Siemens Switchboard and Protection Manual

Totally Integrated Power TM Application Manual
Application Manual
www.siemens.com/tip
The information provided in this brochure contains merely general descriptions or characteristics of performance which in actual case of use do not always apply as described or
which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to
provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of
contract.
Connecting the worlds

of building construction and power distribution
with integrated solutions for commercial and industrial buildings
totally integrated
power
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Power Transmission and Distribution
Siemens Schweiz AG
Nominal charge: 30.00 euro
Gleiwitzer Strae 555
Paul-Gossen-Strae 100
Building Technologies Group
Order no.: E20001-A70-M104-X-7600
D-90475 Nuremberg
D-91052 Erlangen
International Headquarters
Gubelstrasse 22
CH-6301 Zug
2nd Edition
Conversion Factors and Tables
Volume flow rate
Volume
Non-metric
unit
in3
SI unit
cm3
Pressure
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
1 gallon/s
3.785 l/s
1 in HG
0.034 bar
1 ft3
28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3
1 gallon/min
0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h
1 psi
0.069 bar
1 yd3
0.765 m3
1 ft3/s
101.941 m3/h
1 lbf/ft2
1 fl oz
29.574 cm3
1 ft3/min
1.699 m3/h
4.788 x 10-4 bar =

4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm2
1 quart
0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l
1 lbf/in2
0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2
1 tonf/ft2
1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2
1 tonf/in2
154.443 bar =
157.488 kgf/cm2
1 pint
1 gallon
1 barrel
SI unit
cm3
1 dm3
=1l
1
m3
16.387
0.473
dm3
3.785
dm3
158,987
= 159 l
SI unit
= 0.473 l
= 3.785 l
dm3
= 1.589
m3
1 l/s
0.264 gallons/s
1 l/h
0.0044 gallons/min
1 m3/h
4.405 gallons/min =
0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s
Non-metric
unit
0.061
in3
= 0.034 fl oz
Force
Non-metric
unit
0.629 barrels
1 lbf
4.448 N
1 kgf
9.807 N
1 tonf
9.964 kN
SI unit
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
1 ft/s
0.305 m/s = 1,098 km/h
1 mile/h
0.447 m/s = 1,609 km/h

Non-metric
unit
1 m/s
3.281 ft/s = 2.237 miles/h
1 km/h
0.911 ft/s = 0.621 miles/h
0.100 tonf
Torque, moment of force

Non-metric
unit
28.35 g
1 lb
0.454 kg = 453.6 g
1 sh ton
0.907 t = 907.2 kg
Non-metric
unit
29.53 in Hg =
14.504 psi =
2088.54 lbf/ft2 =
14.504 lbf/in2 =
0.932 tonf/ft2 =
6.457 x 10-3 tonf/in2
(= 1.02 kgf/cm2)
Non-metric
unit
1 lbf in
0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m
1 lbf ft
1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m
0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J

= 2.737 x 105 kgf m
1 ft lbf
0.138 kgf m
1 Btu
1.055 kJ = 1055.06 J
(= 0.252 kcal)
SI unit
Non-metric
unit
1 kWh
1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m

= 3.6 x 105 J
1J
3.725 x 10-7 hp h =
0.738 ft lbf =
9.478 x 10-4 Btu
(= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal)
1 kgf m
3.653 x 10-6 hp h =
7.233 ft lbf
Non-metric
unit
8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft
(= 0.102 kgf m)
SI unit
1 hp h
SI unit
SI unit
1 oz
Non-metric
unit
Energy, work, heat content
0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf
Mass, weight
SI unit
Non-metric
unit
1 kN
1 Nm
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
1N
SI unit
SI unit
1 bar
= 105 pa
= 102 kpa
61.024 in3 =
0.035 ft3 = 1.057 quarts =
2.114 pint = 0.264 gallons
Velocity
SI unit
Non-metric
unit
Moment of inertia J
Numerical value equation:
J=
Non-metric
unit
1 lbf
ft2
1g
0.035 oz
1 kg
2.205 lb = 35.27 oz
SI unit
1t
1.102 sh ton = 2,205 lb
1 kg m2
GD2
= Wr 2
4
SI unit
0.04214 kg
m2
Non-metric
unit
23.73 lb ft2
Btu = British thermal unit

Btu/h = British thermal unit/hour
lbf
= pound force
tonf = ton force
Conductor cross sections

in the Metric and US System
Temperature
Linear measure
Metric cross
sections acc.
to IEC
American Wire Gauge

(AWG)
Conductor
cross
section
Equivalent
metric CSA
320
160
[mm2]
AWG or MCM
305
[mm2]
Non-metric
unit
150
290
140
275
0.75
1.50
2.50
4.00
0.653
19 AWG
0.832
18
1.040
17
1.310
16
1.650
15
2.080
16.00
35.00
Non-metric
unit
SI system
260
230
3.281 ft = 39.370 in
= 1.094 yd
14
212
100
1 km
0.621 mile = 1,094 yd
2.620
13
200
3.310
12
245
120
90
185
4.170
5.260
11
10
6.630
8.370
9
8
155
70
10.550
140
60
Non-metric
unit
13.300
16.770
50
1 in2
26.670
33.630
4
3
2
1
1/0
70.00
2/0
95.00
85.030
3/0
107.200
126.640
152.000
4/0
250 MCM
300
202.710
400
240.00
253.350
500
300.00
304.000
354.710
405.350
506.710
600
700
800
1000
400.00
1.609 km = 1,609 m
0.394 in
67.430
500.00
625.00
0.914 m
1 mile
1m
53.480
185.00
30.48 cm = 0.305 m
1 yd
110
50.00
150.00
2.54 cm = 25.4 mm
1 ft
39.37 mil
42.410
120.00
0.0254 mm
1 in
1 cm
21.150
25.00
1 mil
1 mm
6.00
10.00
130
SI system
80
Square measure
170
125
110
40
95
30
80
65
20
50
10
0
0.093 m2 = 929 cm2
yd2
0.836 m2
1 acre
4046.9 m2
mile2
SI unit
1 mm2
cm2
10
10
2.59 km2
Non-metric
unit
0.00155 in2
0.155 in2
1 m2
10.76 ft2 = 1,550 in2

= 1.196 yd2
1 km2
0.366 miles2
20
5
6.452 cm2 = 654.16 mm2
ft2
1
32
SI unit
20
25
30
40
40

lbf
= pound force
tonf = ton force
Electrical power
Examples of decimal multiples and

fractions of metric units
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
1 hp
0.746 kW = 745.70 W =
76.040 kgf m/s
(= 1.014 PS)
1 ft lbf/s
1.356 W (= 0.138 kgf in/s)
1 kcal/h
1.163 W
1 Btu/h
0.293 W
1 km2 = 1,000,000 m2;

1 m2 = 10,000 cm2;
1 cm2 = 100 mm2
1 m3 = 1,000,000 cm3;
1 cm3 = 1,000 mm3
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
1 km = 1,000 m;
1 m = 100 cm = 1,000 mm
1 t = 1,000 kg; 1 kg = 1,000 g

1 kW = 1,000 W
1 kW
1.341 hp =
101.972 kgf m/s
(= 1.36 PS)
1W
0.738 ft lbf/s = 0.86 kcal/h =

3.412 Btu
(= 0.102 kgf m/s)
Specific steam consumption

Non-metric
unit
SI unit
1 lb/hp h
0.608 kg/kWh
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
1 kg/kWh
1.644 lb/hp h
Temperature
Non-metric
unit
F
SI unit
5 ( 32) =
F
C
9
5 + 255.37 = T
9 F
Non-metric
unit
SI unit
C
5 + 32 =
F
9 C
5 T 459.67 =
F
9
Note:
Quantity
Symbol
Unit
F*
Temperature in degrees C*
Celsius (centigrade)
Temperature in
Fahrenheit
Thermodynamic
temperature
K
(Kelvin)

lbf
= pound force
tonf = ton force
* The
letter t may be used instead of
Contents
1
Introduction
1/2
Power Distribution Planning for

Commercial and Industrial Buildings
2/2
2.1.
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems

Requirements to Electrical Power Systems in Buildings
Network Configuration
Power Supply Systems
Routing/Wiring
Switching and Protective Devices
Planning Aid
2/2
2/3
2/4
2/6
2/8
2/8
2/11
2.2
Power System Planning Modules
2/12
System Protection / Safety Coordination
3/2
3.1.
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
Definitions
Protective Equipment and Features
Low-Voltage Protection Equipment Assemblies
Selectivity Criteria
Preparation of Current-Time Diagrams
(Grading Diagrams)
3/2
3/3
3/4
3/4
3/6
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Protective Equipment for Low-Voltage Systems

Circuit-Breakers with Protective Functions
Switchgear Assemblies
Selecting Protective Equipment
Miniature Circuit-Breakers (MCB)
3/9
3/9
3/16
3/20
3/27
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems

Selectivity in Radial Systems
Selectivity in Meshed Systems
3/33
3/40
3/49
3.4
Protection of Capacitors
3/51
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
Protection of Distribution Transformers

Protection with Overreaching Selectivity
Equipment for Protecting Distribution Transformers
3/52
3/52
3/58
Medium Voltage
4/2
4.1
Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear

for Primary Power Distribution
Withdrawable Circuit-Breaker Switchgear, Air-Insulated
Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear, SF6-Insulated
4/3
4/4
4/26
Secondary Distribution Systems, Switchgear

and Substations
4.3
4.4
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
4.5
Low Voltage
6/2
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6/3
6/6
6/11
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.1.9
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution Systems

SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems
SIVACON Low-Voltage Switchgear
SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC
for the Switchgear Manufacturer
Floor-Mounted ALPHA 630 Universal and
ALPHA 630 DIN Distribution Boards
Wall-Mounted ALPHA 400/160, ALPHA Universal and
ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards
ALPHA-ZS Meter and Distribution Cabinets for Germany
SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards
SMS Rapid Mounting System
8HP Insulated Distribution System
6/24
6/27
6/29
6/31
6/34
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems

Circuit-Breakers
Fuse Systems
Fuse Switch-Disconnectors
Miniature Circuit-Breakers
Residual-Current-Operated Circuit-Breakers
Lightning Current and Surge Arresters
3LD2 Main Control and EMERGENCY STOP Switches
6/36
6/38
6/41
6/49
6/54
6/61
6/71
6/88
6.3
Modular Devices
6/89
6.4
Maximum-Demand Monitors
6/102
6.5
Switches, Outlets and Electronic Products
6/104
6.6
SIMOCODE pro Motor Management System
6/110
Communications in Power Distribution
7/2
Protection and Substation Control
8/2
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Power System Protection

Relay Design and Operation
Relay Selection Guide
Typical Protection Schemes
8/11
8/16
8/25
8/29
Power Management
9/2
10
Measuring and Recording Power Quality
10/2
4/44
10.1
10.2
10.3
Overview
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS R
10/2
10/3
10/8
Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range
4/72
11
Meters and Measuring Instruments
11/2
PQM Power Quality Management and

Load Flow Control
4/84
Planning of Systems for Primary and Secondary Power

Distribution Exemplified by the Automotive Industry
4/87
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
SIMEAS P Power Meter

SIMEAS T Transducers for High-Current Power Quantities
Meters / Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices
4NC3 and 4NC5 Current Transformers
11/2
11/14
11/20
11/28
Transformers
5/2
12
SIMARIS design the Program for

Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution
12/2
Appendix
13/2
6.1.4
6.1.5
13
6/19
6/22
TIP_Kap_01_Engl
11.08.2005
18:35 Uhr
Seite 1
totally integrated
power
TIP_Kap_01_Engl
11.08.2005
18:35 Uhr
Seite 2
1 We focus your energy

and everything
gets so easy
Totally Integrated Power is more than
mere planning of the power distribution in buildings or industrial plants.
Totally Integrated Power encompasses the philosophy to render you
support with our advice, with a service that is focused on you. A new
project is under way: planning for a
complete power distribution system
for a hospital, an office or industrial
building. You know what this means:
the system has to be designed not
just to meet the needs of today but
the future as well. Thus, cost calculations and construction timetables are
kept under control, and expensive rework is avoided. This is where we offer you our support.
But this is not enough: the requirements of building contractors go far
beyond this. They demand cross-system thinking and integral concepts
right from the project start. The goal
is an optimization of building services
realized by customer-focused overall
solutions. To respond to this demand, Siemens has developed a
portfolio which features total functionality. The optimized interplay of
all functions creates benefits for
everyone involved in the project: the
building contractors, the users and
building operators, the consulting engineers and, last but not least, the
installation company.
components such as medium-voltage

switchgear, transformers, low-voltage switchgear and low-voltage distribution boards to the power consumer. Costs, whether for new systems or extensions, are always
transparent and controllable.
The majority of the electrical power
consumers belongs to the facilities
for supply management, in particular
those for heating, ventilation and air
conditioning systems, drinking water
supply and lighting. The latter is to
be seen in a functional relation to
integrated room automation, including sun protection, daylight control
technologies and motion detection
(i.e. presence of persons in a building). Air conditioning technology is
in a functional relation to smoke
detection and fire alarm systems.
Safe power supply must be
ensured for all operating
modes.
Totally Integrated Power, a concept

which offers electrical consultants
and installation companies integrated
and coordinated power distribution,
from medium voltage to low voltage
with load feeder right down to the final outlet the best foundation for
quick and easy planning. Integrated
project planning combines individual
1/2
Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
TIP_Kap_01_Engl
11.08.2005
18:35 Uhr
Seite 3
Totally Integrated Power makes

everything so easy for distribution
board manufacturers and electricians:
C Designing TTA systems, for example, is no problem: the components
are completely compatible
C Minimum integration expense
when installing: the distribution
board manufacturers and electricians simply use the data from the
planning tools
C Saving time and money all around
by a simplification of the workflow
C They make use of the evolution of
technical and system know-how by
Siemens and benefit from it and
they will have a partner for the
future
C Optimum cross-functional system
tuning, coordination of all requirements and support from Siemens
as the leading technology manufacturer in the field of automation and
alarm technologies
Take advantage of our focused

know-how
When all the components fit together
smoothly, safe and secure power distribution is guaranteed. And your system will be economical. Now you can
make use of a system that offers you
a complete range of products with integrated solutions from hardware
with bus interfaces to easy-to-use
software.
Your partner also offers you professional expertise and tailored solutions
for monitoring, automation, service
optimization and operational management of the entire building installations of course utilizing planning
tools for efficient project management.
Totally Integrated Power takes into
consideration the demands of the liberalized energy markets as well as
simple and secure configuration, thus
creating the foundation for economical operation. These developments
call for a new way of thinking when
planning. Low energy import costs
are now more than ever a focus of attention. The basis for this is knowledge of the load profiles, the key
loads and consumption-based
billing. Here, the individual solutions and
systems from Totally
Integrated Power and
Total Building Solutions bring transparency, and thus optimization possibilities
within reach. Totally
Integrated Power integrates systems and
components together
with a functional software package for operator control and
monitoring.
Safety
technology
Building
control
systems
Information
technology
Totally
Integrated
Power
Heating,
ventilation
air conditioning
Automation technology
Progressive, holistic operation and

building management is implemented
with systems by Siemens. These
systems communicate with each
other on the basis of globally standardized communication protocols,
such as BACnet, KNX/EIB, ASi and
PROFIBUS. System integrations are
proficiently carried out using internationally accepted open methods like
OPC, LonMark, Modbus and M-Bus.
Functions such as consumption
recording, cost center allocations or
load management can thus be performed, which renders a comprehensive power management system.
1/3
TIP_Kap_01_Engl
11.08.2005
18:37 Uhr
Advantage: operators can optimize

their installations in terms of maintenance expense, power consumption
and availability. Of course, you expect the optimum solution for every
investment you make, and it is only
natural that system costs are increasingly being determined by operating
costs. But what people are often not
aware of is the fact that data networks and the data they generate
can be used to achieve the optimization of electrical power distribution
processes. Electrical power supply is
the fundamental basis of all
processes and control procedures,
and most of the things we take for
granted today would not function
without electrical energy. This is why
it is important to make use of information networking in the field of
electrical power distribution. Siemens
can implement this because we are
completely at home in this field. Totally Integrated Power offers electrical power distribution for all functions
in a building: heating, ventilation, air
conditioning, production and manufacturing processes, and information
technology with clearly defined communication interfaces. This ensures
reliable power supply, safe working
conditions, appropriate sizing, transparent system status and consumption-based cost structures.
Seite 4
A building automation and control

system comprises:
C Field devices (sensors, signal
sources, switches and actuating
devices such as butterfly and control
valves, or sensors and actuators)
C Local priority control units
C Cabling, data networks and communication units
C Control panels, variable speed drives
(SED 2) and automation stations (PX),
or room controllers (RX)
C Management and server stations, interactive operator terminals and
computer terminals
C Software for functions, communications, data management and operation (rights of use, licenses)
C Services and tools for the installation
of a BACS system (engineering)
C Web services and system maintenance
1.1 Total Building

Solutions
DESIGO
building automation
Building automation includes all facilities, software and services for automatic control, monitoring and load optimization as well as operation and management aimed at energy-efficient,
economical and safe operation of all
technical building installations.
Fig. 1/1 Systems of the technical building equipment
1/4
DESIGO RX integrated room automation comprises application-specific devices and functions for zone or
single-room control. This includes an integrated monitoring, control and optimization of room-related building
equipment which is interconnected
through their communication functions.
DESIGO PX ensures that the operation of the building, i.e. of its technical installations, is performed in a
safe, ecological and economically optimized manner which is also a lowexpense mode of operation. The
building automation and control system reliably implements control
strategies regarding HVAC. It has
been optimized for the performance
of operating time optimization, maximum-load limiting and the calculation
of enthalpy and heating curves. It informs the operator about trends and
present and previous operating states.
The building automation and control
system provides the data required for
operating cost controlling and the
documentation of an ecological audit
system. It is possible to demonstrate
no-fault operation. Technical equipment
data and statistics which are relevant
for maintenance are made available
through the building automation and
control system. It can also be employed as a tool for management
tasks such as analysis, adjustment
and continuous optimization of the
modes of operation.
TIP_Kap_01_Engl
11.08.2005
18:37 Uhr
Seite 5
Introduction
1.2 Life Safety and

Security Management
While building automation mainly
deals with the data of HVAC and
electrical subsystems, which create
the basis for process optimization,
the information rendered by protective and security installations is often
vitally important. Life safety and security management means the limitation and containment of a multitude
of risks and encompasses taking rigorous action against the most diverse
hazardous events that might occur.
This guarantees the protection of human life and property and the maintenance of operations within a building.
The main task of life safety and security management is the easy and safe
handling of critical alarms and events.
The purpose is to fight hazards immediately and with the most suitable
means to prevent greater damage.
Life safety and security management
is typically associated with the specific tasks of security systems. It
must, however, be extended to any
potential hazard that may be inherent
in any other technical installation. Examples are for instance the temperature and humidity limits in museums,
critical faults in the power distribution
system of a hospital, elevator alarms,
etc.
Differences from the user's

point of view
Control and optimization
One aspect is the control and optimization of the performance of technical building installations to supply
both the technical conditions for
which buildings have been designed
and to ensure their users' productivity by providing appropriate ambient
conditions.
Operator tasks are only carried out
under high time pressure and psychological stress in the event of a
fault, as they normally deal with longterm trends and system performance
analyses. Such management functions do not require any permanent
support in commercial and industrial
buildings.
Those who operate these functions
need adaptive graphic displays that
facilitate the user's intuitive orientation and enable actions to be performed which are typical for monitoring a complex system. A good operator interface provides a broad range
of options with functions for generating status reports and user-specific
statistics and data views.
Operators of life safety and security

management systems need simple,
guided operator interfaces with restricted choices of action to be able
to respond fast, safely and efficiently
even in a panic situation.
Support from Siemens
Total Building Solutions by Siemens focus on the performance of the tasks
detailed above and the surplus value
to be gained by the customer.
The type of building control defines
both the complexity of the building automation and control system and its
life safety and security management,
and the structure of the organizations
involved in its operation.
Total Building Solutions enables product and service offers to be adapted to
real customer needs, thus optimizing
benefits for the user.
Detailed descriptions of the available
building solutions can be obtained at:
www.sbt.siemens.de
Signaling and alarms

The other often crucial aspect
deals with sudden system malfunctions. Normally, those events do not
represent any hazard to the building
or its users. In some cases, however,
human life, infrastructure elements or
manufacturing processes might be
put at risk. The treatment of those
cases is the objective of life safety
and security management. It means
the limitation and control of various
hazards in the building and a rigorous
treatment of different potential emergency cases in a building.
1/5
TIP_Kap_01_Engl
11.08.2005
18:38 Uhr
Seite 6
SIMARIS Planning Software

SIMARIS
With the SIMARIS range of software
products, Siemens offers integrated
tools for fast and effective planning
and calculation of power distribution
systems for commercial and industrial buildings. The tools are designed for international use, taking
SIMARIS design
Thanks to its Windows look and feel,
SIMARIS design is easy to operate and
can be used without any extra software training. From its contents, this
software offers a scope of functionality that facilitates sizing considerably.
In the planning stage, for example,
you can dimension the entire supply
circuit with SIMARIS design on the
basis of real products. In the implementation stage, this helps to avoid
extra costs arising from badly coordinated systems. Suitable components
and distribution systems are selected automatically. You can focus
on whats important in planning your
electrical power distribution system
SIMARIS SIVACON
The SIMARIS SIVACON software
tool supports the sales and manufacturing process for the SIVACON
8PT low-voltage switchboard system which was specially designed
for franchise switchgear manufacturers. The project-planning data from
1/6
into consideration the respective

standards and rules of the country
where they are to be used. The language can also be freely selected
both for working with the program
and for planning results.
and neednt spend hours looking up

product data in catalogs. Per download from our homepage, you can
easily keep up to date the product
data contained in the SIMARIS
design database. Every configuration
of an electric power distribution is
subject to many changes and adaptations both in the planning and implementation stage. SIMARIS design integrates each modification into the
supply concept and automatically
checks it for compliance with the
relevant standards and regulations.
Selectivity, for example for installations in the safety power supply system, data can also be easily verified
with SIMARIS design. All of these
steps will automatically and accu-
SIMARIS design can also be used

directly by this program. In addition,
the forwarding of order data to the
Siemens Mall on the Internet, for example, is completely trouble-free.
rately be documented in SIMARIS

design, exactly following the specifications you have defined.
TIP_Kap_01_Engl
11.08.2005
18:38 Uhr
Seite 7
Introduction
Power Management
Energy distribution at a glance
The actual status of the power
distribution system can be displayed
online. This enables you to easily
keep a check on all important parameters: every breaker position, every
power requirement, every upper and
lower limit as well as possible over-
Perfect records
All changes in power distribution are
recorded by the system. Regardless
of whether they were remotely controlled or were performed locally, all
events are precisely recorded, together with their date and time. The
event log created is archived in a
database and can then be evaluated
Optimum energy flow

The utilization of a power distribution system can be determined by
the measurement of the energy
flows. This analysis is the basis for
the optimization of power consumption or the system structure. Future
power requirements can also be calculated by studying the load curves:
the ideal prerequisite for any strat-
Maintenance planning
The information required for maintenance is gathered from the system.
All evaluations that can be derived
from operating cycles, runtimes or
scheduled times are contained
within the module. Maintenance
measures, current status and
maintenance due dates are shown.
loads. An invaluable opportunity to

keep on top of the condition of your
power distribution system and, if
required, to control it from a remote
location.
by other programs. Selected status

signals can also be transmitted directly by SMS via mobile phone, allowing faults to be rectified by the
technical staff as quickly as possible.
U
I
cos o
P
W
Status
central ON
OFF
local ON
OFF
tripped
Event logs
Time
22:59:03
23:16:24
01:12:45
03:35:02
Status signal
local OFF local incoming circuit breaker off
local ON local incoming circuit breaker off
Power > 20 A
Power < 1600 A
egy involving
Load curves
Load management
Prognoses
continuous purchasing contracts or the buying of power on
the energy markets. To ensure
demand values become too high,
optimum utilization of current concan automatically add extra capacity
tinuous purchasing contracts, power
that is not directly required for opermanagement monitors the conation.
sumption values and, if maximum
Extensive information such as

personnel requirements and
necessary spare parts is also given.
The user of the system is always
informed of the maintenance measures currently being carried out or
which are due to be carried out,
and can therefore plan both staff
and material requirements well in
advance.
Frame: Installation
Distribution
Maintenance measure
Hall 1
Distribution 3
Feeder II
check HVAC
change ACB contacts
change meter
1/7
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:40 Uhr
Seite B

2.1 Basics for Drafting Electrical

Power Distribution Systems
2.2 Power System Planning Modules
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite C

chapter 2
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 2
2 Power Distribution Planning for

2.1 Basics for Drafting
Electrical Power
Distribution Systems
Framework parameter
analysis:
Totally Integrated Power comprises

products, systems and services from
Siemens for a homogenous implementation concept for power distribution from a medium-voltage switchgear station to the transformer and
from there to the floor distribution
board or final circuit.
With Totally Integrated Power,
Siemens responds to customer
requirements, such as
C Simplification of operational management by transparent, simple power system structures
C Low power loss costs, e.g. by medium-voltage-side power transmission to the load centers
C High supply and operational safety
of the installations even in the
event of individual equipment failures (redundant supply, selectivity of
the power system protection, and
high availability)
C Easy adaptation to changing load
and operational conditions
C Low operating cost thanks to
equipment that is easy to maintain
C Sufficient transmission capacity of
the equipment under normal operating conditions as well as in fault
conditions to be handled
2/2
Power system concept:

Analysis
Selection of the network
configuration
Type of connection to ground
Technical features
Building
Rooms, type of use
Operation
Network calculation:
Load flow
Short-circuit calculation
Energy balance
Lists of consumers
Temperatures
...
Rating:
Transformers
Cables
Protective/switching devices
Provisions for redundant supply
Priorities and
prognoses for
the electrical
power system etc.
Fig. 2/1 Power system planning tasks
C Good quality of the power supply,

i.e. few voltage changes due to
load fluctuations with sufficient voltage symmetry and few harmonic
distortions in the voltage
C Compliance with IEC/EN/VDE specifications and project-related stipulations for special installations
The efficiency of a power supply
system rises and falls with good
planning.
For this reason, power supply concepts must always be evaluated in
the context of their framework parameters and project goals. When focusing on power supply in the field of
building infrastructure, the spectrum
of reasonable options can be narrowed down.
Siemens supports your power system planning with service offers

and tools such as SIMARIS design.
The following design aids can be
obtained from Siemens:
C Application manual
C SINCAL
C SIGRADE
C Specific product catalogs
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 3
Planning Modules for Building Supply Concepts
2.1.1 Requirements on
Electrical Power Systems
in Buildings
When planning electrical power systems, the largely ambivalent requirements of the three project stages,
Investment Installation Operation,
must be taken into consideration.
Further influencing factors
The main characteristics of a power
system are determined by the following requirements:
C Use/consumers or purpose of power distribution, i.e. energy balance, power density and load centers
C Architecture, e.g. low building or
high-rise building
C Operating and environmental conditions
C Legal provisions, stipulations by public authorities, e.g. building authorities, safety at work regulations
C By the supplying public utilities
company
Technical specifications regarding
voltage, short-circuit power,
agreed maximum connected load,
permissible equipment
Use of power management to
operate the power system economically within the agreed electric
rates options.
Investment
Installation
Operation
Implementation cost
minimum
maximum
irrelevant
Implementation time
minimum
minimum
irrelevant
Technology/equipment
low-cost
easy installation flexible operation
Space requirements for equipment minimum
maximum
irrelevant
Period of use
maximum
irrelevant
maximum
Fire load
irrelevant
irrelevant
minimum
Operating cost
(e.g. insurance rates)
irrelevant
irrelevant
minimum
Table 2/1
Project stages
Type of use
Features
Residential
Many small
Low nominal currents at Back-up protection
consumer devices comparatively high line
short-circuit power
Offices
Requirements
Action
Users are
no electrical
engineering
experts
Protection against direct Residual currentand indirect contact

operated circuitbreakers are
mandatory!
Many
PC workstations
Voltage stability and

reliable power supply
High proportion of Counter action in the

capacitive loads
event of harmonics
Inductor-type
compensation
General escape
routes
Safety power supply
Generator supply
DP server
rooms
Communications
equipment
(network)
Good electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
TN-S system to
minimize stray fault
currents
Medical
Life-saving
machines
High reliability of supply
Redundancy, selective
grading, powerful safety
power supply (SPS)
Intensive care,
EKG
Good electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
TN-S system to minimize

stray fault currents
Local limitation of fault

currents
IT system
Mainly motor
loads
High power quantities

required per area
Busbar trunking
systems
Minimize
downtimes
High reliability of supply
Redundant supply,
meshed electrical
networks
Industrial
Different
processes
Table 2/2
Selective grading
Examples for different types of building use and their impact on electric power
systems/equipment
2/3
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 4
2.1.2 Network Configuration
IEC
Regional
America
PAS
Europe
CENELEC
Australia
Asia
Africa
National
USA: ANSI
CA: SCC
BR: COBEI
...
DE: DIN VDE

I: CEI
F: UTE
GB: BS
AUS: SA
NZ: SNZ
CN: SAC
J: JISC
SA: SABS
DIN VDE
German Industrial Standard,

Association of German Electrical
Engineers
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization

(Comit Europen de Normalisation
Electrotechnique)
IEC
International Electrical Engineering

Commission
JISC
Japanese Industrial Standards

Committee
CEI
PAS
Pacific Area Standards
SABS
South African Bureau of Standards
ANSI
American National Standards

Institute
BS
British Standards
COMITATO ELETTROTECNICO
ITALIANO Italian Electrical
Engineering Committee
COBEI
Comit Brasileiro de Eletricidade,

Eletrnica,
Iluminao e Telecomunicaes
SAC
Standardisation Administration of
China
Table 2/3
SA
Standards Australia
SCC
Standards Council of Canada
SNZ
Standards New Zealand
UTE
UNION TECHNIQUE DE LELECTRICITE ET DE LA COMMUNICATION

Technical Association of Electrical
Engineering & Communications
Interdependencies of national, regional and international standards for electrical engineering
Standards
To minimize technical risks and/or to
protect persons involved in handling
electric equipment or components,
major planning rules have been compiled in standards.
Technical standards are desired conditions stipulated by professional associations which are however made
binding by legal standards such as
safety at work regulations. Furthermore, the compliance to technical
standards is crucial for any approval
of operation granted by authorities or
insurance coverage.
now been agreed upon that drafts

shall be submitted at the central (IEC)
level and then be adopted as regional
or national standards. Only provided
that IEC is not interested in dealing
with the matter or, if there are any
time constraints, a standard shall be
drafted regionally.
An optimum configuration should particularly meet the following requirements:

C Simple structure
C High reliability of supply
C Low losses
C Favorable and flexible expansion
options
The following characteristics shall
be selected accordingly:
C Type of meshing
C Number of feeder points
C Type of feed
Meshing
Low-voltage-side power distribution
shall preferably be designed in a radial topology.
The clearly hierarchical structuring
offers the following advantages:
C Easy monitoring of the power
system
C Fast fault location
C Simple power system protection
C Easy operation
The interrelation of the different

standardization levels is illustrated
in Fig. 2/2.
A complete list of IEC members and
links to more detailed information can
be obtained at www.iec.ch q structure & management q iec members.
While in the past, standards were

mainly drafted at a national level and
debated in regional (i.e. European,
American etc.) committees, it has
2/4
As detailed above, the supply task

determines the configuration of a power system. Buildings featuring different power densities can therefore be
distinguished according to the type
of their configuration.
Fig. 2/2 Unmeshed power system (radial)
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 5
Radial network with changeover reserve
Simple radial network
a) Partial load reserve
T1
LVMD
T1
LVGPS MD1
n.c.
b) Full load reserve

- transformers not fully utilized
- Use transformers with forced-air cooling
T2
LVSPS MD2
n.o.
T1
LVMD1
T2
n.c.
LVMD2
T3
n.c.
LVMD3
n.c.
n.o.
n.o.
K1
2
K1
2
K2
3
Complete power failure
Continued operation of selected

consumers
Continued operation of all consumers
SN,T1 Ptotal / cos
(n-1) 8 SN,i PSV / cos
(n-1) 8 ai 8 SN,i Ptotal / cos;

a: Utilization factor
n.c.
Fig. 2/3 Radial topology variants
As the operation of a meshed system

places high demands on the equipment, the radial system is generally
preferred at the infrastructure level
for economical reasons. Ring-type
systems are mainly used in highly
consumptive industrial processes in
combination with high-current busbar

trunking systems, as these systems
have the advantage of safe and flexible supply for the consumers. They
are also used for public supply systems at the > 1 kV level.
Number of feeder points

The availability of the radial power
system can be optimized by means
of its infeed configuration.
Fig. 2/3 shows an optimization of the
radial network assuming one fault in
the infeed.
2/5
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 6
Type of infeed
Electrical energy can be fed into the
power system in different ways, determined by its primary function.
For general power supply (GPS) by
C Direct connection to the public grid:
normally up to 300 kW at 400 V
C Supply from the medium-voltage
system (up to 52 kV) via distribution transformers up to 2 MVA
For redundant power supply (RPS),
power sources are selected in dependency of the permissible interruption
time.
C Generators for safety power supply
C Second independent system infeed
with automatic changeover for
safety-supply consumers
C Static uninterruptible power supply
(USP) from a rectifier/inverter unit
or storage battery
C Rotating USP consisting of motor
and generator set
Type
Example
General power
supply (GPS)
Supply of all installations and consumer devices

available in the building
Safety power
supply (SPS)
Supply of life-protecting facilities in cases

of danger
C Safety lighting
C Elevators for firefighters
C Fire-extinguishing equipment
Uninterruptible power
supply (UPS)
Supply of sensitive consumer devices which must be operated without interruption in the event of a GPS failure:
C Emergency lighting
C Servers/computers
C Communications equipment
Fig. 2/4 Supply types
T-1
T-2
T-3
G
A constellation as described in Fig. 2/4

has proven itself for the building
infrastructure level.
GPS
system
UPS
RPS system
2.1.3 Power Supply Systems

Electric systems are distinguished
as follows:
C Type of current used: DC;
AC ~ 50 Hz
C Type and number of live
conductors within the system:
L1, L2, L3, N, PE
C Type of connection to ground:
low-voltage systems: IT, TT, TN
medium-voltage systems: isolated,
low-resistance, compensated
2/6
GPS consumer
SPS consumer
UPS consumer
Fig. 2/4 Type of infeed
The type of connection to ground

must be selected carefully for the
MV or LV system, as it has a major
impact on the expense required for
protective measures. It also determines electromagnetic compatibility regarding the low-voltage system.
From experience, the best cost-benefit ratio for electric systems within
the general power supply is achieved
with
C Low-resistance neutral for
medium-voltage applications
C TN-S systems for low voltage
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 7
Section A
Section B
3*
3*
Transformer
Generator
1* 2*
1* 2*
L1
L2
L3
PEN (isolated)
PE
L1
L2
L3
PEN (isolated)
PE
1*
Central grounding
point dividing
bridge
4*
4*
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Branches
Circuit A
1* The PEN conductor must be wired isolated

along the entire route, this also applies for its
wiring in the low-voltage main distribution
(LVMD)
2* The PE conductor connection between
LVMD and transformer chamber must be
configured for the max. short-circuit current
that might occur (K2S2 Ik2tk).
L1 L2 L3 N PE
Main equipotential
bonding
3* There must be no connection between the

transformer neutral to ground or to the PE
conductor in the transformer chamber.
4* All branch circuits must be designed as TN-S
systems, i.e. in case of a distributed N conductor function with a separately wired N
conductor and PE conductor. Both 3-pole
Branches
Circuit B
and 4-pole switching devices may be used.

If N conductors with reduced cross sections
are used (we do not recommend this), a protective device with an integrated overload
protection should be used at the N conductor
(example: LSIN).
Fig. 2/5 EMC-friendly power system, centrally installed (short distances)
The advantage of a TN-S system lies

in the fact that the short-circuit current generated in the event of a fault
is not fed back to the voltage source
via a connection to ground but via a
conductor. The comparatively high
1-pole ground fault current enables
rather simple protective devices to
be used, such as fuses or circuit-breakers tripping in the event of a fault.
When TN-S systems are used, residual currents in the building can be
avoided because current flows back
via a separate N conductor. Magnetic
fields depend on the geometrical arrangement of the connections.
As according to IEC 60364-5-54, a

TN-S system is only permissible in
a central arrangement of the feed
system, we recommend to always use
the TN-C-S system as shown in Fig. 2/5.
In case of distributed infeed, 4-pole
switching/protective devices must be
provided at the infeeds and changeover
equipment (parallel operation inhibited).
2/7
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 8
t a (s)
Ir
IrN
1000
Ik min
tr
Ik max
100
2.1.4 Routing/Wiring
10
Nowadays the customer can choose

between cables and busbars for power
distribution. Some features of these
different options are listed below:
Isd
0
C Cable laying
+ Lower material costs
+ When a fault occurs along the
line, only one distribution board
including its downstream
subsystem will be affected
High installation expense
Increased fire load
C Busbar distribution
+ Rapid installation
+ Flexible in case of changes
or expansions
+ Low space requirements
+ Reduced fire load
Rigid coupling to the building
geometry
2/8
tg
0,1
Ii
tsd
0,01
0,5
L
L Overload release
2
These aspects must be weighted in

relation to the building use and
specific area loads when configuring
a specific distribution.
Connection layout comprises the
following specifications for wiring
between output and target
distribution board
C Overload protection
Ib Ir Iz and Iz > I2/1.45
C Short-circuit protection S2K2 >= I2t
C Protection against electrical shock
in the event of indirect contact
C Permissible voltage drop
Ig
Standard I t
Optionally I 4t
Short-time delayed
short-circuit release S
Standard tsd
Optionally I 2t
N
G
10
50
100
x In
Instantaneous
short-circuit release I
Standard On
Optionally Off
Neutral conductor protection
Standard 0.5-1 x Ir
Optionally Off
Ground fault release
Standard t g
Optionally I 2t
Fig. 2/6 Characteristic curve variants
2.1.5 Switching and

Protective Devices
As soon as the initial plans are drafted, it is useful to determine which
technology shall be used to protect the
electric equipment. The technology
that has been selected affects the
behavior and properties of the power
system and hence also influences
certain aspects of use, such as
C Safety of supply
C Mounting expense
C Maintenance and downtimes
Types of protective equipment

Protective equipment can be divided
into two categories, which can however be combined.
C Fuse technology
+ Good current-limiting properties
+ High switching capacity up
to 120 kA
+ Low investment cost
+ Easy installation
+ Safe tripping, no auxiliary
power required
+ Easy grading between fuses
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 9
Protective tripping
P = I 2* R
This energy (area below the

curve) is also transported in
the contacts and hence in
the switch
I
Current flow when

zero-current
interrupters are used
Current flow when
current-limiting circuitbreakers are used
4 ms
10 ms t
Fig. 2/7 Current limiting
Downtime after fault

Reduces selective tripping in
connection with circuit-breakers
Fuse ageing
Separate protection of personnel
required for switching high
currents
C Fuseless technology
+ Clear tripping times for overload
and short circuit
+ Safe switching of operating and
fault currents
+ Fast resumption of normal
operation after fault trip
+ Various tripping methods
adapted to the protective task
+ Communications-capable:
signaling of system states
Coordination of the protection
concept requires a calculation
of short circuits
Higher investment costs
Above all when fuseless technology

is employed, the selection of the tripping unit is crucial for meeting the
defined objectives for protection.
Q1
In power systems for buildings, selective tripping is gaining more and

more importance, as this results in a
higher supply safety and quality.
While standards such as DIN VDE
0100 Part 710 or DIN VDE 0108 demand a selective behavior of the protective equipment for safety power
supply or certain areas of indoor installations, the proportion of buildings
where selective tripping is also desired for the general power supply is rising.
Fig. 2/8 Selective tripping
Generally speaking, a combined solution using selective and partially selective network sections will be applied in power systems for buildings
when economic aspects are considered.
Q2
In this context, the following device

properties must be taken into
account:
Current limiting:
A protective device has a current-limiting effect if it shows a lower letthrough current in the event of a fault
than the prospective short-circuit current at the fault location.
Selectivity:
When series-connected protective
devices cooperate for graded tripping, the protective device which is
closest upstream of the fault location
must trip first. The other upstream
devices remain in operation. The
temporal and spatial effects of a fault
will be limited to a minimum.
Q2
Trip
Q3
Q1
Trip
Trip
Q3
Fig. 2/9 Back-up conditioned fault tripping
Back-up protection:
The provision is that Q1 is a currentlimiting device. If the fault current is
higher than the rated breaking capacity of the downstream device in the
event of a line shorting, it will be
protected by the upstream protective
device. Q2 can be selected with
Icu Ikmax, Q2. This results in partial
selectivity.
2/9
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 10
Supply section
800 kVA
ACB
1,250 A
LSI
Supply section
400 kVA
Supply section
30 kVA
Fuse
400 A
MCCB
630 A
LSI
Fuse
63 A
Fuse
80 A
MCB
16 A
Fig. 2/10
Supports
the priority
of cost
minimization
MCB
25 A
Grading for a supply section of 800 kVA
Grading in the supply section

Starting from the smallest supply unit
in a building, e.g. a household or a
shop, different protective devices are
preferably suited to meet the requirements of power supply and protection.
TIP: If an 800 kVA supply section is
fed by a transformer and if selective
tripping is a major requirement, a circuit-breaker with definite-time overcurrent-time protection must also
be selected for the medium-voltage
system.
For more detailed information in particular regarding the tripping characteristics, please refer to
C Chapter 3 Power System Protection and Safety Coordination
C Chapter 4 Medium Voltage
C Chapter 6 Low Voltage
in the Application Manual.
Power requirements
The power requirements of the entire
distribution largely determine the layout of the main distribution as well as
the transformer and/or generator rating. This equipment then determines
the amount of investment involved.
2/10
Supports the
priority of
selective fault
tripping
Smax in kVA <
SN in kVA
ukr
Ikmax in kA
1260
1600
1890
2400
2520
3000
3200
630
800
630
800
630
1000
800
2
2
3
3
4
3
4
6%
6%
6%
6%
6%
6%
6%
30
40
45
60
65
75
80
Table 2/5
Proven transformer constellations for buildings
Power requirements are

established by
Smax = Pmax /cosB,
With Pmax = (Pi 8 ai) 8 g
cosB Power factor, purchased
quantity
a
Utilization factor
g
Simultaneity factor
(demand)
When the dimensioning rule Icu Ik
is applied, a minimization of the
purchased power results in a minimization of the short-circuit strength
for the operating equipment. This
means cost savings in investment
and operation.
Transformer:
100 %
Ik, max u
IrTransformer, i
kr, i
Please note that the lower limit for
the short-circuit current is at ~15 kA ,
in order to ensure both a sufficient
voltage stability and safe shutdown

in the event of a fault. Consequently,
transformers shall only be selected
for outputs up to 400 kVA, in order
to increase the short-circuit current.
For building power supplies, economical transformer outputs are between 630 and 1,000 kVA. Table 2/5
shows useful constellations for transformers connected in parallel per
supply section. Higher outputs must
therefore be divided into several (>2)
separate supply sections to gain manageable power system data and
hence economical solutions.
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 11

2.1.6
Planning Aid
Different individual decisions made regarding the power supply of buildings can be combined as follows:
Functional areas:
Offices
Meeting rooms
Computing center
Catering kitchen and
canteen
HeatingVentilation
Air Conditioning
Fire protection
Logistics
Commercial
building?
yes
Radial system
with partial load
reserve
TN-C-S system,
LVMD with
central
grounding point
Tip:
Given ground area = a2
Length l 100 m = 2 8 a;
max. no. of floors
i 100 - 2a/h
no
i < 5?
High-rise
building
Low building
no
A 2000 m2 ?
Tip:
Smax = P/cos
Smax < 630 kVA; ukr 4%
Smax 630 kVA; ukr 6%
Separation into several

supply sections per area,
i.e. number of floor
distribution boards 2
yes
no
i 10?
i 20?
Smax
2 MVA?
Central utilities
room, supplytransformerLVMD
no
no
yes
Centralized MV
supply, distributed
transformers to
LVMD
Distributed MV
supply to
transformers to
LVMD
Interlocked
changeover with
4-pole devices
Low building,
type 1
Low building,
type 2
High-rise building,
type 1: centralized,
cables
High-rise building,
type 2: centralized,
busbar
yes
High-rise building,
type 3: transformers
at remote location
High-rise building,
type 4: distributed,
cables
High-rise building,
type 5: distributed,
busbar
yes
yes
Tip:
Use busbar trunking systems
if requirements are mainly set
for ease of use, such as good
expandability, fire load
minimization
Fig. 2/11
Cables?
no
Busbars?
Overview of power supply concept modules
2/11
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 12
2.2 Power System

Planning Modules
The following modules may be used
for an easy and systematic power
distribution design for typical building
structures.
FF elevators
1st floor
UPS1.2
SPS2.2
2nd floor
UPS2.2
SPS3.2
3rd floor
UPS3.2
GPS4.2
GPS4.2
GPS3.2
4th floor
UPS4.2
HVAC-SPS
SPS1.2
Low building, type 1:

One supply section
HVAC
GPS2.2
Up-to-date, detailed descriptions on a

variety of applications can be obtained
on the Internet at www.siemens.com/tip
Elevators
GPS1.2
These are schematic solution concepts which can then be extended to

meet specific customer project requirements. When the preplanning
stage has been completed, the power system can easily be configured
and calculated with the aid of the
SIMARIS design software.
LVMD
GPS
1
SPS
MVD
Basement
From PCO
GPS
General power supply
FD
Floor distribution boards
PCO
Power company or system operator
FF
Firefighters
HVAC Heating Ventilation Air conditioning

MVD
Medium-voltage distribution
LVMD Low-voltage main distribution
2/12
SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
Uninterruptible power supply
G
3~
UPS
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 13

Building type
Low building
Number of floors
Ground area / total area
2,500 m2 / 10,000 m2
Segmentation of power
required
85% utilized area, 15% side area
Power required
1,000 to 2,000 kW
Supply types
100% total power from the public grid

10 30% of total power for safety power supply (SPS)
5 20% of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Power system protection
Selectivity is aimed at
Special requirements
Good electromagnetic compatibility, high safety of supply and operation
Proposal for concept finding

Feature
Our solution
Advantage
Your benefit
Network
configuration
Smax = 1,200 kVA,
cos = 0.85
Central transformer supply

close to load center
Supply at the load center,

short LV cables
low losses
Low costs,
time savings during
installation
Radial network
Transparent structure
Easy operation and fault

localization
Transformer module with 2 x 630 kVA, Voltage stability

ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik 30 kA
lighter design
Redundant supply unit:
Generator 400 kVA (30 %)
(the smaller the generator,
the greater the short-circuit
current must be compared to
the nominal current)
UPS: 200 kVA (15 %)
Optimized voltage quality,

economical
Supply of important consumers on

Increased safety of supply
all floors in the event of a fault, e.g.
during power failure of the public grid
Safety power supply
Safety power supply acc. to

DIN VDE 0108
Supply of sensitive and important

consumers
Uninterruptible supply of
consumers, e.g. during power
failure of the public grid
Medium-voltage
supply station
SF6 gas-insulated
Small switchgear station

independent of climate
Minimized space requirements for

electric utilities room;
no maintenance
Transformer
GEAFOL cast-resin with

reduced losses
Low fire load,

indoor installation
Economical
Low-voltage
main distribution
SIVACON 8PT with central

EMC-friendly power system
grounding point q splitting of PEN
in PWE and N to the TN-S system
Protection from
electromagnetic interference
(e.g. to prevent lower transmission
rates at communication lines)
Wiring/
main route
Cables
Cost transparency
Central measurements of current,

voltage, power, e.g. for billing,
cost center allocation
2/13
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 14
Low building, type 2:

Two supply sections
Elevators
HVAC
FF-elevators
GPS
MVD
Basement
From PCO
GPS
General power supply
FD
Floor distribution boards
PCO
Power company or system operator
FF
Firefighters
HVAC Heating Ventilation Air conditioning

MVD
Medium-voltage distribution
LVMD Low-voltage main distribution

SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
2/14
SPS
2
z
G
3~
UPS4.2
UPS2.2
UPS1.2
LVMD
UPS3.2
SPS4.2
SPS2.2
SPS1.2
GPS3.2
GPS2.2
GPS1.2
SPS3.2
GPS4.2
UPS4.1
UPS2.1
UPS1.1
UPS3.1
SPS4.1
SPS2.1
1st floor
SPS1.1
2nd floor
GPS2.1
3rd floor
GPS1.1
GPS3.1
4th floor
SPS3.1
GPS4.1
HVAC-SPS
UPS
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 15

Building type
Low building
Number of floors
2,500 m2 / 2 x 10,000 m2
required
85 % utilized area
15 % side area
Power required
> 2,000 kW
Supply types
100 % total power from the public grid

10 30 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS)
5 20 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Good electromagnetic compatibility

Feature
Our solution
Advantage
Your benefit
Network
configuration
Smax = 2,400 kVA
cosB = 0.85
Two supply sections per floor
Supply at the load center,

short LV cables
low losses
Low costs, no extra utilities

room necessary, time savings
during installation
Radial network

localization
Transformer module with 3 x 800 kVA, Minimization of voltage fluctuations; Optimized voltage quality,
ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik 60 kA
low static requirements on building cost minimization in the
structures
building construction work
Generator 730 kVA (30%)
(the smaller the generator,
the greater the short-circuit
current must be compared to
the nominal current)
UPS: 400 kVA (15 %)

Safety power supply

DIN VDE 0108
Supply of sensitive and important

consumers
Uninterruptible power supply,

e.g. during power failure of the
public grid
Medium-voltage
supply station
SF6 gas-insulated
Small switchgear station

Minimized space requirements

for distribution board room;
no maintenance
Transformer

reduced losses
Low fire load,

indoor installation
Economical
Low-voltage main
distribution

grounding point q splitting of
PEN in PE and N to the
TN-S system
Protection from
electromagnetic interference
(e.g. to prevent lower
transmission rates at
communication lines)
Wiring/
main route
Cables

voltage, power, e.g. for billing, cost
center allocation
Cost transparency
Two outgoing distribution board

feeders per floor
Shorter cable routes, lower

voltage drop
Economical
2/15
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 16
High-rise building, type 1:

Central power supply
GPS
General power
supply
FD
Floor distribution
boards
PCO Power company or

system operator
FF
Elevators
FF elevators
HVAC
HVAC-SPS
nth floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-1)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-2)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-3)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-4)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
5th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
4th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
3rd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
2nd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
1st floor
Firefighters
HVAC Heating Ventilation

Air conditioning
LVMD
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS
LVMD Low-voltage main

distribution
SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
Uninterruptible
power supply
2/16
1
MVD
Basement
From PCO
SPS
2
z
G
3~
UPS
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 17

Building type
High-rise building
Number of floors
10
1,000 m2 / 10,000 m2
required
80 % utilized area
20 % side area
Power required
1,800 kW
Supply types


High safety of supply and operation

Feature
Our solution
Advantage
Your benefit
Network
configuration

Simple network configuration,

low power losses
Only one electric utilities room

required, easy and low-cost
operation of electric system
Smax = 1,000 kVA

cos = 0.85
Floors: 8
Transformer module with 2x 630 kVA, Voltage stability,

lighter design
Ukr = 6%, i.e. Ik 30 kA
(the smaller the generator, the
greater the short-circuit current must be compared to the
nominal current)

economical

Safety power supply

DIN VDE 0108
UPS: 200 kVA (15 %)
Supply of sensitive or important

consumers

during power failure of the
public grid
Radial network

localization
Medium-voltage
supply station
SF6 gas-insulated
Compact design,

utilities room; no maintenance
Transformer

reduced losses
Compact design,
Economical
Low-voltage main
distribution

grounding point q splitting of
PEN in PE and N to the
TN-S system
Protection of telecommunications
equipment from interference (e.g.
to prevent lower transmission rates
at communication lines)
Wiring/
main route
Cables

central recording
Cost center allocation at

minimum expense
Cost savings
2/17
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 18

Transformers at remote location
GPS
General power
supply
FD
Floor distribution
boards
PCO Power company

or system operator
FF
Elevators
FF elevators
HVAC
HVAC-SPS
nth floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-1)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-2)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-3)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-4)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
5th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
4th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
3rd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
2nd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
1st floor
Firefighters

Air conditioning
LVMD
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS

distribution
SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
Uninterruptible
power supply
2/18
z
Basement
From PCO
SPS
2
MVD
G
3~
UPS
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 19

Building type
High-rise building
Number of floors
10 to 20
1,000 m2 / 20,000 m2
required
80 % utilized area
20 % side area
Power required
1,500 kW; for 2 MW or higher, a relocation of the transformers should be considered even
if the number of floors is less than 10
Supply types



Feature
Our solution
Advantage
Your benefit
Network
configuration
Smax = 1,800 kVA
cos = 0.85
Floors: 20
Splitting into two supply

sections
Short LV cables, low power losses,

reduction of fire load
Economical, eased fire

protection
2 transformer modules with

(2 + 1) x 630 kVA,
Ukr = 6% i.e. Ik 45 kA
Voltage stability,
lighter design

economical

nominal current)

Safety power supply

DIN VDE 0108
UPS: 400 kVA (15 %)

consumers

public grid
Radial network

localization
Medium-voltage
supply station
SF6 gas-insulated
Small switchgear station,


Transformer

reduced losses
Low fire load,

indoor installation
Economical
Low-voltage main
distribution

in PE and N to the TN-S system
(4-pole switches in the feeding
lines and at the changeover point)
equipment from interference
(e.g. lower transmission rates
for communication lines)
Wiring/
main route
Cables
Central data processing

centrally per floor in LVMD
2/19
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 20

Distributed supply
Elevators FF elevators
4
GPS
General power
supply
FD
Floor distribution
boards
PCO Power company

or system operator
FF
HVAC
G
3~
UPS
nth floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-1)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-2)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-3)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-4)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
5th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
4th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
3rd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
2nd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
1st floor
Firefighters

Air conditioning
LVMD
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS

distribution
SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
Uninterruptible
power supply
2/20
HVAC-SPS
z
Basement
From PCO
SPS
3
MVD
G
3~
UPS
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 21

Building type
High-rise building
Number of floors
> 20
1,000 m2 / > 20,000 m2
required
80 % utilized area
20 % side area
Power required
2,000 kW
Supply types

1030 % of total power for safety power supply (SPS)
520 % of total power for uninterruptible power supply (UPS)


Feature
Our solution
Advantage
Your benefit
Network
configuration
Smax = 3,600 kVA
cos = 0.85
Floors: 25

sections
Short LV cables,
low power losses,
Economical solution,
simplified fire protection
2 transformer modules with 3 x 630 kVA, Voltage stability,

lighter design
Ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik 45 kA
Generator 2 x 500 kVA (30 %)
greater the short-circuit current
must be compared to the nominal current)

economical

Safety power supply

DIN VDE 0108
UPS: 2 x 250 kVA (15 %)

consumers

public grid
Radial network

localization
Medium-voltage
supply station
SF6 gas-insulated

Minimized space requirements;

no maintenance
Transformer

reduced losses
Low fire load, indoor installation

without any special precautions
Economical
Low-voltage main
distribution

(4-pole switches to connect to
the low-voltage main distribution)
Wiring/
main route
Cables
Cost transparency

cost center allocation
Cost savings
2/21
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 22

Central busbars
GPS
General power
supply
FD
Floor distribution
boards

system operator
FF
Elevators
FF elevators
HVAC
HVAC-SPS
nth floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-1)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-2)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-3)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-4)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
5th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
4th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
3rd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
2nd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
1st floor
Firefighters

Air conditioning
LVMD
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
GPS

distribution
SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
Uninterruptible
power supply
2/22
z
Basement
From PCO
SPS
2
MVD
G
3~
UPS
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 23

Building type
High-rise building
Number of floors
10
1,000 m2 / 10,000 m2
required
80 % utilized area
20 % side area
Power required
1,800 kW
Supply types



Feature
Our solution
Advantage
Your benefit
Network
configuration
Smax = 1,500 kVA
cos = 0.85
Floors: 8

Simple network configuration, low

power losses
Only one electric utilities room

required, easy and low-cost
operation of electric system
Transformer modules with 2 x 800 kVA, Optimized voltage quality

Ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik 40 kA
nominal current)
Operation that is gentle on the user's

equipment, economical equipment

Safety power supply

DIN VDE 0108
UPS: 200 kVA (15 %)

consumers

public grid
Radial network

localization
Medium-voltage
supply station
SF6 gas-insulated


Transformer

reduced losses
Low fire load, indoor installation

without any special precautions
Economical
Low-voltage main
distribution

Wiring/
main route
Busbars to the subdistribution

boards
Low fire load, flexible power

distribution
Safety, time savings at

restructuring
Few branches in the distribution,

small distribution

for electric utilities room
Small, minimized rising main busbar Less space requirements for

supply lines
2/23
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 24

Distributed busbars
Elevators FF elevators
4
General power
supply
FD
Floor distribution
boards

system operator
FF
G
3~
HVAC-SPS
UPS
nth floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-1)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-2)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-3)th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
System disconnecting point
5th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
4th floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
3rd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
2nd floor
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-GPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n-4)th floor
GPS
HVAC
1st floor
FD-UPS
Firefighters

Air conditioning
MVD Medium-voltage
distribution
distribution
SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
Uninterruptible
power supply
2/24
GPS
1
LVMD
Basement
From PCO
SPS
3
z
MVD
G
3~
UPS
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 25

Building type
High-rise building
Number of floors
> 20
1,000 m2 / 20,000 m2
required
80 % utilized area
20 % side area
Power required
> 2,000 kW
Supply types



Feature
Our solution
Advantage
Your benefit
Network
configuration
Smax = 4,000 kVA
cos = 0.85
Floors: 21

sections
Short LV cables,
low power losses,
Lower cost
2 transformer modules with 3 x 800 kVA, Voltage stability

lighter design
Ukr = 6 %, i.e. Ik 60 kA
Generator 2 x 630 kVA (30 %)
greater the short-circuit current
must be compared to the nominal current)

economical

Safety power supply

DIN VDE 0108

consumers

public grid
Radial network

localization
Medium-voltage
supply station
SF6 gas-insulated


Transformer

reduced losses
Low fire load,

indoor installation
Economical
Low-voltage main
distribution

(4-pole switches in the feeding
lines and at the changeover point)
Wiring/
main route
Busbars to the subdistribution

boards
Low fire load, flexible power

distribution
Safety, time savings when

restructuring work is carried out
Few branches in the distribution,

small distribution

for electric utilities room
UPS: 2 x 300 kVA (15 %)
Small, minimized rising main busbar Less space requirements for

supply lines
2/25
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 26
Appendix
Short-circuit currents Calculated acc. to DIN VDE 0102 EN 60909, dated 07-01-2002
[V]
Rated current Ir Impedance

oltage Ukr
[A]
[%]
Reduced power
losses Pk
[kVA]
Max. secondary-side
short-circuit current
[kA]
10
10
10
10
400
400
400
400
577
909
1,155
1,443
4
4
4
4
4.3
6.4
7.8
8.9
16
25
31
39
400
630
800
1,000
1,250
1,600
10
10
10
10
10
10
400
400
400
400
400
400
577
909
1,155
1,443
1,804
2,309
6
6
6
6
6
6
4.3
6.4
7.6
8.5
10.5
11.4
10
17
21
26
33
42
400
630
800
1,000
20
20
20
20
400
400
400
400
577
909
1,155
1,443
4
4
4
4
3.9
6.0
7.5
8.7
16
25
31
39
400
630
800
1,000
1,250
1,600
20
20
20
20
20
20
400
400
400
400
400
400
577
909
1,155
1,443
1,804
2,309
6
6
6
6
6
6
4.1
6.4
7.9
9.6
10.5
12.3
10
17
21
26
33
42
Rated power
HV voltage
LV voltage
[kVA]
[kV]
400
630
800
1,000
2/26
TIP_Kapitel_02_Engl
11.08.2005
18:41 Uhr
Seite 27
2/27
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite B
System Protection and Safety Coordination
3.1 Definitions
3.2 Protective Equipment for Low-Voltage Systems
3.3 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems
3.4 Protection of Capacitors
3.5 Protection of Distribution Transformers
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite C
chapter 3
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 2
3 System Protection and Safety Coordination

System configuration
While in building and industrial power
systems star-type system configurations are normally used for medium
voltage, radial system configurations
are normally preferred for the lowvoltage side (radial systems, double
spur systems). A number of
switchgear stations and distribution
boards are required for distributing
power from the infeed to the load.
The protective equipment of these
devices is connected in series.
Objectives of system protection
The objective of system protection is
to detect faults and to selectively isolate faulted parts of the system. It
must also permit short clearance
times to limit the fault power and the
effect of arcing faults.
High power density, high individual
power outputs, and the relatively
short distances in industrial and building power systems mean that lowvoltage and medium-voltage systems
are closely linked. Activities in the LV
system (short circuits, starting currents) also have an effect on the MV
system. If the situation is reversed,
the control state of the MV system
affects the selectivity criteria in the
secondary power system.
Mutual system interference
It is therefore necessary to adjust the
power system and its protection
throughout the entire distribution
system and to coordinate the protective functions.
This chapter basically comprises the
installation of electrical equipment in
LV systems. Therefore, also when
dealing with network protection, the
emphasis lies on the low-voltage
side. Specific network protection re-
3/2
quirements for medium voltage are

dealt with in Chapter 4 Medium
Voltage and in Chapter 8 Substation Control and Protection Systems.
3.1 Definitions
Electrical installations in a power system are protected either by protective equipment allocated to the installation components or by combinations of these protective elements.
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacity
The rated short-circuit breaking capacity is the maximum value of the
short circuit that the protective device is able to clear according to
specifications. The protective device
may be used in power systems for
rated switching capacities up to this
value.
Back-up protection
If a short circuit, which is higher than
the rated switching capacity of the
protective device used, occurs at a
particular point in the system, back-up
protection must provide protection
for the downstream installation component and for the protection device
by means of an upstream protective
device (grading).
Selectivity
Selectivity, in particular, has become
a topic for discussion in the previous
years. Partly, it has become a general
requirement in tender specifications.
Due to the complexity of this issue,
information about proper selection
and application is often insufficient.
These requirements as well as the
effects of full or partial selectivity in
power distribution systems within
the context of the relevant standard,
industry, country, system configuration or structure should be clarified in
advance with the network planners,

installation companies and system
operators involved. The system interconnection together with the 5 rules
of circuit dimensioning must also be
taken into account. Some terms and
definitions shall be described in this
chapter for a better understanding of
the issue. If you wish to obtain more
detailed information regarding further
applications, please contact your
Siemens representative.
Full selectivity
To maintain the supply safety of
power distribution systems, full selectivity is increasingly demanded. A
power system is considered fully selective, if only the protective device
upstream of the fault location disconnects from supply, as seen in the direction of energy flow (from the infeed to the load).
Note:
Full selectivity always refers to a
dead, three-phase, i.e. maximum,
fault current at the mounting location.
Partial selectivity
In certain situations, partial selectivity
(up to a particular short-circuit current) is sufficient. The probability of
faults occurring and the effects of
these on the load must then be considered for unfavorable scenarios.
1) For descriptions and modes of operation of

low-voltage protection devices, controlgear
and switchgear, please also refer to the
Siemens handbook Switching, Protection
and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks,
published by Publicis MCD, Erlangen.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 3
Inverse time-delay
t
Inverse
Definite
time-delay
I 2 . t = constant
Definite
LV HRC fuse
Instantaneous
LV circuit-breaker
with releases
HV HRC fuse
Protective characteristic of LV HRC fuse and

LV circuit-breaker with releases
3.1.1 Protective Equipment

and Features
Low-voltage protective devices1)
Low-voltage high-rupturingcapacity fuses
Low-voltage high-rupturing-capacity
(LV HRC) fuses have a high breaking
capacity. They fuse quickly to restrict
the peak short-circuit current to the utmost degree. The protective characteristic is determined by the selected utilization category of the LV HRC fuse
(e. g. full-range fuse for overload and
short-circuit protection, or partial range
fuse for short-circuit protection only)
and the rated current (Fig. 3/1).
Low-voltage circuit-breakers,
IEC 60947-2
Circuit-breakers for power distribution systems are distinguished according to their type design (open or
compact design), mounting type
(fixed mounting, plug-in, withdrawable), rated current (maximum nominal current of the switch) method of
operation (current limiting: MCCB; or
non-current-limiting: ACB), protective
functions (see releases), communication capability (capability to transmit
data to and from the switch), utilization category (A or B, see IEC 609472).
Releases / protective functions
The protective function of the circuitbreaker in the power distribution system is determined by the selection of
MV circuit-breaker with
time-overcurrent protection
I
Variable operating zones

and setting ranges
Variable characteristic
curves and setting ranges
Fig. 3/1
Instantaneous
release
Fig. 3/2
Protective characteristic of HV HRC fuse and

MV time-overcurrent protection
the appropriate release. Releases can

be divided into thermo-magnetic releases (previously also called electromechanical releases) and electronic
tripping units (ETU).
Designation: L or earlier a
(L for long-time delay). Depending on the type of release, inverse
time-delay overload releases are
also available with optional
characteristic curves.
C Short-circuit protection, instantaneous
Designation: I (previously also
called n release), e.g. solenoid releases. Depending on the application, I-releases are also offered with
a fixed settable or OFF function.
C Short-circuit protection, with delay
Designation: S, previously also
z release (S for short-time
delay). For a temporal adjustment
of protective functions in series
connections. Besides the standard
curves and settings, there are also
optional functions for special
applications.
Definite-time-delay overcurrent releases: For this standard S-function, the desired delay time tsd is
set to a definite value when a set
current value (limit-value Isd) is exceeded (definite time; similar to the
DMT function in medium voltage)
Inverse-time-delay overcurrent release: For this optional S-function
applies I 2 t = constant. This function
is generally used to ensure a higher

degree of selectivity (inverse time;
similar to the inverse-time
delay function in medium voltage)
C Ground fault protection
Designation: G (previously also
called g release). Besides the
standard function (definite-time),
there is also an optional function
(I 2 t = inverse-time delay).
C Fault current protection
Designation: RCD (= residual current device). To detect differential
fault currents up to 3 A, similar to
the RCCB function for the protection of persons (up to 500 mA).
In addition, electronic releases also
permit new tripping criteria which are
not possible with electromechanical
releases.
Protective characteristics
The protective characteristic curve is
determined by the rated circuitbreaker current as well as the setting
and the operating values of the releases (see Table 3/5).
Low-voltage miniature circuitbreakers (MCB)
Miniature circuit-breakers are distinguished according to their method of
operation either high or low current
limiting. Their protective functions
are determined by electromechanical
releases:
3/3
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 4
Releases
C Overload protection by means of
inverse time-delayed overload
releases, e.g. bimetallic releases
C Short-circuit protection by means
of instantaneous overload releases,
e.g. solenoid releases.
Medium-voltage protection
equipment
High-voltage high-breakingcapacity fuses
High-voltage high-breaking-capacity
(HV HRC) fuses can only be used for
short-circuit protection. They do not
provide any overload protection. A
minimum short-circuit current is
therefore required for correct operation. HV HRC fuses restrict the peak
short-circuit current. The protective
characteristic is determined by the
selected rated current (Fig. 3/2).
Medium-voltage circuit-breakers
Circuit-breakers can provide timeovercurrent protection (definite and
inverse), time-overcurrent protection
with additional directional function or
differential protection. Distance protection is rarely used in the distribution systems described here.
Protective characteristics
Secondary relays, whose characteristic curves are also determined by the
actual current transformation ratio,
are normally used as protective devices in medium-voltage systems.
Static numerical protection devices
are increasingly preferred.
3.1.2 Low-Voltage Protection

Equipment Assemblies
Protection equipment assemblies
With series-connected distribution
boards, it is possible to arrange the following protective devices in series (relative to the direction of power flow):
C Fuse with downstream fuse
3/4
C Circuit-breaker with downstream

miniature circuit-breaker
C Circuit-breaker with downstream
fuse
C Fuse with downstream circuit-breaker
C Fuse with downstream miniature
circuit-breaker
C Several parallel infeeds with or
without coupler units with downstream circuit-breaker or downstream fuse
Current selectivity must be verified in
the case of meshed LV systems.
The high- and low-voltage protection
for the transformers feeding power
to the LV system must be harmonized and adjusted to the additional
protection of the secondary power
system. Appropriate checks must be
carried out to determine the effects
on the primary MV system.
In MV systems, HV HRC fuses are
normally only installed upstream of
the transformers in the LV infeed.
With the upstream circuit-breakers,
only time-overcurrent protection devices with different characteristics
are usually connected in series. Differential protection does not affect,
or only slightly influences the grading
of the other protective devices.
3.1.3 Selectivity Criteria

In addition to factors such as rated
current and rated switching capacity,
a further criterion to be considered
when implementing a protection device is selectivity. Selectivity is important because it ensures optimum
supply reliability. The following criteria can be applied for selective operation of series-connected protection
devices:
C Time difference for clearance
(time grading)
C Current difference for operating
values (current grading)
C Combination of time and current

grading (inverse time grading)
Power direction (directional protection), impedance (distance protection) and current difference (differential protection) are also used.
Requirements for the selective behavior of protective devices
Protective devices can only behave
selectively if both the highest and the
lowest short-circuit currents for the
relevant system points are known at
the project planning stage.
As a result:
C The highest short-circuit current
determines the required rated
short-circuit switching capacity
Icu/ Ics of the circuit-breaker.
Criterion: Icu/ Ics > IKmax
C The lowest short-circuit current is
important for setting the overcurrent release; the operating value of
this release must be less than the
lowest short-circuit current at the
end of the line to be protected,
since only this setting of Id /Isd
guarantees that the instantaneous
overcurrent release can carry out
its personnel and system protection functions.
Note: With these settings, the admissible tolerance limit of 20%
must be observed!
Criterion: Isd IKmin 20 %
C The observance of specified tripping conditions determines the
maximum conductor lengths or
their cross sections.
C Selective current grading is only
possible if the short-circuit currents
are known.
C In addition to current grading, partial selectivity can be achieved using combinations of carefully
matched protective devices.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 5
Ik
tg2
ta1
Operating time of breaker Q1
ta2
Operating time of breaker Q2
te1
Disengaging time of breaker Q1

Disengaging time of breake Q2
td2
Delay time of breaker Q2

grading time tst2
te2
L
S
Q2
t d2 150 ms
td2 tst2
ta2
te2
tL2
to2
to1
ta1
L
S
Q1
Fig. 3/3
to1 = 3 to 30 ms
depending on
circuit-breaker type
and magnitude of
te1
tg1
tL1
to1
Opening time of breaker Q1
to2
tL1
Arcing time of breaker Q1
tL2
Arcing time of breaker Q2
tg1
Total clearance time of breaker Q1
tg2
Total clearance time of breaker Q2

(tg = to+tL)
Safety
margin
Time sequence for the breaking operation of two graded

LV circuit-breakers in the event of a short circuit
C The highest short-circuit current

can be both the three-phase and
the single-phase short-circuit
current.
C With infeed into LV power systems, the single-phase fault current
will be greater than the threephase fault current if transformers
with the Dy connection are used.
C The single-phase short-circuit current will be the lowest fault current
if the damping zero phase-sequence impedance of the LV cable
is active.
With large installations, it is advisable
to determine all short-circuit currents
using a special computer program.
Here, our SIMARIS design planning
software comes as the optimum solution (see Chapter 12).
Grading the operating currents

with time grading
Grading of the operating currents is

also taken into consideration with
time grading, i.e. the operating value
of the overcurrent release of the
upstream circuit-breaker must be at
least 1.25 times the operating value
of the downstream circuit-breaker.
Scattering of operating currents in
definite-time-delay overcurrent
releases (S) is thus compensated
( 10%).
Plotting the tripping characteristics of

the graded protective devices in a
grading diagram will help to verify
and visualize selectivity.
Fig. 3/3 illustrates the individual

time-related terms using two graded
LV circuit-breakers as an example.
Grading time, delay time
The grading time tsd is the interval

required between the tripping characteristics of two series-connected
protection devices to ensure correct
operation of the protective device
immediately upstream of the fault.
The delay time to be set at the circuit-breaker tsd is obtained from the
sum of the grading times.
Time sequence for circuit-breakers
When grading the operating currents,

the time sequence of the breaking
operation of the circuit-breakers must
also be taken into consideration.
3/5
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 6
Q1
120
100
40
t
20
min 10
Q2
Ik1
L (cold)
4
2
1
4
2
1
400
200
100
Manual preparation
General notes
When characteristic tripping curves
are entered on log-log graph paper,
the following must be observed:
C To ensure positive selectivity, the
tripping curves must neither cross
nor touch.
C With electronic inverse-time delay
(long-time delay) overcurrent releases, there is only one tripping
curve, as it is not affected by preloading. The selected characteristic
curve must therefore be suitable
for a motor or transformer at operating temperature.
C With mechanical (thermal) inversetime delay overload releases (L), the
characteristic curves shown in the
manufacturer catalog apply for cold
releases. The opening times to are
reduced by up to 25% at normal operating temperatures.
Tolerance range of tripping curves
C The tripping curves of circuit-breakers
given in the manufacturer catalogs are
usually only average values and must
be extended to include tolerance
ranges (explicitly shown in Fig. 3/4,
3/20 and 3/24 only).
C With overcurrent releases instantaneous (I) and definite-time delayed
releases (S) the tolerance may be
20% of the current setting (according to EN 60947-2 / IEC 60947-2 /
VDE 0660 Part 101).
Significant tripping times
For the sake of clarity, only the delay
time (td) is plotted for circuit-breakers
with definite-time-delay overcurrent
releases (S), and only the opening
time (to) for circuit-breakers with instantaneous overcurrent releases (I).
3/6
20
10
3.1.4 Preparation of CurrentTime Diagrams (Grading Diagrams)
Ik2
ms
40
20
10
2 3 4 6 102
2 3 4 6 103
2 3 4 6 104 2 3 4 6 105
Current I (r.m.s. value)
Grading diagram with tripping curves of the circuit-breakers Q1 and Q2 shown in Fig. 3/3
Grading principles
Delay times and operating currents are
graded in the opposite direction to the
flow of power, starting with the final
circuit.
C Without fuses, for the load breaker
with the highest current setting of
the overcurrent release.
C With fuses, for the fused outgoing
circuit from the busbars with the
highest rated fuse-link current.
Circuit-breakers are preferred to
fuses in cases where fuse links with
high rated currents do not provide selectivity vis--vis the definite-time-delay overcurrent release (S) of the
transformer feeder circuit-breaker, or
only with very long delay times tsd
(400 to 500 ms). Furthermore, circuitbreakers are used where high system
availability is required as they help to
clear faults faster and the circuitbreakers releases are not subject
to aging especially with consumers
with very long infeed distances.
Procedure with two or more voltage levels
In the case of selectivity involving
two or more voltage levels (Fig. 3/39 ff.),
all currents and tripping curves on the
high-voltage side are converted and
referred to the low-voltage side on
the basis of the transformation ratio.
t d2 180 ms
to1 < 30 ms
2
101
Fig. 3/4
s
t st2 150 ms
Tools for preparing grading

diagrams
C Standard forms with paired current
values for commonly used voltages, e. g. 20/0.4 kV, 10/0.4 kV,
13.8/0.4 kV, etc.
C Templates for plotting the tripping
curves
Fig. 3/4 shows a hand-drawn grading
diagram with tripping curves for two
series-connected circuit-breakers, not
taking into account tolerances. The
time sequence for the breaking operation illustrated in Fig. 3/3 was used
here (time selectivity). When the
SIMARIS design planning software is
used, a manual preparation of grading
diagrams is no longer necessary.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 7
Low-voltage time grading
Grading and delay times

Only the grading time tgt and delay
time tsd are relevant for time grading
between several series-connected
circuit-breakers or in conjunction with
LV HRC fuses (Fig. 3/5).
The delay time tgt2 of breaker Q2 can
be equated approximately with the
grading time tgt2 ; the delay time tgt3
of breaker Q3 is calculated from the
sum of the grading times tgt2 + tgt3.
The resulting inaccuracies are corrected by the calculated grading margins. In the interests of simplicity,
only the grading times are added.
Proven grading times tgt
Series-connected circuit-breakers:
Those so-called "proven grading times"
are guiding values or rules of thumb.
Precise information must be obtained
from the device manufacturer.
C Grading between two circuit-breakers with electronic overcurrent
releases (Q1 and Q2) should be
about 70-80 ms
C Grading between two circuit-breakers with different release types
(Q2 = ETU and Q3 = TM) should
be about 100 ms
C For circuit-breakers with ZSI (zoneselective interlocking, i.e. short-time
grading control) the grading distance has been defined as 50 ms
Irrespective of the type of S-release

(mechanical or electronic), a grading
time of 70 ms to 100 ms is necessary between a circuit-breaker and a
downstream LV HRC fuse.
Between an LV HRC fuse and a
downstream circuit-breaker, a grading time tgt (safety margin) of at least
1 s must be maintained from the
prearcing-time/current characteristic
of the LV HRC fuse to the point at
which the tripping curves L and I or S
intersect, in order to allow for the
scatter band of the L-release (Fig.
3/6).
to1
tgt2 Grading time of breaker Q2
a
Q3
L
S
td3
tgt3 Grading time of breaker Q3
t d3 (t gt2 + ttgt3)
ttgt3
Q2
L
S
td2
t d2 t gt2
td2
td3
Inverse-time delay, Ir
Definite-time delay, Id, td
Instantaneous, Ii
Grading
margin
t o1
Q1
L
I
to1
Safety
margin
Fig. 3/5
Time grading for several series-connected circuit-breakers
3/7
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 8
Back-up protection
Current I
According to the Technical Supply

Conditions of the power supply companies (see Electrical Installations
Handbook), miniature circuit-breakers must be fitted with back-up fuses
with a rated current of 100 A (max.)
to prevent any damage being caused
by short-circuit currents.
Time setting for back-up protection

Short-circuit
current
Time setting
for protection
Operating
current
Grading time t gt
Command time tc
Spread of
Spread of
Spread of
protection
circuit-breaker protection
response time clearance time response time
Load current
The DIN VDE and IEC standards also

permit a switching device to be protected by one of the upstream protective devices with an adequate
rated short-circuit switching capacity
if both the feeder and the downstream protective device are also
protected (back-up protection).
Clearance time
of circuit-breaker
t
Release
time
Grading
margin
Total clearance time t g

of circuit-breaker
Fig. 3/6
Time grading in medium-voltage switchgear
Bibliography
Literature on LV installations
For more information about low-voltage switching and protective devices,
please refer to the Siemens publication Switching, Protection and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks
and the Electrical Installations Handbook, published by Publicis MCD
Verlag, Erlangen.
Medium-voltage time grading

Command time and grading time
The following must be observed
when determining the grading time
tgt on the medium-voltage side: Once
the protective device has been energized (Fig. 3/6), the set time must
elapse before the device issues the
tripping command to the shunt or undervoltage release of the circuitbreaker (command time tc).
The release causes the circuitbreaker to open. The short-circuit current is interrupted when the arc has
been extinguished. Only then does
the protection system revert to the
normal/rest position (release time).
The grading time tgt between successive protective devices must be
greater than the sum of the total clearance time tg of the breaker and the release time of the protection system.
3/8
Since a spread of time intervals,

which depends on a number of factors, has to be expected for the protective devices (including circuitbreakers), a safety margin is incorporated in the grading time.
Whereas grading times tgt of less
than 400 to 300 ms are not possible
with protective devices with mechanical releases, the more modern electronic and digital releases permit
grading times of only 300 or 250 ms.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 9
3.2 Protection Equipment for Low-Voltage

Power Systems
Tables 3/1 and 3/2 provide an
overview of the protection equipment for LV systems. The protection
equipment in the MV system of outgoing transformer feeders has also
been listed in Table 3/2.
Overcurrent protection for
lines and cables
Overcurrent protection devices must
be used to protect lines and cables
against overheating which may result
from operational overloads or dead
short circuits (Electrical Installations
Handbook, Publicis MCD Verlag,
Erlangen, Section 1.7).
The protective switching devices and
safety systems dealt with in this
chapter are further described in
Chapter 6.
3.2.1 Circuit-Breakers with

Protective Functions
Protective functions of
LV circuit-breakers
Circuit-breakers are used, first and
foremost, for overload and short-circuit protection. In order to increase
their protective functions, they can also
be equipped with additional releases,
e.g. for clearance with undervoltage,
or with supplementary modules for
detecting fault/residual currents (also
see Chapter 6).
The circuit-breakers are distinguished
according to their protective function:
C Circuit-breakers for system protection acc. to EN 60947-2/ IEC 609472/DIN VDE 0660-101
C Circuit-breakers for motor protec
tion acc. to EN 60947-2/
IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101
C Circuit-breakers used in motor star

ters acc. to EN 60947-4-2/
IEC 60947-4-2 / DIN VDE 0660-102
C Miniature circuit-breakers for cable
and line protection acc. to
EN 60898/ IEC 60898 /
DIN VDE 0641-11
Zero-current interrupters /
current limiters
Depending on their method of operation, circuit-breakers are available as:
C Zero-current interrupters or
C Current limiters (fuse-type
current limiting).
When configuring selective distribution boards, zero-current interrupters
are more suitable as upstream protection devices and current limiters
as downstream protection devices.
Overcurrent protection devices
Standard
Overload
protection
Short-circuit
protection
See Section
Fuses gL
EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636
Section 6.2.2
Miniature circuit-breakers
EN 60 898/IEC 60 898/DIN VDE 0641-11
Section 6.2.4
Circuit-breakers with overload

and overcurrent releases
EN 60 947-2/IEC 60 947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101
Section 6.2.1
Switchgear
fuses aM
EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636
Section 6.2.2
Switchgear assemblies
with back-up fuse, utilization
category gL or aM, and
contactor with overload relay
EN 60 269/IEC 60 269/DIN VDE 0636
EN 60 947-4-1/IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102
or
starter circuit-breaker and
contactor with overload relay
EN 60 947-2/IEC 60 947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101

EN 60 947-4-1/IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102
Protection provided
Table 3/1
No protection provided.
Overview of line and cable overcurrent protection devices discussed in this manual together with their protection ranges
3/9
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Protection devices
Seite 10
MV
Switch-disconnectors,
HV HRC fuses
LV
Circuit-breakers or
LV HRC fuses
Low
Cost
Circuit-breakers,
transducer, timeovercurrent protection
Switch-disconnectors,
HV HRC fuses
Tie breaker
Circuit-breakers
Network circuit-breakers
and network master relays
Justifiable
High
Low
Medium-voltage side
Transformers with thermal

release or full thermal
protection
Low-voltage side with
various series-connected
protection devices in
radial systems, and
parallel-connected LV HRC
fuses in interconnected
systems
I>
I>>
HV HRC
MV
LV
Individual
and parallel
operating
customary
Optional
630 A
HV HRC
MV
LV
Individual
and parallel
operating
customary
MV
LV
Only
parallel
operation
customary
LV
HRC
(interconnected
system)
50 A, 100 A
I>
I>>
S
Table 3/2
3/10
HV or LV HRC fuses
Circuit-breaker
Definite-time-overcurrent protection, twolevel I> and I>>, via current transformer
Drawout circuit-breaker (with safe clearance)
Network master relay (directional power relay)

via current transformer and system voltage
Power-factor correction controller
Contactor
Switch-disconnector
Overload relay
Overview of protection grading schemes discussed in this manual for outgoing transformer and LV feeders
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 11
Overload and overcurrent protection

Tables 3/3 and 3/4 provide an
overview of releases and relays in LV
circuit-breakers. Table 3/5 contains
the operating ranges of the overcurrent releases. According to the standards specified in Table 3/1, the operating value at which the releases trigger may deviate by 20% from the
set value.
Overcurrent releases
The instantaneous electromagnetic
overcurrent releases have either
fixed or variable settings, whereas
the electronic overcurrent releases
used in Siemens circuit-breakers all
have variable settings.
Modules
The overcurrent releases can be integrated in the circuit-breaker or supplied as separate modules for retrofitting or replacement. Possible exceptions are indicated in the
manufacturer specifications.
Overload releases
Mechanical (thermal) inverse-time-delay overload releases (L-releases) are
not always suitable for networks with
a high harmonic content. Circuitbreakers with electronic overload releases must be used in such cases.
Short-circuit protection with
S-releases
In the case of circuit-breakers with
definite (short-)time-delay overcurrent releases (S) used for time-grading short-circuit protection, it should
be noted that the circuit-breakers are
designed for a specific maximum permissible thermal and dynamic load.
If, in the event of a short circuit, the
time delay results in this load to be
exceeded, an I-release must also be
used to ensure that the circuitbreaker is opened instantaneously
with very high short-circuit currents.
The information supplied by the
Protective
function
Siemens
symbol
Time-delay
characteristics
of release
Graphical symbol acc. to

EN 60 617/DIN 40 713
Circuit diagram
or
Overload
protection
Inverse-time
delay
Selective
short-circuit
protection
S1)
Definite-time
delay by
timing element
or
inverse-time
delay
Fault current/
residual current/
earth fault
protection
G1)
Definite-time
delay
or
inverse-time
delay
Short-circuit
protection
Block
diagram
I>
I>
Instantaneous
I>>
I>
1)
For SENTRON 3WL and SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers, protection also includes
zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)
In the following, combinations of releases will be referred to by their code letters
only (L-, S- and I-releases).
Table 3/3
Symbols for releases according to protective functions
Function
Release
Relay
Overload
protection
Overload release
Inverse-time delay or
electronic delay
Overload relay
Thermal delay or
electronic delay
Thermistor protection release devices
Short-circuit
protection
Overcurrent release
Instantaneous electromagnetic
or electronic
Overcurrent relay
release
Selective
short-circuit
protection
Overcurrent release
or electronic
Table 3/4
Circuit-breaker releases and relays with protective functions
3/11
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:43 Uhr
Seite 12
manufacturer should be consulted

when the release type is selected.
Reclosing lockout after
short-circuit tripping
A number of circuit-breakers can be
fitted with a mechanical and/or electrical reclosing lockout which prevents reclosing to the short-circuit
after short-circuit tripping.
The circuit-breaker can only be closed
again after the fault has been eliminated and the lockout has been reset
manually.
Fault-current/residual-current
protection
The global importance of fault-current
protection devices has grown in the
field of protection technology due to
the high level of protection they provide (protection of human life and
property) and their extended scope
of protection (alternating and pulsating current sensitivity).
Apart from residual-current-operated
circuit-breakers, miniature circuitbreaker assemblies, e. g. miniature
circuit-breakers with fault-current tripping, are being used to an increasing
extent for commercial and industrial
applications.
3/12
Applications
(primarily for
short-circuit
current clearance)
Time-delay
characteristic
Operating ranges of
inverse-time-dealy overcurrent
release as multiple of set
value Ir
Circuit-breaker
for generator
protection
Instantaneous or
short-time delay
Approx. 3 to 6 Ir
Circuit-breaker for
line protection
Instantaneous
Approx. 6 to 12 Ir
Circuit-breaker for
motor protection
Instantaneous or
short-time delay1)
Approx. 8 to 15 Ir
1)
Poss. short-time delay for rush current shunting
Table 3/5
Operating ranges of the overcurrent releases (acc. to EN 60 947 / IEC 60 947/DIN VDE 0660)
MCBs with fault-current tripping

These circuit-breaker assemblies are
available as compact factory-built devices or may be assembled from a
miniature circuit-breaker as the basic
device and an add-on module.
Circuit-breakers with fault-current/
residual-current tripping
The assembly comprising a circuitbreaker and add-on module has established itself for circuit-breakers
with rated currents In of up to 400 A
and fault-current/residual-current tripping.
Technical features
The add-on module for residual-current tripping used in system protection applications includes such technical features as:
C Rated residual current In, adjustable in steps, e.g. 30 mA/
100 mA/300 mA/500 mA/1,000
mA/3,000 mA
C Tripping time ta, adjustable in
steps,
e. g. instantaneous/60 ms/ 100
ms/250 ms/500 ms/1,000 ms
C Operation depends on system
voltage
C Sensitivity: tripping with alternating
and pulsating DC fault currents
C Reset button R for resetting
after residual-current tripping
C Test button T for testing the

circuit-breaker assembly
C Status display for the current leakage / residual current I in the
downstream circuit, e. g. by means
of colored LEDs:
green: I 0.,5 In
yellow: 0,25 In < v 0.5 vn
red:
cA > I > 0.5 In
IA = Tripping current of
additional residualcurrent module
C Disconnection of the electronics
overvoltage protection prior to insulation measurement in the installation
C Remote tripping
C Auxiliary switch (AS)
Interface to bus systems
With appropriate interfaces, the
circuit-breaker assemblies can be
equipped to bus systems to enable
the exchange of information and interaction with other components in
the electrical installation.
AC/DC sensitive circuit-breaker
assemblies
In industrial applications, circuitbreaker assemblies which are sensitive to AC/DC currents are required
for electrical installations in which
smooth DC fault currents or currents
with a low residual ripple occur in the
event of a fault.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 13

Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity Icn
(r.m.s. value) kA
4.5
6
10
20
50
<
<
<
<
<
Table 3/6
I
I
I
I
I
6
10
20
50
Power factor
cos
Minimum value n
short-circuit making capacity
n=
short-circuit breaking capacity
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.25
0.2
1.5
1.7
2.0
2.1
2.2
Correlation n between rated short-circuit making and breaking capacity

and the respective power factor (for AC circuit-breakers)
The rated short-circuit breaking capacity is indicated using two values:
Icu
Ics
Rated ultimate
short-circuit
breaking capacity
Rated service
short-circuit
breaking capacity
Test sequence
O-t-CO
O-t-CO-t-CO
Test of
ultimate short-circuit
breaking capacity
Testing
the overload tripping
the insulation resistance
the overheating
service short-circuit
breaking capacity
Testing
the overload tripping
the insulation resistance
the overheating
Switching capacity
O Opening (O = Open)
CO Opening and closing (C = Close)
t
Interval (t = time)
Table 3/7
Switching performance categories acc. to EN 60947 / IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660
and IEC 157-1
Standards
The standards EN 60947-2/
IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101
apply for circuit-breakers with addon fault-current or residual-current
modules.
Selection criteria for circuitbreakers
When selecting the appropriate circuit-breaker for system protection,
special attention must be paid to the
following characteristics:
C Type of circuit-breaker and its releases according to the respective
protective function and tasks
C Rated voltages
C Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics and

rated short-circuit making (Icm) and
breaking capacity (Icn)
C Rated and maximum load currents
The system voltage and system
frequency are crucial factors for
selecting the circuit-breakers
according to
C Rated insulation voltage Ui
and
C Rated operating voltage Ue.
Rated insulation voltage Ui
The rated insulation voltage Ui is the
standardized voltage value for which
the insulation of the circuit-breakers
and their associated components is
rated in accordance with HD 625 /
IEC 60664 / DIN VDE 0110, Insulation
Group C.
Rated operating voltage Ue

The rated operating voltage Ue of a
circuit-breaker is the voltage value to
which the rated short-circuit making
and breaking capacities and the shortcircuit performance category refer.
Short-circuit current
The maximum short-circuit current at
the installation location is a crucial
factor for selecting the circuit-breakers
according to
C Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics , as well
as
C Rated short-circuit making Icm and
breaking capacities Icn.
Dynamic short-circuit strength
The permissible dynamic short-circuit
strength is indicated as the peak shortcircuit current. It is the highest permissible instantaneous value of the
prospective short-circuit current along
the conducting path with the highest
load.
Thermal fault withstand capability
(1-s current)
The permissible thermal short-circuit
strength is referred to as the rated
short-time current Icw . It is the maximum current which the breaker is capable of withstanding for X s without
any damage occurring. Generally, the
Icw current refers to 1 s. Other time
values can be converted assuming
Icn = constant.
Rated switching capacity
The rated switching capacity of the
circuit-breakers is specified as the
rated short-circuit making capacity and
rated short-circuit breaking capacity.
3/13
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 14
Circuit-breaker type
Rated current
Application example
Air
circuit-breaker (ACB)
630A to 6,300 A
Protection of distribution systems, motors,

transformers and generators
SENTRON 3WL1
High rated short-time current for time selectivity

Two series, SENTRON WL1 and SENTRON WL6
with high and medium rated switching capacity
Electronic, microprocessor-based overcurrent
releases independent of external voltages
Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) with total delay
time of 50 ms
Current-limiting
circuit-breaker
(MCCB)
SENTRON 3VL
Designed and tested in compliance with

EN 60947 / IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660
Possible applications:
Tripping characteristic
L
S
I
L
S
I
TM release:
16 A to 630 A
ETU release:
63 A to 1,600 A
For system protection up to 1,600 A

Optional adjustable overload and overcurrent release:
Precise adaptation to protection requirements
ETU release:
63 A to 500 A
For motor protection up to 500 A

Electronic overload release with adjustable time-lag class:
Effective protection when motor is under full load
L
I
L
I
M release:
63 A to 500 A
M release:
100 A to 1,600 A
Circuit-breaker
3RV1
0.16 to 100 A
For starter combinations up to 500 A

Unsusceptible to inrush currents:
Breaker not tripped by direct-on-line motor starting
As isolating circuit-breaker (load interrupter) up to 2,000 A

with integrated overcurrent releases,
no back-up fuse required
3 RV1 circuit-breaker for motor protection

with overload and overcurrent protection
L
I
I
L Overload tripping
Table 3/8
3/14
S Short-time delay overcurrent tripping
I Instantaneous overcurrent tripping
Application examples for modern Siemens circuit-breakers and their typical tripping characteristics
G Ground fault tripping
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 15
Rated short-circuit making

capacity Icm
The rated short-circuit making capacity Icm is the short-circuit current
which the circuit-breaker is capable
of making at the rated operating voltage +10%, rated frequency and a
specified power factor. It is expressed as the maximum peak value
of the prospective short-circuit current, and is at least equal to the rated
short-circuit breaking capacity Icn ,
multiplied by the factor n specified
in Table 3/6.
capacity Icn
The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn is the short-circuit current which
the circuit-breaker is capable of breaking at the rated operating voltage
+10%, rated frequency and a specified power factor cos . It is expressed as the r.m.s. value of the alternating current component.
Switching capacity category
Switching capacity categories, which
specify how often a circuit-breaker
can switch its rated making and
breaking current as well as the condition of the breaker after the specified
switching cycle, are defined for
circuit-breakers in EN 60947 /
IEC 60947/ DIN VDE 0660 and in
accordance with IEC 157-1 (Table
3/7). The rated short-circuit breaking
capacity Icn is based on the test
sequence O-t-CO-t-CO. The rated
service short-circuit breaking capacity
Ics can also be specified on the basis
of the shortened switching sequence
O-t-CO (see Table 3/7 for explanation
of O, t, and C).
Rated circuit-breaker currents

The rated duty, e.g. continuous
operation, intermittent operation or
short-time operation, plays a decisive
role in selecting the switchgear
according to its rated currents.
The following rated currents are distinguished according to the thermal
characteristics:
Application examples and tripping

curves
Application examples for circuitbreakers with protection
The principal application examples
and typical tripping curves of modern
circuit-breakers currently available
from Siemens are specified in
Table 3/8.
C Rated thermal current Ith

C Rated continuous current Iu
C Rated operating current Ie.
Conventional rated thermal
current Ith , rated continuous
current Iu
The conventional rated thermal current Ith or Ithe for motor starters in
enclosures is defined as an 8-h current in accordance with EN 60947-1,
-4-1, -3 / IEC 60947-1, -4-1, -3 /
DIN VDE 0660-100, -102, -107.
It is the maximum current which can
be carried during this time without
the temperature limit being exceeded. The rated continuous current
Iu can be carried for an unlimited
time.
With adjustable inverse-time-delay
releases and relays, the maximum
current setting is the rated continuous current Iu.
Rated operating current Ie
The rated operating current Ie is the
current that is determined by the operating conditions of the switching
device, the rated operating voltage
and rated frequency, rated switching
capacity, the rated duty, utilization
category1), contact life and the degree of protection.
1) The utilization category describes the
switching devices application and stress,
see device standards EN 60947 /
IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660.
3/15
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 16
Circuitbreaker
L Inverse-time-delay
overload release
Fuse
Fuse
I Instantaneous
electromagnetic
overcurrent release
L
Circuitbreaker
Icn Rated short-circuit

breaking capacity
A
I
3.2.2 Switchgear Assemblies

Switchgear assemblies are seriesconnected switching and protection
devices which perform specific tasks
for protecting a system component;
the first device (relative to the flow
of power) provides the short-circuit
protection.
Ik Prospective sus-
tained short-circuit
current at mounting
location
Ik
Ik
Icn
A Safety margins
Operates
Clears
Fig. 3/7
L release
I release
Circuit-breaker
Fuse
Fuse
+ circuit-breaker
Switchgear assembly comprising fuse and circuit-breaker
Switchgear assemblies with fuses

Fuses and molded-case circuitbreakers
If the prospective short-circuit current Ik exceeds the rated short-circuit
breaking capacity Icn of the circuitbreaker at its point of installation, the
latter must be provided with upstream fuses (Fig. 3/7).
Protection and operating ranges
Defined protection and operating
ranges are assigned to each device in
the switchgear assembly. The L-release monitors overload currents,
while the I-release detects short-circuit currents up to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuitbreaker.
The circuit-breaker provides protection against all overcurrents up to its
rated short-circuit breaking capacity
Icn and ensures all-pole opening and
reclosing. The fuses are only responsible for short-circuit clearance with
higher short-circuit currents Ik . In this
case too, the circuit-breaker disconnects all-pole almost simultaneously
via its I-release, triggered by the letthrough current ID of the fuse. The
fuse must, therefore, be selected
such that its let-through current ID is
less than the rated short-circuit
breaking capacity Icn of the circuitbreaker.
3/16
Fuse, contactor, and thermal

inverse-time-delay overload relay
The contactor is used to switch the
motor on and off. The overload relay
protects the motor, motor supply
conductors and contactor against
overloading. The fuse upstream of
the contactor and overload relay provides protection against short circuits. For this reason, the protection
ranges and characteristics of all the
components (Fig. 3/8) must be carefully coordinated with each other.
The switchgear assembly comprising
contactor and overload relay is referred to as a motor starter or, if a
three-phase motor is started directly,
a direct-on-line starter.
Specifications for contactors and
motor starters
The standards EN 60947-4-1 /
IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN VDE 0660-102
apply for contactors and motor
starters up to 1,000 V for direct-online starting (with maximum voltage).
When short-circuit current protection
equipment is selected for switchgear
assemblies, a distinction is made between various types of protection according to the permissible degree of
damage as defined in EN 60947-4- /
IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN VDE 0660-1021):
Type a
Destruction and replacement of individual components or complete switching device
Type b
Welding of contacts and

permanent change in
characteristic values of
overload relay
Type c
Welding of contacts without permanent change to

operating values of over
load relay.
Protection and operating ranges of

equipment
Grading diagram for motor starter
The protection ranges and the relevant characteristics of the equipment
constituting a switchgear assembly
used as a motor starter are illustrated
in the grading diagram in Fig. 3/8.
1) The standards EN 60 947-1 / IEC 60 947-4-1/

DIN VDE 0660-102 comprise modified descriptions for short-circuit behavior as
follows:
Coordination type 1:
Destruction of contactor and overload relay
are permissible. The contactor and/or over
load relay must be replaced if necessary.
Coordination type 2:
The overload relay must not be damaged.
Contact welding at the contactor is, however,
permissible, given the contacts can easily be
separated or the contactor can easily be
replaced.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 17
Assembly
comprising
LV HRC fuse,
contactor, and
thermal
overload relay
(motor starter)
1
1 min
2
2 Destruction characteristic of thermal overload

relay
3 Rated breaking capacity
of contactor
4 Characteristic of contactor for easily separable
welding of contacts
B
A
1 Tripping characteristic
of (thermal) inversetime-delay overload
relay
4 (Depends on
current limiting
by fuse)
5
C
6
1 ms
5 Prearcing-time/current
characteristic of fuse,
utilization category aM
6 Total clearance-time
characteristic of aM
fuse
A, B, C
Fig. 3/8
Safety margins for reliable short-circuit protection
Switchgear assembly comprising fuse, contactor,

and thermal inverse-time-delay overload relay
The fuses in this assembly must

satisfy a number of conditions:
C The time-current characteristics of
fuses and overload relays must allow the motor to be run up to
speed.
C The fuses must protect the overload relay from being destroyed by
currents approximately 10 times
higher than the rated current of the
relay.
C The fuses must interrupt overcurrents beyond the capability of the
contactor (Ie currents approximately
10 times higher than the rated operating current Ie of the contactor).
C In the event of a short circuit, the
fuses must protect the contactor to
such an extent that any damage
does not exceed the specified degrees of damage mentioned above
(depending on the rated operating
current Ie, contactors must be able
to withstand motor start-up currents of between 8 and 12 Ie without the contacts being welded).
To satisfy these conditions, the following safety margins A, B and C
must be maintained between certain
characteristic curves of the devices:
Protection of overload relay

In order to protect the overload relay,
the prearcing-time/current characteristic of the fuse (an LV HRC
switchgear fuse of utilization category aM was used in this example;
refer to the following section Selecting fuses) must lie in margin A below the intersection of the tripping
curve of the overload relay (1) with
its destruction curve (2).
Protection of contactor
In order to protect the contactor
against excessively high breaking currents, the prearcing-time/current
characteristic curve of the fuse, starting from the current value which corresponds to the breaking capacity of
the contactor (3), must lie in margin B
below the tripping characteristic of
the overload relay (1).
In order to protect the contactor
against contact welding, time-current
characteristic curves can be specified
for each contactor indicating which
load currents can be applied as maximum currents so that
C contact welding is avoided, or else
C welded contacts can easily be separated (characteristic curve 4 in
Fig. 3/8).
Therefore, in both cases, the fuse

must respond in good time. The total
clearance time characteristic of the
fuse (6) must lie in margin C below
the characteristic curve of the contactor for easily separable contact welding (4) (total clearance time = prearcing time + extinction time).
Selecting fuses
LV HRC switchgear fuses
Fuses for motor starters are selected
according to the aforementioned criteria.
Compared with LV HRC fuses of utilization category gL used to protect
lines and cables, LV HRC switchgear
fuses of utilization category aM provide the advantage of weld-free
short-circuit protection for the maximum motor power which the contactor is capable of switching.
Owing to their more effective current
limiting abilities (as compared with
those of line-protection fuses), they
are very effective in relieving contactors of high peak short-circuit currents ip since they respond more
rapidly in the upper short-circuit
range as shown in Fig. 3/9.
It is therefore preferable to use
switchgear fuses rather than lineprotection fuses with relay settings
> 80 A at higher operating currents
with correspondingly lower shortcircuit current attenuation.
Table 3/9 shows the classification
of the fuses based on functional
features.
3/17
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 18
Functional category
Designation
Utilization category
Rated continuous Rated breaking Designation

current
current
Protection of
t s Prearcing time for fuse

104
s
t s 103
Full-range fuses
In
Ia min
gL/gG
gR
gB
Cables and
lines
Semiconductors
Mining
installations
Back-up fuses
a
102
Utilization category
gL
aM
101
100
10-1
In
4 In
2.7 In
aM
aR
Switchgear
Semiconductors
Ia min Minimum rated breaking current
10-2
10-3
8
4 102
103
104
I
Table 3/9
Classification of LV HRC fuses based on their functional characteristics defined in

EN 60269-1/ IEC 60269-1/DIN VDE 0636-10
Classification of LV HRC fuses and

comparison of characteristic
curves of gL and aM utilization
categories
LV HRC fuses are divided into functional and utilization categories in accordance with their type design. They
can continuously carry currents up to
their rated current.
Functional category g
(full-range fuses)
Functional category g applies to fullrange fuses which can interrupt currents from the minimum fusing current
up to the rated short-circuit breaking
current.
Utilization category gL/gG
This category includes fuses of utilization category g/gG used to protect
cables and lines.
Functional category a
(back-up fuses)
Functional category a applies to
backup fuses which can interrupt
currents above a specified multiple of
their rated current up to the rated
short-circuit breaking current.
Utilization category aM
This functional category applies to
switchgear fuses of utilization category aM, the minimum breaking current of which is approximately four
3/18
times the rated current. These fuses

are thus only intended for short-circuit
protection. For this reason, fuses of
functional category a must not be
used above their rated current. A
means of overload protection, e.g. a
thermal time-delay relay, must therefore always be provided.
Comparison of characteristic
curves for utilization categories gL
and aM
The prearcing-time/current characteristics of LV HRC of utilization category gL and aM for 200 A are compared in Fig. 3/9.
Switchgear assemblies without
fuses (fuseless design)
Back-up protection (cascade-connected circuit-breakers)
If two circuit-breakers with I-releases
of the same type are connected in
series along one conducting path,
they will open simultaneously in
the event of a fault (K) in the vicinity
of the distribution board
(Fig. 3/10, 3/11).
The short-circuit current is thereby
detected by two series-connected
interrupting devices and effectively
extinguished. As a result, the downstream circuit-breaker with a lower
rated switching capacity can be in-
Fig. 3/9
5
[A]
Comparison of prearcing-time/
current characteristics of LV HRC
fuses of utilization categories gL
and aM, rated current 200 A
stalled at a location where the possible short-circuit current exceeds its

rated switching capacity.
Protection and operating ranges of
the circuit-breakers
Fig. 3/10 shows the single-line diagram and Fig. 3/11 the principle of a
cascade connection. The rated current of the upstream circuit-breaker
Q2 is selected in accordance with its
rated operating current. The circuitbreaker Q2 can, for example, be used
as a main circuit-breaker or group circuit-breaker for several feeders in
sub-distribution boards. Its I-release
is set to a very high operating current, if possible to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of the
downstream circuit-breakers.
Circuit-breaker
with I-release
Q2
and
Q1
Circuit-breaker
with L I-release
Fig. 3/10
Single-line diagram of a back-up

circuit (cascade connection) in a
sub-distribution board
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 19
The outgoing circuit-breaker Q1 provides overload protection and also

clears autonomously relatively low
short-circuit currents which may be
caused by short circuits to exposed
conductive parts, insulation faults or
short circuits at the end of long lines
and cables. The upstream circuitbreaker Q2 is only involved at the
same time if high short-circuit currents occur as a result of a dead
short circuit in the vicinity of the outgoing circuit-breaker Q1 (restricted
selectivity).
Circuit-breakers with L- and
I-releases and contactor
Protection and operating ranges
of devices
The circuit-breaker provides overload
and short-circuit protection also for
the contactor, while the contactor
performs switching duties (Fig. 3/12).
The requirements that must be fulfilled by the circuit-breaker are the
same as those that apply to the fuse
in switchgear assemblies comprising
fuse, contactor and overload relay
(see Fig. 3/8).
Starter circuit-breaker with
I-release, contactor, and overload
relay (a)
Readiness for reclosing
Overload protection is provided by
the overload relay in conjunction with
the contactor, while short-circuit protection is provided by the starter circuit-breaker. The operating current of
its I-release is set as low as the starting cycle will permit, in order to include low short-circuit currents in the
instantaneous breaking range as well
(Fig. 3/13). The advantage of this
switchgear assembly is that it is possible to determine whether the fault
was an overload or short circuit according to whether, via the overload

relay, the contactor or the starter circuit-breaker has opened. Further advantages of the starter circuit-breaker
following short-circuit tripping are
three-phase circuit interruption and
immediate readiness for reclosing.
ip
i
i D1
i D(1+2)
The switchgear assemblies with the

starter circuit-breaker are becoming
increasingly important in fuseless
control units.
Switchgear assemblies with thermistor motor-protection devices

u
Overload relays and releases cease

to provide reliable overload protection when it is no longer possible to
establish the winding temperature
from the motor current. This is the
case with:
C
C
C
C
ue
u B(1+2)
u B1
High switching frequencies

Irregular, intermittent duty
Restricted cooling and
High ambient temperatures
In these cases, switchgear assemblies with thermistor motor-protection devices are used. The
switchgear assemblies are designed
with or without fuses depending on
the installations configuration.
Temperature sensor in motor winding
The degree of protection that can be
attained depends on whether the
motor to be protected has a thermally critical stator or rotor. The operating temperature, coupling time constant and the position of the
temperature sensor in the motor
winding are also crucial factors. They
are usually specified by the motor
manufacturer.
ip
Maximum asymmetrical shortcircuit current (peak value)
i D1
Let-through current Q1
i D (1+ 2) Actual let-through current

(less than i D1)
ue
Source voltage (opening

voltage)
u B (1+ 2) Sum of arc voltages of upstream circuit-breaker Q2 and

outgoing circuit-breaker Q1
u B1
Fig. 3/11
Arc voltage of outgoing

circuit-breaker Q1
Principle of a back-up circuit

(cascade connection)
3/19
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 20
Circuitbreaker with
li releases
Circuit-breaker
with I-release for
starter assemblies
Contactor
Inverse-timedelay overload
relay with
L-release
Contactor
L
1
2
n
Setting range
I
Icn
Icn
Trip
L-release
I-release
Opens
Contactor
Circuit-breaker
1 Rated breaking capacity of

contactor
2 Rated making capacity of
contactor
3 Characteristic of contactor
for easily separable contact welding
Fig. 3/12
L Characteristic of
inverse-time-delay
overload release
I Characteristic of instantaneous electromagnetic
overcurrent release
breaking capacity of
circuit-breaker
L Characteristic curve of
(thermal) inverse-time-de
lay overload relay
Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker and contactor
a)
b)
Fig. 3/13
Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker, adjustable

overcurrent release, contactor, and overload relay
c)
Fuse
Characteristic curve of ad
justable instantaneous
overcurrent release
d)
Fuse
Circuit-breaker with
L- and I-releases
Contactor
L- and I-releases
L- and I-releases
Contactor
Contactor
Overload relay
Thermistor
motor protection
Fig. 3/14
Thermistor
motor protection
Switchgear assemblies with thermistor motor-protection devices plus additional overload

relay or release (block diagram)
Motors with thermally critical

stators
Motors with thermally critical stators
can be adequately protected against
overloads and overheating by means
of thermistor motor-protection devices without overload relays. Feeder
cables are protected against short circuits and overloads either by fuses
and circuit-breakers (Fig. 3/14a) or by
fuses alone (Fig. 3/14b).
3/20
Overload relay
Thermistor
motor protection
Thermistor
motor protection
Motors with thermally critical

rotors
Motors with thermally critical rotors,
even if started with a locked rotor,
can only be provided with adequate
protection if they are fitted with an
additional overload relay or release.
The overload relay or release also
protects the cabling against overloads (Fig. 3/14a, c and d).
3.2.3 Selecting Protective

Equipment
Short-circuit protection of branch
circuits
Branch circuits in distribution boards
and control units can be provided with
short-circuit protection by means of
fuses or by means of circuit-breakers
without fuses. The level of anticipated
current limiting, which is higher in
fuses with low rated currents than in
current-limiting circuit-breakers with
the same rated current, may also be a
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 21

[kA] 100
2h
cos 0.25
cos 0.3
ip , i D
63 A i D
cos 0.5
13
10
iD
cos 0.7
ip
a, a
100 A
10 s
a
63 A
1
iD
b
10 ms
10
22
Short-circuit current I k
iD Let-through currents
ip Peak short-circuit current
100
[kA]
e.g. where Ik = 10 kA:

iD Fuse (100 A) 7.5 kA
iD Circuit-breaker 8 kA
Current-limiting characteristics of circuit-breaker (63 A)

and LV HRC fuses (63 and 100 A)
crucial factor in making a choice in

favor of one or the other solution.
Comparing the protective characteristics of fuses with those of
current-limiting circuit-breakers
The following should be taken into
consideration when comparing the
protection characteristics of fuses
and circuit-breakers:
C The rated short-circuit breaking
capacity, which can vary considerably;
C The level of current limiting which,
with fuses of up to 400 A, is always higher than for current-limiting circuit-breakers with the same
rated current;
C The shape of the prearcing
time/current characteristic curves
of fuses and the tripping curves of
circuit-breakers;
1
2
3
A
Current limiting range

Overload range
Short-circuit current range
Test range for fuse
currents
Fig. 3/16
B A
1 1.3 1.6 Ir,(Ie)

1.05 1.2
Fig. 3/15
Icn
Ik
I
100
[kA]
B Test range for limiting

tripping currents of
circuit-breaker
breaking capacity
Characteristics and rated switching capacities of fuse

(a) and circuit-breaker (b) with I-releases
C Clearance conditions in accordance

with HD 384.4.41 / IEC 60 364-4-41/
DIN VDE 0100-410, Section 6.1.3
Protection measures in TN systems (see Electrical Installations Handbook, Chapter 2).
Comparison between the tripping

curves and rated short-circuit
breaking capacity of fuses with
those of circuit-breakers with
the same rated current and a high
switching capacity
Comparison of current-limiting
characteristics
Tripping curves and rated

short-circuit breaking capacity Icn
The prearcing-time/current characteristic curve a of the 63 A fuse link, utilization category gL, and the I tripping characteristic b of a circuitbreaker are, by way of example,
plotted in the time-current diagram in
Fig. 3/16. The current setting for the
inverse-time-delay overload release
of the circuit-breaker corresponds to
the rated current of the fuse link.
Current limiting with LV HRC fuses

and circuit-breakers
Fig. 3/15 shows the current-limiting
characteristics of a circuit-breaker
with rated continuous current of 63 A,
at 400 V and 50 Hz compared to an
LV HRC fuse of type 3NA, utilization
category gL, rated currents 63 A and
100 A. Owing to the high motor starting currents, however, the rated current of the fuse must be higher than
the rated operating current of the motor, i.e. a circuit-breaker with a minimum rated current of 63 A or a fuse
with a minimum rated current of
100 A is required for a 30 kW motor.
Current limiting range (1)

The typical test range for fuse currents (A) is, for example, between
1.3 and 1.6 times the rated current
while the test range for the limiting
tripping currents of the overload release (B) is between 1.05 and 1.2
times the current setting. The adjustable overload release enables the
current setting and, therefore, the
limiting tripping current to be
matched more closely to the continuous loading capability than it would
be possible with a fuse, the different
current ratings of which only permit
approximate matching.
3/21
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 22
Although the limit current of the fuse

is adequate for providing overload
protection for lines and cables, it is
not sufficient for the starting current
of motors where a fuse with the
characteristic a would be needed.
Overload range (2)
In the overload range (2), the prearcing- time/current characteristic curve
of the fuse is steeper than the tripping curve of the overload release.
Short-circuit current range (3)
In the short-circuit current range (3),
the instantaneous release of the circuit-breaker detects short-circuit currents above its operating value faster
than the fuse. At higher currents, the
fuse trips more quickly and therefore,
limits the short-circuit current more
effectively than a circuit-breaker.
Extremely high rated switching

capacity of LV HRC fuses
This results in an extremely high
rated breaking capacity for fuses of
over 100 kA at an operating voltage
of 690 V AC. The rated short-circuit
breaking capacity Icn of circuit-breakers, however, depends on a number
of factors, e.g. the rated operating
voltage Ue and the type.
A comparison between the protection characteristics of fuses, circuitbreakers and their switchgear assemblies can be found in Tables 3/10
and 3/11.
Selecting circuit-breakers for
distribution boards with and
without fuses
Distribution boards and control units
can be constructed with or without
fuses.
Distribution boards with fuses
The standard design of distribution
boards with fuses (Table 3/12) includes switchgear assemblies comprising circuit-breakers and fuses,
whereby a specific task is allocated
to each protection device.
The feeder circuit-breaker provides
overload protection and selective shortcircuit protection for the transformer
and distribution board. The Siemens circuit-breakers SENTRON WL and 3VL
are ideal for this purpose.
3/22
The switchgear assemblies comprising fuse and circuit-breaker, which

provide system protection, protect the
lines to the sub-distribution board
against overloads and short circuits.
The switchgear assemblies comprising fuse and circuit-breaker, which
provide motor protection, as well as
fuses, contactor and overload relay
protect the motor feeder cable and
the motor against overloads and short
circuits.
Distribution boards without fuses
(fuseless design)
In distribution boards without fuses
(Table 3/13), short-circuit protection
is provided by circuit-breakers for
system protection and for load
switching, furthermore circuit-breakers fulfill motor protection tasks only
or protect starter assemblies together with the contactor. The protection ranges of the switchgear assemblies comprising circuit-breaker,
contactor and overload relay have already been dealt with in this chapter.
For further technical data, please
refer to the literature supplied by the
manufacturer.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 23
Characteristic
Fuse
Circuit-breaker
Rated switching
capacity (AC)
> 100 kA, 690 V
f (Ir Ue type1))
Current limiting
f ( I r I k)
f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
Additional arcing space
None
f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
External indication
of operability
Yes
No
Operational reliability
With additional costs2) Yes
Remote switching
No
Automatic all-pole breaking
Indication facility
Interlocking facility
No
Yes
Readiness for reclosing after

clearing overload
clearing short circuit
No
No
Yes
f (condition)
Interrupted operation
Yes
f (condition)
Maintenance costs
No
f (number of operations and condition)
Selectivity
No additional costs
With additional costs
Replaceability
Yes5)
With unit of same make
Short-circuit protection
cable
motor
Very good
Very good
Good
Good
Overload protection
cable
motor
Adequate
Not possible
Good
Good
1)
2)
The term type embraces: current

extinguishing method, short-circuit
strength through internal impedance,
type of construction
For example, by means of shockproof
fuse switch-disconnectors with snapaction closing
Yes
3)
4)
5)
By means of fuse monitoring and

associated circuit-breakers
By means of fuse monitoring
Due to standardisation
Table 3/10 Comparison between the protective characteristics of fuses and circuit-breakers
3/23
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
Equipment to be
protected and
switching rate
18:44 Uhr
Seite 24
Protection devices with fuses
Fuse
Circuit-breaker
Contactor
Overload protection
Thermistor
motor protection
M
3~
M
3~
Overload protection
Cable
Motor (with thermally critical stator)
Motor (with thermally critical rotor)
++
++1)
++1)
++
++
++
+
++
+
+
++
+
++
++
++
++
++
++
Cable
Motor
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
Switching rate
++
++
++
Equipment to be
protected and
switching rate
Protection devices without fuses
Circuit-breaker
Contactor
Overload protection
Thermistor
motor protection
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
M
+
Overload protection
Cable
Motor (with thermally critical stator)
Motor (with thermally critical rotor)
++
++1)
++1)
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++1)
++1)
+
++
++
Cable
Motor
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
Switching rate
1)
Protection with slight functional loss following failure of phase conductor

++ Very good
+ Good
Poor
Table 3/11 Comparison between the protective characteristics of different switchgear assemblies (block diagrams)
3/24
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 25
No. Type of
circuitbreaker
Type
code
Rated
short-circuit
breaking
capacity
Icn
Type of release/relay
L
S
Adjus- Fixed Adjustable settable
ting
Back-up
fuse
Fixed
setting
Adjustable Icn
> 100 kA
Ik1
Tripping
characteristic
TIP_Kap3_E
Adjustable
release
Feeder circuit-breaker
1
1
Circuitbreaker
for selective
protection
3W
Icn
t
Ik1 I
Ik1
Distribution circuit-breaker
2
Fuse
3NA
and
3VF
circuit-breaker 3VL
for system
protection
Ik2
Ik2
Ik2
Icn
t
Ik2 I
Ik2
Load circuit-breaker
4
Ik3
Table 3/12
Ik3
Ik3
Fuse
and
direct-on-line
starter
Ik3
Ik3
Ik3
Icn
t
Ik3 I
Ik3
4
M
3~
Fuse
3NA
and
3RV1
circuit-breaker
for motor
protection
M
3~
3NA
3ND
3TW
Icn
t
Ik3
Power distribution boards with fuses and circuit-breakers
3/25
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 26
No. Type of
circuitbreaker
Type
code
Rated
short-circuit
breaking
capacity
Fixed
setting
Adjustable
Icn
Type of release/relay
L
S
Adjus- Fixed Adjustable settable
ting
Tripping
characteristic
Ik1
TIP_Kap3_E
Adjustable
release
Feeder circuit-breaker
1
1
Ik1
Circuitbreaker
for selective
protection
3W
Icn
t
Ik1 I
Distribution circuit-breaker
2
Ik2
Ik2
Circuit-breaker 3VF
for system
3VL
protection
Ik2
Ik2
Icn
t
Ik2 I
Circuitbreaker
for selective
protection
SEN- Ik2
TRON
WL
Icn
t
Ik2 I
Load circuit-breaker
4
5
Ik3
M
3~
Ik3
M
3~
Circuitbreaker
for motor
protection
3RV1
Circuit3RA
breaker
3TW
and direct-online starter
Ik3
Icn
t
Ik3
Ik3
Table 3/13 Power distribution with circuit-breakers without fuses
3/26
I
Icn
t
Ik3
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 27
3.2.4 Miniature CircuitBreakers (MCBs)

Task
Miniature circuit-breakers are mainly
designed for the protection of lines
and cables against overload and short
circuit, thus ensuring the protection
of electrical equipment against excessively high heating according to
the relevant standards, e.g.
DIN VDE 0100-430.
1st condition 2nd condition

Ib In I z
I2 1.45 Iz
Ib
Iz
In
1.45Iz
I2
I1
Iz
Permissible continuous load

current for one conductor
where the permanent temperature limit for the insulation is not exceeded
1.45 Iz Maximum permissible timelimited overload current

where a short-term exceeding of the continuous limit
temperature will not yet result in a safety-relevant reduction of insulation properties.
I2
I3
In
Rated current, i.e. the current for which the miniature

circuit-breaker has been rated and to which other parameters refer (set value)
I1
Small test current, i.e. the

current which does not result in tripping in defined
conditions
I2
Large test current, i.e. the

current which is broken
within one hour in defined
conditions (In 63 A)
I3
Tolerance limiting
I4
Seal-in current of the instantaneous electromagnetic

overcurrent release (shortcircuit release)
I5
Tripping current of the instantaneous electromagnetic

overcurrent release (shortcircuit release)
I3
Application
Miniature circuit-breakers are used in
all distribution networks, both for
commercial buildings and industrial
buildings. Due to a wide range of versions and accessories (e.g. auxiliary
contacts, fault signal contacts, opencircuit shunt releases), they are able
to meet the various requirements of
the most diverse areas of application.
I5
I4
Tripping characteristics
C Tripping characteristic A is particularly suitable for the protection of

transducers in measuring circuits,
for long-line circuits and where disconnection within 0.4 s is required
in accordance with HD 384.4.41 S2 /
IEC 60 364-4-41/
Rated operating current to

be expected, i.e. load-determined current during normal
operation
time t
Under certain conditions, MCBs in a

TN system also provide protection
against electrical stroke at excessively high contact voltage due to
wrong insulation, e.g. according to
HD 384.4.41/ IEC 364-4-41 /
DIN VDE 0100-410.
Four tripping characteristics A, B, C

and D are available for the actual type
of application corresponding to the
equipment being connected in the
circuit to be protected.
Ib
Fig. 3/17
Typical values of lines and protective devices
DIN VDE 0100-4110.

C Tripping characteristic B is the standard characteristic for wall-outlet
circuits in residential and commercial buildings.
3/27
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 28
C Tripping characteristic C is advantageous wherever equipment with

higher inrush currents, e.g.
luminaires and motors, is used.
C Tripping characteristic D is adapted
to highly pulse-generating equipment, such as transformers, solenoid valves or capacitors.
Operating method
Miniature circuit-breakers are protective switches for manual operation,
including overcurrent remote tripping
(via thermal overcurrent instantaneous release). Multi-pole devices
are coupled mechanically at the outside via handles and simultaneously
inside via their releases.
Standards
The international basic standard is
IEC 60898. The European standard
EN 60 898 and the German national
standard DIN VDE 0641-11 are based
upon it. Device sizes are described in
DIN 43880. For the protection against
personal injury, the disconnecting requirements according to the relevant
standards, e.g. HD 384.4.41 S2 /
IEC 60364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410
have to be met.
Versions
MCBs are available in many different
versions: 1-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole,
4-pole and with connected neutral
1-pole+N and 3-pole+N. Corresponding to the preferred series according
to IEC 60898 and DIN 43880, MCBs
are allocated the following rated
currents:
C Devices with 55 mm depth
0.3 A to 63 A
C Devices with 70 mm depth
0.3 A to 125 A
Depending on the device type, an
auxiliary switch (AS), fault-signal contact (FC), open-circuit shunt
release (ST), undervoltage release
(UR) or residual-current-operated
circuit-breaker (RCCB module) can
be retrofitted.
Auxiliary switches (AS) signal the
switching state of the MCB and indicate whether it has been switched
off manually or automatically. Faultsignal contacts (FC) indicate tripping
of the MCB due to overload or short
circuit.
Open-circuit shunt releases (ST) are
suitable for remote switching of
MCBs. Undervoltage releases (UR)
protect devices connected in the circuit against impacts of insufficiently
low supply voltage.
By fitting an RCCB module to an
MCB, you will receive an RCBO
assembly, which as a complete
system can be used for line protection as well as for protection against
electrically ignited fires and personal
injury in the event of direct or indirect contact voltages.
3/28
By connecting the AS and the FC

to an instabusEIB binary input,
the signals may also be read into an
instabus EIB system. When using an
instabus EIB binary output, the MCB
which is tripped via the open-circuit
shunt release (AA) can also be
remotely tripped via instabus EIB.
Depending on the device type,
miniature circuit-breakers by
Siemens have the following features:
C Excellent current limiting and selectivity characteristics
C Identical terminals on both sides
for optional infeed from the top or
bottom
C Installation and dismantling without the use of tools
C Rapid and easy removal from the
system
C Terminals safe-to-touch by fingers
or the back of the hand according
to VDE 0106-100 (VBG4)
C Combined terminals for simultaneous connection of busbars and
feeder cables
C Main switch characteristics according to EN 60 204 / IEC 60204/
VDE 0113
C Separate switch position indicator
AC current type MCBs are suitable
for all AC and three-phase networks
up to a voltage of 240/415 V and all
DC networks up to 60 V (1-pole) and
120 V (2-pole).
The MCB voltage rating is
230/400 V AC.
AC/DC current type MCBs may also
be used for 220 V DC (1-pole) and
440 V DC (2-pole).
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 29
Rated cross
section qn
mm2
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
25
35
Table 3/14
Rated current In of the MCB when

protecting
2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load
A
A
16
25
32
40
63
80
100
125
Iz (line)
Permissible continuous load current with
2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load
A
A
16
20
32
40
50
63
80
100
19.5
26
35
46
63
85
112
138
17.5
24
32
41
57
76
96
119
Allocation of miniature circuit-breakers to conductor cross sections

Example: flat-webbed cable, stranded cables on or in the wall, installation type C1) at an ambient temperature of 30C
1) Installation type C acc. to DIN VDE 0298-4 and DIN VDE 0100-430, Supplement 1. Cables are fixed in such a way
that the spacing between them and the wall is smaller than 0.3 times the outer cable diameter.
For line-overcurrent protection, the

MCBs usually have two independent
releases. In the event of overload, a
bimetal contact opens inverse-time
delayed corresponding to the current
value. If a certain threshold is exceeded in the event of a short circuit, however, an electro-magnetic
overcurrent release instantaneously
trips without delay. The tripping
range (time-current threshold zone)
of the MCB according to EN 60898 /
IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11 is
defined via parameters I1 to I5 (Fig.
3/18). The line parameters Ib and Iz
(see Fig. 3/17) are related to it.
300
timet
MCBs with
tripping characteristics B, C, D acc. to
EN 60 898 / IEC 60 898 / DIN VDE 0641-11
I1 I2
A1)
60
minutes
In order to avoid damaging of the

conductor insulation in case of faults,
temperatures must not rise above
certain values. For PVC insulation,
these values are 70 C permanently
or 160 C for a maximum of 5 s
(short circuit).
10
I1 (t > 1h)
1.13 x In 1.13 x In 1.13 x In 1.13 x In
I2 (t < 1h)
1.45 x In 1.45 x In 1.45 x In 1.45 x In
I4 (t > 0.1s)
2 x In
3 x In
5 x In
10 x In
I5 (t < 0.1s)
3 x In
5 x In
10 x In
20 x In
1)
Specifications in
compliance with
DIN VDE 0100-410
I3
1
10
5
seconds
TIP_Kap3_E
I3
1
0.4
A B
I4
Fig. 3/18
I5
0.1
0.01
Breaking condition
acc. to
HD 384.4.41S2/
IEC 60 364-4-41
DIN VDE 0100-410
I4
I5
I4
3 4
I5
I5
I4
6 8 10
20 30 40 60 80 100
x rated current In
MCB time-current limit ranges
3/29
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 30
When the IEC 60898 was published,

new characteristics B, C and D were
defined internationally. They were
also adopted in EN 60898 and
DIN VDE 0641-11.
The new tripping requirements of
MCBs facilitate their assignment to
conductor cross sections. In the relevant German standards, e.g.
DIN/VDE 0100-430, the following
conditions are listed:
1st condition
Ib In Iz (Rated current rule),
2nd condition
I2 1,45 Iz (Tripping current rule).
The 2nd condition automatically being fulfilled with the new characteristic curves due the fact that these
curves have been defined (Iz = In),
the MCB merely needs to be selected according to the simplified criterion In Iz .
Resulting from this, a new allocation
of rated currents for MCBs and conductor cross sections can be given
(see Table 3/14), related to an ambient temperature of 30 C, as it is
considered appropriate according to
DIN VDE 0100-430, Supplement 1,
and in dependence of the type of
installation and accumulation of
equipment.
Standard
Siemens MCBs are available with

the tripping characteristics B, C and
D, bearing, among other things, the
VDE mark based upon the CCA procedure (CENELEC-CertificationAgreement).
Figure 3/19 represents all tripping
characteristics. Due to the position
of the tripping bands, the following
features vary in intensity with a rising degree from curve A to D
C Current pulse withstand strength,
rising
C Permissible line and cable length
for the protection of persons, decreasing
Temperature impact
The tripping characteristics are standard defined at an ambient temperature of +30 C. At higher temperatures, the thermal tripping curve in
Fig. 3/18 shifts to the left, and to the
right at lower temperatures. This
means that tripping becomes effective even with lower currents present
(higher temperatures) or only with
higher currents (lower temperatures).
This has to be taken into account in
particular for an installation in hot
rooms, in encapsulated distribution
boards where, owing to the currentinduced heat losses of the built-in
devices, higher temperatures may
prevail and for distribution boards
installed outdoors. MCBs can be
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity classes
EN 60 898 / IEC 60 898 /

DIN VDE 0641-11
1,500 A
3,000 A
4,500 A
6,000 A
10,000 A
15,000 A
20,000 A
25,000 A
Table 3/15 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity classes for miniature circuit-breakers
3/30
used at temperatures ranging from

25 C to +55 C. The relative humidity may be 95%.
Resistance to climate
Miniature circuit-breakers by Siemens
are resistant to climate according to
IEC 68-2-30. They were successfully
tested in six climatic cycles.
Degree of protection
As MCBs are mainly installed in distribution boards, their degree of protection must meet the requirements
of the respective type of room.
MCBs without an encapsulation can
reach IP 30 according to EN 60529/
IEC 60529 / DIN VDE 0470-1 provided that they have sufficient terminal covers.
All MCBs are equipped with a snapon fixing for rapid fitting on 35-mm
wide standard mounting rails according to DIN EN 50022. Some versions
may additionally be screwed on
mounting plates.
Installation
Moreover, some type series are
available with a rapid wiring system
for manual handling without the use
of tools, which even enables the removal of individual MCBs from the
busbar system.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 31
[A2 s]
I2 t
Permissible value I 2 t of 1.5 mm2 cable
Transformer
Fuse 50 A
Fuse
B 16
MCB
104
Ik
[A]
i
i
Ieff
B 16
1
Sinusoidal semiwave
5
t
Fig. 3/19
10
[ms]
103
10-1
100
6
Ik
101
[kA]
Selectivity of MCBs with current limiting classes1[ 2 and3 towards back-up fuses.
Curve B16 applies to 16 A Siemens breakers, tripping characteristic B.

capacity
Besides a reliable adherence to characteristic curves, an important performance feature of MCBs is their
rated short-circuit breaking capacity.
It is divided into short-circuit breaking capacity classes and indicates up
to which level short-circuit currents
can be broken according to EN 60898 /
IEC 60898/ DIN VDE 0641-11 (Table
3/18). Depending on their design,
MCBs by Siemens have short-circuit
breaking capacity ratings up to
25,000 A and VDE approval (VDE is
the Association of German Electrical
Engineers).
Current limiting classes

As a selectivity indicator with regard
to upstream fuses, miniature circuitbreakers with characteristic B and C
up to 40 A are divided into three
current limiting classes according to
their current limiting capability.
For permissible let-through I 2t values, please refer to the standards
EN 60898/ IEC 60898 / DIN VDE
0641-11. For reasons of selectivity,
only Class 3 MCBs with a rated
switching capacity of at least 6,000 A
may be used in distribution boards
connected downstream of the meter
for residential and commercial buildings in compliance with the Technical Supply Conditions of German
power supply companies.
Devices must be labeled

6000
3
Selectivity
Selectivity means that only that protective device will trip in the event of
a fault which is closest to the fault
location in the course of the current
path. This enables maintaining energy flow in circuits which are connected in parallel. In the diagram in
Fig. 3/19, the current sequence in a
disconnection process is illustrated
with regard to current limiting
classes. MCBs of type B16 by
Siemens reduce the energy flow to
much lower values than defined for
current limiting class 3.
3/31
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 32
Figure 3/19 shows the selectivity

limits of MCBs with different current
limiting classes as the intersection of
the MCB tripping curve with the
melting curve of the fuse. The highly
effective current limitation of the
MCB also affects the high current
discrimination towards the upstream
fuse.
Characteristic B16 relates to 16 A
Siemens breakers, tripping characteristic B.
Back-up protection
If the short-circuit current at the
point where the MCB is installed
exceeds its rated switching capacity,
another short-circuit protecting device has to be connected upstream.
Without affecting the operability of
the breaker in such cases, the
switching capacity of such an assembly will be increased up to 50 kA.
Although circuit-breakers have a high

inherent rated breaking capacity,
they do not switch sufficiently current-limiting in the range of the MCB
switching capacity limit (6 kA/10 kA)
so that they cannot provide much
support. Therefore, miniature circuitbreakers with a rated current of 6 A
to 32 A are only protected by an upstream circuit-breaker (type 3VF1 to
3VF6 and SENTRON WL1/WL5) up
to the defined rated switching capacity of the MCB (back-up protection).
A more detailed description can be
found in Chapter 6.1.2.
Further product information on
MCBs by Siemens is contained in
the Siemens Catalog BETA Built-in
installation devices, Order No.
E86060-K8220-A101-A6-7600.
In some countries, circuit-breakers

rather than LV HRC fuses are connected upstream instead, which
depending on the type reduces the
combined switching capacity considerably.
3/32
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 33
3.3 Selectivity in LowVoltage Systems

Selectivity and selectivity types
With two series-connected protective
devices, full selectivity in the event of
a fault is achieved if only the protective device directly upstream of the
fault location disconnects from supply.
Selectivity types / selectivity limit
A distinction is made between two
types of selectivity:
C Partial selectivity acc. to
IEC 60947-2, 2.17.2:
Overcurrent discrimination of two
series-connected overcurrent pro
tection devices, where the loadside protective device takes over
the full protection task up to a defi
ned overcurrent level without the
other protective device being
active.
C Full selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2,
2.17.2:
Overcurrent discrimination of two
series-connected overcurrent pro
tection devices, where the loadside protective device takes over
the full protection task without the
other protective device being
active.
Selectivity types
C Current selectivity:
Selective disconnection by grading
the instantaneous short-circuit releases. Circuit-breakers with LI
characteristics.
C Time selectivity:
Grading of the configurable tripping
times (tsd in the S-part) of the
short-circuit releases. This applies
to standard as well as to optional
characteristic curves. Circuit-breakers with LSI characteristics. It is
often required in main distribution
boards and at transfer points using
devices of different manufacturers.
C Dynamic/energy selectivity
Selectivity based on the evaluation
of the let-through energy of the
downstream devices and the tripping energy of the upstream
protective device.
Selectivity determination
According to IEC 60947-2, Appendix
A, the determination or verification of
the desired type of selectivity is divided in two time ranges.
Time range > 100 ms:
The time range above 100 ms can be
analyzed by a comparison of characteristic curves in the L- or S-range,
taking the tolerances, required protective settings, curve representation
in identical scales etc. into account.
Time range < 100 ms:
According to Fig. A2 in this standard,
selectivity in this time range must be
verified by testing. Due to the fact
that the time and cost expense involved being very high, different devices being used in the power distribution system, selectivity limits can
often be obtained from renowned
equipment manufacturers only. In
practice, let-through currents are
therefore often compared to the operating or pickup currents or, the letthrough currents of the protective devices are compared to each other.
The prerequisite being that the relevant data is available from the equipment manufacturer and that it is analyzed thoroughly.
All characteristic curves must if not

already specified by the manufacturer
be assigned a scatter band to determine selectivity reliably.
In the case of switchgear, EN 609472 /
IEC 60 9472 / DIN VDE 0660101
specify a scatter of 20% for the instantaneous overcurrent release. The
operating times, which are sometimes considerably shorter at normal
operating temperatures, must be
taken into account for electromechanical overload releases.
Determination of the selectivity
limit
As a rule, all selectivity limits between two protective devices can be
determined by carrying out measurements or tests. These measurements
are virtually indispensable, particularly when assessing selectivity in the
event of a short circuit, owing to the
extremely rapid switching operations
when current-limiting protection
equipment is used.
The measurements can, however, be
very costly and complicated, therefore
many manufacturers publish selectivity tables for their switchgear (see
Table 3/16). When using SIMARIS
design, all criteria are automatically
considered.
Comparing characteristic curves

Three diagram types can be used for
comparing characteristics:
C Time-current diagram
C Let-through current diagram
C Let-through energy diagram
Since these characteristic curves are
compared over several orders of
magnitude, they are usually plotted
on log-log paper.
3/33
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 34
Upstream circuit-breakers
System protection
Characteristics In
li
Type
3VL3
TM
TM 160-200
3VL4
TM
200-250
160-200
200-250
250-315
1,000-2,000 1,200-2,500 1,000-2,000 1,250-2,500 1,575-3,150
Icn
40-100
40-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
Downstream circuit-breakers
[A]
[A]
kA
Selectivity limits (kA)
Type
5SY4
Characteristics
LI
6
10
13
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
T
T
T
T
9.2
8.6
7.5
7.7
6.7
6.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
9.0
T
T
T
T
9.1
8.6
7.6
7.6
6.6
6.2
T
T
T
T
8.8
8.0
6.4
6.4
6.4
6.1
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8.0
6
10
13
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
T
T
T
T
8.6
8.5
8.5
7.5
6.6
6.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
9.7
8.7
T
T
T
T
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.6
6.5
6.1
T
T
T
T
7.1
8.1
7.8
6.9
6.5
6.1
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8.0
6
10
13
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
T
T
T
T
9.2
8.6
7.5
7.7
6.7
6.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
14.3
11.1
11.1
9.0
T
T
T
T
9.1
8.6
7.6
7.6
6.6
6.2
T
T
12.9
11.5
8.8
8.0
6.4
6.4
6.4
6.1
T
T
T
T
T
T
12.4
11.8
10.7
8.0
6
10
13
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
T
T
T
T
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.5
6.6
6.2
T
T
T
T
T
14.7
14.7
13.0
9.7
8.7
T
T
T
T
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.6
6.5
6.1
T
14.3
11.1
11.1
7.1
8.1
7.8
6.9
6.5
6.1
T
T
T
T
T
13.7
13.4
12.0
10.2
8.0
Characteristics
LI
Type
5SY7
Characteristics
LI
Characteristics
Table 3/16
3/34
LI
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn acc. to IEC 60898

Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 35
3VL5
TM
315-400
250-315
315-400
400-500
500-630
3VL5
ETU 10/20
3VL6
ETU 10/20
3VL7
ETU 10/20
252-630
320-800
400-1,000
3VL8
ETU 10/20
500-1,250
640-1,600
2,000-4,000 1,575-3,150 2,000-4,000 2,500-5,000 3,150-6,500 788-6,300
1,000-6,400 1,250-11,000 1,563-12,500 2,000-14,400
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
50-100
50-100
50-100
50-100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
14.6
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
13.8
13.0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
14.2
13.3
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
13.4
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
14.2
12.0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
14.6
12.3
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T = Full selectivity
up to
Icn = rated shortcircuit breaking
capacity of the
lower-rated protective device
M = Electromagnetic release
TM = Thermomagnetic release
ETU = Electronic
tripping unit
3/35
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 36
System protection
3WL1
ETU25/27
Type
Series
Characteristics
IR
1,000-2,500 1,280-3,200 1,600-4,000 2,000-5,000 2,520-6,300

li
Icn
MCCB
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
55-100
80-100
100
100
100
[A]
[A]
[kA]
3VL1 Line Pro LI

TM
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
300
300
300
300
600
600
600
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,500
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
3VL2 Line Pro LI

TM
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
125-160
25-63
40-100
64-100
300-600
300-600
400-800
500-1,000
625-1,250
800-1,600
80-693
125-1,100
200-1,760
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
3VL2 Line Pro LI

TM
ETU
160-200
200-250
80-200
100-250
1,000-2,000
1,250-2,500
250-2,200
312-2,750
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
3VL4 Line Protect

TM
160-200
200-250
250-315
315-400
126-315
160-400
1,000-2,000
1,250-2,500
1,575-3,150
2,000-4,000
400-3,465
500-4,400
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
ETU
250-315
315-400
400-500
500-630
252-630
1,575-3,150
2,000-4,000
2,500-5,000
3,250-6,500
788-6,300
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
45-100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
3VL6 Line Pro LI
320-800
1,000-6,400
50-100
3VL7 Line Pro LI

ETU
400-1000
500-1250
1,250-11,000
1,562-12,500
50-100
50-100
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
3VL8 Line Pro LI
640-1,600
2,000-14,400
50-100
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
41.4
ETU
ETU
3VL5 Line Protect LI

TM
Table 3/16
3/36

Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2 (continued)
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 37
3LW1-3B
ETU45B
500-1,250
640-1,600
800-2,000
1,000-2,500
1,280-3,200
1,600-4,000
2,000-5,000
252-630
320-800
400-1,000
787.5-7560
1,000-9,600
1,250-12,000 1,562.5-15,000 2,000-19,200 2,500-24,000 3,125-30,000
4,000-38,400 50,000
50,000
50-65
100
100
100
100
55-100
80-100
100
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
55-100
up to
capacity of the
ETU = Electronic
tripping unit
3/37
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 38
System protection
3VL1
TM
Type
Series
Characteristics
IR
li
Circuit-breaker for
motor protection
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
[A]
300
300
300
300
600
600
600
Icn
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
[A]
[A]
[kA]
Selectivity limits [kA]
3RV1.1
LI
0.70-1.00
0.90-1.25
1.10-1.60
1.40-2.00
1.80-2.50
2.20-3.20
2.80-4.00
3.50-5.00
4.50-6.30
5.50-8.00
7-10
9-12
12
15
19
24
30
38
48
60
76
96
120
144
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
T
T
T
2.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
T
T
T
2.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
T
T
T
2.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
T
T
T
2.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
T
T
T
T
T
2.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.8
T
T
T
T
T
2.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.8
T
T
T
T
T
2.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.8
3RV1.2
LI
0.70-1.00
0.90-1.25
1.10-1.60
1.40-2.00
1.80-2.50
2.20-3.20
2.80-4.00
3.50-5.00
4.50-6.30
5.50-8.00
7-10
9-12.5
11-16
14-20
17-22
20-25
12
15
19
24
30
38
48
60
76
96
120
150
192
240
264
300
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
T
T
T
T
T
5.0
2.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
T
T
T
T
T
5.0
2.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.5
T
T
T
T
T
5.0
2.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.5
T
T
T
T
T
5.0
2.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
6.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
6.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
6.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
3RV1.3
LI
11-16
14-20
18-25
22-32
28-40
36-45
40-50
192
240
300
384
480
540
600
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
0.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
3RV1.4
LI
11-16
14-20
18-25
22-32
28-40
36-50
45-63
57-75
70-90
80-100
192
240
300
384
480
600
756
900
1080
1140
100
100
100
100
50-100
50-100
50-100
50-100
50-100
50-100
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
0.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
Table 3/16
3/38

Rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu acc. to IEC 60947-2 (continued)
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 39
Disconnector
3VL1
M
System protection
3VL2
TM
80
100
125
160
100
160
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
125-160
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,500
1,800
1,800
300-600
300-600
400-800
500-1,000 625-1,250
800-1,600
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-70
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
40-100
T
T
T
T
T
T
8.0
3.0
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
8.0
3.0
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
8.0
3.0
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
30
6
4
4
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
30.0
6.0
4.0
4.0
T
T
T
T
4.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
T
T
T
T
4.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
T
T
T
T
T
4.0
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
0.8
T
T
T
T
T
30.0
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
5.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.2
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
5.0
4.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
15.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
15.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
15.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
10.0
8.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
30.0
12.0
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
30.0
12.0
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
8.0
2.5
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.6
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
8.0
2.5
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.6
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20.0
6.0
4.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40.0
25.0
5.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40-50
30.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
6.0
4.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
10.0
6.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
10.0
6.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.6
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
0.6
0.6
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.2
0.6
0.6
4.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
0.6
0.6
0.6
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.2
0.6
0.6
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.2
0.6
0.6
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.2
0.6
0.6
5.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
8.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.0
0.6
0.6
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.2
0.6
0.6
3.0
2.0
2.0
1.2
0.6
0.6
up to
capacity of the
ETU = Electronic
tripping unit
3/39
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 40
[s]
ts
100 A
size 00
200 A
(160 A)
200 A
size 1
Ik =1300 A
1.4
3.3.1 Selectivity in
Radial Systems
50 A
50 A
100 A
Ik =1300 A
Selectivity between series-connected fuses

The incoming feeder lines and the
outgoing feeders of the busbar of a
distribution board carry different operating currents and, therefore, also
have different cross-sections. Consequently, they are usually protected by
fuses with different rated currents
which ensure selectivity on account
of the different operating behavior.
Selectivity between series-connected fuses with identical utilization categories
When fuses of the same utilization
category (e.g. gL or gG) are used, selectivity is ensured across the entire
overcurrent range up to the rated
breaking capacity (absolute selectivity) if the rated currents differ by a
factor of 1.6 or higher (Fig. 3/20).
The Joulean heat values (I 2t-values)
should be compared in case of high
short-circuit currents. In the example
shown, a 160 A LV HRC fuse would
also have absolute selectivity with
respect to a 100 A LV HRC fuse.
1.37 s
0.03
K1
101
a) Selective isolation
of short circuit K1
Fig. 3/20
104
I
[A]
Selectivity between series-connected LV HRC fuses with

identical utilization categories (example)
Selectivity between seriesconnected circuit-breakers

Selectivity by grading the operating currents of instantaneous overcurrent releases
(current grading)
Selectivity can be achieved by grading the operating currents of instantaneous overcurrent releases (I-releases) (Fig. 3/21). Prerequisites for
this are:
Current grading with different
short-circuit currents
The short-circuit currents in the event
of a short circuit at the respective locations of the circuit-breakers are
sufficiently different.
5-second breaking and lineprotection conditions

In complying with the 5-second
breaking condition specified in
HD 384.4.41 / IEC 60364-4-41 /
DIN VDE 0100-410 or the 5-second
line-protection condition specified in
DIN VDE 0100-430 (if line protection
cannot be provided in any other way),
103
1.3
b) Prearcing times where Ik =1300 A
Current grading with differently

configured I-releases
The rated currents and, therefore, the
I-release values of the upstream and
downstream circuit-breakers differ
accordingly.
3/40
102
the I-release must generally be set to

4,000 A so that even very small short
circuits are cleared at the input terminals of the downstream circuitbreaker Q1 within the specified time.
Only partial selectivity can be established by comparing characteristic
curves for current grading since the
increased appearance of broken lines
in the curve in the range < 100 ms,
which result from the complicated dynamic switching and tripping operations, does not permit conclusions to
be drawn with regard to selectivity.
Possible solution: dynamic
selectivity
Selectivity through circuit-breaker
coordination (dynamic selectivity)
With high-speed operations, e.g. in
the event of a short circuit, and the interaction of series-connected protection devices, the dynamic processes
in the circuit and in the electromechanical releases have a considerable effect on selectivity behavior,
particularly if current limiters are
used.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 41

[s]
Opening time t
104
102
Sr = 400 kVA
at 400 V,
50 Hz
min.
U kr = 4%
I r = 577 A
I k 15 KA
II
101
Q1
Ir = 600 A
(L-release)
Ie = 4000 A
(I-release)
Q2
I k = 10 kA
10
Q2
102
100
101
I (6000 A)1)
II
Q1
4.8 kA
100
Ir = 60 A
(L-release)
Ii = 720 A
(I-release)
I (720 A)
I (4000 A)
10-1
I
2.1 kA
a)
10-2
M
3~
Single-line diagram
Q1 Circuit-breaker for motor protection

(current-limiting)
4
5
102
103
104
2
Current I
5
[A]
b) Tripping curves
L Inverse-time delay overload release
I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release
Q2 Circuit-breaker (zero-current interrupter)

1)
Fig. 3/21
Maximum setting range
Current selectivity for two series-connected circuit-breakers at different short-circuit current levels (example)
Selectivity is also achieved if the

downstream current-limiting protection device trips so quickly that, although the let-through current does
momentarily exceed the operating
value of the upstream protection device, the mechanically slow release does not have time to trigger.
The let-through current depends on
the peak short-circuit current and current limiting characteristics.
Selectivity limits of two series-connected circuit-breakers
A maximum short-circuit value the
selectivity limit up to which the
downstream circuit-breaker can open
more quickly and alone, i.e. selectively, can be determined for each
switchgear assembly.
Table 3/16 shows an example of a selectivity table. The selectivity limit indicated in the table may be well above
the operating value of the instantaneous overcurrent release in the upstream circuit-breaker (see Fig. 3/22).
Irrespective of this, it is important to
check the selectivity in the event of
an overload by comparing the characteristic curves and by means of tripping times in accordance with the
relevant regulations.
Generally speaking, only partial selectivity is possible in the case of dynamic selectivity with short circuits.
This may be sufficient (full selectivity)
if the prospective maximum short-circuit current at the downstream protective device is lower than the established selectivity limit.
tivity provides a suitable possibility for

establishing full selectivity without
having to use switchgear with shorttime-delay overcurrent releases.
Selectivity by means of shorttime-delay overcurrent releases
(time grading)
Time grading by short-time-delay
releases
If current grading is not possible on
account of the requirements listed on
page 36 and cannot be achieved by
selecting the switchgear in accordance
with the selectivity tables (dynamic selectivity), selectivity can be provided by
time grading short-time delay overcurrent releases. This requires grading of
both the tripping delays and the
appropriate operating currents.
With partial selectivity, which usually

arises with current grading owing to
the clearance condition (see Fig.
3/20), consideration of dynamic selec-
3/41
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
Circuitbreaker
Power
supply
system
18:44 Uhr
Seite 42
Delay time t d
of S-release
3WL1
220 ms
3WL1
3VL
150 ms
3VL
80 ms
3VL
3RV
Instantaneous
M
Fig. 3/22
Required delay time settings for

electromagnetic short-time-delay
S-releases for selective short-circuit protection
Time grading with virtually

identical short-circuit currents
The upstream circuit-breaker is
equipped with short-time-delay overcurrent releases (S) so that, if a fault
occurs, only the downstream circuitbreaker disconnects the affected part
of the installation from the system.
3/42
Time grading can be implemented to

safeguard selectivity if the prospective short-circuit currents are almost
identical. This requires grading of
both the tripping delays and the
operating currents of the overcurrent
releases.
In addition to the diagram with the
four series-connected circuit-breakers, Fig. 3/22 also contains the associated grading diagram. The necessary
grading time, which allows for all
scatter bands, depends on the operating principle of the release and the
type of circuit-breaker.
Electronic S-releases
With electronic short-time-delay
overcurrent releases (S-releases), a
grading time of approximately 70 ms
to 100 ms from circuit-breaker to circuit-breaker is sufficient to allow for
all scatter bands.
Operating current
The operating current of the shorttime-delay overcurrent release should
be set to at least 1.45 times (twice
per 20% scatter, unless other values
are specified by the manufacturer)
the value of the downstream circuitbreaker.
Additional I-releases
In order to reduce the short-circuit
stress in the event of a dead short
circuit at the upstream circuit-breakers, they can be fitted with instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent
releases in addition to the short-time
delay releases (Fig. 3/23). The value
selected for the operating current of
the instantaneous electromagnetic
overcurrent releases must be high
enough to ensure that the releases
only operate in case of direct dead
short circuits and, under normal operating conditions, do not interfere with
selective grading.
Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)

A microprocessor-controlled shorttime grading control, also called
zone-selective interlocking, has
been developed for circuit-breakers to
prevent excessively long tripping
times when several circuit-breakers
are connected in series. This control
function allows the tripping delay to
be reduced to max. 50 ms for the circuit-breakers located upstream of the
short circuit.
The method of operation regarding
zone-selective interlocking is illustrated in Fig. 3/24. A short circuit at
K1 is detected by Q1, Q3, and Q5. If
ZSI is active, Q3 is temporarily disabled by Q1 and Q5 by Q3 by means
of appropriate communication lines.
Since Q1 does not receive any disabling signal, it trips after only 10 ms.
A short circuit at K2 is only detected
by Q5; since it does not receive any
disabling signal, it trips after only 50
ms. Without "ZSI", tripping would only
occur after 150 ms.
Selectivity between circuitbreaker and fuse
When considering selectivity in conjunction with fuses, a permissible
scatter band of 10% in the direction
of current flow must be allowed for in
the time-current characteristics.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 43

[s]
Opening time t
104
Sr = 1000 kVA
at 400 V,
50 Hz
U kr = 6%
I n = 1445 A
I k 24.1 kA
103
Q1
t d3 = 150 ms
n (20 kA)
Q3
Q2
Main
distribution
board
101
t d2 = 80 ms
Q2
100
I k = 17 kA
Subdistribution
board
S
t d3 =
150 ms
t d2 =
80 ms
-1
10
Q1
n
I k = 10 kA
10-2
102
M
~
Fig. 3/23
Q3
102
103
104
2
Current I
105
[A]
Selectivity between three series-connected circuit-breakers with limitation of short-circuit stress by means
of an additional I-release in circuit-breaker Q3
[s]
Opening time t
104
t d = 150 ms
A t ZSi = 50 ms
E
Q5
103
K2
Q1/Q2
Q3/Q4
Q5
102
Q3
A
E
t d = 80 ms
t ZSi = 50 ms Q4
A
E
t d = 10 ms
t ZSi = t d
101
td = 150 ms
100
Q1
A
E
A
E
Q2
td = 80 ms
tZSi
10-1
t d =10 ms
t ZSi = t d
Icn
td =
10 ms
10-2
K1
Communication lines
102
103
104
Current I
Fig. 3/24
105
[A]
Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) of series- or parallel-connected circuit-breakers (block diagram)
3/43
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 44
F1 Fuse
Q1 Circuit-breaker
Inverse-time-delay
L
overload delay
I
overcurrent release
tA Safety margin
Operating current of n release
Ii
F1 Q1
L
I
Q1
tA
The time-current characteristics

(scatter bands) do not touch
F1
I
Ii
Overload range I
Fig. 3/25
Selectivity between circuit-breaker and downstream fuse in overload range
F1 Q1
L
S
Q1
L
S
tA
Id
ts
td
t
L
Overload release
Short-time-delay overcurrent release
Safety margin
Operating current of s release
Prearcing time of fuse
Delay time of s release
t A 100 ms
F1
ts
Ik
Id
Fig. 3/26
Selectivity between circuit-breaker with LS-releases and

downstream fuse; short-circuit current range
downstream fuse
Selectivity between LI-releases
and fuses with very low rated
currents
In the overload range up to the operating current Ii of the delayed overcurrent release, partial selectivity is
achieved if the upper scatter band of
the fuse characteristic does not touch
3/44
td
the tripping characteristic of the fully

preloaded instantaneous overcurrent
release and maintains a safety margin
of tA 1 s (Fig. 3/25).
A reduction in the tripping time of up
to 25% must be allowed for at normal
operating temperatures (unless the
manufacturer states otherwise).
Absolute selectivity for circuit-breakers without short-time-delay overcurrent releases is achieved if the letthrough current of the fuse ID does
not reach the operating current of the
instantaneous overcurrent release
(please refer to current limiting diagram for LV HRC fuses in Electrical
Installations Handbook, Section
4.1.1). This is, however, only to be
expected for a fuse, the rated current
of which is very low compared with
the rated continuous current.
Selectivity ratios between LS-releases and fuses with relatively
high rated currents
Due to the dynamic processes that
take place in electromagnetic releases, absolute selectivity can also
be achieved with fuses, whose ID
briefly exceeds the operating current.
Once again, selectivity can only be
verified by means of appropriate
measurements of Ii. Absolute selectivity can be achieved by using circuitbreakers with short-time-delay overcurrent releases (S-releases) if the
safety margin for the operating current td between the upper scatter
band of the fuse characteristic and
the delay time of the S-release td is
selected so that tA 100 ms (Fig.
3/26).
Selectivity between fuse and
downstream circuit-breaker
Selectivity ratios in the
overload range
In order to achieve selectivity in the
overload range, a safety margin of
tA 1 s is required between the lower
scatter band of the fuse and the characteristic curve of the inverse-timedelay overload release (Fig. 3/27).
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 45
Q1
F1
t
L
In case of short circuits, it is important to remember that, after the releases in the circuit-breaker have
tripped, the fuse continues to be
heated during the arcing time. The selectivity limit lies approximately at the
point where a safety margin of 70 ms
between the lower scatter band of
the fuse and the operating time of the
instantaneous overcurrent release or
the delay time of the short-time-delay
overcurrent release is undershot.
Short-circuit range
A reliable and usually relatively high
selectivity limit for the short-circuit
range can be determined in the
I 2t- diagram. In this diagram, the maximum let-through I 2t value of the circuit-breaker is compared with the
minimum prearcing I 2t value of the
fuse (Fig. 2/28). Since these values
are maximum and minimum values,
the scatter bands are not necessary.
L
I
F1 Fuse
Q1 Circuit-breaker
L
Inverse-time-delay
overload release
I
overcurrent release
tA Safety margin
Operating current of I-release
Ii
F1
tA 1 s
The time-current characteristics

(scatter bands) do not touch
Q1
I
I
I
Overload range
Fig. 3/27
Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; overload range
Q1 Circuit-breaker
(max. let-through value)
F1 Fuse (min. prearcing value)
ISel Selectivity limit
F1
F1
I 2t
Q1
L
I
Q1
Ik
ISel
Selectivity range
Fig. 3/28
Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; short circuit
[s]
t
T1
Equal ratings
T2
Separate
Parallel
Q1
Q2 Q2+Q3
Base
104
L
Ik Part
103
Q2 L
S
I r = 600 A
I sd = 3,000 A
Q3 L
S
I
I k 10 kA
Ik Part
102
I k 10 kA
101
S
I r = 200 A
I i = 2,400 A
Q1 L
I
100
Ik
M
~
ttd2/3 150 ms
( 70 ms)
Ii
10
Fig. 3/29
Ik
-1
102
102
t1
2
4 6 103
4
3
104
6 I
4
[A]
Selectivity with two infeed transformers of the same rating and operating simultaneously.
Example with outgoing feeder in the center of the busbars.
3/45
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
T1
18:44 Uhr
T2
Seite 46
T3
I k Part 1
I k
< 30 kA
L
Q1 S
I
Ik
<15 kA
Ik
<15 kA
Q2
Q3
I k Part 2
Q1
Q2
Q3
I k
15 kA
Fig. 3/30
15 kA
Selectivity with three infeed transformers operating simultaneously
Selectivity with parallel infeeds

Improving selectivity with
parallel infeeds
With parallel infeeds to a busbar, the
total short-circuit current I K that occurs in the faulted outgoing feeder
comprises the partial short-circuit currents I k Part in the individual infeeds
and represents the base current in
the grading diagram (Fig. 3/29). This
is the case for all fault types.
Two identical infeeds
If a short circuit occurs in the outgoing feeder downstream of the circuitbreaker Q1, the total short-circuit
current I k of e.g. 20 kA flows via
this breaker, while the infeed circuitbreakers Q2 and Q3, with the outgoing feeder connected centrally to
the busbars and incoming feeders of
equal length, each carry only half this
current, i.e. 10 kA.
Parallel operation permits additional current selectivity by means
of a shift in the tripping curve (I i)
of the LS-releases of the infeed circuit-breaker
Fig. 3/31
Characteristic displacement factor

Since the total short-circuit current is
ideally distributed equally among the
two infeeds (ignoring the load currents in the other outgoing feeders)
with the outgoing feeder located at
the center of the busbars, the tripping
curve of circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3
can be shifted optimally to the right
along the current scale by a characteristic displacement factor of 2 up to
the line I k, which represents the
base current for this fault condition.
The result of this is selectivity both
with regard to time and also current.
If the characteristic curve of the individual circuit-breaker is used instead
of the shifted characteristic, the exact
short-circuit current (distribution)
which flows through the circuitbreaker must be taken into consideration.
With asymmetrical configurations and
with infeeds and outgoing feeders
located at the busbars, short-circuit
current distribution will differ according to the impedance ratio along the
incoming feeder lines.
Additional current selectivity with

parallel transformer operation
In the grading diagram, the tripping
curve of circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3
must, therefore, be considered in
relation to the base current of the
circuit-breaker Q1.
3/46
Short-circuit distribution via the

tie breaker Q3 with two infeeds
Q1 and Q2
Reduced selectivity with LV HRC

fuses with a rating of 630 to 1,000 A
near an infeed
This is particularly significant in the
event of fused outgoing circuits with
high current ratings, e.g. 630 to
1,000 A. It is important to ensure that
a safety margin of 100 ms between
the tripping characteristic of the S-release and the prearcing-time/current
characteristic of the LV HRC fuse is
provided not only with parallel operation, but also with individual transformer operation.
When setting the releases of circuitbreakers Q1, Q2 and Q3, it must be
ensured that selectivity is also
achieved for operation with one
transformer and for all short-circuit
currents (single- to three-phase).
For cost-related reasons, S-releases
for the feeder circuit-breakers must
also be provided for low and medium
rated fuse currents as the resulting
current selectivity of I-releases is
insufficient.
Three identical infeeds
With parallel operation of three transformers, the selectivity ratios will,
owing to the additional current selectivity, be more favorable than with
two units since the characteristic displacement factor is > 2 and < 3.
Once again, LS-releases are required
for the circuit-breakers in the infeeds
in order to achieve unequivocal selectivity ratios.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 47

a) Fault at the outgoing feeder of the
centre busbar section
Q1
I k Part 1
Q4
Q2
I k Part 2
b) Fault at the outgoing feeder of the

outer busbar section
Q3
I k Part
Q5
3 .I k
I k
Fig. 3/32
Q1
Q2
Q4
I k Part
Q3
Q5
2 .I
k Part
I k
Distribution of the short-circuit currents used in determining the settings for the overcurrent release in the tie breakers Q4 and Q5 with three infeeds and faults a and b
in the outgoing feeders of different busbar sections
Additional I-release necessary

Furthermore, it is necessary to provide additional I-releases to allow a
fault between the transformer and
feeder circuit-breaker to be detected
as shown in Fig. 3/30. For this purpose, the S-releases of circuit-breakers Q1 to Q3 must be set to a value
< I k and the I-releases to a value
> I k, but < I k. The highest and lowest fault currents are important here.
Due to the I-releases, only the
faulted transformer infeed will trip
on the high-voltage and low-voltage
side. The circuit-breakers in the
sound infeeds remain operative.
Parallel-connected infeeds via
tie breakers
Protective functions under
fault conditions
Tie breakers must perform the following protective functions in fault
situations:
C instantaneous release with faults
in the vicinity of the busbars and
C relief of outgoing feeders of the
effects of high total short-circuit
currents.
Selecting the circuit-breakers

The type of device used in the outgoing feeders and the selectivity ratios
depend primarily on whether
circuit-breakers with current-zero
cut-off, i.e. without current limiting,
or with current limiting are used as
tie breakers.
Instantaneous, current-limiting tie
breakers relieve the outgoing circuits
of the effects of high unlimited total
peak short-circuit currents I p and,
therefore, permit the use of less
complex and less expensive circuitbreakers.
Note on setting the overcurrent
releases in tie breakers
The values set for the overcurrent
releases must be as high as possible
in order to prevent operational interference caused by the tie breakers
opening at relatively low short-circuit
currents, e.g. in the outgoing feeders
of the sub-distribution boards.
With two infeeds
With two infeeds and depending on
the fault location (left or right busbar
section or feeder), only the associated partial short-circuit current
(e.g. I k Part 2) flows through the
tie breaker Q3 as shown in Fig. 3/31.
With three infeeds and fault

With three infeeds, the ratios are
different according to which of the
outgoing feeders shown in Fig. 3/32a
and b is faulted.
In the center busbar section
If a fault occurs at the outgoing
feeder of the center busbar section
(Fig. 3/32a), approximately equal partial short-circuit currents flow through
the tie breakers Q4 and Q5.
In the outer busbar section
If a fault occurs at the outgoing
feeder of the outer busbar section,
(Fig. 3/32b), two partial short-circuit
currents flow through the tie breaker Q4.
Computer-assisted selectivity check
Precise values for the short-circuit currents flowing through the tie breakers
are required to permit optimum setting of the overcurrent releases. They
provide information concerning selective characteristics with a large number of different fault currents and are
determined and evaluated with the aid
of a computer program.
Selectivity and undervoltage
protection
If a short circuit occurs, the system
voltage collapses to a residual voltage
at the short-circuit location. The magnitude of the residual voltage depends on the fault impedance. With a
dead short circuit, the fault impedance and, therefore, the voltage at
the short-circuit location drops to almost zero. Generally speaking, however, arcs with arc-drop voltages between approximately 30 V and 70 V
occur with short circuits.
3/47
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 48
a) Short circuit at sub-distribution board
b) Short circuit at main distribution board
Q3
Q3
0.5.U
0.13.Ue
Main distribution
board
Q2
td
70 ms
80 m
3 x 95 mm2 Cu
0.13.Ue
Q2
K2
Sub-distribution
board
Q1
Q1
td = 0
K1
Fig. 3/33
Ue Rated operating
current
td Delay time
Voltage ratios for short-circuited LV switchgear with a main and sub-distribution board
Ik1
F1
F2
Ik2
Ik3
F3
Ik3 = Ik1+Ik2
K1
Ik1+Ik2+Ik4
Ik
Ik4
Ik
b
Ik
Fig. 3/34
3/48
Short-circuited cable with its two

incoming feeder nodes a and b
Fig. 3/35
Example of a meshed system with multi-phase infeed
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 49
This voltage, starting at the fault location, increases proportionately to the

intermediate impedance with increasing proximity to the power source.
Fig. 3/33 illustrates the voltage ratios
in LV switchgear with a dead short
circuit.
If a short circuit occurs at K1 (Fig. 3/33a),
the rated operating voltage Ue drops
to 0.13 Ue at the busbar of the subdistribution board and to 0.5 Ue at
the busbar of the main distribution
board. The next upstream circuitbreaker Q1 clears the fault. Depending on the size and type of the circuitbreaker, the total breaking time is
30 ms for zero-current interrupters
and a maximum of 10 ms for currentlimiting circuit-breakers.
If a short-circuit occurs at K2 (Fig. 3/33b),
the circuit-breaker Q2 opens. It is
equipped with a short-time-delay
overcurrent release (S). The delay
time is at least 70 ms. During this
time, the rated operating voltage at
the busbar of the main distribution
board is reduced to 0.13 Ue.
If the rated operating voltage drops to
0.7 0.35 times this value and the
voltage reduction lasts longer than approximately 20 ms, all of the circuitbreakers with undervoltage releases
open. All contactors also open if the
rated control supply voltage collapses
to below 75% of its rated value for
longer than 5 to 30 ms.
Tripping delay for contactors

and undervoltage releases
Undervoltage releases and contactors
with tripping delay are required to ensure that the selective overcurrent protection is not interrupted prematurely.
This is not necessary if current-limiting
circuit-breakers with a maximum total
clearing time of 10 ms are used.
3.3.2 Selectivity in
Meshed Systems
Two selectivity functions must be
performed in meshed systems:
1. Only the short-circuited cable may
be disconnected from the system.
2. If a short-circuit occurs at the terminals of an infeed transformer,
only the faulted terminal may be
disconnected from the system.
Node fuses
The nodes of a meshed LV system
are normally equipped with cables
with the same cross-section and with
LV HRC fuses of utilization category
gL of the same type and rated current
(Fig. 3/34).
If a short circuit (K1) occurs along
the meshed system cable, the shortcircuit currents I k3 and I k4 flow to the
fault location. Short-circuit current I k3
from node a comprises the partial
currents I k1 and I k2 which may differ
greatly depending on the impedance
ratios.
.
Permissible current ratio

Selectivity of the fuses at node a is
achieved if fuse F3, through which
the total current I k3 flows, melts and
fuse F1 or F2, through which the partial short-circuit current I k1 or I k2
flows, remain operative. In the case
of Siemens LV HRC fuses, the permissible current ratio I k1 /(I k1 + I k2)
for high short-circuit currents is 0.8.
Power transformers in meshed
systems
Feeder circuit-breaker with
network master relay
In multi-phase meshed systems
(Fig. 3/35), i.e. infeed via several MV
lines and transformers, power feedback from the LV system to the fault
location shall be prevented if a fault
occurs in a transformer substation or
MV line. A network master relay
(reverse power relay) and a circuitbreaker for mesh-connected systems are required for this purpose.
This is a three-pole circuit-breaker,
possibly without overcurrent release,
but with a capacitor-delayed shunt release (open-circuit shunt release with
memory).
If a short circuit occurs on the HV
side of the transformer (K1) or between the transformer and network
circuit-breaker (K2) or along the cable
(K3) (Fig. 3/36), the HV HRC fuse operates on the HV side; on the LV side,
power flows back to the fault location
via the network circuit-breaker.
The open-circuit shunt release receives the tripping pulse from the
network master relay. The fault location is thus selectively disconnected
from the power system.
3/49
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 50
Network circuit-breaker
without S-release
If the outgoing transformer feeders
are protected by network master relays, no S-release is provided or the
value set for this release is so high
that the thermal overload capability of
the transformer can be fully utilized.
120
K3
Network master relays are used in

conjunction with circuit-breakers for
mesh-connected systems.
In multi-feed LV power systems, they
ensure fast, selective disconnection
of a damaged MV cable from the
connected transformer substations.
The relay detects a reversal in the
flow of power if, in the event of a
short circuit in an MV feeder cable of
the meshed system, high currents
flow through the LV power system
and the transformers of the damaged
MV cable to the fault location.
3/50
0.6.Ue
t
100
0.3.Ue
80
Network master relays
To prevent errors, however, the network master relay permits circulating

currents up to the same value as the
rated current at the rated voltage
(setting can be varied between
2 A and 6 A using the spring bias).
Fig. 3/37 shows the tripping characteristic for the standard setting of
6 A and for various other voltages.
Ue
ms
60
K1
40
K2
Fig. 3/36
20
a HV HRC fuses
b Network circuitbreaker with network
master relay
c Node fuses
Single-line diagram showing the

infeed point of a meshed LV
power system
Circuit-breakers for
mesh-connected networks
Circuit-breaker selection
When selecting this circuit-breaker
and its rated switching capacity, it is
important to remember that the highest short-circuit current must be expected in the event of a short circuit
between the transformer terminals
and the circuit-breaker. In this case,
the total short-circuit current of all
the infeed points flows through the
meshed system and the circuitbreaker to the short-circuit location.
20
40
60
Fig. 3/37
Tripping characteristic of the network master relay 7RM with standard setting (6 A)
The total short-circuit current may be

higher than the short-circuit current
of the relevant transformer.
Technical details regarding network
master relays and circuit-breakers for
mesh-connected networks can be
found in the literature supplied by the
manufacturer.
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 51
3.4 Protection of
Capacitors
According to IEC 60358 / VDE 0560
Part 4, capacitor units must be suitable for continuous operation with a
current whose r.m.s. value does not
exceed 1.3 times the current which
flows with a sinusoidal voltage and
rated frequency.
Owing to the above-mentioned dimensioning requirements, no overload protection is provided for capacitor units in the majority of cases
Capacitors in systems with
harmonic components
The capacitors can only be overloaded in systems with devices which
generate high harmonics (e.g. generators and converter-fed drives). The
capacitors, together with the seriesconnected transformer and short-circuit reactance of the primary system,
form an anti-resonant circuit. Resonance phenomena occur if the natural
frequency of the resonant circuit
matches or is close to the frequency
of a harmonic current generated by
the power converter.
Reactor-connected capacitors
The capacitors must be provided with
reactors to prevent resonance (see
Electrical Installations Handbook,
Section 1.6). An LC resonant circuit,
whose resonance frequency is below
the lowest harmonic component
(250 Hz) in the load current, is used
instead of the capacitor. The capacitor unit is thus inductive for all harmonic currents that occur in the load
current and can, therefore, no longer
form a resonant circuit with the
system reactance.
Settings for overload relays
If thermal time-delay overload relays
are used to provide protection against
overcurrents, the tripping value can be
1.3 to 1.43 times the rated current of
the capacitor since, allowing for the
permissible capacitance deviation, the
capacitor current can be 1.1 1.3 = 1.43
times the rated capacitor current.
Harmonics suppression by
means of filter circuits
An alternative solution would be to
use filter circuits to remove the majority of harmonics from the primary
system (see Electrical Installations
Handbook, Sections 1.6.3 and 1.6.4).
The filter circuits are also series resonant circuits which, unlike the reactorconnected capacitors, are tuned precisely to the frequencies of the harmonic currents to be filtered. As a
result, the impedance is almost zero.
LV HRC fuses with utilization category gL are normally used in capacitor
units for short-circuit protection.
A rated fuse current of 1.6 to 1.7 times
the rated capacitor current is required
to prevent the fuses from tripping in
the overload range and when the capacitors switch.
With transformer-heated overload

relays or releases, a higher secondary
current flows due to the changed
transformation ratio of the transformers caused by the harmonic components. This may result in premature
tripping.
3/51
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 52
3.5 Protection of
Distribution Transformers
The following devices are used for
protection tasks in medium-voltage
systems:
HV HRC fuses
High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity
(HV HRC) fuses usually used in conjunction with switch-disconnectors to
protect radial feeders and transformers against short circuits.
Circuit-breakers with protection
Protection relays
Protection relays connected to current transformers (protection core)
can be used to perform all protectionrelated tasks irrespective of the magnitude of the short-circuit currents
and rated operating currents of the
required circuit-breakers.
Digital protection
Modern protection equipment is
controlled by microprocessors (digital
protection) and supports all of the
protective functions required for a
medium-voltage outgoing feeder.
Protection as component of the
substation control and protection
system
Digital protection also allows operating and fault data, which can be called
up via serial data interfaces, to be collected and stored. Digital protection
can, therefore, be incorporated in
substation control and protection
systems as an autonomous
component.
Current transformer rating for

protection purposes
Current transformers are subject to
the standards DIN VDE 0414, Parts 1
to 3, as well as IEC 185 and IEC 186.
Current transformers with 5P or 10P
cores must be used for connecting
protection equipment.
The required rated output and overcurrent factor must be determined on
the basis of the information provided
in the protection relay descriptions.
Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection via current
transformers for protecting cables
and transformer feeders can be either
two-phase or three-phase. The neutral-point connection of the mediumvoltage network must be considered
here.
Relay operating currents with
emergency generator operation
Care should be taken to ensure that
the operating currents of the protection relays provided for normal system operation are also attained in the
event of faults during emergency operation using generators with relatively low rated outputs.
Three-phase time-overcurrent
protection
In the interests of future system
safety, it is advisable to configure the
time-overcurrent protection as a threephase system, irrespective of the
method of neutral-point connection.
Standards for protection relays

Static protection relays must comply
with the standards IEC 255 and
DIN VDE 0435-303.
3/52
3.5.1 Protection with

Overreaching Selectivity
Ideally, transformer feeders should
be protected by:
HV HRC fuses
(HV HRC) fuses used in conjunction
with switch-disconnectors for rated
transformer outputs of up to approx.
1,250 kVA for low switching rates, or
Circuit-breakers with protection
Circuit-breakers with protection (see
page 54) from approx. 800 kVA and
for high switching rates; also when
several circuit-breakers with S-releases are arranged in series on the
low-voltage side and selectivity is not
possible with upstream HV HRC
fuses.
The anticipated selectivity ratios
must, therefore, be checked before
the protection scheme is chosen and
dimensioned.
Protection by means of
HV HRC fuses
Dimensioning HV HRC fuses
The rated current of the HV HRC
fuses specified by the manufacturers
for the rated output of each transformer should be used when dimensioning the HV HRC fuses. The lowest rated current is dictated by the
rush currents generated when the
transformers are energized and is
1.5 to 2 times the rated transformer
currents.
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 53
Minimum breaking current I a min

For the determination of the maximum rated current it must be observed that, with short circuits on a
transformers secondary side, the
minimum breaking current I a min of
the fuse must be exceeded, affecting
even the installation's busbar system.
Generally, the load on I a min is 4 to 5
times that of the transformers rated
current. Between these limit values,
the fuse link can be chosen according
to selectivity.
Required
back-up
protection
zones
HV HRC
HV HRC
LV HRC
HV HRC
3WL
3WL
a
400 V
LV HRC
LV HRC
LV HRC
b
S 7RM network master relay
Fig. 3/38
Protection zones of HV HRC back-up fuses necessary for various protection devices
used on the low-voltage side
40
Back-up protection with

transmission range
HV HRC fuses must ensure sufficient
back-up protection in case of a possible failure of the downstream protective device. The required transmission range can be seen in Fig. 3/38,
illustrated for three circuit diagrams.
The working range of the back-up
protection increases with the decreasing protective rated current of
the fuse.
20
tp
10
min
400 A
630 A
10 kV
Base Ik < 9.5 kA
TIP_Kap3_E
100 A
6
4
F3
400 kVA
Ukr 6%
F2
1
40
F1
20
F1
s
F2
6
4
Rated currents of LV HRC fuses must

be selected in such a way that, between the established maximum
short-circuit current near the low-voltage sides busbar system (converted
to the medium-voltage side) and the
minimum breaking current I a min (circle in the melting current characteristic), a minimum safety clearance of
25% is observed from I a min to the
transformers short-circuit current I k
(see Fig. 3/39 to 3/43).
630 A
0.4 kV
400 A
F3
10
Safety clearances between the

melting current characteristic of
HV HRC fuses and other protective
devices
630 A
I k < 9.5 kA
>25% Safety margin
Ia min
600
400
200
ms
100
60
40
20
10
6
A at 0.4 kV
1000
A at 10 kV
40
2000 3000
80
120
5000 7500 10000

200
400
20000
50000
800
2000
I
t p Prearcing time for fuses

Minimum breaking current Ia min of HV HRC fuse
Fig. 3/39
Example showing grading of HV HRC with LV HRC fuses in infeed circuits
3/53
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 54
40
20
F1
630 A
10
min
100 A
F2
(160) A
6
4
Base Ik <15
t k, t vs
10 kV
2
1
40
F2
1000/ . . A
Ring interconnection Q1
630 A
Ik R.1
100 A
(optionally
160 A)
S n = 630 kVA
Ukr = 6%
Ik max = 15 kA
Ring interconnection
IkT
630 A
Ik R.2
0.4 kV
Q1
F1
630 A
20
s
Ik=
Ik T+Ik R.1+Ik R.2
10
25% Safety margin

Ia min
required
6
4
Scatter band
2
Reverse
protection
1
600
400
current 630 A) are mainly used for

transformers with rated outputs of up
to 400 kVA; circuit-breakers with
overcurrent releases are used on the
low-voltage side for rated outputs
500 kVA.
Tangent prearcing time/current
characteristics F2 (LV HRC) and F3
(HV HRC) referred to 0.4 kV and
possible tripping of the switch disconnector on the medium-voltage side by
the upstream HV HRC fuse are acceptable, since both fuses protect the
same system element and interruption will occur in all cases (restricted
selectivity). HV HRC fuses with higher
rated currents (e.g. 160 A as shown
in Fig. 3/40) would not be suitable
here, since their minimum breaking
current I a min is 12 kA, i.e. well above
the short-circuit current I k which the
transformer can carry (max. 9.5 kA).
200
ms
Grading of HV HRC fuses with

circuit-breakers for mesh-connected systems and downstream
LV HRC fuses
100
60
40
20
10
6
A at 0.4 kV
1000
A at 10 kV
40
tk
t vs
Ik
Q1
Fig. 3/40
2000 3000
80
5000
120
200
400
20000
50000
800
2000
I
Command time for network master relay of circuit-breaker Q1
Virtual prearcing time of fuses
Short-circuit current with individual transformer operation
Tripping characteristic for network master relay S set to 1.2 In transf. = 1,200 A
Example showing grading with HV HRC fuses network master relay in the
infeed and LV HRC fuses in the outgoing feeder; transformer rating 630 kVA
Further data on safety margins for

gradings as shown in Fig. 3/38, case
b and c, for example, can be found in
the following sections.
3/54
10000
Grading of HV with LV HRC fuses

in infeed circuits
Grading with LV HRC fuses
Example of a transformer with a rated
output of 400 kVA (Fig. 3/39): LV HRC
fuse switch-disconnectors or motor
fuse-disconnectors (maximum rated
Selecting the HV HRC fuse rating

In meshed systems with several
transformers and parallel system operation, the LV feeder circuit-breakers
are not fitted with overcurrent releases (LS) but, instead, have separate 7RM19 network master relays
which only respond to reverse currents.
Given the absence of the LS-release
as a grading element, the back-up
protection range of the HV HRC fuse
must be extended as shown in Fig.
3/38, case b. In Fig. 3/40, this is
achieved by selecting the HV HRC
fuse with the lower current rating.
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 55
The proximity of the characteristics

F1 and F2 does not have a detrimental effect on selectivity in this case,
since the ring interconnections also
function as infeeds in the event of a
fault, which means that selectivity is
improved as a result of the total
short-circuit current I k in the feeder
being distributed among the infeeds
(with the two ring interconnections in
Fig. 3/40). This is possible because a
higher short-circuit current (I k) flows
through the LV HRC fuse F1 than
through the HV HRC fuse F2 (I kT).
Grading of HV HRC fuses with lowvoltage circuit-breakers and downstream LV HRC fuses using a
630 kVA transformer as an example
Requirements
Selectivity is required between the
protection devices of the feeders and
those of the infeed, which form a
functional unit; a safety margin of at
least 100 ms is necessary between
the characteristic of an LV HRC fuse
and that of an S-release (Fig. 3/41).
Between LV HRC fuses and
S-releases
Thus, selectivity is achieved with the
400 A LV HRC fuse-link used in the
example. The setting and delay time
td must be adjusted with the S-release (6 kA setting).
In such cases, selectivity can be
achieved more easily using downstream
circuit-breakers, e.g. SENTRON WL
(Fig. 3/43), or using a considerably
more powerful transformer, the associated circuit-breaker enables the S-release to be set to a higher value.
40
10 kV
20
t s, td
10
min
F1
400 A
6
4
(630 A)
F2
100 A (160 A)
Not
selective
Base Ik <15 kA
TIP_Kap3_E
F2
L
Q1 S
100 A
(optional 160 A)
630 kVA
Ukr 6%
3 WL1
1000 A
t d=220 ms
Q1
1
40
F1
0.4 kV
400 (630) A
20
s
Selective
10
I sd=6 kA
6
4
Ik <15 kA
Ia min
25% Safety margin

(requirement)
Scatter band
2
Setting
range S
Q1
1
600
400
td
Safety margin 100 ms
200
ms

(required)
100
60
40
20
10
6
A at 0.4 kV
1000
A at 10 kV
40
2000 3000
80
120
5000
200
10000
400
tn Prearcing time for fuses

t d Delay time for S-release
Fig. 3/41
20000
50000
800
2000
I
Example showing the grading of HV HRC fuses F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 and

downstream LV HRC fuse F1 in the outgoing feeder
3/55
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 56
Between HV HRC fuses

and S-releases
Since the protection devices in the infeed form a functional unit, a restriction in selectivity in the upper shortcircuit current range is accepted in
the case of faults in the vicinity of the
busbars (as indicated by the circle in
the diagram) for the 100 A HV HRC
fuse in Fig. 3/42.
40
t s, tv
min
630 A
F2
not selective
100 A (160 A)
(choose Q1)
6
4
100 A
(optionally 160 A)
630 kVA
Ukr 6%
3 WL1
1000 A
t d2=220 ms
Q2
1
40
F1
630 A
20
I sd =6 kA
Q2
10
F2
L
Q2 S
6
4
Q1
Ik <15 kA
Ia min
0.4 kV
3 WL1
630 A
td1=
100 ms
25% Safety margin

(required)
Scatter band
L characteristic Q1
not shown
I sd =3.6 kA
1
600
400
selective
200
ms
100
60
40
Scatter band of HV HRC fuses

According to EN 60 282-1/ DIN
VDE 0670-4, the scatter band width
of HV HRC fuse-links can be 20%.
Siemens HV HRC fuse-links have a
scatter band width of 10%.
3/56
F1
10
Safety margin between HV HRC

fuse and S-release
If, on the other hand, selectivity is required, e.g. with different switching
priorities at the two voltage levels or
in order to avoid the medium-voltage
switchgear having to be switched off,
for example, when HV HRC fuses are
replaced, there should be a safety
margin of approximately 100 ms on
the base line I k between the characteristic curve of the S-release and the
left-hand limit of the scatter band of
the prearcing-time/current characteristic of the HV HRC fuse.
Result:
When selecting circuit-breakers instead of low-voltage fuses, selectivity
can easily be attained, overlapping of
characteristics Q1 and F2 should be
avoided, as it could result in erroneous tripping. For such cases, HV
HRC fuse-links with a higher rated
current should be chosen.
10 kV
20
Base Ik <15 kA
TIP_Kap3_E
t d2=220 ms
td2
Safety margin
100 ms
t d1=100 ms
td1
More pronounced intersection of

Q1 and F2 must be avoided if possible
20
10
6
A at 0.4 kV
1000
A at 10 kV
40
2000 3000
80
120
5000
200
10000
400
20000
50000
800
2000
tn Prearcing time for fuses

t d1 Delay time for S-release (Q1)
t d2 Delay time for S-release (Q2)
Minimum breaking current Ia min
Fig. 3/42
Example showing the grading of HV HRC fuses F2 with circuit-breaker Q2

and downstream circuit-breaker Q1 with LS-release in the outgoing feeder
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 57
40
Base IkT <15 kA (individual operation)
TIP_Kap3_E
20
t s, td,t o
F1
400 A
10
min
6
4
Q3
I> = 200 A
L Q2
1
40
20
S = 6 kA
Q2
10
6
4
10 kV
630 A
tI > 500 ms
Q3
I>
I>>
60/1 A
630 kVA
U kr 6%
3 WL
1000 A
t d = 220 ms
H.V.
0.4 kV
L
F1
I
400 A
Q1
630 A
Ik <15 kA
L
Q2 S
Setting
range S
2
1
tc > 500 ms
600
400
Safety margin
300 ms
t d 220 ms
200
ms
Q2
Safety margin
100 ms
100
I>> = 792 A
Q3
tc 50 ms
60
40
I
6 kA
20
10
Q1 t o
6
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
to
td
tvs
tc
Fig. 3/43
2,000 3,000 5,000

80
120
200
Opening time of circuit-breaker (Q1)

Delay time of S release (Q2)
Prearcing time of fuses F1
Command time of DMT protection (Q3)
10,000
400
20,000
50.000
800
2,000
I
Example showing the grading of circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), SENTRON
WL circuit-breaker, 1000 A with LS-releases (Q2) and downstream outgoing feeders,
e.g. 400 A LV HRC fuse (F1) and 630 A distribution circuit-breaker (Q1) in a 630 kVA
transformer feeder
Protection by means of circuitbreakers with definite-time overcurrent protection (DMT)

Requirement
The two feeder circuit-breakers (in
Fig. 3/43) form a functional unit and
require selectivity with respect to
the protection devices on the lowvoltage side.
Outgoing feeders with
LV HRC fuses
If low-voltage fuses are connected
downstream, selectivity with circuitbreakers with mechanical releases
(3WF) can only be achieved up to a
certain maximum fuse current rating;
in the example, Q2 with mechanical
S-releases (setting range 3 to 6 kA)
400 A for F1. Larger LV HRC fuses
are also selective if SENTRON WL
circuit-breakers with an S-release
range of 2 to 12 I r are used.
Outgoing feeders with mixed
components
If outgoing feeders with mixed components are used, the safety margin
of at least 100 ms relative to the
largest permissible LV HRC fuse-link
for F1 is the crucial factor in determining the setting for the S-release of
Q2. In the case of mechanical S-releases with the highest current setting of 6 kA, this results in a delay
time td of 220 ms for the smallest
permissible safety margin of 100 ms.
This determines the starting point for
all subsequent upward and downward gradings in the diagram.
circuit-breaker
Since selectivity cannot be achieved
using LV HRC fuses with a higher
current rating (see Fig. 3/41), circuitbreakers with time or, if possible,
current grading should be used.
3/57
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 58
Based on the assumption that verification of the short-circuit currents

would show that current grading
would be possible, a 630 A (Q1) distribution circuit-breaker with LI-releases was selected.
Intersection of the characteristics Q2
and Q3 in the middle short-circuit
range is permissible because:
C the L-release of the low-voltage
circuit-breaker Q1 (not shown in
Fig. 3/43) protects the transformer
against overloading, which only
occurs in the range 11.3 times the
rated current of the transformer;
C there is a safety margin of 150 ms
(300 ms in the example shown in
Fig. 3/43) between the I > tripping
value of the DMT protection and
the LV HRC fuse characteristic F1
and selectivity is, therefore,
achieved.
Higher rated transformer outputs
and broader setting ranges for the
S-release of Q2 make it easier for the
characteristic Q3 I > to be shifted to
the left of the characteristic Q2 s.
This also provides a certain degree of
back-up protection with respect to
the L-release of circuit-breaker Q2.
DMT protection
Nowadays, digital devices are used to
provide DMT protection in practically
all applications. They have broader
setting ranges, allow a choice between definite-time and inverse-time
overcurrent protection or overload
protection, provide a greater and
more consistent level of measuring
accuracy and are self-monitoring.
3/58
Selecting current transformers

for DMT protection
The following points should be observed when selecting current transformers for DMT protection (these
considerations are applied in the example shown in Fig. 3/43):
Current transformers with a rating of
40 to 200 A could be selected for rated
currents of 36.4 A on the high-voltage
side of the 630 kVA transformer, with
the characteristic Q3 I> at 200 A positioned at the abscissa for 10 kV and
with the broad setting ranges. Here, it
is important to bear in mind the
higher investment costs for current
transformers with lower rated primary
currents.
If, for example, 60/1 A current transformers are selected, the current
sensors must be set as follows:
Setting the current sensors I>, I>>
and timing elements
Current sensor I >:
The setting for a selected operating
value of 200 A is as follows:
200 A
I p = ______ = 3.3 A
60/1
Timing element for I > excitation:
ti> = 0.5 s
Current sensor I>>:
The current sensor I>> should only respond to faults on the high-voltage
side (in the shortest possible time).
Operating current I>> approximately
I kT 1.20
(safety margin relative to I kT)
IrT 100% __________

36,4 A 100%
=
= 606.6 A
I kT = _______
ukr
6%
Operating current = I kT 1.2 = 728 A
Operating current (in secondary circuit) =
728 A
I p = ______ 12.1 A
60/1
3.5.2 Equipment for Protecting Distribution Transformers (against Internal Faults)

The following signaling devices and
protection equipment are used to
detect internal transformer faults:
C Devices for monitoring and protecting liquid-cooled transformers such
as Buchholz protectors, temperature detectors, contact thermometers, etc.
C Temperature monitoring systems
for GEAFOL resin-encapsulated
transformers comprising
temperature sensors in the
low-voltage winding and
signaling and tripping devices in
the incoming-feeder switch panel.
The thermistor-type thermal protection protects the transformer against
overheating resulting from increased
ambient temperatures or overloading.
Furthermore, it allows the full output
of the transformer to be utilized irrespective of the number of load cycles
without the risk of damage to the
transformer.
These signaling and protection devices do not have to be included in
the grading diagrams (e.g. Fig. 3/29).
TIP_Kap3_E
11.08.2005
18:44 Uhr
Seite 59
3/59
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:47 Uhr
Seite B2
Medium Voltage
4.1 Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear for Primary Power

Distribution
4.2 Secondary Distribution Systems, Switchgear and Substations
4.3 Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range
4.4 PQM Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control
4.5 Planning of Systems for Primary and Secondary Power Distribution
Exemplified by the Automotive Industry
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:47 Uhr
Seite B3
Medium Voltage
chapter 4
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:47 Uhr
Seite 2
4 Medium Voltage
Standards
Insulation
Busbar
system
Compartments
Access
option
Type-tested
indoor
switchgear
acc. to
IEC 62271-200
(IEC 60298)
Interlocking control
circuit-breaker/cable
compartment,
or tool-dependent
busbar/cable
compartment
Operational
availability
LSC 2B
(three-compartment
design + isolating
distances to busbar
and cable)
Accidental
arc
qualification
Switching
device 4)
IAC
(IEC 60298)
CB, SD,
Compartme
ntalization class
PM
(metal-clad)
CB, SD,
contactor1)
CB, SD,
contactor 2)
CB, SD,
contactor 2)
Single
Airinsulated
Double
Single
CB
PM
(metal-clad)
compartment,
or tool-dependent
busbar/cable
compartment
LSC 2A
(two-compartment design
+ isolating distances to
busbar and cable)
Interlocking control to
the high-voltage
compartment
LSC 1 (isolating distances

to busbar and cable)
compartment,
or tool-dependent
busbar/cable
compartment
LSC 2B
(three-compartment
design + isolating
distances to busbar
and cable)
PM
(metal-clad)
Busbar compartment:
tool-based
Circuit-breaker
compartment:
not accessible
Cable compartment:
tool-based
No restriction
PM
(metal-clad)
Busbar compartment:
tool-based
Circuit-breaker
compartment:
not accessible
Cable compartment:
tool-based
No restriction
IAC
(IEC 60298)
CB, SD,
CB, SD,
contactor 1)
IAC
CB, SD,
IAC
(IEC 60298)
CB
CB
IAC
(IEC 60298)
CB, SD,
contactor
CB
CB
Gasinsulated
Double
Table 4/1
Medium-voltage switchgear
4/2
PM
(metal-clad)
IAC
(IEC 60298)
CB, SD,
contactor
CB
CB
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:47 Uhr
Seite 3
Medium Voltage
4.1 Medium-Voltage
and Circuit-Breaker
Switchgear for Primary
Power Distribution
Every operator or user of medium-voltage primary distribution equipment,

whether they be power supply or industrial companies or power stations,
places special demands on the
switchgear. These include, for example,
high reliability, personal safety and low
space requirements.
In addition to appropriate voltage levels,
air or gas insulation, a differentiation is
made with respect to environmental in-
Isolating
distance
Switchgear
type
dependence, maintenance-free design,

compactness, security of investment,
cost-efficiency, serviceability and flexibility to suit the demand.
You definitely make the right decision
with circuit-breaker switchgear from
Siemens. The complete range of
switchgear sets standards for the safe
and cost-efficient solution to your special
requirements.
Technical data
7.2
kV
12
kV
15
kV
17.5
kV
24
kV
36
kV
40.5
kV
Maximum rated
normal current of busbar
[A]
7.2
12
15
17.5 24
kV
kV
kV
kV
kV
25/3
2,500 2,500
2,500 2,500
Maximum rated short-time

withstand current [kA], 1/3 s
36
kV
40.5
kV
Maximum rated
normal current of feeder
[A]
7.2
12
15
17.5 24
kV
kV
kV
kV
kV
36
kV
40.5
kV
Withdrawable
unit/truck
NXAIR
25/3
Withdrawable
unit/truck
NXAIR M
31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3
25/3
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
Withdrawable
unit/truck
NXAIR P
50/3
4,000 4,000 4,000
4,000 4,000 4,000
Truck
SIMOPRIME
31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
Truck
8BT2
31.5/3
2,250
2,000
Withdrawable
unit/truck
NXAIR M
25/3
25/3
2,500 2,500
2,500 2,500
Truck
8BT1
25/1
25/1
2,250 2,250
2,000 2,000
Truck
8BT3
16/1
1,250
1,250
Withdrawable
unit/truck
NXAIR M
31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3
25/3
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
Withdrawable
unit/truck
NXAIR P
50/3
4,000 4,000 4,000
4,000 4,000 4,000
Disconnector,
fixed-mounted
NXPLUS C3)
31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 25/3
25/3
/3
/3
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
Disconnector,
fixed-mounted
NXPLUS
31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3
2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Disconnector,
fixed-mounted
8DA
40/3
40/3
40/3
40/3
40/3
40/3
40/3
4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
Disconnector,
fixed-mounted
NXPLUS C3)
25/3
25/3
25/3
25/3
25/3
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
Disconnector,
fixed-mounted
NXPLUS
31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3 31.5/3
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
Disconnector,
fixed-mounted
8DB
40/3
4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
1)
2)
50/3
50/3
40/3
50/3
50/3
40/3
up to 7.2 kV
up to 12 kV
40/3
3)
4)
40/3
40/3
40/3
1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
The product ranges of single busbars and busbars can be combined with each other.
CB = circuit-breaker, SD = switch-disconnector
4/3
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:48 Uhr
Seite 4
4.1.1 Withdrawable CircuitBreaker Switchgear,

Air-Insulated
NXAIR Family
Switchgear from the NXAIR family
just makes solutions simpler, because it brings security into all significant decisions for future planning.
Security of investment through innovative technology
The novel modular design of
switchgear panels allows rapid reavailability because the individual
compartments (connection, module
and low-voltage compartment) can
be replaced after a fault inside the
switchgear panel. The bushing-type
current transformer principle, together with the pressure-resistant
partitions, allows the selective disconnection of an internal fault up to
31.5 kA by means of the associated
circuit-breaker. A mimic diagram with
self-explanatory operating symbols
for optimum operator prompting is integrated into the equipment front as
a standard feature. The numerical bay
controller family integrates protection, control, communication, operating and monitoring functions into one
device.
Cost-efficiency of the switchgear

Decades of experience in the manufacture of air-insulated medium-voltage switchgear as well as type and
routine testing in accordance with
IEC 62271-200 ensure reliability. Internal arc tests and self-explanatory
operating symbols ensure personal
safety and operational reliability.
Rapid re-availability is achieved by
the modular design and selectivity.
Flexibility shows itself in the choice
between truck-type or withdrawable
Photo 4/1
4/4
NXAIR
switchgear, or in the fact that any

customary cable sealing ends can
be used.
Service friendliness
Switchgear maintenance intervals of
more than 10 years, minimized training expenses due to the self-explanatory operating symbols, and modern
documentation guarantee service
friendliness over the entire life of
the product.
11.08.2005
18:48 Uhr
Seite 5
Medium Voltage
Rated
The air-insulated, metal-clad NXAIR

switchgear is the innovation on the
distribution level up to 12 kV, 25 kA,
2,500 A.
C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad
(LSC 2B)
C Uniform panel structure for all
versions
C Cable connection from the front
or rear
C Available as truck-type or withdrawable switchgear
C Bushing-type current transformers
permit selective shutdown of
feeders
C Panels resistant to internal arc
faults
C Exchange of the module and
connection compartment possible
C Switchgear modules with integrated interlocking and control
board
kV
7.2
12
frequency
Hz
50
50
short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage
kV
20
28 **
lightning surge withstand voltage
kV
60
75
short-circuit breaking current
max. kA
25
25
short-time withstand current, 3s
max. kA
25
25
short-circuit making current
max. kA
63
63
peak withstand current
max. kA
63
63
2,500
2,500
max. A
normal current of feeders:

with circuit-breaker
max. A
2,500
2,500
with switch-disconnector
max. A
800 *
800 *
* Depends on rated current of HV HRC fuses used

** Higher value on request
Table 4/2
NXAIR rating
H2
NXAIR features
voltage
H1
TIP_Kap04_E
All panel types
Dimensions in mm
Width W for all panels

(compartment)
800
Height H1 Standard,
2,000
H2 with a high low-voltage cubicle

with open-circuit ventilation
with busbar fittings
Depth D
Photo 4/2
NXAIR switchgear panel
Table 4/3
for all panels
2,350
1,350
NXAIR dimensions
4/5
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:48 Uhr
Seite 6
B
14
2
3
15
22
16
23
1234
17
24
25
18
10
26
19
11
12
20
21
28
29
1 Door of low-voltage cubicle
14 Pressure relief duct
A Module compartment
2 Protection equipment
15 Busbars
B Busbar compartment
3 Option: capacitive voltage detection

system for feeder and busbar
16 Bushing-type insulator
C Connection compartment
17 Bushing-type current transformer
4 High-voltage door to module compartment
18 Make-proof grounding switch
D Vacuum vacuum circuit-breaker

module
5 Door knob for opening high-voltage door
19 Cable connection for 4 cables per phase
E Low-voltage cubicle
7 Mechanical switch position indication and

actuating opening for withdrawable part
20 Cable sealing ends
8 Closing spring charged indicator and

operating cycle counter
22 Low voltage plug connector
9 Mechanical switch position indication for

switching device
10 ON/OFF pushbuttons for switching
device
21 Cable support rail

23 Withdrawable part
24 Combined operating and interlocking unit
for circuit-breaker, withdrawable part and
grounding switch

actuating opening for make-proof grounding switch
25 Vacuum interrupters
12 Mimic diagram
29 Option: truck
26 Contact system
28 Grounding busbar
Fig. 4/1
NXAIR circuit-breaker panel 12 kV / 1,250 A, basic panel design (example)
4/6
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:48 Uhr
Seite 7
Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel
Disconnecting panel
Switch-disconnector panel
Spur panel
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
or
or
or
or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible)
Circuitbreaker
panel
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
Metering panel
Riser
panel
or
or
or
or
or
and/or
and/or
Fig. 4/2
NXAIR product range
4/7
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:48 Uhr
Seite 8
Rated
NXAIR M features
The air-insulated, cubicle-type or
metal-clad switchgear NXAIR M is
the consequent further development
of the NXAIR family for use on the
distribution and process level up to
15 kV, 31.5 kA, 2,500 A or 24 kA,
25 kA, 2,500 A.
kV
7.2
12
15
17.5
24
frequency
Hz
50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
short-duration power-frequency
withstand voltage
kV
20
28
35
38
50
kV
60
75
95
95
125
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
25
25
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
25
25
short-circuit making current1)
max. kA
80
80
80
63
63
peak withstand current1)
max. kA
80
80
80
63
63
max. A
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

with vacuum contactor
max. A
max. A
max. A
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

800* 800* 800* 800* 800*
400*

Values for 50 Hz
1)
NXAIR M rating
H2
H3
Table 4/4
H1
C Metal-enclosed and metal-clad or

cubicle-type (LSC 2A, LSC 2B)
C Circuit-breaker, contactor and switchdisconnector panels can be lined up
or rear
permit selective shutdown of
feeders
C Panels resistant to internal arc faults
C Exchange of the module and connection compartment possible
board
voltage
All panel types
Dimensions in mm
Width W
Standard
(compartment) with 24 kV / 2,500 A
800
1,000
with vacuum contactor panel

Height H1
400
with standard low-voltage cubicle
2,200
H2
with attached air guides (standard)

with a high low-voltage cubicle
with open-circuit ventilation
2,550
H3
with busbar fittings
2,770
Depth D
Single busbar
cubicle-type2)
metal-clad
Vacuum contactor panel

Double busbar with
back-to-back installation
2)
Photo 4/3
NXAIR M switchgear panel
4/8
For 24 kV only
Table 4/5
NXAIR M dimensions
1,454
1,554
1,650
cubicle-type2)
metal-clad
2,958
3,158
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:48 Uhr
Seite 9
Medium Voltage
30
30
B
1
14
2
3
15
22
4
5
23
16
24
1234
25
17
10
26
18
11
19
12
27
20
28
21
29
transformer
3 Option: capacitive voltage

detection system for feeder
and busbar
19 Cable connection for

4 cables per phase
4 High-voltage door to module

compartment
5 Door knob for opening

high-voltage door
7 Mechanical switch position

indication and actuating
opening for withdrawable part
8 Closing spring charged
indicator and operating cycle
counter
indication for switching
device
10 ON/OFF pushbuttons for
switching device
indication and actuating
opening for make-proof
grounding switch
12 Mimic diagram
30
15
22 Low voltage plug connector

24 Combined operating and
interlocking unit for circuitbreaker, withdrawable part
and grounding switch
25 Vacuum switching tubes
26 Contact system
27 Lower partition
28 Grounding busbar
22
23
16
30 Air guide
24
D
25
17
26
18
29 Option: truck
19
20
D Vacuum circuit-breaker
module
15 Busbars
17 Bushing-type current
Fig. 4/3
Metal-clad version
28
21
29
Cubicle-type version
(feature: common module and connection compartment)
NXAIR M, basic panel design (example)
4/9
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:49 Uhr
Seite 10
Disconnecting panel
Panels for double-busbar applications

Double-busbar switchgear is made up of
the product range of the single-busbar
panels, which are available as:
vis--vis installation
Vis--vis installation
Panels from the product range of the
single-busbar systems (circuit-breaker
panel, bus sectionalizer and metering
panel)
Connection of the two systems
with cables or bars below the panels
Bus coupling, consisting of
circuit-breaker panel
disconnecting panel
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
or
or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Vacuum contactor panel (7.2 kV)
Back-to-back installation
Panels from the product range of the single-busbar systems (circuit-breaker panel,
bus sectionalizer and metering panel)
Connection of the two systems with bars
within the panels
circuit-breaker panel with current and
voltage transformers
disconnecting panel, optionally with
current transformers
Note
Double-busbar switchgear with busbar
disconnector attachment on request.
Metering panel
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
or
or
or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
Fig. 4/4
NXAIR M product range
4/10
11.08.2005
18:49 Uhr
Seite 11
Medium Voltage
Rated
The air-insulated, metal-clad

switchgear NXAIR P is based on the
design principles of the NXAIR family
for use on the distribution and process
level up to 15 kV, 50 kA, 4,000 A.
(LSC 2B)
C Circuit-breaker, contactor and
switch-disconnector panels can
be lined up
or rear
permit selective shutdown of feeders up to 31.5 kA
C Panels resistant to internal arc
faults up to 31.5 kA
C Exchange of the module and connection compartment possible
board
kV
7.2
frequency
Hz
50/60 50/60 50/60
withstand voltage
kV
20
28
35
kV
60
75
95
max. kA
50
50
50
max. kA
50
50
50
short-circuit making
current1)
12
15
max. kA
125
125
125
current1)
max. kA
125
125
125
max. A
4,000 4,000 4,000

max. A
max. A
max. A
4,000 4,000 4,000

800* 800* 800*
400* 400*
peak withstand

Values for 50 Hz
1)
Table 4/6
NXAIR P rating
H2
H3
NXAIR P features
voltage
H1
TIP_Kap04_E
W1
W2
All panel types (except for vacuum contactor panel)

Width
2,000 A (standard)
Dimensions in mm
800
(compartment) > 2,000 A (with panel ventilation)
1,000
Height
H1 with standard low-voltage cubicle
2,225
H2 with attached pressure relief duct
2,550
H3 with forced ventilation (4,000 A)
2,710
Depth
Single busbar
1,635
Double busbar with back-to-back installation
3,320
Photo 4/4
NXAIR P switchgear panel
Width
W1 Standard
(compartment)
400
Height
2,225
H2 with attached pressure relief duct
2,550
Depth
1,650
Table 4/7
Single busbar
NXAIR P dimensions
4/11
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:49 Uhr
Seite 12
14
2
15
4
16
23
17
26
25
D
9
18
24
22
10
19
31
11
20
C
12
28
21
13
29
Panel 3,150 A with open-circuit ventilation
32
32
Panel 4,000 A with forced ventilation

3 Option: capacitive voltage detection system
for feeder and busbar
11 Mechanical switch position indication

and actuating opening for make-proof
grounding switch
12 Mimic diagram
24 Drive unit
26 Contact system
28 Grounding busbar
4 High-voltage door to module compartment
13 Ventilation duct
5 Mechanical lifting device for opening

high-voltage door

15 Busbars
31 Interlocking unit for circuit-breaker

6 Locking device for high-voltage door
32 Fan unit with fan
8 Closing spring charged indicator, switch

position indication for switching device
and operating cycle counter
17 Bushing-type current transformer
9 ON/OFF pushbuttons for switching

devices
actuating opening for withdrawable part
29 Option: truck
19 Cable connection for 6 cables per phase
D Vacuum circuit-breaker module
22 Low voltage connector
Fig. 4/5
NXAIR P, basic panel design (example)
4/12
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:49 Uhr
Seite 13
Medium Voltage
Disconnecting panel
Panels for double-busbar

applications
Double-busbar switchgear is
made up of the product range
of the single-busbar panels,
which are available as:
vis--vis installation
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Vacuum contactor panel (7.2 kV, 12 kV) Bus sectionalizer (mirror-image version also possible)
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
Vis--vis installation
Panels from the product range
of the single-busbar systems
(circuit-breaker panel, bus sectionalizer and metering panel)
with cables or bars below the
panels
disconnecting panel
Back-to-back installation
Panels from the product range
of the single-busbar systems
(circuit-breaker panel, bus sectionalizer and metering panel)
with bars within the panels
circuit-breaker panel with
current and voltage transformers
Metering panel
or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Fig. 4/6
NXAIR P product range
4/13
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:49 Uhr
Seite 14
SIMOPRIME features
Rated

switchgear SIMOPRIME is a factoryassembled, type-tested indoor
switchgear for use on the distribution
and process level up to 17.5 kV,
31.5 kA, 2,500 A.
kV
7.2
12
15
17.5
frequency
Hz
50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
withstand voltage
kV
20
28
35
38
kV
60
75
95
95
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
max. kA
80
80
80
80/82
max. kA
80
80
80
80/82
max. A
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

max. A
max. A
max. A
2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

630* 630* 630* 630*
400* 400*

Table 4/8
SIMOPRIME rating
H2
H1

(LSC 2B)
C Circuit-breaker, contactor and
switch-disconnector panels can
be lined up
or rear
C Truck-type version
C Use of block-type or ring-type
C Panels resistant to internal arc faults
C All switching operations with
closed door
C Logic interlocks
voltage
All panel types

Width
(compartment) W
Height
Depth
Photo 4/5
SIMOPRIME switchgear panel
4/14
Table 4/9
Dimensions in mm
with circuit-breaker 1,250 A / vacuum contactor 600
with 2,500 A circuit-breaker,
disconnector truck or switch-disconnector
800
2,200
H2 with a high low-voltage cubicle
1,780
1,860
Standard
SIMOPRIME dimensions
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:49 Uhr
Seite 15
Medium Voltage
1
2
E
13
14
4
15
5
6
22
16
23
17
24
10
18
11
19
12
20
21
Circuit-breaker panel, 12 kV, 1,250 A
11 Openings for switch truck operation
A Switchgear compartment
2 Opening for locking/unlocking the

low-voltage cubicle door
12 Opening for grounding switch operation

14 Busbars
D Vacuum circuit-breaker truck
4 High-voltage door to switchgear

compartment
15 Bushings
16 Insulators
5 Inspection window for identifying

the switch truck
17 Option: ring-type or block-type current

transformer
6 Opening for locking or unlocking the

high-voltage door
18 Option: make-proof grounding switch
7 Actuating opening for the mechanical

charging of the closing spring of the
circuit-breaker
20 Option: current transformer
8 Openings for manual circuit-breaker

operation (CLOSED/OPEN)
9 Inspection window for reading off
the indicators

21 Grounding busbar
22 Low-voltage plug connector
24 Switch truck
10 Door knob
Fig. 4/7
SIMOPRIME, basic panel design (example)
4/15
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:49 Uhr
and/or
Seite 16
Disconnecting panel
or
and/or
or
or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
Fig. 4/8
SIMOPRIME product range
4/16
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Metering panel
and/or
and/or
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 17
Medium Voltage
8BT1 features
The air-insulated, cubicle-type
switchgear 8BT1 is a factory-assembled, type-tested indoor switchgear
for the lower performance range, for
use on the distribution and process
C Metal-enclosed and cubicle-type
(LSC 2A)
C Circuit-breaker and contactor
panels can be lined up
C Use of block-type current transformers
C Enclosure tested for resistance
to accidental arcing
closed door
C Logic interlocks
Rated
8BT1
voltage
kV
12
frequency
Hz
50
kV
28
kV
75
max. kA
25
max. kA
25
max. kA
63
max. kA
63

or disconnector truck
with contactor
max. A
2,250
max. A
2,000
max. A
400*

Table 4/10
8BT1 rating
TIP_Kap04_E
W
Photo 4/6
8BT1 switchgear
All panel types

Width
Dimensions in mm
W 1,000 A circuit-breaker, disconnector truck, contactor 600

W 1,250 A, 2,500 A circuit-breaker, disconnector truck
800
Height
2,050
Depth
1,200
Table 4/11
8BT1 dimensions
4/17
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 18

5 Door of high-voltage compartment
6 Inspection window for disconnector

position
7 Knob for high-voltage door
switching device
indication for switching device
10 Mechanical switch position indication Spring charged and operating
cycle counter
11 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening of the
feeder grounding switch
12 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for
establishing an isolating distance
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
13 Mimic diagram
14 Busbars
16 Block-type current transformer
17 Cable connection for 4 cables
max. per phase
8BT1 switchgear

20 Cable bracket
22 Vacuum tube
23 Contact system top/bottom
24 Switch truck
25 Voltage transformer
14
A Busbar compartment
B Connection compartment
C Switchgear compartment
21
22
23
C
16
17
B
18
19
25
20
Feeder panel
Fig. 4/9
8BT1, basic panel design (example)
4/18
24
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 19
Medium Voltage
and/or
and/or
Disconnecting panel
Spur panel
and/or
and/or
and/or
Vacuum contactor panel (7.2 kW)
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
Metering panel
and/or
Bus sectionalizer
and/or
Fig. 4/10
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Busbar termination panel
Switch
truck
panel
Riser
panel
or
8BT1 product range
4/19
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 20
8BT2 features
Rated

level up to 36 kV, 31.5 kA, 2250 A.
(LSC 2B)
C Use of block-type current
transformers
closed door
C Logic interlock
8BT2
voltage
kV
36
frequency
Hz
50/60
kV
70
kV
170
max. kA
31.5
max. kA
31.5
max. kA
80/82
max. kA
80/82
max. A
2,250

with contactor
max. A
max. A
max. A
2,000
8BT2 rating
Table 4/12
Photo 4/7
8BT2 switchgear
All panel types
Dimensions in mm
Width
1,550
Height
2,400
Depth
2,450
Table 4/13
4/20
8BT2 dimensions
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 21
Medium Voltage

4 Mimic diagram

position
switching device
9 Mechanical switch position indication for switching device, Spring
charged and operating cycle
counter
11 Actuating opening of the feeder
grounding switch
12 Actuating opening for establishing
an isolating distance
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
14 Busbars
15 Bushing to busbar or feeder
max. per phase
8BT2 switchgear
20 Cable bracket
22 Vacuum tube
24 Switch truck
14
26 Grounding bus
A Busbar compartment
B Connection compartment
21
C Switchgear compartment
15
22
23
B
16
17
24
18
25
19
26
20
Fig. 4/11
4/21
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 22
Disconnecting panel
Spur panel
and/or
and
and/or
and
and/or
and/or
or
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Metering panel
and/or
Bus sectionalizer
and/or
or
and/or
and/or
Fig. 4/12
8BT2 product range
4/22
and/or
and/or
Switch
truck
panel
Riser
panel
or
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 23
Medium Voltage
8BT3 features
The air-insulated, cubicle-type
C Metal-enclosed and cubicle-type
(LSC 1)
C Circuit-breaker panel, fixedmounted switch-disconnector
can be lined up
C Use of block-type current
transformers
closed door
C Logic interlock
Rated
8BT2
voltage
kV
36
frequency
Hz
50/60
kV
70
kV
170
max. kA
16
max. kA
16
max. kA
40/42
max. kA
40/42
max. A
1,250

with contactor
max. A
max. A
max. A
1,250
400*

Table 4/14
8BT3 rating
TIP_Kap04_E
W
Photo 4/8
8BT3 switchgear
All panel types
Dimensions in mm
Width
1,000
Height
2,400
Depth
1,450
Table 4/15
8BT3 dimensions
4/23
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 24


position
8 ON/OFF pushbuttons for switching device

9 Mechanical switch position indication Spring charged and operating
cycle counter
10 Mechanical switch position indication Spring charged and operating cycle counter
11 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening of the
feeder grounding switch
12 Mechanical switch position indication and actuating opening for
establishing an isolating distance
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
13 Mimic diagram
14 Busbars
max. per phase
8BT3switchgear

20 Cable bracket
22 Vacuum tube
14
24 Switch truck
D High-voltage cubicle
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
20
Fig. 4/13
4/24
24
25
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 25
Medium Voltage
Disconnector truck panel
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
and/or
Metering panel
Fig. 4/14
or
or
and/or
and/or
8BT2, 8BT3 product range
4/25
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 26
4.1.2 Fixed-Mounted
Circuit-Breaker Switchgear,
SF6-Insulated
NXPLUS Family
Switchgear of the NXPLUS family
provides the plus in performance and
is fit for any terrain.
Unique pressure system
This is the only switchgear worldwide with hermetically sealed pressure systems. This makes it independent of external influences.
Whether extreme climatic conditions
or most adverse conditions in conurbations or industrial centers are
concerned, our NXPLUS switchgear
masters every environmental challenge. At the same time, no work
on the gas system is required on
site, nor throughout the lifetime
of the system.
Maintenance-free design
Switchgear of the NXPLUS family requires no maintenance for life. This is
achieved by the gas-tight enclosure
of the high-voltage part, by using SF6
as insulating medium and by maintenance-free operating mechanisms.
Cost-efficiency
Whether you decide for an NXPLUS
or an NXPLUS C you opt for the
most compact dimensions, for the
highest voltages and switching
capacities and thus certainly for
a cost-efficient solution.
4/26
NXPLUS C
It is the first medium-voltage circuitbreaker switchgear to make SF6 insulation and vacuum technology costefficient in its class the compact
NXPLUS C for voltages up to 24 kV.
Features:
C Hermetically sealed pressure
system with SF6 filling for the complete service life
C Type-tested switchgear gets by
completely without any work on
the gas system during installation
and extensions
C Safe-to-touch enclosure and standard connections for cable plugs of
the outside-cone type
C Three-pole SF6-insulated module
for the three-position disconnector
and the circuit-breaker with panel
connection
C Single-pole-insulated and screened
busbars, plug-in system
C Operating mechanisms and transformers easily accessible outside
the SF6 enclosure
C Reduced number of functional
elements due to three-position
disconnector used for isolating
and earthing the outgoing feeder
C Dielectrically unstressed ring-type
C Make-proof grounding with vacuum
circuit-breaker
C Measurements on the busbar possible without the need for additional panels
C Aseismic version optionally
available
Photo 4/9
NXPLUS C
Insulation technology
C Switchgear container filled with
SF6 gas
C Characteristics of the SF6 gas:
nontoxic
odorless and uncolored
non-flammable
chemically neutral
heavier than air
electronegative (high-quality
insulator)
C Pressure of the SF6 gas in the
switchgear container:
Rated filling pressure: 150 kPa
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 27
Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel (basic design)
1
15
2
16
17
Design pressure: 180 kPa

Design temperature of the SF6
gas: 80 C
Operating pressure of the bursting
disc: 300 kPa
Bursting pressure: 400 kPa
Panel configuration
C Factory-assembled, type-tested
C Switchgear container made of
stainless steel, hermetically tight
welded, without any sealings
C Single-pole busbars with solid
insulation, screened, plug-in type
C No maintenance required
C Degree of protection
IP65 for all high-voltage sections
of the primary conducting path
IP3XD for the switchgear enclosure
C Vacuum circuit-breaker and vacuum
contactor
C Three-position disconnector for
isolating/grounding via the
circuit-breaker
C Three-position switch-disconnector
C Make-proof grounding with the
help of the vacuum circuit-breaker
C Cable connection with outside
cone plug-in system acc. to
DIN EN 50181
C For wall-mounting and stand-alone
installation
C Installation and possible later expansions of existing panels without
any gas works
C Exchange of the switchgear container without any gas works
C Transformer can be removed without
any gas works since it is arranged
outside the gas compartment
C Sheet-steel enclosure with sendzimir
coating, front and end walls varnished with the color light basic
C Low-voltage cubicle can be disassembled, pluggable ring circuits
C Lateral, metal cable ducts for
control lines
18
Z
30
19
20
21
3
4
22
31
23
6
24
32
25
33
26
27
34
28
29
Front view
Cable connection from the front

14 Actuating opening for READY TO
GROUND function of three-position
disconnector
Detail Z
8
9
15 Option: busbar current transformer,

plug-in type
10
11
16 Busbar, single-pole, fully insulated,

plug-in type, external surface grounded
12
17 Option: busbar current transformer
13
18 Switchgear container, hermetically welded,

filled with SF6 gas
14
19 Three-position disconnector
1 Low-voltage cubicle
20 OFF pushbutton for circuit-breaker
2 SIPROTEC 4 multifunction protection

(example)
21 Vacuum interrupter of circuit-breaker
3 Switch position indicator of circuit-breaker
23 Capacitive voltage detection system
4 Actuating opening for the charging of

the circuit-breaker springs
24 Locking device for Feeder grounded

(suitable for locking with padlock)
5 ON pushbutton for circuit-breaker

6 Spring charged indicator
25 Disconnecting device for feeder voltage

transformer
7 Counter for circuit-breaker
26 Bushing feeder voltage transformer
8 Switch position indicator for ISOLATING

function of three-position disconnector
27 Option: feeder voltage transformer
9 Ready-for-service indicator
29 Cable connection compartment
22 Pressure disc (bursting disc)
28 Option: pressure relief duct
10 Switch position indicator for READY

TO GROUND function of three-position
disconnector
30 Operating mechanism for three-position

disconnector
11 Preselection slide and locking device for

ISOLATING/GROUNDING function of
three-position disconnector
32 Feeder current transformer
12 Interrogation lever
13 Actuating opening for ISOLATING
function of three-position disconnector
Fig. 4/15
31 Circuit-breaker operating mechanism

33 Cable connection with outside cone T-plug
34 Actuation for the disconnecting device of
the feeder voltage transformer
NXPLUS C circuit-breaker panel, SF6-insulated
4/27
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 28
SF6-insulated circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS C

Rated voltage
Rated frequency
7,2
50/60
12
50/60
15
50/60
17,5
50/60
24
50/60
Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV
20
28*
36
38
50
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
60
75 *
95
95
125
max. kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
25
25
Rated short-time withstand current, 3 s
kA
31.5
31.5
31.5
25
25
Rated short-circuit making current
kA
80
80
80
63
63
Rated peak withstand current
kA
80
80
80
63
63
Rated short-circuit breaking current
kV
Hz
kV
Rated normal current

of busbar
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
Rated normal current

of feeders
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,000
2,000
Rated normal current of

switch-disconnector panels with fuses
Depending on rated current

of fuse (max. 100 A)
* 42 / 95 kV possible acc. to a number of
international specifications
Table 4/16 Electrical data
Width
mm
600,1,200
Height
mm
2,250
Depth
Single busbar
Double busbar
mm
mm
1,100, 1,225
2,370
Weight (approx.) incl. packing:

single busbar, 1 panel
double busbar, 2 panels
Table 4/17
Dimensions and weights
For further technical data, please

refer to the NXPLUS catalog
(HA 53.41).
4/28
kg
kg
900, 1,500
1,800
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:50 Uhr
Seite 29
Medium Voltage
Single busbar panels

Switch-disconnector
panel with fuses
Disconnector panel
Metering panel
Double busbar panels

Bus sectionalizer
Incoming-feeder coupling
BB1
BB1
BB1
BB2
BB2
BB2
Panel variants of single and double busbars can be combined.

For further variants, please refer to the NXPLUS C catalog (HA 35.41)
Fig. 4/16
Bus coupling
BB1 = busbar 1
BB2 = busbar 2
NXPLUS C panel versions
4/29
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:51 Uhr
Seite 30
NXPLUS
NXPLUS is the gas-insulated
switchgear for up to 40.5 kV with the
benefits of vacuum technology for
a high degree of independence in
operation.
Features:
C Hermetically sealed pressure
system with SF6 filling for the
complete service life
C Type-tested switchgear gets by
completely without any work on
the gas system during installation
and extensions
C Easy module replacement thanks
to self-supporting, individual modules which are bolted together
C Safe-to-touch enclosure and standard connections for cable plugs of
the outside-cone or inside-cone
type
C Three-pole SF6-insulated modules
for the busbar with the three-position switch and for the circuitbreaker with the panel connection
C Single-pole-insulated and screened
couplings for interconnecting the
modules
C Motor operating switching devices,

interlocked electrically and, as an
option, mechanically
C Operating mechanisms and transformers easily accessible outside
the SF6 enclosure
C Reduced number of functional elements due to three-position switch
used for isolating and grounding
the outgoing feeder
Photo 4/10
4/30
NXPLUS
C Dielectrically unstressed ring-type

C Make-proof grounding with vacuum
circuit-breaker
C Measurements on the busbar
possible without the need for
additional panels
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:51 Uhr
Seite 31
Medium Voltage
2 Multifunction protection SIPROTEC

4 7SJ61/ 7SJ62 for control and
1
protection
8
1
3 Mimic diagram
10
4 EMERGENCY-OFF pushbutton,
mechanical
11
17
12
18
13
19
5 Door to mechanical control board
6 Cover of cable connection

compartment
7 Busbar cover and space for pluggable busbar current transformers
8 Busbar module, welded, SF6 -insulated
11 Three-position disconnector, SF6 insulated, with the three positions: 6
9 Rupture diaphragm
10 Three-pole busbar system
20
14
21
CLOSED OPEN READY-TOGROUND
22
15
23
16
12 Module coupling between busbar

module and circuit-breaker module
24
13 Circuit-breaker module, welded,

SF6 -insulated, with integrated
cable connection
Panel with integrated inside cone
14 Vacuum switching tube of

circuit-breaker
16 Integrated cable connection as

inside cone
13
17 Low-voltage cubicle, standard:

935 mm high
26
Option: 1,100 mm high

18 Ring-core current transformer
18
25
23
27
24
19 Manual and motor operating mechanism of three-position switch

20 Mechanical control board
Panel with outside cone
21 Manual and motor operating

mechanism of circuit-breaker
22 Voltage transformer connection
socket as inside cone
25 Isolating device for feeder voltage
transformer
26 Voltage transformer connection
socket as outside cone
27 Cable connection as outside cone
Fig. 4/17
NXPLUS circuit-breaker panel with single busbar
4/31
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:51 Uhr
Seite 32
SF6-insulated circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS

Rated voltage
bis kV
24
40.5
Rated short-duration power-frequency

withstand voltage
Hz
50/60
50/60
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
kV
50
85
kV
125
185
max. kA
31.5
31.5
Rated short-time withstand current, 3 s
max. kA
31.5
31.5
max. kA
80
80
Rated peak withstand current
max. kA
80
80
Rated normal current of busbar
max. A
2,000
1)
Rated normal current of feeders
max. A
2,000
1)
1)
2,000
1)
2,000
1)
with double busbar 2,500 A possible
Table 4/18
Electrical data
Single Double
busbar busbar
Width
Width of bus sectionalizer panel 2,000 A (> 2,000 A)
mm
mm
600
900
(1,200)
600
600
(900)
Bus coupler
mm
600/1,200
Metering panel
mm
300
Height
mm
2,450
2,600
Depth
mm
1,600
1,840
kg
1,200
1,600
Weight per panel incl.

packing (approx.)
Table 4/19
Dimensions and weights
4/32
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:51 Uhr
Seite 33
Medium Voltage
Busbar fittings
Fittings
upstream of circuit-breaker module
Fittings
downstream of circuit-breaker module 3)
1)
Capacitive
voltage
detection
system
Panel connection
fittings
1 x plug-in
cable,
interface
type 2 or 3
or
1 x plug-in
cable,
interface
type 2 4)
or
2 x plug-in
cable,
interface
type 2 or 3
or
Voltage
transformer,
plug-in
type 4)
or
3 x plug-in
cable,
interface
type 2 or 3
or
Surge
arrester,
plug-in
type 4)
or
4 x plug-in
cable,
interface
type 2
and
Busbar
current
transformer
or
Solidinsulated bar
2)
Voltage
transformer,
plug-in type
Surge
arrester,
plug-in type
Current
transformer
1) Capacitive voltage detection

system acc. to the LRM or IVDS
system
2) Not possible with busbar voltage
transformer
3) Requires cable connection with
container for separate inside cone
4) With single busbar only
Fig. 4/18
NXPLUS panel versions with cable connection as inside cone
Single busbar / double busbar

With cable connection as inside
cone for
rated voltage up to 36 kV/40.5 kV
(single busbar only)
rated short-circuit breaking current

up to 31.5 kA
rated normal currents of busbars
and feeders up to 2,000 A
4/33
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:51 Uhr
Seite 34
Busbar fittings
Fittings
upstream of circuit-breaker module
Fittings
downstream of circuit-breaker module
1)
Capacitive
voltage
detection
system
Panel connection
fittings
1 x plug-in
cable
or
1 x plug-in
cable,
interface
type 2 3)
or
2 x plug-in
cable
or
Voltage
transformer,
plug-in
type 3)
or
3 x plug-in
cable
or
Surge
arrester,
plug-in
type 3)
and
Busbar
current
transformer
2)
Voltage
transformer,
disconnectable
Current
transformer
Surge arrester
1) Capacitive voltage detection
or limiter,
to be plugged in
system acc. to the LRM or IVDS
additionally
system
2) Not possible with busbar voltage
transformer
3) With single busbar only
Fig. 4/19
NXPLUS panel versions with cable connection as outside cone
Single busbar and double busbar circuitbreaker panel

With cable connection as outside cone for
rated voltage up to 24 kV
rated short-circuit breaking current up
to 25 kA (for 12 kV: 31.5 kA)
rated normal currents of busbars up
to 2,000 A and feeders up to 1,250 A
4/34
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:51 Uhr
Seite 35
Medium Voltage
Bus sectionalizer
for
rated
rated
up to
rated
up to
voltage up to 36 kV/40.5 kV
31.5 kA
normal current of busbars
2,000 A
Busbar
fittings
Fittings upstream of
circuit-breaker
module
Capacitive
voltage
detection
system
Fig. 4/20
Current
transformer
NXPLUS bus sectionalizer
4/35
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 36
Fixed-mounted circuitbreaker switchgear, type

8DA and 8DB up to 40.5 kV,
SF6-insulated
Versions
Fixed-mounted circuit-breaker
switchgear
C 8DA10 for single busbar applications
C 8DA11/8DA12 (single- and doublepole) for traction power supplies
C 8DB10 for double busbar applications are metal-enclosed, metalclad, SF6-insulated switchgear
for indoor installation
Features
Environmental independence
Encapsulation with modular standard
containers made of noncorrosive aluminum alloys make 8DA and 8DB
switchgear
C insensitive to aggressive ambient
conditions such as
salt water
air humidity
dust
temperature
C hermetically tight against ingress of
foreign substances such as e.g.
dust
dirt
C independent of the installation
height
Compactness
The use of SF6-insulation results in
small panel width of only 600 mm up
to 40.5 kV.
Thus,
C existing switchrooms become
effectively usable
C new buildings become more
cost-effective
C inner-city areas are used
economically
4/36
8DA10
panel
for single busbar
applications
Photo 4/11
8DA11/8DA12
panel
for traction power supplies,
single- and double-pole versions (example 8DA11)
8DA/8DB panels
Nearly no maintenance required

Switchgear containers as hermetically sealed pressure system, nomaintenance switchgear and encapsulated cable plugs ensure
C highest security of supply
C safety of the personnel
C reduced operating costs
C economic efficiency of the
investment
8DB10
panel
for double busbar
applications
Innovation
The use of digital secondary
technology and combined protective
and control devices results in
C a clear integration into process
control
C flexible, simple adaptations to
new system states and thus, in
economical operation
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 37
Medium Voltage
8DA10 panel for single busbar, 3-pole
Panels for traction power supply

8DA11 single-pole
8DA12 double-pole
3
4
5
6
8DB10 panel for double busbar, 3-pole

1 Low-voltage cubicle
2 Electronic operating interface,

e.g. multifunction protection
3 Operating mechanism and interlock for

the three-position switch-disconnector as
well as mechanical switch position indication of the three-position switch disconnector and circuit-breaker
4 Pressure gage for gas monitoring of the

feeder gas compartments
5 Circuit-breaker operating mechanism
6 Operating shaft for vacuum switching

tubes
7 Voltage detection system
8 Operating shaft for three-position

switch-disconnector
Fig. 4/21
Panel design (examples)
4/37
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 38
Single busbar
1
2
3
1 Busbar container
2 Busbar
3 Three-position switchdisconnector
4 Gas-tight bushing between three-position
switch-disconnector and
circuit-breaker
6
7
5 Circuit-breaker container
6 Vacuum interrupter
7 Current transformer
8 Pole support plate
9 Panel connection
Double busbar
10
2
3
4
11
12
Pos. 1 to 9, see above

switch-disconnector or
busbar

switch-disconnector
(busbar 1) and switchdisconnector (busbar 2)
8
9
12 Busbar switch-disconnector for busbar system 2
Fig. 4/22
Single-pole design
4/38
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 39
Medium Voltage
8DA10
3-pole
Rated values
Rated
-voltage
max. kV 12 24 36 40.5
-frequency
50 Hz1)
-short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28 50 70 85
-lightning surge withstand voltage
kV 75 125 170 185
-short-circuit breaking current
max. 40 kA
-short-time withstand current, 3s
max. 40 kA
-short-time making current
max. 100 kA
-peak withstand current
max. 100 kA
-normal current of busbar
max. 4,000 A
-normal current of feeders
max. 2,500 A
Dimensions in mm
Compartment (width)
600
600
Transverse coupling
Longitudinal coupling (2 panels)

2 x 600
Longitudinal coupling for connection
2 x 600
in the cable basement (2 panels)
Switchgear termination (end wall)
for left and right switchgear cabinet side 152
Depth
for all panel types
1,625
Height (switchgear front)
Standard
2,350
with high low-voltage cubicle
2,700
with make-proof busbar
2,700
grounding switch
Height switchgear rear side
Standard
1,850
with make-proof busbar
1,960
grounding switch
with busbar isolation without
2,320
additional panel loss
Busbar module without disconnection option:
With voltage transformer up to 24 kV 2,220
36/40.5 kV 2,470
With cable connection for
1 connector, connection type 2
2,050
2,030
2 or 3 connectors, connection type 2 2,110
4 to 6 connectors, connection type 2 2,250
With connection for all-insulated bar2)
1,930
Busbar modules with disconnection option:
With voltage transformer up to 24 kV 2,420
36/40.5 kV 2,670
With cable connection for
2,180
2,240
4 to 6 connectors, connection type 2 2,380
With connection for all-insulated bar2)
2,130
1)
60 Hz on request
2)
The busbar supplier must be consulted about the dimensions
Table 4/20
8DB10
3-pole
12 24 36
40.5
50 Hz1)
28 50 70
85
75 125 170 185
max. 40 kA
max. 40 kA
max. 100 kA
max. 100 kA
max. 4,000 A
max. 2,500 A
600
600
2 x 600
2 x 600
152
2,660
2,350
2,700
2,700
8DA11/8DA12
single-/doublepole
Rated values
Rated
-voltage acc. to
kV 15
25
EN 50163 and IEC 60850
-isolation voltage
max. kV 17.5 27.5
-frequency
Hz 16.7 50/60
-power-frequency to ground
kV 50
95
withstand
over isolating kV 60
110
voltage
distance
-peak
to ground
kV 125 200
withstand
over isolating kV 145 220
current
distance
-short-circuit breaking current
max. 31.5 kA
-short-circuit making current
max. 80 kA
-normal current of
max. 2,500 A
busbar
-normal current of feeders
max. 2,000 A
Dimensions in mm
Compartment (width)
Incoming-feeder panel
600
Section feeder panel
600
Switchgear termination end wall
for left and right
152
switchgear side
Depth
for 8DA11, single-pole
865
for 8DA12, double-pole
1,245
Height switchgear front
Standard
2,350
Height switchgear rear side
Standard
1,850
2,100
2,210
2,570
2,390
2,640
2,300
2,280
2,360
2,380
2,500
2,180
2,590
2,840
2,430
2,490
2,490
2,510
2,630
2,380
Electrical data, dimensions
4/39
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 40
Busbar fittings
Fitting at the
circuit-breaker housing
Fitting over the
panel connection
1)
Panel connection
variants
2) For plug-in cable connection with inside cone acc.

to EN 50181
Max. of 6 connections
per conductor possible,
depending on the connector size
3) The use of these modules
reduces the possible number of connectable plug-in
cables by 1 piece each
2)
Plug-in cable
Voltage
transformer,
fixed or disconnectable
1) Capacitive voltage
detection system
or
Make-proof
grounding
switch
or
Cable or
busbar connection, fixed or
disconnectable
or
or
or
Fitting at the
panel termination
Current
transformer
all-insulated bar,
solid or gas
insulation
3)
Inductive
voltage
transformer
Longitudinal
disconnection
without additional
space requirements
and/or
3)
Inductive voltage
transformer,
connected via cable
and/or
3)
Ohmic
voltage divider
and/or
3)
Surge arrester
Busbar current
transformer
Busbar fittings
Fittings and connection

options same as for
Fitting at the
riser housing
Fitting over the
panel connection
1)
Panel connection
variants
Longitudinal coupling
Busbar fittings
Consisting of 2 panels
(circuit-breaker arranged
optionally in the left or
right panel)
1)
Busbar
current
transformer
Ohmic
voltage
divider
Fitting at the
riser housing
Current
transformer
Fig. 4/23
8DA10 single busbar panels, 3-pole (panels 8DA11, single-pole and 8DA12, double-pole on request)
4/40
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 41
Medium Voltage
Busbar fittings
BB1
BB2
Fitting at the
Fitting over the
panel connection
1)
Panel connection
variants
BB1
BB2
Voltage
transformer,
disconnectable
or
BB2
BB1
BB2
or
BB1
BB1,
BB2
BB2
or
BB1
BB1,
BB2
BB2
BB2
or
BB1
Current
transformer
Ohmic
current
divider
All-insulated
bar, solid or
gas insulation
and/or
3)
Inductive
voltage
transformer
and/or
3)
Inductive voltage
transformer,
connected via cable
Cable or bar
connection,
fixed
and/or
3)
Ohmic voltage
divider
and/or
3)
Surge arrester
Cable or bar
connection,
disconnectable
Busbar
current
transformer
or
BB1
or
Fitting at the
panel termination
Make-proof
grounding
switch
or
BB1
2)
Plug-in cable
Voltage
transformer,
fixed
or
HA35-2444 eps
TIP_Kap04_E
BB2
Longitudinal
disconnection
without additional
space requirements
Abbreviations
BB1 = busbar 1
BB2 = busbar 2
1) Capacitive voltage detection system
2) For plug-in cable connection with inside cone acc. to EN 50181
Max. of 6 connections per conductor possible, depending on the connector size
3) The use of these modules reduces the possible number of connectable
plug-in cables by 1 piece each
Fig. 4/24
8DB10 double busbar panels, 3-pole
4/41
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 42
Transverse coupling
Busbar fittings
BB1
BB2
1)
Voltage
transformer,
fixed
or
BB1
BB2
Voltage
tranformer,
disconnectable
or
BB2
BB1
Make-proof
grounding
switch
or
BB1
BB2
or
BB1
BB1,
BB2
BB2
or
BB1
BB1,
BB2
BB2
or
BB1
BB2
or
Abbreviations
BB1 = busbar 1
BB2 = busbar 2
1)
Capacitive voltage detection system
Fig. 4/25
4/42
BB1 BB2
Cable or bar
connection,
fixed 1)
Cable or bar
connection,
disconnectable
Busbar
current
transformer
Longitudinal
disconnection
without additonal
space requirements
Fitting at the
riser housing
Current
transformer
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 43
Medium Voltage
for busbar 1 and 2
consisting of 2
assembled panels
Busbar fittings
BB1
BB2
1)
1)
Busbar current
BB1 transformer at
BB1
oder
Current
transformer
Busbar current
transformer at
BB2 BB2
for connection in the
cable basement
consisting of 2
separate panels
Busbar fittings
BB1
BB2
Fitting at the
1)
1)
1)
1)
Fitting above the
panel connection
Busbar
BB1 current
transformer
at BB1
or
Busbar
current
BB2 transformer
at BB2
Ohmic
voltage
divider
or
Panel connection
variants:
Single plug-in cable,
sizes 1 to 3 or bar (solid
or gas insulation)
Fitting per panel at

the circuit-breaker or
riser panel termination
Current
transformer
Abbreviations
BB1 = busbar 1
BB2 = busbar 2
1) Capacitive voltage detection system
Fig. 4/26
4/43
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 44
Generator level
G
Primary
distribution level
4.2 Secondary
Distribution Systems,
Switchgear and
Substations
General information
In its basic version, the secondary
distribution system consists of consumer substations with ring-main
feeders and directly fed transformer
feeders.
In order to minimize transmission
losses and attain an economical solution for switchgear and transformer
substations, the system configuration
and switchgear technology should be
optimally designed and dimensioned.
To limit transmission losses, the
packaged transformer substations/
consumer substations must be
located directly in the load center.
Therefore, switchgear and substations with a high degree of safety
and reliability and, at the same time,
minimum dimensions are to be
preferred.
The large number of substations
installed in the distribution system
requires a high degree of standardization and the application of
technically mature products. The
switchgear types described below
fulfill these quality requirements in
every respect.
The packaged transformer substations consisting of medium-voltage
switchgear, transformer and lowvoltage distribution are available as
factory-assembled units or as single
components and can be installed in
any building and room at the site of
installation.
4/44
Secondary
distribution level,
with switchgear of
the 8DJ and 8DH
types
Utilities
substation
Utilities customer transfer

substation
Utilities
distribution
substation,
industrial plant
Low-voltage
distribution
Further
utilities
substations
Fig. 4/27
Secondary distribution system
Furthermore, the large number of

substations within the distribution
system asks for a cost-effective solution, e.g. switchgear made of climate-independent, maintenance-free
switching devices, making maintenance work unnecessary throughout
the entire service life of the substations in operation. Block-type ringmain units (non-extendable) and modular switchgear (extendable) have
been developed for such packaged
transformer substations. Extendable
switchgear consists of switch-disconnectors, optionally with or without
HV HRC fuses, circuit-breaker panels,
metering panels and bus sectionalizer panels.
Block-type switchgear are ring-main

units available with various schemes.
Medium-voltage ring-main units and
switchgear in secondary distribution
systems must reliably meet the operational requirements regarding:
C Various layouts of the different
switchgear types for optimum application in the different substation
sizes
C Personal safety
C Operational reliability
C Maximum possible environmental
independence
C Cost-efficiency
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 45
Medium Voltage
Siemens has developed switchgear

which complies with all the aforementioned requirements.
8DJ secondary distribution
switchgear and 8DH switchgear
are metal-enclosed, gas-insulated
switchgear for indoor installation.
C 8DJ type as ring-main units in
block-type construction, extension
installation not possible
C 8DH type as modular switchgear
line-up and extendable type in
panel-type construction
More than 400,000 8DJ/8DH-type
switchgear panels are in operation
worldwide.
Application areas
8DJ/8HD switchgear is used in
secondary distribution systems, e.g.
substations, customer transfer substations and distribution substations
of power supply companies and
municipal utilities or industrial plants.
Typical application areas are
C Wind power stations
C High-rise buildings
C Airports
C Lignite open-cast mining
C Underground stations
C Sewage plants
C Docks
C Traction power supplies
C Automobile industry
C Oil industry
C Chemical industry
C Cement industry
The 8DJ secondary distribution

switchgear and 8DH switchgear are
type-tested, factory-assembled,
metal-enclosed switchgear with
SF6 gas insulation. They have been
proven to reliably comply with all
requirements of operation with
regard to:
Maximum personal safety
C Arc-fault-tested stainless-steel
vessel and cable connection compartment tested on the resistance
to accidental arcs
C Logic interlockings
C Guided operation
C Capacitive voltage indication
integrated in switchgear
C Isolation from supply can be safely
tested on the closed switching
front
C Locked and grounded covers for
the fuse section and the cable
terminal compartment
Standards
The 8DJ, 8DH10 and SIMOSEC
switchgear correspond to the following
standards and specifications:
IEC
standard
VDE
standard
IEC 60694
VDE 0670 Part 1,000
IEC 60298
VDE 0670 Part 6
IEC 62271-100
VDE 0671 Part 100
IEC 62271-102
VDE 0671 Part 102
IEC 60265-1
VDE 0670 Part 301
IEC 62271-105
VDE 0671 Part 105
IEC 61243-5
VDE 0682 Part 415,

DIN EN 61243-5
IEC 60529
VDE 0470 Part 1
IEC 60071
VDE 0111
Instrument transformers (e.g. for

8DH or SIMOSEC switchgear)
Further information can be

obtained at:
IEC
standard
www.siemens.com/ptd
Current transformers
VDE
standard
IEC 60044-1
VDE 0414 Part 1
Voltage transformers
IEC 60044-2
VDE 0414 Part 2
Combined transformers for 8DH

switchgear
IEC 60044-3
Table 4/21
VDE 0414 Part 5
Standards
4/45
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
Specifications
18:52 Uhr
Insulation
Seite 46
Type of
construction,
installation
Busbar
system
Compartments
Access
option
Operational
availability
Type of
compartment
LSC 2A
Cable connection
Medium-voltage
indoor
switchgear,
type-tested
according to
IEC 62271-200,
IEC 60298
Gas-insulated
Non-extendable
Single
Accessible
HV HRC fuse
compartment
Busbar
Not
accessible
Switching devices
LSC 2A/B
Cable connection
Gas-insulated
Extendable
Single
Busbar
Accessible
HV HRC fuse
Switching devices
Not
accessible
Air-insulated
Extendable
LSC 2A/B
Single
Busbar
Accessible
Circuit-breaker
Cable connection
Disconnector
Not
accessible
LSC2 A/B
1)
2)
3)
4)
LS = circuit-breaker
LTS = switch-disconnector
LST = circuit-breaker with disconnecting function
PM = partition of metal
Accessible
4/46
HV HRC fuse
Cable connection
Not
accessible
Table 4/21a Secondary distribution systems selection matrix
Busbar
Switchdisconnector and
grounding switch
Circuit-breaker
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 47
Medium Voltage
Access
control
Compartment class
Interlocking
control
PM4)
(metal
partitions)
Accidental
arc
classification
Feeder
or
switching
device
Application, use
Switchgear
type
IAC
(IEC
60298)
RK2)
TR2)
LS13)
Ring-main unit for packaged

transformer substations,
standard type 1:
for substations with
very narrow widths
transformer cable connection
at the top
8DJ10
Ring-main unit for packaged

transformer substations,
standard type 2:
for compact substations,
substations with control aisle
transformer cable connection
at the front (standard)
8DJ20
Switchgear for substations,

customer transfer substations,
distribution and switching
substations, circuit-breaker
switchgear up to 630 A
8DH10
Switchgear for substations,

customer transfer substations,
distribution and switching
substations, circuit-breaker
switchgear up to 1,250 A
SIMOSEC
Tooldependent
Interlocking
control
Interlocking
control
PM4)
(metal
partitions)
IAC
(IEC
60298)
Tooldependent
Tooldependent
RK2)
TR2)
LS11)
LS21)
LTx1)
LST3)
SE2)
ME1
ME2
ME32)
Interlocking
control
Tooldependent
PM4)
(metal
partitions)
IAC
(IEC
60298)
LS111)2)
LS321)2)
Interlocking
control
Interlocking
control
Tooldependent
Interlocking
control
PM4)
(metal
partitions)
IAC
(IEC
60298)
RK1)
TR1)
LS12)
SE1)
ME1
ME31)
HF
4/47
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
Switchgear
type
18:52 Uhr
Seite 48
Technical data
Rated lightning surge

withstand voltage Up
Rated
voltage Ur
Maximum rated shorttime withstand current
7.2/12
[kV]
17.5/24
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
1s
[kA]
3s
Rated operating
current
for busbar
for feeder
[A]
[A]
60/75
95/125
7.217.5
25
20
630
up to 630
60/75
95/125
7.2 24
20
20
630
up to 630
60/75
95/125
7.217.5
25
20
630
up to 630
60/75
95/125
7.2 24
20
20
630
up to 630
60/75
95/125
7.217.5
25
20
60/75
95/125
7.2 24
20
20
8DJ10
8DJ20
630 1)
8DH10
max. 1,250
630 1)
up to 630
up to 630
max. 1,250
SIMOSEC
1)
60/75
95/125
7.217.5
25
11.5
max. 1,250
up to 1,250
60/75
95/125
7.2 24
20
20
max. 1,250
up to 1,250
Standard
Table 21b Secondary distribution systems selection matrix / technical data
4/48
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:52 Uhr
Seite 49
Medium Voltage
Operational reliability /
no maintenance required
Maximum environmental
independence
C Non-corrosive, hermetically tight

welded, stainless steel vessel
without gaskets, stable under variable pressures
C Insulating gas which complies with
the requirements to insulating and
extinguishing tasks throughout the
entire service life
C Single-pole enclosure outside the
vessel
C Clear ready-for-service indicator
independent of temperature and
site altitude
C Complete protection zone of
switch-disconnector/fuse assembly even with thermal overload of
the HV HRC fuse (thermal protection function)
C Easy replacement of HV HRC
fuses without tools
C Reliable electrical and mechanical
switching device that requires no
maintenance
C Robust, non-corrosive, no-maintenance operating mechanisms

C No-maintenance, climate-independent and safe-to-touch cable
connections
C Free from leakage currents and
partial discharges
C No-maintenance, safe-to-touch
HV HRC fuse assembly that is
not affected by climatic impacts
Environmental compatibility
C Continuous and integrated
environmental management from
manufacture to disposal
C Tightly sealed vessel, virtually
no loss of gas
C Easy installation and
commissioning
Quality and environment
Quality and environmental mangement systems in compliance with
DIN EN ISO.
Cost-efficiency
The switchgear is cost-effient not
only in purchase but also in service
due to its compactness and minimum
space requirements as well as its
no-maintenance, climate independent-design.
4/49
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:53 Uhr
2 ring-main feeders
1 transformer feeder
Scheme 10
Photo 4/12
Seite 50
3 ring-main feeders
Scheme 71
Ring-main transformer block versions
8DJ10 secondary distribution switchgear: standard

type 1
7.224 kV, gas-insulated,
non-extendable block-type
construction
8DJ10 secondary distribution
switchgear is factory-assembled,
type-tested and metal-enclosed
switchgear for indoor installation.
Application areas
switchgear is used for power distribution in substations also for severe ambient conditions e.g. in:
C Industry
C Damp, sandy or dusty areas
C Simple outdoor substations
Main fields of application
C Compact substations
C Compact transformer substations,
e.g. for wind power stations
C Garage and vault substations
C Low-lying and underfloor
substations
C Pavement substations
C Accessible substations
C Extremely narrow designs
More than 80,000 8DJ10 secondary
distribution switchgear is in operation
worldwide.
4/50
4 ring-main feeders
2 transformer feeders
Scheme 62
Specific features of the standard

type 8DJ10, the narrowest type
by Siemens
C 2 heights available
1,360 mm
1,650 mm
C Switchgear design with up to
6 feeders
C Three-pole primary enclosure,
metal-enclosed
C Insulating gas SF6
C Gas-tight, welded switchgear vessel made of stainless steel, with
welded-in bushings for electrical
connections and mechanical components
C Independent of climate
with switch-disconnector and
make-proof grounding switch
function
C Cable connection for bushings with
outside cone
C Connection with cable plugs
in ring-main feeders with bolted
contact (M16)
in transformer feeders with
plug- in contact
C Connection of conventional cable
sealing ends (cable feeders)
for thermo-plastic-insulated
cables via AKE 20/630 elbow
adapter (by Siemens)
for ground cables via adapter

systems
C Easy installation
C Detachable lever mechanism (optional: rotary operating mechanism)
C With capacitive voltage detection
system at ring-main feeders
C Optional motor operating mechanism for switch-disconnector
(24 V DC up to 230 V AC for
remote control)
Cost-efficiency
Extremely low life-cycle costs
and maximum availability due to:
C Maintenance-free concept
C Climatic independence
C Minimum space requirements
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:53 Uhr
Seite 51
Medium Voltage
8DJ10 switchgear
Rated voltage Ur
kV
7.2
12
15
17.5
24
kV
20
28
36
38
50
kV
60
75
95
95
125
Rated frequency fr
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
Rated normal current Ir

for ring-main feeders
for transformer feeders depending on the
HV HRC fuse link
A
A
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 1 s
kA
20
25
20
25
20
25
16
20
25
16
20
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 3 s (option)
kA
20
20
20
20
20
Rated peak withstand current Ip
kA
50
63
50
63
50
63
40
50
63
40
50
Rated short-circuit making current Ima 1)

for transformer feeder
for ring-main feeder
kA
kA
25
50
63
25
50
63
25
50
63
25
40
50
63
25
40
50
Ambient temperature T
40 to +70
Rated insulation level:

withstand voltage Ud
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Up
Pressure values for insulation:

Rated filling pressure pre (at 20C)
1)
hPa (absolute)
1,500
Depending on HV HRC fuse set; please observe the max. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse elements
Table 4/22
Electrical data, temperature, filling pressure
Supply overview
Width mm
Depth
1)
mm
Height mm
Weight 2)
net weight approx. kg
Scheme 10
Scheme 71
Scheme 62
2 ring-main feeders and

(identification symbols 2RK + 1T)


710
1,060
1,410
775
775
775
1,360
1,650
1,360
650
1,360
650
270
300
340
390
500
580
RK = ring-main feeder
T = transformer feeder
1)
Additional wall distance required: 15 mm
2)
Depending on the equipment, e.g. motor operating mechanism
Table 4/23
Dimensions and weights: block versions consisting of ring-main and transformer feeders
For further technical data: please refer to the catalog HA 45.11 8DJ10 switch-disconnector system
4/51
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:53 Uhr
Seite 52
Ring-main transformer block

A
Transformer feeder
Section A-A
Ring-main feeder
Section B-B
17
B
11
24
18
1
12
25
13
20
14
30
20
15
10
19
8
L1
L2
26
L3
2
10
21
26
21
31
16
32
22
22
27
Standard
Cable connection for cable
elbow plug with plug-in contact,
cable routing to the back
Scheme 10
1 Feeder designation
label
2 Sockets for voltage
detection system
29
Cable connection with screw contact

(M 16), optionally for:
cable T-plugs or right-angle cable plugs
AKE 20/630 right-angle adapter
(by Siemens) for conventional cable
sealing ends
10 Lock for cable compartment cover
23
11 HV HRC fuse assembly, cover

removed
18
12 Lock for HV HRC fuse assembly
3 Ready-for-service
indicator
14 Rating and type plate
4 Switch position indication for grounding

function OPEN
GROUNDED
17 Cable elbow plug with plug-in

contact
16 Arrangement of cable connections
Option
Cable connection for straight
cable plugs with plug-in contact,
cable routing to the top
5 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting function

CLOSED OPEN
6 Locking device
(option for threeposition switchdisconnector)
7 Manual operating
mechanism for the
grounding function
8 Manual operating
mechanism for the
switch-disconnecting
function
9 Short-circuit/groundfault indicator (option)
Personnel safety
All feeder covers can only be opened when
the respective three-position switch-disconnector is switched to GROUNDED.
Fig. 4/28
Switching panel design example
4/52
18 Transformer cable connection

20 Three-position switch-disconnector
21 Switchgear vessel, filled with
SF6 gas
23 Straight cable plug with plug-in
contact
17
24 Cover of the HV HRC fuse

compartment
18
25 Spring-operated/stored-energy
mechanism
26 Cover of cable connection
compartment
Option
(only for schemes 10 and 71)
cable connection for elbow
plug with plug-in contact,
cable routing to the right
27 Grounding connection M12

30 Spring-operated mechanism
31 Ring-main cable connection
32 Option: Elbow adapter AKE 20/630
with conventional cable sealing end
(M16 bolted contact)
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:53 Uhr
Seite 53
Medium Voltage
Radial transformer panel

1 radial cable connection
Scheme 01
Photo 4/13

2 ring-main feeders
Scheme 10

3 ring-main feeders
2 transformer feeders
Scheme 82
Typical versions
8DJ20 secondary distribution switchgear: standard

type 2
7.224 kV, gas-insulated,
non-extendable block-type
construction
8DJ20 ring-main units are factoryassembled, type-tested and metalenclosed switchgear for indoor
installation.
Typical uses
switchgear is used for power distribution in substations also for severe ambient conditions e.g. in:
C Industry
C Damp, sandy or dusty areas
C Simple outdoor substations
Main fields of application
C Integrated substations
C Integrated transformer substations,
e.g. for wind power stations
C Garage and vault substations
C Low-lying and underfloor
substations
C Pavement substations
C Accessible substations
Specific features of the standard

type 8DJ20, the most diverse type
by Siemens
C 3 heights available
1,200 mm
1,400 mm
1,760 mm
C Switchgear design with up to
5 feeders
C Three-pole primary enclosure,
metal-enclosed
C Insulating gas SF6
C Gas-tight, welded switchgear vessel made of stainless steel, with
welded-in bushings for electrical
connections and mechanical
components
C Maintenance-free
C Independent of climate
with switch-disconnector and
function
C Cable connection for bushings
with outside cone
C Connection with cable plugs
in ring-main feeders with bolted
contact (M16)
in transformer feeders with
plug-in contact
C Connection of conventional cable
sealing ends
for thermo-plastic-insulated
cables via AKE 20/630 elbow
adapter (by Siemens)
for ground cables via adapter

systems
C Easy installation
C Detachable lever mechanism (optional: rotary operating mechanism)
C With capacitive voltage detection
system at ring-main feeders
C Optional motor operating mechanism for switch-disconnector
(24 V DC up to 230 V AC for
remote control)
C Various possibilities for transformer
cable connection:
Standard: front
Option: bottom, for cable routing
to the rear
Cost-efficiency
Extremely low life-cycle costs
and maximum availability due to:
C Maintenance-free concept
C Independence of climate
4/53
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:53 Uhr
Seite 54
8DJ20 switchgear
Rated voltage Ur
kV
7.2
12
15
17. 5
24
Rated insulation level:

Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Ud kV
kV
20
60
28
75
36
95
38
95
50
125
Rated frequency fr
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
Rated normal current Ir

for ring-main feeders
for transformer feeders depending on the
HV HRC fuse link
A
A
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
400 or 630
200
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 1 s
kA
20
25
20
25
20
25
16
20
25
16
20
Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 3 s (option)
kA
20
20
20
20
20
kA
50
63
50
63
50
63
40
50
63
40
50
Rated short-circuit making current Ima 1)

for transformer feeder
for ring-main feeder
kA
kA
25
50
63
25
50
63
25
50
63
25
40
50
63
25
40
50
63
40 to +70

Rated filling pressure pre (at 20C)
1)
hPa (absolute)
1,500
Depending on HV HRC fuse set; please observe the max. let-through current of the HV HRC fuse elements
Table 4/24
Ring-main/transformer block
A
Ring-main feeder
Section B-B
Transformer feeder
Section A-A
6
1
2
3
L1
L2
L3
Scheme 10
1 Switchgear vessel, filled with SF6 gas

3 Operating mechanism for three-position
switch-disconnector
Fig. 4/29
Panel design Example
4/54
Standard
Cable connection for elbow plug
(option: for cable T-plug), cable
routing to the bottom
4 Transformer cable connection:
Cable elbow plug with plug-in
contact (option)
5 Ring-main connection: cable T-plug
with bolted contact (option)
Cable connection with bolted contact (M16):

for cable T-plug or cable elbow plug
for conventional cable sealing ends via
AKE 20/630 elbow adapter (by Siemens)
6 HV HRC fuse assembly
For further technical data:
please refer to the catalog HA 45.31,
8DJ20 switch-disconnector system
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:53 Uhr
Seite 55
Medium Voltage
Dimensions
Scheme
Components shown
with dashes are
optional
Weight1)
Width Depth2) Height net weight
approx.
kg
mm
mm**) mm
Scheme
Dimensions
Components shown
with dashes are
optional
Width Depth2) Height
1 transformer feeder and

1 ring-main connection
Scheme 21
1 ring-main connection and

mm
mm**) mm
Weight1)
net weight
approx.
kg
Radial transformer panels

Scheme 01
K Radial cable
connection incoming feeder
K
Radial cable con

nection K(E) (with
make-proof grounding
switch)
(identification symbol 1T)

510
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
140
160
200
K(E)
(identification symbols 1K(E) + 1T)

710
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
200
210
250
Single panel
Scheme 02
a) Ring-main
connection
b) Radial cable
connection
RK
1 ring-main feeder with

radial cable connection
(identification symbol 1RK)
710
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
150
170
210
Block versions, consisting of ring-main and transformer feeders (with HV HRC fuse assembly)
Scheme 10*)
(identification symbol 1RK + 1T)
1,060
710
775
280
300
340
RV
T
Scheme 72
1,200
1,400
1,760
200
210
250

1,410
1,760
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
340
360
400

Scheme 81*)
775
RV
1,200
1,400
1,760

Scheme 71*)
1 ring-main feeder and

RV
Scheme 20
775
T
Scheme 82
1,200
1,400
1,760
420
440
480

1,410
1,760
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
400
420
460
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
470
500
540
Block versions, consisting of ring-main feeders (without HV HRC fuse installation)

Scheme 11
Scheme 70*
2 ring-main feeders
Scheme 32*)
710
1,060
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
160
170
210
4 ring-main feeders
Scheme 84
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
210
230
270
5 ring-main feeders
1,410
1,760
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
280
300
340
1) Depending on the equipment, e.g. motor operating mechanism

2) With transformer cable routing to the bottom
*) Scheme also suitable for outdoor enclosures
**) Additional wall distance required: 15 mm
Fig. 4/30
3 ring-main feeders
Identification symbol: RK =
K =
T
=
K(E) =
775
1,200
1,400
1,760
350
380
420
ring-main feeder
cable feeder
transformer feeder
cable feeder for radial cable connection
with make-proof grounding switch
8DJ20 switchgear, up to 24 kV, SF6-insulated, supply overview, schemes
4/55
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 56
8DH10 switchgear up to
24 kV, gas-insulated,
extendable
Modular design for consumer
substations
Application
8DH10 switchgear is factory-assembled, type-tested and three-phase
metal-enclosed single-busbar
switchgear for indoor installation:
C Up to 24 kV
C Feeder currents up to 630 A
C Busbar currents up to 1250 A
Typical uses
8DH10 switchgear is used even under severe environmental conditions
for power distribution in secondary
distribution systems, e.g. in:
C Substations, customer transfer substations, distribution substations
and switching substations of power
supply and public utilities
C Industrial plants
Examples
C Airports
C Lignite open-cast mines
C Sewage treatment plants
C Port facilities
C and many other applications
Modular design
C Individual panels and panel blocks
can be freely combined and
extended without the need
for work involving SF6 gas at site
C Low-voltage cubicles can be supplied in two overall heights and are
wired to the panel by means of
plug-in connections
4/56
Photo 4/14
8DH10 extensible switchgear in modular construction
Reliability
C Type- and routine-tested
C Standardized and manufactured
using numerically controlled
machines
C Quality management system
according to DIN EN ISO 9001
C More than 400,000 8DJ/8DH panels have been in service for many
years all over the world
The 8DH10 switchgear complies with
the requirements for medium-voltage
switchgear, e.g.:
C High degree of security of operation, reliability and availability
C No gas work at site
C Easy installation and extension
C Operation not influenced by
environmental conditions
C Fully insulated, single-pole, plug-in
busbars for interconnection of
individual panels and panel blocks
C Busbar arrangement for panel

blocks within the switchgear
vessel filled with SF6 gas
C Single-phase, cast-resin-insulated,
enclosed, air-insulated HV HRC
fuse assembly.
Fuse assembly arranged at the top,
outside the switchgear vessel
C All live parts are protected against
humidity, pollution, dust and small
animals
C Connection of cable T-plugs or cable elbow plugs for thermo-plasticinsulated cables up to 300 mm2
C All switching devices are accommodated safe-to-touch in earthed
enclosure, HV HRC fuse assembly
and cable sealing ends safe-totouch in grounded enclosure
C Access to HV HRC fuses and to
cable connection compartment only
possible in grounded state
C Hermetically sealed switchgear
vessel; all bushings for electrical
connections and operating mechanism welded gas-tight without
seals
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 57
Medium Voltage
8DH10 switchgear station
Rated insulation level
Rated voltage Ur
kV
Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage Ud kV
kV
7.2
20
60
12
28
75
15
35
95
17.5
38
95
24
50
125
Rated frequency fr
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
Rated normal current Ir for:

ring-main feeders
transformer feeders depending on the
HV HRC fuse link
circuit-breaker feeders
section sectionaliser panels (type LT1, LT2)
A
A
400 or 630
200
A
A
400 or 630
400 or 630
Rated normal current Ir for

busbar
metering panels
A
A
630 (standard), 1,250 (option)

up to 630
Rated short-time withstand current Ik

for switchgear with tk = 1 s
kA
20
25
20
25
20
25
16
20
25
16
20

for switchgear with tk = 1 s (option)
kA
20
20
20
20
20
kA
50
63
50
63
50
63
40
50
63
40
50
Rated short-circuit making current Ima

ring-main feeders
circuit-breaker feeders
transformer feeders, depending on the
cut-off current of the HV HRC fuse
kA
50
63
25
50
63
25
50
63
25
40
50
63
25
40
40
25
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc

for circuit-breaker feeders
kA
20
25
20
25
20
25
16
20
25
16
20
without secondary equipment
Panels with secondary equipment
and circuit-breaker panels
Class Minus 25 indoor (-25 C up to +70 C)

Class Minus 5 indoor (-5 C up to +55 C)

Rated filling pressure pre (at 20 C)
hPa (absolute) 1,500
Minimum operating pressure pme for insulation

Table 4/25
hPa (absolute) 1,300
with switch positions: CLOSED
OPEN GROUNDED. Operation as
multi-purpose switch-disconnector
with the functions:
C Each 8DH10 switchgear can
consist of individual panels
(preferably) or panel blocks
depending on the requirements.
One panel block can comprise

up to 4 feeders.
C Circuit-breaker panels are supplied
with an integrated three-phase
current transformer at the cable
connection for connection of
protection systems, optionally for
digital protection systems or
CT-operated protection systems.
C The 8DH10 switchgear requires

no maintenance (VDE 0670
Part 1000/IEC 60694)
For further technical data:

please refer to the catalog
HA 41.11 8DH10 switchgear
4/57
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 58
Ring-main feeder
Section
Transformer feeder
Section
61
61
1
2
31
32
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
23
11
12
15
3
38
5
6
7
25
24
13
14
15
16
26
18
27
19
23
12
35
13
14
15
16
36
17
37
18
10
27
19
28
20
11
15
17
10
34
33
28
20
29
29
21
21
22
22
Type RK
Circuit-breaker feeder
Type TR
Section
1 Option: low-voltage cubicle
2 Niche for customer-side low-voltage equipment,
with swing-out cover
3 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting
function CLOSED OPEN
4 Switch position indication for grounding function
OPEN GROUNDED
43
44
61
5 Ready-for-service indicator
45
46
47
48
49
50
11
5
6
8
9
15
10
7 Mimic diagram
8 Option: short-circuit/ground-fault indicator
7
51
52
12
13
63
3
4
53
14
23
16
17
46
9 Sockets for voltage detection system

10 Arrangement of busbars
11 Feeder designation label
12 Option: locking device for three-position
switch-disconnector
24
14 Manual operating mechanism for the

switch-disconnecting function
25
26
54
27
18
28
19
29
20
55
21
13 Manual operating mechanism for the grounding function
15
16 Arrangement of cable connections

17 Busbar system
18 Switchgear vessel, filled with SF6 gas
19 Busbar connection
20 Pressure relief device
21 Busbar compartment
22 Ground busbar with ground connection
22
Type LS1 (without voltage transformer)
Fig. 4/31
Switchgear panel design (example)
4/58
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 59
Medium Voltage
Billing metering panel, air-insulated
Section
61
1
2
40
11
39
39
41
7
42
62
22
30
Type ME1
25 Bushing for cable plug with screw contact (M16)
Vacuum circuit-breaker:
45 Opening for the operating crank handle
for closing with manual operation
for emergency stop with motor operation
26 Option: cable T-plug
46 Operating mechanism box with operating mechanism
27 Cable compartment cover

47 Mechanical ON pushbutton (not applicable with

spring-operated mechanism)
48 Mechanical OFF pushbutton
30 Grounding connection for grounding set
49 Operations counter
31 HV HRC fuse assembly, cover removed
50 Spring charged indication
32 Handle for exchanging the HV HRC fuse insert
51 Vacuum interrupter
33 Lock for HV HRC fuse assembly
52 Switch position indication
34 Cover for the HV HRC fuse compartment
53 Option: lock between vacuum circuit-breaker and

three-position switch-disconnector
24 Spring-operated mechanism
35 Spring-operated / stored-energy mechanism

36 Bushing for cable plug with bolted contact
37 Cable elbow plug with plug-in contact
38 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting
function CLOSED OPEN with HV HRC fuse
tripped or f-release tripped, if applicable
39 Cover for access to the busbar connection and to
the instrument transformers, screwed
40 Voltage transformer type 4MR
41 Current transformer type 4MA7
42 Cover to busbar connection compartment, screwed
43 Option: SIPROTEC bay control unit
44 Low-voltage cubicle (standard)
54 Option: three-phase current transformer

(protective transformer)
55 Cable-type slip-on current transformer
56 Pluggable 4MT3 voltage transformer on the busbar
57 Bushing for connecting the pluggable voltage
transformers
58 Plug connection acc. to EN 50181/DIN EN 50181
as connection type A
59 Option: pluggable 4MT8 voltage transformer
at the connection
60 Depth cable compartment cover
61 Cable duct, withdrawable, for control cables
and/or bus wires
62 Screwed cover
63 Option: lock between three-position switchdisconnector and circuit-breaker
4/59
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 60
Busbars
Features
C Safe-to-touch due to metallic
covers
C Plug-in design
C Consisting of round-bar copper,
insulated by means of siliconerubber
C Busbar connection with cross and
end adapters, insulated with
silicon rubber
C Insensitive to pollution and
condensation
C Switchgear extension or panel
replacement is possible without
the need to carry out gas works
C Busbar arrangement for the panel
blocks within the switchgear vessel
filled with gas
C Option: screened busbar
Field control with the aid of
conductive layers on the siliconerubber insulation
Installation of 4MC7032 current
transformers is possible
Independent of the installation
height
C No gas work
C To be installed from the front
C Replacement of individual panels
possible to the front without having
to move panels
C Groups of up to 5 panels can be
pre-assembled at the factory
C Fast installation on site
Fig. 4/32
Combination of individual panels with plug-in, silicone-insulated busbar.

No SF6 gas work is required for installation or extension.
7
8
9
1
10
2
3
4
5
Busbar system
7 Primary enclosure panel 1
2 Cross adapter
8 Primary enclosure panel 2
3 Busbar insulation of silicone rubber

4 Threaded bolt M12/M16
5 Busbar, Cu, 32 mm
6 Stopper
Fig. 4/33
4/60
Switchgear container
1 End adapter
Plug-in busbar, insulated, single-pole,

unscreened version (plan view)
9 Bushing
10 Capacitive tap at the bushings,
grounded (standard)
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 61
Medium Voltage
SIMOSEC modular
switchgear up to 24 kV, airinsulated, extendable
Modular design for consumer
substations
Application
SIMOSEC switchgear is factory-assembled, type-tested and threephase metal-enclosed switchgear
for indoor installation:
C Up to 2 kV
C Feeder currents up to 1,250 A
C Busbar currents up to 1,250 A
C Up to 25 kA
Reliability
C Type- and routine-tested
C Standardized and manufactured using numerically controlled machines
C Quality management system
according to DIN EN ISO 9001
C More than 400,000 switchgear
components have been in service
for many years all over the world.
C Without cross-insulation of the insulating distances from phase to
phase
The SIMOSEC switchgear complies
with the requirements for mediumvoltage switchgear, e.g.:
Typical uses
SIMOSEC switchgear is used for
power distribution in distribution
systems with feeder currents up
to 1,250 A, e.g. in:
C Substations, customer transfer
substations, distribution substations and switching substations of
power supply and public utilities
C Public buildings such as, for
example, high-rise buildings, train
stations, hospitals
C Industrial plants
Typical applications
C Airports
C Sewage treatment plants
C Port facilities
C and many other applications
Modular design
C Individual panels can be freely
combined and extended
C Option: low-voltage cubicle in
two overall heights
Personal safety
C All switching operations executable
with the panel front closed
C Metal-enclosed, metal-clad or
cubicle-type switchgear
C HV HRC fuses and cable sealing
ends only accessible with
grounded feeders
C Logic interlock
C Capacitive voltage detection
system to verify the isolation
from supply
C Grounding of feeders via makeproof grounding switches possible
Operational reliability
C Components such as , for example, operating mechanisms, threeposition switches, vacuum circuitbreakers proven for many years
C Metal-clad panels (metallic partition
between busbar and switchgear as
well as between switchgear and
cable connection compartment)
C Cubicle-type panels with metallic
partition between switchgear and
busbar compartment
C Metal-enclosed three-position
switch with gas-insulated switching
functions
sealed by welding in the switchgear
container for life
Photo 4/15
SIMOSEC extensible switchgear

in modular construction
and thus no cross-insulation from

phase to phase
with welded bushings for cable
connection, busbar and driving
mechanics
Re-availability
with gas-insulated, maintenancefree arc quenching principle
C Metallic partition between busbar
compartment and switching devices as well as the cable
connection compartment
C Separate pressure relief for each
compartment
C Cable test without isolation of
the busbar
C Three-phase current transformer
installation location for selective
disconnection of circuit-breaker
feeders
Cost-efficiency
Low life-cycle costs and high availability during the complete product
service life due to:
C Three-position switch with gasinsulated arc quenching principle
C 3AH vacuum circuit-breaker
C Simple extendability of the
switchgear
C Standard protective devices,
e.g. SIPROTEC 4 multifunction
protection
For further information and data,

please refer to the catalog HA 41.21,
SIMOSEC Switchgear
4/61
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 62
Common details on electrical data, filling pressure and temperature

Rated voltage Ur
kV 7.2
kV 20
withstand voltage Ud
Rated lightning surge withstand voltage Up kV 60
Rated insulation level
Rated frequency fr
15
35
17.5
38
24
50
75
95
95
125
50/60 Hz
Rated operating current Ir

of the busbar
1)
Standard
Option
630 A
1,250 A


Rated filling pressure pre
12
28
up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20
up to kA 20 20 20 20 20
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50
2)
Minimum operating pressure pme
2)
for insulation
1,500 hPa (absolute) at 20 C
for insulation
1,300 hPa (absolute) at 20 C
for panels without sedoncary equipment

for panels with sedoncary equipment
Class Minus 25 indoor (25 C up to +55 C)

Class Minus 5 indoor (5 C up to +55 C)
Ring-main panel type RK and cable connection panel type K, K-E

1)
for feeder and transfer, panel tpye RK

for feeder, panel type K, K-E
for feeder, panel type K1, K1-E

current Ima
630 A (standard), (400 A on request)

630 A (standard), (400 A on request)
630 A (standard), 1,250 A
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50
Transformer panel type TR

1)
for feeder
3)
200 A
3)
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50

current Ima 3)
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50
Inside dimension e for HV HRC fuse-links

Circuit-breaker panel type LS
1)
mm 292
for feeder
for transfer
442
442
442
with
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50
for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers
1) Rated
operating currents are defined for ambient temperatures of

40 C. The average value over 24 hours is 35 C max. (acc. to
IEC 60694/VDE 0670 Part 1000)
2) Pressure
292
for panel type LS1

and LS1-U 3AH5* 630 A
for panel type LS11
and LS11-U 3AH6* 630 A
for panel type LS31, LS32 and LS31-U 3AH6* 1,250 A

current Ima
current Isc
4)
values for gas-insulated containers
up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20
3) With
panels of type TR and ME31-F depending on the max.

let-through current of the HV HRC fuse-link (ID 25 kA)
4) With
inside dimension e = 192 mm, a 100 mm long extension

pipe is additionally required for the 292 mm fuse-link
Table 4/26
Elecrical data of the switchgear panels, pressure values, temperature
4/62
* Type designation of the

vacuum circuit-breaker
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 63
Medium Voltage
7.2
12
15
17.5
24
Busbar grounding panel type SE

current Ima
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50
Busbar voltage metering panels type ME3 and type ME31-F

3)
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50

current Ima 3)
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50
Inside dimension e in the panel type ME31-F
for HV HRC fuse-links
292 mm
Billing metering panels type ME1

1)
for transfer, panel type ME1 and ME1-H

for feeder as cable connection panel type
ME1-K
for busbar connection, panel type
ME1-S
for riser panel, type HF
630 A, 1,250 A
630 A, 1,250 A
630 A, 1,250 A
for
for
for
for
for
630 A
630 A
630 A
630 A
1,250 A
630 A, 1,250 A
Sectionalizer panels type LT

1)
panel
panel
panel
panel
panel
types LT10 and HF, with 3AH5 *

type LT1, with 3AH5 *: on request
types LT2 and LT22 630 A

current Ima
up to kA 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 40 50 63 40 50

current Isc
for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers
up to kA 20 25 20 25 16 20 25 16 20 25 16 20
Electrical service life
for 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers:

at rated operating current Ir 1)
at rated short-circuit breaking
current Isc
10,000 operating cycles

50 breaking operations
35 breaking operations with 3AH6* with 25 kA
1) Rated
operating currents are defined for ambient temperatures

of 40 C. The average value over 24 hours is 35 C max. (acc.
to IEC 60694/VDE 0670 Part 1000)
2) Pressure
Table 4/27
values for gas-insulated containers
3) With
panels of type TR and ME31-F depending on the max.

let-through current of the HV HRC fuse-link (ID 25 kA)
* Type designation of the

vacuum circuit-breaker
4) With
inside dimension e = 192 mm, a 100 mm long extension

pipe is additionally required for the 292 mm fuse-link
Electrical data of the switchgear panels, pressure values, temperature
4/63
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:54 Uhr
Seite 64
Ring-main and cable panels, transformer, riser and busbar grounding panels
Ring-main panels
as feeder panels
Transformer panels
as feeder panels
Type RK,
375 mm wide
Option
Option
Type TR
375 mm wide
Option *
Option *
3)
Option *
Option
alternatively
Option
Option *
1)
1)
Type LS1, 500 mm wide

Option
Option
Type TR1
500 mm wide
Option
6) 8)
Option
Option
2)
Option *
Option
Option
1)
1)
3)
Riser panels
630 A and 1,250 A
Ring-main panels
as transfer panels for mounting to
panels of type ME1 or ME1-H
Type RK-U,
Option
500 mm wide
Option
Type HF BB
375 mm wide
Standard:
for bus-sectionalization
to the right
Option
Option *
Option:
for bus-sectionalization
to the left
3)
Option
P2
P1
2)
Option
Cable panels
as feeder panels, 630 A
Type K,
375 mm wide
Option**
Option**
Option
alternatively
Option**
Option
alternatively
Option**
1)
3)
Option**
Option
1)
Fig. 4/34
Product range (basic range, further types available)
4/64
alternatively
Option
Cable panels
as feeder panels, 630 A, with
Type K-E,
Option
375 mm wide
Busbar
grounding panels
Type SE1
375 mm wide
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 65
Medium Voltage
Billing metering panels

630 and 1,250 A
standard
3AH5
vacuum
circuit-breaker
HV HRC fuse
3AH6
vacuum
circuit-breaker
Grounding switch
Type ME1
375 mm wide
Option
Option
4)
Standard **:
for bus sectionalization to the
right
P2
P1
5)
2)
Three-position
switch-disconnector

630 and 1,250 A
for busbar connection
Option
2)
alternatively *
Option
P1 P2
Type ME1-S
500 mm wide
Standard **:
right
Option
2)
2)
Make-proof
grounding switch
Capacitive voltage
detection system
Fixed point
for grounding
Insulator-type current
transformer 4MA,
cast-resin-insulated
Fixed point
for busbar grounding
Voltage transformer,
e.g. 4MR, single-pole,
Cable (not included

in the scope of
delivery)
2)
Option
2nd cable (not

included in the
scope of supply)

630 and 1,250 A **
for cable connection
Option
Option
Surge arrester
Type ME1-K BB
375 mm wide
Standard B:
right
P2
P1
2)
P1 and P2
are terminal
markings of the
current transformer

630 and 1,250 A **
for busbar connection
Type ME1-KS
375 mm wide
Option
as right- or lefthand end panel
Option
2)
Up to 12 kV
on request
** Connection of 3
cables possible
B
P2
P1
Option: bus
sectionalization to the left
BB For mounting to
left- or right-hand
ring-main panels
of type RK-U
4/65
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 66
Circuit-breaker panels
Circuit-breaker panels 1,250 A
as feeder panels
Option
4)
Option
3)
Option
Option
P1
2)
P2
Option**
Option
3)
Option
Option
1)
2)
Option
6)
Type LS31
750 mm wide
with 3AH6 vacuum
circuit-breaker,
withdrawable
for the connection
of 2 cables max.
Option
5)
alternatively
Option
with 3AH5 vacuum

circuit-breaker,
fixed-mounted
alternatively
6) 7)
alternatively alternatively
Option
Option
Option
Type LS1
750 mm wide
alternatively
Circuit-breaker panels 630 A

as feeder panels
Option
1)
3)
with 3AH6 vacuum

circuit-breaker,
withdrawable
Option
Option
Option**
3)
Option
6)
Option
Option
2)
1)
Option
6)
1)

panels of type ME1... or ME1-H

panels of type ME1... or ME1-H
4)
Option
2)
Option
6) 7)
Option:
for bus sectionalization to the left
Option
Option
3)
alternatively
Option B
Option
P1
2)
P2
5)
Option
Option
with 3AH5 vacuum

circuit-breaker,
fixed-mounted
Standard:
for bus sectionalization to
the right
P1
P2
Type LS1-U
750 mm wide
Type LS11-U
750 mm wide
with 3AH6 vacuum
circuit-breaker,
withdrawable
Bus sectionalization only
possible to
the right
6)
Fig. 4/35
Product range (basic range, further types available)
4/66
Option
3)
Option B
alternatively
Option
3)
Option
Option
Option
1)
Option
for the connection

of 3 cables max.
(4 cables*)
Option
5)
with 3AH6 vacuum

circuit-breaker,
withdrawable
2)
Option
alternatively
5)
Option
alternatively
alternatively
Option
Option
Type LS11
750 mm wide
Option**
Option
alternatively
Option
Option
alternatively
Type LS32
875 mm wide
Option
P1
2)
P2
Option
6)
5)
Type LS31-U
750 mm wide
with 3AH6 vacuum
circuit-breaker,
withdrawable
Bus sectionalization only
possible to
the right
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 67
Medium Voltage
Bus sectionalizer panels 630 A

with 1 three-position switch-disconnector
Option
Option
Three-position
switch-disconnector
Capacitive voltage
detection system
Three-position
switch-disconnector
Make-proof
grounding switch
Insulator-type current
transformer 4MA,
Fixed point for

grounding
Three-phase
current transformer
4MC63 . . .
Cable (not
included in the
scope of supply)
6)
e.g. 4MR, single-pole,
2nd cable (not

included in the
scope of supply)
7)
e.g. 4MR, doublepole, cast-resin-insulated
Surge arrester
Type LT2
750 mm wide
corresponds to type
RK-U with type RK-U
2)
3)
with 2 three-position switch-disconnectors
Option
Option
Type LT22
750 mm wide
corresponds to type
RK-U with type RK-U
Option
Option
Type LT22-W
750 mm wide
Option
Option
Option
3)
corresponds to type
RK-U with type RK-U
3)
Option
P2
2)
alternatively
TIP_Kap04_E
P1
Option
6) 7)
P1 and P2
are terminal
markings of the
current transformer
*
Up to 12 kV
on request
** Connection of 3
cables possible
B
Option: bus
sectionalization to
the left
BB For mounting to
left- or right-hand
ring-main panels of
type RK-U
4/67
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 68
Transformer panel as feeder

HA41-2394d eps
HA41-2393d eps
Ring-main panel as feeder
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
23
24
19
58
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
59
20
25
18
60
2
23
24
19
58
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
59
27
57
26
27
18
20
57
21
21
34
61
28
35
34
35
61
22
31
29
31
33
22
32
29
33
61
56
23
30
Type RK
22
22
Section
30
Type RT
Section
HA41-2395e eps
Billing metering panel
1 Option: low-voltage cubicle

2 Niche for customer-side low-voltage equipment,
cover can be screwed off
3 Option: CAPDIS voltage indication system
60
2
23
24
10
33
37
38
38
8
16
57
9
33
33
40
40
4 Option: short-circuit/ground-fault indicator

5 Option: Ready-for-service indicator for switchgear
6 Switch position indication for switch-disconnecting function CLOSED OPEN
7 Switch position indication for grounding function
OPEN GROUNDED
8 Feeder designation label
9 Mimic diagram
10 Option: sockets for capacitive voltage detection
system (depending on arrangement)
11 Option: ON OFF momentary-contact rotary
control switch for motor drive with local-remote
changeover switch for the three-position switchdisconnector
12 Option: Locking device for three-position
switch-disconnector
13 Pressure relief device for switchgear
65
14 Manual operating mechanism for the grounding

function
15 Manual operating mechanism for the switchdisconnecting function
39
39

17 Gas-insulated container for switchgear
30

19 Bushing-type insulator for the busbar
Type ME1
Section
Fig. 4/36
Switchgear panel design (example)
4/68
20 Bushing-type insulator for the feeder
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 69
Medium Voltage
Circuit-breaker panel (with 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker)
HA41-2396e eps
21 Insulating collar (e.g. for Up > 95 kV)
22 Cable mounting rail with cable clamps (option) for

cable fixing
23 Busbar
60
24 Insulating cap * on the busbar
2
23
24
51
19
58
51
5
45
46
44
8
47
10
48
11
12
13
14
6
7
15
16
17
64
59
49
9
25
43
20
22
28 Cable connection
29 Cable compartment cover
30 Ground terminal (for position, see dimension drawing)
31 Grounding switch for the cable connection
41
32 Inspection window
57
33 Insulators
50
34 Insulating collar
35 Option: HV HRC fuse-link
28
36 Option for panel types LS11... and LT11... only: logic

interlocks between circuit-breaker OPEN and threeposition switch-disconnector as well as locking device
for three-position switch-disconnector
29
37 Option: part of the low-voltage equipment
61
38 Cover, screwed
21
61
26 Spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism for

64
20
21
25 Spring-operated mechanism for three-position

switch-disconnector
22
30
39 4MR current transformer

40 4MA7 insulator-type current transformer, vacuum
circuit-breaker
41 3AH5 vacuum circuit-breaker, fixed-mounted
42 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker, withdrawable
Type LS1
43 Operating mechanism box
Section
44 Manual operation
for closing with manual operation
Circuit-breaker panel (with 3AH6 vacuum circuit-breaker)

HA41-2397d eps
for emergency stop with motor operation
1
60
52
11
36
17
14
15
16
13
64
59
36
5
6
7
8
9
10
54
20
56
50
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
46 Mechanical ON pushbutton (not applicable with

spring-operated mechanism)
55
2
23
24
52
19
58
45 Mechanical OFF pushbutton
25
49 Switch position indication

50 Option: 4MC63 53 three-phase current transformer
51 Option: SIPROTEC easy 7SJ45 time-overcurrent
protection
52 Option: SIPROTEC 4 7SJ62 multifunction protection
53 Cover* for cable connection glands
54 Insulating cap* on the bushing-type insulator
64
55 Option: Cable duct, withdrawable, for control cables

and/or bus wires
57
56 Logic interlock for three-position switch-disconnector

57 Grounding busbar
54
58 Metal cladding of the busbar compartment
43
59 Metal cladding of the cable connection compartment
29
60 Cover of the busbar compartment for panel expansion
42
61 Cable sealing end (not included in the scope of supply)
33
62 Option: feeder grounding via make-proof grounding

switch
62
33
63
61
61
63 or feeder grounding via the vacuum circuit-breaker

(= locking device for feeder grounded when circuitbreaker CLOSED)
64 Lock for cable compartment cover in circuit-breaker
panels
22
56
Type LS11
48 Operations counter
27
50
53
47 Spring charged indication
30
Section
65 Cover of the transformer connection compartment

* For example for Up 95 kV, Ur 15 kV
4/69
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 70
Busbars
1 Busbar
C Shock-hazard protection by means

of metallic encapsulation
C Metal-clad busbar compartment
C 3-pole version, can be screwed
from panel to panel
C Simple switchgear expansion
possible
C Consisting of copper:
Fl E-Cu for 630 A
Rd E-Cu for > 630 A up to 1,250 A
HV HRC fuse-link
C For transformer panels of type TR
and TR1
C For busbar voltage metering panel
type ME31-F
C HV HRC fuse-links acc. to
DIN 43625 (main dimensions) with
striker pin; version medium acc.
to IEC 60282/ VDE 0670 Part 4*)
as short-circuit protection in front
of transformers,
with selectivity when selected
correctly to upstream and downstream devices
C Requirements met as high-voltage
switch fuse combination
C Selection of HV HRC fuses for
transformers
C Fuse replacement only possible
with a grounded feeder
C Option: shunt release at the
operating mechanism of the
2 Insulating cap (e.g. for Ur > 17,5 kV)

on the busbar
3 Bushing-type insulator for
the busbar
Photo 4/16
Busbar compartments over 3 panels (example), side view
CLOSED indication,
hand- or motor-operated
HV HRC fuse tripped or
f-release tripped indication
OPEN indication
Photo 4/17
Masking frame of a transformer feeder
4 Insulating collar
5 HV HRC fuse (not included in the

scope of supply)
6 Grounding switch (rated short-circuit

breaking current Ima = 4 kA)
for the cable connection
7 Cover for cable lug connection (e.g.
for rated voltage Ur = 24 kV)
8 Cable sealing end (not included in
the scope of supply)
*)
For standards, please refer to page

4/43 and catalog HA 41.21
4/70
Photo 4/18
HV HRC fuses in the transformer panel type TR, side view
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 71
Medium Voltage
C Option: Tripped signal of the

in the transformer feeder (transformer switch) for electrical remote
signaling with 1 normally open
contact (1NO)
HV HRC fuse tripped
When a HV HRC fuse-link has
tripped, the operating mechanism
has to be switched to the OPEN
position to charge the spring.
Then, the equipment can be
grounded using the three-position
switch-disconnector and the fuse
can, for example, be replaced.
Replacement of HV HRC fuse-links
C Isolation and grounding of the
transformer feeder
C Then, manual replacement of the
HV HRC fuse-link
4/71
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 72
4.3 Medium Voltage

Equipment, Product
Range
Device
Devices for medium-voltage

switchgear
Rated
voltage
Ratedshort-circuit
current
Rated
short-time
current (3 s)
kV
kA
kA
3AH
7.236
13.172
13.172
NXACT
1224
31.5
31.5
Components for
3AH VCB
3AY2
1224
1640
1640 (1 s)
Outdoor vacuum
circuit-breaker
3AF
3AG
1240.5
2531.5
2531.5
Indoor
vacuum switch
3CG
7.224
1620
Vacuum circuit-breaker/
disconnector unit
3AH58
12
13.125
13.125
Indoor vacuum
contactors
3TL
7.224
8 (1 s)
Indoor vacuum
switching tube
VS
7.224
12.580
12.580
Indoor switchdisconnector
3CJ
1236
2025 (1 s)
Indoor disconnector
3D
1240.5
1663 (1 s)
HV HRC fuses
3GD
7.236
31.580
Fuse base
3GH
7.236
44
urge current
strength
Current and voltage

transformers for indoor
and outdoor installations
4M
1236
Indoor vacuum
circuit-breaker
The comprehensive switchgear

device range enables Siemens to
supply almost any type of device required for the medium-voltage range
of 7.2 to 36 kV. Table 4/28 presents
an overview of products and their
main properties.
All components and equipment comply with international and national
standards as follows:
Vacuum circuit-breakers
C IEC 60056,
partially IEC 62271-100
C IEC 60694
C BS 5311
Vacuum switches
C IEC 60265-1
Vacuum switch/fuse
combinations
C IEC 60420
Vacuum contactors
C IEC 60470
C UL 347
Switch disconnectors
C IEC 60129
C IEC 60265-1
HV HRC fuses
C IEC 60282
Current and voltage transformers
C IEC 60044-1; 60044-2
C BS 7625, 7626
C ANSI C57.13
Further information can be obtained
at fax no.: +49 9131/73 46 54
Table 4/28
4/72
Type
Equipment range for medium-voltage switchgear
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 73
Medium Voltage
Rated
operating
current
Switching operations
Fields of application /
comment
mechanical
with rated
operating
with rated
fault
80012,000
10,000
12,0000
10,000
30,000
25100
1,2502,500
10,000
10,000
2550
1,2502,500
Equipment manufacturers and retrofitters
1,0002,000
10,000
10,000
2550
Operation at power supply company for almost

any switching task
800
10,000
10,000
All fields of application, such as overhead lines,

cables, transformers, motors, capacitors;
many operating modes; short-circuit protection
required, fuses
8001,250
10,000
10,000
25
In partially enclosed circuit-breaker switchgear
400800
1 x 1063 x 106
0,25 x 1062 x 106
All fields of application, mainly motors

with a high rate of operating cycles
6304,000
10,000
30,000
10,000
30,000
25100
For circuit-breakers, switches and gas-insulated

switchgear
630
1,000 ... 2,500
20
Cables and overhead lines, transformers
6303,000
1,000... 5,000
Protection of personnel during maintenance

work at the equipment by creating an isolating gap
6.3250
Short-circuit protection,
short-circuit limiting
400
Placement of HV HRC fuse-links
Measuring and protecting
A
All fields of application, such as overhead lines,
cables, transformers, motors, generators, capacitors,
filter circuits, arc furnaces
4/73
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:55 Uhr
Seite 74
3AH1-6 vacuum circuitbreakers for universal use

Suitable circuit-breakers for every
application:
3AH5
No-maintenance allrounder for most
standard applications
3AH2
Circuit-breaker for frequent switching
operations, e.g. for industrial
applications.
3AH3
High-performance circuit-breaker,
e.g. for power generation.
Circuit-breakers of type 3AH1, 2, 3, 4

and 6 round off the total product
range.
3AH4
Circuit-breaker for extremely
frequent switching operations,
e.g. in steelworks.
3AH1
Standard circuit-breaker for power
utilities and industrial applications
to complement the 3AH5 range.
3AH6
Circuit-breaker with switching poles
arranged in line one behind the other.
Photo 4/19
Rated
voltage
Vacuum circuit-breaker (type)

For rated short-circuit breaking current1) (rated short-circuit making current)
kV
kA
13.1
(32.8)
kA
16
(40)
kA
20
(50)
kA
25
(63)
kA
31.5
(80)
kA
40
(100)
7.2
12
3AH5
3AH53)
3AH5
3AH5
3AH6 4)
3AH6
3AH6
24
3AH6 4)
3AH6
3AH5
3AH6
36
3AH6 3AH5
3AH3
3AH3
3AH5
3AH2
3AH1
3AH2
3AH3
3AH3
3AH1
3AH2
3AH3
3AH3
3AH2
3AH5
3AH2
3AH1
3AH2
3AH3
3AH3
800 A
800 A
to
1,250 A
1,250 A
to
3,150 A
1,250 A
to
4,000 A
3AH3
3AH4
3AH5 5)
3AH2
3AH5 3)
3AH5
kA
63
(160)
3AH1
3AH2
3AH6
3AH5
kA
50
(125)
3AH2
15
17.5
3AH5 allround circuit-breaker

24 kV / 16 kA
3AH3
3AH4
800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 1,250 A

to
to
to
to
to2)
1,250 A 2,500 A 1,250 A 2,500 A 2,500 A
3AH3
3AH4
2,500 A 1,250 A
to
3,150 A
Rated operating current

1)
DC current proportion is 36% (higher values on request)
4)
12.5 kA instead of 13.1 kA for 3AH6
2)
3,150 A at 17.5 kV rated voltage for 3AH2
5)
1,250 A to 2,500 A for 24 kV / 25 kV
3)
Up to 2,000 A
Table 4/29
The complete 3AH range: electrical values and products
4/74
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:56 Uhr
Seite 75
Medium Voltage
Applications
C Power supply installations with
long service life
C Industrial installations with high
short-circuit currents and frequent
switching operations
C Switchgear installation companies
C Special switching tasks, as applicable in capacitors, reactor coils and
filter circuits
C Steelworks
Features
C Proven vacuum switching principle
C Universal use
C Long service life
C No maintenance up to 10,000
operating cycles
C Compact design
Customer benefit
C Cost-saving in the long run due to
its long service life and the fact
that it requires no maintenance
C Space saving due to its compact
design
C Highly reliable, thus ensuring the
utmost availability of power supply
C Flexible use thanks to short delivery times for standard breakers
Circuit-breakers for special
applications
3AH8 high current and
generator circuit-breaker
Applications
C High operating and fault currents
C Switching of generators in hydropower, coal, natural gas and
steam power plants
Features
C High switching cycles
C No maintenance
C Tested in accordance with
IEEE C37.013
Photo 4/20
3AH38 high-current and

generator circuit-breaker
Photo 4/21
3AH47 single-pole circuit-breaker
3AH3 818
17.5 kV / 63 kA / 175 kA / 3,150 A and 4,000 A
3AH3 819
17.5 kV / 72 kA / 200 kA / 3,150 A and 4,000 A
3AH3 838
17.5 kV / 63 kA / 175 kA / 8,000 A and 12,000 A
3AH3 838
17.5 kV / 72 kA / 200 kA / 8,000 A and 12,000 A
Table 4/30
UN
Technical data for 3AH38 types
27.5 kV /
50 and 60 Hz
17.5 kV /
16.7 Hz
ISC
kA
IN
Table 4/31
25
31.5
40
50
1,250 2,000 2,500 2,000 2,500 2,500 2,500
Product range of 3AH47 for single-pole applications
Customer benefit
C Small dimensions, making its installation more flexible
C Easy handling thanks to low weight
C Long service life
C Low life cycle costs
Thanks to their compact design and
high performance features, high-current and generator circuit-breakers of
type 3AH8 and IEEE C37.013 are perfectly suited both for modernizing
existing power plants and for initially
equipping new power plants.
They can be easily installed in
switchgear systems.
3AH7 single-pole
circuit-breaker
Applications
C Railway applications
C Neutral point switch (grounding
transformer, ground-fault
neutralizer)
Features
C High operating cycle rates
C Low maintenance
C Low wear and tear even at
frequencies of 16 2/3 Hz
C Tested and approved in
accordance with EN 50152-1
C Circuit voltage class acc. to EN
50163 or IEC 60850
Customer benefit
C Optimized life cycle costs
C High reliability
4/75
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:57 Uhr
Seite 76
Components for 12 kV
Up to 2,500 A / up to 40 kA / 1s. For cubicle widths of 800 mm:
With 3AH1 circuit-breaker 7.2/12 kV
210 mm pole center distance
With 3AH5 circuit-breaker 12 kV
Components for 24 kV
Up to 2,500 A / up to 25 kA / 1s. For cubicle widths of 1,000 mm:
Photo 4/22
Switchgear 12 kV, 25 kA, 1,250 A
Table 4/32
Components for 3AH vacuum

circuit-breakers
Applications
C As cartridge or truck for switchgear
C Components for the switchgear installation company
Features
C Components based on 3AH
circuit-breaker
C Free choice of components ranging
from counter-contacts and bushings to truck and complete
cartridge
C Tested components
Technical data and product range
Rated voltage
kV
ISC
kA
Ima
kA
Pole center distance

mm
Ir
A
12
13.1
32.8
160
800 to 1,250
16
40
160
800 to 1,250
20
50
160
800 to 1,250
25
63
160
800 to 1,250
Table 4/33
Technical data of the 3AH58 vacuum circuit-breaker/disconnector unit
Customer benefit
C Everything from a single source
C Quick to use
Photo 4/23b Disconnector counter-contacts
C Compact design makes room for

cable connections and instrument
transformer in the switchgear cubicle
C All operating elements arranged at
an ergonomic height
C Circuit-breaker and disconnector
drive can be accessed from the
front
3AH58 vacuum circuit-breaker/

disconnector unit a powerful
combination
Applications
C In partially enclosed circuit-breaker
installations
Features
C Combined switching and disconnecting function using a 3AH5
vacuum circuit-breaker and 3DC
disconnector
C Disconnector mechanically
interlocked with the circuit-breaker
C Compact design in fixed mounted
installations
C Factory-tested circuit-breaker/
disconnector unit
4/76
Photo 4/23a 3AH5 804-2, 12 kV/25

kA/1,250 A
Customer benefit
C Time savings due to less installation work required compared with
installing single components
C Disconnector counter-contacts
included in the scope of delivery
Disconnector counter-contacts
C Included in the scope of delivery
C Lightning surge withstand voltage
75 kV / 85 kV*
C Short-time AC withstand voltage
28 kV / 32 kV*
C Short-circuit time 3s
* Across the isolating gap
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:57 Uhr
Seite 77
Medium Voltage
Photo 4/24
Photo 4/25
NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module, type 3AJ
NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module, type 3AK
NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker

module
NXACT combines the advantages of
vacuum switching technology with
additionally integrated functions.
Applications
C For switchgear installation
companies
Features
C Combination of vacuum switching
technology with further advanced
functions
C Disconnector, grounding switch
drive, locks and operating panel
integrated in the module
C Pre-tested and ready-to-install
delivery
C All operating elements located at
the switchgear front panel
NXACT 3AJ
NXACT 3AK
Rated voltage
kV
12 24
to 15
Rated short-time AC voltage
kV
28 50
to 38
Rated lightning surge voltage
kV
75 125
to 110
Rated frequencyz
Hz
50 / 60
to 50 / 60
Rated short-circuit breaking current (max.)
kA
to 31.5
to 50
Rated short-circuit making current (max.)
kA
to 80
to 125
Rated short-time current, 3 seconds (max.)
kA
to 31.5
to 50
1,250 / 2,500
to 4,000

Table 4/34
Technical data
Customer benefit
Increased productivity due to
C Easy planning
C Easy installation
C Minimum mounting and commissioning expense

C Immediately ready to use after
delivery
C Clear and transparent operating
front panel
4/77
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:58 Uhr
Seite 78
3AF01
3AG01
Rated voltage
kV
to 40.5
12
Rated frequency
Hz
50 / 60
50 / 60
Rated lightning surge withstand voltage
kV
170
75
Rated AC withstand voltage
kV
70
28
kA
25 / 31.5
25
kA
63 / 80
63
1,600 / 2,000
1,600

Table 4/35
Technical data
3AF0/3AG0 vacuum circuit-breaker

for outdoor installations up
to 40.5 kV
Photo 4/27
3TL8 vacuum contactor
Photo 4/28
3TL6 vacuum contactor
Applications
C In particular for use in power
supply companies
C Can be used even in difficult
climatic environments
C For almost every switching task
Features
C Proven vacuum switching tubes
in porcelain insulators
C High electrical and mechanical
service life
C Suitable for short-time interruptions
C Gas- or air-insulated versions
available
Customer benefit
Optimized life cycle costs due to
C Low mounting and commissioning
expense
C Minimum maintenance expense
C Installation possible at any location
Photo 4/26
3TL vacuum contactors

designed for continuous operation
Vacuum contactors are 3-pole contactors for medium-voltage installations
with an electromagnetic drive that
features high switching frequencies
and unlimited ON periods.
3AF/3AG vacuum circuit-breakers
Applications
C Switching of three-phase motors
C Switching of capacitors
C Switching of ohmic loads
(e.g. arc furnaces)
4/78
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:58 Uhr
Seite 79
Medium Voltage
Vacuum contactor type
3TL81
3TL61
3TL65
3TL71
7.2
12
24
Rated voltage
kV
7.2
Rated frequency
Hz
50 / 60
400
450
400
800
Switching capacity acc. to utilization category AC-4

(cos = 0,35)
Rated making current
Rated breaking current
A
A
4,000
3,200
4,500
3,600
4,000
3,200
4,500
3,600
Mechanical life of the contactor
operating cycles
1 10 6
3 10 6
1 10 6
1 10 6
Mechanical life of the vacuum

switching tube
operating cycles
0.25 106
2 106
1 10 6
1 10 6
Electrical life of the vacuum switching

tube (nominal current)
operating cycles
0.25 10 6
1 10 6
0.5 10 6
0.5 10 6
Table 4/36
Technical data
Features
C Small dimensions
C High electrical service life up
to 1 million operating cycles
Customer benefit
Increased productivity due to
C High reliability and availability
C Flexible mounting positions,
vertical or horizontal
Vacuum switching tubes utmost
switching capacity in extremely
compact designs
Vacuum switching tubes for medium
voltage are supplied by Siemens for
all applications on the international
power market ranging from 1 kV to
40.5 kV. On demand, we are pleased
to complement our comprehensive
standard product range with tailormade, specific customer solutions.
Applications
C Vacuum circuit-breakers
C Vacuum load interrupters
C Vacuum contactors
C Transformer tap changers
C Circuit-breakers for railway
applications
C Auto-reclosers
C Special applications, such as
nuclear fusion
Photo 4/29
Vacuum switching tubes in seal-soldering technology
Tubes for vacuum circuit-breakers

Rated voltage
kV
A
7.2 to 40.5
630 to 4,000
kA
12.5 to 80
kV
1 to 24
Tubes for vacuum contactors

Rated voltage
Table 4/37
400 to 800
Product range (extract) Tube ratings for circuit-breakers/contactors
Features
C Small designs
C High breaking and operating
currents
C High operating cycle rates
Customer benefit
C A suitable solution for every
application
C Long-term supply security
4/79
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:58 Uhr
Seite 80
Rated voltageg
kV
7.2
12
15
24
Rated lightning surge

withstand voltage, list 2
kV
60
75
95
125
Rated short-circuit
making current
kA
50
50
50
40
Rated short-time
current (3s)
kA
20
20
20
16
800
800
800
800
Rated closed-loop
breaking current
800
800
800
800
Rated no-load transformer

breaking current
10
10
10
10
Rated no-load capacitor

breaking current
800
800
800
800
3CG vacuum switches are multipurpose load interrupters.
Rated cable-charging
breaking current
63
63
63
63
Applications
C Frequent switching of electric loads
C In particular for switching transformers, motors or capacitors in
industrial applications
Rated breaking current

for locked motors
2,500
1,600
1,250
Transfer current acc. to

IEC 60420, inductive switching
capacity (cos 0.15)
5,000
3,000
2,000
2,000
Induktives Switching capacity

(cos 0.15)
2,500
1,600
1,250
1,250
630
630
630
630
63
63
63
63
63 + 800
63 + 800
63 + 800
63 + 800
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Photo 4/30
3CG vacuum switch for 12 kV,

800 A
3CG vacuum load interrupter

suited for very high operating
cycle rates
Features
C In compliance with IEC 60265-1,
IEC 60420 and VDE 0670 Part 301,
tested in combination with
HV HRC fuses
C Rated currents up to 800 A
C Up to 10,000 electrical operating
cycles
Switching capacity under

ground fault conditions:
Rated ground fault
A
breaking current
A
breaking current under
ground fault conditions
A
breaking current under
ground fault conditions with
with superimposed load current
Customer benefit
C Optimization of operating costs
due to high operating cycle rates
C Very economical
C High availability
C Highly reliable due to proven
vacuum switching technology
Operating cycles with rated

operating current
Table 4/38
4/80
3CG vacuum circuit-breaker ratings
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:58 Uhr
Seite 81
Medium Voltage
3CJ2 switch disconnector for daily

use
Indoor switch disconnectors, type
3CJ2, are multi-purpose switch disconnectors that comply with the relevant standards in their basic versions
and when combined with (makeproof) grounding switches.
Applications
C In power distribution, for rare
switching of loads
C Switching of distribution
transformers
Features
C Multi-purpose switch disconnectors
complying with the relevant standards
C Can be combined with make-proof
grounding switches
C Welded basic frame
C Isolating blades
C Robust arc quenching chambers
C Switching angle is always 90
C Can also be supplied as Class B
and acc. to IEC 60420
Customer benefit
C High operator safety
C Easy installation
C Easy handling
C Reliability and safety
3D grounding switch and
disconnector
3D grounding switches and disconnectors are well suited for indoor installations up to 40.5 kV. In addition,
our product range includes makeproof grounding switches for 12 kV
and 24 kV with a rated short-circuit
making current of 50 kA or 40 kA.
Photo 4/31
3CJ1 switch disconnector
Photo 4/32
3DC disconnector
Rated voltage
kV
12
17.5
24
36
Rated short-time current (1s)
kA
25
25
25
20

current
kA
63
63
50
25
630
630
630
630

Table 4/39
Ratings for 3CJ2 switch disconnectors
Rated voltage
kV
12
24
36
40.5
Rated short-time
current (1s)
kA
20 63
20 31.5
20 31.5
20 31.5
Rated surge
current
kA
40 160
40 80
50 80
80
Rated operating
current
Table 4/40
630 3,000 630 2,500 630 3,000 1,250 2,500
Ratings for disconnectors and grounding switches
Applications
C To protect personnel when
working at equipment
Features
C Utmost reliability and
operating safety
C Simple, robust construction
C Can be used in difficult climatic
environments
C Mechanical service life up

to 5,000 operating cycles
Customer benefit
C Utmost safety for works at
switchgear installations
C Easy handling
4/81
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 82
3GD high-voltage high-rupturingcapacity fuses

(HV HRC) fuses are used for shortcircuit protection.
Applications
C Short-circuit protection in
medium-voltage installations
C Protection of transformers, motors
and capacitors for example
C Can be combined with load
interrupter switches
Features
C Fuse base for fuse-link, can be
supplied as 1-pole or 3-pole version
C Cuts short-circuit currents to low
values
Photo 4/33
4M instrument transformers
for safe measurements
3GH fuse base with HV

HRC fuse-links
Rated voltageg
kV
7.2
12
24
36
Rated short-circuit
breaking current
kA
63 80
40 63
31.5 40
31.5
Rated operating
current
kA
6.3 250
6,3 160
6.3 100
6.3 40
Rated voltage
kV
3.6 / 7.2
12
24
36
Surge current
withstand strength
kA
44
44
44
44
400
400
400
400
3GH fuse base
Applications
C In all types of electrical installations
4/82
Photo 4/34
3GD HV HRC fuse-link
Customer benefit
C Reliable protection of connected
consumers
C Thanks to its current-limiting function, more inexpensive consumers
can be used
Features
C Measurement of electrical quantities in electrical installations
C Transformation of currents or voltages into quantities that are better
suited for protective devices
C Disconnection of high or low
voltage
C For indoor and outdoor installations
C Comprehensive product range:
can be supplied in compliance with
every relevant standard
C Manufactured using state-of-the
art cast-resin technologies
C Partial discharge level is below
the test values required by IEC
HV HRC fuse, type 3GD
Rated current
Table 4/41
Product range and rating data
Customer benefit
C Provides safety due to reliable detection of fault currents
C
3E surge arrester
Applications
C Industry
C Power plants
Features
C Protects the insulators of plants or
plant sections against excessive
voltage stress
C Overvoltage limiter to protect
C
C
C
C
high-voltage motors, dry-type

transformers and cable networks
up to 15 kV
Special arrester to protect rotating
machines and furnaces up to 42 kV
Plastic or porcelain enclosure
Very high energy absorption
capacity
Stable and self-contained
construction for type 3EE2
Extremely high short-circuit
strength (types 3EF3 and 3EE2)
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 83
Medium Voltage
Photo 4/35
Photo 4/36
4MA block-type current

transformer
3EE2 surge arrester
Customer benefit
C Lower protective level than in
traditional arresters
C Universal solution for an effective
protection of high-voltage motors,
because the protective characteristics of arresters are relatively unsusceptible to steep-edge surges
Ur (kV)
Ir (A)
Changeover option No. of cores
4MA7
insulator-type current
transformer
12
24
36
10 2,500
Primary or
secondary
changeover
4MB1 insulator-type
current transformer
12
24
1,500 6,000
Secondary
changeover
4MC2
bushing-type current
transformers
12
24
36
150 3,000
Secondary
changeover
4MC3
bushing-type current
transformers
12
24
36
1,000 10,000
Secondary
changeover
4ME1
current transformer
for outdoor
installations
12
24
36
52
5 1,200
Primary or
secondary
changeover
Voltage transformers
Ur (kV)
Rating of the
measuring winding
(VA)/class
Thermal limit rating of

ground-fault detection
winding
(VA / A)
4MR1, 4MR2
indoor, single and
two-pole,
small model
12
24
20/0.2; 50/0.5; 100/1

20/0.2; 50/0.5; 100/1
230/4*
4MR5, 4MR6
indoor, single and
two-pole,
large model
12
24
36
30/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1

45/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1 350/6*
50/0.2; 100/0.5; 200/1
4MS
outdoor, single-pole
12
24
36
52
30/0.2;
30/0.2;
25/0.2;
60/0.2;
4MS4
36
60/0.2; 150/0.5; 400/1
100/0.5; 200/1
100/0.5; 200/1
75/0.5; 150/1
180/0.5; 400/1
230/4*
230/4*
230/4*
500/9
* Higher values on request

Table 4/42
Product range of current and voltage transformers
3EF
3EH2
3EE2
For networks
kV
3.6 to 15
4.7 to 42
4.5 to 42
Rated discharge surge current
kA
10
10
Short-circuit current
kA
1 to 40
16
50 to 300
Table 4/43
Surge arresters technical data and product range
4/83
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 84
4.4 PQM Power

Quality Management
and Load Flow Control
The future of the rapidly changing
global power distribution markets lies
in the form of power grid operations.
Switching high currents, measures to
be taken by power quality management and handling short circuits remain the major tasks in this context.
New technologies, such as static and
dynamic compensation equipment and
network couplings based on power
electronic components, are the logical
choice to meet these challenges.
POWERCOMP are products and systems that ensure high power quality
of an industrial or public medium-voltage supply grid. By utilizing systems
for reactive power compensation that
are tailored to meet customer requirements, the price of the power
quantities delivered will be reduced.
Return of investment can often be
achieved within less than two years.
In the event of significant load fluctuations, dynamic compensation systems using thyristor valves or IGBT
modules ensure a stable supply voltage. Powerful filter circuit systems
reduce effective harmonic currents of
speed-controlled large drives, and
thus, operating permits for the connection of such plants can be obtained. POWERCOMP systems are
4/84
Photo 4/37
2-MW SIPLINK system at the municipal utilities of Ulm in Germany
modularly designed and can be used

in the voltage range of 3 kV to 36 kV.
SIPLINK, the medium-voltage DC
transmission system, allows economical power exchange at the medium
voltage level by using power electronics. Power supply systems with
differing parameters can thus be
coupled, costs can be saved by optimizing power procurement, the load
flow during power transmission is
controlled and a constant supply of
voltage is maintained through the
provision of reactive power.
Innovative solutions for power

supply
Most consumers dont just draw active power from the grid but also reactive power which is somewhat erratically transmitted to the consumer.
For this reason, in their supply contracts, power supply companies define the exact power factor as the ratio between active power to be transmitted and the apparent power. Any
deviation is on account of the customer. This makes power quality
management a very interesting topic.
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 85
Medium Voltage
Input power supplied by the power

supply company, to be paid by the
customer
Input power
from the tuning
capacitor
Active
power
P
Reactive
power
Q
Required
apparent power
S
Fig. 4/37
Definition of electric power types

compensation
Photo 4/38
Outdoor installation
are gaining ground in the context of

growing cost pressure and the widespread use of electronic modules and
power electronics for automating and
control tasks.
Thanks to the use of intelligent load
flow controls, performance- and costoptimized power procurement is now
attainable. Subnetworks with deviating parameters can also be connected, which means that their voltage stability and quality can thus be
positively influenced.
Photo 4/39
Compact compensation unit
State-of-the art power electronics

provide efficient and cost-effective
options for optimizing power supply
and power quality. Such applications
Applications in the field of power

quality management initially require
comprehensive measurements of
power and harmonic ratios, which are
taken using high-tech measuring instruments. By means of a specially
developed program, these data are
evaluated in a network analysis that
simulates real conditions, taking numerous consumer and load requirements into account.
This analysis helps to develop and
implement the proper PQM solution
even for highly complex and sensitive
networks.
POWERCOMP
compensation systems for
medium voltage
Compact, intelligent and expandable
this characterizes POCOS, a system which is, above all, suitable for
use in medium-voltage installations
that require a compensation system
for a certain technical process or for
reasons of ambitious customer specifications. Extensive experience from
use of this system the world over is
continually being channeled into its
further development.
4/85
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
Photo 4/40
18:59 Uhr
Seite 86
SIPLINK ship
Wherever fast load changes result in

a dynamic impact on the voltage at
the point of connection, or wherever
a highly sensitive voltage control is
required, dynamic compensation systems do the job. Their dynamic reactive-power compensation function
can be combined with an activepower filtering function. Fast changing load characteristics of arc furnaces and mill trains affect the system voltage as much as, for example,
the dynamic load characteristics in
traction systems.
Long-standing experience and comprehensive process knowledge about
industrial power supply systems
guarantee economical solutions that
take customer needs into account.
For further information please contact:
POWERCOMP@ptd.siemens.com
Photo 4/41
Transformer/container model
As required, several units can be operated side by side. Choked or nonchoked options are feasible. Despite
the extremely compact design, a high
compensation effect is achieved owing to the use of vacuum switchgear,
optimized capacitors and iron-core reactors. Besides the basic model for
indoor installation, systems for outdoor installation are also available.
Compact compensation systems are
not necessarily suited to every type
of application. In some cases, it may
be more reasonable to use conventional systems with capacitors or filter circuits. For the primary industry
(including paper, cement, steel,
chemical and glass), this type of compensation system has been installed
at every voltage level all over the
world.
4/86
SIPLINK
Closed-loop controlled load flow
for power systems with special requirements
With SIPLINK (Siemens Multifunctional Power Link), Siemens has developed a technology for mediumvoltage direct current transmission
that depending on the application
and configuration of an existing supply system can be utilized by power
supply companies and industrial plant
operators alike to make tremendous
savings in terms of costs of investment, operation and total plant service life.
SIPLINK controls the load flow during
power transmission and ensures optimal voltage stability by a controlled
output of reactive power.
In order to do so, SIPLINK uses technology that is based on self-commutated IGBTs, which allows networks
to be linked that still remain electri-
cally isolated. In this case, the connected networks may even feature
different voltage levels, neutral point
connections, frequencies and phase
angles.
The SIPLINK can also be used to supply a separate network without a
power generating set of its own, in
particular if network parameters that
differ from the distribution system
are required. Typical examples are
test bays (for 60 Hz or surge voltage
generation), or shipyards and connection points in harbors for the supply
of on-board networks of ships. Individual plant sections with different
requirements to power quality and
safety of supply can also be operated
isolated from the general power supply using SIPLINK.
For further information please
contact:
SIPLINK@ptd.siemens.com
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 87
Medium Voltage
4.5 Planning of Systems

for Primary and Secondary Power Distribution Exemplified by the
Automotive Industry
sive know-how about the equipment

and systems under consideration.
This know-how will be detailed on
the basis of process-related power
supply planning for a car manufacturing plant.
When power supply systems are

planned, each individual problem can
be faced in various ways: by means
of technical solutions that feature
specific technical advantages. This
means that both a thorough knowledge of the relevant industrial technology is required and comprehen-
During the planning of a power supply system, decisions must be made

regarding the power system design,
ratings and operating mode. These
decisions must focus on the specific
process requirements of the press
shop, body shop, paint shop and the
final car assembly. Network and plant
engineering solutions for the opti-
mum fulfillment of requirements

placed on the power supply of a car
manufacturing plant will be demonstrated here.
Requirements to the power supply
system set by the process
The process flow in an automotive
manufacturing plant determines the
requirements to the electric power
system.
The following requirements shall be
met:
C Covering a process-oriented power
demand
Process flow
Store
Press
shop PR
Body shop
BS
Paint shop
PS
Auxiliary facilities
Store
Final
assembly FA
Compressor
system CS
Store
Transformer Main
substation switchgear
Heating and
boiler system
HB
Social &
administrative
building AB
Paint shop
switchgear
BS
PS /
System 1
PR
110/20 kV
0.4 kV
CS
0.4 kV
M1
AB
HB
M5
0.4 kV
PS /
System 2
M6
UPS
M10
FA
6 kV
0.4 kV
110/20 kV
G
3~
0.4 kV
0.4 kV
0.4 kV
20 kV
Fig. 4/38
20 kV
20 kV
Model network (110/20/6/0.4 kV) to supply production processes in an automotive manufacturing plant
4/87
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 88
MV
TS2
TS1
C Ensuring a high degree of supply

safety by mastering the (n-1)
principle
C Ensuring high power quality in accordance with DIN EN 50160:2000-03
(properties of the supply voltage)
and DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE 0839
Parts 2-4):2003-05 (EMC level)
C Ensuring a high degree of safety
for man and machinery under normal operating conditions as well
as under fault conditions
C High adaptability to changing
manufacturing processes
C Reduction of operating costs due
to low maintenance expense and
low power losses
C Simple operatability and operatorfriendly systems alike
In automotive manufacturing plants,
a network configuration as shown in
Fig. 4/38 has proved its worth with
regard to technically and economically efficient implementation of
these requirements.
Optimum power system and plant
configuration
The power supply for the production
halls in a car manufacturing plant is
distributed by means of medium-voltage load center systems. Every MV
load center system is operated in
combination with a low-voltage system built from high-current busbars
and busbar trunking systems (Fig.
4/39 and 4/40). These high-current
busbars and busbar trunking systems
replace the typical line network and
its main and subdistributions that
used to supply the consumers. The
PEHLA-tested transformer load center substation (TS station), tested in
4/88
MEB
TS3
TS4
MEB
MEB
MEB
L1-L3
PEN
LV
High-current busbar system

3
A 16 mm2
L1-L3
L1-L3
PE
PE
A 25 mm2
Busbar trunking system
TS1TS4 Load center substations distributed in the production area

MEB
Main equipotential bonding
Fig. 4/39
Load center network in combination with a TN-C-S system built from busbar trunking
systems
accordance with DIN EN 61330 (VDE

0670 Part 611):1997-08, has proven
itself as an economical and safe element in distributed power supply.
Most favorable operating mode

from the point of view of power
engineering medium voltage
(MV)
Protection for the TS stations, which

are equipped with cast-resin transformers, is provided by a load-switchfuse combination which is rated and
selected according to the criteria given
in IEC 62271-105:2002-08 or DIN EN
60420 (VDE Part 303):1994-09. The
relevant standard for the selection
of the high-voltage high rupturing
capacity fuses (HV HRC fuses) is
DIN VDE 0670-402 (VDE 0670 Part
402):1998-05.
The operating mode of the MV

power system is determined by the
type of neutral point connection. The
most important types of neutral point
connection in MV systems according
to DIN VDE 0101 (VDE 0101):2000-01
are as follows:
C Isolated neutral
C Ground fault compensation or resonant neutral grounding (RESPE)
C Low-resistant neutral grounding
(NOSPE)
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 89
Medium Voltage
There is a general tendency towards

replacing resonant grounding of the
neutral point by low-resistant neutral
grounding in MV cable networks in
the automotive industry. The following advantages are decisive for this
trend:
C (n-1)-redundant network design allows selective disconnection of
1-pole faults
C Protective disconnection of the
fault location is carried out without
interrupting the power supply
C Clearly defined protective trippings
and changes of the switching
status enable integrated power
automation
C Low-resistant grounded neutral
operation (resistance) prevents
high transient long-term operating
overvoltages
C Danger of fault expansion and double ground faults is eliminated
C Short tripping times limit follow-up
damages of ground faults at the
fault location
The operating experience gathered
with NOSPE networks used in plants
of Volkswagen AG, Adam Opel AG
and DaimlerChrysler AG confirms the
advantages of low-resistant neutral
grounding. BMW AG is another automotive manufacturer that has decided in favor of low-resistant neutral
grounding of the 20-kV power system to be installed in their new plant
at Leipzig.
MV
TS1
TS2
MEB
TL
TS3
MEB
TS4
MEB
TL
TL
MEB
TL
L1-L3
PE
PEN
High-current busbar system
LV
3
L1-L3
L1-L3
N
PE
PE
TS1TS4 Load center substations distributed in the production area

MEB
Main equipotential bonding
TLPE/PEN Isolating link (bridge only in one load center substation)
Fig. 4/40
Load center network in combination with a TN-S system built from busbar trunking
systems
Most favorable operating mode

from the point of view of power
engineering low voltage (LV)
The system types suitable for operation as LV systems are defined in IEC
60364-1:2001-08 or DIN VDE 0100-300
(VDE 0100 Part 300):1996-01. As far
as the type of connection to ground
of the system power source and the

type of connection to ground of the
conductive parts in the electric consumer system are concerned, distinctions can be made between IT, TT
and TN systems.
4/89
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
20/0.4kV
1250kVA
6%
TS2
Seite 90
20/0.4kV
1250kVA
6%
TS2
The TN system is the preferred

system type for supplying power to
automotive manufacturing plants. For
distributed transformer infeeds (highcurrent busbar), an LV system conforming to VDE can only be designed
as TN-C system with common neutral and protective conductor (PEN
conductor). Only at a lower level can
a TN-S system be built with a separate neutral conductor (N conductor)
and protective ground conductor
(PE conductor). Consequently, LV
systems for the automotive industry
have so far been designed exclusively as TN-C-S systems.
20/0.4kV
1250kVA
6%
TS3
UN = 400 V
Sk = 55 MVA
u = 1.2 %
M5
3~
M1
M2
3~
M4
3~
M6
3~
M1
M2
3~
M5
3~
160 kW
Press 5
250 kW
Special
press
160 kW
Press 2
160 kW
Press 4
115 kW
Try-out
press
280 kW
Special
press
160 kW
Press 2
160 kW
Press 5
Press line 1
In a modern automotive manufacturing plant, too, higher requirements

are placed on electromagnetic compatibility in order to prevent any
negative impact on the production
process by electromagnetic interference of communication and information technology systems. An EMCsuitable LV system with a continuously de-energized PE conductor
must be designed as TN-S system. In
multiple-supply LV systems, a TN-S
system is only feasible if the PEN
conductors or the individual supply
circuits can be grounded at a central
point.
Press line 2
Average cycle time for pressing the body parts

T = 4s (n = load operations/min)
101
uzul
[%]
3
2
u = 1.2 %
100
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
10-1
10-1
100
101
15 Load operations/min
102
103
[min-1]
104
Fig. 4/41
LV system rating in a press shop according to the voltage changes uperm as a function of the frequency n
4/90
At present, the form of design represented in Fig. 4/40 is not backed up

by national or international standards.
Until a valid standard has been
adopted, it is the sole responsibility
of the switchgear installer or plant
operator. So far, only Adam Opel AG
has operated a multiple-supply LV
system as TN-S system.
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 91
Medium Voltage
Process-dependent particularities
for the design of subsystems
press shop
In the press shop, a large number of
motorized press drives are installed
for forming metal sheets into body
parts. The individual power output of
these drives is relatively high compared to the total power demand of
the press shop and it puts a surgetype, intermittent burden on the
power system. Another system perturbation is caused by the thyristor
controllers of the press drives, as
they generate harmonics of the vth
order.
Owing to the short-circuit power of
the network, voltage changes due to
surge-type loads must be limited in
such a way that the operational
safety of consumers is not endangered and the optical stress on the
human eye by current fluctuations in
the lighting system remains within
reasonable limits. An example of how
to meet this power quality requirement is shown in Fig. 4/41.
Another requirement for the LV system in the press shop is for the permissible compatibility levels for harmonic contents to be observed as
defined in DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE
Parts 2-4):2003-05. To maintain these
levels, the compensation system of
the switchgear substations must normally be inductor-type. The optimum
degree of choking p depends on the
harmonic contents of the vth order
(v = 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23 and 25
for 3-phase bridge circuits) that are
mostly present. In practice, inductorcapacitor units with a choking degree
between p = 6% and p = 7% are
mainly used.
Body shop
Connection of the welders in the
400-V system of the body shop is
carried out in groups by a symmetric
distribution to the phase conductors
L1-L2, L1-L3, L2-L3 (Fig. 4/42). Due
to their intermittent operating mode,
the machines for welding the body
parts connected in the circuit do not
constitute a continuous load. Therefore, the equipment in the welding
circuit must be rated according to its
thermal equivalent current. The thermal equivalent current must be calculated as a sequence of accidentally
overlapping welding pulses. The calculation is performed by means of
the thermal equivalent current
method by establishing the square
average, a probability calculation
based on binomially distributed welding currents.
For rating the welding network, the
thermal equivalent current is, however, merely of minor importance.
What is more important are the voltage dips caused by the accidentally
overlapping welding pulses. The
probability calculation of these voltage dips is again based on the binomial distribution. To apply the
Bernoulli formula, the different welding machine types are combined into
one uniform equivalent welding machine with an identical peak welding
current Iw, the identical power factor
cos and the same relative ON period OP. This probability peak load
calculation provides the required indicator for evaluating the power supply
quality in the body shop.
What is vital for quality-responsive

welding of the body parts is the presence of voltage dips that do not exceed a limit u = 10% in the statistic
mean. Another quality indicator is the
scrap rate for voltage-related faulty
weldings (uperm. > 10%). The permissible limit value for this scrap rate
is perm = 1.
In the body shop, compensation can
normally be made non-choked. For
the non-choked compensation
method, observance of the permissible compatibility level for harmonic
contents has been verified by measurements in several 400-V welding
networks in the automotive industry.
A favorable solution in terms of
power engineering proves to be the
use of capacitors with a rated voltage
of 480 V Um 525 V.
Paint shop
Paint shop processes are characterized by high load densities and long
ON periods of the consumers. What
is particularly typical is the negative
impact on power quality caused by
the rectifiers for the electro-dipcoating or cataphoretic painting process.
In order to relieve the LV system
from harmonic impact, these rectifiers are preferably supplied directly
from the MV system via separate
transformers.
As important as the observance of
the permissible compatibility levels
for harmonic contents according to
DIN EN 61000-2-4 (VDE 0839 Parts 24): 2003-05 is the strict fulfillment of
safety-of-supply requirements set by
the painting process itself.
4/91
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Q1
Seite 92
Q2
Q3
nected between phase conductor

(L1vL2vL3) and neutral conductor (N).
In this type of connection, all current
harmonics of the order v that can be
divided by 3 add up in the neutral
conductor N. The current harmonic
whereby v = 3 is particularly distinctive. To prevent thermal overload
caused by current harmonics, the
phase conductors (L1, L2, L3), neutral conductor (N) and PEN conductor
of the TN-C-S system (Fig. 4/39) or
TN-S system are designed with identical cross sections as a matter of
principle.
Q4
L1
L2
L3
PEN
PE
L1
L2
L3
PEN
PE
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
2,500 A high-current busbar
800 A busbar trunking systemsi
Summary
Welding machine group
i L1L2
i L1L3
i L2L3
Number of welders
90
90
90
Peak welding current is
800 A
Relative ON period OP
8%
OP =
Fig. 4/42
ts
100, with welding time ts and cycle time T
T
Operation of welding machines arranged in groups in the 0.4 kV power system of the
body shop (TN-S system)
This includes the uninterruptible handling of the single fault by a protective disconnection of the fault location from supply.
Cast-resin transformers at the TS station provide an instantaneous
standby or hot redundancy to handle such single faults. In addition, a
standby supply is provided for sensitive and fail-critical consumers.
4/92
Final assembly
The connected power of the consumers in the final car assembly is
relatively low as compared to the
nominal power of the supplying
transformers. For this reason, the
maximum power demand of all consumers in the grid is important for
system rating. Power demand is
largely influenced by the simultaneity
factor g, the degree of utilization a,
the power factor cos and the efficiency . In the final assembly plant
section, a large proportion of the nonlinear consumers is single-phase con-
The load center network in combination with a TN system consisting of

busbar trunking systems is the ideal
network configuration for the power
supply of production halls in an automotive manufacturing plant. Low-resistant neutral point grounding is
most advantageous for MV system
operation. An EMC-suitable LV system with a continuously de-energized
protective conductor (PE) must be
designed as TN-S system.
Currently, there is no binding standard for the design of a multiple-infeed LV system as TN-S system.
There is only a unanimously optimum
solution for the design and operation
of the supply networks. The rating of
the supply networks for the
processes handled in the production
halls results in engineering differences such as the number and size
of the supplying transformers and the
method of compensation.
TIP_Kap04_E
11.08.2005
18:59 Uhr
Seite 93
Medium Voltage
4/93
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Seite B
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Seite C
Transformers
chapter 5
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Seite 2
5 Transformers
Transformers are one of the primary
components for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy. Their
design mainly results from the range
of application, construction, rated
power and voltage level.
The scope of transformer types extends from generator transformers to
distribution transformers.
Distribution transformers are within
the range from 50 to 2,500 kVA and
max. 36 kV. In the last stage, they
distribute the electrical energy to the
consumers by feeding from the highvoltage into the low-voltage distribution network. These are designed either as liquid-filled or as dry-type
transformers.
Transformers with a rated power up
to 2.5 MVA and a voltage up to 36 kV
are referred to as distribution transformers; all transformers of higher
ratings are classified as power transformers.
Rated power
MVA
Max. operating voltage

kV
Oil distribution
transformers
0.05 2.5
36
GEAFOL cast-resin
transformers
0.10 40
36
Table 5/1
Transformer types
General standards and

specifications
The transformers comply with the
relevant VDE specifications, i.e.
DIN VDE 0532 Transformers and
reactors and the Technical conditions of supply for three-phase transformers issued by VDEW and ZVEI.
Therefore they also satisfy the requirements of IEC Publication 60076,
Parts 1 to 5, together with the
standards and specifications (HD and
EN) of the European Union (EU).
Enquiries should be directed to the
manufacturer where other standards
and specifications are concerned.
Only the US (ANSI/NEMA) and Canadian (CSA) standards differ from IEC
by any substantial degree.
5/2
Important additional standards

C DIN 42500, HD 428: oil-immersed
three-phase distribution transformers 502500 kVA
C DIN 42523, HD 538:
three-phase dry-type transformers
1002500 kVA
C DIN 45635 T30: noise level
C IEC 60289: reactance coils and
neutral grounding transformers
C IEC 60076-10: measurement of
noise level
C IEC 60076-11: dry-type transformers
C RAL: coating/varnish
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Seite 3
Transformers
Electrical Design
Power ratings and type of cooling
All power ratings in this guide are
the product of rated voltage (noload voltage times phase-factor
for three-phase transformers) and
rated current of the line side winding
(at center tap, if several taps are
provided), expressed in kVA or MVA,
as defined in IEC 60076-1. If only one
power rating and no cooling method
are shown, natural oil-air cooling
(ONAN or OA) is implied for oilimmersed transformers. If two
ratings are shown, forced-air cooling
(ONAF or FA) in one or two steps is
applicable.
In accordance with IEC 60076, the

standard temperature rise for oil-immersed power and distribution transformers is:
C 65 K (average winding temperature
measured by the resistance method)
C 60 K maximum oil temperature
(measured by thermometer)
The standard temperature rise for
Siemens cast-resin transformers is
C 100 K (insulation class F) at HV and
LV winding.
I
1
ii
III
Yd1
iii
iii
II
III
Dy5
iii
i
III
iii
ii
II
III
II
ii
Yd5
ii
II
i
5
11
Dy11
Yd11
i
ii
III
Fig. 5/1
iii
I
11
For cast-resin transformers, natural

air cooling (AN) is standard. Forcedair cooling (AF) is also applicable.
Temperature rise
Dy1
II
ii
III
iii
II
Most commonly used vector groups
Whereby the standard ambient temperatures are defined as follows:

C 40 C maximum temperature,
C 30 C average on any one day,
C 20 C average in any one year,
C 25 C lowest temperature outdoors,
C 5 C lowest temperature indoors.
Higher ambient temperatures require
a corresponding reduction in temperature rise, and thus affect price or
rated power as follows:
C 1.5% surcharge for each 1 K above
standard temperature conditions,
or
C 1.0% reduction of rated power for
each 1 K above standard temperature conditions.
These adjustment factors are applicable up to 15 K above standard temperature conditions.

Altitude of installation
The transformers are suitable for operation at altitudes up to 1000 metres above sea level. Site altitudes
above 1000 m necessitate the use of
special designs. For every 100 m
above the permissible altitude of installation, the rated power for oil-immersed transformers is to be reduced by approx. 0.4% and for drytype transformers for approx. 0.5%.
5/3
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Transformer losses and

efficiencies
Losses and efficiencies stated in this
manual are average values for guidance only. They are applicable if no
loss evaluation figure is stated in the
inquiry (see following chapter) and
they are subject to the tolerances
stated in IEC 60076-1, namely +10%
of the total losses, or +15% of each
component loss, provided that the
tolerance for the total losses is not
exceeded.
If optimized and/or guaranteed losses
without tolerances are required, this
must be stated in the inquiry.
Connections and vector groups
Distribution transformers
The transformers listed in this manual are all three-phase transformers
with one set of windings connected
in star (wye) and the other one in
delta, whereby the neutral of the
star-connected winding is fully rated
and brought to the outside.
The primary winding (HV) is normally
connected in delta, the secondary
winding (LV) in wye. The electrical
offset of the windings in respect to
each other is either 30, 150 or 330
degrees standard (Dy1, Dy5, Dy11).
Other vector groups as well as single-phase transformers and autotransformers on request.
5/4
Seite 4
Test voltages
Routine and special tests
Power-frequency withstand voltages

and lightning-impulse withstand
voltages are in accordance with
IEC 60076-3, Paragraph 5, Table II, as
follows:
All transformers are subjected to the

following routine tests in the factory:
C Measurement of winding resistance
C Measurement of voltage ratio and
check of polarity or vector group
C Measurement of impedance voltage
C Measurement of load loss
C Measurement of no-load loss and
no-load current
C Induced overvoltage withstand test
(windings test)
C Separate-source voltage withstand
test (AC test voltage)
C Partial discharge test (only GEAFOL
cast-resin transformers).
Conversion to 60 Hz possibilities
All ratings in the selection tables of
this guide are based on 50 Hz operation. For 60 Hz operation, the following options apply:
C Rated power and impedance voltage are increased by 10%, all other
parameters remain identical.
C Rated power increases by 20%,
but no-load losses increase by 30%
and noise level increases by 3 dB,
all other parameters remain identical (this layout is not possible for
cast-resin transformers).
C All technical data remain identical,
price is reduced by 5%.
C Temperature rise is reduced by
10 K, load losses are reduced by
15%, all other parameters remain
identical.
Overloading
Overloading of Siemens transformers
is guided by the relevant IEC 60354
Loading guide for oil-immersed
transformers and the (similar) ANSI
C57.92 Guide for loading mineral-oilimmersed power transformers.
Overloading of GEAFOL cast-resin
transformers according to IEC 60905
"Loading guide."
The following special tests are optional and must be specified further
in the enquiry:
C Lightning-impulse voltage test
(LI test), full-wave and choppedwave (to be specified)
C Partial discharge test
C Heat-run test at natural or forced
cooling (to be specified)
C Noise level test
C Peak short-circuit test.
Test certificates are issued for all of
the above tests on request.
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Seite 5
Transformers
Transformer cell
(indoor installation)
The transformer cell must have the
necessary electrical clearances when
an open-air connection is used. The
ventilation system must be large
enough to fulfil the recommendations
for the maximum temperatures according to IEC.
A. Capital cost
Cp r
CC =
100
amount
year
Cp = purchase price
r=
p qn
qn 1
q=
p
+ 1 = interest factor
100
= depreciation factor
Transformer loss evaluation
= interest rate in % p.a.
The sharply increased costs of electrical energy have made it almost

mandatory for buyers of electrical
machinery to carefully evaluate the
inherent losses of this equipment. In
case of distribution and power transformers, which operate continuously
and most frequently in loaded condition, this is especially important. As
an example, the added cost of lossoptimized transformers can in most
cases be counterbalanced by savings
in power consumption in less than
three years.
= depreciation period in years
Low-loss transformers use more and

better materials for their construction,
therefore their purchase price is
higher. By stipulating loss evaluation
figures in the transformer enquiry, the
manufacturer receives the necessary
information to offer a loss-optimized
transformer rather than the low-cost
model.
Detailed loss evaluation methods for
transformers have been developed
and are described accurately in the
literature, taking the project-specific
evaluation factors of a given customer into account.
B. Cost of no-load loss

CP0 = Ce 8760 h / year P0
Ce
= energy charges
P0
= no-load loss [kW]
amount
year
amount
kWh
C. Cost of load loss

CPk = Ce 8760 h / year 2 Pk
amount
year
constant operating load

=
rated load
Pk
= copper loss [kW]
D. Cost resulting from demand charges

CD = Cd (P0 + Pk)
Cd
Table 5/2
amount
year
= demand charges
amount
kW year
Cost examination for transformer selection
Table 5/2 gives a simplified method

for a quick evaluation of different
quoted transformer losses, making
the following assumptions:
C The transformers are operated continuously
C The transformers operate at partial
load, but this partial load is constant
C Additional cost and inflation factors

are not considered
C Demand charges are based on
100% load.
5/5
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Seite 6
The total cost of owning and operating a transformer for one year is thus
defined as follows:
A. Capital cost (CC)
taking into account the purchase
price (Cp), the interest rate (p), and
the depreciation period (n)
Depreciation period.................................
Interest rate ............................................
n
p
Energy charge .........................................
Ce = 0.13 /kWh
C. Cost of load loss (CPk)

based on the copper loss (Pk), the
equivalent annual load factor (),
and energy cost (Ce)
Depreciation factor
r = 13.99
Equivalent annual load factor ..................
Cd = 179
kW year
= 0.8
A. Low-cost transformer
B. Loss-optimized transformer
P0 = 2.6 kW
Pk = 20 kW
Cp = 12800
P0 = 1.7 kW
Pk = 17 kW
Cp = 14300
Demand charge.......................................
B. Cost of no-load loss (CP0)

based on the no-load loss (P0), and
energy cost (Ce)
= 20 years
= 12 % p.a.
no-load loss
load loss
purchase price
no-load loss
load loss
purchase price
D. Demand charges (Cd)

based on the power demand set
by the power supply company,
and the total power loss.
12,800 13.99
Cd =
100
= 1,790/year
14,300 13.99
Cd =
100
= 2,000/year
CP0 = 0.13 8760 2.6

= 2,961/year
CP0 = 0.13 8760 1.7

= 1,936/year
These individual costs are calculated

as shown in Table 5/2.
CPk = 0.13 8760 0.64 20

= 14,580/year
CPk = 0.13 8760 0.64 17

= 12,390/year
To demonstrate the usefulness of

such calculations, the following arbitrary examples are shown, using factors that can be considered typical in
Germany, and neglecting the effects
of inflation on the rate assumed.
C0 = 179 (2.6 + 20)

= 4,045/year
C0 = 179 (1.7 + 17)

= 3,350/year
Total cost of owning and operating this

transformer is thus:
Total cost of owning and operating this

transformer is thus:
23,376/year
19,676/year
The energy saving of the optimized distribution transformer of 3,700 per year
pays for the increased purchase price in less than one year.
Table 5/3
5/6
Example: 1,600 kVA distribution transformer
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:05 Uhr
Seite 7
Transformers
Mechanical Design
General mechanical design for oilimmersed transformers
C Iron core made of grain-oriented
electrical sheet steel insulated on
both sides, core-type
C Windings consisting of copper section wire, copper band or aluminum
band. The insulation has a high disruptive strength and is temperature-resistant, thus guaranteeing a
long service life
C Designed to withstand short circuit
for at least 2 seconds (IEC)
C Oil-filled tank designed as tank with
strong corrugated walls or as radiator tank
C Transformer base with plain or
flanged wheels (skid base available)
C Cooling/insulation liquid: Mineral oil
according to VDE 0370/IEC 60296(3).
Silicone oil or synthetic liquids are
available (on request)
C Standard coating for outdoor installation. Coatings for special applications (e.g. in aggressive environments) are available
Tank design and oil preservation
system
TUMETIC sealed-tank distribution
transformers
In ratings up to 2,500 kVA and 170 kV
LI this is the standard sealed-tank
distribution transformer without
conservator and gas cushion. The
TUMETIC transformer is always
completely filled with oil; oil expansion is taken up by the flexible corrugated steel tank (variable volume
tank design), whereby the maximum
operating pressure remains at only a

fraction of the usual. These transformers are always shipped completely filled with oil and sealed
for their lifetime. Bushings can be
exchanged from the outside without
draining the oil below the top of the
active part.
The hermetically sealed system prevents oxygen, nitrogen, or humidity
from contact with the insulating oil.
This improves the ageing properties
of the oil to the extent that no maintenance is required on these transformers for their lifetime. Generally,
the TUMETIC transformer is lower
than the TUNORMAtransformer.
This design has been in successful
service since 1973. A special
TUMETIC protection device has been
developed for this transformer.
TUNORMA distribution transformers with conservator
This is the standard distribution transformer design in all ratings. The oil
level in the tank and the top-mounted
bushings is kept constant by a conservator vessel or expansion tank
mounted at the highest point of the
transformer. Oil level changes due to
thermal cycling affect the conservator only. The ambient air is prevented
from direct contact with the insulating oil through oil traps and dehydrating breathers.
Photo 5/1
Cross section of a TUMETIC

three-phase distribution
transformer
Photo 5/2
630 kVA, three-phase, TUNORMA

20 kV 2.5 %/0.4 kV distribution
transformer
Tanks from 50 kVA to approximately

6,000 kVA are preferably of the corrugated steel design, whereby the
sidewalls are formed on automatic
machines into integral cooling pockets. Suitable spot welds and braces
render the required mechanical
stability. Tank bottom and cover are
fabricated from rolled and welded
steel plate.
5/7
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:08 Uhr
Seite 8
Connection Systems
Distribution transformers
All Siemens transformers have topmounted HV and LV bushings according to DIN in their standard version.
Besides the open bushing arrangement for direct connection of bare or
insulated wires, three basic insulated
terminal systems are available.
Photo 5/3
Fully enclosed cable connection box
Photo 5/4
Grounded metal elbow plug connection
Fully enclosed terminal box for

cables (Photo 5/3)
Available for either HV or LV side, or
for both. Horizontally split design in
degree of protection IP 44 or IP 54
(totally enclosed and fully protected
against contact with live parts, plus
protection against drip, splash or
spray water).
Cable installation through split cable
glands and removable plates facing
diagonally downwards. Suitable for
single-core or three-phase cables
with solid dielectric insulation, with
or without stress cones. Multiple cables per phase are terminated on
auxiliary bus structures attached to
the bushings. Removal of transformer by simply bending back the
cables.
Insulated plug connectors
(Photo 5/4)
For substation installations, suitable
HV can be applied using insulated
elbow connectors in LI ratings up to
170 kV.
HV
LV
Cable box
Cable box
Cable box
Flange
Flange
Cable box
Flange
Flange connection
boxes
Elbow
connector
Cable box
Elbow
connector
Flange
Table 5/4
Possible combinations of
connection systems
Flange connection (Photo 5/5)

Air-insulated bus ducts, insulated
busbars or throat-connected
switchgear cubicles are connected
via standardized flanges on steel terminal enclosures. These can accommodate either HV, LV or both bushings. Fiberglass-reinforced epoxy
5/8
Photo 5/5
Flange connection for switchgear

and bus ducts
partitions are available between HV

and LV bushings if flange/flange
arrangements are chosen.
Apart from open-type arrangements
of the bushings, all terminal system
combinations listed in Table 5/4 are
possible.
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:09 Uhr
Seite 9
Transformers
Accessories and Protective

Devices
Accessories not listed completely.
Deviations are possible.
Double-float Buchholz relay
(Photo 5/6)
For sudden pressure rise and gas detection in oil-immersed transformer
tanks with conservator. Installed in
the connecting pipe between tank
and conservator and responding to internal arcing faults and slow decomposition of insulating materials. Additionally, backup function of oil alarm.
Photo 5/6
Double-float Buchholz relay
Photo 5/8
Magnetic oil level indicator
Photo 5/7
Dial-type contact thermometer
The relay is actuated either by pressure waves or gas accumulation or

by loss of oil below the relay level.
Separate contacts are installed for
alarm and tripping.
In case of a gas accumulation alarm,
gas samples can be drawn directly at
the relay with a small chemical testing kit. Discoloring of two liquids indicates either arcing by-products or insulation decomposition products in
the oil. No change in color indicates
an air bubble.
Dial-type contact thermometer

(Photo 5/7)
Magnetic oil level indicator

(Photo 5/8)
Indicates actual top-oil temperature.

Sensor mounted in well in tank
cover. Up to four separately adjustable alarm contacts and one maximum pointer are available. Installed
to be readable from the ground.
These instruments can also be used
to control forced-cooling equipment.
The float position inside of the conservator is transmitted magnetically

through the tank wall to the indicator.
Devices supplied with limit (position)
switches for high- and low-level
alarm are available. Readable from
the ground.
5/9
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
Photo 5/9
11.08.2005
19:10 Uhr
Protective device for

hermetically sealed
transformers (TUMETIC)
Protective device for hermetically

sealed transformers (TUMETIC)
(Photo 5/9)
For use on hermetically sealed
TUMETIC distribution transformers.
Gives alarm upon loss of oil and gas
accumulation. Mounted directly at
the (permanently sealed) filler pipe of
these transformers.
Seite 10
Photo 5/10 Dehydrating breather
Pressure relief device (Photo 5/12)

Relieves abnormally high internal
pressure shock waves. Easily visible
operation pointer and alarm contact.
Reseals positively after operation and
continues to function without operator action.
Dehydrating breather
(Photos 5/10, 5/11)
A dehydrating breather removes
most of the moisture from the air
which is drawn into the conservator
as the transformer cools down. The
dehydrating breather contributes to
safe and reliable operation of the
transformer.
5/10
Photo 5/11 Dehydrating breather
Photo 5/12 Pressure relief device
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:10 Uhr
Seite 11
Transformers
Technical Data of
TUNORMA and TUMETIC
Distribution Transformers
Note: The tank with strong corrugated walls represented in Fig. 5/3 is
the preferred design. For high voltages up to 24 kV and a rating up to
2,500 kVA (and with high voltages >
2436 kV and a rating up to 800 kVA),
the conservator is fitted at the vertical side just above the low-voltage
bushings.
Standard
DIN 42500
Rated power
502500 kVA
Rated frequency
50 Hz
HV rating
up to 36 kV
Taps on HV side
2.5 % or 2 x 2.5 %
LV rating
400 720 V (special designs for up to 12 kV

can be built)
Connection
HV winding: delta
LV winding: star
(up to 100 kVA: zigzag)
Losses
The standard HD 428.1.S1 (= DIN
42500, Part 1) applies to three-phase
oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 Hz, from 50 kVA to 2,500 kVA,
Um to 24 kV.
For load losses (Pk), three different
listings (A, B and C) were specified.
There were also three listings (A, B
and C) for no-load losses (P0) and
corresponding sound levels.
Due to the different requirements,
pairs of values were proposed which,
in the national standard, permit one
or several combinations of losses.
DIN 42500 specifies the combinations A-C, C-C and B-A as being
most suitable.
The combinations B-A (normal
losses) and A-C (reduced losses) are
approximately in line with previous
standards. In addition, there is the
C-C combination. Transformers of
this kind with additionally reduced
impedance especially economical
(maximum efficiency > 99%). The
higher costs of these transformers
are counteracted by the energy savings which they make.
Impedance voltage at
rated current
6 % at (4 % only up to 630 kVA rated

power and HV rating
up to 24 kV)
Cooling
ONAN
Protection class
IP 00
Final coating
RAL 7033 (other colors are available)
Table 5/5
TUMETIC and TUNORMA three-phase oil-immersed distribution transformers
Um
kV
Lightning impulse test voltage AC test voltage

kV
kV
1.1
12
75
28
24
125
50
36
170
70
Table 5/6
Insulation level (IP 00)
for no-load losses, the listings D and

E were specified. In order to find the
most efficient transformer, please
see the aforementioned section on
Transformer loss evaluation.
Standard HD 428.3.S1 (= DIN 42500-3)

specifies the losses for oil distribution transformers up to Um = 36 kV.
For load losses, the listings D and E,
5/11
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:10 Uhr
Seite 12
12
11
10
8
2N 2U 2V 2W
H1
1U 2U
1W
B1
7
9
A1
Oil drain plug
Thermometer pocket
10 Lashing lug
Adjustment for off-load tap changer
11 Oil filler neck
Rating plate (relocatable)
Grounding terminals
12 Provision for mounting

protective device
Fig. 5/2
9 Towing eye, 30 mm dia.
TUMETIC distribution transformer (sealed tank)
1
10
H1
3 8
2N 2U 2V 2W
1U 2U
1W
B1
7
9
A1
E
1
Oil level indicator
6 Adjustment for off-load tap changer
Oil drain plug
7 Rating plate (relocatable)
Thermometer pocket
8 Grounding terminals
Buchholz relay (optional extra)
Dehydrating breather (optional extra)
9 Towing eye, 30 mm dia.

10 Lashing lug
Notes: Tank with strong corrugated walls shown in illustration is the preferred design. With
HV ratings up to 24 kV and rated power up to 2,500 kVA (and with HV ratings > 2436 kV and
rated power up to 800 kVA), the conservator is fitted on the long side just above the LV bushings.
Fig. 5/3
5/12
TUNORMA distribution transformer (with conservator)
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:10 Uhr
Rated
Max.
Imped-
Combi-
No-load
Load
Sound
power
rated
ance
nation of
losses
losses
pressure power
voltage
voltage
losses
level 1 m level
distance
acc. to
tolerance
(centers)
CENELEC
+ 3 dB
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
Uz
%
4JB.. 4HB..
50
12
..4744-3LB
B-A'
190
1350
42
55
340
350
860
980
660
660
1210 1085
520
..4744-3RB
A-C'
125
1100
34
47
400
430
825 1045
660
660
1210 1085
520
..4744-3TB
C-C'
125
875
34
47
420
440
835
985
660
660
1220 1095
520
..4767-3LB
B-A'
190
1350
42
55
370
380
760
860
660
660
1315 1235
520
..4767-3RB
A-C'
125
1100
34
47
430
460
860
860
660
660
1300 1220
520
..4767-3TB
C-C'
125
875
33
47
480
510
880 1100
685
685
1385 1265
520
36
..4780-3CB
E-D
230
1450
52
500
710
710
1530
520
12
..5044-3LB
B-A'
320
2150
45
59
500
500
1090 1020
660
660
1275 1110
520
..5044-3RB
A-C'
210
1750
35
49
570
570
980
980
660
660
1315 1145
520
..5044-3TB
C-C'
210
1475
35
49
600
620
1030
930
660
660
1320 1150
520
..5067-3LB
B-A'
320
2150
45
59
520
530
1020 1140
685
685
1360 1245
520
..5067-3RB
A-C'
210
1750
35
49
600
610
1030 1030
690
690
1400 1280
520
..5067-3TB
C-C'
210
1475
35
49
640
680
960 1060
695
695
1425 1305
520
36
..5080-3CB
E-D
380
2350
56
660
780
780
1600
520
12
..5244-3LA
B-A'
460
3100
47
62
620
610
1140 1140
710
710
1350 1185
520
..5244-3RA
A-C'
300
2350
37
52
700
690
1130 1010
660
660
1390 1220
520
..5244-3TA
C-C'
300
2000
38
52
760
780
985 1085
660
660
1380 1215
520
..5267-3LA
B-A'
460
3100
47
62
660
640
1150 1150
695
695
1440 1320
520
..5267-3RA
A-C'
300
2350
37
52
730
730
1030
930
695
695
1540 1420
520
..5267-3TA
C-C'
300
2000
37
52
800
820
1120 1120
710
710
1475 1355
520
36
..5280-3CA
E-D
520
3350
59
900
1120
800
800
1700
520
12
..5344-3LA
B-A'
550
3600
48
63
720
710
1190 1190
680
680
1450 1285
520
..5344-3RA
A-C'
360
2760
38
53
840
830
1070 1120
660
660
1470 1300
520
..5344-3TA
C-C'
360
2350
38
53
900
920
1130 1130
660
660
1450 1285
520
..5367-3LA
B-A'
550
3600
48
63
800
780
1290 1290
820
820
1595 1425
520
..5367-3RA
A-C'
360
2760
38
53
890
910
1110 1230
755
755
1630 1460
520
..5367-3TA
C-C'
360
2350
38
53
950
980
1080 1180
705
705
1595 1430
520
..5380-3CA
E-D
600
3800
61
1000
1250
800
800
1700
520
24
(200)
24
36
dB
to-roller
kV
160
LWA
dB
RollerHeight
Um
24
LPA
Width
kVA
100
Pk 75*
Length
Sn
24
P0
Dimensions
weight
TUNORMA
Total
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
HV side
Sound
TUNORMA
Type
Seite 13
kg
A1
B1
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
1000
1050
Dimensions and weights are approximate values.

Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.
x: On request
* Related to 75 C
Table 5/7
Selection table for oil-immersed distribution transformers from 50 to 2,500 kVA
5/13
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:10 Uhr
Rated
Max.
Imped-
Combi-
No-load
Load
Sound
power
rated
ance
nation of
losses
losses
pressure power
voltage
voltage
losses
level 1 m level
distance
acc. to
tolerance
(centers)
CENELEC
+ 3 dB
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
Uz
%
4JB.. 4HB..
250
12
..5444-3LA
B-A'
650
4200
50
65
830
820
1300 1300
810
810
1450 1285
520
..5444-3RA
A-C'
425
3250
40
55
940
920
1260 1260
670
820
1480 1415
520
..5444-3TA
C-C'
425
2750
40
55
1050 1070
1220 1220
690
700
1530 1310
520
..5467-3LA
B-A'
650
4200
49
65
900
1340 1340
800
760
1620 1450
520
..5467-3RA
A-C'
425
3250
39
55
1010 1010
1140 1190
760
680
1675 1510
520
..5467-3TA
C-C'
425
2750
40
55
1120 1140
1220 1340
715
710
1640 1475
520
36
..5480-3CA
E-E
650
4250
62
1100
1350
800
1680
520
12
..5544-3LA
B-A'
780
5000
50
66
980
960
1440 1330
820
820
1655 1385
670
..5544-3RA
A-C'
510
3850
40
56
1120 1100
1400 1250
820
820
1690 1415
670
..5544-3TA
C-C'
510
3250
40
56
1240 1260
1380 1260
820
820
1665 1390
670
..5567-3LA
B-A'
780
5000
50
66
1050 1030
1450 1350
840
840
1655 1510
670
..5567-3RA
A-C'
510
3850
40
56
1170 1150
1410 1270
820
820
1755 1610
670
..5567-3TA
C-C'
510
3250
40
56
1250 1280
1395 1290
820
820
1675 1540
670
36
..5580-3CA
E-E
760
5400
64
1220
1420
960
1700
670
12
..5644-3LA
B-A'
930
6000
52
68
1180 1160
1470 1390
930
930
1700 1425
670
..5644-3RA
A-C'
610
4600
42
58
1320 1310
1400 1360
820
820
1700 1430
670
..5644-3TA
C-C'
610
3850
42
58
1470 1470
1410 1390
820
820
1695 1420
670
..5667-3LA
B-A'
930
6000
52
68
1240 1220
1570 1570
940
940
1655 1510
670
..5667-3RA
A-C'
610
4600
42
58
1370 1350
1475 1400
820
820
1760 1615
670
..5667-3TA
C-C'
610
3850
42
58
1490 1520
1440 1400
820
820
1765 1540
670
36
..5580-3CA
E-E
930
6200
65
1480
1470
990
1830
670
12
..5744-3LA
B-A'
1100
7100
53
69
1410 1380
1500 1430
840
840
1710 1440
670
..5744-3RA
A-C'
720
5450
42
59
1650 1620
1560 1550
890
890
1745 1470
670
..5744-3TA
C-C'
720
4550
43
59
1700 1710
1500 1470
820
820
1745 1470
670
..5767-3LA
B-A'
1100
7100
53
69
1460 1440
1470 1530
835
850
1755 1610
670
..5767-3RA
A-C'
720
5450
42
59
1650 1620
1495 1420
835
820
1815 1665
670
..5767-3TA
C-C'
720
4550
43
59
1860 1910
1535 1500
820
820
1860 1645
670
..5780-3CA
E-E
1050
7800
66
1680
1510
1030
1900
670
24
(500)
24
36
dB
to-roller
kV
400
LWA
dB
RollerHeight
Um
24
LPA
Width
kVA
(315)
Pk 75*
Length
Sn
24
P0
Dimensions
weight
TUMETIC
Total
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
HV side
Sound
TUNORMA
Type
Seite 14

x: On request
* Related to 75 C
Table 5/8
5/14
kg
920
A1
B1
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:10 Uhr
Seite 15
Transformers
Rated
Max.
Imped-
Combi-
No-load
Load
Sound
power
rated
ance
nation of
losses
losses
pressure power
voltage
voltage
losses
level 1 m level
distance
acc. to
tolerance
(centers)
CENELEC
+ 3 dB
Total
P0
Pk 75*
LPA
LWA
dB
dB
Dimensions
RollerHeight
to-roller
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
TUNORMA
Width
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
Length
TUMETIC
weight
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
HV side
Sound
TUNORMA
Type
Sn
Um
Uz
kVA
kV
4JB.. 4HB..
630
12
..5844-3LA
B-A'
1300
8400
53
70
1660 1660
1680 1480
880
880
1755 1585
670
..5844-3RA
A-C'
860
6500
43
60
1850 1810
1495 1420
835
820
1785 1510
670
..5844-3TA
C-C'
860
5400
43
60
2000 1990
1535 1380
820
820
1860 1520
670
..5844-3PA
B-A'
1200
8700
53
70
1750 1760
1720 1560
890
890
1920 1685
670
..5844-3SA
A-C'
800
6750
43
60
1950 1920
1665 1600
870
870
1740 1400
670
..5844-3UA
C-C'
800
5600
43
60
2160 2130
1670 1560
830
830
1840 1500
670
..5867-3LA
B-A'
1300
8400
53
70
1690 1650
1665 1640
860
860
1810 1595
670
..5867-3RA
A-C'
860
6500
43
60
1940 1920
1685 1680
870
870
1910 1695
670
..5867-3TA
C-C'
860
5400
43
60
2100 2130
1600 1490
820
820
1940 1725
670
..5867-3PA
B-A'
1200
8700
53
70
1730 1720
1780 1580
880
880
1760 1610
670
..5867-3SA
A-C'
800
6750
43
60
1970 1960
1645 1640
830
830
1810 1595
670
..5867-3UA
C-C'
800
5600
43
60
2240 2210
1740 1670
880
880
1840 1625
670
36
..5880-3CA
E-E
1300
8800
67
1950
1740
1080
1940
670
12
..5944-3PA
B-A'
1450
10700
55
72
1990 1960
1780 1540
1905 1660
670
..5944-3SA
A-C'
950
8500
45
62
2210 2290
1720 1830
900
960
1935 1630
670
..5944-3UA
C-C'
950
7400
44
62
2520 2490
1760 1710
920
920
1975 1730
670
..5967-3PA
B-A'
1450
10700
55
72
2000 1950
1720 1710
1000 1000
1885 1670
670
..5967-3SA
A-C'
950
8500
45
62
2390 2340
1760 1710
960
960
1945 1730
670
..5967-3UA
C-C'
950
7400
44
62
2590 2550
1770 1700
930
930
1985 1780
670
36
..5980-3CA
E-E
1520
11000
68
2400
1800
1100
2030
670
12
..6044-3PA
B-A'
1700
13000
55
73
2450 2640
1790 1630
1000 1000
2095 2070
820
..6044-3SA
A-C'
1100
10500
45
63
2660 2610
1830 1830
1040 1040
2025 1770
820
..6044-3UA
C-C'
1100
9500
45
63
2800 2750
1830 1830
1040 1040
2105 1840
820
..6067-3PA
B-A'
1700
13000
55
73
2530 2720
1830 1670
1090 1010
2095 2120
820
..6067-3SA
A-C'
1100
10500
45
63
2750 2690
1790 1740
1050 1050
2055 1840
820
..6067-3UA
C-C'
1100
9500
45
63
2830 2810
1725 1770
2065 1850
820
..6080-3CA
E-E
1700
13000
68
2850
2120
2220
820
24
800
24
1000
24
36
kg
A1
B1
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
1000 1000
990
990
1160

x: On request
* Related to 75 C
Table 5/9
5/15
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:10 Uhr
Rated
Max.
Imped-
Combi-
No-load
Load
Sound
power
rated
ance
nation of
losses
losses
pressure power
voltage
voltage
losses
level 1 m level
distance
acc. to
tolerance
(centers)
CENELEC
+ 3 dB
Sn
Um
Uz
kVA
kV
4JB.. 4HB..
(1 250)
12
..6144-3PA
B-A'
..6144-3SA
dB
2100
16000
56
74
2900 3080
1930 1850
A-C'
1300
13200
46
64
3100 3040
1810 1780
..6144-3UA
C-C'
1300
11400
46
64
3340 3040
..6167-3PA
B-A'
2100
16000
56
74
..6167-3SA
A-C'
1300
13200
46
..6167-3UA
C-C'
1300
11400
36
..6180-3CA
E-E
2150
12
..6244-3PA
B-A'
..6244-3SA
kg
Rollerto-roller
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
Height
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
TUMETIC
LWA
dB
A1
B1
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
1260 1100
2110 2070
820
990
2145 1880
820
1755 1720
1015 1000
2235 1970
820
2950 3200
2020 1780
1260 1100
2110 2220
820
64
3190 3120
1840 1810
1060 1060
2115 1900
820
46
64
3390 3330
1810 1780
1015
990
2245 2030
820
16400
70
3360
2150
1250
2350
820
2600
20000
57
76
3450 3590
1970 1870
1220 1140
2315 2095
820
A-C'
1700
17000
47
66
3640 3590
2030 1760
1080 1090
2315 2010
820
..6244-3UA
C-C'
1700
14000
47
66
3930 3880
2020 1900
1110 1100
2395 2070
820
..6267-3PA
B-A'
2600
20000
57
76
3470 3690
2070 1830
1280 1120
2335 2320
820
..6267-3SA
A-C'
1700
17000
47
66
3670 3850
2030 2000
1230 1070
2265 2120
820
..6267-3UA
C-C'
1700
14000
47
66
4010 3950
2000 1850
1030 1030
2305 2010
820
36
..6280-3CA
E-E
2600
19200
71
3930
2170
1340
2480
820
12
..6344-3PA
B-A'
2900
25300
58
78
4390 4450
2100 1890
1330 1330
2555 2540
1070
..6344-3SA
A-C'
2050
21200
49
68
4270 4430
2080 1840
1330 1330
2455 2250
1070
..6344-3UA
C-C'
2050
17500
49
68
4730 4710
2020 1730
1330 1330
2495 2170
1070
..6367-3PA
B-A'
2900
25300
58
78
4480 4500
2020 1860
1330 1330
2655 2660
1070
..6367-3SA
A-C'
2050
21200
49
68
4290 4490
2190 2030
1330 1330
2425 2280
1070
..6367-3UA
C-C'
2050
17500
49
68
4910 4840
2110 1980
1330 1330
2475 2180
1070
36
..6380-3CA
E-E
3200
22000
75
5100
2260
1380
2560
1070
12
..6444-3PA
B-A'
3500
29000
61
81
5200 5090
2115 2030
1345 1330
2685 2550
1070
..6444-3SA
A-C'
2500
26500
51
71
5150 5110
2195 1950
1345 1330
2535 2450
1070
..6444-3UA
C-C'
2500
22000
51
71
5790 5660
2190 2190
1330 1330
2565 2240
1070
..6467-3PA
B-A'
3500
29000
61
81
5420 5220
2115 2030
1335 1330
2785 2675
1070
..6467-3SA
A-C'
2500
26500
51
71
5260 5220
2195 2030
1335 1335
2585 2580
1070
..6467-3UA
C-C'
2500
22000
51
71
5640 5470
2160 2080
1330 1330
2605 2305
1070
..6480-3CA
E-E
3800
29400
76
5900
2320
1390
2790
1070
36

x: On request
* Related to 75 C
5/16
TUNORMA
LPA
24
Table 5/10
Width
Pk 75*
24
2 500
Length
24
(2 000)
Dimensions
weight
P0
24
1 600
Total
TUMETIC
TUMETIC
TUNORMA
HV side
Sound
TUNORMA
Type
Seite 16
990
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:11 Uhr
Seite 17
Transformers
LV terminals
Three-leg core
Normal arrangement: Top or,

Bottom at LV side.
Special version: available
on request at extra charge
Made of grain-oriented,
low-loss electrolaminations
insulated on both sides
Resilient spacers
HV terminals
To insulate core and

windings from mechanical
vibrations, resulting in low
noise emissions
Variable arrangements, for

optimal station design. HV
tapping links on low-voltage
side for adjustment to system
conditions, reconnectable in
de-energized state
HV winding
Consisting of vacuum-potted
single foil-type aluminum
coils. See enlarged detail in
Fig. 5/5
Cross-flow fans
LV winding
Permitting up to 50% increase

in the rated power
Made of aluminum band.

Turns firmly glued together
by means of insulating
sheet wrapper material
Temperature monitoring
By PTC thermistor detectors
in the LV winding
Paint finish on steel parts
Insulation: Mixture of
epoxy resin and quartz
powder
Multiple coating, RAL 5009.

On request: Two-component
varnish or hot-dip galvanizing
(for particularly aggressive
environments)
Makes the transformer

maintenance-free,
moisture-proof, tropicalized,
flame-resistant and selfextinguishing
Environmental category E2
Clamping frame
and truck
Climatic category C2
(If the transformer is installed
outdoors, degree of protection
IP 23 must be assured)
Rollers can be swung

around for lengthways or
sideways travel
Fire class F1
Fig. 5/4
GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transformer
GEAFOL Cast-Resin
Dry-Type Transformers
Standards and regulations
GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type
transformers comply with
IEC 60076-11, CENELEC HD 464,
HD 538 and DIN 42523.
Advantages and applications

GEAFOL distribution and power
transformers in ratings from 100 to
approx. 40,000 kVA and LI values of
over 200 kV are full substitutes for
oil-immersed transformers with comparable electrical and mechanical
data.
insulating materials are used throughout, so that all restrictions applying

to oil-filled electrical equipment,
such as oil-collecting pits, fire walls,
fire-extinguishing equipment, etc.,
are omitted.
GEAFOL transformers are designed

for indoor installation close to their
point of use, which is often at the
load center. Flame-retardant inorganic
5/17
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:13 Uhr
Seite 18
GEAFOL transformers are also installed where oil-filled transformers

must not be used: inside buildings, in
tunnels, on ships, on offshore cranes
and platforms, in wind power stations, in groundwater protection areas, in food processing plants etc.
Often they are combined with their
primary and secondary switchgear
and distribution boards into compact
substations that are installed directly
at their point of use. As converter transformers for
variable-speed drives
they can be installed
together with the converters at the drive location. This reduces civil works, cable costs, transmission losses, and installation costs.
GEAFOL transformers are fully LIrated. They have similar noise levels
to comparable oil-filled transformers.
Taking the above indirect cost reductions into account, they are also frequently cost-competitive.
Runddrahtwicklung
8
U
7
6
5
By virtue of their design, GEAFOL

transformers are almost completely
maintenance-free for their lifetime.
6
4
6
5
Folienwicklung
GEAFOL transformers have been in

successful service since 1965. A lot
of licences have been granted to major manufacturers throughout the
world since.
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Fig. 5/5
5/18
High-voltage encapsulated winding design of GEAFOL cast-resin transformer

and voltage stress of a conventional round-wire winding (above) and the foil
winding (below)
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:13 Uhr
Seite 19
Transformers
HV winding
The high-voltage windings are wound
from aluminum foil, interleaved with
high-grade polypropylene insulating
foil. The assembled and connected
individual coils are placed in a heated
mold, and are potted in a vacuum
furnace with a mixture of pure silica
(quartz sand) and specially blended
epoxy resins. The only connections
to the outside are copper bushings,
which are internally bonded to the
aluminum winding connections.
The external star or delta connections
are made of insulated copper connectors to ensure an optimal installation
design. The resulting high-voltage
windings are fire-resistant, moistureproof, corrosion-proof, and show excellent ageing properties under all indoor operating conditions. For outdoor use, specially designed
sheet-metal enclosures are available.
The foil windings combine a simple
winding technique with a high degree
of electrical safety. The insulation is
subjected to less electrical stress
than in other types of windings. In a
conventional round-wire winding, the
interturn voltage can add up to twice
the interlayer voltage, while in a foil
winding it never exceeds the voltage
per turn because a layer consists of
only one winding turn. Result: a high
AC voltage and impulse-voltage withstand capacity.
Why aluminum? The thermal expansion coefficients of aluminum and

cast-resin are so similar that thermal
stresses resulting from load changes
are kept to a minimum (see Fig. 5/5).
LV winding
The standard low-voltage winding
with its considerably reduced dielectric stress is wound from single aluminum sheets with interleaved castresin impregnated fiberglass fabric.
The assembled coils are then ovencured to form uniformly bonded solid
cylinders that are impervious to moisture. Through the single-sheet winding design, excellent dynamic stability under short-circuit conditions is
achieved. Connections are submerged-arc-welded to the aluminum
sheets and are extended as aluminum busbars to the secondary terminals.
Fire safety
GEAFOL transformers use only
flame-retardant and self-extinguishing
materials in their construction. No additional substances, such as aluminum oxide trihydrate, which could
negatively influence the mechanical
stability of the cast-resin molding
material, are used. Internal arcing
from electrical faults and externally
applied flames do not cause the
transformers to burst or burn. After
the source of ignition is removed, the
transformer is self-extinguishing.
This design has been approved by

fire safety officers in many countries
for installation in buildings where
people are generally present and in
other areas.
The environmental safety of the combustion residues has been proven in
many tests.
Categorization of cast-resin transformers
Dry-type transformers have to be categorized under the sections listed
below:
C Environmental category
C Climatic category
C Fire category
These categories have to be shown
on the rating plate of each dry-type
transformer.
Product conformity to the properties
laid down in the standards for ratings
within the approximate category
relating to environment, humidity,
climate and fire behavior has to be
proven by means of tests.
These tests are described for the environmental category (code number
E0, E1 and E2) and for the climatic
category (code number C1, C2) in
DIN VDE 0532, Part 6 (corresponding
to HD 464). According to this standard, they are to be carried out on
complete transformers.
The tests of fire behavior (fire class
code numbers F0 and F1) are limited
to tests on a duplication of a complete transformer. It consists of
a core leg, a low-voltage winding and
a high-voltage winding. The specifications for fire class F2 are determined
by agreement between the manufacturer and the customer.
5/19
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:13 Uhr
Seite 20
ing temperatures are not exceeded

for extended periods of time.
Temperature monitoring
Each GEAFOL transformer is fitted
with three temperature sensors
which are installed in the LV winding.
Solid-state tripping devices can be
supplied separately on order. The
PTC thermistors used for sensing are
selected for the hot-spot winding
temperature. Additional sets of sensors can be installed for them and for
fan control purposes. Additional dialtype thermometers and Pt100 are
available too. Special versions can be
provided for 3.6 kV operating voltages of the LV winding and higher.
Auxiliary wiring is run in a protective
conduit and terminated in a central
LV terminal box (optional). Each wire
and terminal is identified and a wiring
diagram is permanently attached to
the inside cover of this terminal box.
Photo 5/13 Flammability test of cast-resin transformer
Siemens has carried out a lot of

tests.
Insulation class and temperature

rise
The results for our GEAFOL transformers are something to be proud

of:
C Environmental category E2
C Climatic category
C2
C Fire class
F1
The high-voltage winding and the

low-voltage winding utilise class F
insulating materials with a mean temperature rise of 100 K (standard design).
This good behavior is solely due to

the GEAFOL cast-resin mix which
has been used successfully for
decades.
5/20
Overload capability
GEAFOL transformers can be overloaded permanently up to 50% (with
a corresponding increase in impedance voltage and impedance losses)
if additional cross-flow fans are installed. (Dimensions increase by
approximately 200 mm in length and
width.) Short-time overloads are uncritical as long as the maximum wind-
Installation and enclosures

Indoor installation in electrical operating rooms or in various protective enclosures is the preferred method of
installation. The transformers need to
be protected against direct sunlight,
sandstorms and against water. Sufficient ventilation must be provided by
the installation location or the enclosure. Otherwise forced-air cooling
must be provided by other equipment.
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:19 Uhr
Seite 21
Transformers
Photo 5/14 GEAFOL transformer with plugtype cable connections
Instead of the standard open terminals, insulated plug-type elbow connectors can be supplied for the highvoltage side with LI ratings up to
170 kV. Primary cables are usually
fed to the transformer from trenches
below, but can also be connected
from above.
Secondary connections can be made
by multiple insulated cables or by
busbars, from either below or above.
Secondary terminals are aluminum
flat pad connections with bores.
A variety of indoor and outdoor enclosures in different safety classes are
available for the transformers alone,
or for indoor compact substations in
conjunction with high- and low-voltage switchgear cabinets.
Photo 5/15 Radial cooling fans on

GEAFOL transformer for AF
cooling
Photo 5/16 GEAFOL transformer in protective

housing to IP 20/40
Recycling of GEAFOL transformers

In GEAFOL cast-resin transformer
types, the high-voltage and low-voltage coils form firm tubes owing to
electrical and mechanical advantages
and production-specific requirements.
In order to recycle these valuable materials, these parts can normally be
removed and post-processed with
little effort, once the upper clamping
structure has been dismantled and
the top core yoke has been pulled
out. It is common practice to recycle
the main mass portions consisting of
iron core, frame and truck.
5/21
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:19 Uhr
Seite 22
GEAFOL Cast-Resin
Selection Tables, Technical
Data, Dimensions and
Weights
Standard
DIN 42 523
Rated power
10020,000 kVA*
Rated frequency
50 Hz
HV rating
up to 36 kV
LV rating
up to 780 V
(special designs for up to 20 kV are possible)
Tappings on HV side
2.5 % or 2 x 2.5 %
Connection
HV winding: delta
LV winding: star
Impedance voltage at rated

current
4 8 %
Insulation class
HV/ LV = F / F
Temperature rise
HV/ LV = 100/100 K
Color of metal parts
RAL 5009
Table 5/11
GEAFOL three-phase transformers
Um
kV
Lightning impulse test voltage AC test voltage

kV
kV
1.1
12
75
28
24
95**
50
36
145**
70
Table 5/12
Insulation level
2U
2V
2N
2W
H1
A1
* Power ratings > 2.5 MVA upon request
** Other levels upon request
5/22
Fig. 5/6
GEAFOL cast-resin transformer
E
B1
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:19 Uhr
Seite 23
Transformers
Rated
Max.
Imped-
power
rated
ance
voltage
voltage
Type
No-load
Load
Load
Sound
Sound
Total
losses
losses
losses
pressure
power
weight
level 1 m
level
HV side
Dimensions
Length
Width
RollerHeight
to-roller
distance
(centers)
tolerance
+ 3 dB
Sn
Um
Uz
kVA
kV
4GB..
100
12
.5044-3CA
440
1600
1900
45
59
630
1210
705
835
without wheels
.5044-3GA
320
1600
1900
37
51
760
1230
710
890
without wheels
.5044-3DA
360
2000
2300
45
59
590
1190
705
860
without wheels
.5044-3HA
300
2000
2300
37
51
660
1230
710
855
without wheels
.5064-3CA
600
1500
1750
45
59
750
1310
755
935
without wheels
.5064-3GA
400
1500
1750
37
51
830
1300
755
940
without wheels
.5064-3DA
420
1800
2050
45
59
660
1250
750
915
without wheels
.5064-3HA
330
1800
2050
37
51
770
1300
755
930
without wheels
.5244-3CA
610
2300
2600
47
62
770
1220
710
1040
520
.5244-3GA
440
2300
2600
39
54
920
1290
720
1050
520
.5244-3DA
500
2300
2700
47
62
750
1270
720
990
520
.5244-3HA
400
2300
2700
39
54
850
1300
725
985
520
.5264-3CA
800
2200
2500
47
62
910
1330
725
1090
520
.5264-3GA
580
2200
2500
39
54
940
1310
720
1095
520
.5264-3DA
600
2500
2900
47
62
820
1310
725
1075
520
.5264-3HA
480
2500
2900
39
54
900
1350
765
1060
520
.5444-3CA
820
3000
3500
50
65
1040
1330
730
1110
520
.5444-3GA
600
3000
3400
42
57
1170
1330
730
1135
520
.5444-3DA
700
2900
3300
50
65
990
1350
740
1065
520
.5444-3HA
570
2900
3300
42
57
1120
1390
745
1090
520
.5464-3CA
1050
2900
3300
50
65
1190
1390
735
1120
520
.5464-3GA
800
2900
3300
41
57
1230
1400
735
1150
520
.5464-3DA
880
3100
3600
50
65
990
1360
735
1140
520
.5464-3HA
650
3100
3600
41
57
1180
1430
745
1160
520
.5475-3DA
1300
3800
4370
50
65
1700
1900
900
1350
520
24
160
12
24
250
12
24
36
P0
Pk 75*
Pk 120** LPA
dB
LWA
GGES
A1
B1
H1
dB
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
Dimensions and weights are approximate values, valid for 400 V at the secondary side.
The vector group is either Dyn 5 or Dyn 11. Power ratings in parentheses are not standardized.
* Related to 75 C
** Related to 120 C
Table 5/13
GEAFOL cast-resin transformer for 100 to 2,500 kVA
5/23
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
Rated
Max.
Imped-
power
rated
ance
voltage
voltage
19:19 Uhr
Type
Seite 24
No-load
Load
Load
Sound
Sound
Total
losses
losses
losses
pressure
power
weight
level 1 m
level
HV side
Dimensions
Length
Width
RollerHeight
to-roller
distance
(centers)
tolerance
+ 3 dB
Sn
Um
Uz
kVA
kV
4GB..
(315)
12
.5544-3CA
980
3300
3800
52
67
1160
1370
820
1125
670
.5544-3GA
720
3300
3800
43
59
1320
1380
820
1195
670
.5544-3DA
850
3400
3900
51
67
1150
1380
830
1140
670
.5544-3HA
680
3400
3900
43
59
1290
1410
830
1165
670
.5564-3CA
1250
3400
3900
51
67
1250
1410
820
1195
670
.5564-3GA
930
3400
3900
43
59
1400
1440
825
1205
670
.5564-3DA
1000
3600
4100
51
67
1190
1410
825
1185
670
.5564-3HA
780
3600
4100
43
59
1300
1460
830
1195
670
36
.5575-3DA
1450
4500
5170
51
67
1900
1950
920
1400
670
12
.5644-3CA
1150
4300
4900
52
68
1310
1380
820
1265
670
.5644-3GA
880
4300
4900
44
60
1430
1380
820
1290
670
.5644-3DA
1000
4300
4900
52
68
1250
1410
825
1195
670
.5644-3HA
820
4300
4900
44
60
1350
1430
830
1195
670
.5664-3CA
1450
3900
4500
52
68
1410
1440
825
1280
670
.5664-3GA
1100
3900
4500
44
60
1570
1460
830
1280
670
.5664-3DA
1200
4100
4700
52
68
1350
1480
835
1275
670
.5664-3HA
940
4100
4700
44
60
1460
1480
835
1280
670
36
.5675-3DA
1700
5100
5860
52
68
2100
2000
920
1440
670
12
.5744-3CA
1350
4900
5600
53
69
1520
1410
830
1320
670
.5744-3GA
1000
4900
5600
45
61
1740
1450
835
1345
670
.5744-3DA
1200
5600
6400
53
69
1470
1460
845
1275
670
.5744-3HA
980
5600
6400
45
61
1620
1490
845
1290
670
.5764-3CA
1700
4800
5500
53
69
1620
1500
835
1330
670
.5764-3GA
1270
4800
5500
44
61
1830
1540
840
1350
670
.5764-3DA
1400
5000
5700
53
69
1580
1540
850
1305
670
.5764-3HA
1100
5000
5700
45
61
1720
1560
850
1320
670
.5775-3DA
1900
6000
6900
53
69
2600
2050
940
1500
670
24
400
24
(500)
24
36
P0
Pk 75*
Pk 120** LPA
dB
LWA
GGES
A1
B1
H1
dB
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
* Related to 75 C
** Related to 120 C
Table 5/14
5/24
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:19 Uhr
Seite 25
Transformers
Rated
Max.
Imped-
power
rated
ance
voltage
voltage
Type
No-load
Load
Load
Sound
Sound
Total
losses
losses
losses
pressure
power
weight
level 1 m
level
HV side
Dimensions
Length
Width
RollerHeight
to-roller
distance
(centers)
tolerance
+ 3 dB
Sn
Um
Uz
kVA
kV
4GB..
630
12
.5844-3CA
1500
6400
7300
54
70
1830
1510
840
1345
670
.5844-3GA
1150
6400
7300
45
62
2070
1470
835
1505
670
.5844-3DA
1370
6400
7400
54
70
1770
1550
860
1295
670
.5844-3HA
1150
6400
7400
45
62
1990
1590
865
1310
670
.5864-3CA
1950
6000
6900
53
70
1860
1550
845
1380
670
.5864-3GA
1500
6000
6900
45
62
2100
1600
850
1400
670
.5864-3DA
1650
6400
7300
53
70
1810
1580
855
1345
670
.5864-3HA
1250
6400
7300
45
62
2050
1620
860
1370
670
36
.5875-3DA
2200
7000
8000
53
70
2900
2070
940
1650
670
12
.5944-3CA
1850
7800
9000
55
72
2080
1570
850
1560
670
.5944-3GA
1450
7800
9000
47
64
2430
1590
855
1640
670
.5944-3DA
1700
7600
8700
55
72
2060
1560
865
1490
670
.5944-3HA
1350
7600
8700
47
64
2330
1600
870
1530
670
.5964-3CA
2100
7500
8600
55
72
2150
1610
845
1580
670
.5964-3GA
1600
7500
8600
47
64
2550
1650
855
1620
670
.5964-3DA
1900
7900
9100
55
71
2110
1610
860
1590
670
.5964-3HA
1450
7900
9100
47
64
2390
1630
865
1595
670
36
.5975-3DA
2600
8200
9400
55
72
3300
2140
950
1850
670
12
.6044-3CA
2200
2200
10200
55
73
2480
1590
990
1775
820
.6044-3GA
1650
1650
10200
47
65
2850
1620
990
1795
820
.6044-3DA
2000
2000
9700
56
73
2420
1620
990
1560
820
.6044-3HA
1500
1500
9700
47
65
2750
1660
990
1560
820
.6064-3CA
2400
2400
10000
55
73
2570
1660
990
1730
820
.6064-3GA
1850
1850
10000
47
65
3060
1680
990
1815
820
.6064-3DA
2300
2300
10500
55
73
2510
1680
990
1620
820
.6064-3HA
1750
1750
11000
47
65
2910
1730
990
1645
820
.6075-3DA
3000
3000
10900
55
73
3900
2200
1050
1900
820
24
(800)
24
1000
24
36
P0
Pk 75*
Pk 120** LPA
dB
LWA
GGES
A1
B1
H1
dB
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
* Related to 75 C
** Related to 120 C
Table 5/15
5/25
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
Rated
Max.
Imped-
power
rated
ance
voltage
voltage
19:19 Uhr
Type
Seite 26
No-load
Load
Load
Sound
Sound
Total
losses
losses
losses
pressure
power
weight
level 1 m
level
HV side
Dimensions
Length
Width
RollerHeight
to-roller
distance
(centers)
tolerance
+ 3 dB
Sn
Um
Uz
kVA
kV
4GB..
P0
Pk 75*
Pk 120** LPA
dB
(1250)
12
.6144-3DA
2400
.6144-3HA
9600
11000
57
75
2900
1780
990
1605
820
1850
10500
12000
49
67
3370
1790
990
1705
820
.6164-3DA
2700
10000
11500
57
75
3020
1820
990
1635
820
.6164-3HA
2100
10500
12000
49
67
3490
1850
990
1675
820
36
.6175-3DA
3500
11000
12600
57
75
4500
2300
1060
2000
520
12
.6244-3DA
2800
11000
12500
58
76
3550
1840
995
2025
1070
.6244-3HA
2100
11400
13000
50
68
4170
1880
1005
2065
1070
.6264-3DA
3100
11800
13500
58
76
3640
1880
995
2035
1070
.6264-3HA
2400
12300
14000
49
68
4080
1900
1005
2035
1070
36
.6275-3DA
4300
12700
14600
58
76
5600
2500
1100
2400
1070
12
.6344-3DA
3600
14000
16000
59
78
4380
1950
1280
2150
1070
.6344-3HA
2650
14500
16500
51
70
5140
1990
1280
2205
1070
.6364-3DA
4000
14500
16500
59
78
4410
2020
1280
2160
1070
.6364-3HA
3000
14900
17000
51
70
4920
2040
1280
2180
1070
36
.6375-3DA
5100
15400
17700
59
78
6300
2500
1280
2400
1070
12
.6444-3DA
4300
17600
20000
62
81
5130
2110
1280
2150
1070
.6444-3HA
3000
18400
21000
51
71
6230
2170
1280
2205
1070
.6464-3DA
5000
17600
20000
61
81
5280
2170
1280
2160
1070
.6464-3HA
3600
18000
20500
51
71
6220
2220
1280
2180
1070
.6475-3DA
6400
18700
21500
61
81
7900
2700
1280
2400
1070
24
1600
24
(2000)
24
2500
24
36
LWA
GGES
A1
B1
H1
dB
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
* Related to 75 C
** Related to 120 C
Table 5/16 GEAFOL cast-resin transformer for 100 to 2,500 kVA
5/26
TIP_Kap_05_Engl
11.08.2005
19:19 Uhr
Seite 27
Transformers
5/27
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite B2
Low Voltage
6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and

6.5 Switches, Outlets and Electronic

Products
6.2 Protective Switching Devices and

Fuse Systems
6.6 SIMOCODE pro Motor Management

Systems for Constant-Speed Motors
in the Low-Voltage Range
6.3 Modular Devices

6.4 Maximum-Demand Monitors
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite B3
Low Voltage
chapter 6
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 2
6 Low Voltage
One important element of the Totally
Integrated Power philosophy for
power distribution by Siemens (see
Chapter 3) is its comprehensive
protection scheme. Especially in
commercial or institutional buildings,
in industry and in infrastructural projects, i.e. in production sites and administrative buildings, the highest
safety requirements for systems and
persons have to be met. Examples
for this are airports or railway stations.
Only an integrated protection scheme
with systems and products from one
manufacturer, with a guaranteed uniform quality standard, based on national and international standards,
provides this high safety level.
A protection system whose components are coordinated in an optimal
way has been part of the Siemens
product philosophy for a long time.
These products that stand for
reliable Siemens high-performance
technology have been included in the
Totally Integrated Power system. The
result is an integrated protection
scheme from the main distribution
board to the consumer.
The high reliability and availability of
the system ensures a faultless operation on an economical basis. The
components have been certified in
accordance with all international standards and can therefore be used all
over the world. As a leading manufacturer of technology, Siemens is setting new standards with respect to
safety.
6/2
Components of the integrated

Siemens protection scheme
C Low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems from 6,300 A (e.g.
SIVACON, ALPHA) down to 63 A
(e.g. SIMBOX)
C SIVACON busbar trunking systems
for safe power distribution from
25 A up to 6,300 A
C Protective switching devices and
fuse systems for overload, shortcircuit and fire protection by way of
circuit- breakers (e.g. SENTRON
3VL), fuse systems (LV HRC,
DIAZED and NEOZED) and
miniature circuit-breakers
C Residual-current-operated circuitbreakers for personnel and fire
protection
C Lightning current and surge arrester of the Classes B, C and D
C Monitoring systems for undervoltage and overvoltage protection
C Fuse switch-disconnectors for safe
isolation and disconnection
C Switching operations handled
safely with conventional techniques
or automated processes via main
and EMERGENCY stop switches,
operator units, modular, switching,
control and signaling devices
C Optimization of the power distribution by way of remote signaling,
communication and control via bus
systems
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 3
Low Voltage
6.1 Low-Voltage
Switchgear and
Distribution System
An overview of the available program

of the Siemens low-voltage
switchgear and distribution systems
is shown in Fig. 6/1.
General
In Table 6/2, the essential selection

criteria are summarised in the following four areas:
Low-voltage switchgear and distribution

boards form the link between the equipment for the generation (generators),
transmission (cables, overhead lines)
and transformation (transformers) of
electrical energy on the one hand, and
the loads, e.g. motors, solenoid valves,
actuators and devices for heating, lighting and air conditioning, and information
technology on the other hand.
Medium voltage
Low voltage e.g
Currents
C Rated currents of the busbars
C Rated currents of the power supply
C Rated currents of the feeders
C Rated peak withstand current Ipk of
the busbars
Distribution system
Degree of protection and installation

C Protection against electric shock
(safety class)
C Material of the enclosure
C Type of mounting (wall-mounting,
stand-alone)
C Number of front operating panels
Type of device installation
C Fixed installation
C Plug-in
C Withdrawable unit
C Snap-on mounting on standard
mounting rail
Application
C Eight different types of application
Enclosures
Busbar trunking
systems
230/ 400 V
6300 A
3200 A
630 A
400 A
160 A
63 A
Fig. 6/1
Product range of low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems (European technology)
6/3
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 4
Types of construction
DIN VDE
NF CEI
Small distribution board
SIMBOX 63
SIMBOX LC, SIMBOX Universal
Wall-mounted distribution board
ALPHA 160 / 400, ALPHA
ALPHA Universal
Floor-mounted distribution cabinet < 630 A
ALPHA 630
ALPHA Universal
High-power distribution board > 630 A
SIVACON
SIKUS Universal
SIVACON
Power Center
SIVACON
SIKUS Universal HC
SIVACON
SIVACON
SIVACON
SIVACON
Table 6/1
ALPHA 400
Low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems in compliance with EN 60439 / IEC 60439
The low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems described comply

with the following standards:
EN 60 439-1/IEC 60 439-1/
VDE 0660 Part 500
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies;
type-tested and partially type-tested
assemblies.
EN 60 439-2/IEC 60 439-2/
VDE 0660 Part 502
special requirements for busbar
trunking systems.
EN 60 439-3/IEC 60 439-3/
VDE 0660 Part 504
special requirements for low-voltage
switchgear assemblies which can be
operated by non-specialists
EN 60 439-3/IEC 60 439-3/
VDE 0660 Part 504
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies
(point-to-point distribution boards);
special requirements for low-voltageswitchgear assemblies which can
be operated by non-specialists.
EN 60 439-4/IEC 60 439-4/
VDE 0660 Part 501
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies
(point-to-point distribution boards);
special requirements for construction
site distribution boards. The various
construction types of switchgear and
distribution boards do not show any
6/4
BS
strict discrimination features. Therefore, the manufacturer and the operator use different terms for the same
product. In most cases, the operators type of application will be decisive for the designation.
Main or subdistribution board
In order to prevent these problems with
regard to the definition of terms, only
the two terms main distribution board
and subdistribution board are used to
give an example of a low-voltage system in an industrial plant (Table 6/2).
Here, the main distribution board is
supplied directly via one transformer
per busbar section. The downstream
motor control centers, control systems, distribution boards for lighting,
heating, air conditioning, workshops,
etc., which are again supplied by the
main distribution board, are part of
the subdistribution boards.
Point-to-point distribution board
Point-to-point distribution board is
the designation for all switchgear and
distribution boards which supply the
electrical energy radially via cables and
leads from the point-to-point distribution board to the remotely arranged
consumers. The necessary switching,
protective and measuring devices are
combined centrally in the switchgear
or distribution board for that.
Busbars (point-to-point distribution)

With busbar trunking systems,
power is transmitted to the immediate vicinity of the consumers. The
consumers are connected to the busbar trunking system via tap-off units
with or without fuse protection and
short spur lines or cables.
Busbar trunking systems supply and
distribute electrical power in industrial facilities and buildings. Tap-off
units can be installed at suitable positions in the trunking, which makes
these systems most suitable for consumers which need to be reinstalled
at different locations frequently.
They are also used as rising mains in
high-rise buildings to supply the floor
distribution boards.
Busbar trunking systems can communicate. In these applications, the tapoff units include the appropriate communications equipment in addition to
the required protective devices. In this
combination, power distribution and
automation are implemented in an object-oriented, decentralized manner.
Types of construction
All distribution boards in accordance
with IEC 60 439; EN 60 439 in a locally
preferred type in accordance with
DIN/VDE, NF/CEI and BS.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 5
Low Voltage
Type of
Switchgear
distribution board
Distribution systems
Point-to-point distribution board
Point-to-point
Line
2,0005)/ 630
Max. rated current

of busbars
7,400 A
6,300 A
3,200 A
2000 A
A, 1,000 A
630 A
6,300 A
Max. rated current

of supply
6,300 A
6,300 A
3,200 A
2,000 A
2,0005)/ 630
A, 2,000 A
630 A
6,300 A
Max. rated current of

outgoing feeders
5,000 A
5,000 A
3,200 A
630 A
2,000/630 A
630 A
6,300 A
Rated peak current Ipk

of busbars up to
375 kA
250 kA
187 kA
80 kA
68 kA
80 kA
286 kA
Max. IP54
IP54
IP30, IP41
IP54
bis IP656)
IP651)
IP34 IP68
Device mounting type
Fixed moun- Fixed moun- Fixed mounted2), plug-in, ted2), plug-in, ted2), plug-in
withdrawable withdrawable

or without fuses
Fixed moun- Fixed moun- Fixed mounted2), snap-on ted2), snap-on ted2), snap-on
mounting
mounting
mounting
Tap-off units
with plug-in
technology
Option
Mounting type
(indoors)
Wall
or
stand-alone
Wall, standalone
or
double front
Wall
or
stand-alone
Floor- or wall- Wall

mounted,
or
flush- or
stand-alone
surfacemounted
Wall
Suspended
from ceiling,
wall-mounted,
sub-floor
mounted
Operating front panels

(quantity)
1 or 2
1 or 2
Protection against
electric shock3)
SK 1
SK 1
SK 1
SK 1
SK 2
SK 1
SK 2
Enclosure
material
Metal
Metal
Metal
Metal
Molded
plastic
Metal
Molded plastic Molded plastic

Aluminum
Metal
Type of application4)
1, 2, 4, 6, 7
1, 2, 4, 6, 7
2, 4, 7, 8
2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 8
2, 3, 4, 5,
3, 8
System type
SIVACON 8PT, SIVACON 8PV SIVACON 8PT, 8HU

SIKUS
SIKUS
Universal HC
Universal
1)
Special version for shipbuilding IP66
2)
Option: withdrawable circuit-breaker
3)
Safety class: SK 1 = Protective ground connection;

SK 2 = Protective insulation; SK 3= Safety extra-low
voltage
Table 6/2
4)
1
3
5
7
5)
SIKUS Klassik
6)
SIMBOX Universal WP
SK1
1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 8
8GK, 8GB,
8HP
8GD, 8GS,
ALPHA,
ALPHA
Stratum
Main switchgear station

Light and energy distribution system
Distribution cabinet
Reactive power compensation
SIVACON 8PS
Systeme CD-K,
BD01, BD2,
LD, LX, PEC
2
4
6
8
Main distribution board

Subdistribution board
Motor distribution board
Control
Selection criteria for low-voltage switchgear and distribution systems
6/5
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 6
6.1.1 SIVACON 8PS

Busbar Trunking Systems
What are busbar trunking
systems?
Busbar trunking systems are the linking element between transformer
and power consumer. They are used
for power transmission and distribution.
The new SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking system is a well proven system
and the market leader in its field. It
covers a current range of 25 A to
6,300 A, meaning it is suitable for any
given application. The system is divided into 6 subsystems:
CD-K (25 A 40 A)
BD01 (40 A 160 A)
BD2 (160 A 1,250 A)
LD (1,100 A 5,000 A, ventilated)
LX (800 A 6,300 A, sandwich-type)
and PEC (800 A 6,000 A, cast)
Power transmission
Between the transformer and the
low-voltage switchgear, busbar trunking systems transmit electrical power
by means of system components.
They are installed between the transformers and the main distribution
boards, and also connect the subdistribution boards, including the feeder
lines for power distribution to the
consumer locations busbar trunking
systems with flexible tap-off units are
used here.
Busbar trunking systems are increasingly replacing connecting cables in
the field of power transmission. With
high currents in particular, cables
must be connected in parallel. Owing
to the high short-circuit power and resulting short distances of cable sup-
6/6
Photo 6/1
SIVACON 8PS the right solution for every application
ports, this type of cable laying is both

costly and time-consuming, not to
mention problematic on account of
the imbalanced power distribution.
Moreover, the installation of cable
trays is expensive, too.
In contrast to this, busbar trunking
systems are power transmission systems which constitute a type-tested
system even when used as combined systems. They have been properly designed for this task as specified in their technical data. They can
be used economically and ensure
safe and reliable power transmission.
Busbar trunking systems have proved
their worth in power transmission
over decades. Today, they are the first
choice in this field of application, with
almost no other system being a real
alternative.
Power distribution
In terms of pictorial projection, busbar trunking systems are an elongated busbar system (line distribution) of a point-to-point distribution
board. Here, individual consumer taps
are no longer connected rigidly to the
system of busbars, as is the case
with point-to-point distribution, but
can be flexibly adjusted to changing
tasks via appropriate tap-off units.
This adjustment can be carried out as
required within a system-related grid.
This way, a variable line distribution
system is created for line supply
and/or area-wide power supply.
The traditional, radial power installation with fixed wired cables and lines
is no longer up to the state of the art.
It is far too rigid for automated production sites. Cable laying in ducts,
on trays, in walls or ceilings is an impediment to flexibility requirements.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 7
Low Voltage
Readjustment made easy

Readjustments are indispensable in
modern production sites, in particular
in automated production. Rearrangements of machinery and restructuring
of existing plant facilities call for a
flexible adjustment of the power supply installation systems.
Busbar trunking systems are particularly geared to these requirements.
An area-wide power supply can be
planned ahead. When modifications
have been scheduled, the consumer
tap-off units are taken to the new location of the machinery and simply
readjusted at the existing system of
busbars. Even completely new supply lines can be built up by reutilizing
existing system components. This
makes busbar trunking system an interesting investment into the future.
Photo 6/2
Lighting control with BD01 and CD-K systems
Photo 6/3
Control of supply with the BD01 system
Retrofitting and re-equipping without

interrupting the production process is
not only important for a continuous
supply of electricity, but is also crucial for production sites that work in
multi-shifts around the clock. Here,
an interruption is only feasible, if at
all, in very narrow time slots. Any
modification must be achievable
quickly and cost-saving.
Consumer tap-off units must therefore be designed that allow for power
tapping, relocation and extension under voltage, i.e. with a busbar track
that has not been isolated from supply. This way, expensive interruptions
of operation are avoided.
Communication-capable busbar
trunking systems
The growing requirements to the economic efficiency, flexibility and transparency of automated systems for
building power supply and industrial
applications make the trend towards
decentralized power distribution and
automation an irreversible process. In
this electrifying context, intelligent
power distribution concepts open up
new savings potential and reduce the
number of interfaces to the automation world.
SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems supply and protect consumers

in a distributed manner, which means
right on the spot. A recent development is the concept of combined, decentralized power distribution and
distributed automation in an integrated range of products: system networking results in a high degree of
transparency on the one hand, and in
central processing of recorded consumption and operating data on the
other hand.
6/7
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 8
Photo 6/4
CD-K system
Photo 6/5
BD2 system
Photo 6/6
LX system
Photo 6/7
BD01 system
Photo 6/8
LD system
Photo 6/9
PEC system
The concept of communication-capable busbar trunking systems is based

on tap-off units which are complemented by communication-capable
device units. The bus systems
PROBUS-DP, AS-Interface and
instabus EIB constitute the communications basis.
These flexible modules enable the
combination of different solution
packages for specific customer requirements. Short planning and configuration times, fast installation of
the power distribution and automation system, easy commissioning and
a high degree of flexibility in terms of
modified area utilization are measurable advantages of communication-capable busbar trunking systems.
6/8
CD-K
C Rated current: 30 A, 40 A, 2 x 25 A,
2 x 40 A
C Conductor material: copper
C Rated operating voltage: 400 V
C Degrees of protection: IP54, IP55
C Spacing between consumer taps:
0.5 m each, 1 m from one side or
both sides
C Rated current of the consumer taps
up to 16 A, with or without fuse
C Codeable tapping points
BD01
C Rated current: 40 A, 63 A, 100 A,
125 A, 160 A
C Aluminum as conductor material for
up to 125 A, and copper for 160 A
C Rated operating voltage: 400 A

C Spacing of consumer taps: either
0.5 m or 1 m from one side
C Rated current of the consumer tapoff units up to 63 A
BD2
C Rated current: 160 A, 250 A, 315 A
400 A, 500 A, 630 A, 800 A
1,000 A, 1,250 A
C Conductor material: aluminum,
copper
C Degrees of protection: IP52/54,
IP55 for power transmission
C Spacing of consumer tap-off units:
0.5 m each from both sides
C Rated current of the consumer
tap-off units up to 630 A
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 9
Low Voltage
Ratings
Conductors
Trunking unit, degree of protection
Tap-off unit, live adjustment
CD-K (25 A 40 A)
2, 3, 4, 6, 2 x 4, copper,
PE enclosure
IP54, IP55
up to 16 A
BD01 (40 A 160 A)
4, aluminum, copper,
PE enclosure
IP54, IP55
up to 63 A
BD2 (160 A 1250 A)
5, aluminum, copper
IP52, IP54 with additional unit,

IP55
up to 630 A
LD (1100 A 5000 A)
4, 5, aluminum, copper
IP34, IP54
up to 1,250 A
LX (800 A 6300 A)
3, 4, 5, aluminum, copper,
Clean Earth, optionally
200% conductor
IP54, IP55
up to 630 A
(up to 1,250 A no live
adjustment)
PEC (800 A 6000 A)
4, 5, copper
IP66, IP68 (140 h)
Table 6/3
Technical data
LD
C Rated current for degree of protection IP34 and Al conductors: 1,100
A, 1,250 A, 1,600 A, 2,000 A, 2,500
A, 3,000 A, 3,700 A, 4,000 A
C Rated current for degree of protection IP54 and Al conductors: 900 A,
1,000 A, 1,200 A, 1,500 A, 1,800 A,
2,000 A, 2,400 A, 2,700 A
C Rated current for degree of protection IP34 and Cu conductors: 2,000
A, 2,600 A, 3,400 A, 4,400 A, 5,000A
C Rated current for degree of protection IP54 and Cu conductors: 1,600
A, 2,000 A, 2,600 A, 3,200 A, 3,600A
C Rated operating voltage: 1,000 V
C Tap-off units with circuit-breakers
up to 1,250 A
C Tap-off units with switch disconnectors with fuse up to 630 A
LX
C Rated current: 800 A, 1,000 A,
1,250 A, 1,400 A, 1,600 A, 2,000 A,
2,500 A, 3,200 A, 4,000 A, 4,500 A,
5,000 A, 6,300 A
C Conductor material: aluminum,
copper
C Rated operating voltage: 690 V
C Degrees of protection: IP54, IP55 for
power transmission up to 3,200 A
C Tap-off units with circuit-breakers
up to 1,250 A
C Tap-off units with fuse switchdisconnectors up to 630 A
PEC
C Rated current: 800 A, 1,000 A, 1,200
A, 1,400 A, 1,750 A, 2,000 A, 2,500
A, 3,000 A, as parallel systems
3,500 A, 4,000 A, 5,000 A, 6,000 A
C Conductor material: copper
C Rated operating voltage: 1,000 V
type-tested for a duration of
140 days
C Tapping points feasible for the
installation of customer-specific
tap-off units
Every element of the SIVACON 8PS

busbar trunking system is tested
prior to delivery. This test includes
dielectric tests which are performed
to ensure proper insulation. The entire
SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking system is manufactured and tested in
compliance with ISO 9001.
Standards
All SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking
systems constitute type-tested
switchgear assemblies (TTA) in compliance with IEC 60439-1 and -2.
Approvals (system-specific)
GL Germanischer Lloyd
LR Lloyd's Register Of Shipping
ABS American Bureau Of Shipping
BV Bureau Veritas
DNV Dansk Norske Veritas
RINA Registro Italiano Navale
SABS South Africa
GOST-R Russia
6/9
TIP_Kap06_Engl
Photo 6/10
11.08.2005
tap-off unit
19:30 Uhr
Seite 10
Photo 6/11
BD2 angular element
Photo 6/12
Communication-capable
BD2 tap-off unit
1: Straight trunking unit

2: Tap-off unit
3: Transformer infeed
4: Connection to SIVACON 8PT/8PV
5: Directional change element
6: Clamp connection, fastener
Photo 6/13
Block diagram of busbar trunking systems
6/10
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 11
Low Voltage
4 MVA
690 V
Cable or busbar system
6,300 A
Power supply
LT
3 AC 50 Hz
Main distribution board

Circuit-breakers as
feeders tho the
subdistribution boards
5,000 A
Connecting cables
ET
ST
630 A
100 A
FT
630 A
630 A
100 A
Photo 6/14
Motor control center

1 in withdrable
design for
production/manufacturing plants
SIVACON 8PV low-voltage

switchgear
6.1.2 SIVACON Low-Voltage

Switchgear Economical,
Flexible and Safe
M M
Motor control center

2 in withdrable
design for
production/manufacturing plants
CBS Circuit-breaker design

PS Plug-in design
Fig. 6/2
WS
FS
Subdistribution boards
for auxiliary system
(lighting, heating
air conditioning,
workshops, etc.)
100 A
Control unit
Withdrawable design
Fixed-mounted design
Example for the structure of a low-voltage system in an industrial company
Introduction
Low-voltage switchgear forms the
link between the equipment for the
generation (generators), transmission
(cables, overhead lines) and transformation (transformers) of electrical energy on the one hand, and the consumers, e.g. motors, solenoid valves,
actuators and devices for heating,
lighting and air conditioning on the
other hand.
Since the majority of the applications
is supplied with low voltage, the lowvoltage switchgear is especially important both for public supply systems and for industrial plants. The
prerequisite for a reliable supply system is high availability, flexibility for
process-related adaptations and high
control and operating reliability of the
switchgear.
The power distribution in a system is
usually implemented via a main
switchgear station (power center or
main distribution board) and a number of sub- or motor control centers
(see Fig. 6/5).
SIVACON 8PV for the

process industry
The SIVACON 8PV low-voltage
switchgear is an economical, demand- meeting and type-tested
switchgear assembly (see Photo
6/14) which is used in power distribution, in the chemical, mineral oil and
capital goods industry as well as in
public and private buildings.
It is characterized by a high degree of
personnel and system safety and can
be used on all power levels up to
6,300 A:
C as main switchgear (power center
or main distribution board)
C as motor control center
C as subdistribution board
All modules used are type-tested

(TTA*), i.e. they comply with the requirements of
C IEC 60439-1
C DIN EN 60439-1
C VDE 0660 Part 500
and additionally
C DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660 Part 514),
IEC 61641, VDE 0660 Part 500
Supplement 2 (arcing fault), DIN EN
ISO 9001/14001 certification.
Thanks to the many options to combine SIVACON 8PV boards due to

their modular design, all requirements
can be met with fixed-mounted and
plug-in as well as with withdrawable
designs.
* Type-tested switchgear assembly
6/11
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:30 Uhr
Seite 12
Rated insulation voltage Ul
1,000 V
Rated operational voltage Ue
up to
Rated currents for busbars (3- and 4-pole):

Main horizontal busbars
Rated current
Rated peak withstand current Ipk
Rated short-time withstand current Icw
up to 6,300 A
up to 250 kA
up to 100 kA
Vertical busbars
for circuit-breaker design
Rated current
up to 6,300 A
up to 250 kA
up to 100 kA
for fixed-mounted and plug-in design

Rated current
up to 2,000 A
up to 110 kA
up to
50 kA
for withdrawable design

Rated current
up to 1,000 A
up to 143 kA
up to
65 kA
Switchgear rated currents

Circuit-breakers
Outgoing feeders
Motor feeders
up to 6,300 A
up to 1,600 A
up to 630 A
in acc. with IEC 60 529, EN 60 529:
IP 20 up to IP 54
Tabl 6/4
690 V
Technical data
400
600
400
600
400
400
400
[mm]
Busbar compartment
Device compartment
Cable/busbar connection compartment

Cross-wiring compartment
Fig. 6/3
Panel structure
6/12
Features of a SIVACON 8PV

switchgear station
C Type-tested standard modules
C Space-saving base areas starting
from 400 x 400 mm
C Solid wall design for safe
panel-to-panel separation
C Highest packing density with up
to 40 feeders per panel
C Standard operator interface for
all withdrawable units
C Test and disconnected position
with door closed
C Visible isolating gaps and points
of contact
C Variable busbar positions at the
top or at the rear
C Cable/busbar connection from
above or below
Description
Panel structure
The cabinet is structured in a modular
grid based on one modular spacing
(1 M) corresponding to 175 mm. The
effective device installation space has
a height of 1,750 mm = 10 M.
Basically, a panel is subdivided into
four functional compartments (see
Fig. 6/3):
C Busbar compartment
C Device compartment
C Cable/busbar connection
compartment
C Cross-wiring compartment
Main busbar system
The main busbar system with busbar
cross sections for rated currents up
to 6,300 A can be used variably (see
Fig. 6/7) and consists of the three
phase conductors L1 to L3 and the
PE, N or PEN conductors.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 13
Cable entry:
Use:
Position of the main

busbar system:
Busbar current:
Mounting:
Cable entry:
Use:
400
Busbar current:
Mounting:
Cable entry:
Use:
at the rear (top and/or

bottom)
In up to 4,000 A,
Icw up to 100 kA
on the wall or standalone
from below and/or
above
main/sub-distribution
board or integrated motor control center

busbar system:
Busbar current:
G
2200

busbar system:
Mounting:
Cable entry:
Use:
center
(top and/or bottom)
In up to 4,000 A,
Icw up to 100 kA
stand-alone, double front
from below and/or above
main/sub-distribution board
or integrated motor control
centre in double-front
version
center top
In up to 6,300 A,
Icw up to 100 kA
stand-alone, double front
from below and/or above
power center
up
up
up
up
up
to
to
to
to
to
Table 6/5
1200
Operating side
Busbar
Construction variants of SIVACON 8PV low-voltage switchgear stations by

virtue of the variable position of the main busbar system
Rated breaker current

In
In
In
In
In
1000
600
G Device installation space

Fig. 6/4
2200
Mounting:
at the top
In up to 2,000 A,
Icw up to 50 kA
on the wall or
stand-alone
from below
motor control centre
sub-distribution board
2200

busbar system:
Busbar current:
2200
Low Voltage
1,000 A
1,600 A
2,500 A
3,200 A
6,300 A
Panel width
400
500
600
800
1,000
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Ciruit-breaker panel width
Circuit-breaker design
The circuit-breaker panels have separate functional areas for the device
compartment, cross-wiring compartment and cable/busbar connection
compartment (Photo 6/15).
The cross-wiring compartment is located above the device compartment, the cable/busbar connection
compartment below. Supply from
above results in a mirror-image
arrangement. The panel width is determined by the rated current of the
SENTRON WL circuit-breaker (Table
6/5).
Photo 6/15
Circuit-breaker panel with withdrawable type SENTRON 3WL,

1,600 A rated current
Photo 6/16
Panel with motor assemblies
Withdrawable design
from supply (Photo 6/16).
If requirements change frequently, as

often demanded by industrial
processes, such as changes in the
motor power or switching new consumers into supply, a withdrawable
circuit-breaker technology offers the
optimum for plant availability.
Withrawable units equipped with the

communication-capable SIMOCODE
motor protection and control units enable a cost-effective interfacing to the
worlds of automation.
Consumer or motor feeders can be

replaced or whole compartments can
even be rearranged without that the
switchgear must be disconnected
These withdrawable units are

available in sizes 1/4 (11 kW),
1/2 (18.5 kW), 1 (37 kW), 2 (75 kW)
3 (160 kW), 4 (250 kW).
6/13
TIP_Kap06_Engl
Photo 6/17
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Panel with pluggable in-line

switch disconnectors and plug-in
modules
Seite 14
Photo 6/18
Fixed-mounted panel with modular functional units
Owing to the plug contacts at the

feeder side (Photo 6/21 Plug-in module), this technology enables fast replacement without the switchgear
having to be isolated from supply.
In-line technology, plugged
In-line switch-disconnectors with
fuses for outgoing cables up to
630 A. The banks are 50 mm (125 A),
100 mm (250 A) or 200 mm (400 A /
630 A) high.
Photo 6/20
Withdrawable unit equipped

with SIMOCODE
Plug-in technology
Consumer feeders up to 45 kW and
outgoing circuit-breaker units up to
100 A. The plug-in modules are
50 mm (11 kW) and 100 mm
(45 kW) high.
Photo 6/21
Plug-in module
Plug-in technology
Thanks to their compact design, pluggable banks and plug-in modules
make it possible to construct a panel
at low costs and save space (see
Photo 6/17).
6/14
In certain applications, e.g. in building

installation systems, there is no need
to replace components when the
switchgear has not been disconnected from supply, or short standstill times do not result in exceptional
costs.
Photo 6/19
Reactive power control unit,

250 kvar, choked
In such cases, the fixed-mounted

design (Photo 6/18) offers excellent
economy, high reliability and sufficient flexibility.
Modular functional units can be combined in the panel as required and
if necessary, they can easily be replaced once the equipment has been
disconnected from supply.
Depending on the type of load,
choked or non-choked control units
(i.e. with or without reactors) are
provided for reactive power compensation.
Depending on the power installed
and the ambient temperature, it may
be necessary to mount a fan assembly (reinforcement of convection).
The capacitor units are designed
with fuse switch-disconnectors
(Photo 6/19).
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 15
Low Voltage
SIVACON 8PT for the

infrastructure market
Introduction
The SIVACON 8PT low-voltage
switchgear is the standard solution
for building and industrial installations.
SIVACON 8PT is tailored to the needs
of the world market, i.e. it takes into
account the demand for standard solutions from one manufacturer and for
local production and the resulting advantages in terms of financing and
procurement close to the plant.
As a power distribution board,
SIVACON 8PT is available throughout
the world and can be used at all
power levels up to 7,400 A, as a fixedmounted unit as well as a plug-in and
withdrawable unit design.
Your advantage:
SIVACON Technology Partner
These are qualified and permanently
audited switchgear manufacturers
close to your company who were
chosen by Siemens. This way, you
will always benefit from Siemens
know-how on conditions that can only
be offered by a local sales partner.
This is a fast, flexible and cost-effective solution for you.
The exclusive use of high-quality

Siemens switchgear ensures a long
service life and reliable operation.
C Safety and proven quality for
every system by type testing
C Siemens switchgear for reliable
operation
C Worldwide presence through
SIVACON Technology Partner
C High flexibility for economical
solutions
Photo 6/22
SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchgear, busbar at the rear, up to 3,200 A
Busbar system
Rear
(top, bottom)
Top
1,000 V
1,000 V
690 V
up to 690 V
Rated operating voltage Ue
up to
Rated currents for busbars

Main horizontal busbars
Rated current
up to 3,200 A
up to
187 kA
up to
85 kA
up to 7,400 A
up to
375 kA
up to
150 kA
For circuit-breaker technology

Vertical busbars
Rated current
up to 3,200 A
up to
187 kA
up to
85 kA
up to 6,300 A
up to
250 kA
up to
100 kA
For fixed-mounted design

Rated current
up to
up to
up to
1,150 A
110 kA
50 kA
up to 1,400 A
up to
163 kA
up to
65 kA
For in-line plug-in design

Rated current
up to 2,100 A
up to
110 kA
up to
50 kA
up to 2,100 A
up to
163 kA
up to
50 kA
Rated currents switchgear

Circuit-breakers
Outgoing feeders
up to 3,200 A
up to
630 A
up to 6,300 A
up to
630 A
in acc. with IEC 60529, EN 60529:
IP30 to IP54
IP30 to IP54
Dimensions (mm)
Height
Depth
2,000, 2,200
600
2,200
600 to 1,200
Table 6/6
Technical data
6/15
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 16
All of the modules used are type-tested

(TTA), i.e. they comply with the
requirements of
C IEC 60439-1
C DIN EN 60439-1, VDE 0660, Part 500
C IEC 61641, VDE 0660 Part 500,
Supplement 2 (arcing fault)
C Quality management
DIN EN ISO 9001
C Environmental management
DIN EN ISO 14001
Features of a SIVACON 8PT
switchgear, busbar at the top,
up to 7,400 A
Photo 6/23
SIVACON 8PT low-voltage switchgear, busbar at the top, up to 7,400 A
0/
80 000
1,
/
00 0
1,0 ,20
1
0
80
0
80
2,200
2,600
0
60
/
00 0
1,0 ,20
1
C Type-tested standard modules

C (TTA)
C Standardized busbar position at
the top of the panel
C 3- and 4-pole busbar system
up to 7,400 A
C Rated withstand current Ipk up
to 375 kA
C Deep switchgear compartment
for universal installation
C Modular structure of device
compartments
C Single-front and back-to-back
installation
C Cable/busbar entry from above
or below
C Cable connection from the front or rear
Description
[mm]
Busbar compartment
Device compartment
Cable/busbar connection
compartment
Fig. 6/5
Cross-wiring compartment (for control

cables and contact conductors)
Cable routing compartment
for cables from above
Panel structure
Generally, a panel is divided into
five functional units (Fig. 6/5):
C Busbar compartment
C Device compartment
C Cable/busbar connection compartment
C Cross-wiring compartment
C Cable routing compartment
Panel structure
Main busbar system

The main busbar system with busbar
cross sections for rated currents up to
7,400 A can be used in various ways
(Fig. 6/6) and consists of the three
phase conductors L1 to L3 and the PE,
N or PEN conductors.
6/16
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 17
Low Voltage
Busbar system up to 3,200 A

The frames are 600 mm deep and suitable for wall or rear
mounting.
800/
1000
600
L1 L2 L3 N/PEN
With cable connection from above, the depth

of the frame is 800 mm or 1,000 mm.
Bedienfront
PE
200
Max. short-circuit strength:

Ipk
200 kA
Icw
80 kA
2200
1700
Max. rated current (35 C):

Ventilated
3,200 A
Unventilated
2,400 A

The frames are 800 mm deep and suitable for wall or
rear mounting.
1000/
1200
800
L1
L2
L3 N/PEN

Ventilated
4,000 A
Unventilated
2,950 A

The frames are 800 mm deep and suitable for wall or
rear mounting.
2200
1700
1000/
1200
800
L1
L2
L3 N/PEN
L1
L2
L3 N/PEN
2600
1700
Bedienfront
PE
200
Location of the main busbar system
Circuit-breaker technology
Various panel versions are available

depending on function, switchgear
rated current and necessary shortcircuit strength.

of the frame is 1,000 mm or 1,200 mm.
Fig. 6/6
Circuit-breaker panel with withdrawable type circuit-breakers
Circuit-breaker technology (Photo

6/24) comprises panel types which
are exclusively used for the supply of
the switchgear and for outgoing feeders and couplings.
PE

Ventilated
7,400 A
Unventilated
5,400 A
Ipk
375 kA
Icw
150 kA
Bedienfront
200

of the frame is 1,000 mm or 1,200 mm.
300

Ipk
250 kA
Icw
100 kA
Photo 6/24
Depending on the requirements, the

panels for outgoing feeders in fixedmounted design are equipped with
circuit-breakers, fuse switch-disconnectors or switchable fuse switchdisconnectors.
Modular feeders
The modular outgoing feeders enable
efficient installation (Photo 6/25).
Modifications and adjustments necessary for operation can be easily
performed.
6/17
TIP_Kap06_Engl
Photo 6/25
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 18
Fixed-mounted panel with outgoing feeders, modular design
Photo 6/26
Fixed-mounted panel with outgoing feeder cables, compartment

design
Photo 6/27
Fixed-mounted panel with switchable in-line fuse switch-disconnectors
Photo 6/28
3NJ6 fuse switch disconnectors,

in-line plug-in design
Photo 6/29
Reactive power control unit,

500 kvar, non-choked
Outgoing cable feeders in

compartment design
This technology, which provides single compartments for each circuitbreaker, ensures a higher degree
of operator and system safety
(Photo 6/26).
Switchable in-line fuse switchdisconnectors
The in-line fuse switch-disconnectors
make for optimum packing density
thanks to their compact design and
their modular structure (Photo 6/27).
In-line plug-in design
Panels that provide for outgoing feeders (Photo 6/28) to be plugged in and
arranged in line represent a lowpriced alternative to the withdrawable
design. By virtue of the supply-side
plug-in contact and their compact design, these panels facilitate easy and
quick retrofitting or replacement without switchgear shutdown.
6/18

The panels for central reactive power
compensation (Photo 6/29) ease the
load on transformers
and cables, reduce transmission

losses and save electricity costs.
Depending on the load structure,
they are equipped with choked or
non-choked capacitor modules.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 19
Low Voltage
Bild 6/30
SIKUS Universal HC
6.1.3 SIKUS Universal and

SIKUS Universal HC
Systems for the Switchgear
Manufacturer
Product and system description
Product description
The single and modular distribution
boards of the SIKUS system comply with the relevant regulations.
They can for instance be used as
main and subdistribution boards in
administrative and functional buildings, in industrial plants and commercial buildings as well as in public
buildings such as schools or hospitals.
All cabinet versions are modularly designed. Their enclosure consists of a
robust frame with holes, including
roof, base and rear plate, and side
parts, and depending on their width,
a single or double door. The cabinet is
made of electroplated, powder-
Bild 6/31
coated sheet steel and meets the requirements of safety class 1 (protective earth conductor). The enclosure
can be equipped as required with
matching assemblies, components
and doors.
With assembled doors, the enclosures have the degree of protection
IP 55 as a standard. When individual
cabinets are lined up, a sealing between the frames is required to attain
IP 55. Doors which feature four-point
locking and door lock can be
mounted on all sides of the individual
cabinets as well as of the cabinet assemblies. Doors can optionally be
hinged left or right.
The door opening angle is 180, improving escape ways in narrow operator rooms.
SIKUS Universal
The busbars can be arranged vertically or horizontally in the cabinets.

A fully developed and harmonized
product range of assembly kits for
fixed mounting and withdrawable
units is available. The cabinets can be
equipped with Siemens circuit-breakers and modular devices on mounting
rails.
Available designs and assemblies
All cabinet versions are available in
safety class 1, with protective earth
conductor, and in degree of protection IP 55 with protective cover and
sealed door, or in IP 30 with protective cover without door.
Cabinets in component kits
The cabinet has not been assembled
and is put together by the switchgear
cabinet installer.
The enclosures can be matched with

busbar systems for rated currents up
to 6,300 A.
6/19
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 20
Design and test requirements
Cabinet panel versions
Type testing
SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal

HC distribution boards have been
approved as type-tested low-voltage
switchgear assemblies (TTA) in accordance with IEC 60439-1, DIN EN
60439 Part 1 (VDE 0660 Part 500).
The constructor of a switchgear
station is normally the switchgear installer. He has to observe the specific
instructions for the Siemens
switchgear to be built in when he
performs an installation.
C Unequipped panels
C Panel with mounting plate for any
devices
C Panel with assembly kit for
circuit-breakers
C Panel with standard mounting rails
for modular devices
C Panel with assembly kit for switch
disconnector
C Panel with assembly kit for LV HRC
fuse switch-disconnector
C Panel with assembly kit for LV HRC
in-line fuse switch-disconnectors
C Panel with assembly kit for
compensation modules
C Panel with assembly kit for 19
system expansion
The type-tested modular SIKUS distribution boards meet the requirements

with regard to
C Temperature-rise limit
C Dielectric strength
C Short-circuit strength
C Effectiveness of the protective
earth conductor
C Clearance in air and creepage distances
C Mechanical functions
Environmental aspects
The plastic materials used are free
of halogen and PVC and can be recycled. The paints used dont contain
any solvents, cadmium or lead.
Modular system and component
design
Stable cabinet frames with 25-mm
hole grid in accordance with DIN
43660 including
C System-specific frame coverings
C Cable entry from top or bottom
C Vertical or horizontal busbar
arrangement
C Base frame accessible from four
sides
C Cabinet-high doors with espagnolette lock, four-point locking and
double-bit key with 3-mm pin
C Door-opening angle 180, doors to
be hinged left or right
C Doors to be mounted at all cabinet
sides
C Fixing with thread-forming screws.
All parts mounted with this fixing
method are thus included in the
protective measure.
6/20
Features at a glance
C Modular component principle for
the creation of a great variety of
cabinet combinations for standalone and line-up installation
C High quality and safety standards
C Flexible expansion with manifold
assembly kits and accessories
C Easy to install due to modular kit
system
C Safe contacting due to grounding
scheme and thread-forming screws
C The matching design for every
requirement
C Appealing design
When installing an electrical system,

the switchgear installer as the manufacturer has to observe the standards
IEC 60439-1, DIN EN 60 439 Part 1
(VDE 0660 Part 500) and the instructions of the system supplier.
Routine testing for
C wiring, electrical functions,
C insulation,
C protective measures
has then to be performed by the
manufacturer (switchgear installer).
He is obliged to sign the corresponding test record.
Interior compartmentalization
Partitions
C prevent any contact between the
energized parts of adjacent functional switching panels,
C limit the possibility of accidental
arc flashover and
C protect the equipment from the
transition of solid objects from one
panel to another.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 21
Low Voltage
Technical data
STRATUM 3200
SIKUS Universal
SIKUS 3200
SIKUS Universal HC
Overvoltage category
1,000/III, 600/IV
1,000/III, 600/IV
Rated impulse withstand

voltage Uimp
kV
Clearances in air and creepage distances
DIN VDE 0110
DIN VDE 0110
1,000
1,000
Rated operational voltageUe
690
690
Rated current,
main busbars
3,200
6,300
Short-circuit strength
Main busbars
Ipk
Icw (1 s)
kA
kA
up to 220
up to 100
220
100
Multi-terminal busbars Ipk

Icw (1 s)
kA
kA
up to 176
up to 80
Protective measure
degree of protection 1 (protective ground conductor)
safety class 1
Number of conductors
in the busbar run
3, AC
4, AC
2 and 3, DC
3, AC
4, AC
2 and 3, DC
Degree of protection acc. to DIN EN 60 529
IP 30 with protective cover

without door;
IP 55 with protective cover and sealed door
IP 30
Level of pollution
Ambient temperature
35 (24-h average)
40
Relative humidity
50 at 40 C
50 at 40 C
max. 2000 (above sea level)
2,000
Enclosure
frame and doors made of 2-mm sheet steel
Plastic parts
without halogens and PVC
Surface of metal parts
electroplated and powder-coated
Color
RAL 7035, light gray (other RAL color on request)
Locking system
2-/4-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock and

double-bit key 3-mm pin
Table 6/7
Technical data
6/21
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 22
6.1.4 Floor-Mounted ALPHA

630 Universal, ALPHA 630
DIN Distribution Boards
Description
The ALPHA floor-mounted distribution
board can be used as main and subdistribution board in administrative,
functional, commercial and industrial
buildings.
The distribution boards and components are modularly designed and
constructed. The system components
and assemblies can also be supplied
in kit form for individual distribution
board construction.
With just a few standard components, a great variety of configurations is possible.
The standard mounting rail tier spacing amounts to 125 + 150 mm. Degree of protection IP 55 can be attained. The rated current maximum
amounts to 630 A
40 mm or 60 mm busbar systems
with dimensions up to 30 x 10 mm
can be installed.
The construction is based on international specifications and installation
preferences. All components are typetested (TTA).
The transparent system design enables easy planning, configuration,
calculation, ordering and installation.
The distribution board components are
designed in such a way that all
switchgear and modular devices can
be installed using only a screwdriver.
We recommend using a batterydriven screwdriver. A pre-assembled
kit consists of an equipment rack,
supports and the corresponding front
cover.
6/22
Photo 6/32
ALPHA Universal,
design standard: NF, CEI
The materials used are environmentally compatible, free of halogens and

recyclable.
System
A distribution board system comprises an enclosure, assemblies for
mounting the switchgear and modular devices, system components and
accessories.
Enclosure
Material: Sheet steel, electroplated,
powder-coated and in safety class 2
with total insulation.
Color: RAL 7035 light gray (further
RAL colors on request).
Assembly kits
Made of sendzimir-galvanized sheet
steel for a wide range of configurations, e.g. for switchgear, modular devices or terminal blocks. The largest
switchgear that can be installed are
the LV HRC fuse switch-disconnectors, of size NH3, 630 A. For fuseless
incoming/outgoing circuits, assemblies of the 3VL molded-case circuit-
Photo 6/33
ALPHA 630 DIN,

design standard: BS
breaker series, 63 A up to 630 A, are

available.
Application
As main and subdistribution boards in
functional, commercial and industrial
buildings. Can be used as control
cabinet with cabinet-high mounting
plate (see accessories).
Features
C System design conforms to relevant DIN, EN and VDE specifications
C Type-tested cabinets in accordance
with DIN EN 60 439-1/3
C Degree of protection IP 55 can be
attained with door
C Safety class 1 (protective ground
conductor) or safety class 2 (total
insulation) are available
C High-quality surface finish: Cabinets and enclosures made of electroplated and powder-coated sheet
steel; system components made of
sendzimir-galvanized sheet steel;
small parts and screws chromated
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 23
Low Voltage
Technical data
ALPHA 630 DIN
ALPHA 630 Universal
III
III
kV 6

voltage Uimp
Clearances in air and
creepage distances
DIN VDE 0110
DIN VDE 0110
V 690
69
V 690
690
Rated voltage
Rated current
V AC 690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in devices

A 630
690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in devices

630
Rated peak short-circuit

current Ipk
kA up to 61.3 (3-pole)1), current flow time 30 ms
53
Rated short-time
current Icw/1s
kA 20
25
Protective measure
safety class 1 with protective ground conductor, safety class 1 with protective ground
or safety class 2 with total insulation
connection
Degree of protection acc.

to DIN EN 60529
IP43 / 55
IP30 / 43 / 55
Tier spacing of mounting rail mm 125, 150
150, 200
Modular width
18 mm is 1 MW
18 mm is 1 MW
Level of pollution
Ambient temperature
35 (24-h average)
35 (24-h average)
Relative humidity
% 50 at 40C
50 at 40C
m max. 2,000 above sea level
max. 2,000 above sea level
Type-tested switchgear
assembly (TTA)
acc. to DIN EN 60439-1 (VDE 0660 Part 500)

and DIN EN 60439-3 (VDE 0660 Part 504)
EN 60439-1
Enclosure
sheet steel
sheet steel
Plastic parts
environmentally compatible, recyclable
environmentally compatible, recyclable
Color
RAL 7035 light gray
RAL 7035 light gray
Locking system
3-point locking with built-in espagnolette

and double-bit key with 3-mm pin
3-point locking with built-in espagnolette lock

lock and double-bit key with 3-mm pin
Packing
in impact-proof, environmentally
compatible packing
in impact-proof, environmentally
compatible packing
1)
Busbar holder spacing: 400 mm; busbar 30 mm x 10 mm
Table 6/8
Technical data
6/23
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
C Replaceable locking systems

(accessories)
C Built-in double-bit key with
3-mm pin
C Doors can be hinged on the right
or left
C Door opening angle 180
C Modular design allows transparent
planning
C 125 and 150 mm tier spacing of the
mounting rail in accordance with
DIN 43870
C Ample wiring space behind the
mounting rail
C Distortion-resistant equipment
racks and front covers
C Environmentally compatible, without PVC and halogens, fully
recyclable plastics
C Sturdy sheet-steel stays in the
scope of supply
C Comprehensive range of pressembled kits
C Front cover with sealable 90
quick-release locks
C Doors with foamed sealing as
standard
Seite 24
6.1.5 Wall-Mounted ALPHA

400/600, ALPHA Universal
and ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards
Description
The wall-mounted distribution board
system for a rated current of up to
400 A can be used as a main or subdistribution board in industrial, administrative, functional, commercial and
residential buildings.
The distribution boards and components are modularly designed. The
system components and assemblies
can also be supplied in kit form for individual board construction.
With just a few standard components, a variety of configurations is
possible. Several assembly kits from
the SIKUS floor-mounted product
range are identical in design.
Being a complete product system,
the wall-mounted distribution board
range includes cabinets with 6 to 9
rows. The mounting rail tier spacing is
125, 150 or 200 mm.
Enclosures are available both for surface mounting and for flush mounting. The product range comprises
cabinets designed as safety class 1
with PE connection or safety class 2
with total insulation. Cabinets with
doors feature degree of protection
IP43.
The construction is based on international standards. All components are
type-tested (TTA).
6/24
Photo 6/34
ALPHA Universal
design standard: NF, CEI
The transparent system design of the

Siemens distribution board range enables easy planning, configuration,
calculation, order processing and installation. All components to be integrated into the cabinet are designed
in such a way that their installation
merely requires a screwdriver.
The materials used are environmentally compatible and recyclable.
System
A distribution board system comprises an enclosure, assembly kits for
mounting the switchgear and modular equipment, system components
and accessories. 40-mm/60-mm busbar systems can be mounted.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 25
Low Voltage
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Photo 6/35
ALPHA 400
design standard: DIN VDE
Enclosure
Material: Electroplated sheet steel,
powder-coated and, in safety class 2,
with total insulation
Color: light gray, RAL 7035
(ALPHA Universal),
traffic white, RAL 9016
(ALPHA 160/400)
Installation using auxiliary frames
and kits
Sendzimir-galvanized sheet steel for a
wide range of configurations, e.g. for
switchgear, modular devices or terminal blocks. The largest switchgear
that can be mounted are LV HRC
fuse switch-disconnectors of size
NH2, 400 A. Additionally, 3VL circuitbreakers up to 400 A can be
mounted.
Photo 6/35
ALPHA 400 stratum

design standard: BS
Application
The SIKUS wall-mounted distribution
board can be used as main and subdistribution board in industrial, administrative, functional, commercial and
residential buildings. With its cabinethigh mounting plate, the wallmounted distribution boards can also
be used as control cabinets.
Features
C System design conforms to relevant DIN, EN and VDE specifications.
C Type-tested cabinets according to
DIN EN 60 439-1 (VDE 0660 Part
500) and DIN EN 60439-3
(DIN VDE 0660 Part 504)
C Robust sheet-steel enclosure
C Available in safety class 1 (protective ground conductor connection)
or safety class 2 (total insulation)
C High-quality surface finish: distribution boards and enclosure made of
electroplated sheet steel with powder coating; system components
made of sendzimir galvanized sheet
C
C
C
C
C
steel; small parts and screws

chromated
Replaceable locking systems
(accessories)
Doors can be hinged on the right
or left
Door opening angle 180
Modular design allows transparent
planning
Ample wiring space behind the
mounting rail
2 cable entries top and bottom
per panel width
Distortion-resistant equipment
racks and front covers
Environmentally compatible,
without PVC and halogens, fully
recyclable plastics
Sturdy sheet-steel stays
Comprehensive program of preassembled kits
Front cover with sealable 90
quick-release locks
Assemblies can be installed and
removed over entire height
Kits mounted on stays can be
removed for configuration and
wiring purposes
Installation facilitated by components with keyhole fixing and
quick-release locks
Doors with foamed sealing as
standard
6/25
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 26
Technical data
ALPHA 400/160 DIN
ALPHA 125 Universal
ALPHA 400 STRATUM
III
III
III
DIN VDE 0110
DIN VDE 0110
DIN VDE 0110

voltage Uimp
kV
Clearances in air and

creepage distances
690
690
690
690
690
690
690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in

devices
690, 40 to 60 Hz; for built-in

devices
690, 40 to 60 Hz; for

built-in devices
up to 400
up to 400
up to 400
Rated voltage
V AC
Rated current
Rated peak short-circuit

current Ipk
kA
up to 61.3 (3-pole)1), current,

flow time 30 ms
17
17
Rated short-time
current Icw /1s
kA
20
10 / 0,1s
Protective measure
safety class 1 with protective

ground connection
or safety class 2 with
total insulation

ground connection

ground connection
Number of conductors
on the busbar track
4/5
4/5
4/5
Degree of protection acc.

to DIN EN 60529
IP43
IP30 / 43
IP40
125/150
200
18 mm is 1 MW
18 mm is 1 MW
18 mm is 1 MW
35 (24-h average)
35 (24-h average)
35 (24-h average)
Tier spacing of mounting rail
mm
Modular width
Level of pollution
Ambient temperature
Relative humidity
50 at 40C
50 at 40C
50 at 40C
Type-tested switchgear assembly

(TTA)
acc. to DIN EN 60439-1

(VDE 0660 Part 500)
and DIN EN 60439-3
(VDE 0660 Part 504)
EN 60439-1
EN 60439-3
EN 60439-1
Enclosure
sheet steel
sheet steel
sheet steel
electroplated and
powder-coated
electroplated and
powder-coated
electroplated and
powder-coated
Color
RAL 9016 traffic white
RAL 7035 light gray
RAL 7035 light gray
Locking system
2-point locking with built-in

espagnolette lock and doublebit key with 3-mm pin


Packing
in impact-proof, environmentally in impact-proof, environmentally in impact-proof, environcompatible packing

compatible packing
mentally compatible packing
1)
Busbar holder spacing: 400 mm; busbar 30 mm x 10 mm
Table 6/9
Technical data
6/26
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 27
Low Voltage
6.1.6 ALPHA-ZS Meter and

Distribution Cabinets for
Germany
Overview
For universal use in residential and
non-residential buildings, Siemens offers the new ALPHA 400-ZS meter
cabinets. Based on the wall-mounted
ALPHA 400-DIN, an identical modular
system has been created that conforms to all of the current technical
supply conditions and provides a
great variety of options in terms of
enclosure design, scope of delivery,
degree of protection and equipment
to be integrated.
A special emphasis has been placed on
meeting regionally differing requirements of power distribution system operators and local installation practice.
The system includes empty cabinets
as flat packs for surface mounting
(delivered in components for self-assembly), preassembled empty cabinets for flush and surface mounting,
cabinet-high rapid mounting kits
(RMK) for extremely fast equipping
and wiring, and a comprehensive
range of accessories.
The transparent system design enables easy planning, calculation, ordering, delivery, transportation, equipping and installation of components
and complete cabinets.
ALPHA SELECT is available as a planning tool for electricians, planning engineers and electrical wholesalers. It
helps to speed up planning and
quickly determines prices for distribution boards and meter cabinets. The
search criteria town, postal code and
responsible power distribution system operator can be used to find a
product range of complete meter
Photo 6/37
Meter cabinet with three panels
cabinets and installation examples

that meets the given requirements.
In addition, individual combinations
of empty cabinets and rapid mounting kits can be planned.
Benefit
C Identical with ALPHA 400-DIN distribution board
C Planning conforms to current technical supply conditions and requirements of power distribution system
operators
C Short installation times
C Low storage expense
Field of application
ALPHA 400-ZS meter cabinets can be
used wherever electric energy is to be
supplied, measured and distributed.
Meter cabinets and their components
are modularly designed, so that few
standard components are sufficient to
create an optimum of diverse, project-
specific mounting and equipping options.

Besides the customary meter cabinets, which are offered in degree of
protection IP43, the system also includes meter cabinets for damp
rooms featuring IP55.
Design
Modular meter cabinets of the
ALPHA 400-ZS series consist of the
following system components: empty
cabinets in four heights and five
widths, RMKs in three different
widths, accessories.
Thanks to the universal system design and numerous combination possibilities with the distribution board
system ALPHA 400-DIN, the options
for planning and erecting larger metering and distribution cabinet systems are manifold.
To complete these systems, ALPHA
cable inlet boxes and cable connection boxes are provided. For internal
measurements, metering kits can be
mounted in any Siemens installation
system featuring a depth of 210 mm.
6/27
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 28
Fig. 6/7
ALPHA meter cabinet, assembly drawing
6/28
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 29
Low Voltage
6.1.7 SIMBOX Small

Distribution Boards
Application
Small distribution boards are suitable
for all types of applications in electrical buildings installations as subdistribution boards or floor distribution
boards.
Thanks to their low mounting depth,
they can be used close to the load
center both in residential and institutional buildings, such as schools, or
in commercial buildings and shops.
Selection criteria
Installation
Small distribution boards are offered
for flush and surface mounting.
According to different requirements
to their fire safety, they can be categorized as suitable for flush-mounting
as wall distribution boards (filament
testing up to 650C) and for hollowwall installation (filament testing up
to 850C).
Size
Depending on your space requirements for built-in devices and wiring,
you may choose from 1- to 4-row versions of small distribution boards.
Mounting rail spacing can vary between 125 mm and 150 mm.
Mounting depth
The distribution boards can be
equipped with modular devices such
as MCBs and RCCBs, up to a 70 mm
Standards
SIMBOX small distribution boards
comply with DIN VDE 0603, DIN
43871 and IEC 60439-3 standards.
This ensures the compliance with
standard measures and, above all,
safe operation due to the observance
of fire safety regulations (e.g. filament testing at temperatures from
650 to 950C) or the protection
against non-permissible voltages on
the enclosures (safety class III).
Photo 3/38
SIMBOX 63 for flush-mounting / hollow-wall installation
Photo 6/39
Photo 6/40
SIMBOX WP
SIMBOX 63 hood-type small

distribution board
Photo 6/41
SIMBOX Universal LC
6/29
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 30
or 55 mm device mounting depth for

snap-on fixing on the 35 mm x 7.5
mm standard mounting rails in accordance with DIN EN 50022.
You may choose between small distribution boards for a variety of applications, ranging from degree of protection IP30 (residential buildings) to IP 55
(splash-water protected industrial,
commercial and functional buildings)
System advantages
Easy installation
Comb: The soft and flexible teeth
at the sliding flange help to make
wiring a quick and convenient action.
The cables are simply inserted and
you can do without the cumbersome
and imprecise knocking out of the
cable entry glands.
Terminal block
The terminal block with an inclination
of 20 is easily visible and allows uncomplicated cable entry. Above that,
strain relief clamps ensure perfect
control and secure seating of the
N and PE conductors.
6/30
Photo 6/42
Comb
150 mm mounting rail spacing

SIMBOX LC and SIMBOX WP provide
for additional wiring space owing to a
mounting rail spacing of 150 mm.
Appealing design
Designed by Guigiaro: SIMBOX LC
owes its attractive look to the Italian
designer Giugiaro, who is one of the
best known industrial and consumer
goods designers.
Photo 6/43
Door frame in low relief
Low in relief
Flush-mounted SIMBOX 63 types almost disappear in the wall and can
be concealed by a picture if desired.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 31
Low Voltage
6.1.8 SMS Rapid Wiring

System
Application
As the components of the SMS Universal rapid wiring system are already
pre-assembled at the factory, the system provides rapid and efficient
wiring in ceiling plenums, hollow
walls, cellular floors as well as in
ductings for electrical installations.
It facilitates the installation at the
construction site and saves time and
costs.
Since all of the cables are equipped
with plug-in connectors at the connection and distribution points, the
installation of a line network is completely flexible; the installation can be
designed, modified or retrofitted simply by plugging in the components.
In contrast to conventional electrical

installations, it is no longer necessary
to cut the cables to length, to strip
them and to make the terminal connections at the construction site. You
only have to make the initial connections of the system infeed.
Plugging in saves considerable installation time. Compared to conventional installations, this system is less
expensive. Furthermore, there is no
waste and the cables can always be
used again for later modifications.
Depending on the requirements and
the application intended, the SMS
Universal rapid wiring system is available for many types of application:
C For the installation of luminaires,
e.g. in false ceilings, operated via
conventional switches/pushbuttons
C For the installation of shielded contact outlets in sill-type trunkings
C For installations in false and cellular

floors, skirting-boards, furniture ...
C Temporary design installations,
trade fairs, camping ...
Supply connection
System power is supplied via a feeder,
for example NYM 5 x 2.5 mm2,
230/400 V or 3 x 2.5 mm2, 230 V.
The 5-pole first connection with strain
relief (socket version) is designed for
screw connection. Solid or stranded
conductors of 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 can be
connected.
The 3-pole first connection with
strain relief can be made with screwless terminals. Solid conductors of
1.5 to 2.5 mm2 or finely stranded
ones of 1.5 mm2 with end sleeves
can be connected.
Plug-in connectors
The housings of the screw-type plugin connectors can be opened by re-
APM 610 switching devices
SMS Universal Kombi

(instabus EIB)
SMS Universal
Fig. 6/8
Overview of SMS rapid wiring system
6/31
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 32
leasing two locating levers (opposite

each other) with a screwdriver. Opening up the hinged housing parts will
make the shock-hazard protected
screw terminals accessible for conductor connection.
Extension cables
They consist of 3-, 4- or 5-pole prefabricated cables similar to H05VV-F,
with factory-crimped plug and socket.
They are available in standard lengths
(2, 4, 6 and 8 m).
On the upper half of the housing, you

will find the identification of the conductors, for example: for the 5-pole
plug-in connector 1, 2, 3, N, and the
grounding sign U. The construction
of the plug-in connector guarantees
non-interchangeability so that it is impossible to connect other plug-in systems.
Connecting cables
3 x 1.5 mm2/2.5 mm2
They consist of a 3-pole pre-fabricated H05VV-F cable, with factorycrimped plug or socket and free ultrasonically compacted core ends for
further fabrication.
Distribution blocks
It is possible to through-connect and
branch off to the electricity consumers
via plug-in distribution blocks with
one incoming and several outgoing
terminals. 2 x 5-pole and 6 x 3-pole
distribution blocks are suitable for
5-pole through-wiring and have
3-pole outgoing terminals. The 5-pole
through-wiring is marked as phase
conductor with the terminal designation 1, 2, 3. The N conductor is a leading conductor with regard to the
phase conductors, the PE conductor
in turn is a leading conductor with
regard to the N conductor. The outgoing terminals are designed as socket
parts (coupling). With the exception
of the T-distribution, every 3- and
5-pole distribution block has an integrated provision for fixing. T-distributors
are suitable for 3-pole through-wiring
of luminaires, for example, and have
two outgoing 3-pole conductors.
6/32
Device connection without screws

(snap-in)
Can be snapped into the device
cutouts of the consumer devices,
e.g. luminaires for sheet strengths of
0.5 to 1.5 mm.
Available as 3-pole socket (output) or
plug (input). Connection for finely
stranded conductor 0.5 to 1.5 mm2.
Two connections per pole are possible. All of the device terminals are
lockable.
Distribution box
The distribution box consists of a
housing with an integrated circuit either for 1 series circuit or 1 pushbutton circuit with 2 connected outputs
for luminaires and 1 output for a
power outlet.
Locking
The socket and plug parts of extension
and connection cables have a locking
device to form a fixed connection in
accordance with DIN VDE 0628.
Cover
The covers can be used to seal outgoing terminals (socket parts) which
are not used in order to raise the degree of protection of the plug-in system from IP 20 to IP 40, if necessary.
Features
C Suitable for wiring in all types of
structural hollow spaces
C Easy and straightforward planning
C Fast, simple and time-saving installation (simply plug in)
C Flexible with regard to modification
and retrofitting
C All of the plug connectors can be
plugged and unplugged while the
system is energised in acc. with
DIN VDE 0625, EN 60 320, IEC 320
C Cost-saving wiring and therefore
less expensive than the conventional installation
C To be used in ambient temperatures of up to 45C
C Connectors are non-interchangeable through coding
C Reusable
C Cutting to length and termination
can be performed at the device
C The system is also available for an
instabus EIB installation with integrated bus line.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 33
Low Voltage
SMS Universal installation

with central ON/OFF
20
11
20
11
20
11
20
10
11
10
11
15
7
20
11
14
20
11
11
8
Through-wiring,
direct connection
20
15
20
Luminaires with snap-in

connector for T-distribution
11
Through-wiring, with
snap-in plugs/sockets
integrated in the luminaire
NYM 3 x 2,5-mm2-Einspeiseleitung geschaltet

3
6
7
8
10
Plug-in connector, socket-type, 3-pole, without screws

Distribution block, 6 x 3-pole
Distribution block, 4 x 3-pole
T-distributor, 4 x 3-pole
Extension cable 3 x 2.5 mm2, plug and socket
Fig. 6/9
11
14
15
20
Extension cable 3 x 1.5 mm2, plug and socket

Connection cable 3 x 1.5 mm2, socket
Connection cable, 3 x 1.5 mm2, plug
Snap-in connector, 3-pole, without screws
Installation of luminaires with SMS Universal in false ceilings, circuitry with central ON/OFF, 230 V AC plug-in connector, 16 A
6/33
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 34
6.1.9 8HP Insulated

Distribution System
High Performance due to
Modular Design
Brief description
The 8HP insulated distribution system is a type-tested modular system
for the fast and efficient construction
of totally insulated power distributions.
Minimum space requirements due
to high density of assemblies and a
flexible adaptation to constructive requirements at the site of installation
allow customer requirements to be
met perfectly.
Areas of application
The type-tested (TTA) insulated 8HP
distribution system is used as a lowvoltage main and sub-distribution
board in industrial, functional and residential buildings.
The modularly designed system is
suitable as a housing for small distribution boards and controls (e.g.
garage door controls with LOGO!
mini control).
The high degree of protection IP 65
(special version in IP 66) allows the
distribution board to be used in damp
or dusty environment (e.g. on ships,
in building-site power distributions,
steelworks and quarries). Resistance
against corrosive atmosphere makes
it perfectly suitable for use in the
chemical industry, in paper factories,
or sewage plants.
The fireproofing test also permits use
in coal mines and lignite open strip
mines.
6/34
Photo 6/44 8HP insulated distribution system
Product range
Any combination of five enclosure
sizes, with transparent or non-transparent cover.
C Uneqiupped enclosure with mounting plate for any kind of device
installation
C Molded-plastic enclosure with
assembly kits for:
modular devices with snap-on
fixing (e.g. 5SY miniature circuitbreaker)
DIAZED and NEOZED fuse links
(e.g. 5SB, 5SE)
NH00 to NH3 fuse bases
(e.g. 3NA)
fuse switch-disconnectors, 100 A

to 630 A (e.g. 3NP)
switch-disconnectors with fuses,
63 A to 250 A (e.g. 3KL)
switch-disconnectors, 63 A to
800 A (e.g. 3KA, 3KE)
load transfer switches, 250 A to
630 A (e.g. 3KE)
parallel switches, 400 A to 1000 A
(e.g. 3KE)
circuit-breakers, 63 A to 630 A
(e.g. 3VF)
C Special design for use on ships
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 35
307
307
307
460,5
307
153,5
307
614
Low Voltage
614
614
[mm]
Fig. 6/10
Delivery range: 5 housing sizes in any combination, with transparent or non-transparent cover
C Type-tested switchgear assembly (TTA)
Creation of TTA-tested power distributions
C High degree of protection IP 65 (IP 66)
Use in dusty or humid environment

(also on ships)
C Resistant against corrosion and contaminants
Suitable for use in corrosive atmosphere

(e.g. chemical industry)
C Total insulation
High degree of personnel protection and system availability
C UL approval
Use as system component for export to USA
C IAB and BfZ test
Also suitable for use in areas with earthquake hazard and in civil
emergency rooms
Table 6/10
Features
6/35
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
6.2 Circuit-Breaker
Devices and Fuse
Systems
Due to increasingly complex
processes, safety for human beings
and machines is becoming more and
more important. Siemens circuitbreaker devices and fuse systems
provide optimum prerequisites for
complete system protection and thus
for safe and reliable operation in modern power supply systems. The demands on electrical power supply in
industry, residential and functional
buildings are increasing. The demand
for more comfort is combined with
the desire for improved security and
reduced downtimes. Only perfectly
adjusted components and products
from a single source, i.e. with the
guarantee of a uniform quality standard based on national and international regulations and standards can
ensure this high safety level. The high
reliability and availability of the individual components, and thus the
whole system, ensures an economic
and fault-free operation for many
years.
6/36
Seite 36
This is only possible if all individual

products and systems are well coordinated and are able to exchange important information. This is carried out
via a device-internal bus interface or
by mountable accessories and binary
inputs.
Individual system components
Circuit-breakers are responsible for
the protection against overload and
short circuits in systems, motors,
generators and transformers when
faults occur. They can also be used as
incoming and outgoing feeder circuits
in distribution boards as well as main
and EMERGENCY STOP switches in
connection with lockable rotary operating mechanisms.
The SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers can
be used in every country all over the
world and work reliably in accordance
with every electrical standard. Thanks
to their modular design and modular
accessories, they can be easily adjusted to changing requirements at
any time. Via PROFIBUS-DP, they can
also be connected to a power management system.
Personnel protection and fire

protection with residual-currentoperated circuit-breakers
Personnel protection
Damages to the insulation might result in fault states which require additional measures according to DIN
VDE 0100 against excessive shock
currents. Siemens residual-currentoperated circuit-breakers provide optimum protection against hazardous
shock currents in case of indirect
contact, and the best possible protection in case of direct contact (with
rated fault current 30 mA).
Fire protection
Short circuits and ground faults are
especially fire-hazardous if relatively
high resistances occur in the fault circuit at the arc. A fault clearance by
line-side overcurrent protective devices such as fuses or circuit-breakers is not always guaranteed at relatively low currents. In combination
with oxygen or air, a thermal load of
only 60 W might lead to an ignition.
Here too, the residual-current-operated circuit-breaker with a rated fault
current of 300 mA ensures extensive protection.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 37
Low Voltage
Cable and line protection with

circuit-breakers and fuses
Due to their excellent product features and the fact that the product
range is optimally designed for the
wide range of applications in the
fields of industry, or commercial,
institutional and residential buildings,
Siemens circuit-breakers and fuses
provide the best conditions for protecting cables and lines against
overload and short circuit. The new
5SY circuit-breaker product range
with its components based on the
complete breaker range for all important functions really offers you many
advantages, e.g., increased operator
safety, installation safety and extremely reduced installation times.
System protection
The well coordinated combination of
circuit-breakers, fuses, miniature circuit-breakers and residual-current-operated circuit-breakers ensures comprehensive system protection as regards short-circuit, overload and fire
protection. Moreover, the coordinated
use of lightning current and surge
arresters can protect the electrical
system against overvoltages resulting
from electrostatic discharges, switching overvoltages and overvoltages
caused by strikes of lightning. Matching all individual components ensures
optimum system protection in all
areas of application. This prevents
damage to increasingly expensive
and sensitive devices and systems.
The circuit-breaker product range is

rounded off by mountable residualcurrent-operated circuit-breaker
blocks which integrate the residualcurrent protective function into the
device as a whole.
Disconnecting and isolating

The available disconnectors guarantee a safe isolation of downstream
system components and devices.
They are used, for example, as
EMERGENCY STOP and repair
switches in distribution boards. Thus,
personnel protection has highest priority. In the open position they comply with the conditions determined
for disconnection.
6/37
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:31 Uhr
Seite 38
6.2.1 Circuit-Breakers
Brief description
Circuit-breakers serve as incoming
and outgoing circuit-breakers for
power distribution in low-voltage
switchgear. They are responsible for
overload and short-circuit protection
in systems, motors, generators and
transformers.
SENTRON 3WL
Air Circuit-Breakers
C As an incoming, distribution, coupling and outgoing circuit-breaker
in electric installations
C As a switching and protecting
device for motors, capacitors, generators, transformers, busbars and
cables
C As an Emergency OFF circuitbreaker in connection with Emergency OFF equipment
Product range
C 3 sizes from 630 A to 6,300 A
C Fixed-mounted and withdrawable
design, 3- and 4-pole
C Short-circuit breaking capacity from
50 kA to 100 kA (at 440 V AC)
C Rated operational voltages up to
1,000 V
C No derating (i.e. full rated current)
up to 55 C (up to 5,000 A)
C Wide range of accessories such as
locking devices, mechanical mutually interlocking devices, Switch ES
operator control and monitoring
software
C External digital and analog output
modules, digital input module
6/38
Photo 6/45
SENTRON 3WL
Features
C Modular design for an easy retrofitting of functions and components
C Communication-capable via
PROFIBUS-DP (transmission of circuit-breaker states, current values,
tripped signals, power management functions)
C Remote diagnosis via Ethernet / Internet possible with BDA (Breaker
Data Adapter)
C Space saving: up to 1,600 A in
switchgear only 400 mm wide
C State-of-the-art microprocessorcontrolled overcurrent release for
every application
Further versions
C SENTRON 3WL circuit-breaker with
UL489 approval
C Versions with ANSI, CSA or CCC
approval
C SENTRON 3WL switch-disconnector for DC applications
Photo 6/46
SENTRON 3VL (250A)
SENTRON VL
Compact Circuit-Breakers
C As incoming and outgoing circuitbreakers in distribution systems
C As switching and protective devices for motors, generators, transformers and capacitors
C As main and EMERGENCY STOP
switches in connection with lockable rotary operating mechanisms
Product range
C Rated currents from 16 to 1,600 A;
rated operational voltage up to
690 V AC
C Three versions with short-circuit
breaking capacity 40, 70, 100 kA at
415 V AC
C No derating up to 50C, i.e. full
rated current at same size up to
50C
C Complete range of modular accessories, same accessories for several sizes
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 39
Low Voltage
Features
Modular design
Due to the compact dimensions and
the modular accessories, it is extraordinarily easy to adjust the device to
changing requirements.
Easy connection and installation
No matter whether you are using
front or rear terminals, integrated
wrap-around terminals, a plug-in system, withdrawable design or busbar
connection the high versatility of
SENTRON 3VL guarantees easy
installation.
Quality
Quality management according to
ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art production methods ensure consistently
high quality.
Universal accessories
No matter whether you are using motorized operating mechanisms, plugin sockets or guide frames, a comprehensive range of accessories even
meets special requirements. Two internal accessory product lines are
available for different voltage levels
and can be easily snapped into place.
Easy configuration
Dimensioning programs such as
SIMARIS design provide you with
support for calculations and dimensioning processes.
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP
Independent of the selected overcurrent release, thermal/magnetic or
electronic, every SENTRON 3VL can
communicate via PROFIBUS or other
internationally used bus protocols.
Power Management offers the user
an economic method to visualize
system states.
Standards
SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers work
reliably no matter where they are
used, in accordance with every electrical standard.
Economical operation in all cases
Graded switching capacities make it
possible to economically adjust the
circuit-breakers to short-circuit currents up to 100 kA at the mounting
position.
SIRIUS 3RV
Circuit-Breakers
3RV1 circuit-breakers are compact,
current-limiting circuit-breakers optimized for load feeders. The circuitbreakers are used for switching and
protecting AC motors up to 45 kW at
400 V AC or for other loads with rated
currents up to 100 A.
Product range
The circuit-breakers are available in
4 sizes:
C Size S00 45 mm wide, max. rated
current 12 A, at 400 V AC suitable
for AC motors up to 5.5 kW
for AC motors up to 11 kW
Photo 6/47
SIRIUS 3RV10 circuit-breakers
Operating conditions
The 3RV1 circuit-breakers are climateproof. They are designed for indoor
operation in which there are no severe operating conditions (e.g. dust,
corrosive vapors, destructive gases).
For installation in dusty and damp
rooms, suitable encapsulations have
to be provided. The 3RV circuit-breakers
can be power supplied from the bottom or top. The permissible ambient
temperatures, maximum switching
capacity, tripping currents and other
boundary conditions for the application are to be found in the technical
data and tripping characteristics. The
3RV1 circuit-breakers are suitable for
use in IT systems (IT networks). The
different short-circuit breaking capacity in the IT system has to be observed for that.
6/39
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 40
Since the operational currents, starting

currents and current peaks can even
be different in motors with the same
power rating due to the inrush current that is present, the motor power
values given in the selection tables
are only guide values. Decisive for the
correct selection of circuit-breakers is
always the precise starting and rating
data for the motor to be protected.
The same applies to the circuit-breakers
for transformer protection.
The tripping characteristics of the
3RV10 /3RV11 circuit-breakers are
mainly designed for the protection of
AC motors. The circuit-breakers are
therefore also called motor circuitbreakers. The rated current In of the
motor to be protected is to be set on
the setting scale. The factory setting
of the short-circuit release is a value
thirteen times the rated current of
the circuit-breaker. This ensures a
trouble-free start-up and safe protection of the motor. The phase-failure
sensitivity of the circuit-breaker ensures
that the circuit-breaker is tripped in
time in case of the failure of a phase
and the resulting overcurrents in the
other phases. Circuit-breakers with
thermal overload releases are usually
designed in tripping class 10 (CLASS
10). The circuit-breakers of sizes S2
and S3 are also available in tripping
class 20 (CLASS 20), thus making the
start-up of motors under aggravated
start-up conditions possible.
6/40
Motor protection with overload relay function (automatic reset)

The circuit-breakers for motor protection with overload relay function are
designed for the protection of AC motors. They have the same short-circuit
release and overload release as the
circuit-breakers for motor protection
without overload relay function. The
circuit-breaker always remains active
in the case of an overload. The overload release just activates two auxiliary contacts (1NC + 1NO). Overload
tripping can be signaled to a higherlevel controller via the auxiliary contacts. It is also possible to directly
deactivate a downstream contactor.
The overload signal is reset automatically. The circuit-breaker itself only
trips in case of a downstream short
circuit.
System protection
The 3RV10 / 3RV11 circuit-breakers
for motor protection are also suitable
for system protection. In order to prevent premature trippings due to the
phase-failure sensitivity, the three current paths are always to be loaded
uniformly. With single-phase loads,
the current paths are to be connected
in series.
Transformer protection
The 3RV14 circuit-breakers are also
suitable for transformer protection.
Due to the high excitation values for
the instantaneous short-circuit release
of >20 x In, even high peak inrush
currents of the transformers do not
lead to trippings upon closure.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 41
Low Voltage
6.2.2 Fuse Systems

General
Low-voltage fuses are space-saving,
high-quality switch- and controlgear
which reliably break overload and
short-circuit currents.
They provide secure protection for
electric systems, cables and lines as
well as for electric devices.
They comply with the requirements
concerning high operating safety, low
power loss, optimum selectivity conditions among themselves as well as
in combination with miniature circuitbreakers, and accurate current limiting with a high resistance to aging.
Flush-mounting
fuse base
Protective
cover
Adapter
sleeve
Fuse link
Screw cap
Photo 6/47 Design of a NEOZED fuse (screw-in fuse system)
The following low-voltage fuse systems are classified according to their

application:
C NEOZED fuses D0 system
ranging from the standard version
to MINIZED circuit-breakers
C DIAZED fuses D system with
DIAZED and SILIZED fuse links
C LV HRC fuse system
C Cylindrical fuses
A fuse always consists of several
components (at least one fuse base
and one fuse link).
LV HRC fuse
base
Photo 6/48
Protective cover
Cover
LV HRC fuse
link
Design of a LV HRC fuse (plug-in fuse system)
Fuse systems
Within the low-voltage range of up to
1000 V, fuse systems are distinguished as follows:
C Fuses that can be handled by nonspecialists (mainly screw-in type)
NEOZED D01/E14, D02/E18,
D03/M30 x 1
DIAZED NDZ/E16, DII/E27, DIII/E33,
DIV/R11/4,
where it is impossible to interchange fuses having different rated
currents due to their design, and
where shock-hazard protection is
ensured for the user.
C Fuses that can only be handled by

specialists (mainly plug-in type)
LV HRC fuse systems size 00 (size
000), size 0, size 1, size 2, size 3,
size 4, size 4a, where neither a
rated current non-interchangeability
as a result of the design, nor
adequate shock-hazard protection
is required.
Siemens offers an appropriate
range of covers and phase barriers
to also provide these LV HRC fuses
with shock-hazard protection.
6/41
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Selection
The following parameters are important when choosing a fuse for circuit
protection:
C Rated voltage Volt (V)
AC voltage1)
DC voltage2)
C Rated current Ampere (A)
C Utilization category
(as time-current characteristic)
C Design (type and sizes)
Features
C NEOZED, DIAZED, SILIZED, LV
HRC, SITOR fuses and cylindrical
fuses have a consistently high
quality
C Low power loss output for high
economy and minimal heating
C Safe rated breaking capacity from
the lowest inadmissible overload
current up to the highest shortcircuit current
C Fuses have full selectivity in
accordance with the standard at
a rated current ratio of 1:1.6
C High current limiting to protect all
system components
C Reliable long-term, continuous
operation
C High resistance towards aging to
avoid unnecessary system malfunctions
C Constant characteristics even
under different temperature conditions
C Safe replacement of fuse links and
switching with the MINIZED
switch-disconnector
C Extensive product range for all
applications
Seite 42
C Wide range of matched accessories, especially to enhance

shock-hazard protection
C Approved in many countries
throughout the world
Selectivity
Usually, several fuses are connected
in series in an installation. Selectivity
ensures that only the faulted circuit is
broken and not the entire process in
operation.
Siemens fuses of the utilization category gL/gG are interselective in the
ratio 1:1.25 at a rated voltage of up to
230 V AC, i.e. from one rated current
level to the other. This is due to the
fact that the tolerance ranges of 5%
of the time/current characteristics are
considerably lower. Here, the requirement of a ratio of 1:1.6 given in the
standard is distinctly exceeded. Owing to smaller rated currents, conductor cross-sections can be reduced in
size.
Utilization categories
According to their functions, fuses
are divided into utilization categories:
the first letter indicates the functional
class, the second the object to be
protected:
1st letter: Functional class
a = Accompanied fuses: Fuse links
which must, at least, continuously conduct currents up to
their specified rated current and
which must be able to break
currents above a specific multiple of the rated current up to the
rated breaking current.
Photo 6/49
Fast arcing and an accurate

extinction are the prerequisites
for a safe breaking capacity
g = General-purpose fuses: Fuse

links which must, at least, continuously conduct currents up to
the specified rated current and
break currents from the lowest
fusing current up to the breaking
current. Overload and short-circuit protection.
2nd letter: Object
G = Cable and conductor protection
(general applications)
M = Switchgear/motor protection (for
protection of motor circuits)
R = Semiconductor/thyristor protection (for protection of rectifiers)
L = Cable and conductor protection
(acc. to DIN VDE)
B = Protection of mines
Tr = Transformer protection
1)
European notation for alternating voltage e.g.

500 V AC, German notation e.g. ~ 500V
2) European notation for direct voltage e.g. 440 V
DC, German notation e.g. 440V
6/42
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 43
Low Voltage
Furthermore, DIAZED fuses are

marked with the designations slow
and quick. These designations are
defined in IEC/CEE and DIN VDE.
Under short-circuit conditions, the
fuse with the quick characteristic
interrupts more quickly than one in
the utilization class gL/gG. The characteristic slow of the DIAZED
fuses for the protection of DC traction systems is particularly suitable
for breaking direct currents with a
high inductance. Both characteristics
can also be used for cable and conductor protection.
General-purpose fuses (gL/gG, gR,
quick, slow) safely interrupt inadmissible overload and short-circuit currents.
Accompanied fuses (aM, aR) are
used exclusively for short-circuit protection.
The following utilization categories
are available in the Siemens product
range:
gL (DIN VDE)/gG (IEC) = General-purpose cable and conductor protection
aM (DIN VDE/IEC) = Accompanied
switchgear protection
aR (DIN VDE/IEC) = Accompanied
semiconductor protection
gR (DIN VDE/IEC) = General-purpose
semiconductor protection
quick (DIN VDE/IEC/CEE) = Generalpurpose cable and conductor protection
slow (DIN VDE) = General-purpose cable and conductor protection
Breaking capacity
The fuses distinguish themselves
with their high rated current breaking
capacity and minimum space requirements. The basic requirements and
circuit data for tests voltages, performance factor, switching angle, etc.
are defined in the national (DIN VDE
0636) and international (IEC 60 269)
standards.
For a consistently safe interruption of
any current, ranging from the lowest
inadmissible overload current to the
highest short-circuit current, many
quality features have to be considered during construction and manufacture. For example, besides designing the dimensions, punched profile
and position in the fuse body of the
fuse element, the resistance to pressure and temperature change of the
fuse body as well as the chemical purity, grain size and density of the
quartz sand are of great importance.
The rated breaking capacity for AC is

50 kA for NEOZED and most of the
DIAZED fuses. For LV HRC fuses it is
even 120 kA AC.
Current limiting
Besides a safe rated breaking capacity, the current limiting effect of a
fuse link has a significant impact on
the cost-effectiveness of an installation. When a fuse blows because of a
short circuit, the short-circuit current
continues to be fed into the network
until the fuse breaks the circuit. The
short-circuit current is only limited by
the network impedance.
When all of the narrow parts of a
fuse element melt at the same time,
partial electrical arcs in series result,
ensuring that the current is quickly interrupted with significant current limiting. The current limiting, too, is significantly influenced by the manufacturing quality. For Siemens fuses it is
excellent. For example, an LV HRC
fuse link of size 2 with In = 224 A
reduces a short-circuit current with a
potential rms value of approx. 50 to a
cut-off current with a peak value of
approx. 18 kA.
gB
Mining
HV HRC fuse
switch-fuse
combination
gR/aR
semiconductor
protection
LV HRC fuse
switch-disconnector
gTr
transformer
protection
Overcurrent
relay > I
M
aM
switchgear
protection
gL/gG cable
and conductor
protection
Fig. 6/11
Fuse application with regard to the utilization category
6/43
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 44
Photo 6/50 MINIZED switch-disconnector and

NEOZED fuses in a SIMBOX 63
small distribution board
This strong current limitation protects

the system from excessive load at all
time.
Fuse assignment for cable and
conductor protection
When assigning fuses to cable and
conductor protection against overload,
the following requirements have to
be met in accordance with DIN VDE
0100, Part 430:
(1) IB In Iz
(Nominal current rule)
(2) I2 1.45 x In
(Tripping rule)
IB: Circuit operating current
In: Rated current of the selected
protective device
Photo 6/51 LV HRC fuse links with center

indicator in a 3NP fuse switchdisconnector
Photo 6/52 NEOZED and DIAZED bus-mounted fuses of the 60 mm SR busbar

system integrated in an ALPHA
distribution board
I z:
Permissible current load capacity

under given operating conditions
I2: Tripping current of protective device under specified conditions
(high test current).
In the meantime, factor 1.45 is an internationally accepted compromise
between utilization and level of protection for a conductor when considering the interrupting performance of
the possible protective device (e.g.
fuses).
Siemens fuse links of the utilization
category gL/gG meet the following
requirement in accordance with the
supplementary sections of DIN VDE
0636:
Interruption with I2 = 1.45 x In for

the conventional test duration under
specific test conditions according to
the supplementary sections of DIN
VDE 0636.
Rated power loss
The cost-effectiveness of a fuse depends considerably on the rated
power loss. This should be kept as
low as possible and only manifest a
low self-heating characteristic. However, when evaluating the intrinsic
losses of a fuse, the physical interdependence between the rated breaking capacity and rated power losses
should be taken into consideration. In
order to achieve a low resistance
value, the fuse element should be as
thick as possible. To ensure a high
rated breaking capacity, however, a
thin fuse element is required.
Considering the high breaking safety,
Siemens fuses have the lowest possible rated loss.
6/44
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 45
Low Voltage
These values lie far below the limits

specified in the relevant regulations.
This means minimal heating, safe
breaking capacity and high cost-effectiveness.
Photo 6/54 LV HRC fuse links in fuse bases

and fuse switch-disconnectors,
assembled in an ALPHA distribution board
Load capacity at higher ambient

temperatures
According to DIN VDE 0636, the
course of the time/current characteristics of NEOZED/DIAZED and LV HRC
fuses refers to an ambient temperature of 20C 5C. When used at
higher ambient temperatures of
50C, the fuse should be loaded
with 90% of the rated current. The
short-circuit breaking capacity is
not affected by higher ambient temperatures.
Application examples
Fuses are primarily used to protect
cables and conductors against overload and short-circuit currents regardless of the currents strength, and
they are also suited to protect equipment and devices.
Photo 6/55 LV HRC fuse links with center

indicator in a 3KL fuse switch-disconnector
Load capacity
Photo 6/53 DIAZED fuses and LV HRC

fuses in a building-site distribution
board
120
%
100
90
80
60
40
20
0
20
40 50 60
80
100 C 120
Ambient temperature
Fig. 6/12
Load capacity at higher ambient

temperatures
C A high degree of selectivity requirements in radial and meshed networks to avoid unnecessary system
failures
Amongst the many tasks and different use conditions for fuses, the following are included:
6/45
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
C Back-up protection of miniature

circuit-breakers
C Protection of motor circuits, in
which short-term overloads and
short circuits may occur during operation
C Short-circuit protection of switchand controlgear such as contactors
and automatic circuit-breakers
C In TN and TT networks where disconnection is operated by overcurrent protective devices, fuses additionally prevent unduly high contact
voltages from being maintained in
the event of a fault.
Fuses are used in a wide range of
applications, extending from residential installations to installations
in commercial buildings and from
industrial installations to installations
in power supply companies.
The MINIZED switch-disconnector
allows NEOZED fuse links to be replaced in no-voltage conditions, and
the safe switching of overload and
short-circuit currents of up to 50 kA.
Here, the MINIZED fuse switch-disconnector is particularly suitable for
use in meter cabinets as the main
switch, and for selective duties in
control and industrial applications
where high switching capacity, safe
operation, selectivity and minimum
space are required.
6/46
Seite 46
Environmental protection
Environmental protection is a continuing task for modern industrial society and demands action!
Environmentally compatible recycling of LV HRC/HV HRC fuses
National and global environmental
problems for example, changes in
the climate and the atmosphere of
the earth, the destruction of the
ozone layer, the deterioration of the
ground and water resources, problems in dealing with waste and raw
materials have all proven the necessity of common action. The recycling
law, which was enacted in Germany
at the end of 1996, requires companies to recycle materials and thus to
save resources. Industry is requested
to be aware of its responsibility also
towards future generations and to
take the initiative.
We, as a manufacturer of low-voltage
and high-voltage HRC fuses, are
aware of this responsibility and are
determined to focus more than ever
on protecting the environment and
taking care of our natural resources.
Initiated by Siemens AG, various German manufacturers of LV/HV HRC
fuses have formed a committee
NH/HH-Recycling e.V., which has
been recognised as beneficial to
common interests. The purpose of
this committee is to duly recycle fuse
links, taking into account the prevailing legal regulations, and in doing so
actively contribute to the protection
of the environment and natural resources.
How are fuses recycled in

Germany?
Only LV HRC and HV HRC fuse links
will be accepted for recycling, without packaging. Euro pallet boxes are
available from your wholesaler. If you
accumulate large quantities of old
fuses, you can also have a Euro pallet
box on your premises. For further information, contact your regional
Siemens sales office.
The disconnected fuse links are completely melted down by an officially
certified recycler. The silver and copper gained are put back into the materials cycle. Residues such as inorganic waste are used, for example, in
road and dam building. Profits made
herewith will be assigned to environmental research for public interest by
the NH/HH-Recycling e.V. committee. The fuses are labeled with the
following symbols
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 47
Low Voltage
MINIZED switch-disconnectors, draw-out assembly

Standards
DIN VDE 0638, EN 60947-3
Dimensions
DIN 43880
Utilization categories
gL/gG
Rated voltage
400 /415 V AC, 48 /110 V DC
Rated current range
2 to 63 A
Rated breaking capacity
50 kA AC, 8 kA DC
Mounting position
any, preferably vertical
Resistance to climate1)
up to 45 C, at 95% rel. humidity
Non-interchangeability
achieved with adapter sleeves
1)
e.g. with regard to corrosion
NEOZED fuse
Standards:
Dimensions:
Rated voltage:
Rated current range:
Mounting position:
Non-interchangeability:
DIAZED fuse, SILIZED fuse link

Standards:
Dimensions:
Utilization categories:
Rated voltage:
Rated breaking capacity:
Table 6/11
DIN VDE 0636, DIN VDE 0680,

EC 60269, EN 60269
DIN VDE 49522, DIN VDE 49523,
DIN VDE 49524, DIN VDE 49525
400 V AC, 250 V DC
2 to 100 A
any, preferably vertical
achieved with adapter sleeves
DIN VDE 0635, DIN VDE 0636, DIN VDE 0680,

IEC 60269, IEC 60241, CEE 16, EN 60269
DIN VDE 49510, DIN VDE 49511, DIN VDE 49514,
gL/gG, aR, slow, quick
500/690/750 V AC, 500/600/750 V DC
2 to 63 A
50 kA AC (E16), 40 kA AC (E16),
8 kA DC (E16), 1.6 kA DC (E16)
achieved with screw adapters or ring adapter
Overview 1: fuse systems
6/47
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 48
LV HRC fuse
Standards:
Dimensions:
Rated voltage:
Resistance to climate1):
1)
SITOR fuse link

Standards:
Dimensions:
Rated voltage:
Cylindrical fuse
Standards:
Dimensions:
Rated voltage:
Resistance to climate1):
1)

IEC 60269, EN 60269
gL / gG, aM
500/690 V AC, 250/440 V DC
2 to 1,250 A
120 kA AC, 50 kA DC
30C to 50 C, at 95% rel. humidity
not required
Table 6/12
Overview 2: fuse systems
6/48
DIN VDE 0636, IEC 60 269, EN 60269

DIN 43620, DIN 43623
aR, gR
600/690/1,000 V AC
16 to 630 A
> 50 kA AC
IEC 60269, NF C 60200, NF C 63210, NF C 63211,

NBN C 63269-, 2-EN-2-1, CEI 32-4
IEC 60 269-2-1
gG, aM
400/500 V AC
0.5 to 100 A
up to 45 C, at 95% rel. humidity
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 49
Low Voltage
6.2.3 Fuse SwitchDisconnectors

3K Switch-disconnectors
High-Level Safety and
Performance
Brief description
3KA and 3KE switch-disconnectors
are able to make, conduct and break
the specified rated current (incl. a
predetermined degree of overload). If
a short circuit occurs, the switchdisconnector must be able to conduct a specified short-circuit current
during the time indicated.
Switch-disconnectors 3KL and 3KM
with fuses
are able to make, conduct and break
the specified rated current (incl. a
predetermined degree of overload).
If a short circuit occurs, the switchdisconnector must be able to conduct a specified short-circuit current
during the time indicated. Additionally, the fuses fitted to the circuitbreaker also provide overload and
short-circuit protection for downstream system components, cables
and loads.
Switch-disconnectors 3KA and 3KE
are used as main, EMERGENCY
STOP, repair, system selector and system disconnection switches in distribution board construction for residential and functional buildings as well as
in industrial switchgear.
Switch-disconnectors 3KL and 3KM
with fuses
also provide overload and short-circuit
protection as main and EMERGENCY
STOP switches for switchgear, distribution boards, power supply and motor feeders. In combination with
semiconductor fuses (SITOR), they
can be used as effective protection in
frequency converters, UPS systems
and soft starters. In the 3KM version,
the switch-disconnector can be easily
mounted, without tools, on a busbar
system.
The 3KA and 3KL switch disconnectors
are available as special versions for
use in aggressive atmospheres (hydrogen sulfide in the chemical industry, paper mills, sewage plants, lignite
open strip mining).
Features
High rated short-circuit current
(up to 100/80/50 kA)
Easy configuration, as calculation of
short-circuit current is not required.
Unlimited selectivity
Selectivity to a line-side fuse can
be easily attained using the factor
K = 1.6.
High switching capacity
AC 23 A at 690 V AC
A standard series meets highest demands as to power distribution and
motor switching capacity.
Photo 6/56
3KL switch-disconnector with

fuses
Use in aggressive atmosphere

This special version of the switchdisconnector can be used under
extreme ambient conditions
(e.g. hydrogen sulfide).
IP 65 enclosure
Safety switch philosophy up to 1,000 A
realized with 8HP molded-plastic
enclosure.
High level of safety for user and
system
Lockable to prevent reclosure, deenergized fuses in OFF position by
means of double contact seaparation
of the switching contacts.
Quality
Quality management according to
ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art production methods guarantee consistently
high quality.
6/49
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 50
3KA and 3KE miniature circuit-breakers without fuses

Switch type:
3KA50
3KA51
3KA52
3KA53
3KA55
3KA57
3KA58
Rated continuous current:
63 A
80 A
125 A
160 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
Rated operational voltage:
690 V AC, 440 V DC
Switch type:
3KE42
3KE43
3KE44
3KE45
250 A
400 A
630 A
1000 A
690 V AC, 440 V DC
Customers can combine two 3KE miniature

circuit-breakers to a transfer control device
3KL and 3KM miniature circuit-breakers with fuses

Switch type:
3KL/M50
3KL/M52
3KL/M53
3KL/M55
3KL/M57
3KL61
63 A
125 A
160 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
690 V AC, 440 V DC
C Available with LV HRC and BS88 fuse-switches for the IEC and British Standard Market
C 3KL miniature circuit-breakers available as protective switches with high-quality 8HP (IP 65) molded plastic enclosure, 63 A to 400 A
Table 6/13
6/50
Range of delivery 3K switch-disconnectors
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 51
Low Voltage
3NP4 Fuse Switch-Disconnectors Compact and Safe

Isolation and Protection
Brief description
3NP4 fuse switch-disconnectors are
able to make, conduct and break the
specified rated current (including a
certain degree of overload). If a short
circuit occurs, the fuse switch-disconnector must be able to conduct a
specified short-circuit current during
a predefined time. The switch-disconnector is opened (OFF) and closed
(ON) by operating the handle unit. In
the open position, it meets the requirements for an isolating function.
Overload and short-circuit protection
of downstream system components
and devices is provided by the size
NH000 to NH3 (630 A), (630 A)
LV HRC fuses integrated in the
handle unit.
used in power distribution and infeed
for occasional manual switching/isolating of load feeders and cable distribution cabinets. The fuses effectively
protect downstream electric devices
and system components from short
circuits and overloads.
The fuse switch-disconnectors are
suitable for distribution board construction for residential and functional
buildings, as well as in industrial
switchgear. They protect and switch
downstream system components
and devices on an all-pole basis.
Together with semiconductor fuses
(SITOR) they can be used to protect,

for example, frequency converters
and soft starters. Due to the open
isolating gap they are perfectly suited
for isolating systems and, thus, for
personnel protection.
Range of delivery
available
C up to a rated continuous current of
630 A in size 000 to 3 for mounting/installation
C for mounting onto standard mounting rails (up to 250 A) and snapping
onto busbar systems (up to 630 A)
C with or without fuse monitoring
C Accessories:
Terminals and terminal covers,
feeder terminals and busbars,
auxiliary switches, masking frames
and mounting sets for various
cabinet/distribution board systems
such as STAB-SIKUS, SIKUS-3200,
SIPRO, 8HP.
Features
High safety for users and system
Overreaching protection and laterally
fingerproof, quick opening due to an
artificial point of force, no arc in case
of short-circuit breaking via fuse,
sealable, degree of protection
IP 30/IP 20.
Photo 6/57 3NP4 fuse switch-disconnector
Various fields of application

Semiconductor protection by the
tested use of SITOR fuses, capacitor
protection via tested capacitor
switching capacity. Free selection of
distribution boards due to a wide
range of accessories and covers.
Quick and easy installation
ensured by snap-on mechanism or
quick mounting plates for installation
on standard mounting rails and versions for mounting onto busbar
systems (40 mm and 60 mm).
Fuse monitoring
by built-on 3RV circuit-breakers.
Electronic fuse monitoring by
5TT3 170 fuse monitor.
Quality
Quality management in accordance
with ISO 9001, and state-of-the-art
production methods guarantee consistently high quality.
6/51
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 52
3NP5 Fuse Switch-Disconnectors Isolation and

Protection, Sturdy, Compact
and Safe With High Switching Capacity
(SITOR) they can be used to protect,

for example, frequency converters
and soft starters. Due to the open
isolating gap they are perfectly suited
for isolating systems and, thus, for
personnel protection.
Brief description

especially suitable for industrial
plants and distribution systems with
high demands on switching capacity
and material resistance, such as ship
installations, chemistry and paper
industry.
3NP5 fuse switch-disconnectors have

a high switching capacity and are
able to make, conduct and break the
indicated rated current (including a
certain degree of overload). If a short
circuit occurs, the fuse switch-disconnector must be able to conduct a
specified short-circuit current during
the open position, it meets the
requirements for an isolating function.
NH00 to NH3 (630 A), LV HRC fuses
integrated in the handle unit.
used in power distribution and infeed
for occasional manual switching/isolation of load feeders and cable distribution cabinets. The integrated fuses
efficiently protect downstream loads
and system components against
short circuit and overload.
The fuse switch-disconnectors are
used in distribution board construction for residential and functional
buildings, as well as in industrial
switchgear. They protect and switch
downstream system components
and devices on an all-pole basis.
Together with semiconductor fuses
6/52
Range of delivery
available
630 A for size LV HRC 00 to
LV HRC 3
C for mounting/installation and for
affixing to busbar systems
C with or without fuse monitoring
C Accessories:
busbar adapters, auxiliary switches,
masking frames and mounting
sets for numerous cabinet/distribution board systems such as
STAB-SIKUS, SIKUS-3200, SIPRO,
8HP and switchboard installation.
Features
High degree of safety for user and
system
High rated breaking capacity, 23 A AC
switching capacity of up to 690 V AC,
overreaching protection and laterally
fingerproof, fully compartmented,
high-speed closing prevents arc
standstill, no arcing in case of shortcircuit breaking by fuse, sealable, degree of protection IP 30/IP 20.
Photo 6/58 3NP5 fuse switch-disconnector
Various fields of application

Semiconductor protection by the
tested use of SITOR fuses; capacitor
protection via tested capacitor
switching capacity; free selection of
distribution boards due to a wide
range of accessories and covers.
due to easy mounting/installation and
adapter for busbar systems (40 mm
and 60 mm).
Use in aggressive atmosphere
The special version can be also used
under extreme ambient conditions
(e.g. hydrogen sulfide).
Fuse monitoring
due to integrated 3RV circuit-breakers.
Solid-state fuse monitoring by selfsupplied, integrated fuse monitor.
Quality
with ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art
production methods guarantee
consistently high quality.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 53
Low Voltage
3NJ4/3NJ5 Fuse
Switch-Disconnectors,
In-Line Type
Isolation and Protection,
Compact and Safe in
Narrow Design
Brief description
3NJ4/ 3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-disconnectors are able to make, conduct
and break the rated current (including
a certain degree of overload). If a
short circuit occurs, the fuse switchdisconnector must be able to conduct
a specified short-circuit current during
the open position, they meet the
requirements for an isolating function.
NH00 to NH4a (1,250 A), LV HRC
fuses integrated in the handle unit.
3NJ4/3NJ5 fuse switch-disconnectors are used in power distribution
and infeed for occasional manual
switching/isolation of load feeders
and cable distribution cabinets. The
integrated fuses efficiently protect
downstream loads and system components against short circuit and
overload.
The in-line fuse switch-disconnectors

are used in distribution board construction for residential and functional
buildings. As a result of the narrow
design, they are mainly used in lowvoltage distribution boards, network
and transformer substations, and in
cable distribution cabinets used in
power supply companies and in industry. They protect and switch downstream system components and consumers in one- and all-pole operation.
Due to the open isolating gap they are
perfectly suited for isolating systems
and, thus, for personnel protection.
3NJ4/3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-disconnectors are fed via the 185 mm
busbar system, disconnectors of
size NH00 via a 100 mm busbar
system.
Range of delivery
3NJ4/3NJ5 in-line fuse switch-disconnectors are available
1,250 A in sizes NH00 to NH4a
C switchable in one- and three-pole
mode
C for affixing to 185 mm busbar
system, for size NH00 on 100 mm
C Accessories:
auxiliary switches, masking frame,
adapter for adjusting size NH00 to
NH1-3.
Features
High degree of safety for user and
system
No arcing in case of short-circuit
breaking by fuse, parking position of
the handle unit, visible isolating gap,
Photo 6/59 3NJ4 fuse switch-disconnector,

in-line type
lockable in OFF position, inspection

holes for voltage testing in ON position, TTA testing in connection with
SIKUS-3200 and SIVACON cabinet
system.
Easy current pick-off
Measuring fuses for current measurement as well as piggyback for construction site supply pick-off can be
inserted via a window in the grip lug.
By direct mounting on busbar systems, mechanical fixing and electrical
contact in one work operation, cable
connection from top or bottom.
Quality
with ISO 9001 and state-of-the-art
production methods guarantee
consistently high quality.
6/53
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 54
6.2.4 Miniature CircuitBreakers

Miniature circuit-breakers are mainly
used to protect cables and lines
against overload and short circuit.
Thus, they also protect electrical
equipment against overheating according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 430.
Photo 6/60 5SP4 miniature circuit-breaker

single-pole
Photo 6/61 5SY miniature circuit-breaker

single-pole
Under certain conditions, in accordance with DIN VDE 0100, Part 410,
miniature circuit-breakers also ensure
protection against hazardous shock
currents in case of an excessive
touch voltage caused by insulation
failures.
Further, due to the fixed rated current
settings of the miniature circuitbreakers, it is also possible to protect
motors in a limited form.
For the respective application, different tripping characteristics are available. EN 60 898, DIN VDE 0641 Part
11 and IEC 60 898 are the underlying
standards for construction and approval. For application in industry and
system engineering, circuit-breakers
are supplemented by the following
add-on accessories:
C
C
C
C
C
C
Auxiliary circuit switches

Fault signal contacts
Open-circuit shunt releases
Undervoltage releases
Remote control
RCCB blocks
Photo 6/62 5SY miniature circuit-breaker with versatile additional components
Functional design, mode of

operation
Circuit-breakers have a time-delayed
overload current/time-dependent
thermal release (thermal bimetal) for
low overcurrents, and an instantaneous electromagnetic release for
higher overload and short-circuit currents.
The special contact materials ensure
a long service life and offer a high
level of protection against contact
welding.
6/54
Due to the ultra-fast separation of the

contacts in case of faults and the
quick quenching of the arc in the arc
chamber, miniature circuit-breakers
significantly and safely limit the current when breaking.
Generally, the admissible I2t limit
values of energy limitation class 3,
specified in DIN VDE 0641 Part 11,
are underranged by 50%. This
guarantees excellent selectivity
with the upstream overcurrent
protective devices.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 55
Low Voltage
Rated cross section
mm2
Iz (conductor)
Continuous current in A acc. to
DIN VDE 0298 T4 and
DIN VDE 0100 T430 Supplement 1
Two-conductor
Three-conductor
A
A
Rated current
miniature circuit-breaker (MCB)
Two-conductor
A
Three-conductor
A
1.5
16
16
19.5
17.5
2.5
25
20
26
24
32
32
35
32
40
40
46
41
10
63
50
63
57
16
25
35
80
100
125
63
80
100
85
112
138
76
96
119
Table 6/14
Conductor cross-sections: Allocation of miniature circuit-breakers to copper wires with PVC insulation for installation type C1) and R=30C.
1)
Example: Rising main busbar, multi-core wires on/in the wall.
Cable and line protection

The actual task of miniature circuitbreakers is to protect cables and
lines against thermal overload of the
insulation caused by overcurrents
and short-circuits. Thus, the tripping
characteristics of the miniature circuit-breakers are adjusted to the load
withstand curves of the cables and
lines.
Iz
Ib
In
I2
I1
I2
Ib Operating current: load-determined

current during uninterrupted operation
1,45 x I z
Iz Permissible continuous current for a

conductor whereby the continuous
limit temperature of the insulation is
not exceeded
Time t
1.45 x Iz Maximum permissible, temporary overload current which does not result in a
safety-relevant reduction of the insulation
properties when the continuous limit
temperature is temporarily exceeded
In Rated current: current which the MCB is
suitable for and which other rated values
refer to
I3
In the opposite chart, the relative values of the lines and of the miniature
circuit-breakers are assigned to each
other. The tripping characteristics are
in accordance with the standards
EN 60 898, IEC 60 898 and
DIN VDE 0641 Part 11.
I1 Conventional non-tripping current:

current which does not lead to a
switch-off under defined conditions
I2 Conventional tripping current: current
which leads to a switch-off within one
hour (In 63 A) under defined conditions
I3
I3 Tolerance limit
I4 Holding current of the instantaneous
release (short-circuit release)
I5 Tripping current of the instantaneous
release (short-circuit release)
I4
I5
Current I
Fig. 6/13
Schematic drawing of the relative values of lines and protective device
6/55
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 56
1,13 1,45
120
1,131,45
120
I2_06663b
Minutes
Minutes
20
Tripping time
Tripping time
10
6
4
2
1
40
20
20
10
6
4
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
0.4
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.02
1.5 2
3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20
Multiple of rated current
0.01
1
30
20
Minutes
20
10
6
4
Tripping time
Minutes
Tripping time
60
40
2
1
40
10
6
4
2
20
20
10
6
4
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
0.4
2
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.02
3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20
30
I2_06354c
1
40
Seconds
Seconds
30
1,13 1,45
60
40
Fig. 6/14
3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20
120
I2_06353c
0.01
1 1.5 2
1.5 2
Tripping characteristic B
Cable protection mainly in residential
building installations, no proof regarding personnel protection required
1,13 1,45
120
Tripping characteristic C
C Cable protection, advantageous for
controlling higher making currents,
e.g. with lamps, motors
6/56
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
Tripping characteristic A
C For limited semiconductor protection
C Protection of measuring circuits with
transformers
C Protection of circuits with long cable
lengths which require tripping within
0.4 sec. acc. to DIN VDE 0100
Part 410
C High rated breaking capacity up to

15,000 A according to EN 60 898
and 25 kA according to EN 60947-2
C Excellent current limiting and
selectivity
C Tripping characteristics A, B, C
and D
C Terminals are safe from finger
touch and touch by the back of the
hand
C Uniform additional components,
quick mounting using snap-on and
snap-in mechanism on site
C Separate switch position indication
C Variable labeling system
C Handle locking device effectively
prevents unauthorized operation of
the handle
C Disconnector characteristics acc. to
DIN VDE 0660 Part 107
C Main switch characteristics acc. to
EN 60204
0.1
0.01
1
Features of miniature circuitbreakers
10
6
4
1
40
0.2
In practice, the new tripping characteristics with a thermal tripping of

I2 = 1.45 x In have the advantage of a
more simple and obvious assignment
of miniature circuit-breakers for cable
and line protection in case of overload. The only condition is now:
I n I z.
20
Seconds
Seconds
Thus, the three characteristics B, C

and D can be certified. Characteristic
B replaces the previous characteristic
L. Characteristic G in accordance with
CEE 19, 1st edition is still defined,
however, it is replaced by characteristic C.
I2_06352c
60
40
60
40
0.01
1
1.5 2
3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20
30
Tripping characteristic D
C Application area is adapted to
strongly pulsating equipment, e.g.
transformers, solenoid valves, capacities
Tripping characteristics according to EN 60 898, DIN VDE 0641 Part 11
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 57
Low Voltage
Photo 6/63 Flexible and without tools
Features of 5SY
Easier, faster, more wiring space
C Identical terminals at the top and
bottom
C Connection of the feeder cable in
front of the busbar
C Larger and more easily accessible
wiring space for the feeder cable
C Comfortable insertion of the feeder
cables into the busbar
C Clear, visible and verifiable
connection of the feeder cables
C Universal infeed with busbar
mounting at the top or bottom
Photo 6/64 Shock-hazard protection with

obvious advantages
Photo 6/65 Easier, faster, more wiring space
Flexible and without tools

C Integrated, movable terminal
covers in the area of the feeder
cable entries
C With tightened screws, the terminals are completely enclosed
C Effective shock-hazard protection
even if fully grabbed
C VBG 4/BGV A2 requirements are
greatly exceeded
Shock-hazard protection with clear
advantages
C Manual rapid mounting and
dismounting system no need
for tools
C Rapid mounting and dismounting of
the MCB onto and from the standard mounting rails in accordance
with DIN EN 60715
C Devices can be replaced easily and
comfortably at any time
Photo 6/66 Removal from the assembly
Removal from the assembly

As a result of the combination of the
various features, the 5SY miniature
circuit-breakers can easily and rapidly
be removed from the assembly when
circuits have to be changed: It is no
longer necessary to remove the busbar. It just takes a moment to replace
a 5SY miniature circuit-breaker.
6/57
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 58
Product overview
Tripping
characteristic
Device
mounting
depth
[mm]
Rated
currents In
Standards
5SJ6
70
6 ... 32 A
EN 60898
5SY6
6 ... 80 A
C
D
Rated breaking
capacity
Energy limitation
class
Type of application
Functional
buildings
Residential
buildings
Industry
Version
Standard product range
0.3 ... 80 A
0.3 ... 63 A
6 000
3
High-performance
product range
5SY4
5SY7
5SY8
70
1 ... 80 A
EN 60898
10 000
3
6 ... 80 A
0.3 ... 80 A
0.3 ... 63 A
6 ... 63 A
0.3 ... 63 A
0.3 ... 63 A
0.3 ... 63 A
0.3 ... 63 A
15 000
3
EN 60947-2
25 kA
AC/DC product range

5SY5
70
6 ... 63 A
EN 60898
0.3 ... 63 A
10 000
3
High current product range

5SP4
70
80 ... 125 A
EN 60898
10 000
80 ... 125 A
80 ... 100 A
Power supply company

product range
5SP3
92
Table 6/15
Overview of miniature circuit-breaker product ranges
6/58
16 ... 100 A
DIN VDE 0645 25 000
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 59
Low Voltage
Technical data
Number of poles
1
1+N
2
3
3+N
4
Rated voltage
5SY4
5SY5
5SY6
5SY7
5SY8
5SP4
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
V AC
V DC
230 / 400
V AC / DC
V/Pol DC
V AC
220 / 440
24
60 1)
440
220
60
10
15
acc. to EN 60947-2
kA AC
kA DC
kA AC
Coordination of insulation
Rated insulation voltage
V AC
250/440
Operational voltage
min.
max.
max.

acc. to EN 60898
Degree of pollution with

overvoltage category III
C
C
C
1)
15
10
25
Shock-hazard protection
acc. to DIN EN 50274
Main switch characteristics

acc. to EN 60204
Sealable in the final handle position

Device depth
acc. to DIN 43880
mm
70
IP00 acc. to DIN 40050, IP20 acc. to DIN 40050 for 5SY, IP40
when mounted in distribution board
Free of CFC and silicone
yes
Mounting
can be snapped onto 35 mm standard mounting rail (DIN EN 60715); additionally for
C 5SY: rapid mounting system operable without tools
C 5SP4: also screw mounting
Terminals
5SY combined terminals on both sides for simultaneous connection of busbars (pin-type version) and conductors
5SP4 tunnel terminals on both sides
Terminal tightening torque

recommended
Nm
2.5 ... 3
3 ... 3.5

solid and stranded
C upper terminal
C lower terminal
mm2
mm2
0.75 ... 35
0.75 ... 35
0.75 ... 50
0.75 ... 50
finely stranded with end sleeve

C upper terminal
C lower terminal
mm2
mm2
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 35
0.75 ... 35
Different cable cross sections can be clamped

simultaneously; details available on request
Supply connection
any, adhere to the specified polarity for DC applications
Mounting position
any
Service life
average of 20,000 operations at rated load
Ambient temperature
25 ... +45, temporarily +55, max. 95% humidity, storage temperature: 40 ... +75
m/s2
60 at 10 Hz ... 150 Hz acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Resistance to vibration
1)
2)
2)
6 cycles acc. to IEC 60068-2-30
Battery charging voltage 72 V

10,000 operations for 5SY5, 40 A, 50 A and 63 A at rated load
Table 6/16
Technical data for miniature circuit-breakers
6/59
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 60
Technical data
Number of poles
5SJ6
230 / 400
V AC / DC
V DC / Pol
V AC
24
60
250

acc. to EN 60898
acc. to DIN VDE 0645
kA AC
kA AC
Coordination of insulation
Rated insulation voltage
V AC
250
min.
max.
max.
C
C
V AC
Operational voltage
5SP3
1
1+N
Rated voltage
5SY6 -.KV
Degree of pollution
with overvoltage category III
230
220 / 440
440
25
690
2 / III
3 / IV
Shock-hazard protection
acc. to DIN EN 50274
Main switch characteristics

acc. to EN 60204
Sealable in the final handle position
Device depth
acc. to DIN 43880
mm
70
92
IP20 acc. to DIN 40050 for 5SP3, IP40 when mounted in distribution board
yes
Mounting
can be snapped onto 35 mm (DIN EN 60715) standard mounting rail;

additionally for 5SP3: also screw mounting
Terminals
5SP3 saddle terminals on both sides, 5SJ6, 5SY6 ...-.KV tunnel terminals on both sides

Solid and stranded
C upper terminal
C lower terminal
mm2
mm2
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 16
0.75 ... 16
max. 70
max. 70
Finely stranded with end sleeve

C upper terminal
C lower terminal
mm2
mm2
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 16
0.75 ... 16
max. 50
max. 50
Supply connection
any
Mounting position
any
Service life
average of 20,000 operations at rated load
Ambient temperature
25 ... +45, temporarily +55, max. 95% humidity, storage temperature: 40 ... +75
m/ s2
60 at 10 Hz ... 150 Hz acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Resistance to vibration
6 cycles acc. to IEC 60068-2-30
Tabelle 6/17 Technical data for miniature circuit-breakers
6/60
2)
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 61
Low Voltage
6.2.5 Residual-CurrentOperated Circuit-Breakers

Protection against hazardous
shock currents according to DIN
VDE 0100 Part 410
Application
C Protection against indirect contact
(indirect personnel protection). Protection is provided by disconnecting hazardous high contact voltages
caused by a short circuit to exposed conductive parts of equipment.
C When using RCCBs with In 30 mA.
extensive protection from direct
contact (direct personnel protection) is given as supplementary
protection via disconnection when
live parts are touched.
Protective action
While RCCBs for rated fault current
In 30 mA provide protection
against indirect contact, the installation of RCCBs with In 30 mA provides a high level of supplementary
protection against unintentional direct
contact with live parts.
Photo 6/67 RCCB 4-pole
Figure 6/15 shows the physiological

responses of the human body when
current flows through it, classified
into current ranges. Current/time values in range 4 are dangerous, as they
can initiate heart fibrillation which can
result in death.
The RCCB tripping range with a rated
fault current of 10 mA and 30 mA is
indicated. The average release time
lies between 10 ms and 30 ms. The
admissible tripping time in accordance with DIN VDE 0664 or EN 61 008
or IEC 1008 of max. 0.3 s (300 ms) is
not required. Residual-current-operated circuit-breakers with a rated fault
current of 10 mA or 30 mA provide
reliable protection even if current
flows through a person as a result of
unintentional direct contact with live
parts. This level of protection cannot
be achieved by any other comparable
means of protection against indirect
contact.
Thus, a current can only flow through

a human body if two faults are present or if the person accidentally
touches live parts.
If a person directly touches live parts,
two resistances determine the level
of the current flowing through the human body, i.e. the internal resistance
of the person RM and the local ground
leakage resistance RSt (see Fig. 6/17).
For the purpose of accident prevention, the worst case must be assumed
which means that the local ground
leakage resistance is almost zero.
The resistance of the human body is
dependent on the current path. Measurements resulted, for example, in a
resistance of 1000 for a hand-tohand or hand-to-foot current path.
A fault voltage of 230 V AC results in
a current of 230 mA for a hand-tohand current path.
Wherever RCCBs are used, an appropriate earth terminal must also be

provided and connected to all of the
equipment and parts of the system.
Photo 6/68 RCCB-protected outlet for a

higher protective level
Photo 6/69 RCCB 2-pole
6/61
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 62
Range a
Usually, the
effect is not
perceived.
10 mA 30 mA
10000
ms
t
2000
Range s
Usually, there
are no noxious
effects.
1000
500
1
200
100
50
Fire protection according to

DIN VDE 0100-482
Application
When using residual-current-operated
circuit-breakers with In 300 mA,
protection against electrically ignited
fires caused by insulation faults.
20
0.1 0.2 0.5 1
5 10 20
Range d
Usually, no
danger of
50 100 200 500 1000 mA 10000 heart fibrillation.
IM
IM
: Shock current
Range f
Heart fibrillation
danger.
t : Duration
Fig. 6/15
Protective action
For locations exposed to the hazards
of fire, DIN VDE 0100-482 specifies
measures to prevent fires that might
result from insulation failures.
Rated current range according to IEC 60479
FI
Taking into account all external influences, the electrical equipment must
be selected and mounted in such a
way that their heating during normal
operation and the predictable increase of temperature in case of a
fault cannot cause a fire.
L1
N
PE
RA
FI
L1
N
PE
RA
PE conductor
interrupted
and insulation
failure in the
equipment
Damaged
insulation
L1
N
PE
RA
FI
Conductors
interchanged
This may be achieved by a suitable

type of equipment or by additional
protective measures during the installation.
In TN and TT systems, there are
therefore RCCBs with a rated fault
current of 300 mA maximum additionally requested for locations exposed to the hazards of fire. Where
resistive faults can cause a fire (e.g.
in the case of overhead radiation
heatings with surface heating elements), the rated fault current must
not exceed 30 mA.
Fig. 6/16
R St
R St
R St
Examples for unintentional direct contact
L1
L2
L3
N
The additional protection against fire

provided by RCCBs should be used
not only at locations with increased
fire hazard but in general.
FI
RM
IM
R St
Photo 6/70 RCCB

AC/DC current sensitive
6/62
Fig. 6/17
Schematic drawing: Additional

protection when directly touching
live parts
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 63
Low Voltage
L1 L2 L3 N
L1 L2 L3
3 x 230 V AC + N
3 x 230 V AC
3 x 400 V AC + N
3 x 400 V AC
Fig. 6/18
TN system
3-pole connection
4-pole RCCBs (Fig. 6/18) can also be
used in 3-pole supply networks. In this
case, the device must be connected at
the terminals 1, 3, 5 and 2, 4, 6 (Fig.
6/18). The functionality of the test facility is only ensured if a jumper is inserted between the terminals 3 and N.
However, if an insulation fault causes a

fault current to flow, this balance is disturbed and a residual magnetic field remains in the transformer core. This produces a voltage in the secondary winding, which, via the release and the
contact latching mechanism, disconnects the circuit with the insulation
fault. This tripping principle works independently of the supply voltage or an
auxiliary supply. This is the prerequisite
for the high level of protection which
RCCBs provide according to IEC/EN
61008 (VDE 0664). Only this ensures
that the full protective function of the
RCCB is maintained, even in case of a
network fault, e.g. if a phase conductor
fails or the neutral conductor is interrupted.
Application
RCCBs can be used in all three
distribution network types
(DIN VDE 0100-410) (Fig. 6 /19).
In the IT system, a tripping upon the
first fault is not required since this can
not yet cause a dangerous touch voltage. An insulation monitoring device
has to be provided so that the first fault
is signaled by an audible or visual signal
and the fault cleared as quickly as possible. The tripping is only requested in
the case of a second fault. Depending
on the grounding, the tripping conditions of the TN orTT system must be
observed. The RCCB can also be used
as a suitable circuit-breaker here; each
current-using equipment must then be
equipped with its own RCCB.
TN-C
TN-S
TT system
L1
L2
L3
N
RCCB
In a fault-free system, the magnetizing effects of current carrying conductors in the summation current
transformer cancel each other out in
accordance with Kirchhoffs law.
There is no residual magnetic field
which could induce a voltage in the
secondary winding.
PE
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
PE
IT system (limited application)
PE
Fig. 6/19
L1
L2
L3
RCCB
The summation current involves all of

the conductors, i.e. also the neutral
conductor, which are necessary for
current conduction.
RCCB
RCCB
PEN
We recommend that the functionality

of the RCCB is tested after installation and at regular intervals (about
twice a year).
Furthermore, other standards or regulations (e.g. accident prevention regulations) which specify test intervals
must also be met. The minimum operating voltage for the test function is
typically 100 V AC (5SM series).
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
RCCB
An RCCB essentially comprises 3

major functional groups:
1. Summation current transformer
for fault current detection
2. Release to convert the electrical
measured value into a mechanical
release
3. Contact-latching mechanism with
the contacts
Test button
Each RCCB has a test button which
can be used to check its operability.
When the test button is pressed, an
artificial fault current is produced and
the RCCB must trip.
RCCB
Design and mode of operation of

residual-current-operated circuitbreakers
Connection of RCCBs
PE
RCCB; possible application in all

three network types
Current types
When using electronic components
in household appliances and in industrial plants for equipment with an
ground terminal (protection class I),
non-sinusoidal fault currents may
flow through an RCCB in case of an
insulation fault.
6/63
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 64
Current type
Current
waveform
Tripping current 1)
Proper functioning of
RCCBs type
AC
AC fault currents
0.5 1.0 In
pulsating DC fault currents

(pos. and neg. half-waves)
0.35 1.4 In
C
C
C
C
0.25 1.4 In
0.11 1.4 In
Half-wave current with superimposed smooth 6 mA DC current
max. 1.4 In+ 6 mA
Smooth DC current
0.5 2.0 In
Phased half-wave currents

Phase control angle
1) Tripping
Table 6/18
90el
135el
currents acc. to IEC /EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10); for smooth DC currents acc. to VDE 0664, Part 100.
Tripping currents for RCCBs
The standards for RCCBs include

additional requirements and test
specifications for fault currents which
become zero or almost zero within
one period of the supply frequency.
RCCBs which trip on both sinusoidal
AC fault currents as well as on
pulsating DC fault currents have
the symbol
.
Three-phase bridge
connection 6-pulse
L1 L2 L3
Pulse current sensitive RCCBs cannot

detect such DC fault currents and
cannot trip. Furthermore, this has a
negative impact on their tripping
function.
This is why electrical equipment which
generates such fault currents when
faults occur may not be operated together with pulse current sensitive
RCCBs on electrical supply networks.
6/64
Load current
IB
L1 L2 L3
IB
IB
Fault current
I
RCCBs which additionally trip on

smooth DC currents (type B) have
the symbol
.
DC fault currents
In industrial electrical equipment, circuits are being increasingly used
where smooth DC fault currents or
fault currents with a low residual ripple may flow in the event of a fault
condition. This is shown in Fig. 6/20
with the example of a piece of electrical equipment with a three-phase
rectifier circuit. Electrical equipment
includes devices such as frequency
converters, medical devices (e.g.
x-ray generators, CT systems) and
UPS systems.
Three-phase star
connection
I
t
Fig. 6/20
Block diagram with fault location
A protective measure would be protective separation, which, however, can

only be implemented using heavy and
expensive transformers. A technically
optimum and cost-effective solution is
obtained by using the new AC/DC sensitive RCCBs. This RCCB type (type B)
is specified in DIN EN 50178 (DIN VDE
0160) Electronic equipment for use in
power installations
.
AC/DC sensitive protective device
Design
The basis for the AC/DC sensitive
protective device is a pulse-currentsensitive protective switching unit
with a release which operates independently of the line supply, supplemented by an additional unit which
senses smooth DC fault currents.
Figure 6/21 shows the basic design.
The W1 summation current transformer monitors, as before, the electrical system or plant for AC and pulsating fault currents. The summation
current transformer W2 senses the
smooth DC fault currents, and transmits a disconnection command to release A via electronic unit E when a
fault occurs.
Operating principle
In order to ensure a highly reliable
supply, the power for the electronic
unit is tapped from all of the three
phase conductors and the neutral
conductor. Furthermore, it is dimensioned to ensure that the electronics
still operate when the voltage is reduced to 70% (e.g. between phase
conductors and neutral conductor).
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 65
Low Voltage
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
1
M
A
W1
This consequently ensures tripping

whenever a smooth DC fault current
is present; this also applies in case of
faults in the supply network, e.g.
when the neutral conductor is interrupted. Even in the extremely improbable case of a failure of the two
phase conductors and the neutral
conductor, and if the remaining intact
phase conductor represents a fire
hazard due to a ground fault, protection is still provided by the pulse-current-sensitive breaker part, which reliably trips due to its supply-independent release.
RCCBs of type B are suitable for use
in an AC system with 50/60 Hz ahead
of input circuits with rectifiers. They
are not designed for use in DC systems and in systems with operating
frequencies deviating from 50/60 Hz.
They can be used for the detection
and tripping of fault currents which
might arise in the power supply
units (e.g. frequency converters,
computer tomographs) of threephase loads with electronic components (rectifiers).
In this electronic equipment, apart
from the described fault current
forms (AC fault currents, pulsating
and smooth DC fault currents), there
might also arise AC fault currents of
very different frequencies as, for example, on the outgoing side of a frequency converter.
For RCCBs of type B, the device regulation VDE 0664 Part 100 defines requirements for frequencies up to 2 kHz.
At the moment, statements as to the
danger of heart fibrillation (up to 1 kHz)
for frequencies exceeding 100 Hz can
only be made in a very limited way. Safe
statements as to further effects and the
influence on the human organism (thermal, electrolytic) are not possible.
W2
Release
M Mechanical system
of the protective device
E
Electronics to trip in the event

of smooth DC fault currents
Test facility
Secondary winding
W1 Summation CT to
sense sinusoidal fault
currents
W2 Summation CT to
sense smooth DC fault
currents
Fig. 6/21
Block diagram of an AC/DC current sensitive RCCB
Based on these facts, protection for

the case that a person directly
touches live parts is only possible for
frequencies up to 100 Hz. For higher
frequencies, the method of protection to be implemented is protection
against indirect contact with live
parts.
Configuration
When designing and installing electrical systems, it must be ensured that
electrical devices which can generate
smooth DC fault currents when a
fault occurs have their own circuit
with an AC/DC sensitive RCCB (see
Fig. 6 /22).
It is not permissible to branch circuits
with these types of electrical devices
to pulse-current-sensitive RCCBs.
Consumers which can generate
smooth DC fault currents under fault
conditions would then adversely affect pulse-current-sensitive RCCB
tripping.
The tripping conditions are defined
according to DIN VDE 0664 Part 100
(for RCCBs of type B) and correspond
to those of type A for AC and pulsating fault currents. The tripping values
for smooth DC fault currents were
defined in this device regulation taking into account the current compati-
bility characteristics according to

IEC 60479 for the range 0.5- to 2.0times the rated fault current.
AC/DC sensitive RCCBs have the
symbols
.
Note:
Using the available auxiliary current
switches, the RCCBs can be integrated into the building management
system via an instabus EIB or
AS-Interface bus or PROFIBUS.
Selective tripping
Residual-current-operated circuitbreakers normally have an instantaneous release. As a consequence, an
RCCB series connection which is to
selectively disconnect in case of
faults will not work. To achieve selectivity when RCCBs are connected in
series, the serially connected devices
must be graded both with regard to
the release time as well as to the
rated fault current. Selective RCCBs
have a tripping delay.
Furthermore, selective RCCBs must
have an increased surge withstand
strength of at least 3 kA according to
IEC /EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10).
Siemens devices have a surge withstand strength of 5 kA.
Selective RCCBs have the symbol S .
6/65
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 66
Wh
I n = 300 mA
FI
FI
Fig. 6/22
I n = 30 mA
I n = 30 mA
I n = 30 mA
FI
I n = 30 mA
FI
FI
I n = 300 mA
FI
Configuration of circuits
Sub-distribution
FI
board
Main distribution
board
SIGRES RCCBs are marked with

the symbol i .
FI
FI
selective version
Upstream RCCB
for selective tripping
1)
instantaneous/short-time delayed K
Downstream RCCB
S
or
instantaneous short-time
K
delayed
In
Tripping time
(at 5 In)
In
Tripping time Tripping time

(at 5 In)
(at 5 In)
300 mA
500 mA
1000 mA
60110 ms
10, 30 or 100 mA
10, 30 or 100 mA
10, 30, 100, 300 or 500 mA
< 20 ms 1)
20< 40 ms
for RCCBs of type AC: < 40 ms
Table 6/19
Allocation of RCCBs
Table 6 /19 shows a possible grading

of RCCBs for selective tripping when
the RCCBs are connected in series
without or with short-time delay.
Short-time delayed tripping
Electrical devices which cause high
leakage currents at switch-on (e.g.
as a result of transient fault currents
which flow between the phase conductor and PE via noise suppression
capacitors) can cause instantaneous
RCCBs to trip when they should not
if the leakage current exceeds the
rated fault current In of the RCCB.
6/66
For applications such as these, where

it is either not possible or only partially possible to eliminate such fault
sources, short-time delayed RCCBs
can be used. These devices have a
minimum tripping time of 10 ms, i.e.
they will not trip in case of a 10 ms
fault current impulse. Here, the
tripping conditions according to
IEC/EN 61008-1 (VDE 0664, Part 10)
are maintained. The devices have an
increased surge withstand strength
of 3kA.
Short-time delayed RCCBs are
marked with the symbol K .
SIGRES RCCBs for aggravated

ambient conditions i
Our SIGRES RCCBs have been developed for the use of RCCBs in environments with an increased impact of
corrosive gas such as, for example,
C indoor swimming pools:
chloric gas atmosphere;
C agriculture: ammonia;
C building site distribution boards,
chem. industry: nitrogen oxides
[NOx], sulfur dioxide [SO2]
With the patented active condensation protection, a clear increase of

the service life is achieved.
The following points have to be
taken into account when using
the SIGRES RCCBs:
C The must always be supplied from
the bottom at the terminals 2/N or
2/4/6/N.
C Prior to insulation tests of the installation system with voltages exceeding 500 V, the SIGRES RCCB
must be deactivated or the cables
on the supply side (bottom) have to
be disconnected.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 67
Low Voltage
Rated current
of RCCB
RCCBs with N-connection

on the left side
Since the RCCBs are usually located
on the left side of the miniature circuit-breakers but have the N-conductor connection on the right side, the
continuous busbar connection is disturbed. RCCBs in connection with
MCBs therefore require a special
busbar. To enable the customer to always use standard busbars, four-pole
RCCBs are also offered with an Nconnection on the left side. The installation habit with the RCCB on the
left side of the MCB using standard
busbar connections can thus be
retained.
Breaking capacity, short-circuit
capacity
According to the regulations for installation, which are specified in DIN
VDE 0100 Part 410 (protection against
hazardous shock currents), RCCBs
may be used in all three network
types (TN, TT and IT systems). If the
neutral conductor is used as protective conductor in TN systems, shortcircuit-type fault currents may flow in
the event of a fault. Thus, RCCBs together with a back-up fuse must have
Maximum permissible
short-circuit back-up
fuse LV HRC, DIAZED,
NEOZED, utilization category gL/gG for RCCB
125 V
400 V AC
A
500
800
800
800
800
800
800
1250
63
100
100
100
100
100
100
125
63
63
63
630
63
500 V AC
Type A
16 ... 40
63
80
25
40
63
80
125
2 MW
2.5 MW
2.5 MW
4 MW
4 MW
4 MW
4 MW
4 MW
Type B
25 ... 63
Table 6/20
8 MW
Rated breaking capacity/short-circuit strength
Stirn
Kenngren eines Stromstoes nach

DIN VDE 0432 Teil 2
TS Stirnzeit in s
T r Rckenhalbwertzeit in s
0 1 Nennbeginn
Im Scheitelwert
Scheitel
%
100
90
Rcken
Im
Versions for 50 to 400 Hz

Due to their mode of operation, the
standard versions of the RCCBs are
designed for the maximum efficiency
in the 50/60 Hz system. The device
specifications and tripping conditions
also refer to this frequency. With an
increasing frequency the sensitivity
decreases. To be able to realize an effective residual-current protection for
applications in systems up to 400 Hz
(e.g. industry), suitable devices have
to be used. Such RCCBs fulfill the
tripping conditions up to the stated
frequency and offer appropriate
protection.
Rated breaking
capacity Im acc.
to IEC/EN 61008
(VDE 0664) at a 35 mm
grid clearance
50
10
0
01
TS
Tr
Fig. 6/23
Surge current wave 8/20 s (8 s front time; 20 s time to half-value on tail)
an appropriate short-circuit strength.

Tests have been defined for this purpose. The short-circuit strength of the
combination must be specified on
the devices.
Siemens RCCBs have, together with
an appropriate back-up fuse, a shortcircuit strength of 10,000 A. In accordance with the VDE standards, this
corresponds to the highest possible
level of short-circuit strength.
Details about the rated breaking capacity in accordance with IEC /EN
61008 and the maximum permissible
short- circuit back-up fuse for RCCBs
are shown in Table 6/20.
Surge strength
During thunderstorms, atmosphericrelated overvoltage conditions may
enter a system or electric installation
via the overhead power lines in the
form of travelling waves and thus the
RCCBs are tripped. To prevent unintended disconnections, pulse-currentsensitive RCCBs must pass special
tests to prove surge withstand
strength. A surge current of the standardized surge current wave 8/20 s
is used for testing. Siemens pulsecurrent-sensitive RCCBs have a surge
withstand strength of 1000 A.
6/67
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 68
RCCBs
RCCB, type A1 1), 16 ... 125 A

instantaneous tripping,
surge strength > 1 kA
Number Rated
of poles current In
A
Rated fault
current In
mA
MW Auxiliary
switch,
mountable
N-connection on the
right
left
10, 30
30, 100, 300
30, 100, 300
2.5
30, 300
500
30, 300
100, 500
30, 300
100, 500
30, 300
30, 100, 300, 500
30
16
25
40
63
80
25
40
63
K short-time delayed,
S selective,
2
4
80
125
25
40
63
63
40
63
125
SIGRES RCCB, type A1), for aggravated ambient conditions
2
25
40
63
80
4
25
40
63
80
4
63
S selective,
RCCB, type A1), 500 V
4
25
40
63
RCCB, type A1), 50 ... 400 Hz
4
25
40
>N<, AC/DC sensitive, type B2)
4
25
40
63
S selective, surge strength > 5 kA
63
1)
30, 100
100, 300
100, 300
100, 1000
300
300, 500
2.5
4
30
30
2.5
30
30, 300
30
300
30, 300
30
30, 300
fixed
fixed
fixed
fixed
300
mounted
mounted
mounted
mounted
= Type A for AC and pulsating fault currents
2)
= Type B for AC fault currents, pulsating and smooth DC fault currents
Table 6/21
Overview of RCCB product range
6/68
*1 MW = modular width 18 mm
>N< = device mounting depth 55 mm
70 mm mounting depth = 70 mm device mounting depth
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 69
Low Voltage
RCCBs
Number Rated
of poles current In
A
RCCB modules for 5SY4, 5SY6, 5SY7, 5SY8 MCBs

2
2
3
4
K short-time delayed,
S selective,
4
2
3
4
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
... 16
... 40
... 63
... 40
... 63
... 40
... 63
... 40
... 63
... 40
... 63
... 63
... 63
RCCB modules for 5SP4 MCBs2)

2
80 ... 100
4
80 ... 100
S selective,
2
80 ... 100
4
80 ... 100
RCCB protected outlets
for installation on mounting box,
2
16
equipped with RCCB and 2 SCHUKO outlets
Molded-plastic enclosure, equipped
2
16
with RCCB and SCHUKO outlet
RCCB protected outlet for an increased protection level
16
SCHUKO outlet DELTA profil titanium white 2
RCCB/MCB 6 ... 40 A; type A1)
Rated breaking capacity 6 kA
2
6
Characteristics B and C
10
6 000
3
13
16
20
25
32
40
Rated breaking capacity 10 kA
2
6
Characteristics B and C
10
10 000
3
13
16
20
25
32
40
1)
Rated fault
current In
mA
MW Additional
components,
mountable
10
30, 300
30, 300, 500
30, 300
30, 300, 500
30, 300
30, 300, 500
30
2
2
300
300, 500, 1000

300, 500, 1000
3
3
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
30, 300
30, 300
300
300, 1000
3.5
5
3.5
5
at
at
at
at
3
3
3
Type
(Typ A)1)
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
10, 30
10
10, 30
10, 30, 300
30, 300
10, 30, 300
30, 300
= Type A for AC and pulsating fault currents
Table 6/22
Overview of RCCB product range
6/69
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 70
Technical data
Standards
IEC / EN 61008, VDE 0664 Part 10; IEC / EN 61543, VDE 0664 Part 30
IEC / EN 61009, VDE 0664 Part 20
Versions
2-pole and 4-pole
Rated voltages Un
AC V
125230
230400
500
Rated currents In
16, 25, 40, 63, 80, 125
Rated fault currents In
mA
10, 30, 100, 300, 500, 1000
Enclosure
5060 Hz
5060 Hz
5060 Hz
gray molded plastic (RAL 7035)
Terminals
at
at
at
at
In
In
In
In
=
=
=
=
16 A, 25 A, 40 A
63 A, 80 A
25 A, 40 A, 63 A, 80 A
125 A
Cable cross
section
mm2
1.0 ... 16
1.5 ... 25
1.5 ... 25
2.5 ... 50
Terminal
tightening torque,
recommended Nm
2.5 ... 3,0
2.5 ... 3,0
2.5 ... 3,0
3.0 ... 3,5
5SM3, tunnel terminals with wire

protection on both sides, lower
combined terminal for simultaneous
connection of busbars and conductors
at 2 MW
at 2.5 MW
at 4 MW
5SZ, tunnel terminals with wire

protection on both sides
In = 25 A, 40 A, 63 A
Screw terminals with auxiliary switch
1.5 ... 25
0.75 ... 2,5
2.5 ... 3,0

0.6 ... 0,8
5SM2, tunnel terminals with wire protection
up to In = 63 A
In = 80 / 100 A
1.0 ... 25
6.0 ... 35
2.5 ... 3,0

3.0 ... 3,5
1.0 ... 25
2.5 ... 3,0
5SU1, tunnel terminals with wire

protection on both sides
Supply connection
optionally top or bottom (SIGRES: supplied from the bottom)
Mounting position
any
IP20 acc. to DIN VDE 0470 Part 1

IP40 when mounted in distribution board
IP54 when mounted in molded-plastic enclosure
Minimum operating voltage for

test facility function
AC V
with RCCB
16 A ... 80 A: 100,
125 A: 195
RCCB module
0,3...63 A 2- and 3-pole: 195,

4-pole: 100
80...100 A: 100
RCCB/MCB in two modular widths: 195
Device service life
> 10,000 operating cycles (electrical and mechanical)
Storage temperature
40 to + 75
Ambient temperature
5 to +45,
for versions marked
-25
: 25 to + 45
Resistance to climate acc. to IEC 60068-2-30
28 cycles (55 C; 95% rel. humidity)
yes
Table 6/23 Technical data for RCCBs
6/70
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 71
Low Voltage
6.2.6 Lightning Current and

Surge Arresters
Lightning current and overvoltage
protection why?
Today, high-performance information
systems are the backbone of modern
industrial society. Any malfunction or
system breakdown could have farreaching consequences. This may
even result in the bankruptcy of an industrial enterprise or service provider.
The causes of faults can be manifold,
with electromagnetic interferences
playing an important part here. Considering our highly technologized,
electromagnetic environment, however, it is no longer wise to wait for
the mutual interference of electric
and electronic equipment and systems and then take action to remedy
the fault at considerable expense. It
is necessary to plan and implement
preventive measures in advance that
reduce the risk of interferences,
faults and destruction.
Nevertheless, damage statistics of
electronics insurance companies
show worrying figures: more than a
quarter of all damage cases are
caused by overvoltages due to electromagnetic interference (see Fig.
6/24).
Causes of overvoltages
According to their causes, overvoltages are filed in two categories:
C LEMP (lightning electromagnetic
impulse) overvoltages that are
caused by atmospheric impact (e.g.
direct lightning strike, electromagnetic lightning fields)
Lightning current arrester

Class I (B)
SEMP (switching electromagnetic

impulse) overvoltages that are
caused by switching operations
(e.g. breaking short circuits, operational switching of loads).
Overvoltages due to a thunderstorm
are caused by direct/close strikes or
remote strikes of lightning (Fig. 6/26).
Direct or close strikes of lightning
are lightning strikes into the lightning
protection system of a building or the
electrically conductive systems leading into the building (e.g. low-voltage
supply, telecommunications and control lines). The resulting surge currents and surge voltages are particularly dangerous for the system to be
protected, with regard to the current/voltage amplitude and energy
content involved.
In the event of a direct or close lightning strike, overvoltages (Fig. 6/26)
are caused by the voltage drop at the
surge grounding resistor and the resulting raise of the ground potential
of the building in relation to the far
surroundings. This means the highest
stressing for electric systems in
buildings.
Combi-arrester
Class I (B) and II (C)
Surge arrester
Class II (C)
Surge arrester
Class III (D)
Accessories
Photo 6/71
Product overview
6/71
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 72
The characteristic parameters of the

surge current present (peak value,
current rise speed, load content, specific energy) can be described by the
surge current waveform 10/350 s
(Fig. 6/25). They have been defined in
international and national standards
as the test current for components
and equipment protecting against direct lightning strikes.
In addition to the voltage drop at the
surge grounding resistor, overvoltages are generated in the electric
building installation and the systems
and equipment connected to it by the
inductive effect of the electromagnetic lightning field (Fig. 6/26, case
1b).
Negligence
36.1 %
Other
1.2 %
6/72
5.7 %
Elementary
27.4 %
Water,
fire
Overvoltage,
lightning discharge,
switching operations
Fig. 6/24
Damage causes to electronic equipment in the year 2000, analysis of 8,400 damage
cases
80
i [kA]
The energy of these induced overvoltages and of the resulting pulse

currents is far lower than the one of
the direct lightning surge current, it is
therefore described by the surge current waveform 8/20 s (Fig. 6/25).
Components and equipment that
need not conduct currents resulting
from direct lightning strikes are therefore tested with such 8/20 s surge
currents.
Lightning strikes are called remote if
they occur at a farer distance to the
object to be protected, or strike
medium-voltage overhead lines, or
occur as cloud-to-cloud lightning discharges in the immediate vicinity of
such overhead lines (Fig. 6/26, cases
2a, 2b and 2c). Similar to induced
overvoltages, the effects of remote
strikes of lightning to the electric
building installation are handled by
components and equipment which
have been dimensioned according to
the surge current waveform 8/20 s.
12.9 % Theft,
vandalism
16.7 %
60
40
20
2
0
0 80
200
fmax [kA]
600
800
t [s]
Waveform [s]
Q [As]
W/R [J/]
Test surge current for

1 lightning current arrester 75
10/350
37.5
1.5 x 106
Test surge current for

2 surge arrester
8/20
0.27
2.75 x 103
Fig. 6/25
75
Test surge currents
Overvoltages caused by switching

operations are, for example, generated by:
The disconnection of inductive
loads (e.g. transformers, reactors,
motors)
400
350
Arc initiation and interruption (e.g.

arc welding equipment)
Fuse tripping
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 73
Low Voltage
The effects of switching operations in

the electrical installation are also simulated by surge currents of the waveform 8/20 s under test conditions.
Lightning
protection zone
Definition
0A
Zone in which objects are exposed to direct lightning strikes and

must therefore be capable of carrying the entire lightning current.
The undamped electromagnetic field is present here.
0B
Zone in which objects are not exposed to direct lightning strikes,

in which, however the undamped electromagnetic field is
present.
Zone in which objects are not exposed to direct lightning strikes

and currents are reduced as compared to zone 0A. In this zone,
the electromagnetic field may be damped dependent on the
shielding measures taken.
2, 3
If a large-scale reduction of the conducted currents and/or the

electromagnetic field is required, subsequent zones must be
established. Requirements to these zones must comply with
the required ambient zones of the system to be protected.
Protection scheme
To ensure continuous availability of
complex electric and IT systems even
in the event of a direct impact of
lightning, further measures for the
protection of electric and electronic
systems against overvoltage, based
on a lightning protection system for
the building, are required. It is important to take all causes of overvoltages
into account. To do so, the concept of
lightning protection zones, as described in IEC 61312-1 (DIN VDE 0185
Part 103), is applied (Fig. 6/27). The
building is divided into endangered
zones. According to the degree of
endangerment of these zones, the
equipment and components necessary for lightning and overvoltage
protection can then be determined
properly.
Part of an EMC-suitable lightning
protection zone concept is the outer
protection against lightning (including
lightning rods, roof conductors or air
termination network, arrester,
grounding), the equal potential bonding, the room shield and the overvoltage protection for the electrical and
IT network. Definitions apply as classified in the Table Definition of lightning protection zones.
Table 6/24
Definition of lightning protection zones
Definition of lightning protection

zones
In accordance with the requirements
and burdens placed on surge protective devices, they are categorized as
lightning current arresters, surge arresters and combined arresters.
The highest requirements are placed
on the arresting capability of lightning
current arresters and combined arresters, which perform the transition
from lightning protection zone 0A to 1
or 0A to 2. These arresters must be
capable of conducting partial lightning currents of waveform 10/350 s
several times without being destroyed in order to prevent the
ingress of destructive partial lightning
currents into the electrical building installation. At the transition point of
lightning protection zone 0B to 1,
or downstream of the lightning current arrester at zone transition point

1 to 2 and higher, surge arresters are
used to protect against overvoltages.
Their task is both to reduce the residual current/voltage quantities of the
upstream protective levels even further and to suppress the overvoltages induced or generated in the
installation itself.
The above described lightning and
overvoltage protective measure at
the borders of the lightning protection zones equally applies to the electrical and the IT network. By summation of the measures defined in the
EMC-compatible concept of lightning
protection zones, continuous availability of modern infrastructure systems can be achieved.
6/73
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 74
Direkt/close lightning strike

Strike into outer lightning
protection system, process frame
(in industrial plants), cables etc.
2b
2a
1a Voltage drop at the surge

grounding resistor RS
1b Induced voltage in loop
1
20 kV
L1
L2
L3
PEN
2c
Remote lightning strike
2a Lightning strike into mediumvoltage overhead lines
1b
IT network
Fig. 6/26
1b RS
2b Traveling surge waves

in overhead lines due
to cloud-to-cloud
lightnings
Power
network
2c Fields of the lightning channel
Causes for overvoltages during lightning discharges
LPZ 0A
LEMP
LPZ 0B
LPZ 1
LEMP
Room shield
Ventilation
LPZ 2
Terminal
LPZ 3
LEMP
LPZ 2
LPZ 0B
LPZ 0B
IT network
SEMP
Power
network
Fig. 6/27
The concept of lightning protection zones
6/74
Equipotential bonding as lightning

protection, lightning current arrester
Local equipotential bonding,
surge arrester
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 75
Low Voltage
Requirement classes of arresters

(SPD = surge protective devices:
lightning current/overvoltage
protective devices)
Rated surge voltage and overvoltage categories

6 kV
IV
Lightning current and overvoltage protection is only effective if the stipulated insulation strength of installation
sections is also taken into account
here. To do this, the withstand surge
voltage of the different overvoltage categories is matched with the protective
level Up of the different SPDs.
The international standard IEC 60664-1
(EN 60664-1) distinguishes four withstand surge voltage categories for lowvoltage equipment. The categories
listed in Table 6/25 apply to low-voltage
installations with nominal voltages of
230/400 V in particular.
The circuit diagram shown in Fig. 6/28,
Table 6/25 respectively, demonstrates
that the lightning current arresters and
surge arresters are divided into requirement classes dependent on their
location within the power system.
Siemens SPDs comply with the
following product standards:
C Germany (VDE 0675-6, 1996)
C International (IEC 61643-1, 1998)
C Italy (CEI EN 61643-11)
C Austria (VE/NORM E 8001)
Co-ordinated use of lightning
current and overvoltage arresters
In practice, arresters of the different
requirement classes are virtually connected in parallel. Owing to the different response characteristics, discharge capacity and protective tasks,
4 kV
III
HA
2.5 kV
II
1.5 kV
I
230/400 V
Protection
level
Fig. 6/28
B
<4 kV
C
D
none
<1.5 kV <1.3 kV
Requirement classes acc. to E DIN part 6/A1
Requirement classes
Category
Withstand
Description
surge voltage
IV
6 kV
For devices connected upstream of the distribution board
III
4 kV
For devices which are an integral part of the installation

(e.g. distribution cabinets)
II
2.5 kV
For equipment withstanding normal impulse voltages

(e.g. household appliances)
1.5 kV
For very sensitive equipment (e.g. electronic equipment)
Table 6/25
Stospannungskategorien
German Draft
Standard
VDE 0675-6
International
Standard
IEC 61643-1
European
Standard
EN 61643-11
Designation
Class B
Class I
Type 1
Class C
Class II
Type 2
Surge arrester for power

distribution
Class D
Class III
Type 3
Surge arrester for consumer
Table 6/26
Product standards: Categorization of surge protective devices (SPD)
6/75
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 76
kWh
Service
entry
Fig. 6/29
Electricity
meter
Lightning current
arrester
Surge
arrester 1
Surge
arrester n
Co-ordinated use of lightning current and surge arresters
the different arrester types must be

installed in the network in such a way
that the ratings of the individual
devices are not exceeded, which
ensures comprehensive protection.
To do so, an energetic evaluation is
required to ensure that a surge current always goes to the next upstream arrester if the affected arrester might be overloaded by this
surge current. This approach is called
energetic co-ordination. It must be
provided between arresters of Class I
(B) and II (C), and between arresters
of Class II and III (D). In the latter
case, energetic co-ordination has already been established if there is a
cable length of 5 m between the
Class II arrester and the Class III arrester. The co-ordination of SPDs of
Classes I and II will be discussed in
the following.
If an installation is stressed by lightning current, the surge arrester of
Class II (C) will respond first due to
its low protective level. These arresters provide a protective level of
< 1.5 kV. This voltage value does not
suffice to make the series gap of the
Class I lightning current arrester respond, which is connected in parallel,
as its response value is in the range
of 3.5 kV.
6/76
Interaction-limiting
reactor
Surge arrester
L1
L2
L3
N
Minimum cable lengths:
5 m for PE conductor not integrated in the cable
15 m for PE conductor integrated in the cable
l
Alternative:
Use of an interaction-limiting reactor
Mounting diagram
Circuit diagram
Interaction-limiting reactor
Interaction-limiting
reactor
Lightning
current
arrester
Lightning
current
arrester
Surge arrester
Fig. 6/30
Energetic co-ordination
Surge
arrester
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 77
Low Voltage
In order not to overload the Class II

arrester, an additional voltage drop of
approx. 2 kV must be induced on the
line between the B arrester and the C
arrester, which shall reach the response value of the series gap of the
lightning current arrester, when
added up to the protective level of
the surge arrester.
In high-current networks, the voltage
drop is attained by utilizing the existing cable impedances or by applying
bundled inductivities, so-called interaction-limiting reactors. Line inductivity depends on the cable routing of
the PE conductor. If the PE conductor

is wired in a common cable together
with L1, L2, L3 and N, a cable length
of 15 m and more is required to attain a sufficient level of inductivity
and the respective voltage drop. If
the PE conductor is wired separate
from the other conductors at a distance of 1 m or more, a cable length
of 5 m is sufficient. If these cable
lengths cannot be realized, additional
interaction-limiting reactors (5SD7
390-0/-1) must be used between arresters of Class I and Class II.
Line arrangement /
connection to ground
Conductor distribution
must be built in if
L1 - L2 - L3 - N
PE built into
different line
L1 - L2 - L3 - N
l<5m
L1 - L2 - L3 - N
PE built into
same line
L1 - L2 - L3 - N - PE
Table 6/27
PE
l < 15 m
Energetic co-ordination of lightning current arresters and surge arresters
F1
If the maximum possible system short

circuit current is lower than the maximum system follow current that can
be extinguished by the SPD, an upstream protective device is not necessary. Otherwise, a fuse or miniature
circuit-breaker must be installed. Rating information for the protective device is provided in the following sections.
The single-pole lightning current arrester 5SD7 315-0 and the combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 341-1 and
5SD7 344-0 have a follow current extinction capacity of 50 kA.
Co-ordinating an SPD with overcurrent protective devices shall
M
S
P
D
This characterizes the height of the

maximum system follow current that
the arrester itself is capable of breaking without the aid of an upstream
protective device, such as a miniature
circuit-breaker or fuse. The system follow current is caused by a deliberate
short-term short circuit that the lightning current arrester produces in order
to discharge the lightning current. This
means, the system follow current is a
short-circuit current with a frequency
of 50 Hz.
Co-ordination of SPDs with miniature-circuit breakers and fuses
F1
F
Follow current extinction capacity
S
P
D
C protect the SPD against overload

when excessive currents are
present
C ensure system availability
Fig. 6/31
Protection of surge arresters
C support the extinction of system

follow currents
6/77
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
Description
19:32 Uhr
Seite 78
Requirement
class
Product designation
Max. permissible Max. permissible

energy value
peak current
I2tmax
Combi-arrester
ip max
5SD7 343-0,
5SD7 344-0,
5SD7 343-1
600 kA s
18 kA
No protection necessary up to a shortcircuit current of 50 kA
1-pole lightning current

I
arrester with high follow
current extinction capacity
5SD7 315-0
600 kA2s
18 kA
No protection nec
essary up to a shortcircuit current of 50 kA
Encapsulated lightning
current arrester
5SD7 311-1, 5SD7 313-1
120 kA2s
10 kA
Open lightning
current arrester
5SD7 311-0
80 kA2s
13 kA
Surge arrester
II
5SD7
5SD7
5SD7
5SD7
5SD7
Table 6/28
I and II
Comment
300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 100 kA2s

302-2, 5SD7 303-2,
323-2, 5SD7 325-2,
327-2, 5SD7 324-2,
326-2
10 kA
Maximum permissible energy values and peak current values of surge protective devices
A co-ordination of the SPDs and fuse

or miniature circuit-breaker shall ensure that
C the maximum permissible peak current Ipmax and
C the maximum permissible energy
value I2tmax
of the SPD are not exceeded. This
way, damage to the SPD and hence,
danger for persons or property, is prevented.
Basically, two connection methods
can be distinguished:
C The protective device is integrated
in the connection line of the SPD.
When a miniature circuit-breaker or
fuse trips, power supply is maintained. We recommend using a signaling device to indicate that the
overvoltage protective function has
6/78
been isolated from supply and is

therefore not effective.
C As standard, protection is effected
by the standard protective device
integrated in the power distribution
system (e.g. service fuse). In this
case, the SPDs are only protected
by the system fuse. If this fuse
trips due to an SPD overload, the
installation is isolated from supply.
The fuse or miniature circuitbreaker to be used must be rated in
accordance with the line cross sections in the installation.
Maximum permissible arrester backup fuse ratings must always be taken
into account.
Flow chart for the co-ordination of

the SPD with the overvoltage
protective device
Power distribution within the installation is effected by circuit-breakers
and fuses in accordance with relevant
installation standards. If required,
lightning current or surge arresters
shall ensure protection against overvoltages by means of fuses or magneto-thermal switches.
The planning engineer may utilize the
system protection situated upstream
of the SPD or provide a series circuit
for the arrester.
The following flow chart describes
the procedure for choosing between
fuse and miniature circuit-breaker as
an overvoltage protective device: if a
fuse is used (recommended use), you
may directly refer to Tables 6/29 and
6/30 and ignore the flow chart.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 79
Low Voltage
Characteristic values of miniature circuit-breaker A
A
Icc eff
Establish effective short-circuit current Icc eff
S
P
D
Establish maximum value of ip and I2t

limited by protective device A
A = Protective device for network

B = Protective device for SPD
Icc eff = Short-circuit current
ip ip max3)
and
I2t and I2tmax3)
No
Yes
1)
No additional surge arrester

fuse required
Protection B required for the SPD
A
S
P
D
Miniature circuit-breaker
Back-up fuse
or
MCB?
Back-up fuse
Solution 1
2)
Breaker selection B with very high

In and isolating capacity so that
ip ip max3) and
I2t and I2tmax3)
Fuse selection B with very high In

and isolating capacity. Observe
maximum fuse values. Take
selectivity between protective
device A and fuse F (B) into account.
SPD protected by MCB (B)
SPD protected by back-up fuse F (B)
A
MCB (B)
F (B)
S
P
D
Solution 3
S
P
D
Solution 2
1)
Owing to an allocated cross-sectional element, line power supply can be quickly restored in case of a replacement of the surge protective device.
2)
Recommended, because fuses generate a lower voltage drop and ensure better protection.
3)
Please refer to Table 6/28 for values.
Fig. 6/32
Flow chart for the co-ordination of the SPD with an overvoltage protective device
6/79
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 80
Installation protected by miniature

circuit-breaker
The following tables list the conditions
required for protection against maxi-
Upstream
MCB
[A]
Lq1
Lq2
Lq3
because fuses ensure a lower voltage

drop and better protection.
mum currents, and the maximum

rated current of the fuse matching the
SPD. We recommend using fuses instead of magneto-thermal switches
Surge arrester
1-pole and multi-pole surge arresters
5SD7 315-01) 5SD7 313-1,

5SD7 311-1
5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 302-4, 5SD7 303-2,
5SD7 303-4, 5SD7 303-5, 5SD7 308-0, 5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 324-2,
5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2
Fuse F
Fuse F
[gL/gG]
[A]
16
2.5
2.5
16
Upstream
MCB
[A]
25
16
10
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
[mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [gL/gG]

2
Lq1
Lq2
Fuse F
[gL/gG]
[mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [A]
2
Lq3
32
10
10
16
16
50
16
16
16
up to 125
25
63
25
25
25
up to 160
32
10
10
10
80
35
35
35
up to 160
50
16
16
16
up to 160
63
25
25
25
up to 125
up to 160
80
35
25
25
up to 125
50
25
25
up to 125
100
50
125
35
50
35
35
35
160
95
35
35
up to 160
100
200
120
35
35
up to 160
125
50
25
25
up to 125
250
35
35
up to 160
160
95
25
25
up to 125
> 250
35
35
up to 160
200
120
25
25
up to 125
250
25
25
up to 125
> 250
25
25
up to 125
1)
Up to 50 kA, surge arrester 5SD7 315-0 does not require a fuse.
MCB
Lq1
MCB Lq1
Lq2
Lq2
S
P
D
Lq3
S
P
D
Lq3
F
Fuse
Lq1 Line cross section of the installation
Lq2 Discharge-line cross section to arrester

Lq3 Line cross section with connection to ground
Combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 343-1, 5SD7 344-0

Feed-through connection
Discharge connection
Upstream
MCB
Lq1 = Lq2
Lq3
[gL/gG]
[mm2]
16
2,5
2)
Upstream
MCB
Lq1
Lq2
Lq3
Fuse F
[mm2]
[gL/gG]
[mm2]
[mm2]
[mm2]
[gL/gG]
16
16
2,5
2,5
16
25
16
25
16
35
10
16
32
10
10
16
50
16
16
50
16
16
16
63
25
25
63
25
25
25
80
35
35
80
35
25
35
100
50
50
100
50
25
35
125
50
50
125
50
25
35
/
/
160
95
25
35
200
120
25
35
250
25
35
>250
25
35
2)
Follow current extinction capacity 50 kA.

/ = No discharge protection necessary.
Table 6/29
Technical data
6/80
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 81
Low Voltage
Installation protected by fuse
Upstream
fuse
[A]
Lq1
Lq2
Lq3
Surge arrester
1-pole and multi-pole surge arresters
5SD7 315-01) 5SD7 313-1,

5SD7 311-1
5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 302-4, 5SD7 303-2,
5SD7 303-4, 5SD7 303-5, 5SD7 308-0, 5SD7 323-2, 5SD7 324-2,
5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2
Fuse F
Fuse F
[gL / gG]
[A]
16
2.5
2.5
16
Upstream
fuse
[A]
25
16
10
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
[mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [gL / gG]

2
Lq1
Lq2
Fuse F
[gL / gG]
[mm ] [mm ] [mm ] [A]
2
Lq3
32
10
10
16
16
50
16
16
16
25
63
25
25
25
32
10
10
10
80
35
35
35
50
16
16
16
63
25
25
25
80
35
25
25
50
25
25
100
50
125
35
50
35
35
35
160
95
35
35
100
200
120
35
35
up to 160
125
50
25
25
250
35
35
up to 160
160
95
25
25
up to 125
250
35
35
up to 160
200
120
25
25
up to 125
250
25
25
up to 125
250
25
25
up to 125
1)
Up to 50 kA, surge arrester 5SD7 315-0 does not require any

fuses.
Lq1
Lq1
Lq2
F1
F1
Lq2
S
P
D
Lq3
S
P
D
Lq3
F
Fuse
Lq1 Line cross section of the installation
Lq2 Discharge-line cross section to arrester

Lq3 Line cross section with connection to ground
Combi-arresters 5SD7 343-0, 5SD7 343-1, 5SD7 344-0

Feed-through connection
Discharge connection
Upstream
MCB
Lq1 = Lq2
Lq3
[gL / gG]
[mm2]
16
2.5
2)
Upstream
MCB
Lq1
Lq2
Lq3
Fuse F
[mm2]
[gL / gG]
[mm2]
[mm2]
[mm2]
[gL / gG]
16
16
2.5
2.5
16
25
16
25
16
35
10
16
32
10
10
16
50
16
16
50
16
16
16
63
25
25
63
25
25
25
80
35
35
80
35
25
35
100
50
50
100
50
25
35
125
50
50
125
50
25
35
160
95
25
35
200
120
25
35
250
25
35
>250
25
50
2)
Follow current extinction capacity 50 kA.

/ = No discharge protection necessary.
Table 6/30
Technical data
6/81
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 82
TN-S system
L1
F1
L2
L3
N
F3
F2
Wh
Consumer
PE
PE
4 arresters,
Class C
4 arresters,
Class B
Power outlet with integrated

overvoltage protection,
Class D
* For feeding with a TN-C system,

the arrester between N and PE is omitted
TT system 3+1 wiring1)
L1
F1
L2
L3
L
F2
F3
Wh
Consumer
PE
3 arresters,
Class B
1 N/PE arrester,
Class B
PE
3 arresters,
Class C
Power outlet with integrated

overvoltage protection,
Class D
1 N/PE arrester,
Class C
For rating the protective devices F2 and F3, please refer to Tables 6/28 to 6/30.
If the lightning current and surge arrester are installed upstream of the RCCB,
an S differential must be provided.
1)
In the single-phase TT system, the circuit diagram is called 1+1 wiring
Fig. 6/33
Circuit diagrams overview
6/82
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 83
Low Voltage
Combi-arrester range of protection
Caution: The protection range of the combi-arrester covers
5 m! If the consumer is located more than 5 m (cable
length) away from the combi-arrester, an additional
overvoltage protection device must be provided for the
consumer.
MD
SD
Con Consumer
Con
MD = Main distribution
system
SD = Subdistribution
system
Combi-arrester
Surge arrester
Combi-arrester application in a combined main and subdistribution system

SD
Con
Con
Surge arrester
Power outlet with

integrated overvoltage
protection
SD
Con
Power outlet with
protection
Surge arrester
MD
SD
Con Consumer
Con
system
system
Combi-arrester
Surge arrester
multi-pole
Conventional installation using an interaction-limiting reactor
SD
Con
Con
Surge arrester
Power outlet with

protection
SD
Con
Surge arrester
Power outlet with

protection
MD + SD
Con
Con
Lightning
current
arrester
Fig. 6/34
Surge arrester
Power outlet with

protection
system
system
Circuit diagrams combi-arresters (application notes)
6/83
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 84
TN-C system
Version featuring 1-pole arresters
L3
L2
L1
3-pole version
L1
L2
L3
PE
PEN
a 3 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1

s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 (cut at 6-pole)
TN-S system
N
L3
L2
L1
3-pole version
N
L1
L2
L3
PE
PE

s Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1
a Arrester, type 5SD7 313-4

s Arrester, type 5SD7 311-1
d Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0
TT system
N
L3
L2
L1
3-pole version
N
L1
L2
L3
f
a
a
PE
PE
a
s
d
f
g
3 arresters, type 5SD7 311-1

through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
N/PE arrester, type 5SD7 318-1
Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 (cut at 2-pole)
Busbar, type 5SD7 361-1
Fig. 6/35
Circuit diagrams lightning current arresters, Class I (B)
6/84
a
s
d
f
Arrester, type 5SD7 313-1

Through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
N/PE arrester, type 5SD7 318-1
Busbar, type 5SD7 361-0
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 85
Low Voltage
TT system
3+1 wiring (with interaction-limiting reactors)
N
L2
L1
=
L1
=
L2
L3
L3
PE
3
1
4
3
1
1
1
2
2
arresters, type 5SD7 311-1

arrester, type 5SD7 318-1
interaction-limiting reactors
arresters, type 5SD7 300-2
arrester, type 5SD7 308-0
through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
busbar, type 5ST2 147
combs, type 5SD7 361-1
combs, type 5SD7 361-0
Caution!
The design of the combi-arrester ensures an energetic

co-ordination with the class II arresters without that an
interaction-limiting reactor would be required.
See solution shown in Fig. 6/39.
Note: To simplify these circuit diagrams, the fuses or magnetothermal switches have not been represented: for their use and
ratings please refer to co-ordination tables 6/29 and 6/30.
PE
Fig. 6/36
Circuit diagrams lightning current arresters, Class I (B)
TN-S system
Version featuring 1-pole surge arrester
N
Version featuring multi-pole surge arrester

PE
Fault alarm
L1
a
a
a a
a
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
a 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-2

Austria:
Fig. 6/37
TN system:
Surge arrester for a TN system
(type 5SD7 325-2 or
5SD7 326-2)
a 1 surge arrester, type 5SD7 326-2
Austria:
Circuit diagrams lightning current arresters, Class II (C)
6/85
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 86
TT system
Version featuring 1-pole surge arrester
Version featuring multi-pole surge arrester

PE
Fault alarm
L3
L2
L1
N
PE
a
a s
d d
d
L1
L2
L3
N
f
a 1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
d 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 302-2
f 1 busbar, type 5SD7 361-1 (cut at 5-pole)
Austria:
s 1 through-terminal, type 5SD7 360-0
& 3 surge arresters, type 5SD7 303-4
f 1 busbar, type 5SD7 361-0 (cut at 5-pole)
TN system:
Surge arrester for a TN system
(type 5SD7 325-2 or
5SD7 326-2)
Austria:
5SD7 300-2, 5SD7 301-2, 5SD7 302-2, 5SD7 303-2, 5SD7 323-2,
5SD7 324-2, 5SD7 325-2, 5SD7 326-2, 5SD7 327-2, 5SD7 328-2
F1
Miniature circuit-breaker
F1 >125 A gL/gG
F3 =125 A gL/gG
F3
On the arrester line
F1 >125 A gL/gG
F3
Note:
To simplify these circuit diagrams, the fuses or magnetothermal switches have not been represented: for their use
and ratings please refer to co-ordination tables 6/29 and 6/30.
Fig. 6/38
Circuit diagrams surge arresters, Class II (C)
6/86
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:32 Uhr
Seite 87
Low Voltage
SEC
F4
F5
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F6
F1F2F3
L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 N
H1
H2
H3
5SD7 344-0
N PE
5SD7 348-3
1 2 3 4
PE
F4 - F6
125 A gL/gG
(s = 50 mm2 Cu)
PAS
L1 L2 L3 N
Service entrance cable
SEC
F1 - F3
>125 A gL/gG
F4
F5
s
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F6
s
F1F2F3
L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 N
H1
H2
H3
F1 - F3
>315 A gL/gG
5SD7 343-1
5SD7 348-3
1 2 3 4
PE
F4 - F6
315 A gL/gG
(s = 50 mm2 Cu)
PE
L1 L2 L3 N
Service entrance cable
Fig. 6/39
PAS
Circuit diagrams combi-arresters, Class I (B) and II (C)
6/87
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 88
6.2.7 3LD2 Main Control and

EMERGENCY STOP Switches
Brief description
Three- or four-pole switch-disconnectors with manual operation (network
disconnecting devices) for switching
main and auxiliary circuits of threephase motors and other devices of
up to 45 kW (e.g. machine tools and
processing machines). The lockable
rotary operating mechanism guarantees optimum use as maintenance or
repair switch from 16 to 125 A.
Main switches (network disconnecting devices) or EMERGENCY STOP
switches
C of individual machine tools or processing machines, direct switching
C for switching off machine or device
groups, encapsulated in a moldedplastic enclosure for wall mounting
C of switchgear and control cabinets
for maintenance or repair purposes
Product range
Main control and EMERGENCY STOP
switches from 16 A to 125 A, lockable
in OFF position with three padlocks.
C For front mounting with rotary operating mechanism (center- or fourhole fixing)
C For front mounting with masking
frame and knob, lockable with two
padlocks
6/88
Photo 6/72 6-pole main and EMERGENCY

STOP switch
Photo 6/73 Main and EMERGENCY STOP

switch in a molded-plastic
enclosure
C In molded-plastic enclosure with

rotary operating mechanism
C For base mounting with rotary
operating mechanism, 300 mm
shaft, detachable door coupling
and door locking in ON position
(center- or four-hole fixing)
C For mounting in distribution boards,
mountable on 35 mm standard
mounting rail, lockable with two
padlocks, cap dimensions 45 mm
C As 6-pole changeover and parallel
switches
Advantages at a glance
C Plugged on accessories installed
(convertible from three-pole to fourpole switches; 2 auxiliary contact
blocks can be mounted; N and PE
conductor can be mounted)
C Rapid mounting with center-hole
fixing 22.5 mm
C Snap-on terminal covers and safeto-touch terminals
C Captive terminal screws accessible
from mounting perspective
Photo 6/74 Main and EMERGENCY STOP

switch with door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 89
Low Voltage
The following list provides an

overview of the currently available
product groups mainly used in functional, i.e. in commercial, administrative and institutional buildings and in
industry.
Application
Standards
Switching of lighting, motors

and other electrical
equipment
IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3

(VDE 0660 Part 107)
IEC 60669-1, DIN EN 60669-1
(VDE 0632 Part 1)
Use in buildings of type

functional
Switch
and is therefore also the reason for an

increase in device development.
5TE8 control switch

C Changeover switch 5TE8,
20 A
C Group switch with
center position
5TE8, 20 A
C Control switch 5TE8,
20 A
Table 6/31
industrial
The term modular devices, as a collective name, refers to all installation

equipment which is used for switching, monitoring, indicating, controlling
and signaling. Together with the
instabus EIB devices, modular devices provide maximum functionality
for low-voltage switchgear as well as
power distribution boards and distribution boards. In Germany, the design

and with it the dimensions of the
modular devices are constructed to
conform with DIN 43880, also defined
in the CENELEC Report R 023- 001.
This standardization has led to an
enormous simplification regarding the
planning, construction and installation
of switchgear and distribution boards
residential
6.3 Modular Devices
C C C
C C C
C C C
For use in logic operations in

control cabinets
5TE4 8 pushbutton
With/without latching
function
As pushbutton in control systems,

e.g. to switch on sealed-in circuits,
or as pushbutton with latching
function for manual operation,
as control switch or for
load switching
IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3

(VDE 0660 Part 107)
IEC 60669-1, DIN EN 60669-1
(VDE 0632 Part 1)
5TE8 ON/OFF switch

20 A to 125 A
For use in logic operations

in control cabinets
1625 A and 40 100 A:

IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3
(VDE 0660 Part 107)
IEC 60669-1, DIN EN 60669-1
(VDE 0632 Part 1)
32 A and 125 A:
IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3
(VDE 0660 Part 107)
C C C
5TE1 switch-disconnector
100 A to 200 A
Switching of plant sections
IEC 60947-3, DIN EN 60947-3,

KEMA-certified acc. to UL 508
Product overview
6/89
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 90
Switching devices
Switching of lighting, ohmic and inductive load, switching of small loads
and contact multiplications in controllers, protection of motor-driven
mechanical drive parts and pumps,
rotational speed setting of 1-phase
AC motors.
Remote-control switch
C Without central switching Switching of lighting with
C With central switching
pushbuttons
C With central and group
switching
Venetian blinds and remote
series switch
Electronic remote series switch
Remote-control switch,
flush-mounted
System remote-control switch
C Without central switching
C With central switching
C With central and
group switching
Relay
C For controllers
C For capacitive loads
Insta contactors
Table 6/32
Product overview
6/90
DIN EN 61095 (VDE 0637)

DIN EN 60669 (VDE 0632)
industrial
Standards
residential
Application
functional
Switch
C C
C
C
C C
C
C C
C C
C
C
Switching of small loads, or

DIN EN 60255 (VDE 0435)
use in control circuits, especially
to switch lights, such as fluorescent
lamps or high-pressure metal-vapor
lamps and metal-halide lamps,
with capacitive properties
Switching of motors, heaters

or lighting, such as fluorescent or
glow lamps, ohmic and
inductive loads
C C C
EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1,
EN 61095
C C
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 91
Low Voltage
Protection of machinery with gear,

belt or chain drives, conveyor belts,
fans, pumps, compressors, packing
machines and door-opening drives
DIN EN 60947-4-2,
(VDE 0660 Part 117)
EMERGENCY OFF switch for

in industry, trade and private
households
In compliance with the EC

Directive for Machinery
98/37/EC, DIN EN 954-1
Soft-starter
C 5TT3 441, 230 V AC
C 5TT3 440, 400 V AC
EMERGENCY OFF module >N<
5TT5 200, 10 A
Electric switching
Table 6/33
industrial
Standards
residential
Application
functional
Switch
C
C
Some general requirements to operation, in particular to the switching of

lighting systems are to be taken into account for planning. The technical
information presented here is intended to provide background information
and to prevent planning errors and early system failures that would result in
time-consuming trouble shooting.
Product overview
6/91
19:33 Uhr
Seite 92
Timers
Power saving in stairwell lighting, prewarned off-switching of stairwell
lighting in multiple dwellings, power
saving in rarely used rooms or rooms
that are frequented with a varying
intensity, timer-controlled stairwell
lighting for ECG dynamic electronic

controlgear, run-on operation for fans
in toilets, for time sequence control
in control systems.
30-minute accurate switching in day
or week cycles, 1-minute accurate
switching in day, week and year
Application
Standards
Power saving for staircase lighting;
DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699
C C
Flashes to warn before the stairwell

lights are switched off in multiple
dwellings;
To trigger electronic control gear in
fluorescent lamps, warns by
dimming the stairwell light before it
is switched off on multi-apartment
floors and landings;
Power saving in rarely used rooms,
or rooms that are frequented with a
varying intensity, flashes to warn
before the lights are switched off
DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699,

DIN 18015
C C
DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699,

DIN 18015
C C
DIN EN 60669, IEC 60699,

DIN 18015
C C

functional
Timers
mode, automatic startup without the

necessity to enter the time, time
monitoring for accuracy. Creates,
modifies and documents switching
programs.
industrial
11.08.2005
residential
TIP_Kap06_Engl
Timers for buildings
C Stairwell lighting timer,

7LF6 110, 7LF6 111
C Stairwell lighting timer
with pre-warning
function, 7LF6 113
C Stairwell lighting
timer ECG,
5TT1 303
C Lighting timer with

pre-warning function,
7LF6 114
C Power-save timer with
pre-warning function,
7LF6 115
C Fan timer,
7LF6 112
Industrial timers
C Multi-function timer,
5TT3 185
C Delay timer,
5TT3 181
C Wiper timer,
5TT3 182
C Flashing timer,
5TT3 183
C Off-delay timer,
5TT3 184
Table 6/34
Product overview
6/92
C C
Power saving in toilets
DIN EN 60699, IEC 60699
For time sequence control in

control systems
DIN EN 60255, IEC 60255
C C
C
C
C
C
C
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 93
Low Voltage
1-second accuracy of switching

in day, week or year mode
DIN EN 60730, IEC 60730
Mechanical and digital

clock timers
C C C
Product overview
Monitoring of the emergency lightings power supply in public buildings, monitoring of the power supply
to ensure the compliance with operational parameters for devices or system parts, monitoring of the neutral
conductor for breakage, monitoring of
all types of fuses, monitoring of the
power supply for short-time interruptions of 20 ms, monitoring of 24 V DC
power supply, disconnecting of unused lines, monitoring of power supply, monitoring of a networks direction of rotation, monitoring of operating hours and switching-on of devices
or systems, overcurrent release for
the protection of motors, monitoring
of emergency and signal lighting and
motors, monitoring of luminaries and
transformers for halogen lighting,
switching of network loads in resi-
Application
Standards

functional
Monitoring devices
dential buildings, thermal protection

of motor windings in heating or cooling equipment, remote display of
room temperatures, controlling and
limiting of temperatures, controlling
of liquid levels in containers, switching of lighting according to daytime
brightness.
Table 6/36
Light indicator
5TE5 8
Optical signaling in plants and

DIN VDE 0710-1
control circuits to indicate switching
states or faults
Bell, buzzer
With power supply unit
4AC3 004, 4AC3 104
Bell or buzzer with 230 V AC

connection in one device, that can
also be pushbutton-operated with
12 V AC safety extra voltage
DIN EN 61558-2-8
industrial
Monitoring devices
residential
Table6/35
industrial
Standards
residential
Application
functional
Timers
Product overview
6/93
19:33 Uhr
Seite 94
Application
Standards

functional
Monitoring devices
Fault signaling units

5TTE5 8
C Centralized fault indicator Evaluation and display of faults or
5TT3 460
alarms to monitor industrial plants
C Expansion fault indicator footpaths, for cost saving purposes
5TT3 461
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435-303
industrial
11.08.2005
residential
TIP_Kap06_Engl
Dusk switches
7LQ2 1, 5TT3 3
On-demand switching of lighting

systems for shop windows or
sidewalks to save costs.
EN 60730
C C
Temperature controller
7LQ2 0
Temperature control and limiting
EN 60730
C C C
Fuse monitor
5TT3 170
Monitoring of all types of fuses
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435
Power-off switch
5TT3 171
Disconnection of unused
supply lines
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435
Phase-sequence/direction Monitoring of the phase sequence

of rotation monitors
of a network or power supply
5TT3 421 / 5TT3 423
Table 6/37
Product overview
6/94
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435
C
C
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 95
Low Voltage
Power supply monitoring of

the emergency lighting in
public buildings
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435-303,

DIN VDE 0108
Voltage relays
C Undervoltage relay,
5TT3 400 to 5TT3 403
C Undervoltage relay,
5TT3 404 to 5TT3 406
C Short-time voltage relay,
5TT3 407
C Under-/overvoltage relay
5TT3 408
C Under-/overvoltage relay
5TT3 410
C Overvoltage relay,
5TT3 19
Table 6/38
Power supply monitoring for

short-time failures of 20 ms
Power supply monitoring to
maintain operative
parameters for equipment or
plant sections
Monitoring of neutral
conductor for breakage
Power supply monitoring to
maintain operative
parameters for equipment or
plant sections
industrial
Standards
residential
Application
functional
Monitoring devices
C
C
C
C
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435
DIN VDE 0633
C
C
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435
Current relay
5TT6 1
To monitor emergency and

signal lighting and motors
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435-303
Priority switch
5TT6 10
Switching of network loads

in residential buildings
IEC 60669 (VDE 0632),

BTO 6 Section 4
Isolation monitor for

industrial applications
5TT3 4
To monitor the dielectric

resistance in ungrounded
networks
IEC 60255, IEC 61557
Cos monitor
5TT3 472
To monitor low loads of

motors up to approx. 5 A
alternating current by cos
measurements
IEC 60255, IEC 61557
Level relay
5TT3 430/5TT3 435
Control of liquid levels in

containers
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435
Thermistor motor
protection relay
5TT3 43
Thermal protection of motor

windings
IEC 60255, DIN VDE 0435
Product overview
6/95
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 96
Power supply units

Voltage/current supply up to 63 VA
as safety extra-low voltage, DC current/voltage supply up to 24 VA as
safety extra-low voltage, for power
supply during maintenance.
Application
Standards
Bell transformers
4AC3 0, 4AC3 1
Alternating current/voltage supply up

to 40 VA, as safety extra-low voltage,
for gongs, buzzers, bells, dooropeners, intercoms, remote-control
switches and AC power supply for
safety-extra-low-voltage systems
intended for short-term operation
DIN EN 61558-2-8
C C
Transformers for
continuous load
4AC3 4, 4AC3 5, 4AC3 6
Alternating current/voltage supply up

for control circuits, relays, Insta
contactors and AC power supply
for safety-extra-low-voltage systems
intended for permanent operation
DIN EN 61558-2-2
Power supply units

for DC voltage
4AC2 4
Direct current/voltage supply up

for gongs, buzzers, bells, dooropeners, relays, Insta contactors
and DC power supply for safetyextra-low-voltage systems intended
for permanent operation
DIN EN 61558-2-6
C C C
Outlets
5TE6 7
Power supply for maintenance

purposes in distribution boards
DIN VDE 0620,

CEE 7 Standard Sheet V
C C C
Table 6/39
Product overview
6/96
industrial
residential

functional
Power supply units
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 97
Low Voltage
instabus binary inputs

N260 binary input
For four independent switching or pushbutton signals,
input voltage 230 V AC,
contacting via data bus.
Standards
EN 50090
N261 binary input

For four independent switching or pushbutton signals,
input voltage 24 V AC/DC,
contacting via data bus.
Table 6/40
Product overview
6/97
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 98
instabus clock timers

REG371 2-channel clock timer
Can be used in day, week or year mode. 36 switching times can be
permanently saved. Holiday timing to interrupt the automatic program
for 199 days with pre-selection of 199 days.
Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover.
Switching, priority, dimming or value frames can be sent on every
channel. Bus contacting via bus terminal.
Can be used in day, week or year mode. 324 switching times can
be permanently saved. Besides the standard week program, up to
9 more week programs can be entered in each channel and called
up with reference to a certain period (e.g. 12-24 to 01-06). Every
week program can be complemented by date switching commands
and single-date switching commands. A random switching program
can be enabled. Temporary or permanent manual operation is possible. Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover.
Bus contacting via bus terminal. Date and time can be transmitted.
REG372/02 4-channel clock timer

In addition to the functions featured by the REG372 clock timer,
REG372/02, when used in connection with a DCF77 antenna,
type AP390, can perform an automatic time synchronization and
summertime/wintertime changeover triggered by a DCF77 signal.

Can be used in day, week or year mode. 500 switching times can
be permanently saved. Besides the standard week program, up to
9 more week programs can be entered in each channel and called
up with reference to a certain period (e.g. 12-24 to 01-06). Every
week program can be complemented by date switching commands
and single-date switching commands. A random switching program
can be enabled. Temporary or permanent manual operation is possible. Calendar-timed automatic summertime/wintertime changeover.
In connection with a DCF77 antenna, type AP390, an automatic
time synchronization and summertime/wintertime changeover
triggered by a DCF77 signal can be performed. Bus contacting via
bus terminal. Date and time can be transmitted.
AP390 DCF77 antenna
To receive DCF77 signals for REG372/02 and REG373 clock timers.
Table 6/41
Product overview
6/98
Standards
EN 50090
EN 60730-2-7
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 99
Low Voltage
instabus actuators
N512 load switch
By means of eight floating contacts (bi-stable relays, contact rating
for 230 V AC, 16 A at cos = 1), the load switch controls eight independent groups of electric consumers. No supply voltage necessary. Manual operation and switch position indicator. Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. Terminal may be used as
connector.
Standards
EN 50090
N522/02 Venetian blinds switch

The N22/02 Venetian blinds switch can independently drive four
230 V AC sun shield or window drives and their integrated end position switches. This easy-to install Venetian blinds switch has 4 terminals per output to connect all of the 4 conductors (Up, Down, N, PE)
of a drive line.
Functions for manual and automatic operation can be configured
separately. Slat angles or blinds position can be controlled at any
angle/position between 0 and 100%.
In connection with a higher-level time, brightness or sun-follow-on
controller, the Venetian blinds switch can be used for shading with
an optimum daylight incidence. Contacting is made via bus terminal.
N523/02 Venetian blinds switch

The N523/02 Venetian blinds switch can independently control four
sun shields (Venetian blinds, roller shutters, sunshade blinds). The
sun shield drives must have end position switches.
A pushbutton with LED enables changeover between manual and
automatic mode. In manual mode, the sun shield can be repositioned by the actuator, using two pushbuttons per channel if a
230 V AC supply and bus voltage are available.
Bus connection via data bus and/or bus terminal. Terminal may
be used as connector.
Tabele 6/42
Product overview
6/99
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 100
N527 universal dimmer

Dimming of glow lamps and LV halogen lamps (with electronic or
conventional transformers) from 20 W to 500 W. Automatically operates according to general phase control principle. Short-circuiting
protection by means of electronic fuse.
N526E switching/dimming actuator

The switching/dimming actuator switches or dims eight independent groups (channels) of fluorescent lamps with dimmable electronic control gear. Each channel is assigned to a 110 V control
output and a contact output with a switching power of 230 V AC,
16 A at cos = 1.
The switching contact output has a mechanical switching position
indicator which can also be used for direct manual operation of the
contact outputs.
N670 universal I/O module
The module is equipped with two universal inputs/outputs, either
of them to be used as binary or anolog input or output, so that four
completely different functionalities are available for each universal
input/output: binary input or output, analog input or output.
For temperature measurements, two inputs are provided for
Pt 1000 sensors in two-wire connection. In addition, two power relays are provided with corresponding switching and forced-guidance
objects.
The device requires an external 24 V AC/DC supply.
Table 6/43
Product overview
6/100
Standards
EN 50090
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 101
Low Voltage
instabus function modules

N341 event module
It can process up to 200 event programs with a maximum of 200
event tasks for up to 255 communication objects. The event module
handles up to 125 calendar entries / day programs together with a
maximum of 400 time-scheduling tasks. For the timing function,
the event module requires a date/time source.
Contacting is made via the data bus.
Standards
EN 50090
N343 operating hours and switching operations counter

It records operating hours and switching operations for a maximum
of 36 sensor/actuator channels with 1-bit switching objects. Limit
values can be defined for all counter values, so that an alarm can be
output to the instabus EIB if a limit is exceeded or undershot.
The maximum runtime of the operating hours counter is 136 years,
a maximum of 4.3 billion switching operations can be recorded.
N350 event, time-scheduling and logic module

In a compact module unit
10 event programs,
100 timing programs (week clock timer) and
10 logic gates (AND; OR; NAND; NOR) with up to six inputs
are offered.
The module can process up to 10 event programs with a maximum
of 10 event tasks each.
The week clock timer provides 100 timing tasks for 20 timer channels. For the timing function, the event module requires a date/time
source. Contacting is made via the data bus.
Table 6/44
Product overview
6/101
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
6.4 Maximum-Demand
Monitors
Product and functional description
Description
The maximum-demand monitor is a
modular device with a width of 4 MW
and is able to suppress peak loads
and thus noticeably lower the users
costs for power and energy supply.
Based on a defined maximum average
power supply value, loads/consumers
are switched off or switched back on.
Here, as a rule, the operational
switching carried out by the operator
is handled with priority and therefore
the maximum-demand monitor can
only switch loads that are operationally
switched on. Each load can be disabled
and released by the assigned bus
sensor, i.e. this load is not subject to
switching by the maximum-demand
monitor in disabled state.
Power is supplied via the bus line and
via a 230 V supply.
Connection to the bus can be made
via an EIB bus terminal or optionally
via a data rail.
6/102
Seite 102
Technical data
Up to 120 channels are available for
control. Channels 1 to 8 directly display the current state via LEDs at the
device. For all of the 120 channels
available, the following parameters
can be set during start-up via the EIB
Tool Software (ETS):
C Switching-off priority (1 to 10)
C Minimum switching-on time
C Minimum switching-off time
C Maximum switching-off time
C Number of permissible switching
cycles per 24 h.
The power range limit to be observed
by the maximum-demand monitor
can be parametrized between 30 and
1,000 kW. Additionally, a warning limit
between 25 and 1,000 kW can be
set. Exceeding of this warning limit is
indicated via an LED. This is possible
for 2 rates (high rate and low rate).
The demand integration period required for the determination of the
average power value can be set to
15, 30 and 60 minutes. In coordination with this, the cycle time for the
load projection intervals can be parameterised with 15, 30, 60, 120 and
240 seconds. LEDs indicate the devices position within the demand
integration period in terms of time.
Photo 6/75
Maximum-demand monitor
The maximum-demand monitor is

parametrized via the ETS and can be
run without any additional software.
To visualize performance statistics, a
software is available that can be used
to draw up demand integration periods, day/month and year statistics,
which can then be exported to Excel
for further evaluation. This offers the
possibility to create a consumption
statistic. This enables the customer
to negotiate better and more economical supply contracts with the
respective power supply companies.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 103
Low Voltage
Changeover
high/low
rate
Synchronous pulse
by the power supply company
Visualization
software
S0 interface
PC
Maximum
demand
monitor
instabus EIB
Meter
Actuator
technology
Sensor
technology
Electrical heater
Lighting
Fan
ON/OFF, disabling or releasing
via pushbutton, binary inputs,
sensors os sontrol modules
Fig. 6/40
Electrical heater
Lighting
Fan
Loads available for
load management
Application example
The software is available as part of

the EIB visualization and as standalone version.
The maximum-demand monitor can
also be operated exclusively as registration unit during a recording period.
This offers the possibility to save load
curves and consumption values without the parameterization of the individual channels.
The maximum-demand monitor has
the following inputs to which floating
contacts or an S0 interface can optionally be connected according to
DIN 43 864 and 62 053-31:
C Consumption pulses:
The valency of the pulses to be
read in can be determined depending on the respective meter to be
connected. Thus, all conventional
meters with S0 interface can be
used.
C Power supply company synchronous pulse
C Changeover high/low rate:
The high/low rate changeover can
also be carried out via bus.
6/103
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 104
6.5 Switches, Outlets

and Electronic
Products
60 mm
Application
71 mm
The application of electrical installation equipment in residential, public,

commercial and industrial buildings
offers ever more diverse solutions for
operating, switching, controlling and
signaling operations as well as for information and monitoring in electrical
building installation.
71 mm
Box
Insert
Frame
Rocker
Influences on device construction

The construction of operation elements as well as the actual device
construction with the required additional functions is subject to the differing national techniques and customs. The following criteria have an
influence on device construction:
C Voltage level
C Plug configuration
C Mounting box dimensions
C Modular size for side-by-side
arrangements
C Conductor connection
C Supplementary functions
C Design
Fig 6/41
CEE/VDE techniques for devices in southern Europe, type A
Standards
The technical requirements are laid
down in standards EN 60669-1 / IEC
60669-1 / DIN VDE 0632-1 for
switches and in IEC 60884-1 / DIN
VDE 0620-1 for power outlets, and
EN 669-2-1 / IEC 60669-2-1 / VDE
0632-2-1 for electronic products. In
accordance with these standards,
uniform performance features have
been specified which, however, also
allow for country-specific values for
the rated current as well as types of
construction and versions.
Various installation techniques
Due to the various country-specific
plug configurations, different national
techniques developed worldwide.
CEE/VDE technology
In Europe, the most commonly used
technique is the circular box system
(Fig. 6/41), made up of a 60 mm diameter mounting box and a modular
size of 71 mm for side-by-side
arrangements.
6/104
Box
Fig. 6/42
Device
Country-specific monoblock
technology for type B devices
with a switching function
Modular technology
In the south of Europe, a modular
technology (Fig. 6/43) is applied.
With this technology, individual device inserts are arranged side-by-side
within a supporting frame with a
masking frame or a cover. The modular technology comprises manufacturer-specific device inserts and country-specific mounting boxes with
varying dimensions.
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 105
Low Voltage
Monoblock technology
Monoblock technology is mainly
applied in South-East Europe. With
this technology, complete devices
which can also comprise several
switching or plugging functions, can
be inserted into mounting boxes. The
device dimensions are not standardized and only designed to comply
with the dimensions of the respective country-specific mounting boxes
(Fig. 6/40).
83.5
mm
Box
Device insert
Type B
Type A
Higher and ever changing demands
result in a permanent modification of
the touch elements surface design.
The international standardized type A
takes this into consideration and thus
ensures that the covers which account for the devices stylish design
can be replaced without detaching
the connected conductors.
CEE/VDE technology
Uniform device inserts
The Siemens DELTA product range
(Photo 6/77) meets these requirements as it uses uniform device inserts (Photo 6/79). The device inserts
are very easy to mount as they have
very small base dimensions, providing more space for the conductors in
the 60 mm diameter mounting box. A
screwless terminal connection technique as well as a circuit diagram on
the back of the base illustrating the
Type A
Supporting
frame
Cover
Type A
Masking frame
Fig. 6/43
Modular technology for devices used in Southern Europe, South America and Asia,
design types A and B
connections in correct order further

ease conductor connection.
The device inserts are equipped with
an overall shock-hazard protection, i.e.
live parts have finger-proof covers.
Furthermore, they come with returning claws and are fixed to the mounting box with captive +/ screws. For
insertion into deeper wall-recessed
mounting boxes, extension claws are
available which must simply be

plugged onto the conventional device
claws.
When mounted, the device inserts
can be tested for voltage from the
front.
6/105
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 106
DELTA line
DELTA line
DELTA vita
DELTA vita
titan white
aluminum metallic
gold
carbon metallic
DELTA miro
DELTA miro
DELTA style
DELTA style
titan white
aluminum
titan white
titan white/ silver
DELTA profil
DELTA profil
DELTA natur
DELTA ambiente
tobacco
bronze
cherry tree
arctic white/ steel
Surface-mounted range IP20
Surface-mounted range IP44 Surface-mounted range IP55 Surface-mounted range IP68
Photo 6/76
DELTA product range in CEE/VDE technology, design type A
Photo 6/77
DELTA product range in CEE/VDE technology, device insert and SCHUKO outlet (without stylish part)
6/106
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 107
Low Voltage
a) Plug-on technique
Frame and
rocker with
bearing block
Switching reliability:
practical solution for
badly fitting inserts
1 mm
Fig. 6/44
Practical
leveling ring:
3 mm
b)
Frame: Horizontal and vertical mounting for
flush-type boxes and trunking installations
Thermoplast molded plastic: resistant to
impact and breakage
3 mm
Leveling and switching reliability for DELTA device inserts in CEE/VDE design as well as rapid frame mounting with plug-on technology
Leveling ring
The design of the touch elements
and the switching device inserts allows leveling which is needed in
practice. Thus, even with badly fitting
device inserts, switching reliability
can be attained (Fig. 6/44).
Rocker, bearing block
Rocker and bearing block have been
constructed to form one single part,
preventing the rocker from being accidentally removed separately.
Frame
The frame is mounted together with
the rocker by plugging them onto the
device insert horizontally and vertically (Fig. 6/44).
Orientation light
The DELTA device inserts have been
designed in such a way that an orientation or pilot lamp can be retrofitted
without having to remove the inserts.
An inspection window integrated in
the rocker leads to an optimum
brightness, this fulfills the German
Ordinance on Workplaces criteria for
commercial and public buildings.
Environmentally compatible
materials
The contact material of the DELTA
device inserts is free of cadmium and
nickel and the electroplatings are free
of chrome-6 deadening agents. All
plastics are free of halogens and pigments containing heavy metals.
6/107
TIP_Kap06_Engl
Photo 6/77
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
DELTA Venetian blinds control,

conventional type
Seite 108
Photo 6/78
DELTA Universal switch for twoway switch
Photo 6/79
DELTA rotary dimmer switch
Photo 6/80
DELTA reflex smoke detector
Photo 6/81
DELTA connection box, category 45
Device insert versions

The various device insert versions of
the Siemens DELTA product range
can be distinguished as follows:
Operator units:
C Pushbuttons for various
applications
C Double pushbuttons for various
applications
C Venetian blinds pushbuttons
Switching devices:
C ON/OFF switches, 1-, 2- and 3-pole
C Two-way switches
C Double two-way switches
C Intermediate switches
C Two-circuit switches
C Control switches for various
applications
C Venetian blinds switches
C Venetian blinds key-operated
switches
C Timers
C Delay timers
Control devices:
C Rotary dimmers for various
applications
C Sensor dimmers for various
applications
6/108
C Pushbutton-type dimmers for

various applications
C Regulating switches for various
applications
C Volume control buttons
C Speed-regulating rheostats
C Room temperature controllers for
various applications
C Motion detectors
Signaling devices:
C Light signals
C Information displays
C Smoke detectors
Communication devices and

sockets for data/voice networks:
C Aerial sockets for various
applications
C Telephone sockets for various
applications
C Loudspeaker sockets
C Telecommunications connection
units
C Universal connection box and
specific device inserts for data
and voice networks (Photo 6/81)
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite 109
Low Voltage
Plug-in equipment for power

supply:
C -outlets for various
applications
C -outlets with operation
indicator
C -outlets with overvoltage
protection
C Child-proof -outlets
(shutter)
C -outlets with integrated
fault current protection, childproof
(shutter)
C Outlets with center ground
contact, 2-pole, according to CEE 7
C Outlets with center ground
contact, 2-pole, according to CEE 7
and child-proof
C Outlets, 2-pole, according to
US standard C73
Photo 6/82
-outlet
Photo 6/83
-outlets with center

ground contact, child-proof
Photo 6/84
DELTA bus coupling unit
Photo 6/85
DELTA Venetian blinds control,

radio controlled
The various DELTA product ranges

The DELTA product ranges meet the
quality of design required from an
architectural point of view and come
in different materials, shapes,
dimensions, surfaces and colors.
The operating rockers of the DELTA
product ranges can also be plugged
onto the instabus KNX/EIB DELTA
bus coupling units (Photo 6/87).
Depending on the type of insert and
application, various functions can be
controlled via the instabus KNX/EIB
in its Twisted-Pair, Powerline or radiocontrol version.
Universal application
The module technology implemented
in the DELTA flush-mounting device
insert system allows for a universal
application of these devices. The
functionality of the DELTA SCHUKO
outlets can, for example, be
extended with modular accessories
for various applications (Photos
6/83, 6/85). The standard mounting
depth of 32 mm is still observed.
6/109
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:34 Uhr
Seite 110
6.6 SIMOCODE pro

Motor Management
System for ConstantSpeed Motors in the
Low-Voltage Range
Description
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular
motor management system for constant-speed motors in the low-voltage range. It optimizes the interfacing
between the instrumentation and
control system and the motor feeder,
while increasing plant availability and
rendering substantial savings during
the construction, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of a plant
at the same time.
When integrated in the low-voltage
switchgear, SIMCODE pro is an
intelligent interface between the
higher-level automation system and
the motor feeder, combining:
C Full, multi-functional, electronic
motor protection, independent of
the automation system
C Flexible software instead of hardware for motor control
C Detailed operating, service and
diagnostic data
C Power management capability
C Open communication via
PROFIBUS-DP, the standard among
the field bus systems
6/110
Photo 6/86
The SIMOCODE pro motor management system
Fields of application
SIMOCODE pro is often used in automated processes where a plant
standstill would be extremely costly
and where it is important to prevent
plant standstills by an analysis of detailed operating, service and diagnostic data. SIMOCODE pro is modular
and space saving in its design, which
makes it especially suitable for application in Motor Control Centers
(MCC), as used in the process industry and power engineering.
Another field of application is the

protection and control of motors
C in hazardous, potentially explosive
locations (chemical, oil and gas
industry)
C featuring heavy duty start-up
(paper, cement, metal industry)
C in high-availability plants (chemical,
oil refinery, materials processing
industry, power plants)
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:34 Uhr
Seite 111
Low Voltage
SIMOCODE pro V
SIMOCODE pro C
Basic component 1
Basic component 2
Current measuring module
Current measuring module

or current/voltage measuring
module1*)
Operating module
(optional)
Operating module
(optional)
Various expansion modules
(optional)
Tabele 6/45 SIMOCODE hardware components
Design
SIMOCODE pro is a modularly designed motor management system
which can be divided into two functionally graded component series.
Both series (systems) consist of
different hardware components
(modules):
C SIMOCODE pro C
C SIMOCODE pro V
Photo 6/89
SIMOCODE pro C
Photo 6/90
SIMOCODE pro V (fully extended)
6/111
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:34 Uhr
Seite 112
Every system consists of one basic

component per feeder and a separate
current detection module. Both modules are linked through a connecting
cable via the system interface, they
can either be mechanically coupled
as a unit (in series) or mounted separately (side by side). The motor current to be monitored determines the
selection of the current detection
module.
Optionally, an operating module can
be connected to the basic component via a second system interface.
The operating module can either be
installed in the control cabinet door or
in a front plate. Both the current
measuring module and the operating
module are power supplied by the
basic component. In addition to the
inputs/outputs integrated in the basic
component, basic component 2
(SIMOCODE pro V) can be complemented by further expansion modules providing more inputs/outputs
and functions. To detect and monitor
voltage, power output and the power
factor and any other related monitoring function, basic component 2 must
be equipped with a combined current/voltage detection module 1*)
instead of a mere current detection
module.
Bild 6/91
Current detection module
Bild 6/92
Photo 6/93
Expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V
All modules are linked by connecting

cables, which are available in different
lengths. The maximum distance
between the modules (e.g. between
the basic component and the current
detection module) may be up to 2 m.
6/112
Operating module
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:34 Uhr
Seite 113
Low Voltage
Functions
Full electronic motor protection for
motor current ratings of 0.3 to 820 A
Software based motor control (instead of

comprehensive hardware interlocks)
Protective functions:
Control functions:
C Current-dependent electronic overload protection

(Class 5 40)
C Phase failure/imbalance protection
C Stall protection
C Thermistor motor protection
C Ground fault monitoring
C Monitoring of settable limit values for motor current
C Monitoring of operating hours, standstill times and
number of starts
C Direct-on-line and reverse starter

C Star-delta starter also with reversal of rotational
direction
C Two speeds; motors with separate windings (pole
reversing) also with reversal of rotational direction
C Two speeds; motors with separated Dahlander
windings also with reversal of rotational direction
C Solenoid valve actuation
C Valve control
C Control of a circuit-breaker
C Control of a soft starter also with reversal of
rotational direction
Extended monitoring functions*):

C Temperature monitoring via up to 3 analog sensor
circuits
C Voltage monitoring
C Power monitoring
C Cos--monitoring (no-load monitoring and loaddischarge monitoring of motor)
C Input, output and monitoring of analog signals
(e.g. level/flow monitoring)
etc.
Recording of measuring curves
In addition, these control functions can be customized

with parameterizable logic modules (truth tables,
counter, timer, edge evaluation), and by using standard
functions (supply line failure, emergency start, external
faults), they can be flexibly adapted to any customerspecific motor feeder version.
*)
Operating, service and diagnostic data
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP
Operating data
SIMOCODE pro supports:
C Motor switching state, deducted from the current flow

in the main circuit
C All phase currents
C All line voltages *)
C Active power, apparent power, and power factor *)
C Phase imbalance
C Phase sequence *)
C Time till triggering
C Remaining cooling time
C Temperature (e.g. motor temperature) *)
etc.
C Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s

C Automatic baud rate detection
C Time stamping in device/clock synchronization *)
via PROFIBUS-DP
C Cyclical services (DPV0) and acyclical services (DPV1)
etc.
Service data
Power management
C Motor operating hours

C Motor standstill times
C Number of motor starts
C Number of overload tripping events
C Internal comments saved in the device
etc.
SIMOCODE pro also monitors current, voltage,

power output and power factor independent of the
automation system, makes all necessary data available
and enables an optimal integration of the motor feeder
into the higher-level power management systems via
PROFIBUS-DP.
Diagnostic data
C Numerous detailed early warning alarms and fault
messages
C Device-internal fault logging with time stamp
etc.
*)
available as of mid 2005
Table 6/46
function overview
6/113
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:34 Uhr
Autonomous operation
An important feature of SIMOCODE
pro is the autonomous execution of
all protective and control tasks even
when the communication to the control system has been interrupted. This
means, even in the event of a bus
system failure or automation system
failure, the full functional performance capability of the motor feeder is
maintained, or a defined response to
such a failure can be configured, for
example, a targeted disconnection of
the feeder, or the execution of certain
parameterized control mechanisms
(such as the reversal of the rotational
direction).
Integration
Besides the device function and the
hardware design, a high degree of
user friendliness of the parameterization software is also important for
communication-capable switching
devices together with a good system
integration, i.e. an optimum and fast
integratability to the most diverse
system configurations and process
automation systems. For this reason,
SIMOCODE pro offers matching software tools for integrated, fast parameterization, configuration and
diagnosis:
*)
Seite 114
C SIMOCODE ES for totally integrated commissioning and service

C Object manager OM SIMOCODE
pro for total integration in
SIMATIC S7
C PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro for
total integration in PCS 7
C Communication via PROFIBUS-DP:

Control of the motor feeder
Transmission of binary and analog
signals
Transmission of operating, service
and diagnostic data
Features
C Current detection/monitoring in the

range of 0.3 820 A
C Modular design:
Expansion modules for retrofitting
of inputs/outputs and functions as
desired
Maximum module spacing up to 2 m
C Compact, space saving design
types:
Basic components, 45 mm wide
Expansion modules, 22.5 mm wide
DIN mounting rail installation or
directly on mounting plate
C Removable current measuring
modules (current transformers):
Motor rated currents of 0.3 A 820 A
Busbar connection, or straightthrough current transformer
45 mm 145 mm width
Installation on DIN mounting rail,
directly on mounting plate, or at
contactor
Available as of mid 2005.
6/114
Recording of measuring curves
*)
C Voltage detection/monitoring up to
690 V *)
C Safe isolation
C Power management *)
C Supply voltages:
C 24 V DC or
C 110 240 V AC/DC
(wide voltage range)
C Easy installation and
commissioning:
Removable terminals
Memory module for parameterization without PC/PD
Address plug to assign a
PROFIBUS address without PC/PD
C Typical certifications and approvals
TIP_Kap06_Engl
11.08.2005
19:34 Uhr
Seite 115
Low Voltage
6/115
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
19:26 Uhr
Seite B
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
19:27 Uhr
Seite C
chapter 7
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
19:27 Uhr
Seite 2
7 Communications in Power Distribution

From electrical power distribution
to power management within the
corporation
Power management as part of Totally
Integrated Power implements the
connection of various energies
(electricity, gas, water, heating, cooling, etc.) to various software packages. Applications such as status
visualization, consumption recording
with the corresponding load curve
presentations and assignment to cost
centers, load management, prognoses, as well as reporting and control functions, recording and managing of maintenance information can
be implemented. A consistent operating and monitoring concept forms
the basis for comprehensive power

management (see Chapter 9).
Power management in
electrical power distribution
A visualisation for event-oriented operating and monitoring is used at the
level of low and medium voltage
electrical power distribution. All
information about faults and events
aids in troubleshooting. Complete
and detailed maintenance information
is important for the execution of
maintenance works. The electrical
power supply is monitored only with
regard to observance of limits and
the switching of equipment (onand off-switching). The electrical
Visualization
Load curve
Operating
and monitoring
Energy flow
History
energy demand is forecasted. All

information and actions focus on
smooth-free operation, fast fault
clearance, and the expedient
execution of maintenance work.
Bus systems are used for the data
transmission and communication in
the electrical energy distribution.
This communication is not only used
to record switch position, messages
and measurements, but also to perform switching operations. The communication with modern circuitbreakers allows a direct online parameterisation of the setting values.
Furthermore, all recorded measured
values can be read out.
Archive
Events
Operating and
monitoring level
Motor 1 Service
Motor 2 Service
U
I
cos
p
W
Tank cv
Bearing replacement
Completion of
operating hours
Technical
Tank test
Inspectorate
Bus systems
Substation control and
protection systems
(Chapter 8)
Processing level
Bus systems
Acquisition and
control level
Contactors Meters Analogue SIMEAS

Switches Pulses signals multifunction
measuring
device
Fig. 7/1
7/2
Energy
meter
SENTRON
circuitbreaker
System structure for the communication in the energy distribution
SIMOCODE
SIPROTEC
medium-voltage
protection
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
19:27 Uhr
Seite 3
Power Management
Power Management
Power Management
in
energy distribution
within
the site
within the corporation
Visualization
Event-oriented operating
and monitoring
Event-oriented operating
and monitoring
Demand-oriented
reports
Faults
Correction
Correction
Analysis
Maintenance
Execution
Execution
Planning/evaluation
Energy import
Monitoring
Monitoring
Dispatch/monitoring
Energy
procurement
Demand forecasts
Demand forecasts
Load forecasts (base,

average, peak load)
Functions
Site 1
Electrical
energy
Extending energy
distribution by bus-capable
data acquisition and control
Gas
Compressed air
Water
Taking account of
all energy types of
the on-site energy
provider
Site 2
Bundling all
corporation-wide
energy services
Steam
etc.
Fig. 7/2
Site n
From energy distribution to power management within the corporation
In the new installation business,

system integrators, such as switchgear cabinet and assembly manufacturers, must provide the hardware
and software requirements, whereas
in the retrofit market (for retrofitting
existing installations), this demand
is placed on electrical fitting and
maintenance departments.
Power management within the site
In addition to electricity, the requirements of power management within
the site take account of all of the
other energies that an in-house supplier provides for smooth operation
within the site. The software satisfies
all requirements of site management,
such as internal energy providers, electrical departments or maintenance
departments.
Power management within the

corporation
In the highest level of functionality,
the power management view is extended to satisfy the corporation requirements. Executive department,
corporate department, head office
can also be used as synonym for corporation. The power management in
the corporation covers all sites. In the
individual sites, the recorded data is
documented in reports according to
the requirements; any faults that occur are analyzed and plannable maintenance work scheduled. The results
and stipulations are transferred to the
individual sites; such data can be
used for optimum fault clearance or
preventive maintenance.
Within the dispatch (see Chapter 9),
the quantities of corporation-wide
energy supply contracts are allocated
to the individual sites and updated

cyclically. The corporation goal is the
optimum utilization of existing energy
supply contracts. The energy procurement combines the forecasts of
the individual sites to produce total
quantities. The base, average and
peak load are each satisfied with the
appropriate purchases at the energy
exchanges. These purchases then
form the stipulations for dispatch.
Although the individual functionality
levels must build on each other,
there is the option to focus all of the
three levels of power management
merely on a single type of energy.
The following discussion refers to
electrical energy.
7/3
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
19:27 Uhr
Seite 4
Transducers
The communication transfers the
transducers measured values. After
being scaled, the measured value can
be used for the actual-value display.
Limit-value monitoring for editable
values provide additional information
about the plant state as superposed
functions.
Conventional
Switching
Indication
Signaling
Bus systems
In future
Fig. 7/3
Operating
Monitoring
Fault messages
Parameterizing
Analyzing
Documenting
Modern power distribution with connection to bus systems
Modern power distribution with

connection to bus systems
In a conventional power distribution
system, analog measuring instruments for voltage, current, capacity,
frequencies etc. are often equipped
with the appropriate transducers.
However, only limited use is made of
this information.
In future, the automatic acquisition
via devices that can be connected to
the bus will permit a central display
and evaluation. The same bus will
also be used to switch the power
distribution.
Newly designed power distribution
systems are equipped with bus
systems by default.
Operating and monitoring in an
electrical power distribution
system
When power distribution is
considered from the viewpoint of
7/4
Load curves
Measurements are transparently
visualized by means of graphic display of the measured values or load
curves. The load curve shows the
measured value over time. The capacity measurement display provides
for a rapid and transparent analysis
of demand/consumption fluctuations.
operating and monitoring, three

basic types/classes result:
C Switches, circuit-breakers
C Disconnectors
C Transducers
Switches
Using the communications, the
switch state ON/OFF, tripped,
is queried and displayed in the
operator control and monitoring
system. This allows the status of the
energy distribution to be uniformly
visualized.
The operating and monitoring communications level permits off-switching using
the voltage or undervoltage coil. If the
switch has a motor drive, in addition to
off-switching, on-switching and reset
can be performed on initiation from the
operating and monitoring level.
Disconnectors
The actual disconnector setting
(ON or OFF) and, using the fuse
monitoring, the triggering of a
fuse can be displayed.
Operating cycles list

Most information in the event log
refers to position changes of the
switches and disconnectors. The operating cycles list shows these
status changes over time. This immediately demonstrates the cause and
time interdependencies of switching
operations. The operating cycles list
precisely indicates the cause that
triggered a switch operation, the
control room or a local event.
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
19:27 Uhr
Seite 5
Power distribution
- ON/OFF
- tripped
remote ON
OFF
Operating switching
OFF
- OFF
- ON/OFF/ Reset
ON
T7.3
- Actual-value display
- Limit value display
local ON
OFF
tripped
Load curves
Monitoring measured value
Q1.0
Monitoring status
P [kW]
110 A
t
Monitoring status
Q12.4
Event log
Date ident.
2000.01.14
2000.01.14
2000.01.20
2000.01.20
2000.01.15
Fig. 7/4
Time ident.
22:59:03
23:16:24
01:12:45
01:17:13
20:59:33
Site ident.
Hall B
Hall B
Hall B
Hall B
Hall F
- ON/OFF
- Fuse tripped
Plant ident.
Infeed
Infeed
Outgoing circuit
Outgoing circuit
Outgoing circuit
Device ident.
Q1.0
Q1.0
T7.3
T7.3
Q12.1

local ON
OFF
tripped
Function ident.
local OFF
local ON
UG2
UG1
local OFF
Event text
Infeed switch switched off locally
Infeed switch switched on locally
Current > 20 A
Current > 50 A
Switch disconnector switched off locally
Operating and monitoring in an electrical power distribution system
Event log
The event log documents all status
changes of the distribution and limitvalue violations. Each event consists
of date/time, site identification, plant
identification, device identification,
function identification, and a detailed
event text. Each event can be subject
to various forms of acknowledgement. An archiving is performed in
parallel to the message display.
The event log permits the long-term
tracking of the distribution status.
This provides a transparent display
of all switching operations and
limit-value violations.
Manual switching records are replaced by this electronic variant. The

entries are logged automatically,
every switching operation of a circuitbreaker, either initiated from the control room or by manual operation on
site or by tripping is recorded.
Information flow
Control-room monitoring shows online the status of the electrical power
distribution; remote switching can be
performed from here. The event log
is archived in a database and can be
analysed using additional programs/
third-party systems. The weak-point
analysis must be mentioned here as
being of particular interest. Selected
messages can be transferred directly
using SMS services and, in future,

to mobile telephones using WAP.
This initiates a faster fault clearance
and the personnel receives a detailed
cause description. The maintenance
personnel can then also be contacted
directly when it does not have any
access to the control room terminal.
The actual status of measurements
is displayed directly as a measured
value in the control room.
7/5
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
Control room
19:27 Uhr
Seite 6
Notification
Archiving
Third-party systems
SMS / mobile telephone

WAP
SQL database
Cost centres
Maintenance
Weakpoint analysis
Forecast
Operating
Monitoring
Event log
Graphical display
Switching
Status
Measured value
Test plus
date / time

Load curve
Power
distribution
U<
Fig. 7/5
Information flow
Limit-value violations are stored with

date/time in the event log. The graphical display shows the measured
value information as a load curve.
The limit-value monitoring and load
curve display makes the measured
value transparent. Thus, information
can be obtained about the time-related utilization. The information
recorded in this manner is very
important for plant extensions and
energy optimization.
7/6
The limit-value violations and load

curves are stored in archives and can
be used for cost center assignments
of the energy flows, utilization profiles,
assessment of reserves, etc. The
acquisition of all data of the electrical
power distribution represents the
first step towards power management. The display and archiving of
the power distribution information
is derived from this acquisition.
TIP_Kap_07_Engl
11.08.2005
19:27 Uhr
Seite 7
Benefits
Transition from local operation to central operating and monitoring
Central control room
C Quick overview of the current status of the plant
C Immediate response to limit-value violations
C Documentation/archiving of the distribution status
C Weakpoint analysis using the event log
Q Preventive supervision of the energy distributions and thus avoidance of plant standstills
Q Generation of SMS messages (mobile telephone). This permits a faster response to faults/events. Personnel can
undertake additional work (personnel costs 30,000 60,000 per man-year)
Load curves
C Documentation of the utilisation, e.g. of the infeeds (according to the design, the interpretation is the total of the
outgoing circuits)
Q Plant extensions can be made specifically within the existing possibilities; saving of additional infeeds
(cost >> 5,000 per infeed panel)
Q Energy consumption becomes transparent. Purchasing contracts can be signed to meet actual demand.
Power Management
Liberalized energy market
C Utilizing offer advantages
Q Reduction of the energy costs by up to 20% possible
Summary
Transition from local operation to central operating and monitoring
C Central control room
Display of the actual distribution state
C Graphical display
Graphical display of measurements and operating cycles
C Events
Documentation and archiving, forwarding as SMS services (mobile telephone)
Preparations for power management have been made

C Maximum-demand monitoring Making optimum use of energy purchasing contract
C Load curves
Documenting energy consumption
C Assignment to cost centers
Assigning energy consumption to the consumer
C Forecasts
Determining future energy requirement
C Power quality
Monitoring and documenting energy quality criteria
7/7
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:33 Uhr
Seite B
8.1 Power System Protection

8.2 Relay Design and Operation
8.3 Relay Selection Guide
8.4 Typical Protection Schemes
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite C
chapter 8
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 2
8 Protection and
Substation Control
General overview
Three trends have emerged in the
sphere of power automation: distributed intelligent electronic devices
(IEDs), open communication and
PC-assisted HMIs. Numerical relays
and computerized substation control
are now state-of-the-art.
Corporate
Network TCP/IP
Power system
control center
Station unit
Full server
IEC 60870-5-101
Station bus
The multitude of conventional, individual devices prevalent in the past

as well as comprehensive parallel
wiring are being replaced by a small
number of multifunctional devices
with serial connections.
HMI
IEC 60870-5-104
Ethernet TCP/IP
Serial Hub
IEC 61850
One design for all applications

In this respect, Siemens offers a
uniform, universal technology for the
entire functional scope of power automation equipment, both in the construction and connection of the devices and in their operation and communication. This results in uniformity
of design, coordinated interfaces and
the same operating concept being
established throughout, whether in
power system and generator protection, in measurement and recording
systems, in substation control and
protection or in telecontrol.
Fig. 8/1
The digital SICAM substation control system implements all of the control,
measurement and automation functions of a substation. Protective relays
are connected serially.
Photo 8/1
Protection and control in medium-voltage substations
All devices are highly compact and

immune to interference, and are
therefore also suitable for direct installation in switchgear cells. Furthermore, all devices and systems are
self-monitoring, which means that
previously costly maintenance can
be reduced considerably.
8/2
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 3
Rationalization of operation
by means of SCADA-like control and

high-performance PC terminals that
can all be operated in the same way
Savings in terms of space

and costs
by means of integration of many functions

into one unit and compact equipment design
Simplified planning
and operational
reliability
by means of uniform design,

coordinated interfaces and universally
identical operating software
Efficient parameterization
and operation
thanks to PC terminals with uniform operator

interfaces
High levels of reliability

and availability
by means of type-tested system technology, complete

self-monitoring and the use of proven technology
20 years of practical experience with digital protection,
more than 350,00 devices in operation (in 2004)
15 years of practical experience with substation
automation (SINAUT LSA and SICAM), over
3,000 substations in operation (in 2004)
Fig. 8/2
For the user, the entire technology from one partner has many advantages
Entire technology from one

partner
The Siemens Power Transmission
and Distribution Group supplies
devices and systems for:
C Power plant protection
C Substation control / power
system control
C Remote control (RTUs)
C Current measurement and
recording
C Measurement and monitoring
of power quality
This covers all of the measurement,
control, automation and protection
functions for substations.
Furthermore, our activities cover:
C Consulting
C Planning
C Design
C Commissioning and Service
This uniform technology from a single

source saves the customer time and
money in the planning, installation
and operation of his substations.
SIPROTEC protective relays
Siemens offers a complete spectrum
of multifunctional, numerical relays
for all applications in the field of
power system and machine
protection.
Uniform design and a metal-enclosed
construction with conventional connection terminals which is free from
electromagnetic interference in accordance with public utility requirements assure simple system design
and usage just as with conventional
relays.
Numerical measurement techniques

ensure precise operation and require
less maintenance thanks to their
continuous self-monitoring capability.
The integration of additional protective and other functions, such as
real-time operational measurements,
event and fault recording, all in one
unit economizes on space, configuration and wiring costs.
Setting and programming of the devices can be performed through the
integral, plain-text, menu-guided operator display or by using the comfortable DIGSI 4 PC software.
For communication at the telecontrol
or substation control level, devices of
the SIPROTEC 4 group can be equipped
with exchangeable communications
modules. Besides an optimal integration into the SICAM PAS substation
control system in compliance with
IEC 61850, the following protocols
are supported: PROFIBUS FMS, IEC
60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP, DNP
V3.00 and Modbus.
Thus, the on-line measurements and
fault data recorded in the protective
relays can be used for local and remote control or can be transmitted
via telephone modem connections to
the workplace of the circuit engineer.
Siemens supplies individual devices
as well as complete protection systems in factory-assembled cabinets.
For complex applications, type and
design test facilities are available together with extensive network models using the most modern simulation and evaluation techniques.
8/3
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 4
Protection and substation

automation
SICAM
power automation
SIPROTEC
substation protection
SIMEAS
power quality
SICAM PAS
power automation systems
7SJ4 and 7SJ6

Feeder protection
overcurrent/overload relays
SIMEAS R
disturbance recorder
SICAM RTU
SICAM miniRTU
SICAM microRTU
Remote terminal units
7SA5 and 7SA6

feeder protection
overcurrent/overload relays
SIMEAS Q
power quality recorders
7SD5 and 7SD610

power system protection,
differential protection and
communication
SIMEAS T
measuring transducers
7UT6
transformer protection
SIMEAS P
power meter
7UM6
generator/motor protection
7SS60 and 7VH60

busbar protection
Fig. 8/3
Product range for protection and substation control systems by Siemens
Substation control
The digital substation control systems of the SICAM family provide all
control, measurement and automation functions (e.g. transformer tap
changing) required by a switching
station. They operate with distributed
intelligence. Communication between
devices in branch circuits and the
central unit is made via fiber-optic
connections which are immune to
interference.
Devices are extremely compact and
can be built directly into mediumand high-voltage switchgear.
8/4
SICAM PAS engineering tools are

based on Microsoft operating systems, and thanks to their Windows
look & feel they are easy to use. The
PC-based SICAM PAS UI Configuration software is used for system
configuration and parameterization.
SICAM PAS UI Operation and
SICAM Value Viewer support the
user during configuration and commissioning and provide diagnostic
functions for the system in operation.
The operator interface is menuguided, with SCADA-comparable
functions, that is, with a level of convenience which was previously only
available in a power system control
center. Optional telecontrol functions
can be added to allow coupling of the
system to one or more power system control centers.
In contrast to conventional substation

control systems, digital technology
saves enormously on space and
wiring. SICAM systems are subjected
to full factory tests and are delivered
ready for operation. Furthermore,
SICAM PAS has a system-wide time
resolution of 1 ms.
Due to the special requirements of
medium- and high-voltage systems,
bay units and I/O modules withstand
voltages up to 2 kV.
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 5
Remote Terminal Units
Switchgear interlocking
Siemens RTUs fulfill all the classic

functions of remote measurement
and control. Furthermore, they provide comprehensive data pre-processing of operational and fault information, and automating functions
that are based on powerful microprocessors.
The distributed substation control

system SICAM PAS provides the
option to implement bay-specific and
inter-bay interlocking by means of
on-screen graphic planning. The
substation topology as well as infeed conditions are taken into
consideration. It prevents false
switching, thus enhancing the
safety of operating personnel
and equipment considerably.
In the classic case, connections to

the switchgear are made through
coupling relays and transducers. This
method allows an economically favorable solution when modernizing or
renewing control systems in older
installations. Alternatively, especially
for new installations, direct connection is also possible. Digital protection devices can be connected by
serial links through fiber-optic
conductors or bus systems.
Power quality
(measuring and recording)
The SIMEAS product range offers
equipment for the monitoring of
power supply quality (harmonic
content, distortion factor, peak loads,
power factor, etc.), fault recorders
(oscillostores), and measuring
transducers.
Stored data can be transmitted
manually or automatically to PC
evaluation systems where they can
be analyzed by intelligent programs.
Expert systems are also applied here.
This leads to rapid fault analysis and
valuable indicators for the improvement of network reliability.
measuring transducers with analog

and digital outputs.
Advantages for the user
The concept of the entire technology from one partner offers the
user many advantages:
C High-level security for his systems
and operational rationalization
possibilities
C Powerful system solutions with
the most modern technology
C Compliance with international
standards
C Integration in the overall system
SIPROTEC SICAM SIMATIC
C Space and cost savings
C Integration of many functions into
one unit and compact equipment
packaging
C Simple planning and safe operation
C Homogeneous design, matched
interfaces and EMI security
throughout
C Rationalized programming and
handling
For local bulk data storage and

transmission, the central processor
DAKON can be installed at substation
level. Data transmission circuits for
analog telephone or digital ISDN networks are incorporated as standard.
Connection to local or wide-area networks (LAN, WAN) is equally possible. We can also offer the SIMEAS T
series of compact and powerful
8/5
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
C Windows-based PC tools and

standardized displays
C Fast, flexible mounting and
reduced wiring
C Simple, fast commissioning
C Efficient spare part stocking,
high flexibility
C High-level operational safety
and availability
C Continuous self-monitoring and
proven technology:
C 20 years of digital relay
experience (more than 350,000
units in operation)
C 15 years of digital substation
control (more than 3,000
systems in operation)
C Rapid problem solving
C Comprehensive support and
fast response from local sales
and workshop facilities worldwide
Application notes
All devices and systems for protection, metering and control mentioned
herein are designed to be used in the
arduous environment of electrical
substations, power plants and the
various industrial application areas.
When the devices were developed,
special emphasis was placed on the
design of electromechanical interference (EMI). The devices are in accordance with IEC 60255 standards.
Detailed information is contained in
the device manuals.
Seite 6
Reliable operation of the devices is

not affected by the usual interference
from the switchgear, even when the
device is mounted directly in a lowvoltage compartment of a mediumvoltage switchgear panel. It must,
however, be ensured that the coils
of auxiliary relays located on the
same panel, or in the same cubicle,
are fitted with suitable spike-quenching elements (e.g. free-wheeling
diodes).
When used in conjunction with
switchgear for up to 1 kV or above,
all external connection cables should
be fitted with a screen grounded at
both ends and capable of carrying
currents. That means that the cross
section of the screen should be at
least 4 mm2 for a single cable and
2.5 mm2 for multiple cables in one
cable duct.
All equipment proposed in this guide
is built up either in enclosures (type
7XP20) or switchgear cabinets with
degree of protection IP51 according
to IEC 60529:
C Protected against access to
dangerous parts with a wire
C Sealed against dust
C Protected against dripping water
Photo 8/2
Installation of the numerical protection in the door of the low-voltage compartment of a mediumvoltage switchgear panel
Climatic withstand features

C Permissible temperature
during service 5 C to +55 C
storage 25 C to +55 C
transport 25 C to +70 C
C Permissible humidity
Mean value per year 75% relative
humidity; on 56 days per year 95%
relative humidity; condensation not
permissible
We recommend that units be installed in such a way that they are
not subjected to direct sunlight, nor
to large temperature variations which
may give rise to condensation.
8/6
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 7
Mechanical stress
Insulation tests
Vibration and shock during

operation
C Standards:
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
C Vibration
sinusoidal IEC 60255-21-1, class 1
10 Hz to 60 Hz:
0.035 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068-2-6
60 Hz to 150 Hz:
0.5 g acceleration
sweep rate 10 octaves/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
C Standards:
IEC 60255-5
High-voltage test (routine test)
2 kV (rms), 50 Hz
Impulse voltage withstand test
(type test)
all circuits, class III
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 J;
3 positive and 3 negative shots
at intervals of 5 s
Vibration and shock during

transport
C Standards:
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
C Vibration
sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
5 Hz to 8 Hz:
7.5 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068-2-6
8 Hz to 150 Hz:
2 g acceleration
sweep rate 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
C Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
Electromagnetic compatibility
EU conformity declaration
(CE mark)
All Siemens protection and control
products recommended in this manual comply with the EMC Directive
99/336/EEC of the Council of the
European Community and further
relevant IEC 255 standards on
electromagnetic compatibility.
All products carry the CE mark.
EMC tests; immunity
(type tests)
C Standards:
IEC 60255-22 (product standard)
EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
C High frequency
IEC 60255-22-1 class III
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s;
400 shots/s; duration 2 s
C Electrostatic discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 class III and
EN 61000-4-2 class III
4 kV contact discharge; 8 kV air
discharge; both polarities;
150 pF; Ri = 330 ohm
C High-frequency electromagnetic
field, non-modulated;
IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III
10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz
field, amplitude-modulated;
ENV 50140, class III
10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1,000 MHz,
80%; 1 kHz; AM
field, pulse-modulated;
ENV 50140/ENV 50204, class III
10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50%
C Fast transients
IEC 60255-22-4 and EN 61000-4-4,
class III
2 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst
length 15 ms; repetition rate
300 ms; both polarities;
Ri = 50 ohm; duration 1 min
C Conducted disturbances induced
by radio-frequency fields HF,
amplitude-modulated ENV 50141,
class III
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
80%; 1 kHz; AM
C Power-frequency magnetic field
EN 61000-4-8, class IV
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m
for 3 s; 50 Hz
EMC tests; emission
(type tests)
C Standard:
EN 50081-2 (generic standard)
C Interference field strength CISPR
11, EN 55011, class A 30 MHz to
100 MHz
C Conducted interference voltage,
aux. voltage CISPR 22, EN 55022,
class B
150 kHz to 30 MHz
8/7
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Instrument transformers
Instrument transformers must comply
with the applicable IEC recommendations IEC 60044, formerly IEC 60185
(current transformers) and 186
(potential transformers), ANSI/IEEE
C57.13 or other comparable
standards.
Potential transformers
Potential transformers (p.t.) in single
or double-pole design for all primary
voltages have single or dual secondary windings of 100, 110 or 120 V/KL
3,
with output ratings between 10 and
300 VA, and accuracies of 0.2, 0.5 or
1 % to suit the particular application.
Current transformers (c.t.) are usually
of the single-ratio type with wound or
bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating. Single, dual or triple secondary windings of 1 or 5 A are standard.
1 A rating, however, should be preferred, particularly in HV and EHV stations, to reduce the burden of the
connecting leads. Output power
(rated burden in VA), accuracy and
saturation characteristics (accuracylimiting factor) of the cores and secondary windings must meet the particular application.
8/8
Seite 8
The current transformer classification

code of IEC is used in the following:
Measuring cores
They are normally specified with
0.5 % or 1.0 % accuracy (class 0.5 M
or 1.0 M), and an accuracy limiting
factor of 5 or 10. The required output
power (rated burden) must be higher
than the actually connected burden.
Typical values are 5, 10, 15 VA.
Higher values are normally not necessary when only electronic meters and
recorders are connected.
A typical specification could be:
0.5 M 10, 15 VA.
Cores revenue metering
In this case, class 0.2 M is normally
required.
Protection cores
The size of the protection core depends mainly on the maximum shortcircuit current and the total burden
(internal c.t. burden, plus burden of
connecting leads, plus relay burden).
Further, an overdimensioning factor
has to be considered to cover the influence of the DC component in the
short-circuit current.
In general, an accuracy of 1% (class
5 P) is specified. The accuracy limiting factor KSSC should normally be
designed so that at least the maximum short-circuit current can be
transmitted without saturation
(DC component not considered).
This results, as a rule, in rated accuracy limiting factors of 10 or 20 dependent on the rated burden of the
current transformer in relation to the
connected burden. A typical specification for protection cores for distribution feeders is 5P10, 15 VA or
5P20, 10 VA.
The requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance are specified in IEC 60044-6.
In many practical cases, the current
transformers cannot be designed to
avoid saturation under all circumstances because of cost and space
reasons, particularly with metal-enclosed switchgear.
The Siemens relays are therefore designed to tolerate current transformer
saturation to a large extent. The numerical relays proposed in this guide
are particularly stable in this case due
to their integral saturation detection
function.
The required current transformer
accuracylimiting factor Kssc can be
determined by calculation, as shown
in Table 8/4.
The transient rated dimensioning
factor Ktd depends on the type of
relay and the primary DC time constant. For the normal case, with
short-circuit time constants lower
than 100 ms, the necessary value for
Kssc can be taken from Table 8/1.
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 9
Rb + Rct
Kssc
Kssc >
Rb + Rct
Relay type
Minimum Kssc
Kssc : Factor of the symmetrical rated

Kssc : Rms factor of the symmetrical
rated short-circuit current
Rb : Ohmic burden (rated)
Rb : Connected burden
Rct : Resistance of secondary winding
Overcurrent protection
7SJ60, 61, 62, 63, 64
Transformer
protection
7UT6
And:
Kssc > Ktd
Issc. max.
Ipn
UK
Optical waveguide
line differential
protection 7SD52/610
Line differential
(pilot wire)
protection 7SD600
, minimum is 20
Ipn
Issc. max. = Max. short-circuit current

Ipn
= Rated primary current
Ktd
= Transient dimensioning factor
Table 8/1
I>>-Setting
Iscc. max. (external fault)
for Tp 100 ms
Ipn
for Tp > 100 ms
Ipn

Ipn
and Kssc 30
Current transformer dimensioning

formulae
(Rb + Rct) Isn Kssc
Ipn
(Kssc Ipn) Line-end 1

and 3
4
4
(Kssc Ipn) Line-end 2
1.3
Isn = Nominal secondary current

Example:
IEC60044: 600/1, 15 VA, 5 P 10, Rct = 4
(15 + 4) 1 10
V = 146 V
BS: UK =
1.3
Rct = 4
Table 8/2
Numerical busbar
protection
(low-resistance) 7SS5
Distance protection
7SA522, 7SA6
1 Iscc. max. (external fault)

Ipn
2
= a
Iscc. max. (close-in fault)
Tp > 30 ms:
Tp < 50 ms:
a=1
b=4
Ipn
Current transformer definition
100 Measuring range
a=2
b=5
and
Us.t. max = 20 5 A Rb
Rb = b
Pb
Isn2
Us.t. max =
Kssc
Iscc. max. (line-end fault)

Ipn
Tp < 200 ms:

a=4
b=5
and Isn = 5 A results in
Tp : Primary time constant (system time constant)

Pb Kssc
Table 8/4
Current transformer requirements
5A
Example:
IEC 60044:
600/5, 5 P 20, 25 VA
ANSI
C57.13:
Us.t. max =
Table 8/3
= b
20
25 VA 20
=
5A
= 100 V corresponding
to Class C100
ANSI definition of current

transformers
8/9
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 10
Relay burden
Burden of the connection leads
The current transformer burdens of

the numerical relays of Siemens are
below 0.1 VA and can therefore be
neglected for a practical estimation.
Exceptions are the 7SS60 busbar
protection (2 VA) and the pilot wire
relays, 7SD600 (4 VA).
The resistance of the current loop

from the current transformer to the
relay has to be considered as follows:
Normally, intermediate current transformers needn't be used any more,

as the ratio adaptation for busbar and
transformer protection is numerically
performed in the relay.
Analog static relays in general also
have burdens below about 1 VA.
Mechanical relays, however, have a
much higher burden, up to the order
of 10 VA. This has to be considered
when older relays are connected to
the same current transformer circuit.
In any case, the relevant relay manuals should always be consulted for
the actual burden values.
Rl =
Example: Stability test of the

7SS52 numerical busbar protection
system
Assuming:
2 l
ohm
A
= Length of the single conductor

from the current transformer
to the relay in m
600/1,
5 P 10,
15 VA,
Rct = 4 Ohm
Specific resistance
l = 50 m
7SS52
A = 6 mm2
I scc.max. = 30 kA
= 0.0179 ohm mm2 (copper wire)

m
= Conductor cross section in mm2
Table 8/5
Resistance of current loop
Iscc.max.
= 30,000 A = 50
600 A
Ipn
According to Table 8/4
Kssc
>
1
2
Rb
15 VA
= 15
1 A2
50 = 25
RRelais = 0.1
2 0.0179 50
= 0.3
6
Rl
Rb
= Rl + RRelais =
= 0.3 + 0.1 = 0.4
Kssc
Rct + Rb
4 + 15
=
Kssc =
4 + 0.4
Rct + Rb
4 + 15
10 = 43.2
4 + 0.4
Result:
Rating factor Kssc (43.2) is greater
than the calculated value (25). The
stability criterion has therefore been met.
Fig. 8/4
8/10
Example: stability verification
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 11
8.1 Power System

Protection
Introduction
Siemens is one of the worlds leading
suppliers of protective equipment for
power systems.
Thousands of relays ensure first-class
performance in the transmission and
distribution networks on all voltage
levels all over the world, in countries
of tropical heat and arctic frost.
For many years, Siemens has also
significantly influenced the development of protection technology.
In 1976, the first minicomputer
(process-computer)-based protection
system was commissioned: A total
of 10 systems for 110/20-kV substations were supplied that are still
working at their customers' full
satisfaction today.
In 1985, we were the first to produce
a series of fully numerically controlled relays with standardized communication interfaces.
Today, Siemens offers a complete
program of protective relays for all
applications including numerical
busbar protection.
To date, more than 350,000 numerical protection relays from Siemens
are providing successful service, as
stand-alone devices in traditional
systems or as components of coordinated protection and substation
control.
Meanwhile, the innovative SIPROTEC 4

series has been launched, incorporating the many years of operational
experience with thousands of relays
as well as the awareness of user
requirements (power company recommendations).
State of the art
Mechanical and solid-state (static)
relays have been almost completely
phased out of our production because numerical relays are now
preferred by the users.
Advantages
C Compact design and lower cost
due to the integration of many
functions into one relay
C High availability even with less
maintenance owing to integrated
self-monitoring
C No drift (ageing) of the measuring
characteristics because of their
complete digital processing
C High availability even with less
maintenance due to digital
filtering and optimized measuring
algorithms
C Many integrated add-on functions,
for example for load monitoring
and event/fault recording
C Local operation keypad and display
designed to modern ergonomic
criteria
Photo 8/3
SIPROTEC 4 numerical relays by

Siemens
C Easy and secure reading of

information via serial interfaces
with a PC, locally or by remote
access
C Possibility to communicate with
higher-level control systems
using standardized protocols
(open communication)
Modern protection management
All the functions, for example, of a
power system protection scheme
can be incorporated in one unit:
C Distance protection with associated
add-on and monitoring functions
C Universal teleprotection interface
C Auto-reclose and synchro-check
8/11
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 12
52
21
67N
FL
79
25
SM
ER
FR
BM
85
Serial link to station or personal computer

to remote line end
ANSI-No.*)
Circuit-breaker
52
Distance protection
21
67N Directional ground-fault protection
Distance-to-fault locator
FL
Autoreclosure
79
Synchro-check
25
Carrier interface (teleprotection)
85
SM Self-monitoring
Event recording
ER
Fault recording
FR
BM Breaker monitor
*) see Table 8/6 cont.
Fig. 8/5
01.10.93
Fault report
Fault record
Relay monitor
Breaker
monitor
Supervisory
control
Numerical relays, increased availability of information
Protection-related information can be

called up on-line or off-line, such as:
C Distance to fault
C Fault currents and voltages
C Relay operation and data
(fault-detector pickup,
operating times etc.)
C Set values
C Line load data (kV, A, MW, kVAr)
To fulfill vital protection redundancy
requirements, only those functions
which are interdependent and directly associated with each other
are integrated in the same unit. For
backup protection, one or more
additional units have to be provided.
8/12
Load
monitor
kA,
kV,
Hz,
MW,
MVAr,
MVA
All relays can stand fully alone. Thus,

the traditional protection concept of
separate main and alternate protection as well as the external connection to the outdoor switchyard remain
unchanged.
One feeder, one relay concept
Analog protection schemes have
been engineered and assembled
from individual relays. Interwiring
between these relays and scheme
testing have been carried out
manually in the workshop.
Data sharing now allows for the
integration of several protection tasks
into one single numerical relay.
Only a small number of external devices may be required for completion
of the overall design concept. This
has significantly lowered the costs of

engineering, assembly, panel wiring,
testing and commissioning. The reliability of the protection scheme has
been highly increased.
Engineering has moved from
schematic diagrams towards a parameter definition procedure. The
documentation is provided by the relay itself. Free allocation of LED operation indicators and output contacts
provides more application design
flexibility.
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 13
Measuring function included

The additional transducer was rather
used for protecting measuring instruments under system fault conditions.
Due to the low thermal withstand capability of the measuring instruments,
they could not be connected to the
protective current transformer directly.
When numerical protection technology is employed, protective current
transformers are in many cases accurate enough to take operational
measurements. Consequently, additional transducers and measuring instruments are now only necessary
where high accuracy is required, e.g.
for metering used for electricity bills.
Recording
Personal computer
DIGSI
Assigning
Protection
Laptop
DIGSI
Recording and
confirmation
Online remote data exchange

A powerful serial data link provides
for interrogation of digitized measured values and other information
stored in the protection units, for
printout and further processing at the
substation or system control level.
In the opposite direction, settings
may be altered or test routines initiated from a remote control center.
For greater distances, especially in
outdoor switchyards, fiber-optic cables are preferably used. This technique has the advantage that it is totally unaffected by electromagnetic
interference.
Fig. 8/6
PC-aided setting procedure of numerical protection relays
to remote control
System level
Substation level
Coordinated
protection and
control
Modem
(option)
ERTU
RTU
Data collection
device
Bay level
52
Offline communication with

numerical relays
Relay
Control
A simple built-in operator keypad

which requires no special software
knowledge or code word tables is
used for parameter input and
readout.
Fig. 8/7
Communication options
8/13
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 14
This allows operator dialog with the

protective relay. Answers appear
largely in plain text on the display of
the operator panel. Dialog is divided
into three main stages:
C Input, alteration and readout of
settings
C Testing the functions of the
protective device and
C Readout of relay operation data
for the three last system faults
and the auto-reclose counter
Setpoints
10,000
setpoints
200
setpoints
Modern power system

protection management
20
setpoints
A notebook PC may be used for

upgraded protection management.
The MS Windows-compatible relay
operation program DIGSI 4 is available for entering and readout of setpoints and archiving of protection
data.
Fig.8/8
8/14
1
bay
system
4
flags
substation
OH line
1000
Parameter
1000
Parameter
1100
Line data C
1000
Parameter
1100
1000
Line data
B
1200
Parameter
1100
O/C Phase settings
Line data
A
1200
1100
Line data
1200
1500
O/C Phase
1500settings
O/C Ground settings
O/C Phase
settings
1500
O/C Ground
280 settings
Fault recording
O/C phase
1500settings
O/C Ground
280 settings
Fault recording
3900
Breaker fail
O/C earth
280settings
Fault recording
3900
Breaker fail
280
Fault recording
3900
Breaker fail
3900
Breaker fail
Fig. 8/9
300 faults p. a.
approx. 6,000 km
OHL (fault rate:
5 p. a. and
100 km)
System-wide setting and relay operation library
1200
Vice versa, after a system fault, the

relay memory can be uploaded to a
PC, and comprehensive fault analysis
can then take place in the engineers
office.
1,200
flags
p. a.
system
approx.
500
relays
1
substation
The relays may be set in 2 steps.

First, all relay settings are prepared
in the office with the aid of a local PC
and stored on a diskette or the hard
disk. On site, the settings can then
be downloaded from a PC into the
relay. The relay confirms the settings
and thus provides an unquestionable
record.
Alternatively, the entire relay dialog

can be guided from any remote location through a modem-telephone
connection (Fig. 8/7).
Relay operations
Alternate parameter groups
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 15
Relay data management
Adaptive relaying
Analog distribution-type relays have

some 2030 setpoints. If we consider a power system with about 500
relays, then the number adds up to
10,000 settings. This requires considerable expenditure in setting the
relays and filing retrieval setpoints.
Numerical relays now offer secure,

convenient and comprehensive adjustment to changing conditions.
Adjustments may be initiated either
by the relays own intelligence or
from outside via contacts or serial
telegrams. Modern numerical relays
contain a number of parameter sets
that can be pre-tested during commissioning of the scheme (Fig. 8/9).
One set is normally operative. Transfer to the other sets can be controlled via binary inputs or serial data
link. There are a number of applications for which multiple setting
groups can upgrade the scheme
performance, for example:
A personal computer-aided man-machine dialog and archiving program,

e.g. DIGSI 4, assists the relay engineer in data filing and retrieval.
The program files all settings systematically in substation-feeder-relay order.
Corrective rather than preventive
maintenance
Numerical relays monitor their own
hardware and software. Exhaustive
self-monitoring and failure diagnostic
routines are not restricted to the protective relay itself, but are methodically carried through from current
transformer circuits to tripping relay
coils.
Equipment failures and faults in the
current transformer circuits are immediately recorded and signaled.
Thus, the service personnel are now
able to correct the failure upon occurrence, resulting in a significantly upgraded availability of the protection
system.
d) For auto-reclose programs, i.e.

instantaneous operation for first
trip and delayed operation after
unsuccessful reclosure.
e) For cold load pickup problems
where high starting currents may
cause relay operation.
f) For ring open or ring closed
operation.
a) For use as a voltage-dependent

control of o/c relay pickup values
to overcome alternator fault current
decrement to below normal load
current when the AVR is not in
automatic operation.
b) For maintaining short operation
times with lower fault currents,
e.g. automatic change of settings
if one supply transformer is taken
out of service.
c) For switch-onto-fault protection
to provide shorter time settings
when energizing a circuit after
maintenance. The normal settings
can be restored automatically after
a time delay.
8/15
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 16
8.2 Relay Design and

Operation
Mode of operation
Numerical protective relays operate
on the basis of numerical measuring
principles. The analog measured values of current and voltage are decoupled electrically from the system's
secondary circuits via input transducers (Fig. 8/10). After analog filtering,
the sampling and the analog-to-digital
conversion take place. The sampling
rate is, depending on the different
protection principles, between 12
and 20 samples per period. With certain devices (e.g. generator protection) a continuous adjustment of the
sampling rate takes place depending
on the actual system frequency.
The protection principle is based on

a cyclic calculation algorithm, utilizing
the sampled current and voltage analog measured values. The fault detection determined by this process must
be established in several sequential
calculations before protection
reactions can follow.
A trip command is transferred to the
command relay by the processor, utilizing a dual-channel control.
The numerical protection concept offers a multitude of advantages, especially with regard to higher security,
reliability and user friendliness, such
as:
C High measurement accuracy: The

high utilization of adaptive algorithms produce accurate results
even during problematic conditions
C Good long-term stability: Due to
the digital mode of operation, drift
phenomena at components due to
ageing do not lead to changes in
accuracy of measurement or time
delays
C Security against over- and underfunctioning: With this concept, the
danger of an undetected defect or
malfunction in the device causing
protection failure in the event of a
line fault is clearly reduced when
compared to conventional protection technology. Cyclical and preventive maintenance services have
therefore become largely obsolete.
PC interface, substation control interface
Meas.
inputs
Input
filter
Current
inputs
(100 x /N,
1 s)
Amplifier
Input/
output
ports
V.24
FO
serial
interfaces
Binary
inputs
Alarm
relay
Command
relay
Voltage
inputs
(140 V
continuous)
100 V/1 A,
5 A analog
A/D
converter
Processor
system
0001
0101
0011
10 V
analog
Fig. 8/10
Block diagram of numerical protection
8/16
Memory:
RAM
EEPROM
EPROM
digital
Input/
output
units
Input/output
contacts
LED
displays
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:43 Uhr
Seite 17
Plausibility check of input quantities

e. g.iL1 + iL2 + iL3 = iE
uL1 + uL2 + uL3 = uE
Check of analog-to-digital conversion

by comparison with
converted reference quantities
A
D
The integrated self-monitoring

system (Fig. 8/11) encompasses
the following areas:
C Analog inputs
C Microprocessor system
C Command relays
Implemented functions
Microprocessor
system
Hardware and software monitoring of

the microprocessor system incl. memory,
e.g. by watchdog and
cyclic memory checks
Relay
Monitoring of the tripping relays

operated via dual channels
SIPROTEC relays are available with

a variety of protective functions (see
relay charts, page 25 cont.). The high
processing power of modern numerical devices allow further integration
of non-protective add-on functions.
The question as to whether separate
or combined relays should be used
for protection and control cannot be
uniformly answered. In transmissiontype substations, separation into
independent hardware units is still
preferred, whereas on the distribution level, a trend towards higher
function integration can be observed.
Here, combined feeder relays for
protection, monitoring and control
are gaining ground (Photo 8/4).
Tripping check or test reclosure by local

or remote operation (not automatic)
Fig. 8/11
Self-monitoring system
Photo 8/4
Switchgear with numerical

relay (7SJ62) and traditional control
With the SIPROTEC 4 series (types

7SJ61, 62 and 63), Siemens supports
both stand-alone and combined solutions on the basis of a single hardware and software platform.
The user can decide within wide limits on the configuration of the control
and protection functions in the
feeder, without compromising the
reliability of the protection functions
(Fig. 8/12).
Switchgear with combined protection
and control relay (7SJ63)
8/17
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:43 Uhr
Seite 18
Busbar
52
7SJ61/62/63/64
Local, remote control
Command/checkback
Motor
control
(only
7SJ63/64)
Trip
monitor
7SJ62/63/64
Measurements during operation
CFC logic
Synchronization
(only 7SJ64)
Limit values,
mean values,
min/max memory
Final
OFF
Energy counter values

as count pulses
Thermobox
connection
Operation Communications
Fault
Motor protection element
modules
recording logic Bearing
RS232/485/LWL
temp.
I< Startup time
IEC 61850
ICE 60870-5-103
PROFIBUS FMS/DP
SwitchLocked
DNP3.0
on
rotor
MODBUS RTU
lock
Inrush
lock
U, f, P element
calculated
(only 7SJ64)
Fault
detector
Interm.
ground fault
Ground fault
detection element
Switch failure
protection
High-imp.
Autodiff.
reclosure
Fig. 8/12
Directional element
Phase-sequence
monitoring
Directional ground fault

detection element
SIPROTEC 4 relay types 7SJ61/62/63/64, implemented functions
The following solutions are available

within one relay family:
C Separate control and protection
relays
C Protective relays including remote
control of the feeder breaker via
the serial communication link
C Combined feeder relays for
protection, monitoring and control
DIGSI 4
Telephone
connection
SICAM PAS
IEC 61850 or IEC 60870-5-103

Modem
IEC 6870-5
DIGSI 4
Mixed use of the different relay

types is easily possible on account of
the uniform operation and communication procedures.
IEC 60870-5-103
Fig. 8/13
8/18
SIPROTEC 4 relays, options for communication
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:43 Uhr
Seite 19
Integration of relays into

substation control
Basically, all Siemens numerical
relays are equipped with an an interface acc. to IEC 60870-5-103 for
open communication with substation
control systems either by Siemens
(SICAM) or by any other supplier. The
relays of the latest SIPROTEC 4 series, however, are even more flexible
and equipped with several communication options. SIPROTEC 4 relays
can still be connected to the SICAM
system or to a communications
system of another supplier via
IEC 60870-5-103.
SIPROTEC 4 protection systems and
SICAM substation control technology
have a uniform design. Communication is based on the PROFIBUS
standard.
IEC 61850 has been established as
a global standard by users and manufacturers. The agreed objective of
this standard is to create a comprehensive communications solution for
substations. Thus, the user is provided with open communication systems which are based on Ethernet
technology.
SIPROTEC protective relays and bay
control units are the first devices released in mid 2004 which use a communications protocol in compliance
with IEC 61850. The station configurator, which is part of the DIGSI 4
operating software, can be used to
configure SIPROTEC relays as well
as non-Siemens relays via IEC 61850.
1
1
2
3
4
1 Large illuminated display

2 Cursor keys
3 LED with reset key
Photo 8/5
4 Control (7SJ61/62 uses

function keys)
5 Key switches
Front view of the

7SJ62 protective relay
SICAM PAS, the new substation

control system by Siemens has been
designed as an open system which
employs IEC 61580 as communication standard between the bay and
station control level. IEC 61580 supports interoperability and integration
of substation control systems which
facilitates system engineering independent of the manufacturer and
reduces the planning expense at
the same time.
Direct operation of a
SIPROTEC 4 relay
All operator actions can be executed
and information displayed on an
integrated user interface.
6 Freely programmable
function keys
7 Numerical keypad
Front view of the 7SJ63 relay

combining protection, monitoring
and control functions
C Large non-reflective back-lit display

C Programmable (freely assignable)
LED's for important messages
C Arrows arrangement of the keys
for easy navigation in the
function tree
C Operator-friendly input of the setting values via the numeric keys or
with a PC by using the DIGSI 4
software
C Command input protected by
key lock (6MD63/7SJ63 only)
or password
C Four programmable keys for
frequently used functions
at the touch of a button
Many advantages are already to be

found on the clear and user-friendly
front panel:
C Ergonomic arrangement and
grouping of the keys
8/19
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:43 Uhr
DIGSI 4 the operating software for all SIPROTEC relays

For the user, DIGSI is synonymous
with convenient, user-friendly parameterizing and operation of numerical protection relays. DIGSI 4 is a logical innovation for operation of protection and bay control units of the
SIPROTEC 4 family.
The PC software DIGSI 4 is the human-machine interface between the
user and the SIPROTEC 4 units. It
features modern, intuitive operating
procedures. With DIGSI 4, the
SIPROTEC 4 units can be configured
and queried.
C The interface provides you only
with what is really necessary,
irrespective of which unit you
are currently configuring.
C Contextual menus for every situation provide you with made-tomeasure functionality searching
through menu hierarchies is a
thing of the past.
C Explorer operation on the MS
Windows standard shows the
options in logically structured form.
C Even with routing, you have the
overall picture a matrix shows
you at a glance, for example, which
LED's are linked to which protection control function(s). It just takes
a click with the mouse to establish
these links by a fingertip.
C Thus, you can also use the PC to
link up with the relay via star coupler or channel switch, as well as
via the PROFIBUS of a substation
control system. The integrated administrating system ensures clear
addressing of the feeders and relays of a substation.
C Access authorization by means of
passwords protects the individual
functions, such as parameterizing,
commissioning and control, from
unauthorized access.
8/20
Seite 20
C When configuring the operator environment and interfaces, we have

attached importance to continuity
with the SICAM automation system. This means that you can
readily use DIGSI 4 on the station
control level in conjunction with
SICAM.
Display editor (Photo 8/10)

A display editor is available to design
the display of SIPROTEC 4 units. The
predefined symbol sets can be expanded to suit the user. The drawing
of a one-line diagram is extremely
simple. Load monitoring values (analog values) can be set, if required.
Configuration matrix (routing)

The DIGSI 4 matrix allows the user to
see the overall view of the relay configuration at a glance. For example,
you can display all the LED's that are
linked to binary inputs or show external signals that are connected to the
relay. And with one mouse click,
connections can be switched.
Commissioning
Special attention has been paid to
commissioning. All binary inputs and
outputs can be read and set directly.
This can simplify the wire checking
process significantly for the user.
CFC: graphic configuration
With the help of the graphical CFC
(Continuous Function Chart) Tool, you
can configure interlocks and switching sequences simply by drawing the
logic sequences; no special knowledge of software is required. Logical
elements such as AND, OR and time
elements are available.
Hardware and software platform
C Pentium 1,6 GHz or better,
with at least 128 Mbytes RAM
C DIGSI 4 requires more than
500 Mbytes hard disk space
C One free serial interface to the
protection device
(COM 1 or COM 4)
C One DVD/CD-ROM drive
(required for installation)
C WINDOWS 2000, or
XP Professional
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 21
Photo 8/6
DIGSI 4 Manager
Photo 8/7
Functional scope
Photo 8/8
Photo 8/9
DIGSI 4 routing matrix
Photo 8/10
Display editor
Photo 8/11
CFC logic with module library
The device with all its parameters and process data
8/21
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Fault analysis
The evaluation of faults is simplified
by numerical protection technology.
In the event of a fault in the power
system, all events as well as the analog traces of the measured voltages
and currents are recorded.
The following types of memory have
been integrated in the numerical
protection relay:
C 1 operational event memory. Alarms
that are not directly assigned to a
fault in the network (e.g. monitoring
alarms, alternation of a set value,
blocking of the automatic reclosure
function).
C 5 fault-event histories. Alarms that
occurred during the last 3 faults on
the network (e.g. type of fault detection, trip commands, fault location, auto-reclose commands). A
reclose cycle with one or more
reclosures is treated as one fault
history. Each new fault in the
network overrides the oldest
fault history.
C A memory for the fault recordings
for voltage and current. Up to 8
fault recordings are stored. The
fault recording memory is organized
as a ring buffer, i.e. a new fault
entry overrides the oldest fault
record.
C 1 ground-fault event memory (optional for isolated or impedance
grounded networks). Event recording of the sensitive ground fault
detector (e.g. faulty phase, real
component of residual current).
8/22
Seite 22
The time tag attached to the fault

records is the relative time of fault
detection with a resolution of 1 ms.
Devices with integrated battery backup clock store operational events and
fault detection events with the internal clock time and a data stamp.
The memory for operational events
and fault record events is protected
against failure of auxiliary supply with
battery back-up supply. The integrated operator interface or a PC supported by the DIGSI 4 programming
tool is used to retrieve fault reports
as well as for the input of settings
and routing.
Evaluation of fault records
Readout of the fault record by DIGSI 4
is done by fault-proof scanning procedures in accordance with the standard recommendations for transmission of fault records.
A fault record can also be read out repeatedly. In addition to analog values,
such as voltage and current, binary
tracks can also be transferred and
presented.
DIGSI 4 is supplied together with the
SIGRA (DIGSI 4 Graphic) program,
which provides the customer with
full graphical operating and evaluation
functionality like that of the digital
fault recorders (oscillostores) by
Siemens (see Photo 8/12).
Photo 8/12
Display and evaluation of a fault

record using DIGSI 4 software
Real-time presentation of analog

disturbance records, overlaying and
zooming of curves and visualization
of binary tracks (e.g. trip command,
reclose command, etc.) are also part
of the extensive graphical functionality, as are setting of measurement
cursors, spectrum analysis and fault
resistance derivation.
Data security, data interfaces
DIGSI 4 is a closed system as far as
protection parameter security is concerned. The security of the stored
data of the operating PC is ensured
by checksums. This means that it is
only possible to change data with
DIGSI 4, which subsequently calculates a checksum for the changed
data and stores it with the data.
Changes in the data and thus in
safety-related protection data are
reliably recorded.
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 23
DIGSI 4 is, however, also an open

system. The data export function
supports export of parameterization
and routing data in standard ASCII
format. This permits simple access to
these data by other programs, such
as test programs, without endangering the security of data within the
DIGSI 4 program system.
Office
Analog
ISDN
Modem
DIGSI
PC, remotely located
With the import and export of fault

records in IEEE standard format
COMTRADE (ANSI), a high-performance data interface is produced
which supports import and export of
fault records into the DIGSI 4 partner
program SIGRA.
Substation
This enables the export of fault

records from Siemens protection
units to customer-specific programs
via the COMTRADE format.
RS232
Star coupler
DIGSI
PC, centrally located
in the substation
(option)
7XV53
Modem,
optionally with
call-back function
Signal converter
RS232
RS485 bus
Remote relay interrogation
RS485
The numerical relay range of Siemens

can also be operated from a remotely
located PC via modem-telephone
connection.
Up to 254 relays can be addressed
via one modem connection if the
7XV53 star coupler is used as a
communication node (Fig. 8/14).
The relays are connected to the star
coupler via optical fiber links. Every
protection device which belongs to
a DIGSI 4 substation structure has
a unique address.
7SJ60
Fig. 8/14
7RW60
7SD60
7**5
7**6
Remote relay communication
The relays are always listening, but

only the addressed one answers the
operator command which comes
from the central PC.
If the relay located in a station is to
be operated from a remote office,
then a device file is opened in DIGSI 4
and the protection dialog is chosen
via modem.
This way, secure and time-saving remote setting and readout of data are
possible.
Remote diagnostics and control of
test routines are also possible without the need of on-site checks of
the substation.
After password input, DIGSI 4 establishes a connection to the protection

device after receiving a call-back
from the system.
8/23
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Enclosures and terminal systems

The protection devices and the corresponding supplementary devices are
available mainly in 7XP20 housings.
Installation of the modules in a cabinet without the enclosure is not
permissible.
The width of the housing conforms
to the 19" system with the divisions
1/6, 1/3, 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19" rack. The
termination module is located at the
rear of devices for panel flush mounting or cabinet mounting.
Screw terminals are available for
devices intended for:
C Panel and cabinet mounting
and
C Devices with a separate operator
station
The following screw-connection
types are to be distinguished:
C Connector modules for voltage connection and
C Connector modules for current connection
Clamping screws are slotted screws
which shall be tightened with a
screw driver. A simple, 6 x 1 slotted
screw driver is suitable for this type
of screw heads.
Seite 24
Ring tongue connectors and forked

cable lugs can be used for connection. To meet the insulation path requirements, insulated cable lugs
must be used. Or else, the crimping
zone must be insulated by other suitable means (e.g. by covering it with
shrinkdown plastic tubing).
The following requirements must
be observed:
Cable lugs
Bolt diameter is 4 mm; maximum
outer diameter is 10 mm;
for cable cross sections of 1.0 mm
to 2.6 mm AWG 16 to 14 accordingly.
Only use copper conductors!
Direct connection
Solid conductors or litz conductors
with end sleeves; for cable cross
sections of 0.5 mm to 2.6 mm AWG
20 to 14 accordingly.
The terminating end of the single
strand or conductor must be pushed
into the terminal compartment in
such a way that it will be pulled into
it when the clamping screw is tightened. Only use copper conductors!
Wire stripping length
9 mm to 10 mm for solid conductors.
Tightening torque
Max. 1.8 Nm.
The heavy-duty current plug connectors provide automatic short-circuiting of the current transformer circuits
when the modules are withdrawn.
Whenever secondary circuits of
current transformers are concerned,
8/24
special precautions are to be taken.

In the housing version for surface
mounting, the terminals are wired up
on terminal strips on the top and bottom of the device. For this purpose
two-tier terminal blocks are used to
attain the required number of terminals.
According to IEC 60529, the degree
of protection is indicated by the identifying IP, followed by a number for the
degree of protection. The first digit
indicates the protection against accidental contact and ingress of solid
foreign bodies, the second digit indicates the protection against water.
7XP20 housings are protected
against ingress of dangerous parts,
dust and dripping water (IP 51).
For mounting of devices into
switchgear cabinets, 8MC switchgear
cabinets are recommended.
The standard cabinet has the
following dimensions:
2,200 mm x 900 mm x 600 mm
(H x W x D). These cabinets are provided with a 44 U high mounting rack
(standard height unit U = 44.45 mm).
It can swivel as much as 180 in a
swing frame. The rack provides for a
mounting width of 19", allowing, for
example, 2 devices with a width of
1/2 x 19" to be mounted. The devices
in the 7XP20 housing are secured to
rails by screws. Module racks are not
required.
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 25
Pilot wire differential

Optical waveguide
current comparison
Overcurrent
7SD600
7SD610
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SJ600
7SJ602
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7VH60
7UT612
7UT613
7UT63
7SS60
ANSI No.1)
Description
14
Locked rotor
21
Distance protection, phase
Distance protection, ground
21FL
Fault locator
C
C
C
21N
24
Overfluxing ( U/f)
25
Synchro-check
Undervoltage
V
V
27
V
V
27/34
U/f protection
voltage/frequency protection
32
Directional power
Forward power
32R
Reverse power
37
Undercurrent or underpower
V
V
V
C
32F
40
Protection against under-excitation
46
Load unbalance protection
47
Phase sequence monitoring
48
Start-up current-time monitoring
49
Thermal overload
49R
Rotor overload protection
49S
Stator overload protection
50
Instantaneous overcurrent
50BF
Breaker failure
C
C
V
Instantaneous ground fault overcurrent
C
C
V
50N
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
C
C
51GN
Stator ground-fault overcurrent
51
Overcurrent with time delay
Type
Protective functions
C Standard function
1)
Differential
Distance protection
7SA6
8.3 Relay Selection Guide
C
C
V
C
C
V
C
C
V
V Option
ANSI (American National Standards Institute) /IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers)
C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers
Table 8/6
Relay selection guide
8/25
Overcurrent
7SD610
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SJ600
7SJ602
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7VH60
7UT612
7UT613
7UT63
7SS60
ANSI No.1)
Description
51N
Ground-fault overcurrent
with time delay
51V
Voltage-dependent
overcurrent-time protection
59
Overvoltage
V
C
V
C
V
C
Residual voltage ground-fault protection
V
V
59N
64
100% rotor ground fault protection (20 Hz)
64R
Rotor ground fault
67
Directional overcurrent
C
C
Directional ground-fault overcurrent
C
C
67N
C
C
67G
Stator ground fault,

directional overcurrent
68
Oscillation detection (Block Z <)
Trip circuit monitoring
V
C
74TC
78
Out-of-step protection
79
Autoreclose
V
V
V
V
V
V
Frequency relay
V
C
81
81R
Frequency change protection
85
Carrier interface
V
C
C
C
Lockout
C
C
86
87G
Differential protection, generator
87T
Differential protection, transformer
87BB
Differential protection, busbar
87M
Differential protection, motor
87L
Differential protection, line
87N
Ground-fault differential protection
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
Type
C Standard function
1)
Differential
Pilot wire differential

Optical waveguide
current comparison
Seite 26
7SD600
19:44 Uhr
Distance protection
11.08.2005
7SA6
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
V Option
Table 8/7
8/26
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 27
Synchronization
Breaker failure
7UM61
7UM62
7VE6
7SV600
7RW600 Voltage, frequency
Generator and motor

protection
ANSI No.1)
Description
14
Locked rotor
C
V
Distance protection, phase
C
V
21
21N
Distance protection, ground
21FL
Fault locator
24
Overfluxing ( U/f)
25
Synchro-check
27
Undervoltage
U/f protection
voltage/frequency protection
C
C
27/34
C
C
C
V
32
Directional power
Forward power
32R
Reverse power
V
C
37
Undercurrent or underpower
40
Protection against under-excitation
Load unbalance protection
47
Phase sequence monitoring
48
Start-up current-time monitoring
49
Thermal overload
V
V
C
V
C
46
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
V
C
32F
49R
Rotor overload protection
49S
Stator overload protection
50N
Instantaneous ground fault overcurrent
50BF
Breaker failure
51GN
Stator ground-fault overcurrent
51
Overcurrent with time delay
C
C
C
C
C
C
Instantaneous overcurrent
C
C
C
C
50
Type
C Standard function
1)
V Option
Table 8/8
8/27
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 28
Synchronization
Breaker failure
7UM61
7UM62
7VE6
7SV600
7RW600 Voltage, frequency
Generator and motor

protection
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
ANSI No.1)
Description
51N
Ground-fault overcurrent
with time delay
51V
Voltage-dependent
overcurrent-time protection
59
Overvoltage
Residual voltage ground-fault protection
C
C
64
100% rotor ground fault protection (20 Hz)
64R
Rotor ground fault
67
Directional overcurrent
C
C
C
C
C
C
V
C
C
C
C
59N
Type
67N
Directional ground-fault overcurrent
67G
Stator ground fault,

directional overcurrent
68
Oscillation detection (Block Z <)
74TC
Trip circuit monitoring
78
Out-of-step protection
V
C
V
79
Autoreclose
81
Frequency relay
Frequency change protection
C
V
V
V
V
V
81R
C
V
Vector jump relay
C
V
V
85
Carrier interface
86
Lockout
Differential protection, generator
87T
Differential protection, transformer
C
C
C
87G
87BB
Differential protection, busbar
87M
Differential protection, motor
87L
Differential protection, line
87N
Ground-fault differential protection
C Standard function
1)
V Option
Table 8/9
8/28
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 29

Infeed
Transformer
protection,
see Fig. 8/20
A
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
B
Further
feeders
51
51N
46
ARC
8.4 Typical Protection

Schemes
7SJ60
79
2)
1)
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
51
51N
7SJ60
46
Radial systems
Notes on Fig. 8/15
1)ANSI no. 79 only for reclosure with
overhead lines.
2)Negative sequence o/c protection
46 as back-up protection against
asymmetrical faults.
General notes:
C The relay (D) with the largest distance from the infeed point has the
shortest tripping time. Relays further upstream have to be timegraded against the next downstream relay in steps of about 0.3
seconds.
C Dependent curves can be selected
according to the following criteria:
C Definite time:
Source impedance is large compared to the line impedance, i.e.
small current variation between
near and far end faults
C Inverse time:
Longer lines, where the fault cur
rent is much less at the end of the
line than at the local end.
C Highly or extremely inverse time:
Lines where the line impedance is
large compared to the source impedance (high difference for closein and remote faults) or lines,
where coordination with fuses or
reclosers is necessary. Steeper
characteristics also provide higher
stability on service restoration
(probes for cold load pickup and
transformer inrush currents).
Load
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
51
51N
7SJ60
46
* Alternatives:
7SJ45/46, 7SJ61
Load
Fig. 8/15
Load
Protection scheme with definite-time overcurrent-time protection
Infeed
Transformer protection,
see Fig. 8/22
52
52
7SJ60*
52
7SJ60*
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t

51
51N
46
>
49
52
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t

51
51N
46
>
49
* Alternatives:
7SJ45/46, 7SJ61
Fig. 8/16
Protection scheme for ring circuit
Ring circuits
General notes on Fig. 8/16
C Tripping times of overcurrent relays
must be coordinated with downstream fuses of load transformers.
(Highly inverse time characteristic
with about 0.2 s grading-time delay

to be preferred)
C Thermal overload protection for the
cables (option)
C Negative sequence o/c protection
46 as sensitive protection against
unsymmetrical faults (option)
8/29
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 30
Infeed
52
I>>,
I>, t
50/
51
Distribution feeder with reclosers

General notes on Fig. 8/17:
C The feeder relay operating characteristics, delay times and autoreclosure cycles must be carefully coordinated with downstream reclosers,
switch disconnectors and fuses.
The instantaneous zone 50/50N is
normally set to reach out to the first
main feeder sectionalizing point. It
has to ensure fast clearing of closein faults and prevent blowing of
fuses in this area (fuse saving).
Fast autoreclosure is initiated in this
case. Further time-delayed tripping
and reclosure steps (normally 2 or 3)
have to be graded against the
recloser.
C The o/c relay should automatically
switch over to less sensitive characteristics after longer load interruption times to enable overriding of
subsequent cold load pickup and
transformer inrush currents.
52
IE>>, I2>, t
IE>, t
50N/
51N
7SJ60
7SJ61
46
79
Autoreclose
Further
feeders
Recloser
Sectionalizers
Fuses
Fig. 8/17
Protection scheme for distribution feeder
Infeed
52
52
I>, t IE>, t
51
51N
>
I2>, t
49
46
52
7SJ60
67
Protection
same as
line or cable 1
OH line or
cable 2
OH line or
cable 1
67N
51
51N
7SJ62
52
52
52
Fig. 8/18
52
52
Load
Load
Protection concept for parallel lines
Parallel lines
C This configuration is preferably
used for the uninterrupted supply
of important consumers without
significant backfeed.
C The directional o/c protection
67/67N trips instantaneously for
8/30
faults on the protected line. This

allows the saving of one timegrading interval for the o/c relays
at the infeed.
C The o/c relay functions 51/51N
have each to be time-graded
against the relays located
upstream.
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 31

Infeed
52
52
52
7SJ60
1)
79
52
2)
51N/
51N
Cables or short overhead lines

with infeed from both ends
Line or
cable
2) Overload protection only

with cables
3) Differential protection options:
C Type 7SD610 with direct fiber-optic
connection up to about 35 km (approx. 22 miles) or via a 64 kbit/s
channel of a general purpose PCM
connection (optical waveguide,
microwave)
C Type 7SD600 with 2-wire pilot
cables up to about 12 km
(approx. 7.5 miles)
7SJ60
7SD600
or
7SD610
4)
7SD600
or
7SD610
4)
Same
protection
for parallel line,
if applicable
3)
51N/
51N
Notes on Fig. 8/19:

1) Auto-reclosure only with
overhead lines
49
87L
49
87L
2)
79
52
52
1)
52
52
Load
Fig. 8/19
52
52
52
Backfeed
Protection scheme using differential protection
HV infeed
52
4) Functions 49 and 79 only with relays of type 7SD610. 7SD600 is a

cost-effective solution where only
the function 87L is required (external 4AM4930 current summation
transformer to be installed
separately).
63
I>>
I>, t
IE>
> I2>, t
50
51
50N
49
RN
46
7SJ60
Optional resistor or
reactor
I>>
87N
51G
52
7VH60
7SJ60
IE>
Distribution bus
52
o/c relay
Load
Fig. 8/20
Fuse
Load
Protection scheme for small transformers
Small transformer infeed

C Ground faults on the secondary
side are detected by current relay
51G which, however, has to be
time-graded against downstream
feeder protection relays. The restricted ground-fault relay 87N may
additionally be used to achieve fast
clearance of earth faults in the secondary transformer winding. Relay
7VH80 is of the high-impedance

type and requires class X current
transformers with similar transformation ratio.
C Primary breaker and relay may be
replaced by fuses.
8/31
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 32
Dual infeed with single

transformer
Protection line 1
same as line 2
Notes on Fig. 8/21:

1) Line current transformers are to be
connected to isolate stabilizing inputs of the differential relay 87T in
order to assure stability in case of
line-through-fault currents.
Protection line 2
21/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N
52
52
7SJ60 oder
7SJ61
2) Relay 7UT613 provides numerical

ratio and vector group adaptation.
Matching transformers, as used
with traditional relays, are therefore no longer necessary.
I>>
I>, t
IE>, t
50
51
51N
46
49
I2>
>
63
Parallel incoming to transformer

feeders
87N
7SJ60
Note on Fig. 8/22:

The directional functions 67 and
67N do not apply for cases where
the transformers are equipped with
transformer differential relays 87T.
I>>
IE>
51
51N
87T
7UT613
51G
7SJ60
52
52
52
Load
bus
52
Load
Fig. 8/21
Transformer protection scheme
HV infeed 1
52
I>>
I>, t
50
51
63
51G
HV infeed 2
7SJ60 or
7SJ61
IE>, t >
51N
46
Protection
same as
infeed 1
7SJ62
I>
I>, t IE>, t
IE>, t
49
52
I2>, t
51
67
51N
IE>
67N
7SJ60
1)
52
52
Load
bus
52
52
Load
Fig. 8/22
8/32
52
Load
Protection scheme for transformers connected in parallel
Load
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 33
Small and medium-sized motors

< 1 MW
52
With effective or low-resistance

grounded infeed
(IIE IN Motor)
General note on Fig. 8/23:
Applicable to low-voltage motors and
high-voltage motors with low-resistance grounded infeed (IE IN Motor).
IE>
>
50
51N
49
Locked
rotor
I2>
49
CR
46
7SJ60
M
Fig. 8/23
Protection scheme for small motors
With high-resistance grounded infeed (IIE IN Motor)
52
Notes on Fig. 8/24: 1)

1) Window-type zero-sequence
current transformer.
2) Sensitive directional earth-fault
protection 67N only applicable
with infeed from isolated or Peterson-coil-grounded network. (For dimensioning of the sensitive directional ground-fault protection, also
see application circuit No. 24)
I>>
I>>
>
I2>
50
49
46
IE>
7XR96
1)
60/1A
51G
I<
7SJ62
or
7SJ602
37
3)
2)
67N
M
Fig. 8/24
Protection scheme for medium-sized motors
3) Relay type 7SJ602 may be used

for power systems with isolated
neutral or compensated neutral
52
I>>
>
U<
I2>
Large HV motors > 1 MW

Notes on Fig. 8/25:
1) Window-type zero-sequence
current transformer.
50
3) This function is only needed for

motors where the start-up time is
longer than the safe stall time tE.
According to IEC 79-7,tE is the
time needed to heat up AC windings, when carrying the starting
current IA, from the temperature
reached in rated service and at
maximum ambient temperature
to the limiting temperature.
IE>
7XR96
1)
60/1A
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault

protection 67N only applicable
with infeed from isolated or
Peterson-coil-grounded network.
49
51N
46
Fig. 8/25
optionally
37
67N
Monitoring of
the start-up
49T
stage
3)
3)
Speed
switch
I<
2)
27
Option:
thermistor
87M
7UM62
5)
4)
Protection scheme for large motors
8/33
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:44 Uhr
Seite 34
A separate speed switch is used to

monitor actual starting of the motor.
The motor breaker is tripped if the
motor does not reach speed in the
preset time. The speed switch is part
of the motor delivery itself.
MS
I>, IE>, t
I2>
>
51
51N
46
49
4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni120
7SJ60
5) 49T can only be implemented

using 7XV5662 thermobox
Smallest generators < 500 kW
Fig 8/26
Note on Fig. 8/26 and 8/27:

If a window-type zero-sequence current transformer is provided for sensitive ground-fault protection, relay
7SJ602 with separate ground current
input can be used (similar to Fig.
8/24).
Protection scheme for smallest generators with solidly grounded neutral conductor
MS
G1
Generator 2
1)
I>, IE>, t
I2>
>
51
51N
46
49
7SJ60
Small generator up to 1 MW
Note on Fig. 8/28:
Two current transformers in
V-connection are sufficient.
RN =
Fig. 8/27
VN
3 (0.5 to 1) Irated
Protection scheme for smallest generators with a resistance-grounded

neutral conductor
52
1)
Field
f>
<
81
I>, t
>
I2>
51
49
46
IE>, t
51N
Fig. 8/28
8/34
Protection scheme for generators > 1 MW
P>
32
U>
59
7UM61
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:45 Uhr
Seite 35
Generators > 1 MW
Notes on Fig. 8/29:
1) Functions 81 and 59 only required
where drives can assume excess
speed and voltage controller may
permit rise of output voltage above
upper threshold.
MS
52
50
27
2) The integrated differential protection function may be used as longitudinal or transverse differential
protection for the generator.
I>/U<
1)
59
U<
2)
I
1)
RE field<
81
87
f>
<
7UM62
64R
Field
I2>
>
46
49
-P>
I>t, U< L.O.F.

51V
40
32
IE>, t
51N
Fig. 8/29
87N
Protection scheme for generators > 1 MW
8/35
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:45 Uhr
Seite 36
Busbar protection by o/c relays

with reverse interlocking
Infeed
General note on Fig. 8/30:

Applicable to busbars without substantial (< 0,25 x IN) backfeed from
the outgoing feeders.
Reverse interlocking
7SS60 busbar protection
I>, t
I>, t0
50
50N
General note on Fig. 8/31

C Applicable for single and double
busbars
C Different current transformer ratios
are balanced by intermediate-circuit
transformers
C Unrestricted number of feeders
C Feeder protection may be connected to the same current
transformer core
51
51N
7SJ60
52
t0 = 50 ms
52
I>
I>, t
50
50N
51
51N
52
I>
I>, t
50
50N
51
51N
I>
I>, t
50
50N
51
51N
7SJ60
7SJ60
Fig. 8/30
52
7SJ60
Busbar protection with reverse interlocking
7MT70
7SS601
87
BB
52
86
52
52
52
7SV60
7SV60
7SV60
50
BF
50
BF
50
BF
Load
Fig. 8/31
8/36
S 7SS60 busbar protection
1)
7SS60
TIP_Kap_08_Engl
11.08.2005
19:45 Uhr
Seite 37
8/37
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite B
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite C
Power Management
chapter 9
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 2
9 Power Management
Power management is the special energy point of view of an industrial
plant, a commercial building, or other
piece of property. The view begins
with the energy import, expands to
its distribution and ends at the supply
to the devices themselves.
An efficiency improvement of the

equipment/consumer devices saves
energy and reduces cost directly. This
optimization is carried out by retrofitting. When making invitations to tender for new equipment, an optimal efficiency should be demanded.
All functions are directed towards the

operator with the goal of enabling an
economical operation.
In addition to the ideal way of reducing power costs through limiting

power consumption, power management aims, on the one hand, at an
optimal use of the existing contracts
not exceeding the import quantity
and on the other hand at concluding
the most advantageous new continuous purchasing contracts buying
neither too much nor too little.
To minimize the energy costs, one

can
C directly influence the power consumption,
C modify the general specifications
for energy import through the best
possible use of stipulated provisions in the contract as well as
through
C optimally negotiating new contracts.
The optimal use of existing contracts

avoids penalties for exceeding the
agreed-upon import quantities. Import monitoring compares the
Energy purchasing
amounts actually used to those stipulated in the existing continuous purchasing contracts. If the amount
used threatens to exceed the latter,
import monitoring will influence the
power consumption. This can occur
within the power management via
priorities-list controls, planning or, if
possible, by involving in-plant generation of power.
The use of several types of power in
interrelation takes the cogeneration
optimization into consideration.
In a turbine, process heat and electricity are generated from gas. Costs
arising from this can be clearly allocated to the corresponding power
types.
Electricity, gas, district heat, diesel, water
Optimizing purchased quantities/prices
Import monitoring
Avoiding penalties
In-plant generation
Optimization of the energy mix

Coordination of all energy types involved
Energy cost
savings
Energy flow representation

Transparency of energy consumption
Efficiency improvement
Optimal energy exploitation
Fig. 9/1
9/2
Energy
savings
Power management: the special energy point of view of an industrial plant, a commercial building, or other piece of property, etc.
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 3
Power Management
Electricity costs for in-plant generation are comparable to those of the

energy market. As power costs on
the market change daily, this comparison is not necessarily always favorable to in-plant generation. The same
considerations must be made when
using the primary energy sources oil,
gas or coal.
The energy flow representation via
load curves depicts the power consumption over the course of time. It
visualizes the power consumption
behavior and provides transparency.
Load curves make the most effective
statements if there is a direct reference to the technological process. By
evaluating the load curves, those responsible for the process can influence the power consumption behavior in such a way that peaks are
clipped and valleys are filled. If no
peaks appear in the lowest level of
power consumption, the import will
also as sum of all power consumers have no peaks; a leveling is
achieved.
Energy flow representation, maximum-demand monitoring and the optimization of the energy mix serve to
optimize energy purchasing. Only
when the customer knows his requirements exactly, can he use the
offer from the various power suppliers to his best advantage.
Industry
Infrastructure
Power distribution
Building automation
and control
Heating
Ventilation
Air conditioning
Time controllers
Process automation/
automated manufacturing
technology
Batches
Sequential control systems
Sequence processors
Feeder
circuitbreaker Q1.0
Busbar coupler
unit
Outgoing circuit-breaker
to sub-distribution board
Incoming circuit-breaker
to sub-distribution board
Transformer
T7.3
Switch-disconnector
Q12.4
Fig. 9/2
Power distribution interfaces in industry and infrastructure
Composition of power costs and

options for influencing them
The cost of (electrical) energy is composed of quantity-based costs and
basic fees. At any time, quantitybased energy costs can be employed
as a lever to influence total energy
cost by improving the efficiency of
the equipment in use. Another leverage is a change of that process that

would yield an optimized degree of
efficiency. If power consumption is
reduced by down-sizing production,
this is irrelevant for consideration.
Energy costs
Energy savings
Energy cost savings
Kilowatt-hour rate (electricity)

quantity costs
Demand rate (electricity)

basic fees
Influence
Influence when negotiating new

contracts
Fig. 9/3
via
via
Continuous purchasing quantities

Benefit of liberalization
Optimization of power import and
in-plant generation
Composition of power costs and options for influencing them
9/3
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 4
A reduction of basic fees by influencing demand charges can only be effected when a contract is changed.
Considering regular contract terms of
5 years, this leverage is unsuitable
for immediate success.
Strategy: First, continuously monitor
energy import, cut off peak supplies
and level consumption. These new
import load curves can be used as a
basis for negotiating a new, lower import limit at the next contract change.
C circuit-breakers,
C isolators, switch-disconnectors,
fuses,
C transducers,
C meters and measuring instruments;
in the expansion,
C generators and
C transformers
are also used.
Circuit-breakers switch and protect
the electrical power flow. They can be
switched and monitored both locally
and remotely.
Disconnectors protect electrical installations. They can be switched onsite and monitored both on-site and
remotely.
9/4
Basis for
energy market
Energy
purchasing
Energy
transmission
Dispatch
Prognosis
Optimizing
purchased
quantities/prices
Virtual
Default
contract
setting for
monitoring limit per site
(per minute)
Broker
Contract
monitoring
Import
monitoring
Prioritieslist control
Cross-connection Schedules
optimisation
Coordination
of all energies
involved
Energy flow
representation
Load curves
Transparency
of energy
consumption
Identical, different
types of energy
Efficiency
improvement
Optimizing
equipment
> 24 h, > 48 h
Planning
In-plant
power
generation
Energy
operation
plans
Inspection
planning
Avoiding penalties
Power distribution at the industry

and infrastructure level
The distribution of power, whether
electricity, gas or water as a connection of the energy import with the
power consumers is set up for infrastructure projects and industrial plants
with the same components. Electrical
power distribution comprises medium
and low voltage. The interfaces from
Totally Integrated Power for building
services automation and automated
manufacturing technology are storey
distribution boards or motor control
centers. The multitude of devices
used in power distribution comprise
the components:
Purchasing associations
Cost center
assignment
Automatic
Manual input
Quality
Harmonics cos
Overvoltages
Transients
Flicker
Thermodynamic
control systems
Optimal energy
exploitation
Evaluations
Fig. 9/4
Reports
Maintenance
9/4 Power management modules
Transducers generate measurements

with standardized interfaces; 1/5 A for
current transformers and 100 V for
voltage transformers. These measurements are placed on-site on display
units. A remote display requires a conversion to 4- to 20-mA interfaces.
Generators transform mechanical energy into electrical energy. They are
started and stopped, as well as having
their power output regulated, either
locally or remotely.
Transformers reduce the voltage levels. They can be monitored and
switched either locally or remotely.
The know-how of system-specific
Data
validation
power distribution is in the dimensioning of the individual elements and

their interconnection with cables, busbar trunking systems and switchgear
cabinets, in accordance with the local
country standards.
The planning tool SIMARIS design
supports this work when dimensioning new systems or new designs.
When retrofitting systems in existing
power distribution systems, the circuit-breakers, isolators, measurements for voltage, current, output, frequencies, etc., along with the corresponding transformers are often
already on hand.
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 5
Power Management
Neither new nor retrofitted systems

use the information available in the
distribution systems consistently. An
automatic recording via bus-capable
devices is the prerequisite for a centralized display and evaluation. The
same bus is also used for switching
within the power distribution system.
See also Chapter 7 Communications
in Power Distribution. If one further
develops the initially described view
of power management as the special
energy point of view of an industrial
plant, a commercial building, or other
piece of property, modules will result
which describe power management
from the operators point of view.
Entire site
P
Maximum-demand
monitoring
of total import
t
Electricity
Sub-site
P
Maximum-demand
monitoring
of sub-site
t
Energy purchasing
In future, energy purchasing will tend
to move away from governmentally
stipulated standard contracts towards
market-oriented individual contracts.
The maximum-demand contract is a
government-oriented standard contract. Customer requirements will
play a much more important role, yet
this will not cause the energy suppliers interests to be neglected. Customers with insufficient knowledge of
their requirement profile are, under
such market conditions, at a disadvantage from the very beginning.
Documenting the requirement profile
in the form of a load curve over a
lengthy period of time forms the basis to advantageously structure contractual negotiations.
The liberalization of the energy market also provides the possibility to explicitly order base load, medium load
and peak load. Knowing the requirements exactly is an absolute must in
order to optimally use the energy
market for the medium load and to
avoid the spot market for the peak
load.
Grafik 9/5
Einkaufsgemeinschaften Energiedurchleitung
energy transmission
If within an existing area several
companies are formed out of one
company through restructuring, each
one of these must be considered individually with regard to its energy
import. The existing supply structures cannot be adapted to the new
premises/building. Rather, the power
infeed is assigned to one company.
This company then assumes the role
of the energy supplier for all of the
other companies formed on the
premises. Every company in the area
receives a maximum-demand contract. The energy supplier of the area,
as the representative of a purchasing
association, concludes an external
continuous energy purchasing contract that includes the consumption
quantity of the entire area. This quantity is then divided by the areas en-
ergy supplier amongst the individual

companies. If a sub-site exceeds the
maximum demand, this does not
necessarily lead to an exceeding of
the maximum demand of the entire
site: Thus no penalties will be
charged. Since the total continuous
purchasing contract does not represent the sum of the maximum peak
imports, the situation could arise in
which the total maximum demand is
exceeded, but each individual subsite does not exceed its maximum
demand. An advanced warning and a
purposeful reduction of the import
limit of all the sub-sites reduces an
exceeding of the total maximum demand. The skilled use of the total
continuous energy purchasing contract results in cost advantages for all
companies in the purchasing association. Inside buildings there are comparable supply structures.
9/5
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
dispatch
Dispatch is about a purchasing association whose members are located
at various sites. Examples of this are
companies with their branches or
amalgamations of several independent companies. A virtual total continuous purchasing contract is formed
that represents the sum of all sites.
The virtual total continuous purchasing contract monitors the maximum
demand and within the period e.g.
15 minutes distributes the energy
to the sites in such a way that the total continuous purchasing contract is
not violated. The trick with dispatch
is to combine consumption valleys of
some sites with the consumption
peaks of other sites in such a way
that a continuous total import results.
Thus, the total import can be considerably smaller than that which would
result from the sum of the individual
sites. The goal of dispatch is on the
one hand, by pooling large quantities
of energy, to get a better import
price, and on the other hand to generate a continuous total import load
curve and thus enable a better exploitation of the continuous purchasing contract.
9/6
Seite 6
Total import
P
t
Allocation of maximum
imported energy
Return of available
switch-off power
Pdefault
Site A
P
Site B
P
Fig. 9/6
Pdefault
Site C
P
Purchasing associations dispatch
Basis for the energy market

prognosis
The liberalized energy market allows
the purchase of energy via energy
markets in addition to the usual import of energy from the local power
supply company. In Leipzig (EEX),
Oslo (NordPool) and in Amsterdam
(APX), there are energy markets.
Since quantities of energy that have
to be ordered at least 24 h in advance are traded on these energy
markets, only those customers/ consumers who know their requirements
in the future can bid on these markets. Consequently, a prognosis tool
is absolutely necessary for the load
side. The daily load curves have
proven themselves as prognoses in
the municipalities.
Pdefault
For every day of the week, weekends, days taken off between a holiday and the weekend to lengthen the
weekend, etc., that have a significantly different power consumption,
there is a standard load curve that is
super-elevated/ adapted with the
daily temperature at 06:00 a.m. and
the expected temperature at 12:00
noon. The procedures are proven and
in use in many municipalities. In industry, energy consumption is mainly
linked to production; prognoses are
to be structured in correspondence
with this information.
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 7
Power Management
Defined energy quantities can be ordered at fixed prices 24 h in advance.
Demand is established via prognosis procedures.
On the Internet,
an amount is
agreed upon with
a broker.
... A new contract will

be required due to the
peak established in the
prognosis.
Basis for the energy market (Leipzig, Amsterdam) prognoses
Consumption control
Priorities list
block
Site x
P
1
2
3
Consumer a
Consumer b
Consumer c
ON
release
Fig. 9/7
OFF
Release
Blocking
Consumer x
Feedback
Fig. 9/8
t 15
M
Forced
ON
Demand monitoring priorities-list control
Import monitoring
Every type of energy electricity,
gas, sometimes water has its own
continuous purchasing contract. Online energy measurement generates
a load curve, a curve trace as a
mountain range with peaks and valleys. An ideal power import is characterized by a curve trace that is as
level as possible. The goal is to reduce peaks higher energy consumption and to fill valleys not
fully utilized power reserves.
Import monitoring
priority-list control
Power shifts are performed by loads
that, without negatively influencing
the production process, can be
switched on and off or controlled
when required. These defined power
loads will be placed in a priorities list.
Monitoring refers to the contractually
agreed-upon imported energy limit,
which should not be exceeded. This
is a case of a period average, i.e., in
the period, the average of the actually imported power will be calculated and permanently compared
with the imported energy limit. If the

value rises too high, the loads will be
either switched off or controlled
down, depending on their position in
the priority list. If the period monitoring shows that too little power is being consumed, the priority lists loads
will be released either for switching
on or controlling up. A priorities-list
control reacts to the momentary actual state of the energy import. Loads
are switched or controlled according
to the priorities list, however, only in
accordance with demand and not as
a result of direct planning.
9/7
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 8
By carefully shifting individual batch starting points, peak load situation can be
detected in advance and prevented.
Import monitoring
planning
Careful planning and control of energy consumption is an additional
way to exploit the energy supply contract as much as possible. It is especially used where batch products are
created or processed that show typical energy requirement curves in regularly recurring intervals, because
their typical shape enables the prognostication of load behavior. After the
analysis of the production requirements it is possible to time the production processes in such a way that
an addition of load peaks is avoided
and thus the energy import curve is
leveled. An optimal envelope curve
results that remains below the import
limit. Only in exceptional situations
will the priority control, that is now
subordinated to the control by planning, intervene. Regarding maximumdemand monitoring for the measurement of the energy types, the relevant hardware (metrology), the
affiliated wiring, and a corresponding
software package for monitoring
must be installed. For the open-loop
control and closed-loop control of the
loads, the relevant wiring from the
maximum-demand monitoring into
the load control must be installed.
Characteristic
P
100
Product A
55
0
10
20
30
40
Aggregated load curve

Product is started in parallel
at the same point in time
P
100
110
0
10
20
30
40
Product is started within a

time shift of 8 time units
100
80
0
10
Fig. 9/9
9/8
Import monitoring planning
20
30
40
50 t
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
12.08.2005
5:33 Uhr
Seite 9
Power Management
Import limit
4.5 MW
Continuous energy
purchasing contract
Demand rate referred to
import limit 4.5 MW
135
/kW
Kilowatt-hour rate
0.06
/kWh
15
minutes
Period
Work
1.125 MWh
15-minute
period
Fig. 9/10
15
30
45
Components of the continuous energy purchasing contract
Import monitoring
in-plant power generation
In-plant power generation within the
framework of import monitoring is
another possibility to prevent energy
import levels from being exceeded.
For example, existing emergency
power units can be used to generate
operating current.
Example of an electricity
purchasing contract
The continuous energy purchasing
contract contains the parameters demand rate, kilowatt-hour rate and period. The supplier supplies a defined
amount of electrical energy in a defined period. It doesnt matter to him
when the agreed-upon amount of
electrical energy is used within this
period. When this is exceeded, however, penalties are assessed. The imported energy limit is calculated from
the defined amount of energy within
the period and is an average value.
A demand rate is set for such an import limit. This demand rate, multiplied with the imported energy limit,
is the monetary value to be paid annually. Such costs arise whether energy is used or not; they correspond
to the connection costs for domestic
power supply.
The quantity of energy actually used
is calculated with the kilowatt-hour
rate. The sum of the demand rate
and kilowatt-hour rate is then the total electricity cost. By clipping the import peaks, a lower import limit can
be agreed upon and the costs reduced.
Example for costs in Fig. 9/10

Demand rate of 607,500
at 135 /kW demand rate and
4,500 kW import limit.
Kilowatt-hour rate of 1,296,000 at
21,600,000 kWh power consumption
and 0.06 /kWh costs.
(Power consumption at 360 days/
24 h a day and medium power
requirements of 2,500 kW).
Total costs of 1,903,500 per year.
Clipping the import limit, e.g. by
10% (450 kW) corresponds to
60,750 per year.
9/9
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
Boiler
unit
Air
19:35 Uhr
Seite 10
Air
Water
power
B1
T1
Oil
External
purchase
Turbine unit
B2
Coal
T5
Feed-water
storage tank
Condensate
tank
Customers
Thermal loads
Return-flow
Fig. 9/11
Electrical
loads
Correlations (combined heat and power)
Optimization of the energy mix

Cogeneration optimization stands for
the dependencies of the transformation of one type of energy into one or
several others. We will use a combined heat and power plant as an example here, which generates live
steam from the primary energies oil
and coal. This live steam is used to
generate steam in a turbine; the
flashed steam is made available for
the provision of heat (district heating,
process heat).
9/10
Loads
The system differentiates between

two control possibilities. The fast
control possibility of this system consists in using live steam to generate
a great deal of electricity and little
heat, or a great deal of heat and little
electricity. The slow control possibility consists in generating more or
less live steam. The exploitation of
this optimization potential is mathematically a very demanding matter
and is only worthwhile after an exact
assessment. Cogeneration optimizations can be interpreted along the
lines of cost, but also according to
other criteria, e.g. ecological aspects.
For the measurement of the energy
types, the relevant hardware (metrology), the affiliated wiring, and a corresponding software package for
monitoring must be installed.
AIn the boilers B1 and B2, live steam

is generated using the primary energies coal or oil. This live steam is lead
to turbines T1 and T5. Inside of the
turbine, the live steam is flashed; it
powers the generation of electricity
in the generator and at the same
time generates heat for thermal
loads.
The sum of the electricity from the
generators, the energy import from
power supply companies and other
in-plant generation, such as from water power, generates the energy that
is made available for the electrical
loads. If one proceeds from the assumption that electrical energy cannot be stored but must always be
available when it is needed, then this
aspect cannot be used as a control
value. To control the entire system,
only the thermal load or the generation of live steam remains.
The dependencies inside of the turbine, including the non-linear correlations, are documented in the turbine
diagram.
In the energy flow representation, the
measured values are represented over
a period of time. These load curves
demonstrate which energy was consumed and when it was consumed.
Using these load curves, a history can
be displayed in the consumption profile up to the current time. The combination of the load curves with the
process knowledge represents the
savings potential.
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 11
Power Management
An expert interprets the load curves

and makes changes in the technical,
technological or organizational levels.
Effects, positive as well as negative,
can be checked immediately with the
help of the new load curves; a feedback arises in the shortest time, so
that an optimization of consumption
by clipping the peaks and filling in the
valleys can begin immediately.
The load curve is an irreplaceable
measure in a modern company for
the continual energy monitoring and
the optimization resulting thereof.
The load curves are always a representation of the power output over a
period of time. If meters are installed, measurements are recorded
in the accompanying hardware and
converted to power values in the
software. To measure these energies, the appropriate hardware
(metrology), the affiliated wiring and
a corresponding software package
must be installed.
For the energy analysis, various load
curves are simultaneously displayed
one above the other. Via this representation, correlations can be seen.
These types of power engineering
correlations and the various dependencies within a system are generally
not known to the operator. This representation works out the complex
interconnections. Documentation of
these is of great importance as one
of the most important bases for proof
of cost-cutting measures.
Identical types of energy

P
1
1
2
2
3
t
Different types of energy

P
G
2
2
3
3
t
Fig. 9/12
Energy flow representation load curves

cost center assignment
Every measurement inside of a system can be used for cost center assignment. A differentiation is made
between certified measurements,
non-certified measurements and simple measurements. Only certified
measurements can be used as a basis for invoicing.
For expense distribution, the total
power costs are distributed on the
basis of consumption to cost center.
All measurements may be used for
in-house expense distribution.
Normal measurements are only designed for expense distribution. To

better use the measurements, each
measurement can be assigned several different cost center via a % key.
In many cases, there is a meter reading by means of receipts. These data
are transferred to the power management system via screen mask input.
The documentation of the data acquired via reading receipts uses the
same types of representation as the
automatic meter readings.
9/11
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:35 Uhr
Seite 12
Measurement
%
Cost center
Transformer 1
Sum
per
cost
center
Rate 1 Total kWh
Rate 2 Total kWh
Rate 3 Total kWh
180
160
Transformer 2
140
120
100
Virtual measurement
%
80
Sum
per
cost
center
Cost center
Transformer 1
60
40
20
0
1st quarter
2nd quarter 3rd quarter
4th quarter
Rate 1 Difference kWh

BD-350A
Fig. 9/13
Energy flow representation cost center assignment (automatic)
Input
180
160
Receipt
Measuring
point
140
120
Estimated
value
Cost center
Actual
value
Time
Date
Load curves
P
Fig. 9/14
9/12
Energy flow representation cost center assignment (manual input)
Sum
per
cost
center
Rate 1 Total kWh
Rate 2 Total kWh
Rate 3 Total kWh
100
80
60
40
20
0
1st quarter
2nd quarter
3rd quarter
4th quarter
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 13
Power Management
Measuring
energy quality
Documenting
energy quality
Influencing
energy quality
SIPCON
Compensation
1
2
2
3
t
Grafik 9/15 Energieflussdarstellung Qualitt (cos , Oberwellen, berspannungen, Flicker, Transienten)
Quality
Power quality stands for reactive
power, harmonics and flicker.
In future continuous energy purchasing contracts, these parameters will
play an increasingly important role.
Examples:
Reactive power: Every motor generates a reactive-power component
(cos j = ratio of active power to apparent power, see Fig. 9/16). Reactive- power compensation systems
adjust the generated reactive-power
component to the default setting.
Harmonics: Electronic power loads,
e.g. converters, generate harmonics.
These harmonics are modulated up
to the normal network frequency of
50 Hz. A network voltage that is not a
pure sine wave arises. The higher the
share of the harmonics (x % of the
fundamental component) is, the
poorer the network quality will be.
The harmonics are measured and filtered by the appropriate devices.
Flicker: Flickers are temporary network interruptions in the millisecond

range. The more flickers appear, the
poorer the network quality will be.
Flickers can, within limits, be compensated for with the appropriate devices.
The efficiency improvement is always directed towards the existing
equipment. Through the use of controllable drives, ECO motors, etc., an
energy saving is feasible from the
electrical point of view. Better insulation improves the thermal efficiency.
Through full use of the control range
an adaptation to demand or, by
avoiding starts and stops avoiding
start and stop losses a further total
efficiency improvement of the generator is possible. In addition to the efficiency improvement, these measures also have a positive effect on
the mechanical service life of the
generator: it is increased. Through
the use of controllable fluorescent
lamps, only the amount of light
needed to illuminate the work area is
generated.
Apparent power
Reactive power
Active power
cos = 0.9
Apparent power
Active power
Reactive power
Fig. 9/16
= 100
= 90
= 43.6
= 25.8
kVA
kW
kVAr
degrees
Power types and cos
A constant workplace illumination

can be guaranteed by using a mix of
daylight and fluorescent light. Energy
saving via new equipment requires
the latest technology and an optimal
design (power output always at the
optimal efficiency). This point of view
is first of all generator-oriented, in the
second step the applied energy or
type of energy plays a role.
9/13
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Efficiency improvement thermodynamic closed-loop controllers

The optimization of the start and
shut-down processes of thermodynamic power loads (boilers) is not
only interesting from an energy point
of view, it also affects the maintenance intervals and service life. The
lesser the start and shut-down times,
the lower the power loss. Because of
this, every operator attempts to approach the gradients (e.g. temperature) rated by the manufacturer, but
not to exceed them. Further advantages are longer maintenance intervals and a longer service life.
Seite 14
MICROMASTER ECO
Photo 9/1 Efficiency improvement optimizing equipment
Evaluation
reports
All information in the database is
compiled in reports and presented in
a customer-oriented manner. Shift
protocols, daily protocols, weekly statistics and monthly statistics serve as
examples here.
Reduced start-up time
Instant gradient violation
9/14
Additionally,
smoother, faster start-up,
longer maintenance intervals,
longer service life
Maximum permissible
temperature gradient
Reports present the data graphically,

as a list, or include both types of representation in one.
Evaluation
data validation
Data validation forms characteristic
values that allow a comparison with
other projects. The thermal energy
consumption per square meter in an
office building serves as an example
here. The collected values of various
items of real-estate (xx kJoule/m2
per month) serve as the comparative
figure. The lower the value is, e.g.,
the better the thermal insulation will
be. Via data validation, inter-site comparisons are made that reveal the
savings potentials that a point of
view restricted to one locality cannot
detect.
Motors
Fig. 9/17
Efficiency improvement thermodynamic closed-loop controllers
Evaluation
maintenance
The maintenance of a technical installation comprises, acc. to DIN 31051,
the activities inspection (determination of the actual condition), maintenance (maintaining the desired condition) and corrective maintenance
(restoring the desired state).
In addition to regularly scheduled
maintenance, the system can be connected online to the process in order
to cyclically calculate the actual runtime (operating hours) and/or the operating cycles of the objects on the
basis of the status signals (ON/OFF).
Operating hours and operating cycle

meters are integrated in the system,
however, they can be realized in the
automation systems. The maintenance schedule resulting from or recommended by this forms the basis
for an efficient maintenance planning.
The goal with this is the reduction of
maintenance costs. The performance
of inspections and maintenance is
viewed realistically; it is done neither
too early nor too late. A system failure, which is usually associated with
high repair and down-time expenses,
is avoided.
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 15
Power Management
Daily load curve total import

P
7000
6500
High rate
6000
Low rate
5500
23:30
22:45
21:15
22:00
19:45
20:30
19:00
17:30
18:15
16:45
15:15
16:00
14:30
13:45
13:00
11:30
12:15
10:45
10:00
9:15
8:30
7:45
7:00
6:15
5:30
4:45
3:15
4:00
2:30
1:45
0:15
Fig. 9/18
1:00
5000
Evaluation - reports
Comparison
180
Evaluation
160
140
Site A
120
Feedback
to the
sites
100
80
60
40
20
0
Site B
Fig. 9/19
1st quarter
2nd quarter
3rd quarter
4th quarter
Data validation comparison of two sites with identical processes
9/15
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 16
The automatic calculation of the

maintenance schedule refers to the
earliest calculated time. In the example (Fig. 9/20 Maintenance orders),
the runtime determines the maintenance order, operating cycles and
maintenance schedule are of lesser
importance. When the runtimes or
operating cycles are exceeded, the
represented value will continue to be
counted with a negative sign up to
the completion notice. A maintenance order can be automatically activated when the recommended date
is reached or manually at any time by
the operator.
The status display of the maintenance
shows all scheduled orders in tables.
Important data, such as operating
hours and operating cycles of the
object, recommended maintenance
schedule, remaining runtime until the
next scheduled maintenance date,
check-control indicator and much
more are cyclically updated. Further
detailed information can be simply
called up by a mouse click on the
Tabs.
Runtime
Operating cycles
Calendar
M-interval
counter
317 h
20.000
3108
Recommended
M-date
31. 07. 2000 10:05
31. 08. 2000 08:45
10. 11. 2000 12:15
Process signal
Recommended M-date for your M-order
Data manager
Process bus
Fig. 9/20
Maintenance orders
Fig. 9/21
Maintenance status
The check-control indicator breaks

down the maintenance time via 5
symbolic LEDs in 20% intervals. The
progress within the maintenance is
highlighted in color.
9/16
M-interval
data
1500 h
31. 07. 2000 10:05
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 17
Power Management
Example of maximumdemand monitoring

with instabus EIB
Switchover
high
rate/low
rate
Power costs are becoming

increasingly important,
especially for process control.
The result: One can reduce the ordered power reserves and further
save expenses.
Visualization
software
S0 interface
In systems that are not monitored,

power reserves, for example, must
be kept ready in order to avoid
load over ranges, because these
make themselves noticeably felt in
the calculation: expenses rise.
This is where the maximum-demand
monitor steps in: It effectively suppresses peak loads and thus unnecessary expenses. The only requirement is, to set up the process correspondingly and create possibilities of
temporally staggering the power consumption.
Synchronous pulse from

the power station
Maximumdemand monitor
PC
instabus EIB
Meter
Actuators
Electric heating
Lighting
Fan
Loads available for load
management
Sensors
Electric heating
Lighting
Fan
ON/OFF, blocking or release
via pushbutton, binary inputs,
sensors or control modules
Fig. 9/22
Schematic diagram of maximum-demand monitoring
Simple, transparent, efficient:

the maximum-demand monitors
work. On the basis of a defined maximum average power, the maximumdemand monitor switches loads and
devices off or on again. In so doing,
operational switching by the operator
always has the highest priority. The
maximum-demand monitor only interferes with operationally connected
loads in correspondence to the set
priority (1 to 10). Each of these loads
can be blocked from the correspondingly assigned switch and released
again, i.e.: If the load is blocked, the
maximum-demand monitor is not
available for switching.
Photo 9/2
Maximum-demand monitor
9/17
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 18
Up to 120 channels
Up to 120 channels are available for
control. The device shows the actual
switching status of channels 18 via
LEDs. Special LEDs indicate if a
warning limit is exceeded during the
high or low rates, and a further display shows where the maximum-demand monitor within the integration
period is temporally located.
Fig. 9/23
System-specific information and limit values are

entered in the general section
Fig. 9/24
Time delays for the restart function can be entered
Fig. 9/25
Specific statements about the switching

performance are made for the 120 channels
Easy commissioning
The maximum-demand monitor is
commissioned with the EIB-Tool software for instabusEIB. The parameters required for load control can be
set for all available 120 channels.
9/18
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 19
Power Management
Software for power statistics

The software for power statistics enables the compilation of demand integration periods and daily, monthly
and annual statistics which can then
be exported to Excel for further evaluation. Through this, one can compile
statistics the basis for the customers negotiation of better and less
expensive supply contracts with the
power supply company.
The software for power statistics is
part of the instabus EIB EIB visualization software and is also available as
a stand-alone version. It facilitates
online tracking of the switching priorities with a PC and allows them to be
changed. The current switching status and the important system parameters are displayed.
Fig. 9/26
Depiction of the maximum-demand monitor in the instabus EIB visualization software
Basically, however, the maximum-demand monitor can also be operated

as a mere detection unit during a
recording phase. In this case, it
records load curves and consumption
values. The individual channels need
not be parameterized for this.
Integration period
The power statistics of an integration
period over 15 minutes are displayed
in minutes. Green and red: the respective power demanded; red: the
released power; green: the switchedoff power.
Typical of this: The low power underrange at the beginning and the low
power overrange at the end of the
integration period. Over the entire
cycle of the integration period, this
results in an even balance.
Fig. 9/27
Integration period
9/19
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 20
Daily profile
The evaluation of daily statistics
shows the individual integration periods. Switched-off and released
power outputs represent the demanded power of all loads. When
manually switching the loads, power
overranges are unavoidable. In spite
of changing the power demand, the
maximum-demand monitor limits the
released power and thus prevents an
exceeding of the admissible limit
value.
History database
In the instabus EIB visualization softwares history database, the switching states of the channels are depicted in their temporal course just
as they result from the priority assignment and requirements.
9/20
Fig. 9/28
Power statistics as software tool with daily statistics
Fig 9/29
Switching states of the channels history database
TIP_Kap_09_Engl
11.08.2005
19:36 Uhr
Seite 21
Power Management
Fig. 9/30
Power statistics
9/21
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite B
10
10.1
Overview
10.2
SIMEAS Q
10.3
SIMEAS R
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite C
chapter 10
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 2
10 Measuring and Recording Power Quality

10.1 Overview
Introduction
For more than 100 years, electrical
energy has been a product, measured, for example, in kilowatt-hours,
and its value was determined by the
amount of energy supplied. In addition, the time of day could be considered in the price calculation (cheap
night current, expensive peak time
rates) and agreements could be
made on the maximum and minimum
power consumption within defined
periods. The latest development
shows an increased tendency to include the aspect of voltage quality
into the purchase orders and cost calculations. Previously, the term quality was associated mainly with the
reliable availability of energy and the
prevention of major deviations from
the rated voltage. Over the last few
years, however, the term of voltage
quality has gained a completely new
significance. On the one hand, devices have become more and more
sensitive and depend on the adherence to certain limit values in voltage, frequency and waveshape; on
the other hand, these quantities are
increasingly affected by extreme load
variations (e.g. in steelworks) and
non-linear consumers (electronic
devices, fluorescent lamps).
Power quality standards

The specific characteristics of supply
voltage have been defined in standards which are used to determine
the level of quality with reference to
C Frequency
C Voltage level
C Waveshape
C Symmetry of the three-phase
voltages
These characteristics are permanently
influenced by accidental changes
resulting from load variations, disturbances from other machines and by
the occurrence of insulation faults.
In contrast to usual commodity trade,
the quality of voltage depends not
only on the individual supplier but,
to an even larger degree, on the
customers.
The IEC series 1000 and the standards IEEE 519 and EN 50160 describe the compatibility level required
by equipment connected to the
power grid, as well as the limits of
emissions from these devices. This
requires the use of suitable measuring instruments in order to verify
compliance with the limits defined
for the individual characteristics as
laid down in the relevant standards.
If these limit values are exceeded,
the polluter may be requested to
provide for corrective action.
Competitive advantage through
power quality
In addition to the requirements
stated in standards, the liberalization
of the energy markets forces the utilities to make themselves stand out
against their competitors, to offer en-
10/2
ergy at lower prices and to take cost

saving measures. These demands
result in the following consequences
for the supplier:
C The energy rates will have to
reflect the quality supplied.
C Customers polluting the grid with
negative effects on power quality
will have to expect higher power
rates polluter-must-pay
principle.
C Cost-saving through network planning and distribution (being different from todays practice in power
systems, which is oriented towards
the customers with the highest
power requirements).
The significant aspect for the customer is that non-satisfying quality
and availability of power supply may
cause production losses resulting in
high costs or leading to poor product
quality.
Examples are in particular
C Semiconductor industry
C Paper industry
C Automotive industry (welding
processes)
C Industries with high energy
requirements
Siemens offers a wide range of
equipment for the recording, archiving and evaluation of voltage quality.
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 3
10.2 SIMEAS Q
Front view
The SIMEAS Q quality recorder

SIMEASQ is a is a measuring instrument for recording electrical parameters in power distribution systems,
which are utilized for power quality
analyses with regard to compliance
to standards EN 50160 and IEC 61000,
for example.
Application
The growing use of non-linear or unbalanced loads is increasingly having
an effect on power quality in supply
systems. However, many electronic
consumers require a defined power
quality in order to work properly. Inadequate power quality has an adverse effect on the operating safety
of consumers within the power supply system and can cause outages
with serious consequences. Complete recording and evaluation of
power quality according to international standards is imperative.
Functions
SIMEAS Q is a cost-effective measuring and recording instrument for quality monitoring of electrical power supply (low voltage / medium voltage).
Besides a continuous recording of all
relevant parameters, the device is also
capable of recording faults. In this
mode, measured values will only be
recorded if one or several limit values
are exceeded. This enables the registration of all characteristics of voltage
quality according to the relevant standards. The measured values can be
automatically transferred to a central
computer system at freely definable
intervals via a standardized
PROFIBUS-DP interface and at a
transmission rate of up to 1.5 Mbit/s.
20 21 22 23 24 25
PROFIBUS-DP
RUN BF DIA
SIMEAS Q
7KG-8000-8AB/BB
Photo 10/1
75
10
90
SIMEAS Q power quality recorder
Side view
Special features
C Cost-effective solution
C Interfacing to the SICAM
PAS power automation
system possible
C Comprehensive measuring functions which can also be used in
the field of automatic control
engineering
C Function modules for
SIMATIC S7-300/400
C Minimum dimensions
C Communication
C PROFIBUS-DP
C RS 232/modem
C RS 485
Measuring inputs
3 voltage inputs, 0280 V
3 current inputs, 06 A
Terminal block
90
105
Connection terminals
20 21 22 23 24 25
Aux. Volt.
PROFIBUS-DP
SIMEAS Q
7KG-8000-8AB/BB
Input: Current AC
Outputs/display
C 2 relays as signaling outputs,
available either for
Device in operation
Energy pulse
Signaling the direction of energy
flow (import, export),
Value below min. limit for cos
Pulse indicating a voltage dip
3 LED's indicating the operating
status and PROFIBUS activity
Input: Volt. AC
IL1 IL1 IL2 IL2 IL3 IL3 ULN UL1 UL2 UL3
1
10
All dimensions in mm
Fig. 10/1
SIMEAS Q power quality

recorder, dimension drawings
Auxiliary power
Two types: 24 to 60 V DC and 110
to 250 V DC, as well as 100 to
230 V AC.
10/3
10
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 4
Two different connection methods

or system configurations are possible, depending on the application
and existing infrastructure. One is to
use a central PC as the master. It is
then possible to set up a system for
measured value acquisition and evaluation using the SICARO Q Manager
software. The other possibility is to
link up to a PLC system where the
SIMEAS Q is connected to the central
master as a slave.
Telecommunications
network
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS Q with PC as a master

The SIMEAS Q units are installed
at various points to record series
of electrical quantities in order to
analyze power quality. The measured
values stored in the device memory
are called up with a personal computer via one of 3 possible communication interfaces and can then be
evaluated. For connection to a PC,
the following communication
interfaces are available:
C PROFIBUS-DP interface
C Modem-capable, serial
RS232 interface
C Serial RS485 interface
SIMEAS Q with PLC systems as
master
The SIMEAS Q version with a
PROFIBUS-DP interface opens up a
further field of application. Together
with programmable control systems
(PLC), the SIMEAS Q can be used as
a sensor for electrical quantities.
The PROFIBUS interface, implemented and certified according
to standard EN 50170 Volume 2,
enables fast adaptation to PLC
systems. That way, measured
values acquired with the SIMEAS Q
can be used for control tasks.
10/4
Fig. 10/2
Using the SICARO Q Manager software and a PC with several SIMEAS Q units
SIMEAS Q
Fig. 10/3
SIMEAS Q
SIMATIC S7 PLC as the master station with various PROFIBUS-DP slaves
Detailed information on how to

retrieve measurement data from
SIMEAS P via PROFIBUS is available
to everyone in the SIMEAS Q user
description. The open communication
interface permits data transmission
between SIMEAS Q units and all
types of PROFIBUS-DP Masters,
such as programmable controllers or
personal computers (with integrated
PROFIBUS-DP hardware).
SIMEAS Q
Function blocks are available for the

SIMATIC S7-300 and -400 PLC systems, with an internal or external
DP interface. They permit fast configuration of customer-specific PLC
programs for applications combining
SIMEAS Q with these PLC systems.
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 5
Recording of measured values is

possible in two modes, which can
be used simultaneously.
C Continuous recording
C Fault recording
Measured variable
Possible averaging time
Max./min.
possible
Rms values phase-to-ground voltages

or phase-to-phase voltages
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Rms values phase currents
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
System frequency (always measured

at input UL1)
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Active power per phase

and total active power
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Reactive power per phase

and total reactive power
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Apparent power per phase

and total apparent power
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Power factor per phase

and total power factor
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Voltage unbalance
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Current unbalance
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Flicker factor short-term

per phase voltage (Ast or Pst)
10 min fixed acc. to IEC 60868 and

IEC 60868 A Flicker meters
no
Flicker factor long-term

per phase voltage (Ast or Pst)
120 min fixed acc. to IEC 60868 and

IEC 60868 A1 Flicker meters
no
1st to 40th harmonic voltage per phase
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
1st to 40th harmonic current per phase
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Total harmonic distortion (THD) per phase
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
yes
Continuous recording
In continuous recording, depending
on the setting for each measured
variable, the rms values are acquired
and stored in the memory along with
the relevant time and date information. This records a chain of measured values whose resolution can
range from low to very high, depending on the averaging time set.
In continuous recording mode, the
SIMEAS Q can record measured variables as defined in the standards
(e.g. EN 50160). Acquisition of maximum and minimum values of measured variables within the measurement period (averaging time) is also
possible. Table 10/1 shows which
measured variables can be acquired
by continuous recording, depending
on the type of power system.
Fault recording
Fault recording means that measurement data are recorded when the
average measured value violates one
or more defined upper or lower limits
(thresholds). When a limit is reached,
the current time and date information
and the mean value since the last
limit violation of that measured variable are stored in the memory.
Active energy import / active energy export 1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Reactive energy inductive / reactive energy capacitive
Apparent energy
Table 10/1
no
Possible measured variables for continuous recording
This type of recording is primarily

used for recording voltage dips. To
record voltage dips, the lowest possible averaging time of 10 ms is selected. During measurement, the
SIMEAS Q compares the half period
measurement of a variable, which
corresponds to the rms value, with

the set thresholds and is thus able to
record very short voltage dips. Table
10/2 shows the measured variables
for which fault recording can be parameterized.
10/5
10
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Data memory and data

transmission
Seite 6
Measured variable
Possible averaging time
Number of
thresholds
The SIMEAS Q has a measurement

memory with a capacity for 70,000
measured values. The information on
time and date of the measurement
are stored along with each measured
value.
Rms values phase-to-ground voltages

or phase-to-phase voltages
10, 20, 50, 100, 500 ms

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Rms values phase currents
10, 20, 50, 100, 500 ms

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
In normal measurement mode, the

capacity of the data memory indirectly defines the intervals at which
the PC must retrieve measurement
data in order to obtain an unbroken
chain of values. Retrieving measurement data frees capacity in the
SIMEAS Q, which is then available
again for new measurement data.
System frequency
(always measured at input UL1)
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Active power per phase and

total active power
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Reactive power per phase and

total reactive power
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Apparent power per phase and

total apparent power
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Power factor per phase and

total power factor
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Voltage balance
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Current balance
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
1st to 40th harmonic voltage per phase
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
2 per
harmonic
1st to 40th harmonic current per phase
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
2 per
harmonic
Total harmonic distortion (THD)

per phase
1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 sec

1, 2, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
If the measurement data are not

retrieved, the SIMEAS Q goes into
memory overflow / ring buffer mode,
which causes loss of data and gaps
in the measured value chain.
It must therefore be ensured that the
measured data are always retrieved
before memory overflow / ring buffer
mode occurs.
Relay outputs
The SIMEAS Q is fitted with 2 relay
outputs (opto-relays). One of the following functions can be assigned to
these outputs:
C Indication device active
(switched on)
C Energy metering pulse per settable
energy value for:
Active energy, energy import
Active energy, energy export
Reactive energy, capacitive
Reactive energy, inductive
Apparent energy
C Indication active power import
(contact open) or active power
export (contact closed)
C Limit cos
((contact closed for as long as cos
is lower than a settable limit value)
10/6
Table 10/2
Possible measured variables for fault recording
C Pulses on voltage dips (contact

closed for 500 ms if violation of the
first threshold below rated voltage
detected)
The relay outputs enable the
SIMEAS Q to be used for acquisition
of measured values and for energy
metering.
Information on SIMEAS Q
configuration
Up to 400 V (L-L), the device is connected directly, or, if higher voltages
are applied, via an external transformer. The rated current values
are 1 and 5 A (max. 6 A can be
measured) without switchover.
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 7
Single-phase AC current
4-wire 3-phase current, identical load
SIMEAS Q connection terminals
3-wire 3-phase current, identical load
3-wire 3-phase current, any load
4-wire 3-phase current, identical load (low-voltage network)
4-wire 3-phase current, any load (high-voltage network)
Photo 10/2
SIMEAS Q connection examples
The above listed input circuitries are

merely examples. Up to the maximum permissible current and voltage
values, the device may also be connected without current or voltage
transformers. Voltage transformers
can also be connected in star or

V topology. All of the input/output
terminals not required for measurements remain unassigned.
10/7
10
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 8
10.3 SIMEAS R
Recording units
The SIMEAS R fault recorder and
PQ recorder
Application
C All-in-one recorder for extra-high-,
high- and medium-voltage systems.
C Component of secondary equipment of power plants and substations or industrial plants.
Photo 10/2
SIMEAS R systems are used in

power plants
Photo 10/4
Fault recording
Photo 10/3
and to monitor overhead

transmission lines
Functions
Digital fault recording system.
All functions can be performed simultaneously and are combined in one
unit with no need for additional devices to carry out the different tasks.
Special features
C The modular design enables the
implementation of different configurations starting from systems with
8 analog and 16 binary inputs up to
the acquisition of data from any
number of analog and binary channels
C Clock with time synchronization
using GPS or DCF77
C Data output via postscript printer,
remote data transmission with a
modem via the telephone line,
connection to LAN and WAN
Fault recording
This function is used for the continuous monitoring of the AC voltages
and currents, binary signals and direct voltages or currents with a high
time resolution. If a fault event, e.g.
a short circuit, occurs, the specific
fault will be registered including its
history. The recorded data are then
archived and can either be printed
directly in the form of graphics or
be transferred to a diagnosis system
which can, for example, be used to
identify the fault location.
10/8
Fault detection is effected with the

help of trigger functions.
With analog quantities this refers to
C Exceeding the limit values for voltage, current and unbalanced load
(positive and negative phase
sequence system)
C Falling below the limit values for
voltage, current and unbalanced
load (positive and negative phase
sequence system)
C Limiting values for sudden changes
in up- or downward direction.
Monitoring of the binary signals

includes
C Signal status (high, low)
C Status changes
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 9
Logic triggers
Logic triggers can be defined by
combining any types of trigger event
(analog or binary). They are used to
avoid undesired recording by increasing the selectivity of the trigger function. The device can distinguish between different causes of a fault, e.g.
between a voltage dip caused by a
short circuit (low voltage, high current) which needs to be recorded,
and the disconnection of a feeder
(voltage low, current low) which
does not need to be recorded.
Sequential control
An intelligent logic operation is used
to make sure that each record refers
to the actual duration of the fault
event. This is to prevent continuous
violation of a limit value (e.g. undervoltage) from causing permanent
recording and blocking of the device.
Analog measured values
16-bit resolution for voltages and
DC quantities and 2 x 16-bit resolution for AC voltages. The sampling
frequency is 256 times the network
frequency, i.e. 12.8 kHz at 50 Hz and
15.36 kHz at 60 Hz for each channel.
A new current transformer concept
enables a measuring range between
0.5 mA and 400 Arms with tolerance
ranges of < 0.2% at < 7 Arms and
< 1% at > 7 Arms. Furthermore, direct current is registered in the range
above 7 A; this enables a true image
of the transient DC component in
the short-circuit current.
Binary signals
The sampling frequency at the binary
inputs is 2 kHz.
Data compression
For best utilization of the memory
space and for high-speed remote
transmission, the data can be compressed to as little as 2% of their
original size.
Fault diagnosis
Performed with the SICARO
software package.
Digital recording
This function is used for the continuous registration of the mean values
of the measured values at intervals
which can be freely defined.
In single-phase and three-phase
systems, the following measured
variables are recorded:
C R.m.s. values of voltages and
currents
C Active power
C Reactive power
C Power factor
C Frequency
C Positive and negative sequence
voltage and current
C Weighted and unweighted total
harmonic distortion (THD)
C 5th to 50th harmonics (depending
on the averaging time)
C DC signals, e.g. from transducers
Depending on the individual network

configuration, a three- or four-wire
connection is used.
Frequency/power recording (F/PR)
This function continuously monitors
the gradient of the frequency and/or
power of one or more three-phase
feeders. If major deviations are detected, e.g. caused by the outage of
a power plant or when high loads are
applied, the profile of the measured
values will be recorded including
their history. The recorder is also
used for the registration of power
swings.
Measured variables
C Frequency of one of the voltages,
(limit of error 1 mHz)
C Active power, reactive power
(reactive displacement power),
(limit of error 0.2%)
C Power factor
Averaging interval
A value between 1 and 250 periods
of the network frequency can be
selected.
History
Depends on the averaging interval;
10 s times the averaging periods.
Automatic power analysis
With the help of the SICARO software package (see SICARO page 08),
a power analysis of a station can be
created automatically.
10/9
10
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 10
Load dispatch
center
Office
R.m.s. values
and diagnosis
Spontaneous
print
Spontaneous
print
Containerized
database
Configuration
WAN
ISDN
X.25
Telephone
Evaluation
Office
LAN
Station level
Decentralized database
Configuration
Evaluation
Diagnostic system
DAKON XP
Data compression
Printer
Remote control, automatic mode
Stations
LAN
SIMEAS R
8 analog/
16 binary inputs
Bay level
Fig 10/3
Example of a distributed recording system realized with SIMEAS R recorders and a DAKON XP data central unit
Sequence of Event (SOE)

recording
Each status change occurring at the
binary inputs is registered with a
resolution of 0.5 ms and is then
provided with a time stamp indicating
the time information from the year
down to the millisecond.
200 status changes per second
can be stored for each group of 32
inputs. The mass memory of the
device can be configured according
to requirements (a 5 MB memory,
for example, enables the storage of
10/10
approx. 120,000 status changes).

Modules are available for signal
voltages between 24 and 250 V.
The time-synchronous power output
enables the combined representation
with analog curves, e.g. of alarm and
command signals together with the
course of relay voltages and currents.
With the help of the SICARO program, the event signals can be displayed in the form of a text list in
chronological order. The use of a
separate SOE recorder will no
longer be required.
The SICARO PQ evaluation

program
The SICARO PQ software package
is suitable for use in personal computers provided with the operating
systems MS WINDOWS 2000 or
WINDOWS XP. It is used for remote
transmission, evaluation and
archiving (database system) of the
data received from a SIMEAS R or
OSCILLOSTORE and from digital
protection devices. The program includes a parameterization function for
remote configuration of SIMEAS R
and OSCILLOSTORE units.
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 11
The program enables fully-automated

data transmission of all recorded
events from the acquisition units to
one or more evaluation stations via
dedicated line, switched line or a network; the received data can then be
immediately displayed on a monitor
and/or printed (Fig. 10/3).
The SICARO PQ program is provided
with a very convenient graphical evaluation program for the creation of a
time diagram with the curve profiles,
diagrams of the rms values or vector
diagrams (Photo 10/7). The individual
diagrams can, of course, be adjusted
to individual requirements with the
help of variable scaling and zoom
functions. Records from different
devices can be combined in one
diagram. The different quantities
measured can be immediately calculated by marking a specific point in a
diagram with the cursor (impedance,
reactance, active and reactive power,
harmonics, peak value, rms value,
symmetry, etc.).
Additional diagnosis modules can be
used to perform an automatic analysis of fault events and to identify the
fault location. The program also
supports server/client structures.
Information for project planning

with SIMEAS R
The secondary components of high
or medium-voltage systems can either be accommodated in a central
relay room or in the feeder-dedicated
low-voltage compartments of
switchgear panels. For this reason,
the SIMEAS R system has been
designed in such a way as to allow
both centralized or decentralized
installation.
The recording unit can be delivered in
two different widths, either 1/2 19" or
19" (full width). The first version is favorable if measured values of only
one feeder line are to be considered
(8 analog and 16 binary signals). Often, this also applies to high-voltage
stations where each feeder is provided with an extra relay kiosk for the
secondary equipment. In all other
cases, the full-width version of 19"
is more economical, since it enables
the processing of up to 32 analog and
64 binary signals. The modular structure with a variety of interface modules (DAUs) provides a maximum of
flexibility. The number of DAUs
which can be integrated in the
recording system is unlimited.
With the help of a DAKON XP unit
(see Fig. 10/3), several devices can
be interlinked and automatically controlled. In addition, digital protection
devices of different make can be
connected to the DAKON XP.
Photo 10/5
SIMEAS R for 8 analog and

16 binary inputs, 1/2 19" design
Photo 10/6
Rear view of a SIMEAS R unit

with terminals for the signals and
interfaces for data transmission
10/11
10
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 12
The voltage inputs are designed for

direct connection to low-voltage
transformers. Current inputs are
suitable for direct connection to
current transformers (IN = 1 or 5 A).
All inputs comply with the relevant
requirements for protection devices
acc. to IEC 60255. The binary inputs
are connected to floating contacts.
Data transmission is preferably
effected via telephone network or
WAN (Wide Area Network). If more
than one SIMEAS R is installed, we
recommend the use of a DAKON XP
unit (data collection platform). The
DAKON XP creates a link with the
SICARO evaluation program, e.g. via
the telephone network. Moreover, the
DAKON XP automatically collects all
information registered by the devices
connected and stores these data on a
decentralized basis. The DAKON XP
performs a great variety of different
functions, e.g. it supports the automatic fax transmission of the data.
A database management system distributes the recorded data to different
stations either automatically or on
command.
10/12
DAU version
Measured values
Application
VCDAU
4 AC voltages
4 AC currents
16 binary signals
Monitoring of voltages and currents

of three-phase feeders or
transformers including the signals
from protective equipment.
VDAU
8 AC voltages
16 binary signals
Monitoring of busbar voltages
CDAU
8 AC voltages
16 binary signals
Monitoring of supply lines and

transformer currents or currents
at the incoming feeders and
busbar couplings
DDAU
8 DC currents
or 16 binary signals
For monitoring of current quantities

supplied by transducers and
telecontrol units, 20 mA or
1 and 10 V
BDAU
16 binary signals
Event acquisition of alarm signals,

disconnector status signals,
circuit-breaker monitoring
Table 10/1
Use of the data acquisition units (DAU's)
Photo 10/7
SICARO program, evaluation and fault recording
TIP_Kap_10_Engl
11.08.2005
19:37 Uhr
Seite 13
10/13
10
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:38 Uhr
Seite B
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
Meters/Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices
11.4
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:38 Uhr
Seite C
chapter 11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 2
11 Meters and Measuring Instruments

Today, it is standard procedure to
monitor currents, voltages and power
values in distributions in order to
know the system utilization so that
overloads do not occur. However, the
possibility to measure currents, voltages and power values to increase system availability has by far not been
exhausted. When using the measurement results, this availability can be
better planned in relation to the utilization level. There is a high potential
in this option. Prerequisite to this are
suitable measuring instruments, transducers and transformers.
If you have detailed information on
the consumption of the devices
connected to the power system and
use these data appropriately, a further great opportunity opens up: saving potentials and cost optimization
can be utilized in a target-specific
way. To do so, we offer you our power meters.
Those who go one step further can
even save money when purchasing
energy and reduce the cost for the
energy purchase. This potential benefits those who analyze the load curves of the actual power consumption. For this we can also offer you
solutions up the online recording
via PC and an integration into our
Power Management System (see
Chapter 9).
There is a high cost saving potential
in the monitoring and selective control of the energy flow in complex power networks and processes in industry as much as in functional and
commercial buildings like bakeries
and workshops.
11/2
Photo 11/1
SIMEAS P power meter
11.1 SIMEAS P
Power Meter
SIMEAS P is a power meter for panelboard mounting or DIN rail mounting. It is used for the recording
and/or display of measurements in electric power supply systems. More
than 80 measuring parameters, such
as phase voltages and currents, active, reactive and apparent power,
symmetry factor, harmonic voltages
and currents, energy and external
measuring parameters and operating
states can be viewed at the graphic
display and transferred to a central
computer system for further processing using the PROFIBUS-DP or Modbus RTU/ASCII standards.
There is a wide range of industrial

and commercial applications. To
match every requirement with the
most suitable device, devices are
available in different basic and extended versions:
Standard versions
C SIMEAS P500/P550 (with graphic
display)
C SIMEAS P100 with the same functionality as SIMEAS P500 but without display
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 3
Extended versions
C SIMEAS P600/ P650 (with graphic
display, memory, battery and clock
module)
C SIMEAS P200 with the same functionality as SIMEAS P600 but without display
C SIMEAS P610/ P660 has the same
functionality as SIMEAS P600, but
it can additionally be equipped with
a maximum of 8 different analog
and digital input/output modules
P500/P550 standard version

C Suitable for connection to 3-phase
systems in 3-wire and 4-wire design with identical or different
loads, or to single-phase systems
C Large graphic display with background lighting
C Very easy parameterization and calibration via panel front keys or
using a PC-based parameterization
software
C The number and contents of the
measurement display screens can
be configured by the user as desired
C Relay outputs can be parameterized for energy pulses, limit-value
violations or status messages
Measured quantities:
C
C
C
C
Rms values of the phase voltages

Rms values of the phase currents
System frequency
Active, reactive and apparent power
C Active, reactive and apparent
energy per phase and for the entire
system
C Power factor per phase and for the
entire system
C Symmetry factor of currents and
voltages
C Harmonic voltages and harmonic

currents up to the 21st order
C Total harmonic distortion (THD)
C Constant high measuring accuracy
over many years, CE mark, UL listing, EMC proof
C Complies with all relevant national
and international standards
Connection
SIMEAS P can be connected to all types of power systems (up to 690-V
systems) ranging from the singlephase type to the 4-wire type, the
connection is made either directly or
via transformers. A universal power
unit with ratings from 24 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 250 V AC makes it truly
universal.
Operation
Besides the graphic display, 3 pushbuttons have been integrated in the
device front for device operation.
Clear designations and texts and an
uncomplicated, menu-guided parameterization make SIMEAS P operation simple and easy to understand.
Measurement display
The user can adapt the representation of measured quantities on the
graphic display screens of the
SIMEAS P to suit his requirements.
Up to 20 screens can be addressed
via the front panel keys. Their number, type, content and sequence can
be parameterized. On the measurement screens, there is a status line
which shows the status, interfacing
and diagnostic messages of the
SIMEAS P. The display is refreshed
in intervals of 1 s.
Functionality
Input voltages and input currents are
scanned and used to generate the
rms values. All derived quantities are
then calculated by a processor and
available for display on the screens
and transfer via a serial interface.
SIMEAS P also offers the possibility
to parameterize several limit groups
with the limit values of the measured
quantities. They can be linked with
AND/OR and their violation can be indicated at the meters or output at the
binary outputs. An oscilloscope triggering is thus also possible.
Quality
Development and production of the
device in our Berlin plant which is
ISO 9001-certified ensure the highest
possible quality standard. For the
user this means a high degree of system protection, reliability and a long
service life of the devices. Further
quality features are their high precision which remains constant over the
years, CE mark, EMC proof and the
fulfillment of all relevant national and
international standards.
Safety
Electrical isolation between the
inputs and outputs with high test voltages ensures the greatest possible
safety. Parameterization and calibration are secured against unauthorized
use via parameterizable password
protection.
11/3
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 4
SIMEAS P 7KG7
RS485/Modbus
1 Protective Ground
3A
4 RTS
5 GND
6 +5V
8B
Measurement
Auxiliary voltage
Voltage
Current
Communication
R
L1
PROFIBUS-DP
1 Protective Ground
3B
4 CTRL-A
5 GND
6 +5V
8A
Communication
L2
L3
Terminal F
L1
L2
PE
PG
L3
Terminal E
N/-
L/+
Terminal H
Terminal G
24 250 V DC
100 230 V AC
k
L1
RS485
l
RS232
L2
L3
N
Fig. 11/1
Inputs and outputs
Service
SIMEAS P devices require no maintenance and thanks to their modular
design, they are easily serviceable.
They can easily be calibrated using
the panel front keys or a PC and the
corresponding parameterization software.
Counters 1 to 4
Limit-value group 1
UL1 < 690 V
or UL2 < 690 V
or UL3 < 690 V
Binary output 1/2
Oscilloscope trigger
Inputs/Outputs
Fig. 11/2
Fig. 11/1 shows the input/output circuitry of the SIMEAS P. Depending

on the type of network, inputs which
are not required are not allocated.
Limit values
Binary outputs
Several limit-value groups with up to

6 measuring parameters can be set
at the SIMEAS P. The measurements
can be linked with AND/OR and
counted in counters if limits are violated, or output to binary outputs and
used for triggering the oscilloscope.
SIMEAS P has 2 binary outputs for

free parameterization as follows:
C Status messages
C Energy quantities from the measured quantities table
C Limit-value violations
Communication
Every SIMEAS P features 2 standard
protocols, PROFIBUS-DP and Modbus RTU/ASCII, as well as an internal
protocol for the SIMEAS P software.
Protocols are selected via the parameterization functions. The basis for
this is an RS485 interface with standardized 9-pole D-SUB connector.
11/4
Limit values
Pulse output time, hysteresis, amplitudes of the energy quantities per

pulse can also be parameterized.
Device versions
SIMEAS P500 is also available with
UL listing.
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 5
Screens
Up to 20 screens can be selected on
the SIMEAS P display via the front
panel keys. If desired, this executive
routine can also be performed automatically.
C The number, type and sequence of
the screens can be freely parameterized.
Photo 11/2
Screens
2 digital measured values
2 digital/analogue measured values
4 digital measured values
C 9 screen types can be selected:

4 types of measured-value screens
1 list screen for min--max values
2 screens for harmonics
1 screen for the oscilloscope
function
1 screen as vector diagram
Measured-value screens
C Number and content of the measured-value screen with the measured quantities can be individually
designed
C In the default setting, the designation of the measuring quantities is
additionally available: UL1, UL2,
UL3, cos or Va, Vb, Vc, PF etc.
C In the bar chart, the start and end
range can be parameterized
C Measured-value screens may be
used any number of times
C The status line contained in the
measurement screen shows the
status and diagnostic messages of
the device
C Screens are refreshed in intervals
of 1 s
Oscilloscope
C 3 parameters, voltage or current
can be selected from the measured-quantities table (on page 11/11,
Table 11/2) and recorded together
with their history
Oscilloscope for sinusoidal values
Oscilloscope for rms values

Photo 11/4
Oscilloscope
C The recording can either be started

manually or triggered by a limit violation
C When the cursor measuring function has been enabled, the cursor
can be moved to the recorded signals with the front panel keys and
the measurements can be read
from the cursor position
C When rms values are recorded, a
maximum of any 3 parameters can
also be selected from the measured-quantities table
C Optimal peak value representation
of the measured quantities in the
screen is conducted automatically
C In the lower part of the screen,
there is a display which represents
the displayed part of the recording
Vector diagram
In the Vector Diagram screen, the
amplitudes and phase angles of the
currents and voltages can be read at
a glance.
4 digital/analogue measured values

Photo 11/3
Measurement screens
11/5
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 6
Master station
GSD file
Photo 11/5
Vector diagram
Photo 11/6
Harmonics
Photo 11/7 List displays for Maximum Average Minimum
Photo 11/8
Parameterization
Harmonics
2 screens can be selected for the
harmonics:
C Harmonic voltages
C Harmonic currents
C The representation in the screens
shows all 3 conductors with all uneven harmonics up to the 21st order.
C In the top right corner of the
screen, there is a window with the
digital display of the individual harmonics which can be selected via
the front panel keys.
11/6
Fig. 11/3
SIMEAS P
SIMEAS P
SIMEAS P
Further field
devices
SIMEAS P
SIMEAS P at the PROFIBUS-DP
List screens
C List screens show the minimum,
maximum and average values of the
measured quantities since the beginning of the recording
C The start of the recording and reset
is executed with the front panel
keys
C The number of the measured quantities and screens, as well as their
order can be freely parameterized
Parameterization
C The user can conduct the parameterization of the SIMEAS P very easily
C Detailed key words, operation with
cursor and Enter key as in Windows make a parameterization as
easy as can be even without a manual
C Parameterization and calibration are
secured against unauthorized use
via parameterizable password protection
Communication
SIMEAS P has a communication interface according to the EIA RS485
standard with 9-pole D-SUB plug for
connection to the RS485 field bus systems.
The following can be parameterized:
C PROFIBUS-DP V1 protocol according to EN 50170 Volume 2
C Modbus RTU/ASCII
Thus SIMEAS P supports the most
common communication protocols.
PROFIBUS-DP
SIMEAS P works in the slave mode
in PROFIBUS-DP. With the aid of the
GSD file, the parameters relevant to
communication are loaded into the
master station.
Here, SIMEAS P supports transfer rates within the range of 9.6 kbit/s to
12 Mbit/s. In order to transfer measured values to the master station,
the user can choose from 4 transfer
types.
C Type 1: transfer of 3 measured
quantities
quantities
quantities
quantities
This type selection ensures an easy
and efficient data transfer between
SIMEAS P and the master station in
the fastest possible way. For types 1
to 4, the 3, 6, 12 or 32 measured values to be transferred can be taken
from the measured quantities table.
The current GSD-File is available at
the homepage www.simeas.com
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 7
Memory management
Due to an extended recording capacity (1 Mbyte) and the new memory
management, the memory may be
segmented to record the following:
C Mean values
C Mean values of power records (e.g.
mean value of power over the period of 15 min)
C Oscilloscope measurements
C Binary states
Photo 11/9
SIMEAS P 7KG7600
SIMEAS P600/P650
extended version
SIMEAS P600 has the same functionality as SIMEAS P500 (7KG7500), in
addition it features the following:
C Battery buffering:
Recordings, such as limit-value violations, meter values (energy values), will not be lost during a failure of the auxiliary power supply,
but will be stored in the measurement memory for up to 3 months
C Clock module:
Measured values are recorded with
time stamp or transmitted to the
master stations
C Extended measurement memory
including memory management
C Recording of limit-value violations
C Log entries
These additional functionalities can
be set in the parameterization software.
Photo 11/10 Memory management
Next to the percentage value, the

corresponding memory time is also
displayed. For limit-value violations
and binary states, the maximum
number of entries will be shown instead.
Photo 11/11 Recording of limit-value violations
Recording of limit-value violations

This screen shows all limit-value violations in their time sequence.
Screen for log entries
The "Log Entries" screen shows the
date and time of the last status
change for every log entry on display.
Reading the measurement memory
Photo 11/12 Log entries screen
The measured values and items of information stored in the device memory can be read, displayed and analyzed using the RS485 interface and
the SIMEAS P parameterization software.
Device versions
SIMEAS P600 is also available with
UL listing.
For more information, please refer to

the Section SIMEAS P parameterization package.
11/7
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 8
SIMEAS P610/P660 extended

version, with analog and digital input/output modules
Slots
A to D
Input/output modules
SIMEAS P610 or P660 have the
same functionality as SIMEAS P600
(7KG7600), but they can be ordered
with additional analog and digital
input/output modules. For this functionality, they have been fitted with
4 slots which can be equipped with
5 different modules.
Photo 11/13 SIMEAS P610/P660
Application
Water
flow rate, pressure, pH etc.
The input modules at the SIMEAS P

are used for recording, display and
post-processing of external measuring parameters (0 20 mADC).
Output modules may be used for the

output of electrical quantities ranging
from 0 20 mADC or 420mADC ,
intended for energy metering, message generation and switching.
Binary outputs
Pulses for energy
metering
Gas
flow rate, pressure etc.
Messages, limit-value
violations
Oil
flow rate, pressure etc.
All of the acquired measured quantities can be displayed on the device

together with their units of measurement and/or transmitted to a central
computer system for further processing. Transmission is made, as with
the standard versions, by using the
communication protocols PROFIBUSDP V1 and Modbus RTU/ ASCII.
In addition, the external measured values can be saved in the device memory including their time stamp.
With the help of the read function
which is integrated in the parameterization software, they can be transmitted to the SIMEAS P parameterization tool and displayed and analyzed there.
Analog outputs
Electrical quantities: U, I,
cos , f etc. (020 mA)
Analog inputs
Via transducers 0-20 mA
Relay outputs
Switching in case of
limit-value violations
District heating
Measured electrical quantities
of other branch circuits
Communication
Like the electrical
quantities, measured
quantities can be
displayed on the
screens and stored
in the memory.
Digital inputs
Messages, switch
positions, status
Time synchronization
Records of measured
quantities can be read out and
displayed at the PC using the
SIMEAS PAR software.
Fig. 11/4
SIMEAS P610/P660 - Examples of application
Slot assignment
The exact module configuration of
the SIMEAS P, i.e. the combination
of the different input and output modules, must be specified on order.
Replacement or retrofitting of modules is not possible. With the exception of the relay module and the
binary outputs, modules can be assig-
11/8
All measured quantities can

be sent to a master station
via PROFIBUS-DP, Modbus.
ned to the slots as desired. Slots

which have not been equipped remain unassigned.
Device versions
SIMEAS P610 with input/output modules can also be ordered as type
P660 with UL listing.
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 9

Module description and options for application
Terminal
Assignment
Analog inputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 analog input modules. Each
of these modules has 2 analog inputs which are rated for a nominal measuring
range of 0 to 20 mADC. Both analog inputs form a common circuit, therefore
they are not isolated. The 2 analog inputs are, however, electrically isolated
against the internal circuit.
Analog inputs may be used for:
C Recording and display of measuring signals in the range of 0 to 20 mADC
C Recording of limit-value violations
C Storage of external measuring signals
AI1+
AI1
AI2+
AI2
BI1+
BIR
BIR
BI2+
AO1+
AO1
AO2+
AO2
BOR
BO1+
BO2+
free
RO1
RO2
RO3
ROR
Binary inputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 binary input modules. Each
of these modules has 2 electrically isolated, rooted binary inputs which work
according to the current source principle, i.e. the input voltage applied is transformed into a constant current. Therefore, the binary inputs do not require any
auxiliary supply voltage.
Binary inputs may be used for:
C Metering external measured quantities
C Status/message logging
C Clock synchronization of the SIMEAS P with minute pulses (sets seconds to 00)
Analog outputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 analog output modules.
Each of these modules has 2 analog outputs which are rated for a nominal output current of 0 to 20 mADC. Both analog outputs form a common circuit, therefore they are not isolated. The 2 analog outputs are, however, electrically isolated against the internal circuit.
Analog outputs may be used for:
C Output of measured quantities (current, voltage, power , cos , frequency
etc.) in the range 0 20 mADC or 420mADC
Binary outputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with a maximum of 4 binary output modules. Each
of these modules has 2 rooted binary outputs, which have been implemented
through semiconductor relays.
Like the internal binary outputs, these binary outputs may be used for:
C Output of energy pulses
C Display of limit-value violations
C Display of device status
C Display of the rotational direction of the phase voltages L1-L2-L3
Relay outputs
SIMEAS P can be equipped with one relay module as a maximum. This module has 3 rooted, electro-mechanical relays. The relay outputs can be used to
switch loads, which cannot be handled by the semiconductor relays of the
binary outputs any more.
These relay outputs are parameterized like binary outputs and can be used for:
C Switching in the event of limit-value violations, e.g. for reactive power compensation
Table 11/1
Module description and options for application
11/9
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 10
Power meter without display

SIMEAS P without display is used
wherever a display is not absolutely
necessary.
SIMEAS P100 7KG7100
SIMEAS P100 is a power meter without display or front panel keys for
snapping onto a 35-mm standard
mounting rail according to DIN EN
50022. It features the same functionality as SIMEAS P500 but without a
graphic display.
Device parameterization is performed
with the parameterization software
only.
SIMEAS P200 7KG7200
SIMEAS P200 is a power meter
without display or front panel keys
for snapping onto a 35-mm standard
mounting rail according to DIN EN
50022. It features the same functionality as SIMEAS P600 but without a
graphic display.
Photo 11/14 SIMEAS P100/P200 7KG7100/7KG7200
Device parameterization is performed

with the parameterization software
only.
11/10
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 11
Measured quantity
Measuring path1)
Selection
Fault limits2)
Voltage
L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, (N-E)
0.1 % 2) / 0.13 % 7)
Voltage
L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1, 3)
0.1 % 2) / 0.13 % 7)
Current
L1, L2, L3, N, 3)
0.1 % 2) / 0.13 % 7)
Active power P + purchase, - supply
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Reactive power Q + cap., ind.
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Apparent power S
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Phase angle4)
L1, L2, L3,
System frequency5)
L1-L2
10 mHz
Active energy E, purchase
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Active energy E, supply
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Active energy, absolute
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Active energy, sum
0.5 %
Reactive energy Q cap.
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Reactive energy Q ind.
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Reactive energy Q, absolute
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Apparent energy
L1, L2, L3,
0.5 %
Unsymmetrical condition of voltage
4-wire system
0.5 %
Unsymmetrie Strom
4-wire system
0.5 %
THD voltage
L1, L2, L3
0.5 %
THD current
L1, L2, L3
0.5 %
Harmonics U5,7,11,13,17,19
L1, L2, L3
0.5 %
Harmonics I5,7,11,13,17,19
L1, L2, L3
0.5 %
Limit-value violations
counters 1 to 4
Analog inputs6)
external
inputs6)
external
Power factor |cos |4)

Active power factor
Binary
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
cos 4)
Conductor representation depends on the type of connection

Fault limits under reference conditions related to 0.1 to 0.2 x nominal
range
Mean value of all conductor circuits
Measurement starting at 2% of internal apparent power
Measurement starting at 30% of input voltage L1-N
7KG7610 and 7KG7660 only
Table 11/2
0.5 %
7)
Fault limits over the entire temperature range related to: 0.1 to 0.2 x
nominal range
Measured quantities to be represented on the screens (only for types
7KG75 and 7KG76)
Measured quantities to be selected via communications
Measured quantities selection for list screens and oscilloscope (only
for types 7KG75 and 7KG76)
Measured quantities
11/11
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
SIMEAS P parameterization
package
Application
With the SIMEAS P parameterization
software package, the user benefits
from a low-cost tool for an even
more efficient utilization of the
SIMEAS P functionality. The package
comprises the Windows parameterization software, a connection lead,
an RS232/RS485 converter and a
plug-in power supply unit. The converter is used to connect the SIMEAS
P to a customary Notebook or PC
using a 9-pole D-SUB connector.
The software is executable with the
operating systems WIN95, WIN98,
Windows NT, WIN2000 and Windows XP Professional.
The parameterization software enables the user to configure SIMEAS P
devices even faster. Parameters can
be set and saved without directly
operating the device. The function
"Send to device" transfers the parameters to the SIMEAS P.
11/12
Seite 12
This enables the user to configure several SIMEAS P simultaneously.

When devices are replaced, stored
parameter sets can easily be uploaded to the new devices. Another option is the upload of communication
protocols and firmware updates.
The parameterization software supports all SIMEAS P devices. It is mandatory for parameterizing SIMEAS
P100/200 and P600.
Parameterization of the memory
function
Memory-equipped devices (SIMEAS
P600 and SIMEAS P200) offer the
possibility to record measured values
and states together with a time
stamp. The parameterization software helps to define which measured values and which status shall be
recorded.
Memory reading
An additional function in the parameterization software enables the following information to be read from the
device memory:
C Mean values
C Mean values of power
C Oscilloscope recordings
C Binary channel status
C Log entries
Display and analysis

The measured values transmitted by
the device are automatically displayed on screen as graphs and tables including time stamps. The context menu offers various functions,
such as showing/hiding signals, copy,
zoom and measurement functions.
The following measured quantities
can be displayed as graphs:
C Mean values
C Mean values of power
C Oscilloscope recordings
C Binary channel status
The following information is shown in
tables:
C Log entries
Export functions
An ASCII interface can be used to export transmitted measurements and
information to other programs, the
data is made available in CSV format
for further processing.
Oscilloscope recordings can be exported via a COMTRADE interface.
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 13
SIMEAS P
RS485
RS232
Fig. 11/5
Parameterization
Photo 11/17 Parameterization and recording of measured values
Photo 11/15 Parameterization
Photo 11/18 Display and analysis
Photo 11/16 Parameterization
Photo 11/19 Display and analysis
11/13
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
11.2 SIMEAS T
Transducer for HighCurrent Power Quantities
Description
All measured quantities in any type
of high-current network can be detected with one device by using the
SIMEAS T multi-purpose transducer.
The device has 3 analog outputs.
Every output can be assigned to one
variable (current, voltage, active or reactive power, frequency etc.) and any
measuring range.
The output signal (e.g. 10 to 0 to
10 mA, 20 mA, 4 to 20 A, 0 to 10 V
etc.) can be parameterized as required for every output.
The binary output can be used as an
energy meter, to measure work
quantities or as limit value indicator.
Input currents of up to 10 A, or input
voltages up to a maximum of 600 V
with nominal frequencies of 50, 60 or
16 2/3 Hz can be connected. Depending on the measuring task, unused
input terminals will remain unassigned.
The measurement is a true rms measurement which also allows distorted
curves up to the 32nd harmonic order
to be measured. The transducer can
be ordered fully parameterized or for
individual parameterization via PC or
notebook.
Fully configured devices can be ordered by specifying a parameterization
key with clear-text information as illustrated in the order example. These
devices can be re-parameterized
using the SIMEAS T PAR software.
Orders for devices to be individually
parameterized merely have to contain
the corresponding order number. The
11/14
Seite 14
configuration of the transducer for its

measuring task is performed via a
commercial PC or laptop. A connection cable to the PC and an installation disk named SIMEAS T PAR is
optionally available. It can be used to
individually configure the transducer
in a Windows desktop in an easy
way.
Set data and a specific connection
diagram are included in the delivery
of factory-configured devices. Or
they can be printed out together with
a device label when you are doing
the parameterization yourself.
The transducer can be re-parameterized during normal operation; measured values can be displayed online or
recorded on graphical instruments
(contained in the software) on the PC
or laptop.
All measured quantities and parameters may be read out and displayed at
the PC with the help of the communication interface, independent of the
analog outputs. Measured values can
be transmitted through an RS232 or
RS485 interface. Devices with an
RS485 interface are additionally provided with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol which enables the transducers
to be connected to an I&C network
and measured values to be sent to
the host processor via an RS485 bus.
Via a serial interface, all measured
quantities and parameters can be
read out and displayed on the PC independently of the analog outputs.
Performance features of the

SIMEAS T multi-purpose transducer for power quantities with
RS232 interface
C Minimum dimensions
C Short delivery times, ex works
C CE mark
C EMC immunity
C In accordance with all relevant national and international standards
C High quality, long service life
C Electric isolation with high test voltage
C High measuring accuracy
C True rms measurement
C Powerful output signal circuits
C One device for all applications
C All data can be freely parameterized
C High system safety and reliability
C High ease of servicing
The devices require an auxiliary power source. A version for the DC

range of 24 V to 60 V and a version
for the AC/DC range of 100 to 230 V
are available.
Inputs and outputs are electrically
isolated.
Photo 11/20 SIMEAS T
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 15
SICAM
PCC
SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC S7
CP
441
CP
521
CP
340
SICAM
PAS
CP
523
RS323
OWG
RS485
SIMEAS T transducers with interface according to IEC 60870-5-103

Design, type of connection and technical data of these transducers are
identical to those of a transducer
with RS232 interface. Instead of an
RS232 interface, however, they have
a built-in EAI RS485 interface for bus
operation in compliance with IEC
60870-5-103. This enables the transducers to be operated at a bus, thus
they can be networked as shown in
the example.
The output of analog measured quantities through the analog outputs will
not be affected by bus operation. Devices are parameterized with the SIMEAS T PAR software.
Measured-value transmission
The measuring points to be acquired
by the converter and transmitted
with the ASDU depend on the selected mode of operation. They are listed in Table 11/3. Data representation corresponds to DIN 19244 and
VDEW.
Data transmission with
IEC 60870-5-103 file transfer
The content of file transfer protocols
according to IEC 60870 is fully transparent for the user. All of the available measured values can be integrated in such a file. The application program determines which data shall be
selected.
RS485
RS485 bus acc. to IEC 60870-5-103
Other field
devices
Fig. 11/6
Example: application programs for SIMATIC for interfacing

transducers with RS485 interface (on request)
ASDU 140 Standard with a maximum of 16 measured values ASDU 9

ASDU 140
with 9 mea- with 9 measured values sured values
No.1) Single-phase 3-wire
system
any load
3-wire
identical
load
4-wire
any load
4-wire
identical
load
4-wire
any load
4-wire
identical
load
IL1
IL1
IL1
IL1
IL1
IL1
PL1-N
UL1-N
IL3
IL2
UL1-N
IL2
PL2-N
UL1-L2
IL3
IL3
PL2-N
cos
UL1-L2
UL1-L3
UL1-LN
cos
UL1-LN
QL1-N
UL2-L3
UL3-L1
UL2-LN
UL2-LN
QL2-N
UL3-L1
cos
UL3-LN
UL3-LN
QL3-N
cos
U0
cosL1-N
cosL2-N
UL1-L2
cosL3-N
10
UL2-L3
11
UL3-L1
12
cos
13
14
15
16
1) No.
corresponds to the measuring point in the telegram,

units of measured quantities: V, A, Hz, W, Var, VA
Table 11/3
Transmission of measured values
11/15
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 16
Types of connection
Single-
3-wire
phase
any load
AC current
3-wire
identical
load
Measured quantities
Parameterization
Selection of measuring and metering quantities
Depending on the type of connection, the transducer will calculate all
measured quantities or count values
marked with .
Any 3 of these measured quantities
can be switched onto the 3 analog
outputs and any one measured quantity may be switched onto the
binary output for limit-value signaling
or energy metering.
The serial interface transmits all measured quantities marked with .
Voltage
UL1-N
Voltage
UL2-N
Voltage
UL3-N
Voltage
UL1-L2
Voltage
UL2-L3
Voltage
UL3-L1
Voltage
UE-N
Current
IL1
Current
IL2
Current
IL3
Current
IL0
Frequency
fL1
Phase angle
Active power
Ptotal
Active power
PL1
Active power
PL2
Active power
PL3
Reactive power
Qtotal
Reactive power
QL1
Reactive power
QL2
Reactive power
QL3
Power factor
cos total
Power factor
cos L1
Power factor
cos L2
Power factor
cos L3
Apparent power
Stotal
Active power, purchase
kWhtotal
kWhL1
kWhL2
kWhL3
Active power, supply
kWhtotal
kWhL1
kWhL2

Energy quantities
kWhL3
Measured quantities that can be switched

onto the analog outputs.
Reactive power, purchase
kvarhtotal
kvarhL1
Measured quantities that can be switched

onto a binary output as count values for limit-value signaling or energy metering.
kvarhL2
kvarhL3
Measured quantities or count values to be

transmitted via a serial interface of type
RS232 or RS485, they can be displayed
and/or recorded at a PC or Notebook with
the help of the SIMEAS T PAR software.
Reactive power, supply
kvarhtotal
kvarhL1
kvarhL2
kvarhL3
Apparent power
kVAhtotal
Table 11/4
11/16
Selection of quantities for measuring and metering
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 17

4-wire
4-wire
any load
identical
Units
load

V, kV
V, kV
V, kV
V, kV
V, kV
V, kV
V, kV
A, kA
A, kA
A, kA
A, kA
Hz
W, kW, MW
W, kW, MW
W, kW, MW
W, kW, MW
The following parameters can be entered with the SIMEAS T PAR software:
Operating mode
C Direct connection without
transformer
C Single-phase AC current
C 3-wire, 3-phase current with identical load
C 3-wire, 3-phase current with any
load
C 4-wire, 3-phase current with identical load
C 4-wire, three phase current with
any load
var, kvar, Mvar
var, kvar, Mvar
var, kvar, Mvar
var, kvar, Mvar
Voltage inputs
VA, kVA, MVA
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
C Without transformer L-N in the

range of 0 to 90 V
range of 0 to180 V
range of 0 to 450 V
C With transformer via clear-text information: prim./sec. example:
10/0.1 kV
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
kWh/pulse
System frequency
C 50 Hz
C 60 Hz
C 16 2/3 Hz
Current inputs
C Without transformer in the
range of 0 to 2 A
range of 0 to 4 A
range of 0 to 10 A
C With transformer via clear-text
information: prim./sec. example:
100/1 kV
Measuring range
C Enter primary measuring
range with start/end range
e.g. 100 to +100 MW
Output signal
C Enter output signal with start/end
range 20 to +20 mA or 10 to
+10 V, e.g. 4 to 20 mA
Output signal limitation
C Enter output signal limitation with
the lower/upper range, e.g. lower
range +4 mA/upper range +22 mA
Characteristic curve
C Linear curve
C With knee-point in the measuring
range/in the output signal, e.g.
sharp bend at +50 MW and +2 mA
Analog output 2 and 3 same as
analog output 1
Binary output
C No signal
C Unit in operation, signal in the
event of a malfunction of the
transducer
C Limit value signaling
Select quantity from Table 11/2,
define limit value of the measuring
range.
Choose whether signal is given
when values exceed/fall below a
given point, e.g. limit value for
measured quantity Voltage:
Signal if value is below 9.9 kV
C Energy metering
Select energy quantity from Table
11/2, define pulse rate of the
energy quantity e.g. energy quantity: Active power-purchase-total;
pulse rate: 10 Imp/kWh.
Analog output 1
Measured quantity
C Select measured quantity from
Table 11/2, e.g. Active power total
11/17
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Transformer
Seite 18
Sequential/ MultiHold circuit plexer
~/
Transformer
Processor
Output
modules
UL1
A1
~
UL2
A2
~
~
A3
UL3
UN
Binary output
IL1
Serial
RS232 interface,
optionally RS485
IL2
IL3
Block diagram
The transducers are permanently wired and tested functional units. They
have a snap fixing for a 35 mm standard mounting rail in accordance with
DIN EN 50 022. Inputs and outputs
can be safely connected with screw
terminals. The transducers are flameretardant and free of silicone and
halogens.
GND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
RXD
Design
TXD
Fig. 11/7
UH
Auxiliary
power supply
3+ 3 2+ 2 1+ 1
Outputs
Interface
25
+
~
Aux. volt.
SIMEAS T transducer
AC inputs: current
Fig. 11/8
11/18
24
AC inputs: voltage
IL1
IL1
IL2
IL2
IL3
IL3
ULN
UL1
UL2
UL3
10
Electrical connection
Inputs and outputs which are not required are not assigned
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:39 Uhr
Seite 19
Other technical data
Safety
acc. to DIN EN 61010 Part 1
Basic standard
acc. to IEC 60888
III
Electric strength
acc. to DIN EN 61010 Part 1
Pollution severity
Input
(current against current
and against voltages)
3.7 kV, 50 Hz, sin

6.8 kV impulse voltage:
1.2/50 s, R1 = 500 W
(type test)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Inputs against outputs

Interface
and auxiliary energy
5.5 kV, 50 Hz, sin

1.2/50 s, R1 = 500 W
(type test)
Auxiliary voltage against

outputs and interface
3.7 kV, 50 Hz, sin

1.2/50 s, R1 = 500 W
(type test)
Outputs and interface

against each other, where
analogue output 1 is electrically
connected with the interface
700 V DC
Ambient temperature
Working temperature range
(depending on measured
voltage, output load and
type of installation)
acc. to IEC 68-2/1-3

10C to +50C e.g.
at input voltage
3 x 100 V and sum of
continuously
applied output loads of
40 mA
Emitted interference
acc. to DIN EN 50081-1

and IEC/C ISPR 22
Interference field strength
acc. to DIN EN 55022 Class B
Interference immunity
acc. to EN 50082-1,
EN 50082-2
Immunity against electromagnetic fields 10 V/m
acc. to IEC 255-22-3
Electrostatic discharge
ESD 8 kV

IEC 255-22-2
Fast transients, asym.

2 kV burst with capacitive link IEC 255-22-4
Storage temperature range
40C to +85C
Climatic application
class
EN 60721-3-3 temperature
3K8H humidity 3K5
Fire resistance class
V0
Weight
approx. 0.65 kg
DIN VDE 0470 T 1 / EN 60529
Housing
IP 40
Terminals
IP 20
Type of connection
screw terminals
Current inputs
4 mm2
Voltage
2.5 mm2
Outputs/interface
2.5 mm2
Connection level: terminals

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
24 25
75
11 12 13
10
90
90
105
Table 11/5
[mm]
Technical data and dimensions
11/19
11
Seite 20
11.3 Measuring Instruments/Meters as

Modular Devices
There is a great potential in this. The

measuring instruments, which are
designed as modular devices, are catching on because their planning and
installation is so easy.
Measuring power consumption is

the first step to cost saving
When configuring these modular devices, it is merely the modular widths

and the mounting tier which have to
be defined. The installation itself is
very simple: just snap the devices in
This advantage is secured by using

the measurements for a better planning in relation to system utilization.
Devices
the distribution board onto the standard mounting rail without the use of
tools and make the connection.
Measuring instruments by Siemens
have proven themselves many times in
this situation. Apart from the fact that
they are reliable and safe, they are also
small, which means they save space
and make the device arrangement within the distribution board transparent.
Application
Time and pulse counters

Time counters
7KT5 80 and 7KT5 82
Monitoring of operating hours

and switch-on operations of devices
or installations
Standards
IEC 60255-6,
DIN EN 60255-6
(VDE 0435 T 301)
Pulse counters
7KT5 81 and 7KT5 83
11/20
Use in building
Industrial
19:40 Uhr
Residential
11.08.2005
Commercial
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
Time counter for front

panel mounting
7KT5 5 and 7KT5 6
Monitoring of operating hours

of devices or installations
IEC 60255-6,
DIN EN 60255-6
(VDE 0435 T 301)
Analog measuring devices

7KT1 0
Voltage and current measurements,

to monitor incoming or outgoing
currents or device currents
IEC 60051-2,
DIN EN 60051-2
Digital measuring devices

7KT1 1
Voltage and current measurements,

to monitor incoming or outgoing
currents or device currents
DIN 43751-1,
DIN 43751-2
Multimeter
7KT1 30
Display and analysis of 23 electrical

measured values in switchgear
stations, incoming or outgoing
feeders
IEC 60051-2,
DIN EN 60051-2
IEC 61010-1,
DIN EN 61010-1
(VDE 0411 T 1)
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 21
Use in building
Industrial
Standards
Residential
Application
Commercial
Devices
Multicounter
7KT1 31, 7KT1 34, 7KT1 35
Display and analysis of 35 electrical

measured values in switchgear
stations, incoming or outgoing feeders
IEC 60051-2,
DIN EN 60051-2
IEC 61010-1,
DIN EN 61010-1
(VDE 0411 T 1)
IEC 62053-21,
DIN EN 62053-21
(VDE 0418 T 3-21)
Energy meter,
single-phase
7KT1 14
For kWh metering in single-phase

power supply systems, e.g. in industrial
plants, offices and apartments in
apartment complexes
IEC 62053-11,
DIN EN 62053-11
(VDE 0418 T 3-11)
IEC 62053-21,
DIN EN 62053-21
(VDE 0418 T 3-21)
Energy meter,
three-phase
7KT1 50, 7KT1 51, 7KT1 52
For kWh metering in single-phase or

three-phase power supply systems, e.g.
in industrial plants, offices and
apartments in apartment complexes
IEC 61010-1,
DIN EN 61010-1
(VDE 0411 T 1)
IEC 62053-11,
DIN EN 62053-11
(VDE 0418 T 3-11)
IEC 62053-21,
DIN EN 62053-21
(VDE 0418 T 3-21)
Energy meter,
three-phase
instabus KNX EIB
7KT1 16
With instabus KNX EIB interface,

for kWh metering in single-phase
or three-phase power supply systems,
e.g. in industrial plants, offices and
apartments in apartment complexes
IEC 61036
DIN EN 61036
(VDE 0418 T7)
LAN coupler
3KT1 390
For connection of multimeters,

multicounters and energy meters
7KT15 to LAN networks
IEEE 802
Current transformer
7KT1 2
For non-contact acquisition of

primary currents in three-phase
power supply networks
IEC 60044-1,
DIN EN 60044-1
(VDE 0414 T 44-1)
11/21
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 22
7KT1 30 multimeter
Overview
All of the required measured values
of the power supply system can be
viewed at a glance
Innovative matrix selection to
assign measurement values to
the display tabs
For direct connection of 63 A or for
current transformer /1A or /5A
For primary currents of a current
transformer of 10 to 5,000 A. Input
is made in increments of 5 A
Large, 11 mm high, green 7-segment measurement display which
is friendly on the eye
Clearly distinct orange text display
of the measuring units assigned to
the displays which show the measured value
Representation of measured values
at 5 triple 7-segment displays and
one auxiliary 7-segment display for
input of the primary current
Detection of connection mistakes
(interchanged phases)
Measuring accuracy for voltage,
current and power: 2 % 1 digit
The analysis of differing phase loads

is a special feature of this instrument. Phase displacement and load
unbalances may result in partial overloads. The multimeter provides various options for the compilation and
analysis of measured values.
11/22
Display
Unit
Assignment
Active power
D1
L1
Voltage
D1
L1
Current
D1
L1
Apparent power
D1
VA
L1
cos
D1
cos
L1
Voltage
D1
L1 L2
Active power
D2
L2
Voltage
D2
L2
Current
D2
L2
10
Apparent power
D2
VA
L2
11
cos
D2
cos
L2
12
Voltage
D2
L2 L3
13
Active power
D3
L3
14
Voltage
D3
L3
15
Current
D3
L3
16
Apparent power
D3
VA
L3
17
cos
D3
cos
L3
18
Voltage
D3
L3 L1
19
Active power
D5
20
Apparent power
D1, D2, D3, D5
VA
21
Reactive power
D5
var
22
Frequency
D4
Hz
23
cos
D1, D2, D3, D4
cos
2 set values will be displayed in addition
Application
Very compact multi-functional display
for direct or current transformer
connection in a three-phase network,
with Wye (Y) and Delta () measurements to display a maximum of 23
different electrical values at a switchgear station, incoming or outgoing
feeders.
Measured value
24
Current transformer setting
D5
CT/A
/1 or /5
25
D5
CT/A
10 ... 5,000
Table 11/6
Display values of the multimeter
Function
Voltage measurement
The multimeter either measures the
delta voltages L1 to L2; L2 to L3 and
L3 to L1 or the Wye voltages L1, L2,
L3 to N.
Display values
5 out of these 23 options can be continuously displayed.
L symbol for the 3-phase system

This emphasizes that all units of measurement shown under this symbol
always refer to all of the 3 phases.
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 23
L1
D1
L1-N
I3
N
L3-N
L3
Fig 11/9
L1-L2
I1
I2
L1-L3
M k W V A COS
L2
L2-3
L
MkW VAR
CT/A
L1-L1
M k W V A COS
L1
L1-2
L
D2
D3
M k W V A COS
L3
L3-1
L
OK
H Z COS
L2-N
D5
L2
Display
The multimeter has a shaded,
brightly lit LED display. Measured values are displayed on 11 mm high,
green 7-segment LED's, units of
measurement are shown on orange
LED's. Both colors can be recognized
more clearly than the previously used
red LED's. Capacitive loads are automatically marked with a capacitor
symbol and inductive loads with a
coil symbol.
Matrix selection
Traditional measuring instruments
either provide voltage, current or
other comparable values for the 3
phases. Thanks to its matrix selection
function, the multimeter is much
more flexible and universal.
Rotary keys select the triple displays,
the desired display is confirmed with
OK. Then the horizontal selection is
made, e.g. W V A or cos , followed by the vertical selection, e.g. L1
L1-L2 L. This defines the matrix
selection.
Fig. 11/10
D4
Display
kW
L1
kW
L2
OK
kW
L3
COS
Fig. 11/11
Example of a matrix selection
This means, each measured value in

the horizontal view can be assigned
to a value in the vertical view. Letters
M and k are automatically assigned
depending on the measuring range,
i.e. the measured value, for example:
kW or MW. Capacitive loads are automatically marked with a capacitor
coil symbol.
The resulting matrix selection might
look as shown in Fig. 11/11.
11/23
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 24
7KT1 3 Multicounter
Overview
All of the required measured values
of the power supply system can be
viewed at a glance
Innovative matrix selection to
assign measurement values to
the display tabs
current transformer /1A or /5A
Large, 11 mm high, green 7-segment measurement display which
is friendly on the eye
Clearly distinct orange text display
of the measuring units assigned to
the displays which show the measured value
Representation of measured values
at 4 triple 7-segment displays and
one seven-fold 7-segment display
Display selection for active, reactive and apparent power values, 3or 7-digit
Accuracy class 2 according to IEC
62053-21, -23
Device types with LAN interface
(via LAN coupler) and MS EXCEL
user interface
Versions with PROFIBUS-DP V1
interface
Application
Very compact multi-functional display
for direct or current transformer
connection in a three-phase network,
with Wye (Y) and Delta () measurements to display a maximum of 35
different electrical values at a switchgear station, incoming or outgoing
feeders.
11/24
Measured value
Display
Unit
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
Active power
Voltage
Current
Apparent power
cos
Voltage
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
W
V
A
VA
cos
V
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1 L2
7
8
9
10
11
12
Active power
Voltage
Current
Apparent power
cos
Voltage
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
W
V
A
VA
cos
V
L2
L2
L2
L2
L2
L2 L3
13
14
15
16
17
18
Active power
Voltage
Current
Apparent power
cos
Voltage
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
W
V
A
VA
cos
V
L3
L3
L3
L3
L3
L3 L1
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Temperature
Current, N conductor
Active power
Reactive power
Apparent power
Frequency
cos
D6
D6
D4
D5
D5
D6
D1, D2, D3, D6
C
A
W
var
VA
Hz
cos
L
L
L
L
L
L
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Active energy Rate 1

Reactive energy Rate 1
Apparent energy Rate 1
Apparent energy Rate 2
D4
D4
D4
D4
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
Wh
Wh
Wh
Wh
varh
varh
varh
varh
VAh
VAh
L q
L q
L y
L y
L, ind.
L, ind.
L, kap.
L, kap.
L
L
CT/A
CT/A
/1 or /5
10 ... 5,000
2 set values will be displayed in addition

36
Current transformer setting D4
37
Current transformer setting D5
Table 11/7
Display values of the multimeter
The analysis of differing phase loads

is a special feature of this instrument. Phase displacement and load
imbalances may result in partial overloads. The device provides various
options for the compilation and analysis of measured values.
Information on LAN operation and
the MS EXCEL user interface can be
found at the LAN coupler section in
catalog ET B1, on page 10/12.
Function
Voltage measurement
The multicounter either measures the
delta voltages L1 to L2; L2 to L3 and
L3 to L1 or the Wye voltages L1, L2,
L3 to N.
Display values
5 out of these 35 options can be continuously displayed.
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 25
D1
L1
L1-N
I3
3
L1-L2
I1
N
L3-N
L1-L1
I2
D2
M k W V A COS
L1
L1-2
L
M k W V A COS
L2
L2-3
L
M k W V A HZ COS
C
N
L
Mk
CT/A
T12
L
Fig. 11/12
L1-L3
M k W V A COS
L3
L3-1
L
VARh
MkWh
D5
oder D5 + D4
D4
OK
L2-N
D6
L3
D3
L2
Fig. 11/13

This emphasizes that all units of measurement shown under this symbol
always refer to all of the 3 phases.
Display
The multicounter has a shaded,
brightly lit LED display. Measured values are displayed on 11 mm high,
green 7-segment LED's, units of
measurement are shown on orange
LED's. Both colors can be recognized
more clearly than the previously used
red LED's.
Matrix selection
Traditional measuring instruments
either provide voltage, current or
other comparable values for the 3
phases. Thanks to its matrix selection
function, the multicounter is much
more flexible and universal.
Rotary keys select the triple displays,
the desired display is confirmed with
OK. Then the horizontal selection is
made, e.g. W V A VA or cos,
followed by the vertical selection,
Display
L1-2
L2-3
L3-1
OK
N
kWh
Fig. 11/14
Matrix selection
e.g. L1 L1-L2 L. This defines the

matrix selection.

coil symbol.
This means, each measured value in

the horizontal view can be assigned
to a value in the vertical view. Letters
M and k are automatically assigned
depending on the measuring range,
i.e. the measured value, for example:
kW or MW. Capacitive loads are automatically marked with a capacitor
The resulting matrix selection might

look as shown in Fig. 11/14.
11/25
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 26
7KT1 5 Energy meter,

three-phase
Rate 1
Rate 2
kWh
kWh
Arrow and T1
Arrow and T2
Reactive energy
Rate 1
Rate 2
kvarh
kvarh
Arrow and T1
Arrow and T2
Active power
kW
Utilization and
momentary value
Reactive power
kvar
Utilization and
momentary value
Phase-sequence indicator 123
Blinking triangle indicates

left-hand rotation
CT primary current
CT (current transformer)
Table 11/8
Versions including LAN interface and

LCD display are used in industrial
plants and office buildings to analyze
consumption and minimize operating
costs. Information on LAN operation
and the MS EXCEL user interface can
be found at the LAN coupler section
in catalog ET B1, on page 10/12.
11/26
10 ... 5,000 A
Data types shown on the display
kWh
kvarh
Application
Energy meters are used for kWh
metering in single-phase and threephase systems, e.g. in industrial
apartment complexes.
Identification
Active energy
Overview
Features
1- or 3-phase measurement for
Delta or Wye connection and neutral-point calculation for Delta
connection
current transformer /5A
7-fold 7-segment display for energy
values and additional functions
Device types with LAN interface
(via LAN coupler) and MS EXCEL
user interface
Accuracy class 2 according to IEC
61036
Unit
Fig. 11/15
CT
T1 T2
kM 3
W var
Device display
LAN communication
6 measured values are transmitted:
active energy Rate 1 and Rate 2,
reactive energy Rate 1 and Rate 2,
active power and reactive power.
The primary current of the CT is set
at the device ridge. Depending on the
CT setting, values are internally converted and displayed. This setting
can be sealed for certification purposes.
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 27

7KT1 162
7KT1 165
7KT1 16 Energy meter,

three-phase,
instabus KNX EIB
Overview
Data for consumption
analysis
Active energy
Rate 1/2
kWh
x/x
Price per kWh, settable
Rate 1/2
Cost/kWh
x/x
Total cost
Rate 1/2
Total cost
x/x
Reactive energy
Rate 1/2
kvarh
x/x
Apparent energy
Rate 1/2
kVAh
Active power maximum
Rate 1/2
kW
Measurement periods, settable
Rate 1/2
min
Momentary active power
Sum total
Phase L1/L2/L3
kW
kW
x
x
Momentary voltage
Phase L1/L2/L3
Momentary current purchase
Sum total
Phase L1/L2/L3
A
A
FA I
x1)
Momentary reactive power
Sum total
Phase L1/L2/L3
kvar
kvar
Momentary apparent power
Sum total
Phase L1/L2/L3
kVA
kVA
Momentary cos
Phase L1/L2/L3
Momentary current factor
Manual reading:
Data (see Fig. 11/16) can be called
up directly at the Energy meter and
recorded manually by pressing the
Set/Reset button (5) and Display
button (3). The Energy meter will
calculate the consumption cost when
the price per kWh is entered. The option for device number input facilitates an assignment to a digit-code
system and cost allocation to different cost centers.
Momentary frequency
Device number, settable
x = These data will be displayed
Table 11/9
1)
Data transmission with instabus

KNX EIB
7KT1 162 and 7KT1 165 meters are
intended for the following data transmission:
Active energy (kWh) Rate 1
Active energy (kWh) Rate 2
Device number
Active power (kW) Phase L1
Visualization software
"Recording of consumption data
and maximum-time analysis"
(in preparation)
The software can read out and allocate meter values, and prepare the
data for billing.
No.
For CT meters only
Readings transmitted to the LCD display or via IR interface
1 Large-size, 7-digit LCD display

with 8 x 4-mm digits
Read software for the IR measuring

head:
The data of the above table are read
into a PC with the aid of the magnetadhesive IR measuring head and filed
in an ASCII file in compliance with IEC
61107. This ASCII file can be converted to an Excel or Access file. The program is executable on Windows 95, 98
and Windows NT.
cos
Hz
2 IR reading interface to plug on the

reading head
3 Display button
4 IR test output LED (10 IMP./W)
5 Sealable Set/Reset button
3
Fig. 11/16
Electricity meter with LCD display
The system does not distinguish between meters which were read online
or manually. A maximum-time analysis can be performed over several
days on the PC in online mode. Several graphical evaluation modes are
available.
Direction of energy flow
Metering is only performed in the
specified direction of energy flow.
For meters with current transformer
connection, the transformers' direction of energy flow (primary- and secondary-side) and the proper allocation of the voltage and current paths
must be observed.
Benefit
PTB-certified
Accuracy class 2
LCD display
Short-circuit-proof pulse output
With network analysis function
and direct cost indication
Application
For kWh metering in single-phase and
three-phase systems, e.g. in industrial
apartment complexes. Versions including an LCD display are used as network analysis instruments in industrial plants and office buildings to
analyze consumption and minimize
operating costs.
11/27
11
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 28
Photo 11/18 Current transformers
11.4 4NC3 and 4NC5

Current Transformers
Brief description
Current transformers enable currents
to be detected and measured.
Wherever currents in low-voltage
switchgear and distribution board systems are detected and measured.
The 4NC3 current transformer series
has been optimally tuned to the
phase center-to-center distance and
the conductor cross-section of the
3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers.
The current range is also perfectly
suited for use together with
SIMOCODE-DP.
11/28
Product range
C 4NC3: rated currents of 75 A to
4,000 A
C 4NC5: rated currents of 5 A to
1,500 A
C Accessories: terminal cover, standard mounting rail and primary conductor
C All 4NC3 current transformers have
been approved for use in shipbuilding
C Accuracy class 1 and overvoltage limiting factor FS5
C Secondary current 1 A and 5 A
Features
3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers
The 4NC3 current transformer series
has been optimally tuned to the
phase center-to-center distance and
the conductor cross section of the
3WN1 and 3WN6 circuit-breakers.
This allows for the installation of
three current transformers in series.
SIMOCODE-DP
4NC31, 4NC36 and 4NC37 current
transformer sizes (75 A to 800 A) are
recommended for use together with
SIMOCODE-DP (external display via
ammeter) and allocated via selection
tables so that the customer doesnt
require any additional configuration
and coordination expense.
TIP_Kap_11_Engl
11.08.2005
19:40 Uhr
Seite 29
11/29
11
TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
12
Seite B
SIMARIS design the Tool for

TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
Seite C

chapter 12
TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
Seite 2
12 SIMARIS design the Tool for

SIMARIS design supports
C Engineering companies
C Electrical fitters for installation
planning
C Switchgear manufacturers for
dimensioning tasks
C Acceptance authorities such as the
German Technical Inspectorate
(TV) etc.
in implementing power supply concepts for commercial and industrial
buildings from medium voltage
through to the power outlet in compliance with accepted standards. This
support already begins at the initial
concept finding stage.
SIMARIS design
C Facilitates routine work
C Helps to ensure high planning and
cost safety
C Leads to a holistic planning approach
C Designs cost-effective complete
installations instead of cheap
individual products
Network calculations and automatic

permissibility checks throughout
the whole power system
In order to meet the high expectations of investors and plant operators, engineering companies and
planners spend a lot of time with the
routine work involved in dimensioning installations and circuits.
All circuits in a power system must
be calculated to include the most
unfavorable, likely network conditions
and verified to comply with countryspecific standards and installation
practice.
As standard, this includes the verification of:
Have the cables been dimensioned for the maximum operating current to be transmitted?
Has the selected switching device been rated for the maximum
cable load current?
Does the selected switching device protect the cable against
overload ?
Have the tripping currents been
taken into account for the selected switching device class according to DIN VDE 0100 T430
(test currents, device characteristics, tolerance ranges)?
C Short-circuit protection
Does the cable/busbar thermally
withstand the load under fault
conditions until the fault has
eventually been cleared
(K2S2 > = I2t)?
12/2
C Protection of human life in the

event of indirect contact according
to DIN VDE 0100 T410:
Will the circuit be definitely interrupted within the specified time
interval by any switching device
under any fault condition?
Has the type of connection to
ground been taken into account in
the network configuration?
Have minimum and maximum
short-circuit currents been taken
into account in dependency of alternative means of supply?
Will an additional equipotential
bonding become necessary?
Have the limits for maximum contact voltage been complied with?
C Voltage drop (static/dynamic):
Is the cumulated voltage drop
down to the outlet circuits within
the limits of the currently applicable standard?
Can all consumers be safely operated despite a voltage drop on the
supply path (motor start-up?)?
C Selectivity:
Is the switching/protective device
in use fully selective to all of its
upstream switching/protective
devices across the entire currenttime range?
Can selectivity be documented
in terms of a TV-approved
selectivity proof according to
DIN VDE 0100 T710 (former
DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108?
TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
Seite 3
SIMARIS design
SIMARIS design automatically performs such calculations and checks

in compliance with the latest
standards and regulations. The
DIN VDE 0100 series is based on
the harmonized IEC 364 (HD 384).
Single-line
diagram view
Extensive paging through regulations,

standard tables or product catalogs
becomes obsolete. For the engineering company this means a sustained
work relief and at the same time a
risk minimization regarding planning
and cost safety.
Project structure tree
Message window
The data-processing-compatible representation of real power supply systems within SIMARIS design can be
implemented easily and quickly. Individual power system components are
input in a circuit-related manner. Basically, the input of cable lengths and
technical device data of the consumers is sufficient to start with the
network calculation.
Once the basic electrical data have
been stored, comparable circuits, or
even complete subdistributions can
be duplicated by just a mouse-click
and assigned to a new subdistribution board, which speeds up the digitizing process for the whole system.
Mapping larger power supply systems, such as the supply for airport
buildings or building power supply of
a university hospital, is no problem
either with SIMARIS design.
Such installations, including the
whole range from the medium-voltage substation down to the last outlet circuit, can also be simulated, calculated and verified in the program
with comparatively little time expense.
Fig. 12/1
Project structure tree
In parallel to runtime, network calculations may be started at any time for:

C Load flow
C Short circuit (1-/2-/3-pole minimum
and 1-/3-pole maximum)
C Energy balance
Calculation results are displayed and
evaluated in the project tree structure with the aid of the signal colors
red/yellow/green for each circuit.
The project view, which is divided in
3 sections (project tree structure /
single-line diagram / message window) facilitates a quick overview of
the network structure and the current
status of the calculation results.
Even subsequent (manual) modifications of the network configuration or
individual components are supported
by SIMARIS design. SIMARIS design
performs an automatic permissibility
check for each modification in the
background and immediately displays
relevant messages if necessary.
Automatic device selection based

on an integrated, well matched
device range
SIMARIS design is not a traditional
network calculation tool.
Based on the results of the network
calculation, SIMARIS design automatically dimensions the network components which are required for safe
supply of the specified consumers.
This includes
C besides the supply current sources
(transformer(s)/generator(s)/neutral
system infeed(s))
C and the cables or busbars
C mainly the switching/protective devices ranging from the mediumvoltage side of the supply current
source down to the individual consumer circuits.
12/3
12
TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
Seite 4
Integrated planning
Components as well as circuits within
the entire power system are technically matched right from the start.
The entire power supply system can
thus be designed in a technically and
economically optimized manner.
At the same time, the fire load can be
reduced to a minimum in the whole
installation while the protection of human life is ensured to a high degree
and supply safety can be guaranteed
in the entire installation under fault
conditions.
In this context, the planner doesnt
need to have any special equipment
know-how.
The widest scope for decisions regarding the design of a complete installation is in the planning stage.
With the aid of SIMARIS designs
own product database, integrated
planning becomes easy and efficient.
Back-up protection or full selectivity
The focus for dimensioning the switching/protective devices may be on
a) Back-up protection economical
device dimensioning:
The use of low-cost devices with a
partially underdimensioned switching capacity becomes feasible. In
the event of a fault, the underdimensioned device will automatically be protected by one of the
devices upstream in the direction
of energy flow.
12/4
Fig. 12/2
Switch combination, partially selective up to 48 kA
b) Selectivity greatest possible

safety of supply for the entire installation:
The upstream device which is closest to the fault location as seen in
the direction of energy flow safely
trips over the entire current-time
range. Those parts of the installation
which are neither affected by, nor
caused the fault stay in operation.
If required: Expansion/extension of
the entire installation through device
reparameterization is possible.
The planner determines the criteria
for automatic device selection in
SIMARIS design.
Visualization and automatic evaluation of characteristic device curves

regarding fully selective behavior
In existing installations, the switching/protective devices in operation are
checked for compliance with fully selective switching behavior according
to DIN VDE 0100 T710 (previously
DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108.
Normally this check is performed by
means of a visual comparison of characteristic curves of upstream and
downstream devices using so-called
current/time curve diagrams.
According to DIN VDE 0100 T710 (former DIN VDE 0107) or DIN VDE 0108,
certain supply sections, such as the
safety power supply, are subject to a
general proof of selective switching
behavior of the switching devices in
operation.
TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
Seite 5
SIMARIS design
If this aspect has not been taken into

account at an early stage prior to
commissioning, it may cause the responsible party unscheduled, high follow-up costs and extra expenditure.
SIMARIS design greatly facilitates
this highly responsible but tedious
planning task.
The program
handles the compilation of device
parameters and characteristic tripping curves
filters out the most unsuitable device combination in a power supply
line (grading path)
Fig. 12/3
Selection of a suitable low-voltage switchgear station for LVMD from the integrated
database
Fig. 12/4
Circuits can easily be parameterized
performs a selectivity evaluation of

the device combination taking
those minimum and maximum
short-circuit currents into account
which would be unfavorable for this
combination
and, besides the visual check of the
characteristic device curves, it also
takes manufacturer information on
the dynamic switching behavior of
tested device combinations in the
time range less than 100 ms into
account
Present device protection settings
can subsequently be adjusted via the
switchgear panels.
Here too, the integrated database in
SIMARIS design with real device data
demonstrates its advantages.
Exactly those setting options will
be suggested which are permitted
for the currently selected device.
Selected protection settings will
automatically be checked for permissibility in the background.
Automatic selection of mediumvoltage and low-voltage switchgear

stations and distribution boards including device equipping per panel
The planner does not require any

product-specific switchgear knowhow.
SIMARIS design realizes a holistic

planning approach covering device dimensioning as well as the layout of
the required switchgear panels and
subdistributions.
12/5
12
TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
Seite 6
File generation for documentation

purposes, such as TV-approved
selectivity proofs, device settings,
calculation results, tender specifications, material price calculations, single-line diagrams / enclosure views and panel equipping in
CAD format for further editing, e.g.
in AutoCAD
All data and planning results featuring
the entire installation, such as
C Calculation and input data
C Single-line diagram views
C Layout of the switchgear installation and distribution board panels
can be directly output to a printer or
viewed on screen, and can also be
exported to other programs, e.g.
AutoCAD for further editing.
File formats of the output files are
oriented to customary Office programs running in the various Windows operating systems. If desired,
all documents can also be output in
English.
Fig. 12/5
Comprehensive documentation with easy data transfer (Office, CAD etc.)
Text modules for tender specifications, so-called specifications of work

and services, can also be generated
in the program and used for drawing
up a planning tender. For the compilation of these texts, a great emphasis has been placed both on the
adoption of relevant basic technical
data and the documentation of technical highlights incorporated in the
proposed devices and distribution
boards.
With a panel-based material price calculation, the planner receives a first
overview of the business volume involved in the planned installation.
12/6
Thanks to its high quality standards,

SIMARIS design has been certified
by the TV Berlin. The tool is also
used by public authorities for results
verification of submitted planning
concepts.
In addition to the software, licensed
users of SIMARIS design will also
benefit from the free expert advice
for complex projects rendered by the
SIMARIS design Solution Support
Team.
TIP_Kap_12_Engl
11.08.2005
19:41 Uhr
Seite 7
SIMARIS design
12/7
12
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite B
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite C
Appendix
chapter 13
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 2
13 Appendix
Contact
Bibliography
Planners or switchgear manufacturers,

investors or architects, electrician or
building operator for institutional,
commercial or industrial developments
or other projects everybody benefits
from Totally Integrated Power.
A Electrical Installations Handbook,

by Gnther G. Seip, Publicis
KommunikationsAgentur,
Corporate Publishing
If you would like to know more about

Totally Integrated Power, or if you
would like to get thorough support:
Were always there to help you!
www.siemens.com/tip
B Switching, Protection, and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks,

Publicis KommunikationsAgentur,
Corporate Publishing
C Totally Integrated Power
www.siemens.com/tip
D SIMARIS design
www.siemens.com/simaris
E Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear
www.siemens.com/sivacon
F
Modular Devices:
ALPHA: Catalog ET A1,
Catalog ET A5
BETA: Catalog ET B1,
Technical Information ET B1 T
GAMMA: Catalog ET G1
G Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,

Catalog LV10 (as of October
2005: LV1)
H DELTA Product Range,
Catalog ET D1
13/2
Products and Systems for

Power Distribution,
Catalog NS PS
Numerical Protection
Catalogs SIP 2004
www.siprotec.com
Power Quality;
Catalogs SR 10 ...
www.powerquality.com
K Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker
Switchgear up to 24 kV,
SF6-insulated, Catalog HA 35.41
NXAIR, NXAIR M, NXAIR P
Circuit-Breakers up to 24 kV,
Catalog HA 25.71
L
Switch-Disconnectors up to
24 kV, SF6-insulated, Catalogs
HA 45.11 and HA 45.31
Switchgear up to 24 kV,
extendable, SF6-insulated,
Catalog HA 41.11
M 3AH Vacuum-Circuit-Breakers
(also available as online catalog),
Catalog HG 11.11
NXACT, Type 3AJ Vacuum
Circuit-Breaker Module,
Catalog HG 11.51
Vacuum Switches, SwitchDisconnectors, HV HRC Fuses,
Catalog HG 12
N GEAFOL Cast-Resin
Transformers 100 to 2,500 kVA,
Catalog TV 1
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 3
Appendix
Chapter Topic
1
2
2.1
2.2
3
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5
6
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.1.9
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
8
9
10
10.1
10.2
10.3
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
12
13
Introduction
Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Power System Planning Module
System Protection/Safety Coordination
Medium Voltage
Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker
Switchgear for Primary Power Distribution
Secondary Distribution Systems,
Switchgear and Substations
Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range
PQM Power Quality Management and Load Flow Control
Transformers
Control transformers
Low Voltage
Low-Voltage Switchgear and
SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems
SIVACON Low-Voltage Switchgear
Economical, Flexible and Safe
SIKUS Universal and SIKUS Universal HC Systems
for the Switchgear Manufacturer
Floor-Mounted ALPHA 630 Universal,
ALPHA 630 DIN Distribution Boards
Wall-Mounted ALPHA 400/160, ALPHA Universal and
ALPHA 400 Stratum Distribution Boards
ALPHA-ZS Meter and Distribution
Cabinets for Germany
SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards
SMS Rapid Wiring System
8HP Insulated Distribution System
Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems
Circuit-Breakers
Fuse Systems
Fuse Switch-Disconnectors
Miniature Circuit-Breakers
Residual-Current-Operated Circuit-Breakers
Lightning Current and Surge Arresters
3LD2 Main Control and EMERGENCY STOP Switches
Modular Devices
Maximum-Demand Monitors
Switches, Outlets and Electronic Products
Motor Management with SIMOCODE pro
Power Management
Overview
SIMEAS Q
SIMEAS R
Meters / Measuring Instruments as Modular Devices
Appendix
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
13/3
13
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 4
Keyword Index
A
Absolute selectivity 3/40 ff.
Back-up protection 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff.,

6/46 8/12,
Cabinet panel versions 6/20
Accessories 2/26, 3/13, 3/27, 5/9, 6/20 ff.,

6/36, 6/38 ff., 6/42, 6/50 ff., 6/71, 6/88,
6/109, 11/28
Active power 9/13, 10/5 ff., 10/9, 11/11,
11/14, 11/16 ff., 11/22 ff., 11/26 ff.
Air-insulated 4/2 ff.
Alarm relay 8/16
Apparent power 9/13, 10/5 ff., 11/2 ff.,
11/11, 11/16, 11/22, 11/24, 11/27
Archiving 7/4, 7/5 ff., 7/6 ff., 8/14, 10/2,
10/8, 10/10
Arcing 3/5 ff., 5/9, 6/11, 6/16, 6/20, 6/36,
6/42, 6/51 ff., 6/72
Arcing time 3/5
Assembly kits, mounting sets 6/17, 6/19
ff., 6/34, 6/51, 6/52
Auxiliary switch 3/12, 3/28, 6/54, 6/65, 6/70
Basic fees 9/3 ff.

Bay controller family 4/4
Bay level 8/4, 8/13
Billing metering panel 4/59 ff.
Capacitors 3/2 ff., 4/73 ff., 6/38, 6/66

Cascade-connected 3/18 ff.
Characteristic (curve) 2/8, 3/3 ff., 11/17
Characteristic displacement factor 3/46
Breaking capacity 3/2 ff.
Characteristics 3/4 ff., 6/43 ff., 6/55 ff.,

6/69, 6/75, 9/8
Breaking current 3/18 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/39,

6/42 ff., 6/52, 6/56, 6/59 ff.
Circuit-breaker 1/6, 2/7 ff., 3/3 ff., 4/10 ff.,

7/2, 8/12, 9/4
Building services automation 9/3 ff.
Circuit-breaker feeder 4/57 ff.
Building substation control systems 1/3
Circuit-breaker panel 4/6 ff., 6/13, 6/17
Burden 8/8 ff.
Clearance time 3/5 ff., 6/102
Bus interface 1/3
Clock timer 6/98
Bus sectionalizer 4/32, 4/35
Command time 3/8 ff.
Bus systems 3/12 ff., 6/2, 6/8, 7/2, 7/4, 8/5
Communication 2/3 ff., 3/3 ff., 6/2 ff., 6/13,

6/36 ff., 6/101, 6/108, 6/110, 6/113 ff.,
7/2 ff., 7/7, 8/2 ff., 8/12 ff., 8/19, 8/23, 9/5,
10/3, 11/5 ff., 11/11, 11/26
Busbar protection 8/4, 8/9, 8/36 ff.

Busbar system 2/5, 4/2 ff., 6/6, 6/12,
6/16 ff., 6/49 ff.
Busbar trunking system 6/2 ff.
Busbars 2/5, 2/23, 2/25, 3/28, 4/2 ff., 5/8
ff., 6/3 ff., 6/12 ff., 6/19 ff., 6/26, 6/38,
6/44, 6/49 ff., 6/59, 6/67, 8/4, 8/9 ff.,
8/36 12/3
Comparison of characteristics 3/18 ff.

Compartmentalization 4/2, 6/20, 6/52
Compensation 2/3, 6/5, 6/14, 6/18,
6/20, 9/13
Conductor cross section 6/42, 6/59, 6/78
Configuration 8/3 ff., 8/12, 10/9 ff., 1/2 ff,
3/4, 4/76, 6/39, 6/49, 6/66, 6/8, 6/114
Consumption analyses 11/17
Consumption control 9/7 ff.
Consumption profile 9/10
Consumption recording 1/2, 7/2
Contactor 3/2 ff., 4/72 ff., 6/7, 6/20,
6/38 ff., 6/42, 6/46, 6/51 ff., 6/56, 6/61,
6/77, 6/90, 6/93, 7/2
Continuous operation 3/15, 6/42, 6/96
13/4
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 5
Appendix
Control board 4/5 ff.
Control level 7/2

Control range 3/6
Control switch 6/89
Conversion factors 13/8
Converter 3/51
Cost center 9/12
Cost center assignment 2/13 ff., 7/2,
7/6 ff., 9/4, 9/11 ff.
Coupling switch 3/46 ff.
Cross-connection optimization 9/2 ff., 9/10
Current carrying capacity 6/44
Current grading 3/4 ff.
Current limiter 3/9, 3/40
Current limiting 2/9, 3/3 ff., 4/73, 4/82,
6/41 ff., 6/56
Current limiting range 3/21
Current quality 8/3 ff.
Current ratio 3/49
Current selectivity 3/4 ff.
Current transformer 3/4 ff., 4/6 ff., 8/8 ff.,
8/13, 8/24, 8/31 ff., 8/36, 10/9, 10/12,
11/21, 11/28
Current types 6/65
Distribution cabinet 6/27, 6/75

Distribution circuit-breaker 3/25 ff.
Daily demand profile 9/20

Data compression 10/9 ff.
Data interfaces 3/52, 8/22
Distribution system 6/34

Distribution transformer 3/52, 3/58, 5/2 ff.
Data networking 1/3
Documentation 1/3 ff., 4/4, 7/5, 7/7, 8/12,

9/5, 9/11
Data validation 9/14 ff.
Dry-type transformer 4/82, 5/2 ff.
Decoupling reactor 6/76 ff., 6/83, 6/85
Dynamic selectivity 3/40 ff.
Degree of protection 3/15, 3/30, 6/3, 6/5

ff., 6/10, 6/13, 6/17 ff., 6/19 ff., 6/20 ff.,
6/26 ff., 6/30 ff., 6/32, 6/34 ff., 6/51 ff.,
6/53 ff., 6/59 ff., 6/61, 6/70, 6/71, 6/74,
6/80, 8/15
Dynamic short-circuit strength 3/13
Delay time 3/3 ff.

Demand charge 5/6 ff.
E
Efficiency 4/92, 5/4, 5/11, 9/2 ff., 9/13
Efficiency improvement 9/2 ff., 9/13 ff.
Demand integration period 6/102, 9/18 ff.
EMERGENCY STOP switch 6/2, 6/36, 6/38,

6/49, 6/88
Demand-oriented energy reports 7/3
Encapsulation 3/30, 4/17 ff., 6/39, 6/49 ff.
Differential protection 3/4 ff., 8/26, 8/28,

8/31
Energy costs 5/5, 7/7, 9/2 ff., 9/17
Digital protection 3/52

DIGSI 8/3, 8/13 ff., 8/18 ff.
Directional protection 3/4
Disconnector 3/39, 3/54, 7/4, 9/4
Disconnector panel 4/8 ff.
Disengaging time 3/5
Dispatch 7/3, 9/4, 9/6
Distance protection 3/4, 8/9, 8/11 ff.,
8/25 ff.
Energy demand 1/6, 5/5 ff., 7/2, 7/7, 10/2

Energy flow representation 9/2 ff., 9/10 ff.
Energy import 1/2, 7/2 ff., 9/2, 9/5 ff., 11/2
Energy market 7/7, 9/3 ff.
Energy procurement 1/6, 7/3, 9/2 ff.
Energy transmission 9/2 ff.
Environmental protection 6/46
Event log 1/6, 7/5 ff.
Extinction time 3/17
Distribution blocks 6/32

Distribution board 1/2, 1/5, 2/2 ff., 3/22 ff.,
4/5 ff., 6/5, 6/22, 6/24, 6/27, 6/29, 6/32 ff.,
6/44 ff., 6/51 ff., 6/75, 6/89, 11/20, 12/6
Distribution box 6/32
13/5
13
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 6
Fault analysis 8/22
Gas insulation 4/3 ff.
Kilowatt per hour rate 9/3, 9/96
Fault current 2/9, 3/3 ff., 2/2, 6/36 ff.,

6/82, 6/109, 8/29
Generator protection 3/12, 8/16
Fault detection 10/8

Fault diagnosis 10/9
Fault recording 8/22
Grading diagram 3/5, 3/6
Grading time 3/5 ff.
Large test current 3/27, 6/44, 6/55
Ground-fault protection 3/3, 8/12, 8/34 ff.
Let-through current 2/9, 3/16 ff.,

4/51 ff., 6/44
Grounding 6/20, 6/32, 6/63, 6/65, 6/71 ff.
Lightning current arrester 6/83 ff.
Fault recording 8/3, 8/11 ff., 8/14,

8/18, 8/22, 10/8
Grounding switch 4/6 ff.
Fault-current protection 3/3, 6/67
Limit value monitoring 7/6
Harmonic currents 3/51, 11/3
Line protection 3/3 ff., 6/2, 6/37, 6/46,

6/56 ff., 6/77 ff.
Harmonics 2/2, 2/3, 3/51, 4/85 ff., 9/4,

9/13, 10/6, 10/9, 10/11
Line-protection condition 3/40
Limit value 3/33, 3/53, 10/3, 10/6, 11/3
Fault-current protective switch 6/37

Fault-current tripping 3/12
Faults 1/6, 2/17, 2/19, 3/6, 4/90, 5/19,
6/42, 6/71, 6/93, 7/2 ff., 7/7, 8/3, 8/13,
8/15, 8/22, 8/29 ff.
Fault-signal contact 3/27 ff., 6/54
Feeder circuit-breaker 1/6, 3/6 ff., 7/5, 9/3
Filter circuit 3/51
Fire protection 2/11 ff., 5/17 ff., 6/2,
6/29, 6/36 ff., 6/62
Fixed-mounted design 6/11 ff., 6/15 ff.
Flicker 9/4, 9/13
Floor-mounted distribution boards 6/4,
6/22, 6/24
Full-range fuse 3/3, 3/18
Functional category 3/18 ff., 6/42
High-current product range 6/58

HV HRC fuses 3/3 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/46
Load circuit-breaker 3/6, 3/22, 3/25 ff.

Load curves 1/6, 9/3 ff., 9/6, 9/10 ff., 11/2
Load forecasts 7/3
I
Import limit 9/4, 9/9
Import monitoring 9/4, 9/7 ff.
Infeed panel 7/7
Infeeds 2/7, 3/4 ff., 7/7, 8/31, 10/12
Information technology 1/3, 6/3
In-line fuse switch-disconnector 6/19, 6/55
Insta contactor 6/90, 6/96
Load management 1/2, 1/6, 6/103,

7/2, 9/17
Load monitoring 8/11 ff., 8/20
Load peak 6/102, 9/8, 9/17
Logic triggers 10/9
Loss evaluation 5/5
Losses (inherent to equipment) 5/5, 6/46
Low-voltage circuit-breaker 3/3 ff.
Low-voltage cubicle 4/4 ff.
Functional scope 8/21
instabus EIB 3/28, 6/8, 6/31 ff., 6/65, 6/89,

6/97 ff., 6/103, 6/109, 9/17 ff., 11/21, 11/27
Low-voltage fuses 6/41
Fuse switch-disconnector 6/2, 6/17,

6/34, 6/51 ff.
Insulation failure 3/19, 3/27, 6/54, 6/62 ff.
Low-voltage power systems 2/8, 3/2 ff.,

6/4, 6/11
Fuses 2/3 ff., 3/3 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/14, 6/34,

6/37, 6/41 ff., 6/49 ff., 6/77 ff., 6/85 ff.,
6/93 ff., 8/29 ff., 9/4
Insulation monitor 6/95

Insulator 4/78
Interlocking 4/2 ff., 6/21, 6/23, 6/26, 6/32,
8/5, 8/36
Isolating 4/26 ff., 6/2, 6/37, 6/51 ff.
Joulean heat value 3/40
13/6
Low-voltage switchgear 3/48, 3/49, 6/2 ff.,

6/11 ff., 6/38, 6/89
LV HRC fuse 3/3 ff., 6/45, 6/46, 6/51 ff.
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 7
Appendix
Modular design 6/19 ff.
Modular devices 6/12, 6/19 ff., 6/24 ff.,

6/34, 6/89, 11/20
Oil-immersed transformer 5/3 ff.
Molded-case circuit-breaker 3/16, 6/22
Open-circuit shunt release 3/27 ff., 6/54
Monitoring equipment 6/72
Opening time 3/5 ff.
Monitoring level 7/2
Operating costs 1/3 ff., 2/2 ff., 5/6 ff.
Motor management 6/110 ff.
Operating current 3/8 ff.
Maintenance 1/5, 7/6, 9/4, 9/14, 9/16
Motor protection 3/9 ff., 6/13, 6/40, 6/42,

6/54, 6/95, 6/113, 8/4, 8/27, 8/28, 8/34
Operating time 3/5 ff.
Maintenance 4/3 ff., 5/7, 5/17, 5/18, 3/23,

8/2, 8/11, 8/14 ff.
Motor starter 3/9 ff.
Maintenance measures 1/6
Mounting rail 6/3, 6/19 ff., 6/29 ff., 6/51,

6/57, 6/59 ff., 6/88, 6/114, 11/10, 11/18
Main busbar system 6/12, 6/16, 6/17

Main distribution board 3/43 ff., 6/5,
6/11, 6/66
Main switch (main circuit-breaker) 3/18,
3/28, 6/36, 6/38, 6/46, 6/56, 6/59 ff., 6/88
Main switchgear 6/4 ff., 6/11
Making capacity rated short-circuit

current 6/49
Operating values 3/3 ff.

Operator safety 4/4 ff., 6/37, 6/41
Outgoing feeder panel 4/18 ff.
Overcurrent protection 3/9 ff., 8/9, 8/30
Overcurrent release 3/4 ff., 6/38 ff., 6/93
Maximum-demand monitoring 7/7, 9/3, 9/5,

9/8, 6/102 ff., 9/17 ff.
Network analysis 4/85
Overcurrent-time protection 3/3 ff., 8/26,

8/28 ff.
Measured values display 7/4
Network circuit-breaker 3/49 ff.
Measuring cores 8/8
Network configuration 2/2 ff., 3/2, 12/3
Measuring instruments 4/85, 6/4, 8/13, 9/4,

10/2, 10/5, 11/2 ff., 11/5, 11/8, 11/9, 11/12
ff., 11/20 ff.
Network master relay 3/10 ff.
Overload protection 2/7 ff., 3/3 ff., 8/25,

8/27, 8/29, 8/31
Node fuse 3/49 ff.
Overload range 3/21 ff.
Nominal current rule 6/44
Overload relay 3/9 ff., 8/4
Measuring transducer 4/76, 4/82, 8/8, 8/13

Medium-voltage circuit-breaker 3/3, 3/4
Overload limit 3/45
Overload release 2/8, 3/3 ff.
Medium-voltage equipment 4/72 ff.

Medium-voltage switchgear 1/2, 4/2 ff., 8/2
Meshed system 2/4, 3/4, 3/48 ff.
Meter 1/6, 3/21, 6/27, 6/76, 6/103, 6/113,
7/2, 8/8, 9/4, 9/11, 9/17, 11/9, 11/11, 11/17,
11/19 ff., 11/23, 11/26 ff.
Meter cabinets 6/27 ff.
Metering panel 4/7 ff.
Mimic diagram 4/4 ff.
Miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) 3/3 ff., 6/2,
6/34 ff., 6/41, 6/46, 6/54 ff., 6/77 ff., 6/86
Modular design 6/11
13/7
13
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 8
product range for ~ 6/58
Power system design 2/2, 2/4

Panel (coupling) 4/35
Panel control 4/60
Panel design 4/6 ff.
Panel versions 4/29 ff., 6/17
Panels 4/4 ff.
Parameterization 8/3, 8/4, 8/20, 8/23,
10/10, 11/3 ff., 11/10, 11/12 ff.
Partial range protection 3/3, 3/18
Partial selectivity 2/9, 3/2 ff.
Peak short-circuit current 3/5 ff.
Period 9/9
Personnel safety 4/3 ff.
Planning 1/2 ff., 2/2 ff., 3/6, 4/2 ff., 6/8,
6/27, 6/89, 6/91, 7/3, 8/3, 8/5, 8/12, 8/19,
9/2, 9/4, 9/7, 9/8, 11/20
Planning result 1/5
Planning software 1/5, 3/6
Planning tool 1/2, 9/4
Plug-connectors 5/8, 6/32 ff.
Point-to-point distribution board 6/4 ff.
Power distribution 1/2 ff., 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff.,
4/2 ff., 6/2, 6/4 ff., 6/11, 6,34 ff., 6/38,
6/49 ff., 6/78, 9/3, 12/2 ff.
Power factor 2/10, 3/13, 3/15, 6/43,
6/112 ff., 8/5, 10/6, 10/9, 11/3, 11/11,
11/16
Power loss 5/5 ff., 6/41, 6/44
Power system protection (also system

protection) 2/2 ff., 3/9 ff., 8/2, 8/4, 8/11,
8/14
Prearcing time 2/17 ff.
Prearcing-time/current characteristic 2/18
Primary winding 5/4
Priorities list 9/7 ff.
PROFIBUS-DP 6/8, 6/36 ff., 6/110,
6/113 ff., 10/3 ff., 11/3 ff.
Rated breaker current 6/13

Rated continuous current 3/15 ff., 6/50 ff.
Rated cross section 6/55
Rated current 3/3 ff., 4/82, 6/8 ff., 6/12,
6/15, 6/17, 6/21 ff., 6/26, 6/38 ff., 6/42,
6/44 ff., 6/55 ff., 6/67
Rated current rule 3/30
Rated frequency 3/15 ff.
Prognoses ( Load forecasts) 1/6, 2/2,

7/2, 7/7, 9/6
Rated insulation voltage 3/13 ff., 6/12,

6/15, 6/21, 6/59
Protection and substation control 3/2,

8/2 ff.
Rated operating current 3/15 ff.
Protection characteristics 3/21 ff.

Protection cores 8/8
Protection, level of ~ 3/9, 3/12
Protective characteristics 3/3, 3/4
Protective devices 2/7 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/61,
4/82, 5/9, 6/38, 6/73 ff., 8/3, 8/8, 8/11,
8/13, 8/24, 10/10 ff., 12/3, 12/4
Protective equipment 2/8 ff., 3/3 ff., 6/2,
6/36, 6/54, 6/99, 8/5
Protective measures 2/6, 3/21, 6/20, 6/63
Protective relay 3/52, 8/2 ff, 8/11, 8/13 ff.,
8/18 ff., 8/31
Protective switch 2/3, 3/2 ff., 6/2, 6/34,
6/36 ff., 6/40 ff., 6/54 ff., 6/66 ff., 6/77 ff.,
6/82, 6/86, 7/4
Power management 6/38, 6/110, 6/113 ff.,

7/2 ff., 7/6 ff., 9/2, 9/4 ff.
Power meter 11/2
Power quality 4/2 ff., 7/7, 8/5, 9/13
Power statistics 6/102, 9/2 ff.
Power supply 6/36, 10/3, 11/2
Power supply company,
13/8
Radial system 8/29
Rated residual current 3/12

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity 3/13 ff.
Rated short-circuit making capacity 3/13 ff.
Rated switching capacity 3/2 ff., 6/67, 6/69
Rated voltage 3/13 ff., 4/91, 6/23, 6/26,
6/42, 6/47 ff., 6/59 ff., 6/69, 10/2
Rating 3/52 ff.
RCCB module 3/28, 6/70
Reactive power 6/14, 6/18, 9/13, 10/6,
10/11, 11/09, 11/11, 11/14, 11/16, 11/22 ff.
Reactive power compensation 6/5, 6/14,
6/18
Reactor 8/31
Reactor-connected capacitors 3/51
Relay burden 8/8, 8/10
Relay interrogation 8/23
Relay operation 8/19
Relay selection 8/25 ff.
Release 3/50 ff.
Release time 3/8
Reliability 4/3 ff., 6/2, 6/36, 8/3, 8/5, 8/12,
8/16 ff., 11/3, 11/14
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 9
Appendix
Remote control 8/3, 8/5, 8/13, 8/18, 10/10

Remote-control switch 6/90, 6/96
Residual current 3/11 ff.
Residual current tripping 3/12 ff.
Residual ripple 3/12
Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker
6/66 ff.
Resistance to accidental arcs 4/5 ff.
Resonance phenomena 3/51
Sequence of event recording,

SOE recording 10/10
Sequential control 10/9
Serviceability 4/3, 4/4
Setting ranges 3/3 ff.
Settings 2/12 ff., 7/2, 8/12, 8/14, 8/19
SF6-insulated 4/26 ff.
Shock-hazard protection 6/19, 6/21, 6/41,
6/57, 6/59 ff., 6/109
Starter circuit-breaker 3/9, 3/19

Station level 8/5, 10/10
Subdistribution board 3/18 ff., 6/4 ff., 6/11,
6/13, 6/19, 6/22, 6/24 ff., 6/29, 6/66
Substation control and protection system
3/52
Substation control systems 8/2, 8/6, 8/19
Summation current transformer 6/64
Supplementary protection 6/62 ff.
Retrofitting 9/2 ff.
Short circuit 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/5 ff., 6/2,

6/6,6/11 ff., 6/20 ff., 6/26, 6/36 ff., 6/46,6/49
ff., 6/55, 6/67, 6/77 ff., 6/100, 8/8 ff.,8/13 ff.
Ring-main feeder 4/44 ff.
Short-circuit breaking capacity 2/13, 6/38 ff.
Surge arrester 4/33 ff., 6/2, 6/73 ff., 6/78,

6/80 ff., 4/60, 6/2, 6/72
Ring-main transformer 4/50 ff.
Short-circuit current 2/7 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/73

ff.,6/23, 6/26, 6/42 ff., 6/49, 6/51 ff., 6/77
ff.,8/8 ff.
Switch position indicator 3/28, 4/6 ff.,

6/99 ff.
Resonant circuit 3/51
Short-circuit making capacity 3/13

Safety class 5/21
Safety margin (grading time) 3/5, 3/6 ff.
Short-circuit protection 2/8, 3/3 ff., 4/70 ff.,

6/36, 6/38, 6/42 ff., 6/49, 6/51 ff., 6/100
Safety margins 3/17, 3/53, 3/54
Short-circuit range 3/17 ff., 6/43
Safety technology 1/3
Short-circuit reactance 3/51
Scatter band width 3/56
Short-circuit strength 2/10, 3/13, 3/23, 5/7,

6/16, 6/20 ff., 6/67
Scatter bands 3/44 ff., 6/42

Secondary winding 5/4
Selective behavior 3/40
Selective tripping 6/65
Selectivity 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/4, 4/70, 6/41 ff.,
6/45 ff., 6/49, 6/54, 6/56, 6/79, 10/9, 12/4
Short-time grading control 3/42

Signaling devices 6/2, 6/94, 6/108
SIMARIS design 12/2 ff.
SIMARIS planning software 12/2 ff.
SIMARIS SIVACON 12/2 ff.
Selectivity criteria 3/4
Single-line diagram 12/3 ff.
Selectivity limit 3/32 ff.
Small distribution board 6/4, 6/29 ff.,

6/34, 6/44
Selectivity types 3/33

Selectivity, conditions 3/6 ff.
Sentron (circuit-breaker) 6/2, 6/13, 6/36,
6/38 ff.
Supply connection 6/31

Supply quality 2/32, 2/9, 4/88, 4/91
Switch-disconnector 3/10 ff., 4/3 ff., 6/2,

6/9, 6/14, 6/17, 6/20, 6/22, 6/25, 6/34, 6/41,
6/88 ff., 7/5, 9/3 ff.
Switch-disconnector panel 4/8
Switch-disconnector stations
(switchgear for secondary distribution) 4/55
Switches 1/6, 2/3 ff., 3/3 ff., 4/2 ff., 5/9, 6/2,
6/30 ff., 6/36 ff., 6/43, 6/49 ff., 6/67 ff., 6/78
ff., 6/88, 6/92, 6/104, 8/12 ff., 8/18 ff., 8/31
ff., 9/4, 9/17
Switchgear 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/2 ff., 6/2 ff.,
6/19, 6/38, 6/49 ff., 6/89, 6/110, 8/2 ff., 8/11
ff., 8/15, 8/17 ff., 8/23 ff., 8/29 ff., 12/5
Switchgear assemblies 3/9, 3/12, 3/16 ff.,
6/4, 6/9, 6/11
Switchgear manufacturer 1/5, 4/75 ff., 6/15,
6/19 ff., 12/2
Small test current 3/27, 6/55
Switching capacity 2/8, 2/9, 3/2 ff., 4/79,

4/80, 6/38, 6/42 ff., 6/51 ff.
Spread of protection response time 3/8
Switching capacity category 3/15
Spur panel 4/7 ff.
Switching devices 2/2, 2/7, 3/7 ff., 4/15 ff.,

5/8, 6/2 ff., 6/8, 6/15, 6/20 ff., 6/35 ff., 6/41
ff., 6/46, 6/90 ff., 8/4, 8/6, 12/2, 12/4 ff.
Standards 1/5, 2/4, 4/45 ff., 5/2 ff., 6/2, 6/9,

6/20, 6/36, 8/5 ff., 8/25, 6/39, 6/75, 11/2,
11/14, 12/2, 12/3
13/9
13
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 10
Switching-off priority 6/102
Tripping characteristic 2/27 ff., 6/56, 6/59
Switch-off power 9/6
Tripping characteristics ( ~ curves) 3/8 ff.
System configuration 3/2, 4/44, 4/52
Tripping current rule 3/30
System protection 3/4 ff., 6/36 ff., 6/40 ff.,

6/78, 8/4
Tripping delay 3/49
System protection management 8/14

System reactance 3/51
Tripping rule 6/44

TTA (type-tested switchgear assembly)
1/2, 3/4, 3/14, 6/9 ff., 6/16, 6/20 ff., 6/26,
6/33, 6/53
Type (of construction) 3/3 ff., 5/3 ff., 6/62,
6/93 ff., 6/104 ff., 8/3
Technical supply conditions 6/27
Type-tested 4/2 ff., 6/16, 6/22, 6/24, 9/11
Temperature-rise limit 6/20

Terminal box for cables 5/8
Thermal fault withstand capability 3/13
Thermistor motor protection device 3/19,
3/20
Time grading 3/4 ff.
Time selectivity 3/6 ff.
U
Undervoltage 2/26, 3/4 ff., 6/54, 6/95, 8/25,
8/27
Undervoltage protection 3/47
Undervoltage release 3/28, 3/49, 6/54
Utilization category 3/3, 6/42 ff., 6/67
Time-current characteristics 3/17 ff.

Time-current threshold zone 3/29
Timer 6/92, 6/108
Total (peak) short circuit 3/55
Total clearance time 3/5 ff.
Touch voltage 3/27, 6/46, 6/54, 6/61,
6/63, 6/65
Transformer 2/2 ff., 3/2 ff., 4/44 ff., 5/2 ff.,
8/4, 8/9, 8/10, 8/15, 8/26, 10/12, 8/28 ff.,
9/12
Transformers (-> current ~, voltage ~,
transducer) 3/51, 4/4 ff., 7/4, 9/3 ff., 10/6
ff., 10/12, 11/3 ff., 11/17 ff., 11/22, 11/24,
11/26 ff.
V
Vacuum circuit-breaker 4/6 ff.
Vacuum contactor 4/72, 4/78, 4/79
Vacuum switch 4/80
Vacuum switching principle 4/75
Vacuum switching tube 4/6 ff.
Voltage levels 3/6, 3/56, 4/3, 4/26, 4/86,
6/104, 8/11, 9/4
Voltage quality 10/5 ff.
Voltage transformer 4/10 ff.
Transmission range 3/53 ff.

Tree structure 12/3
13/10
W
Wall-mounted distribution board 6/4 ff.,
6/24 ff.
Weakpoint analysis 7/5 ff.
Withdrawable switchgear 4/4
Z
Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) 3/42
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 11
Appendix
Technical Information
Type of design
NYM, NHXMH, NYBUY, NHYRUZY, NYIF, H07V-U, H07V-R, H07V-K
Wires under load
Installation type
(Cable load rating in
heat insulating walls
acc. to DIN VDE 0298
Part 4)
B1
B2
In pipes or ducts for electr. installations
Direct installation
Free in air
Single-core cables
in the installation
pipe on the wall
Multi-core cable in
installation pipe on
the wall or on the
floor
Multi-core cable on
the wall or on the
floor
Single-core cables
in a cable duct on
the wall
Multi-core cable in
a cable duct on the
wall or on the floor
Single-core
sheathed cables
on the wall or on
the floor
Multi-core cable
free in air with min.
clearance from
wall of at least 0.3 x
the cable diameter
d and, if two cables
are laid side by side
or above each other,
with a spacing
of at least double
the cable diameter
On or in walls or flush-mounted
0.3d
Single-core cables,
single-core
sheathed cables or
multi-core cable in
the installation
pipe in the brickwork
0.3d
Multi-core cable,
flat-webbed cable
in the wall, in the
ceiling or concealed
Nominal cross section of Load rating in A

copper conductor in mm2
1.5
17.5
15.5
16.5
15
19.5
17.5
22
18.5
2,5
24
21
23
20
27
24
30
25
32
28
30
27
36
32
40
34
41
36
38
34
46
41
51
43
10
57
50
52
46
63
57
70
60
16
76
68
69
62
85
76
94
80
25
101
89
90
80
112
96
119
101
35
125
110
111
99
138
119
148
126
50
151
134
70
192
171
95
232
207
120
269
239
Table 13/1
Load rating of cables for building installations, suitable for continuous loading at 30 C
ambient temperature, permissible operating temperature is 70 C
(taken from DIN VDE 0298 Part 4)
13/11
13
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 12
Classification of overcurrent
protection systems
According to DIN VDE 0100 Part 430
Nominal
cross
section
To protect cables and lines in the event of
Cable with
PVC insulation
*
0.6/1 kv
overloading, the following conditions must
Ib In Iz
mm2
Cu
I2 1.45 Iz
1.5
2.5
4
Iz
Cable load rating following the load rating

tables and acc. to DIN VDE 0278 Part 2
or Part 4
In Nominal current of protective system

I2 Current which effects tripping of the
protective system under conditions
defined in the device standards (large
test current); e.g. DIN VDE 0636,
DIN VDE 0641 and DIN VDE 0660.
In the special case that the overcurrent

protection system fulfills the requirement
I2 1.45, In may be selected as being equal
to the cable load rating Iz.
6/10 kV
12/20 kV
18/30 kV
Al
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
19.5
25
34
6
10
16
43
59
79
25
35
50
106
129
157
82
100
119
106
130
156
99
119
147
178
213
138
165
163
197
236
153
183
200
239
185
241
187
70
95
120
199
246
285
152
186
216
196
238
274
150
182
210
265
322
370
206
249
288
294
358
413
228
278
321
297
361
416
231
280
323
299
363
418
232
282
325
150
185
240
300
326
374
445
511
246
285
338
400
313
358
423
482
238
273
323
380
420
481
566
648
326
375
442
507
468
535
631
722
364
418
494
568
470
538
634
724
366
420
496
569
472
539
635
725
367
421
496
568
Al
Three-core cable
the current breaking capacity of the overcur-
Three-core cable with single shield
rent protection device is at least equal to the

short circuit present at the mounting location.
Single-core cable, laid in bunches
If this condition, which is normally fulfilled in

Part 430/11.91 Section 6 must be observed.
6/10 kV
Cu
Protection against short circuits is ensured if
practice, is not true here, DIN VDE 0100
3.6/6 kV
Load rating in A
be fulfilled:
Ib Operating current of the circuit
Cable with
VPE insulation
* Three or four-core, without concentric conductor, three loaded wires

If conditions are different, the table values must be multiplied with appropriate conversion
factors, for planning notes please refer to Heinhold/Stuppe Cables and lines for high currents
(ISBN 3-89578-088-X), DIN VDE 02771, DIN VDE 02776-603, DIN VDE 0276-620 and
DIN VDE 276-1000.
Table 13/2
13/12
Load rating of high-power cables for laying in air at 30 C ambient temperature
TIP_Kap13
11.08.2005
19:42 Uhr
Seite 13
Appendix
Imprint
Totally Integrated Power planning
power distribution systems the
manual for Totally Integrated
Power is your assistant.
Published by
Siemens AG
Automation & Drives (A&D)
Power Transmission and Distribution
(PTD)
Siemens Building Technologies (SBT)
Authors:
Stefan Auxel (PTD M)
Bernhard Bckenfeld (PTD EA)
Ulrich Eckhoff (SBTS PM)
Ingo Englert (SBT)
Ulrike Fleischmann (A&D CD TIP)
Jrg Flottemesch (PTD M)
Andreas Friese (SBTS PM)
Remo Gellert (A&D ET)
Faik Gnaydin (A&D CD)
Harald Heil (A&D ET)
Gerhard Hengstebeck (A&D CD)
Ina Hbel (PTD M)
Hans-Joachim Langels (A&D ET)
Franz Kammerl (A&D ET)
Dr. Hartmut Kiank (PTD M)
Manfred Kleemeier (A&D ET)
Helmuth Kotulla (A&D CD)
Hans R. Kranz (SBT)
Dr. Winfried Kristen (A&D ET)
Hugo Mhner (PTD T)
Christoph Maul (PTD M)
Martin Moosburger (A&D CD)
Oliver Nldner (PTD M)
Klaus Nonnen (A&D ET)
Norbert Pantenburg (A&D CD TIP)
Wolfgang Pilsl (A&D ET)
Claus Rohr (A&D CD)
Dr. Dieter Smann (PTD M)
Tino Schuldt (A&D ET)
Gordon Schumann (A&D CD)
Herbert Soens (PTD M)
Manfred Wei (A&D CD)
Astrid Werner (A&D CD TIP)
Harald Zieger (SBT)
Concept, support, coordination,

production:
Uwe Wolf (A&D GC)
Ulrike Fleischmann (A&D CD TIP)
Gerhard Reinknecht (A&D GC)
Layout:
Publicis KommunikationsAgentur
Erlangen
Printed by
Bollmann Druck, Zirndorf
Production:
THALHOFER, D-71101 Schnaich
ethabind cover
patented
2005 by Siemens AG,
2nd revised edition
Berlin and Munich
All rights reserved.
Nominal charge 30.00 euro
We accept no responsibility for the
information and typical circuit
diagrams given in this manual.
Subject to change without prior
notice.
13/13
13

Siemens Switchboard and Protection Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Siemens Switchboard and Protection Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Totally Integrated Power TM Application Manual

Connecting the worlds

Power Transmission and Distribution

Nominal charge: 30.00 euro

Gleiwitzer Strae 555

Building Technologies Group

Order no.: E20001-A70-M104-X-7600

Conversion Factors and Tables

Volume flow rate

28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3

0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h

4.788 x 10-4 bar =

0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l

0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2

1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2

0.305 m/s = 1,098 km/h

0.447 m/s = 1,609 km/h

3.281 ft/s = 2.237 miles/h

0.911 ft/s = 0.621 miles/h

Torque, moment of force

0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m

1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m

0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J

1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m

Energy, work, heat content

0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf

1.102 sh ton = 2,205 lb

Btu = British thermal unit

Conversion Factors and Tables

Conductor cross sections

American Wire Gauge

0.621 mile = 1,094 yd

0.093 m2 = 929 cm2

10.76 ft2 = 1,550 in2

6.452 cm2 = 654.16 mm2

Btu = British thermal unit

Conversion Factors and Tables

Examples of decimal multiples and

1.356 W (= 0.138 kgf in/s)

1 km2 = 1,000,000 m2;

1 t = 1,000 kg; 1 kg = 1,000 g

0.738 ft lbf/s = 0.86 kcal/h =

Specific steam consumption

Btu = British thermal unit

letter t may be used instead of

Power Distribution Planning for

Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems

Power System Planning Modules

System Protection / Safety Coordination

Protective Equipment for Low-Voltage Systems

Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems

Protection of Distribution Transformers

Medium-Voltage and Circuit-Breaker Switchgear

Secondary Distribution Systems, Switchgear

Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution Systems

Protective Switching Devices and Fuse Systems

Switches, Outlets and Electronic Products

SIMOCODE pro Motor Management System

Communications in Power Distribution

Protection and Substation Control

Power System Protection

Measuring and Recording Power Quality

Medium-Voltage Equipment, Product Range